B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol3 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)
Uploaded by
SergioB-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol3 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)
Uploaded by
SergioFANUC Series 0+-MODEL F
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(Volume 3 of 3)
B-64603EN-1/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of from Japan subject to an export license by the
government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines
equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to
control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this
manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING .......................................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING ................................................................s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS..........................................................................................s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ...................................................s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ...............................................s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .........................................................................s-9
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need
to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the
MDI unit until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI unit are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
2 The OPERATOR’S MANUAL and programming manual supplied with a CNC
unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine
model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not
actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
3 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine-tool
builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.
s-2 -
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
4 The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
1 Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in non-volatile memory in
the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to
delete all data from non-volatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of
deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
2 The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING
This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear
movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully
confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis.
Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip on
the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is likely to
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
WARNING
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement
units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data
specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of
the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively
high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum allowable speed.
Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as
required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even
if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7 Interference check for each path (T series)
An interference check for each path is performed based on the tool data
specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not match the
tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made correctly,
possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start
automatic operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8 Same address command in same block
The G code or M code including the same address cannot be commanded on
the same block. If you use the same address, it may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user. Command on separate block.（About
address P, refer to the appendix “List of functions include address P in the
program command”）
CAUTION
1 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice
versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
2 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or
a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the
descriptions of the respective functions for details.
3 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip
is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will
be executed without performing a skip.
s-4 -
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
4 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable
mirror image is enabled.
5 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position
return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool
and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position
return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual
reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the
tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command
have been specified correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
4 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100,
applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may
damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
5 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during
threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted,
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the operator.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
WARNING
6 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing
injury to the user.
7 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece
coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control
of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the
MDI unit, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine
operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed
commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI unit keys are operated inadvertently, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
9 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result, the
servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function for
reasons such as an MDI unit problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to ensure security.
CAUTION
1 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting
the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and absolute/incremental command
mode.
2 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled
using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the
machine in this case.
3 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry
run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
s-6 -
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
4 Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because cutter or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When a
command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter or
tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention to the tool path
when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of
the corresponding functions for details.
5 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if
machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not
modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
WARNING
1 When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close
the machine cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after
such a modification. Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using
functions such as the single block function, feedrate override function, and
machine lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a tool and
workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates normally, the
machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2 The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those
parameters usually need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified
for some reason, ensure that you fully understand the function of that parameter
before attempting to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and
presenting a risk of injury.
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL
WARNING
FANUC’s touch panel is an analog resistive film type. When two or more points
are pressed at the same time, there is a possibility that it behaves as if the
center of these points was pressed, and this wrong output or malfunction may
cause an accident. Do not create a virtual machine operator’s panel screens on
which two or more points are pressed at the same time for touch panel
operation.
On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related
operations that may lose human life or may cause serious damage, or real-time
operations such as emergency stop, program start, program stop, axis
movements, etc. If there is a failure in the CNC, peripheral units, or cable,
wrong outputs or malfunctions may cause an accident. In addition, real-time
operation is not guaranteed on the touch panel screen.
s-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
WARNING
Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or more
applications or use networks.
If you neglect them, there is a danger of the user being injured or there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged.
1 Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data or a
series of related data set by two or more above applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the data will be written in
an unexpected order.
Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.
- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
- Two or more network functions
Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below. However,
all may not be listed completely because new features will be added in the
future.
2 Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same byte from
being written by the following two or more applications including network
functions. While an application reads and writes one byte of PMC signals, other
applications may write the same byte.
3 Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a NC
function by using the following two or more applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the NC may receive the
PMC signal set in an unexpected order.
s-8 -
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
4 Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the following
two or more applications including network functions, the coherency of the read
multi-byte data (in other words, reading all latest data at once) is not guaranteed.
To ensure the coherency of the multi-byte data, prepare flags to notify the
completion of reading or writing process that is separated from the entity of the
data and make the handshaking process to access the data by using the flags.
Data List Table
Category Data
Parameter, Tool compensation value and related data,
Work zero offset value and related data,
Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related data,
Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and related data,
General data for NC
Tool management function data, Tool life management data,
Error compensation related data ,
Overtravel check (Interference check) related data ,
Software operator’s panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter
Other data Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network setting
List Table of Applications and Network Functions
Category Functions
PMC Ladder, Macro Executor, C Language Executor, FANUC PICTURE,
Applications
FOCAS2
FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet,
Network functions
CC-Link
5 CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/F address.
Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and network read or write
PMC signals used by these functions. When reading or writing the same PMC
signal, applications or CNC functions may work in an unexpected manner.
As for the CNC functions of interest, refer to the connection manual (Function)
(B-64603EN-1) "Appendix B. List of Functions Using PMC Signals Other Than
G/F Address".
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
s-9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must
retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external
power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery” in the OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (Common to T/M series) for details of the battery replacement
procedure.
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual for details
of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the
cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
s-10 -
B-64603EN-1/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
4 When using the controller unit, display unit, MDI unit, or machine operator's
panel, prevent these units from directly exposing to chips or coolants. Even if
direct exposure to coolants is prevented, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at
a high activation level, oil-free synthetic-type coolants, or water-soluble coolants
at a high alkali level particularly have large effects on the control unit and
peripheral units, possibly causing the following failures.
• Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or peripheral units, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
• Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the CNC or peripheral units through, for example, gaskets. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
• Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
s-11
B-64603EN-1/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
Organization of this manual
This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC
machine tools. The following items are explained for each function.
1. Overview
Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s Manual as requied.
2. Signal
Describes names, functions, output conditions and addresses of the signals required to realize a
function.
3. Parameter
Describes parameters related with a function.
4. Alarms and message
Lists the alarms and messages related with a function in a table.
5. Reference item
List the related items of the related manuals in a table.
A list of addresses of all signals and a list of signals are described in the appendix of this manual. Refer to
it as required.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 0i-TF 0i-TF
Series 0i-F Series 0i
FANUC Series 0i-MF 0i-MF
NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to
the CNC model :
- 0i-TF : Lathe system (T series)
- 0i-MF : Machining center system (M series)
2 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-64602EN).
Description of symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual. These symbols are described below.
- M
Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system (M series).
In a general description of the method of machining, a machining center system operation is identified by
a phase such as "for milling machining".
- T
Indicates a description that is valid only for the lathe system (T series).
In a general description of the method of machining, a lathe system operation is identified by a phrase
such as "for lathe cutting".
p-1
PREFACE B-64603EN-1/01
-
Indicates the end of a description of a system control type.
When a system control type mark mentioned above is not followed by this mark, the description of the
system control type is assumed to continue until the next item or paragraph begins. In this case, the next
item or paragraph provides a description common to the control types.
Description of signals
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool
F0000~ Y000~
[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]
CNC G0000~ X000~
Path 1 F0000~ Y000~
PMC Machine tool
G1000~
Path 2 F1000~
[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]
CNC Signal PMC
I/F
1st
machine Path 1
G0000~ G0000~
group for X000~
machining F0000~ F0000~ I/O device
1st
PMC for 1st
G1000~ G1000~ Y000~ machine
Path 2
for
machining F1000~ F1000~
2nd X000~
G2000~ G0000~
machine Path 1 2nd I/O device
group for loader F2000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 2nd
machine
3rd X000~
G3000~ G0000~
machine Path 2 3rd I/O device
group for loader F3000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 3rd
machine
p-2
B-64603EN-1/01 PREFACE
NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an independent signal area. The F,
G, X, and Y signal addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other hand, the
F and G signal addresses from the viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses used in programming of each
ladder are different from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both lathe system (T series) and machining center system (M series) are described, some
signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown below. This means either
lathe system or machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for lathe system and
lower part is for machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON M series
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the lathe system (T series) while the other
signals for both the lathe system (T series) and machining system (M series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 2]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for machining center system (M series) only.
NOTE
1 The following notational conventions are used in the signal description of each
function.
Example) Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 <Fn102>
↑ ↑ ↑
Signal name Symbol name Signal address
2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right
of a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1 on PMC side) : #1
- Path type (for path 2 on PMC side) : #2
- Path type (for loader path on PMC side) : #3
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP
- PMC axis control group type : #PX
Refer to Appendix “List of Addresses“ for details
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
p-3
PREFACE B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
5 For a signal of controlled axis type, when the number of axes exceeds eight for
each path, set parameter No.3021 to address this situation.
Description of parameters
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
Bit path 0 or 1
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
-128 to 127 Some parameters handle these types of
Byte path 0 to 255 data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
-32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
Word spindle
2-word
2-word machine group
Some parameters handle these types of
2-word path 0 to ±999999999
data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group
See the Standard Parameter
Real path Setting Tables.
Real axis
Real spindle
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and bit
spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight
different meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each
machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
p-4
B-64603EN-1/01 PREFACE
- Standard parameter setting tables
This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and
unit of data of each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 -9999.99999 to +9999.99999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg.
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
IS-A 0.01 0.0 to +999000.00
mm/min
IS-B 0.001 0.0 to +999000.000
degree/min
IS-C 0.0001 0.0 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.0 to +96000.000
inch/min IS-B 0.0001 0.0 to +9600.0000
IS-C 0.00001 0.0 to +4000.00000
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
mm/min IS-C 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
2 IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
mm/sec
IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
deg./sec2
IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch/sec2 IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
IS-C 0.00001 0.00000 to +9999.99999
p-5
PREFACE B-64603EN-1/01
If bit 7 (IESP) of parameter No. 1013 is set to 1, the valid data ranges for IS-C are extended as follows:
Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
mm/min IS-C
0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
degree/min
inch/min IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
CAUTION
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data
unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values
representing actual performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D,
"Range of Command Value" of the Operator’s Manual (B-64604EN).
- Parameters of the bit type, bit machine group type, bit path type, bit axis type,
and bit spindle type
Data No. Data (Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
- Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above
Data No. Data
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE
1 The bits left blank in “description of parameters” and parameter numbers that
appear on the display but are not found in the parameter list are reserved for
future expansion. They must always be 0.
2 A parameter usable with only one system, namely, the lathe system (T series) or
the machining center system (M series), is indicated using two rows as shown
below. When a row is blank, the parameter is not usable with the corresponding
series.
[Example 1]
Parameter HTG is a parameter common to the machining center system (M
series) and the lathe system (T series), but parameters RTV and ROC are
parameters valid only for the lathe system (T series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV HTG ROC T series
1403
HTG M series
[Example 2]
The following parameter is provided only for the M series.
T series
1411 M series
Cutting feedrate
3 When "to" is inserted between two parameter numbers, there are parameters
with successive numbers between the two starting and ending parameter
numbers, but those intermediate parameter numbers are omitted for
convenience.
p-6
B-64603EN-1/01 PREFACE
NOTE
4 The lower-case letter "x" or "s" following the name of a bit-type parameter
indicates the following:
-” x” : Bit axis type parameters
-” s” : Bit spindle type parameters
Related manuals of Series 0i- MODEL F
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i-F. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name Specification number
DESCRIPTIONS B-64602EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64603EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64603EN-1 *
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64604EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64604EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64604EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64605EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64610EN
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-2
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-66263EN
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63943EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL B-64013EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i B-63874EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-2
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN-1
MANUAL GUIDE 0i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64434EN
TURN MATE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64254EN
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64483EN-2
p-7
PREFACE B-64603EN-1/01
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
Table 2 Related manuals
Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series / FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series /
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series /
B-65270EN
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65272EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series, BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series
B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series / FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series /
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor and spindle information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
Notes on various kinds of data
CAUTION
1 Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit
internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the
switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that a state can occur
where precious data stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to
restore rapidly when this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you
create a copy of the various kinds of data beforehand.
2 The number of times to write machining programs to the non-volatile memory is
limited.
You must use "High-speed program management" when registration and the
deletion of the machining programs are frequently repeated in such case that the
machining programs are automatically downloaded from a personal computer at
each machining.
In "High-speed program management", the program is not saved to the
non-volatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of programs.
Please make the application software by using FOCAS2/ C Language Library to
save the changed programs to the non-volatile memory when "High-speed
program management" is used.
p-8
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............................................................ s-7
WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR TOUCH PANEL ....................... s-7
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT..................... s-8
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................... s-9
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 AXIS CONTROL...................................................................................... 1
1.1 CONTROLLED AXIS ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS ................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Name of Axes ...........................................................................................................3
1.2.2 Increment System .....................................................................................................7
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis .................................................................................10
1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach .........................................................................................13
1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis............................................................16
1.2.6 Mirror Image ..........................................................................................................17
1.2.7 Follow-up ...............................................................................................................20
1.2.8 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ........................................................................22
1.2.9 Position Switch.......................................................................................................24
1.2.10 High-Speed Position Switch...................................................................................26
1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION.......................................................................... 31
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation...........................................................................31
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation .........................................................................................39
1.3.3 Smooth Backlash ....................................................................................................41
1.3.4 Straightness Compensation ....................................................................................44
1.3.5 Simple Straightness Compensation ........................................................................48
1.3.6 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points...............................................................50
1.3.7 Interpolated Straightness Compensation ................................................................52
1.3.8 Interpolated Straightness Compensation 3072 Points ............................................56
1.3.9 Inclinaiton Compensation.......................................................................................58
1.3.10 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................................61
1.3.11 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................67
1.3.12 Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation .......................................................69
1.3.13 About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, Straightness Compensation,
and Inclinaiton Compensation (for Reference Purposes) .......................................71
1.3.14 Axis Name Display of Pitch Error Compensation..................................................72
1.3.14.1 Setting of axis name display ........................................................................... 73
1.3.14.2 Parameter ........................................................................................................ 74
1.3.15 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Value Input function ...............................75
1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES.......................... 83
1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo...................................................................................83
1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection ...................................................................................88
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
1.4.3 FSSB Setting ........................................................................................................102
1.4.3.1 FSSB setting screen ...................................................................................... 109
1.4.3.2 FSSB automatic setting procedure................................................................ 117
1.4.4 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting..............................................................141
1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS .......................... 145
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System.................................................................................145
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair 148
1.5.2.1 Workpiece coordinate system ....................................................................... 148
1.5.2.2 Workpiece coordinate system preset............................................................. 151
1.5.2.3 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54)................................ 153
1.5.2.4 Automatic coordinate system setting ............................................................ 154
1.5.2.5 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series)............................................... 154
1.5.2.6 Direct input of coordinate system shift (T series)......................................... 159
1.5.2.7 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals ................................. 161
1.5.3 Local Coordinate System .....................................................................................166
1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll-Over .........................................................................................168
1.6 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 171
1.6.1 Example of Usage ................................................................................................171
1.6.2 Procedure to Start-Up ...........................................................................................174
1.6.3 Setting of Synchronous Axes ...............................................................................175
1.6.4 Reference Position Establishment ........................................................................177
1.6.4.1 Procedure of reference position establishment ............................................. 177
1.6.4.2 Setting of grid position ................................................................................. 178
1.6.4.3 Reference position establishment.................................................................. 180
1.6.4.4 Balance adjustment ....................................................................................... 180
1.6.4.5 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 182
1.6.4.6 Reference point setting with mechanical stopper.......................................... 182
1.6.4.7 Distance coded linear scale interface and linear scale with distance-coded
reference marks (serial)................................................................................. 182
1.6.5 Synchronization Establishment ............................................................................183
1.6.6 Synchronization Error Check ...............................................................................185
1.6.6.1 Synchronization error check ......................................................................... 185
1.6.6.2 Methods of alarm recovery by synchronization error check......................... 185
1.6.7 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................186
1.6.8 Synchronization Error Compensation ..................................................................188
1.6.9 Combination with other functions ........................................................................190
1.6.10 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .............................................................196
1.6.11 Signal....................................................................................................................197
1.6.12 Parameter..............................................................................................................200
1.6.13 Diagnosis Data .....................................................................................................214
1.6.14 Alarm and Message ..............................................................................................214
1.6.15 Caution .................................................................................................................215
1.7 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 217
1.8 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL...................................................................... 229
1.9 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ................................................... 242
1.9.1 Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...........................................................................242
1.9.2 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization ......................................261
1.9.2.1 Arbitrary Gear Ratio for Master Axis in Electronic Gear Box Automatic
Phase Synchronization .................................................................................. 268
1.9.3 Skip Function for EGB Axis (M Series) ..............................................................273
1.9.4 U-axis Control (M Series) ....................................................................................277
1.9.5 Signal-based Servo EGB Synchronous Control ...................................................286
1.9.6 Electronic Gear Box (FSSB type) ........................................................................294
1.10 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK TURNING MODE / COMPENSATION
CLAMP ...................................................................................................... 302
c-2
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.11 FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE OF POWER
FAILURE ................................................................................................... 303
1.12 FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL ............................................ 305
1.12.1 Flexible Synchronization Control ........................................................................305
1.12.2 Automatic Phase Synchronization for flexible synchronization Control .............316
1.12.3 Synchronization Positional Difference Detection Diagnosis Display and Signal
Output in Flexible Synchronization .....................................................................325
1.12.4 Inter-path Flexible Synchronization Control........................................................327
1.12.5 Skip Function for Flexible Synchronization Control ...........................................336
1.12.6 Hob Command by Flexible Synchronization Control ..........................................341
1.13 AXIS IMMEDIATE STOP FUNCTION ....................................................... 354
1.14 FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT...................................................... 357
1.14.1 Outputting States of Individual Axes ...................................................................375
1.14.2 Direct Assignment Mode of Flexible Path Axis Assignment...............................377
1.14.3 Axis Assignment Reset.........................................................................................384
1.15 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION ......................................... 386
1.16 PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL ................................................................ 403
2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ................................................. 443
2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 443
2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS ............................................................................. 445
2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK ............................................................................. 446
2.3.1 Overtravel Signals ................................................................................................446
2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1..........................................................................................448
2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 1 Area Expansion ...............................................................455
2.3.4 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3......................................................................................458
2.3.5 Checking the Stored Stroke during the Time from Power–on to the Reference
Position Establishment .........................................................................................465
2.3.6 Stroke Limit External Setting...............................................................................467
2.3.7 Stroke Limit Area Changing Function .................................................................468
2.3.8 Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal ........................................469
2.3.9 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ..............................................................476
2.4 ALARM SIGNALS...................................................................................... 488
2.5 START LOCK / INTERLOCK..................................................................... 488
2.6 MODE SELECTION................................................................................... 495
2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL....................................................................... 502
2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................................................... 504
2.9 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ...... 505
2.10 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 515
2.11 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M SERIES) .................... 521
2.12 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................................................. 524
2.13 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS ......................................... 526
3 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 538
3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED............................................................ 538
3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 546
3.2.1 Jog and Handle Simultaneous Mode ....................................................................556
3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT............................................................... 561
3.3.1 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate System Conversion...............567
3.4 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION..................................... 569
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
3.5 HANDLE-SYNCHRONOUS FEED ............................................................ 586
3.6 RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE ................................................... 593
3.7 3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M SERIES) ........................................ 596
3.7.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis
Direction Incremental Feed ..................................................................................598
3.7.1.1 Tool axis direction handle feed..................................................................... 598
3.7.1.2 Tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed............... 599
3.7.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle
Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed ...........599
3.7.2.1 Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed .................................................. 601
3.7.2.2 Tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed/tool axis right-angle direction
incremental feed............................................................................................ 602
3.7.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed/Tool Tip Center Rotation JOG Feed/
Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental Feed.........................................................602
3.7.3.1 Tool tip center rotation handle feed .............................................................. 603
3.7.3.2 Tool tip center rotation JOG feed/tool tip center rotation incremental feed . 604
3.7.3.3 Selection of the tool length offset value........................................................ 604
3.7.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed/Table Vertical Direction JOG Feed/
Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed ..........................................................605
3.7.4.1 Table vertical direction handle feed.............................................................. 605
3.7.4.2 Table vertical direction JOG feed/table vertical direction incremental feed. 606
3.7.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed/Table Horizontal Direction JOG
Feed/Table Horizontal Direction Incremental Feed .............................................606
3.7.5.1 Table horizontal direction handle feed.......................................................... 608
3.7.5.2 Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal direction incremental feed
...................................................................................................................... 609
3.8 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND .............................................................. 628
3.9 I/O Link βi MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE.............................................. 634
4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..................................... 640
4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 640
4.2 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................... 662
4.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM
THE REFERENCE POSITION .................................................................. 670
4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN.................................................................................. 677
4.5 IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...... 680
4.6 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER............ 681
4.7 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER BY
GRID METHOD ......................................................................................... 687
4.8 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 692
4.9 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS
(SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 705
4.10 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE
INTERFACE .............................................................................................. 713
4.10.1 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command ........................................713
4.10.2 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed....................................................717
4.11 REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT FUNCTION ......................... 720
4.12 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA. 721
4.12.1 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range .................................722
4.12.2 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under One
Rotation ................................................................................................................723
c-4
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.12.3 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over One
Rotation ................................................................................................................729
4.12.4 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...................................................................731
4.12.5 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.....................733
4.12.6 In Case of a Linear Axis.......................................................................................737
4.13 MANUAL 2ND/3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 741
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 746
5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD..................................................................... 746
5.2 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 750
5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 754
5.3.1 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................754
5.3.2 Dry Run ................................................................................................................758
5.3.3 Single Block .........................................................................................................760
5.3.4 High-speed Program Check Function ..................................................................763
5.3.5 Manual Handle Retrace ........................................................................................775
5.3.6 Auxiliary Function Output Block Reverse Movement for Manual Handle
Retrace..................................................................................................................796
5.3.7 Manual Handle Retrace Function for Multi-path .................................................798
5.3.8 Extension of the Manual Handle Retrace Function..............................................801
5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ................................................................. 806
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......... 807
5.6 PROGRAM RESTART .............................................................................. 810
5.6.1 Auxiliary Function Output in Program Restart Function .....................................819
5.6.2 Approach for Each Arbitrary Axis in Program Restart ........................................822
5.7 QUICK PROGRAM RESTART .................................................................. 824
5.7.1 Suppress Motion of Quick Program Restart.........................................................838
5.7.2 Quick program restart for multi path system........................................................841
5.7.3 Improvement of Quick program restart for non-machining program...................846
5.8 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER............................................................ 848
5.8.1 Update of Tool Compensation value for Tool Retract and Recover ....................854
5.9 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN................................................ 858
5.10 RETRACE (M SERIES) ............................................................................. 862
5.11 ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION...................................................... 872
5.12 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING
MODE........................................................................................................ 878
5.13 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 879
5.14 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 886
5.15 DIRECT OPERATION BY PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION ............ 889
5.16 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ............................ 890
5.17 RETRACTION FOR 3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID TAPPING .......................... 891
5.17.1 Alarm and Message ..............................................................................................895
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 896
6.1 POSITIONING ........................................................................................... 896
6.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING ........................................................ 898
6.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ........................................................................ 901
6.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 902
6.5 THREADING.............................................................................................. 906
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
6.5.1 Threading .............................................................................................................906
6.5.2 Threading Cycle Retract.......................................................................................911
6.5.2.1 Threading cycle retract (canned cycle) ......................................................... 912
6.5.2.2 Threading cycle retract (multiple repetitive canned cycle) ........................... 915
6.5.3 Variable Lead Threading......................................................................................919
6.5.4 Continuous Threading ..........................................................................................919
6.5.5 Circular Threading ...............................................................................................920
6.5.6 Arbitrary Speed Threading ...................................................................................921
6.5.6.1 Arbitrary speed threading ............................................................................. 921
6.5.6.2 Re-machining thread..................................................................................... 933
6.5.7 Rapid Traverse Overlap in Threading Cycle........................................................954
6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 958
6.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ................................................ 959
6.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 962
6.8.1 Cylindrical Interpolation ......................................................................................962
6.8.2 Cylindrical Interpolation by Plane Distance Command .......................................962
6.8.3 Cylindrical Interpolation Cutting Point Compensation ........................................962
6.9 POLYGON TURNING................................................................................ 967
6.9.1 Polygon Turning...................................................................................................967
6.9.2 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles....................................................................975
6.9.3 Concurrent Use of Polygon Turning and Polygon Turning with Two Spindles ..993
6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 995
6.11 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) ............................................ 999
6.12 NANO SMOOTHING ............................................................................... 1000
6.13 SMART TOLERANCE CONTROL........................................................... 1007
6.13.1 Change Tolerance in Smart Tolerance Control Mode........................................1013
6.14 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT ........................................................... 1017
Volume 2 of 3
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION
CONTROL ......................................................................................... 1023
7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ........................................................................... 1023
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate ...........................................................................................1024
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp......................................................................................1026
7.1.3 Feed per Minute..................................................................................................1026
7.1.4 Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution ............................................1031
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .....................................................................1034
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ............................................................................1037
7.1.7 Override..............................................................................................................1038
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override ............................................................................... 1038
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override ........................................................................................ 1042
7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override ............................................................................ 1045
7.1.7.4 Override cancel ........................................................................................... 1050
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override................................................................................1052
7.1.8.1 Inner corner automatic override (G62) ....................................................... 1052
7.1.8.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change..................................................... 1054
7.1.9 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function...........................................1056
7.1.10 External Deceleration .........................................................................................1061
7.1.11 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations..............................................................1067
7.1.12 AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control I / AI Contour
Control II ............................................................................................................1072
7.1.13 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C ..................................1101
c-6
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL...................................... 1104
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ................................................................1104
7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration........................................................... 1104
7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap ...................................................................... 1108
7.2.1.3 Programmable rapid traverse overlap ......................................................... 1109
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration.....................................1114
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation ...................1116
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation..........1118
7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .....................................................1121
7.2.6 Corner Control....................................................................................................1135
7.2.6.1 In-position check signal .............................................................................. 1135
7.2.6.2 In-position check......................................................................................... 1136
7.2.6.3 In-position check disable signal.................................................................. 1137
7.2.6.4 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse .............................. 1139
7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ........................................................................1141
7.2.8 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ....................................1142
7.2.9 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before Interpolation.........................1156
7.3 JERK CONTROL (M SERIES)................................................................. 1161
7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis (M Series)..............1161
7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before
Interpolation (M Series) .....................................................................................1164
8 MULTI-PATH CONTROL .................................................................. 1167
8.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL......................................................................... 1167
8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .....................................................1173
8.1.2 Multi-path Functions ..........................................................................................1174
8.1.3 Cautions on Multi-path Control .........................................................................1176
8.2 WAITING M CODES................................................................................ 1185
8.3 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE ........................................ 1190
8.4 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T SERIES)...................... 1197
8.5 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES) ........................................................... 1207
8.6 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL............................................ 1210
8.6.1 Synchronous Control..........................................................................................1211
8.6.2 Composite Control .............................................................................................1216
8.6.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ............................................................................1250
8.7 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ................................................................. 1255
8.8 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED CONTROL) .................. 1271
8.9 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL
BY PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1272
8.10 COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL AND AI CONTOUR
CONTROL ............................................................................................... 1275
8.11 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL .................................................................... 1281
8.12 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS ............................................................ 1290
8.13 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ........................................... 1293
8.14 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES................. 1294
8.15 WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START POINT......................... 1296
9 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL............................................. 1306
9.1 FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL ................................................... 1306
10 AUXILIARY FUNCTION .................................................................... 1318
10.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................... 1318
c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK................................................................ 1331
10.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................. 1332
10.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ....................................................... 1335
10.5 M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION .......................................................... 1338
10.6 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION............................................................. 1341
10.7 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING AXIS.............................. 1345
11 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION........................................................... 1356
11.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) ................................ 1356
11.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT .................................................................... 1357
11.3 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT.................................................................. 1368
11.4 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 1372
11.5 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.................................................................. 1377
11.6 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC ........................................ 1404
11.7 EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME.................................................................. 1410
11.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ........................................... 1410
11.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES).................................. 1422
11.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..................................................... 1424
11.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................................... 1456
11.11.1 Cs Contour Control ............................................................................................1456
11.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip..............................................................1477
11.11.3 Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function ..................................................1480
11.11.4 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment..........................................1482
11.11.5 Cs Contour Control Manual High-Speed Reference Position Return ................1489
11.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................................... 1491
11.13 RIGID TAPPING ...................................................................................... 1517
11.13.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder......................1518
11.13.2 Rigid Tapping Specification...............................................................................1522
11.13.3 Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution ................................1523
11.13.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ....................................................1524
11.13.5 Override..............................................................................................................1525
11.13.6 Reference Position Return..................................................................................1527
11.13.7 FS10/11 Format Command ................................................................................1527
11.13.8 Multi-Spindle Control ........................................................................................1529
11.13.9 3-dimensional Rigid Tapping .............................................................................1529
11.13.10 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path .....................................................1530
11.13.11 Diagnosis Data ...................................................................................................1536
11.13.12 Command Format...............................................................................................1539
11.13.13 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .............................................1542
11.13.14 Signal..................................................................................................................1543
11.13.14.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function ......................................................... 1543
11.13.14.2 Signals related to S code output.................................................................. 1544
11.13.14.3 Signals related to gear switching ................................................................ 1545
11.13.14.4 Signals related to the addition of multi-spindle control .............................. 1546
11.13.14.5 Notes on interface with the PMC................................................................ 1549
11.13.15 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification .................................................1552
11.13.15.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 .................................................... 1553
11.13.15.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block .................................... 1557
11.13.15.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters................................. 1561
11.13.15.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 .................................................... 1565
11.13.15.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block .................................... 1567
11.13.15.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters................................. 1569
c-8
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
11.13.15.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping ........................................................ 1571
11.13.15.8 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode .......................................................... 1571
11.13.16 FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping .......................................................................1573
11.13.17 Parameter............................................................................................................1576
11.13.18 Notes...................................................................................................................1594
11.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................................................. 1598
11.14.1 Arbitrary Spindle Position Phase Synchronization Function .............................1617
11.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION ........................................................................ 1623
11.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING ............................................................ 1629
11.17 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................. 1632
11.18 SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL INDEPENDENT
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION....................................... 1644
11.19 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................. 1648
11.20 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ......................................... 1659
11.20.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .....................................................................1660
11.20.2 Spindle Indexing Function .................................................................................1680
11.20.3 Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function .............................................................1684
11.20.4 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor .......................................................................1687
11.20.5 Threading, Feed per Revolution, and Constant Surface Speed Control.............1693
11.20.6 Spindle Output Control with PMC.....................................................................1696
11.20.7 Speed Arrival Signals and Speed Zero Signals ..................................................1697
11.20.8 Spindle Control with Servo Motor (Speed Control)...........................................1698
11.20.9 Spindle Synchronous Control for Spindle Control with Servo Motor ...............1700
11.20.10 Speed-up of Spindle Stop Motion for Spindle Control with Servo Motor.........1711
11.20.11 Alarm and Message ............................................................................................1714
11.21 SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY FUNCTION .................... 1715
11.22 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................................... 1717
11.22.1 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control ..................................................................1717
11.22.2 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control (FSSB Type) ............................................1728
11.22.3 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION FOR SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS
CONTROL .........................................................................................................1733
11.23 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL ................................... 1739
11.24 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX........................................ 1743
11.25 SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP ................................................... 1748
11.26 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE FEEDBACK PULSES
................................................................................................................. 1751
11.27 RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND .................................. 1753
12 TOOL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 1763
12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM ............................................... 1763
12.1.1 Tool Offset .........................................................................................................1764
12.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.....................................................1764
12.1.3 Offset ..................................................................................................................1765
12.1.4 Extended Tool Selection Function .....................................................................1775
12.1.5 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)..................1780
12.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ...................... 1784
12.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory..............................................................................1785
12.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION......................................................... 1789
12.3.1 Tool Management Function ...............................................................................1789
12.3.2 Tool Management Extension Function ..............................................................1818
12.3.2.1 Customization of tool management data display ........................................ 1818
12.3.2.2 Setting of spindle position/standby position display................................... 1818
c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
12.3.2.3 Input of customize data with the decimal point .......................................... 1818
12.3.2.4 Protection of various tool information items with the KEY signal............. 1818
12.3.2.5 Selection of a tool life count period ............................................................ 1818
12.3.2.6 Each tool data screen .................................................................................. 1819
12.3.2.7 Total life time display for tools of the same type........................................ 1819
12.3.3 Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support.........................................1826
12.4 TOOL COMPENSATION......................................................................... 1835
12.4.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(T Series) ............................................................................................................1835
12.4.2 Tool Length Compensation (M Series) ..............................................................1842
12.4.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)...........................................1846
12.4.4 Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series) ...........................................................1851
12.5 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.................................................................... 1856
Volume 3 of 3
13 PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1875
13.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 1875
13.2 G CODE SYSTEM................................................................................... 1877
13.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System........................................................................1877
13.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System....................................................1880
13.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1885
13.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE
PROGRAMS............................................................................................ 1887
13.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ................................................................ 1888
13.6 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1894
13.6.1 Custom Macro ....................................................................................................1894
13.6.2 Indirect Axis Address Command .......................................................................1919
13.6.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1921
13.6.4 Embedded Macro ...............................................................................................1924
13.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1937
13.7.1 Canned Cycle for Drilling ..................................................................................1937
13.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1954
13.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ............ 1970
13.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................... 1971
13.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) .......................... 1976
13.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................................................... 1978
13.13 SCALING ................................................................................................. 1988
13.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION...................................................... 1997
13.15 3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ................................... 1998
13.16 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES) .............................. 2005
13.16.1 Tilted Working Plane Indexing ..........................................................................2005
13.16.1.1 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle............................. 2007
13.16.1.2 General specifications of the tilted working plane indexing....................... 2008
13.16.1.3 Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw ............................. 2011
13.16.1.4 Tilted working plane indexing based on three points ................................. 2012
13.16.1.5 Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors ................................. 2014
13.16.1.6 Tilted working plane indexing based on projection angles......................... 2015
13.16.1.7 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction ................................. 2017
c-10
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
13.16.2 Multiple Command of Tilted Working Plane Indexing......................................2026
13.16.2.1 Absolute multiple command ....................................................................... 2026
13.16.2.2 Incremental multiple command................................................................... 2028
13.16.3 Tool Axis Direction Control...............................................................................2030
13.16.3.1 Tool axis direction control .......................................................................... 2030
13.16.3.2 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control........................ 2038
13.16.4 Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length Compensation .........................2042
13.16.5 Restrictions of Tilted Working Plane Indexing..................................................2061
13.17 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER ............................................. 2066
13.18 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 2067
13.19 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING ........................................... 2068
13.20 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 2070
13.21 PATTERN DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 2072
13.22 G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING..................................................... 2087
14 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT .......................................................................... 2091
14.1 DISPLAY/SET.......................................................................................... 2091
14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ....................................................................2091
14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel ..................................................................................2096
14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function ......................................................................2112
14.1.4 Touch Panel Control...........................................................................................2118
14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface ..........................................................................2123
14.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function .........................................................................2128
14.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal .................................................................................2139
14.1.8 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals .............................................2141
14.1.9 CNC Screen Dual Display..................................................................................2144
14.1.10 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor............................2148
14.1.11 Screen Switching by Mode.................................................................................2150
14.1.12 Screen Switching at Path Switching...................................................................2153
14.1.13 Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure Function ....................2153
14.1.14 Screen Hard Copy Function ...............................................................................2155
14.1.15 Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals ....................................................2159
14.1.16 Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters ..................................2160
14.1.17 Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm.............................................2164
14.1.18 Periodic Maintenance Screen .............................................................................2164
14.1.19 Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen...................................2166
14.1.20 Power Consumption Monitor .............................................................................2168
14.1.21 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function ...........................................................2183
14.1.22 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion Function ............................2192
14.1.23 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting...........................................2200
14.1.23.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2200
14.1.23.2 MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen ...................................... 2201
14.1.23.3 Registration and protection parameters, C Language Executor programs,
or ladder programs. ..................................................................................... 2204
14.1.23.4 Change of password.................................................................................... 2205
14.1.23.5 Notification of the modification of setting.................................................. 2206
14.1.23.6 Unregistration and canceling protection of parameters, C Language
Executor programs, or ladder programs...................................................... 2206
14.1.23.7 Selection of parameters............................................................................... 2207
14.1.23.8 Parameters................................................................................................... 2212
14.1.23.9 Signals......................................................................................................... 2212
14.1.23.10 Alarm and Message..................................................................................... 2213
14.1.24 Title Display Function in Initial Screen .............................................................2214
c-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
14.2 EDIT ........................................................................................................ 2217
14.2.1 Memory Protection Keys....................................................................................2217
14.2.2 Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter..................................................2218
14.2.3 MDI Key Setting ................................................................................................2219
14.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...........................................................2220
14.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT.......................................................... 2221
14.3.1 Multi Path Display..............................................................................................2221
14.3.2 Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing.........................................................2226
14.4 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................ 2229
15 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................................... 2235
15.1 RS232C INTERFACE.............................................................................. 2235
15.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ....................................................... 2245
15.3 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION.............................................................. 2251
16 MEASUREMENT............................................................................... 2254
16.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ...................................... 2254
16.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 2255
16.3 SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 2264
16.3.1 Skip Function .....................................................................................................2264
16.3.2 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function.............................................................2272
16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................2272
16.3.4 Continuous High-Speed Skip Function ..............................................................2276
16.3.5 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................2279
16.3.6 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................2287
16.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ........................................................... 2294
16.4.1 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series).....................................2294
16.4.2 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series)..........................................2295
16.4.3 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B"
(T Series) ............................................................................................................2313
17 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 2316
17.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 2316
17.1.1 PMC Axis Control..............................................................................................2316
17.1.2 PMC Axis Status Display Function....................................................................2410
17.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 2415
17.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...................... 2428
17.4 EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR EXTERNAL
MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT .............................................................. 2431
17.5 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH....................................... 2433
17.6 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT .......................................................................... 2437
17.7 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ................................................................... 2443
17.8 PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE .................................................... 2450
17.8.1 Parameter Write..................................................................................................2450
17.8.2 Parameter (No. 2092, Bit 0 of No. 8162) Write .................................................2455
17.8.3 Parameter (No. 1620) Write ...............................................................................2456
17.8.4 Parameter (No. 1825, No. 1826) Write ..............................................................2457
17.9 DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC .............................. 2458
18 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............................................. 2461
c-12
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 2461
18.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................... 2462
18.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.........................................................2462
18.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen .................................... 2463
18.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.................................... 2465
18.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..........................................................2465
18.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen ....................................... 2466
18.2.2.2 Related parameters...................................................................................... 2468
18.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function....................................... 2469
18.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .................................................................2471
18.2.3.1 Setting up DNS ........................................................................................... 2471
18.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ........................................................................................ 2472
18.2.3.3 Related parameters...................................................................................... 2474
18.2.4 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function.....................................................2474
18.2.4.1 Operation on the Setting screen .................................................................. 2475
18.2.5 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package ...........................................2476
18.2.5.1 Related NC parameters ............................................................................... 2476
18.2.5.2 Operation on the Setting screen .................................................................. 2478
18.2.5.3 Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from PMC .................... 2481
18.2.5.4 Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen ............................................ 2485
18.2.6 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function..................................................2488
18.2.6.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2488
18.2.6.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function .................................................. 2490
18.2.6.3 Mode selection ............................................................................................ 2493
18.2.6.4 Setting on the CNC screen.......................................................................... 2495
18.2.6.5 Setting on the personal computer................................................................ 2499
18.2.6.6 Execution methods...................................................................................... 2499
18.2.6.7 Related parameters...................................................................................... 2505
18.2.7 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function ..............................................2506
18.2.7.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2506
18.2.7.2 Setting of the WEB SERVER function ...................................................... 2508
18.2.7.3 Operation of the CNC screen Web server function .................................... 2509
18.2.7.4 Related signals ............................................................................................ 2512
18.2.7.5 Related parameters...................................................................................... 2513
18.2.8 CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION .................................................2514
18.2.8.1 Overview..................................................................................................... 2514
18.2.8.2 Contents of E-mail ...................................................................................... 2514
18.2.8.3 Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function................................... 2516
18.2.8.4 Setting of CNC Status Notification function .............................................. 2517
18.2.8.5 Related NC parameter................................................................................. 2520
18.2.9 Setting of the Modbus/TCP Server Function .....................................................2521
18.2.9.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 2521
18.2.9.2 SETTING.................................................................................................... 2527
18.2.9.3 MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 2530
18.2.9.4 RELATED NC PARAMETER................................................................... 2531
18.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ....... 2532
18.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................ 2532
18.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . 2534
18.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............. 2538
19 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ................................................................... 2544
19.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................................................. 2544
19.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 2547
19.3 FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING FUNCTION AND
COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION......................... 2548
c-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64603EN-1/01
19.3.1 Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function ...................................................2548
19.3.2 Communication Retry Monitoring Function ......................................................2549
19.4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS........................................................................... 2554
19.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2554
19.4.2 Investigation procedure of cause of alarm occurrence .......................................2558
19.4.3 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.....................................................................2558
19.4.4 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ......................................................................2560
19.4.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen .......................................................................2571
19.4.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen ..................................................................2575
19.4.7 Parameter............................................................................................................2578
19.4.8 Signal..................................................................................................................2579
19.4.9 Restrictions.........................................................................................................2579
19.5 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS .............................................................. 2580
19.5.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2580
19.5.2 Additional alarm and operator message .............................................................2581
19.5.3 Diagnosis Number ..............................................................................................2581
19.5.4 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message.......................................2582
19.5.5 Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis..................................................2582
19.5.5.1 Install .......................................................................................................... 2582
19.5.5.2 Uninstall...................................................................................................... 2583
19.5.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages ..................................... 2583
19.5.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages............................ 2584
19.5.6 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages ................................................................2586
19.5.6.1 Input Guidance Data ................................................................................... 2586
19.5.6.2 Checking input data .................................................................................... 2589
19.5.6.3 Making a memory card format file ............................................................. 2590
19.5.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table ......................... 2591
19.5.7 Making Messages for Multi-languages ..............................................................2592
19.5.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages ............................................................. 2592
19.5.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages........................................... 2593
19.5.8 Notice .................................................................................................................2594
19.5.9 Translating Data Used with the Former Series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C,
Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ........................................................................................2594
20 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION............................................................. 2596
20.1 MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION ........................................ 2596
20.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................2596
20.1.2 Monitoring by CNC Software ............................................................................2597
20.1.3 Monitoring by Ladder Program..........................................................................2598
20.1.4 Saving the Machine State ...................................................................................2598
20.1.4.1 Restriction of saving ................................................................................... 2599
20.1.5 Setting.................................................................................................................2601
20.1.5.1 PMC signal ................................................................................................. 2601
20.1.5.2 Multi-Sensor Unit ....................................................................................... 2602
20.1.5.3 Delay time for operation history saving...................................................... 2602
20.1.5.4 Machine state history saving response signal (MSUSAS).......................... 2603
20.1.6 Display the CNC Information ............................................................................2606
20.1.7 Machine state monitoring screen........................................................................2607
20.1.7.1 Monitoring of PMC signals ........................................................................ 2608
20.1.7.2 With Multi-Sensor Unit .............................................................................. 2609
20.1.8 Machine state history screen ..............................................................................2613
20.1.8.1 Machine State History List Screen.............................................................. 2614
20.1.8.2 Machine State History CNC Data Screen ................................................... 2620
20.1.8.3 Machine State History Operation History Screen....................................... 2621
20.1.8.4 Output CNC Information ............................................................................ 2622
c-14
B-64603EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
20.1.9 Caution ...............................................................................................................2626
20.2 SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ................ 2627
20.2.1 Outline ................................................................................................................2627
20.2.2 Waveform Data ..................................................................................................2627
20.2.3 Sampling.............................................................................................................2628
20.2.4 Detect Trouble....................................................................................................2629
20.2.5 Sequence when Trouble Occurs .........................................................................2629
20.2.6 Data Output ........................................................................................................2631
20.2.7 Output File Format .............................................................................................2634
20.2.8 Restriction ..........................................................................................................2634
APPENDIX
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC......................................... 2643
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................................ 2643
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS................................................................................... 2685
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ..............................................................2685
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ................................................................2717
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)..............................................................2745
B LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F
ADDRESS ......................................................................................... 2772
B.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F
ADDRESS ............................................................................................... 2772
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE PROGRAM
COMMAND........................................................................................ 2773
C.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE ARGUMENT
OF G CODE ............................................................................................ 2773
C.2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE ARGUMENT
OF M AND S CODE ................................................................................ 2776
D FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER .................. 2778
D.1 AUTOMATIC STEEING OF FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING
PARAMETER .......................................................................................... 2778
D.2 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER (FIXED TYPE). 2780
D.3 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER (INITIALIZED
TYPE) ...................................................................................................... 2785
E LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 2789
c-15
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13 PROGRAM COMMAND
Chapter 13, "PROGRAM COMMAND", consists of the following sections:
13.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................................................1875
13.2 G CODE SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................1877
13.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................1885
13.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS ...........1887
13.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ..................................................................................................1888
13.6 CUSTOM MACRO ......................................................................................................................1894
13.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING ...........................................................................................1937
13.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) .1954
13.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ..........................................1970
13.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................................................1971
13.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) ..........................................................1976
13.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES) ..................................................................................1978
13.13 SCALING .....................................................................................................................................1988
13.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION.......................................................................................1997
13.15 3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ..................................................................1998
13.16 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES).............................................................2005
13.17 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER .............................................................................2066
13.18 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) ..................2067
13.19 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING ...........................................................................2068
13.20 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES).......................................2070
13.21 PATTERN DATA INPUT............................................................................................................2072
13.22 G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING.......................................................................................2087
13.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
Overview
Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a
distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, F ......Machining center system (for a type common to all axes)
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F ...........Lathe system
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal point notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be
specified in millimeters, inches or degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is
considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal
point notation by using the bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401. Setting the bit 0 (AXDx) of parameter No.
3455 to 1 enables the calculator-type decimal input to be set up for individual axes separately. Values can
be specified both with and without decimal point in a single program.
Pocket calculator type decimal Standard type decimal point
Program command
point programming programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm
Command value without decimal point Unit : mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm)
- 1875 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Pocket calculator type decimal Standard type decimal point
Program command
point programming programming
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm
Command value with decimal point Unit : mm Unit : mm
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3455 AXDx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,
the value is determined:
0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input)
1: In millimeters, inches, degrees, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)
NOTE
This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input
function for each axis.
For the same axis name, be sure to make the same setting.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Decimal point programming
- 1876 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.2 G CODE SYSTEM
13.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System
T
Overview
There are three G code systems : A,B, and C. Select a G code system using bits 7 (GSC) and 6 (GSB) of
parameter No. 3401.
Table 13.2.1 (a) G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G05.1 G05.1 G05.1 AI contour control
G05.4 G05.4 G05.4 HRV3, 4 on/off
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
AI contour control (advanced preview control compatible
G08 G08 G08
00 command)
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 G10.6 G10.6 Tool retract and recover
G10.8 G10.8 G10.8 Programmable internal data change
G10.9 G10.9 G10.9 Programmable switching of diameter/radius specification
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
G28.2 G28.2 G28.2 In-position check disable reference position return
G29 G29 G29 Movement from reference position
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
In-position check disable 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
G30.2 G30.2 G30.2
return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
- 1877 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Table 13.2.1 (a) G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G32 G33 G33 Threading
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading
G35 G35 G35 Circular threading CW
Circular threading CCW (When bit 3 (G36) of parameter No.
G36 G36 G36 3405 is set to 1) or Automatic tool offset (X axis) (When bit 3
(G36) of parameter No. 3405 is set to 0)
Automatic tool offset (Z axis) (When bit 3 (G36) of parameter
G37 G37 G37
01 No. 3405 is set to 0)
Automatic tool offset (X axis) (When bit 3 (G36) of parameter
G37.1 G37.1 G37.1
No. 3405 is set to 1)
Automatic tool offset (Z axis) (When bit 3 (G36) of parameter
G37.2 G37.2 G37.2
No. 3405 is set to 1)
G38 G38 G38 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation: with vector held
Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation: corner rounding
G39 G39 G39
interpolation
G40 G40 G40 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : left
G42 G42 G42 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : right
G40.1 G40.1 G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1 G41.1 G41.1 19 Normal direction control left on
G42 .1 G42 .1 G42 .1 Normal direction control right on
Tool length compensation +
G43 G43 G43
(Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 must be 1.)
Tool length compensation -
G44 G44 G44
(Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 must be 1.)
23
G43.7 G43.7 G43.7 Tool offset
(G44.7) (G44.7) (G44.7) (Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 must be 1.)
G49 G49 G49 Tool length compensation cancel
(G49.1) (G49.1) (G49.1) (Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 must be 1.)
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max spindle speed clamp
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
- G50 G50 Scaling cancel
18
- G51 G51 Scaling
G50.1 G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygon turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygon turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G50.4 G50.4 G50.4 Cancel synchronous control
G50.5 G50.5 G50.5 Cancel composite control
G50.6 G50.6 G50.6 Cancel superimposed control
G51.4 G51.4 G51.4 Start synchronous control
00
G51.5 G51.5 G51.5 Start composite control
G51.6 G51.6 G51.6 Start superimposed control
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
(G54.1) (G54.1) (G54.1)
G55 G55 G55 14 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
- 1878 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table 13.2.1 (a) G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
14
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G60 G60 G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 G62 Automatic corner override mode
15
G63 G63 G63 Tapping mode
G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 G68 G68 04 Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional coordinate
G68.1 G68.1 G68.1 17
system conversion mode on
G68.2 G68.2 G68.2 Tilted working plane indexing
G68.3 G68.3 G68.3 17 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction
G68.4 G68.4 G68.4 Tilted working plane indexing (incremental multi-command)
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image off for double turret or balance cutting mode
04
cancel
Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional
G69.1 G69.1 G69.1 17
coordinate system conversion mode off
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating cycle
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling cycle
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle
G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle
G72 G72 G73 Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle
01
G73 G73 G74 Oscillation grinding cycle
G74 G74 G75 Oscillation direct sizing/grinding cycle
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling
10
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
G80.4 G80.4 G80.4 28 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
Spot drilling (FS10/11 format)
G81 G81 G81 10
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
G81.4 G81.4 G81.4 28 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G82 G82 G82 Counter boring (FS10/11 format)
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS10/11 format)
G83.5 G83.5 G83.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G83.6 G83.6 G83.6 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 10 Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G87.5 G87.5 G87.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 Peck drilling cycle
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
- 1879 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Table 13.2.1 (a) G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Threading cycle
G94 G79 G24 End face turning cycle
G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00 Maximum specified incremental amount check
G96 G96 G96 02 Constant surface speed control
G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion)
G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion)
00
G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 SV speed control mode ON
G97 G97 G97 02 Constant surface speed control cancel
G93 G93 G93 Inverse time feed
G98 G94 G94 05 Feed per minute
G99 G95 G95 Feed per revolution
- G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
- G91 G91 Incremental programming
- G98 G98 11 Canned cycle : return to initial level
- G99 G99 11 Canned cycle : return to R point level
13.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System
M
Table 13.2.2 (a) G code list
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell
G05.1 AI advanced preview control / AI contour control / Nano smoothing
G05.4 HRV3, 4 on/off
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
G08 AI advanced preview control / AI contour control (advanced preview control
compatible command)
00
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 Tool retract and recover
G10.8 Programmable internal data change
G10.9 Programmable switching of diameter/radius specification
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 (G70) Input in inch
06
G21 (G71) Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
- 1880 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table 13.2.2 (a) G code list
G code Group Function
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
19
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
G28.2 In-position check disable reference position return
G29 Movement from reference position
00
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.2 In-position check disable 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return
G31 Skip function
G31.8 EGB-axis skip
G33 Threading
G34 Variable lead threading
01
G35 Circular threading CW
G36 Circular threading CCW
G37 Automatic tool length measurement
G38 00 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : preserve vector
G39 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : corner circular interpolation
G40 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : cancel
G41 07 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : left
G42 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : right
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1 18 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1 Normal direction control on : right
G43 Tool length compensation +
G44 08 Tool length compensation -
G43.7 Tool offset
G45 Tool offset : increase
G46 Tool offset : decrease
00
G47 Tool offset : double increase
G48 Tool offset : double decrease
G49 (G49.1) 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
31
G51.2 Polygon turning
G50.4 Cancel synchronous control
G50.5 Cancel composite control
G50.6 Cancel superimposed control
G51.4 Start synchronous control
00
G51.5 Start composite control
G51.6 Start superimposed control
G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 (G54.1) Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
14
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G60 00 Single direction positioning
- 1881 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Table 13.2.2 (a) G code list
G code Group Function
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode on
G69 Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode off
G68.2 16 Tilted working plane indexing
G68.3 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction
G68.4 Tilted working plane indexing (incremental multi-command)
G70.7 Finishing cycle
G71.7 Outer surface rough machining cycle
G72.7 End rough machining cycle
G73.7 Closed loop cutting cycle
G74.7 00 End cutting off cycle
G75.7 Outer or inner cutting off cycle
G76.7 Multiple threading cycle
G72.1 Figure copying (rotary copy)
G72.2 Figure copying (linear copy)
G73 Peck drilling cycle
09
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
G77 Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle
G78 01 Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle
G79 Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle
G80 Canned cycle cancel
09
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
G80.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle
G81 09
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
G81.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
09
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 00 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
- 1882 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table 13.2.2 (a) G code list
G code Group Function
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 Constant surface speed control
13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G96.1 Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion)
G96.2 Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion)
00
G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 SV speed control mode ON
G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
10
G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
G107 00 Cylindrical interpolation
G112 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G113 Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
G160 Infeed control cancel
20
G161 Infeed control
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GSC GSB
3401
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 GSB The G code system is set.
#7 GSC
GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
NOTE
G code system B and G code system C are optional functions.
When no option is selected, G code system A is used, regardless
of the setting of these parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G23 CLR FPM G91 G01
3402
G23 CLR G70 G91 G19 G18 G01
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)
- 1883 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 to 0.
#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G90 mode (absolute programming)
1: G91 mode (incremental programming)
#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state:
0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set.
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set.
#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are:
0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input).
1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input).
#6 CLR Reset button on the MDI unit, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and
emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
#7 G23 When the power is turned on
0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
Note
NOTE
1 When the power is turned on or the cleared state is set by a reset (bit 6 (CLR) of
parameter No. 3402 is set to 1), modal G codes are placed in the following
states:
(1) G codes marked with in G code lists are enabled.
(2) When the system is cleared due to power-on or reset, whichever specified,
either G20 or G21, remains effective.
(3) Bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402 is used to specify whether G22 or G23 is
to be selected upon power-on. The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however,
changed when the CNC is cleared upon a reset. When the system is cleared
due to reset, whichever specified, either G22 or G23, remains effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single-shot G codes.
3 Alarm PS0010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G code list is
specified or a G code without a corresponding option is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code
specified last is valid.
- 1884 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is
canceled in the same way as when a G80 command is specified. G codes of
group 01 are not affected by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the initial level is
provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Preparatory function (G function)
Status when turning power on, when clear and when reset
13.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Overview
A program consists of the following components:
Table 13.3 (a) Program components
Components Descriptions
Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Program code end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start
O0001 ;
Program (COMMENT) Comment section
section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Fig. 13.3 (a) Program configuration
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 CTV
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0: Performed
1: Not performed
- 1885 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 is set to 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is
from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen.
SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of parameter
No. 0000 to 0.
PS5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of the NC
program is read.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Program configuration
- 1886 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS
Table 13.4 (a) lists the combinations of the part program storage sizes and the number of registerable
programs.
Table 13.4 (a) Part Program Storage Size / Number of Registerable Programs
Part program storage size Number of registerable programs
Number of Registered programs Number of Registered programs
expansion 1 : Non expansion 1 : Yes
1-path system 2-path system 1-path system 2-path system
512Kbyte 400 - 1000 -
1Mbyte - 800 - 1000
2Mbyte 400 800 1000 1000
NOTE
Part program storage size 2Mbyte and Number of Registered programs
expansion 1 are optional.
NOTE
Program O0001
1 Creating one folder results in the
number of programs yet to be
O0001 ; First page registerable decreasing one.
N1 G01 ; 2 The program storage size means the
maximum size of a program if the
(Area in use)
program is the one and only program
registered.
N100 … ; Second page 3 If more than one program is registered,
the total size of registerable programs
(Area in use) reduces for the following reason.
The FS0i-F manage programs in page
units. The unit of program storage is
M30 ; Last page managed also in page units. When a
(Area in use) program is created, as many pages as
(Unused area)
necessary to store the program are
secured, and the program is stored on
these pages. Generally, the last
program storage page has an unused
Unusable for any other
area (Fig. 13.4 (a)). This unused area
program
cannot be used to store any other
program. For the sake of program
Example of creating program O0001 management, it is regarded as an area
in use.
Fig. 13.4 (a)
The FS0i-C uses a similar way of
management, but the unit of pages in it
differs from that in the FS0i-F. So, if
more than one program is registered in
the FS0i-F, the total program size of
registerable programs in the FS0i-F
differs from that in the FS0i-C.
- 1887 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Program management
13.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION
Overview
Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be switched by the following four methods.
- G code(G20/G21)
- SETTING (HANDY) screen/setting bit 2 (INI) parameter No. 0000
- Programable parameter input(G10)
- Custom macro variable #3005
Explanation
- Switching method using a G code(G20/G21)
The unit of input data is switched by G20/G21. It switches to inch input by G20, and metric input by G21.
Please refer to the OPERATOR'S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center
System)(B-64604EN) for switching conditions of G20/G21.
- Switching method using a SETTING (HANDY) screen/setting parameter
The unit of input data is switched by SETTING (HANDY) screen or setting bit 2 (INI) parameter
No. 0000.
- Switching method using a programable parameter input(G10)
Setting bit 2 (INI) parameter No. 0000 is rewritten by the G10 command, and the unit of input data is
switched.
- Switching method using a custom macro variable
The unit of input data is switched by system variable #3005.
- Switching position
The unit of input data is switched at the reference position of the machine coordinate system origin.
In case G code(G20/G21), it is possible to change the unit at the positions other than 0 of the machine
coordinate by the following settings.
(1) Setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed in
the reference position (parameter No. 1240). However, it is necessary to enable (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136 is set to 0) the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed even in
positions other than the reference position. However, it is necessary to enable (bit 0 (NWZ) and bit 1
(NWC) of parameter No. 8136 is set to 0 and 1, respectively) the workpiece coordinate system and
workpiece coordinate system presetting.
Signal
Inch input signal INCH<Fn002.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active.
[Output cond.] 1indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and 0 indicates that metric input
mode (G21) is in progress.
This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched using the setting
data display on the MDI unit.
- 1888 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn002 INCH
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 INI Unit of input
0: In metrics
1: In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROTx
#1 ROSx Setting linear or rotary axis.
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
- 1889 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 1 Rotary axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotary axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotary axis roll-over function and the index table
indexing function (M series)
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the reference position in the machine coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 MCN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 MCN Machine position
0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is
displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.
1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when
input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 1890 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
Metric IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
input IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
system IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 times
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
Inch input
IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
system
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NWC NWZ
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#1 NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 IMG CIM NIM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command
(G20 or G21) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece
coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below:
0: An alarm PS1298 is issued.
1: Clearing is performed.
If bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is set to 1, or if bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000
is set to 1, this parameter clears the following:
• Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal is off
- 1891 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
• Issuance of a move command with the machine locked
• Movement by handle interrupt
• Operation with a mirror image
• Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system is set up
#2 IMG Inch/metric conversion is:
0: Performed with the G20/G21 (G70/G71).
1: Not performed with the G20/G21 (G70/G71).
NOTE
If bit 2 of parameter No. 11222 is 1 (inch/metric conversion with
G20/G21 is disabled), only bit 2 of parameter No. 0 can be used to
perform inch/metric conversion. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 0, the
metric system is used. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 1, the inch
system is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14000 IRF INA
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 INA If an inch-metric switch command is executed at a position other than 0 of the machine
coordinate,
0: Alarm is not issued.
1: Alarm PS5362, “CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS” is issued.
NOTE
1 Set this parameter to 0 for the rotation axis or other axes not
related to inch/millimeter switching.
2 This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#2 IRF An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and
metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm
PS5362 is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled.
Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before
switching between the inch and metric unit.
- 1892 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, tool
compensation values are automatically converted and need not be re-set.
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are
different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error
is not accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using bit 2 (INI) of parameter No.
0000.
3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of
parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric switching at the
reference position (machine coordinate system origin).
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
PS5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other
than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion
after returning to the reference position.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Inch metric conversion (G20, G21)
- 1893 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.6 CUSTOM MACRO
13.6.1 Custom Macro
Overview
A subprogram is useful for repeatedly executing the same operation. With the custom macro function,
however, variables, operation commands, conditional branches, and so forth can be used to create
general-purpose programs more simply for pocketing, user-specific canned cycles, and so forth.
From a machining program, a custom macro can be called with a simple instruction as in the case of a
subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
:
G65P9010 R50.0 L2 ; G02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ;
: :
: :
:
M30 ;
M99 ;
Thus, when a function is programmed as a custom macro body, the function can be made more universal.
This means that a program can be created using variables for values that can change or are not defined yet.
This feature also leads to application of group technology.
For example, classify similar workpieces into a group and create a general-purpose custom macro by
using variables for such a group. Thus, the need for programming for an individual workpiece in the
group can be eliminated by assigning desired values to the variables.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 5 (NMC) of parameter No.8135 to 0.
r β
α
As an example, the bolt hole circle shown above can be created simply. By creating and once registering
a custom macro for the bolt hole circle, the CNC can operate as if it had a bolt hole circle function.
The programmer can use the bolt hole circle function by remembering the following command:
G65 Pp Rr Aα Bβ Kk ;
P : Macro number of bolt hole circle
r : Radius
α: Start angle
β: Angle between circles
k : Number of circles
- 1894 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Signal
Custom Macro Input Signals
UI000 to UI015<Gn054,Gn055>, UI016 to UI031<Gn056,Gn057>,
UI100 to UI131<Gn276 to Gn279>, UI200 to UI231<Gn280 to Gn283>
UI300 to UI331<Gn284 to Gn287>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro
as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros
and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
- When the bit 0 (MIF) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 0 :
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UI014 1 #1014
UI015 1 #1015
UI000 to UI015 16 #1032 Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1
∑ {# [1000 + i] × 2 }
15
*1
Variable value #1032 = i
i =0
These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.
- When the bit 0 (MIF) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 1 :
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UI030 1 #1030
UI031 1 #1031
UI000 to UI031 32 #1032 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UI100 to UI131 32 #1033 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UI200 to UI231 32 #1034 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UI300 to UI331 32 #1035 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
∑{2 × V }－2
30
*1
Variable value #(1032+n) = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UIni is 0 and Vi=1 when UIni is 1
n : 0 to 3
These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.
Custom Macro Output Signals
UO000 to UO015<Fn054,Fn055>, UO100 to UO131<Fn056 to Fn059>
UO016 to UO031<Fn276,Fn277>, UO200 to UO231<Fn280 to Fn283>
UO300 to UO331<Fn284 to Fn287>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a
custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between
custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
- 1895 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- When the bit 0 (MIF) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 0 :
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UO014 1 #1114
UO015 1 #1115
UO000 to UO015 16 #1132 Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1
UO100 to UO131 32 #1133 Signed 32-bit binary code *2
∑ {# [1100 + i]× 2 }
15
*1 Variable value #1132 = i
i =0
∑ {2 }
30
*2 Variable value #1133 = i
× Vi －2 31 × V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UO1i is 0and Vi=1 when UO1i is 1
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as
well as on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the
value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
- When the bit 0 (MIF) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 1 :
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UO030 1 #1130
UO031 1 #1131
UO000 to UO031 32 #1132 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UO100 to UO131 32 #1133 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UO200 to UO231 32 #1134 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
UO300 to UO331 32 #1135 Signed 32-bit binary code *1
∑ {2 }
30
*1 Variable value #(1132+n) = i
× Vi －2 31 × V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UOni is 0and Vi=1 when UOni is 1
n : 0 to 3
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as
well as on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the
value of the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
Custom Macro Input Signals for Interface Signal R Addresses
UI400 to UI431 <Rr to Rr+3>
UI500 to UI531 <Rr+4 to Rr+7>
UI600 to UI631 <Rr+8 to Rr+11>
UI700 to UI731 <Rr+12 to Rr+15>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro
as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros
and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
- 1896 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UI400 1 #1036
UI401 1 #1037
0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UI431 1 #1067
UI400 to UI431 32 #1068 Signed 32-bit binary code
UI500 to UI531 32 #1069 Signed 32-bit binary code
UI600 to UI631 32 #1070 Signed 32-bit binary code
UI700 to UI731 32 #1071 Signed 32-bit binary code
The letter r represents a setting of parameter No. 6093.
These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.
Custom Macro Output Signals for Interface Signal R Addresses
UO400 to UO431 <Rr to Rr+3>
UO500 to UO531 <Rr+4 to Rr+7>
UO600 to UO631 <Rr+8 to Rr+11>
UO700 to UO731 <Rr+12 to Rr+15>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a
custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between
custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UO400 1 #1136
UO401 1 #1137
0 at 0 and 1 at 1
: : :
UO431 1 #1167
UO400 to UO431 32 #1168 Signed 32-bit binary code
UO500 to UO531 32 #1169 Signed 32-bit binary code
UO600 to UO631 32 #1170 Signed 32-bit binary code
UO700 to UO731 32 #1171 Signed 32-bit binary code
The letter r represents a setting of parameter No. 6094.
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as
well as on the right side. Using these system variables on the right side enables the
last value assigned (sent) to each variable on the left side to be read.
- 1897 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
Gn055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
Gn056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016
Gn057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024
Gn276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100
Gn277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108
Gn278 UI123 UI122 UI121 UI120 UI119 UI118 UI117 UI116
Gn279 UI131 UI130 UI129 UI128 UI127 UI126 UI125 UI124
Gn280 UI207 UI206 UI205 UI204 UI203 UI202 UI201 UI200
Gn281 UI215 UI214 UI213 UI212 UI211 UI210 UI209 UI208
Gn282 UI223 UI222 UI221 UI220 UI219 UI218 UI217 UI216
Gn283 UI231 UI230 UI229 UI228 UI227 UI226 UI225 UI224
Gn284 UI307 UI306 UI305 UI304 UI303 UI302 UI301 UI300
Gn285 UI315 UI314 UI313 UI312 UI311 UI310 UI309 UI308
Gn286 UI323 UI322 UI321 UI320 UI319 UI318 UI317 UI316
Gn287 UI331 UI330 UI329 UI328 UI327 UI326 UI325 UI324
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
Fn055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008
Fn056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100
Fn057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108
Fn058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116
Fn059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124
Fn276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016
Fn277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024
Fn280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200
- 1898 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Fn281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO208
Fn282 UO223 UO222 UO221 UO220 UO219 UO218 UO217 UO216
Fn283 UO231 UO230 UO229 UO228 UO227 UO226 UO225 UO224
Fn284 UO307 UO306 UO305 UO304 UO303 UO302 UO301 UO300
Fn285 UO315 UO314 UO313 UO312 UO311 UO310 UO309 UO308
Fn286 UO323 UO322 UO321 UO320 UO319 UO318 UO317 UO316
Fn287 UO331 UO330 UO329 UO328 UO327 UO326 UO325 UO324
(The letter r represents a setting of parameter No. 6093.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rr UI407 UI406 UI405 UI404 UI403 UI402 UI401 UI400
Rr+1 UI415 UI414 UI413 UI412 UI411 UI410 UI409 UI408
Rr+2 UI423 UI422 UI421 UI420 UI419 UI418 UI417 UI416
Rr+3 UI431 UI430 UI429 UI428 UI427 UI426 UI425 UI424
to
Rr+15 UI731 UI730 UI729 UI728 UI727 UI726 UI725 UI724
(The letter r represents a setting of parameter No. 6094.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rr UO407 UO406 UO405 UO404 UO403 UO402 UO401 UO400
Rr+1 UO415 UO414 UO413 UO412 UO411 UO410 UO409 UO408
Rr+2 UO423 UO422 UO421 UO420 UO419 UO418 UO417 UO416
Rr+3 UO431 UO430 UO429 UO428 UO427 UO426 UO425 UO424
to
Rr+15 UO731 UO730 UO729 UO728 UO727 UO726 UO725 UO724
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SBV SBM HGO HMC MGO G67
6000
SBV SBM HGO V15 HMC MGO G67
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call
mode (G66/G66.1) is not set:
0: Alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” is issued.
1: The specification of G67 is ignored.
- 1899 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the
executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.
#2 HMC A custom macro is executed:
0: At a normal speed.
1: At a high-speed.
NOTE
When the parameter HMC is set to 1, the CNC gives priority to a
custom macro. For this reason, when this parameter is set,
performance of the following functions may be degraded:
- Screen display of CNC
- Macro executor (Auxiliary macro, Conversational macro screen)
- C language executor (excluding high-level tasks)
- External data input
etc.
#3 V15 As system variable numbers for tool offset:
0 : The standard system variable numbers for the FS0i are used.
1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the FS10/11 are used.
The tables indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 999. The values for
tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system variables in
parentheses.
(1) Tool offset memory A
System variable number
V15 = 0 V15 = 1
#10001 to #10999 #10001 to #10999
Wear offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2001 to #2200)
(2) Tool offset memory C
System variable number
V15 = 0 V15 = 1
#11001 to #11999 #10001 to #10999
Geometry offset value
Tool length (#2201 to #2400) (#2001 to #2200)
offset #10001 to #10999 #11001 to #11999
Wear offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2201 to #2400)
Tool radius Geometry offset value #13001 to #13999 #12001 to #12999
offset Wear offset value #12001 to #12999 #13001 to #13999
#4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed
branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
#5 SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable
#3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom
macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single
blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of
parameter No. 6000.
- 1900 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 SBV Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003
Bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000
0 1
0 Disables single block stop. Enables single block stop. (With
Bit 7 (SBV) of
Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop
parameter No.
1 variable #3003, single block stop cannot be enabled/disabled. Single
6000
can be enabled/disabled.) block stop is enabled at all times.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:
0: Standard specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.)
1: Extended specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are
used.)
#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command
0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:
0: #500 to #999 are output.
1: #100 to #149 and #500 to #999 are output. (Note)
NOTE
Output variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.
When the parameter PV5=1
Option Non #100 to #199 and #500 to #999
“Embedded macro” Yes #100 to #199, #200 to #499 and #500 to #999
#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command
0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output
1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output
#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram)
0: Not called using a T code
1: Called using a T code
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are:
0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
- 1901 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Cleared variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.
Option Non #100 to #199
“Embedded macro” Yes #100 to #199 and #200 to #499
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
VHD NAT
6004
D15 NAT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are
specified as follows:
0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.
1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.
#2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5140:
0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is
read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation
memories are available.)
1: An interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt is read.
#5 D15 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for
up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401
through #2800, as FS10/11 are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
When bit 3 (V15) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
D code
Geometry Wear
Compensation
Variable Variable
number Variable name Variable name
number number
1 #2401 [#_OFSDG[1]] #2601 [#_OFSDW[1]]
2 #2402 [#_OFSDG[2]] #2602 [#_OFSDW[2]]
3 #2403 [#_OFSDG[3]] #2603 [#_OFSDW[3]]
: : : : :
199 #2599 [#_OFSDG[199]] #2799 [#_OFSDW[199]]
200 #2600 [#_OFSDG[200]] #2800 [#_OFSDW[200]]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6007 CVA MGE BCS SCS DPG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 DPG Specifies whether to allow G codes with a decimal point to be called.
0: Do not allow.
1: Allow.
- 1902 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#1 SCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with S codes.
0: Do not call with S codes.
1: Call with S codes.
#2 BCS Specifies whether to call subprograms with the second auxiliary function codes.
0: Do not call with the second auxiliary function codes.
1: Call with the second auxiliary function codes.
#3 MGE Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or for each block.
0: Make a call for each block (equivalent to G66.1).
1: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66).
#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:
0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.
[Example]
When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling
program is set as follows:
Command CVA=0 CVA=1
#24 0.01 0.01
ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01
NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 IJK GMP ADD ISO KOP MCA F16
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 F16 The precision of operation is based on:
0: New specification.
1: FS16i compatible specification.
#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows:
0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and
the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to
variable #3000.)
1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A
value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)
[Example]
Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0:
The alarm screen displays "MC 3001 ALARM MESSAGE".
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1:
The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".
#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made open by POPEN:
0: Communication continues, and the line is left open.
1: Communication stops, and the line is closed.
- 1903 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#4 ISO 0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *,
=, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameters Nos. 6010 to 6018.
1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,
*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameters Nos. 6010 to 6018.
#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the format specification [a,b] of the
DPRNT statement is less than the number of digits in the integer part of an output
variable value:
0: The specified number of digits only are output, with the unspecified digits discarded.
1: An alarm for excessive digits is issued.
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the
calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second
auxiliary function code, or particular code are:
0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary
function code, and NC address.)
1: Allowed.
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments:
0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined.
1: Argument specification I is always used.
Example
When K_J_I_ is specified:
- When this parameter is set to 0:
Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10
are specified.
- When this parameter is set to1:
Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are
specified regardless of the specification order.
(Argument specification II cannot be used.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6009 MAA MSM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 MSM When an M code or M codes specified for a macro call or macro calls (multiple macro
call specification) are not at the beginning of the block:
0: Alarm PS0127 is issued.
1: The macro or macros are called based on the M code or M codes. All addresses
specified in the same block are used as arguments.
NOTE
1 When MSM is set to 1 and an M code specified for a macro call is
not at the beginning of the block, argument specification II cannot
be used.
2 When MSM is set to 1 and an M code specified for a macro call is
not at the beginning of the block, the number of repetitions (L)
cannot be used.
- 1904 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 MAA When a Macro Call using M code or Special Macro Call using M code are executed:
0: Address G does not become an argument.
The addresses that can be used as arguments are as shown in the tables below.
- Usual Macro Call
Variable Variable Variable
Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: Address G can not command. If address G is commanded, alarm PS0129 occurs.
*2: Address L is a number of times in which the macro call is repeated.
*3: Address M other than call code is passed to variable #13.
*4: Address M for call code does not become an argument.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14.
- Special Macro Call
Variable Variable Variable
Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: Even if address G is commanded, PS alarm does not occur. And address G does
not become an argument.
*2: Address L does not become a number of times in which the macro call is
repeated, and does not become an argument.
*3: Address M other than call code is passed to variable #13.
*4: Address M for call code does not become an argument.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14, and becomes a sequence number.
1: Address G becomes an argument.
The addresses that can be used as arguments are as shown in the tables below.
- Usual Macro Call
Variable Variable Variable
Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G #28 to #32 *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
- 1905 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
*1: The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code groups are used as
arguments and passed to variables #28 to #32.
*2: Address L is a number of times in which the macro call is repeated.
*3: Address M other than call code is passed to variable #13.
*4: Address M for call code does not become an argument.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14.
- Special Macro Call
Variable Variable Variable
Address Address Address
number number number
A #1 J #5 S #19
B #2 K #6 T #20
C #3 L #12 *2 U #21
D #7 M #13 *3 V #22
E #8 M(Call code) #27 *4 W #23
F #9 N #14 *5 X #24
G #28 to #32 *1 P #16 Y #25
H #11 Q #17 Z #26
I #4 R #18
*1: The first five addresses G in ascending order of G code groups are used as
arguments and passed to variables #28 to #32.
*2: Address L is passed to variable #12, and does not become a number of times in
which the macro call is repeated.
*3: Address M other than call code is passed to variable #13.
*4: Address M for call code is passed to variable #27.
*5: Address N is passed to variable #14, and becomes a sequence number.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.
=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.
]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
- 1906 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SFN EDP OFN DPD MCO
6019
SFN EDP MSV OFN MCO
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 DPD When argument D is specified for a macro call without a decimal point, the number of
decimal places:
0: Is assumed to be 0.
[Example]
When G65PppppD1 is specified, #7=1.0000 is passed as the argument.
1: Depends on the increment system of the reference axis.
[Example]
When the increment system of the reference axis is IS-B and G65PppppD1 is
specified, #7=0.0010 is passed as the argument.
#3 OFN The format of the name of a file output by the external output command (DPRNT or
BPRNT) is:
0: PRNTxxxx.DAT (xxxx: 0000 to 9999).
1: MCR_PRNT.TXT (fixed).
#4 MSV When Tool length compensation shift type is used, the value in which Tool offset value,
Tool length offset and Tool holder offset are :
#5041 - #5060, #100101 - #100132 (Current position)
#5061 - #5080, #100151 - #100182 (Skip position):
0: It is included in above-mentioned system value.
1: It is not included in above-mentioned system value.
Only in the machining center system, this parameter becomes effective.
#5 EDP Precision setting for macro relational operators is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Parameter No. 6100 is used to set the number of significant digits
after the decimal point.
#7 SFN The format of the name of a file output by the external output command (DPRNT or
BPRNT) is:
0: PRNTxxxx.DAT (xxxx: 0000 to 9999).
If the power is off and on, xxxx is reset to 0000.
1: PRNTxxxx.DAT (xxxx: 0000 to 9999).
If the power is off and on, xxxx is continued and the next number is applied.
NOTE
The setting value of bit 7 (SFN) is effective in case of that bit 3
(OFN) equals 0.
- 1907 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6020 NCM IFR NC2 NC1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 NC1 The setting of the number of custom macro variables common to paths for #100 to #199
(#499) (parameter No. 6036) is:
0: Valid.
As many custom macro variables #100 to #199 (or #100 to #499) set for this path as
the number set in parameter No. 6036 are used as custom macro variables common
to tool paths.
1: Invalid.
Custom macro variables #100 to #199 (or #100 to #499) set for this path are all used
as variables for the path.
NOTE
For path 1, be sure to set this parameter to 0.
#1 NC2 The setting of the number of custom macro variables common to paths for #500 to #999
(parameter No. 6037) is:
0: Valid.
As many custom macro variables #500 to #999 set for this path as the number set in
parameter No. 6037 are used as custom macro variables common to tool paths.
1: Invalid.
Custom macro variables #500 to #999 set for this path are all used as variables for
the path.
NOTE
For path 1, be sure to set this parameter to 0.
#2 IFR The custom macro interface signal R address is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Set the start address of each R area in parameter No. 6093 or
6094.
WARNING
To set the parameter IFR=1, set an appropriate value to parameter
No.6094 beforehand.
When the parameter No.6094 is 0, R0 of an internal relay is set. If
the internal relay R0 is used to another area, the operation not
intended might be done.
- 1908 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#3 NCM The position in which comment section can be inserted in macro statements changes
places by setting value of this parameter.
When #3000(Alarm) or #3006(Stop with a message) are commanded with the comment
section, the order of message and the comment section changes places by setting value of
this parameter.
0: The position in which comment section can be inserted in macro statements is as
follows.
(ABC) #100 =1; Head of the block
#100 =1 (ABC); End of the block
N01 (ABC) #100 =1; Just behind of the sequence number
It is assumed that it message first, and assumes since the second to be comment
section.
#3000 =1 (ALARM MESSAGE) (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2);
1: The position in which comment section can be inserted in macro statements is as
follows.
(ABC) #100 =1; Head of the block
#100 =1 (ABC); End of the block
N01 (ABC) #100 =1; Just behind of the sequence number
#100(ABC) =1; Just behind of variable number
#100 =#101 +1.(ABC) *#102; Just behind of numeric values
#100 =[#_UIL[1]](ABC) *100.; Just behind of the name of variable
The end is assumed to be message, and it assumes to be comment section from it
ahead.
#3000 =1 (COMMENT 1) (COMMENT 2) (ALARM MESSAGE);
6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)
6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 500 to 999
Among the common variables #500 to #999, the range of common variables specified by
this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write attempt
(on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameters Nos. 6031 and 6032 not to protect
common variables.
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499))
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 400
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 (up to #499 in a system with the embedded macro
option) may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common
variables is not exceeded.
- 1909 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Example
When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #149: Used by each path independently
NOTE
1 To use up to #199, the option for adding custom macro common
variables is required.
2 To use up to #499, the embedded macro option is required.
3 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
4 When the option for embedded macro is effective and the option for
addition of custom macro common variables is not effective, #150
to #199 can not be used but this parameter should be set the
number which includes #150 to #199.
6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 500
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.
Example
When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037
#500 to #549: Shared by all paths
#550 to #599: Used by each path independently
NOTE
1 To use up to #999, the option for adding custom macro common
variables is required.
2 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros
[Input type] Parameter input
- 1910 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in
parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered. Whether
the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.
6007.
[Example] When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No. 6040 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6039 + value of parameter No. 6040 -
1) > 9999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.
6041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] -999 to 999
6042 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal point
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6043 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call custom macros
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
- 1911 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes with a decimal
point at a time. With G codes with a decimal point as many as the value set in parameter
No. 6043 starting with the G code with a decimal point set in parameter No. 6041, the
custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No. 6043
starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6042 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6043 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6041, the modal call mode is entered. Whether
the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No.
6007.
[Example] When parameter No. 6041 = 900, parameter No. 6042 = 2000, and parameter No. 6043 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G90.0 → O2000
G90.1 → O2001
G90.2 → O2002
:
G99.9 → O2099
When the setting of parameter No. 6041 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6042 + value of parameter No. 6043 -
1) > 9999
3) When bit 0 (DPG) of parameter No. 6007 = 0 (to disable calls
using G codes with a decimal point)
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6060 to 6069, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6060 to 6069 are made preferentially.
6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
- 1912 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling.
[Example] When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter No.
6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6045 + value of parameter No. 6046 -
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.
6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999
6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling.
[Example] When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No.
6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
- 1913 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6048 + value of parameter No. 6049 -
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls
specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made
preferentially.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
to to
6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of
parameter No. 6007.
6060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040
to to
6069 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9049
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] -999 to 999
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of
parameter No. 6007. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The value expressed by (m×10+n)
is set in the parameter. The values m and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 ≤m
≤99, 0 ≤n ≤9.
NOTE
Parameter Nos. 6060 to 6069 are valid when bit 0 (DPG) of
parameter No. 6007 is set to 1.
6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001
to to
6079 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9009
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
- 1914 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to
9009.
NOTE
If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No.
6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist,
O9001 is called when M100 is specified.
6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020
to to
6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The
simple call mode is set.
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameters
Nos. 6081 and 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 used
to call subprograms and in a parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 used
to call custom macros, a custom macro is called preferentially. For
example, if 300 is set in parameters Nos. 6071 and 6081, and
programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when
M300 is specified.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
The settable addresses are indicated below.
Address Parameter setting value T series M series
A 65 O O
B 66 O O
D 68 X O
F 70 O O
H 72 O O
I 73 O O
J 74 O O
K 75 O O
L 76 O O
M 77 O O
P 80 O O
- 1915 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Address Parameter setting value T series M series
Q 81 O O
R 82 O O
S 83 O O
T 84 O O
V 86 X O
X 88 X O
Y 89 X O
Z 90 X O
NOTE
1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified.
2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.
6093 Top address of custom macro interface signal R address (input signal)
6094 Top address of custom macro interface signal R address (output signal)
NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum address (multiple of 4. 0, 4, 8, ...)
Set the top address of custom macro interface signal R address. 128 signals starting at the
top address are allocated.
[Example]
Parameter System variable number Signal to use Attribute
No.6093=1000 #1068 R1000 to R1003 R
#1069 R1004 to R1007
#1070 R1008 to R1011
#1071 R1012 to R1015
No.6094=1100 #1168 R1100 to R1103 R/W
#1169 R1104 to R1107
#1170 R1108 to R1111
#1171 R1112 to R1115
*) The R and R/W attributes of variables represent, respectively, read-only and
read/write enabled.
NOTE
1 Each value specified with this parameter must be a multiple of 4 (0,
4, 8, …). Otherwise, this function is disabled.
2 If a non-existent R address or system relay address is set, the
corresponding system variable becomes invalid. The effective R
address area varies depending on the PMC used and its memory.
Be sure to specify a usable range by checking the specification of
the PMC in use.
3 When setting the parameter, make sure that the input signal
addresses do not overlap with the output signal addresses.
- 1916 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
6100 Precision setting for relational operators
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 15
This parameter sets the number of digits after the decimal point in two values to be
compared using the custom macro relational operator. The two values are rounded off to
the specified number of digits before comparison.
NOTE
1 This function is enabled by setting bit 5 (EDP) of parameter No.
6019 to 1.
2 This function is disabled if parameter No. 6100 is set to a value out
of the valid data range.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 DSK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 DSK Skip position reading (system variables #5421 to #5440, #100701 to #100750) by the
detection unit is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NCV NMC
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 NMC Custom macro is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#6 NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NGW
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 1917 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
PS0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out
of range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
PS0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro
statement is in error. The parameter program format is in
error.
PS0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE An illegal No. was specified in a local variable, common
variable or a system variable in a custom macro.
A non–existent custom macro variable No. was specified in
the EGB axis skip function (G31.8), or there are not enough
custom macro variables for storing the skip position.
PS0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
right side of an expression.
PS0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
PS0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
RANGE range.
PS0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
PS0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
PS0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed
the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
PS0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
PS0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. G can be
specified as an argument only in an every-block call (G66.1).
PS1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in
the same block.
PS1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the
same block.
PS1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.
PS1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in
the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom
macros.
PS1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified. [#_OFSxx] does
not match the tool offset memory option configuration.
PS1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
PS1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
- 1918 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number Message Description
PS1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
PS1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
PS1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro
interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.
PS1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
left side of an expression.
PS1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1
to 99999999).
PS1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets ()) in a custom macro statement.
PS1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([] in a custom macro statement.
PS1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
PS1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
PS1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
PS1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro
ERROR is in error.
PS1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a
NAME character that cannot be used in a variable name.
PS1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters (31 characters when the custom
macro variable name expansion function is enabled).
PS1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT
FORMAT ERROR statement is in error.
Diagnosis data
Diagnosis 1493 Number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros
[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Block
The number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros per
1024 ms is displayed.
This data provides an indication of the actual macro statement processing speed.
13.6.2 Indirect Axis Address Command
Overview
When the custom macro function is enabled, indirect specification by an axis number can be performed
by using AX[(axis-number)] instead of directly specifying an axis name during specification for an axis
address.
In addition, the axis number corresponding to the axis name can be obtained by using
AXNUM[(axis-name)].
- 1919 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Explanation
- Indirect axis address
Indirect axis address AX[] can be used to perform a command for an axis with an axis number (AX[]
must be followed by “=”).
AX[(axis-number)]=(value);
(axis-number) :1 to number-of-control-axis (Number of each path for a multipath system)
(value) :Value for the axis specified by its axis number
When the specified (axis-number) is invalid, the alarm PS0331, "ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[]"
occurs. A decimal fraction is rounded off to the integral axis number.
A variable such as a local variable, common variable, or system variable can also be used as
(axis-number). When calculation using a variable name is performed for (axis-number), however, the
variable name must be enclosed with [].
1. AX[1]=100.0;
A value of 100.000 is specified for the first axis.
2. AX[#500]=200.0;
A value of 200.000 is specified for the axis having the value stored in #500 as its
axis number.
3. AX[#500+1]=300.0;
A value of 300.000 is specified for the axis having the value stored in #500 plus
1 as its axis number.
4. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC]=400.0;
A value of 400.000 is specified for the axis having the value stored in
#ABC(#500) as its axis number.
5. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[[#ABC]+1]=500.0;
A value of 500.000 is specified for the axis having the value stored in
#ABC(#500) plus 1 as its axis number.
6. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC+1]=500.0;
The alarm PS0114 occurs.
- AXNUM function
AXNUM[] can be used to obtain an axis number.
AXNUM[(axis-name)];
If the specified (axis-name) is invalid, the alarm PS0332, "ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN AXNUM[]"
occurs.
When the number of control axes is three and the first axis name is "X", the second
axis name is "Y", and the third axis name is "Z"
1. #500=AXNUM[X];
A value of 1 is stored in #500.
2. #501=AXNUM[Y];
A value of 2 is stored in #501.
- 1920 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
3. #502=AXNUM[Z];
A value of 3is stored in #502.
4. #503=AXNUM[A];
The alarm PS0332 occurs.
Example
Example where the first axis name is "X", the second axis name is "Y", and the third axis name is "Z1"
N10 SETVN 500[AXIS1,AXIS2,AXIS3] ;
N20 [#AXIS1]=AXNUM[X] ;
N30 [#AXIS2]=AXNUM[Y] ;
N40 [#AXIS3]=AXNUM[Z1] ;
N50 G92 AX[#AXIS1]=0 AX[#AXIS2]=0 AX[#AXIS3]=0 ;
N60 G01F1000. ;
N70 AX[#AXIS1]=100.0 AX[#AXIS2]=100.0 AX[#AXIS3]=100.0 ;
N80 G02 AX[#AXIS1]=200. 0 AX[#AXIS1]=200.0 R50.0 ;
N90 M02;
Limitation
When the custom macro function is enabled, "AX" and "AXN" cannot be used as extended axis names
and are assumed as AX[] and AXNUM[], respectively.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0331 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[] An illegal value is specified for an AX[] axis number.
PS0332 ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN An illegal value is specified for an AXNUM[] axis address.
AXNUM[]
13.6.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro
Overview
When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal UINT
<Gn053.3> from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function.
Explanation
Program an interrupt command in the following format:
M96 Pxxxx; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of
an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which
vary from time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external
signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the
cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
:
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro
function.
- 1921 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
M96 Pxxxx;
Interrupt signal
UINT O xxxx;
Interrupt signal
UINT*
M99 (Pyyyy);
Nyyyy;
M97 ; Interrupt signal
UINT*
Fig. 13.6.3 (a) Interruption type custom macro function
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an
interrupt signal UINT input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx.
Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 13.6.3 (a)) issued after M97 is ignored.
Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.
Signal
Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT<Gn053.3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory.
During execution, a program in automatic operation is suspended.
To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function must be specified
in a command program for automatic operation. In addition, automatic operation must
already be started to accept this signal. The particular miscellaneous function code is set
by parameter Nos. 6003, 6033 and 6034.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 UINT
Parameter
- Various Setting for Custom Macro
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MUS MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#1 MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt
0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
- 1922 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt
0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)
#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT
0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method
#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code
0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters Nos. 6033 and 6034
#5 MSB Interrupt program
0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)
#7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macro
0: Not used
1: Used
- Setting M code that makes interruption effective and ineffective
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 03 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters can be used when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is 1. M96 is used
as a valid M code and M97 is used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of
the state of this parameter.
Note
NOTE
1 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during multiple repetitive canned
cycle execution.
2 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during return operation in dry run
after search operation when the program is restarted.
- 1923 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
3 The alarm PS1101 is issued in the following cases:
<1> Case where an interrupt is made in the programmable mirror image
(G51.1) mode and G51.1 is further specified in the interrupted program
<2> Case where an interrupt is made in the coordinate system rotation (G68)
mode and G68 is further specified in the interrupted program
<3> Case where an interrupt is made in the scaling (G51) mode and G51 is
further specified in the interrupted program
4 During program execution in cycle operation, interrupt type II is used, regardless
of the setting of bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003. Cycle operation has the
following functions:
<1> Automatic reference position return
<2> Cutter or tool nose radius compensation (when multiple blocks are
generated from one specified block as in a case where an acute turn is
made on the outside)
<3> Canned cycle
<4> Automatic tool length measurement
<5> Optional chamfering corner R
<6> Normal direction control
<7> Cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Interrupt-type custom macro
13.6.4 Embedded Macro
Overview
This function protects a program created by a machine tool builder, by storing the program in a folder
dedicated to embedded macros (hereinafter referred to as an MTB1 folder) and assigning an attribute to
the folder.
At the same time, the following functions are available:
(1) A dedicated program memory capacity of 100K bytes (corresponding to about 260 m) is provided in
addition the ordinary program memory capacity.
The number of registerable programs remains unchanged from the ordinary number of registerable
programs.
(2) To the MTB1 folder, an attribute such as edit prohibition and edit/display prohibition can be
assigned. Moreover, by using a dedicated password and keyword, a set value can be locked.
(3) A program stored in the MTB1 folder can be used by calling based on a code such as M/T codes,
macro calling based on a G code, macro calling based on G65/G66, and subprogram calling based
on an M code such as M98.
(4) Custom macro common variables (#200 to #499) are added.
- 1924 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 To use this function, enable the "Custom macro" (bit 5 (NMC) of parameter
No.8135 is 0).
Detailed explanation
(1) Program memory capacity
A dedicated program memory capacity of 100K bytes (corresponding to about 260 m) is provided in
addition the ordinary program memory capacity.
The dedicated program memory capacity is managed separately from the ordinary program memory
capacity. Program memory capacity information (used pages and free pages) is displayed as
described below.
- When the MTB1 folder is displayed
Embedded macro program memory capacity
- When another folder is displayed
Ordinary program memory capacity
Fig. 13.6.4 (a) Program memory capacity
- 1925 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
(2) Number of registerable programs
Ordinary programs and dedicated programs can be registered as long as the total number of those
programs does not exceed the number of registerable programs.
(3) Program protection function
One of two attributes can be assigned to the MTB1 folder.
1) Edit prohibition
Editing of the programs in the folder is prohibited.
- The contents of programs cannot be edited.
- No program name and program attribute can be modified.
- No program can be deleted.
No new program can be created in the folder.
2) Edit/display prohibition
The contents of programs in the folder cannot be edited.
No new program can be created in the folder.
The programs in the folder become invisible.
No program in the folder can be output to an external device.
By setting the edit prohibition attribute or edit/display prohibition attribute, the programs in the
folder can be protected from modification and deletion due to an operation error.
NOTE
Subfolders cannot be created in the MTB1 folder.
(4) Password and keyword
By setting a password in parameter No. 11311 and setting a keyword in parameter No. 11312, the
attribute setting of the MTB1 folder can be locked.
In the locked state, the attribute of the MTB1 folder cannot be changed. Thus, the protection of the
programs in the MTB1 folder cannot be canceled without setting the correct keyword.
- Locked state
The locked state means the state where the value of the password parameter No. 11311 and the
value of the keyword parameter No. 11312 differ from each other.
The values set in these parameters are not displayed.
- Unlocked state
The unlocked state means the state where the value of the password parameter No. 11311 and
the value of the keyword parameter No. 11312 match each other.
The values set in these parameters are not displayed.
- State where no key is set
When 0 is displayed in the password parameter No. 11311, no password is set yet.
NOTE
The attribute of the MTB1 folder can be changed only in the unlocked state.
(5) Calling
A program stored in the MTB1 folder can be used by calling based on a code such as M/T codes,
macro calling based on a G code, macro calling based on G65/G66, and subprogram calling based
on an M code such as M98.
For macro calling based on a G code, G codes used for calling are additionally set as indicated below.
Parameters are used to set the relationship between a G code used for macro calling and the number
of a called program. Up to ten sets can be set.
- 1926 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Example)
Suppose that the following (Table 13.6.4 (a)) are set by the parameters:
Table 13.6.4 (a)
First group Second group Third group
G code No.12020=100 No.12023=150 No.12026=900
Program number No.12021=8000 No.12024=7500 No.12027=8300
Number of G codes/programs No.12022=10 No.12025=5 No.12028=30
Then the G codes call the programs in the Table 13.6.4 (b):
Table 13.6.4 (b)
G code Called program
G100 to G109 O8000 to O8009
G150 to G154 O7500 to O7504
G900 to G929 O8300 to O8329
NOTE
When this function is enabled, the MTB1 folder is added to the top of the search
order as a program search folder for macro call and subprogram call.
(1) If a program to be called is registered in the MTB1 folder, the program in the
MTB1 folder is called.
(2) If a program to be called is not registered in the MTB1 folder, the program is
searched for according to parameter No. 3457.
(6) Macro variable
Common variables #200 to #499 are added.
These variables are independent variables on a path-by-path basis as with variables #100 to #199.
- When the power is turned off, the variables are initialized and the data becomes null.
- When bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 1, the custom macro outputs common
variables #100 to #199, #200 to #499, and #500 to #599.
- When bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 0, common variables #100 to #199 and #200
to #499 are cleared to null by a reset. When CCV is set to 1, these common variables are not
cleared by a reset.
NOTE
By specifying parameter No. 6036, variables can be made common to all paths.
If the option for the embedded macro function is specified but "Addition of
custom macro common variables" is disable (bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135
is 1), #150 to #199 are unusable. However, in this parameter, set a number
including #150 to #199.
Example of setting)
When 200 is set in parameter No. 6036:
#100 to #299: Common to all paths
#300 to #449: Used independently on a path-by-path basis
#150 to #199 can be used when "Addition of custom macro common
variables" is enabled (bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135 is 0).
- 1927 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Operation explanation
Procedure for creating programs in the MTB1 folder
(1) Creation
<1> Make the MTB1 folder empty.
Delete all programs and folders from the MTB1 folder.
<2> Create a program in the MTB1 folder.
A program can also be read through an external device.
<3> Set G code numbers for calling and program numbers to be called in parameters Nos. 12020 to
12049 as needed.
<4> Determine a password then specify it in parameter No. 11311.
Specify the same value as the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to unlock the key.
<5> Set the desired attribute of the MTB1 folder.
<6> Set a value other than the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to lock the key.
(2) Modification/addition
<1> Set the same value as the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to unlock the key.
<2> Cancel the attribute of the MTB1 folder.
<3> Modify a program in the MTB1 folder or add a program to the MTB1 folder.
<4> Set the desired attribute of the MTB1 folder.
<5> Set a value other than the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to lock the key.
(3) Copy (copy to another NC)
<1> Make the MTB1 folder empty.
Delete all programs and folders from the MTB1 folder.
<2> Read a program to the MTB1 folder through an external device.
<3> Set G code numbers for calling and program numbers to be called in parameters Nos. 12020 to
12049 as needed.
<4> Set a password in parameter No. 11311.
Set the same value as the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to unlock the key.
<5> Set the desired attribute of the MTB1 folder.
<6> Set a value other than the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to lock the key.
Setting of the attribute of the MTB1 folder
(1) Set the same value as the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to unlock the key.
(2) Set the EDIT mode to display the program list screen.
Operate the soft keys in the order shown Fig. 13.6.4 (b).
Sets/cancels the edit/display prohibition attribute.
Sets/cancels the edit prohibition attribute.
Fig. 13.6.4 (b)
- 1928 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
(3) Place the cursor on the MTB1 folder then press a desired attribute soft key.
Fig. 13.6.4 (c) Attribute setting
Display when the edit prohibition attribute is assigned
Fig. 13.6.4 (d) Edit prohibition attribute
- 1929 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Display when the edit/display prohibition attribute is assigned
Fig. 13.6.4 (e) Edit/display prohibition attribute
(4) Set a value other than the password in parameter No. 11312 (keyword) to lock the key.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3457 SCF SCC SYS MC1 MC2 LIB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
1 The parameters LIB, MC2, MC1, and SYS are used to set a search
folder for the following subprogram/macro calls:
- Subprogram call based on an M code
- Subprogram call based on a particular address
- Subprogram call based on a second auxiliary function code
- Macro call based on a G code
- Macro call based on an M code
- Macro call based on a T code
- One-touch macro call
2 The parameter SCF is used to set whether to add a search folder
for the following subprogram/macro calls:
- Subprogram call based on M98
- Figure copy based on G72.1/G72.2
- Macro call based on G65/G66/G66.1
- Macro interrupt based on M96
#0 LIB The common program directory "//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY/" of the initial
directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
- 1930 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#1 MC2 MTB dedicated directory 2 "//CNC_MEM/MTB2/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
#2 MC1 MTB dedicated directory 1 "//CNC_MEM/MTB1/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
#3 SYS The system directory "//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
NOTE
When multiple folders are specified, LIB, MC2, MC1, and SYS are
searched in this order.
#6 SCC The same folder as the main program is added to the top of the search order as a search
folder for the following each subprogram call and macro call.
- Subprogram call by M code
- Subprogram call by ASCII code
- Subprogram call by the second auxiliary function code
- Macro call by S code
- Macro call by T code
- Macro call by G code
- Macro call by M code
- One-touch macro call
The same folder as the main program is:
0: Not added in the search order.
1: Added in the search order.
When a search folder is added, a search is made in the following order:
0) Folder only for embedded macro (With the embedded macro-function.)
1) Folder where the main program is stored
2) Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
3) MTB-dedicated folder 2, which is an initial folder (MTB2)
4) MTB-dedicated folder 1, which is an initial folder (MTB1)
5) System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
The folders of 2) through 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the bits
0 (LIB), 1 (MC2), 2 (MC1), and 3 (SYS) of parameter No. 3457.
#7 SCF A search folder is:
0: Not added.
1: Added.
When a search folder is added, a search is made in the following order:
0) Folder only for embedded macro (With the embedded macro-function.)
1) Folder where the main program is stored
2) Common program folder, which is an initial folder (LIBRARY)
3) MTB-dedicated folder 2, which is an initial folder (MTB2)
4) MTB-dedicated folder 1, which is an initial folder (MTB1)
5) System folder, which is an initial folder (SYSTEM)
The folders of 3) through 5) can be excluded from search target folders by setting the bits
1 (MC2), 2 (MC1), and 3 (SYS) of parameter No. 3457.
- 1931 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV PV5
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:
0: #500 to #549 are output. (Note)
1: #100 to #149 and #500 to 549 are output. (Note)
NOTE
Output variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.
When the parameter PV5=0
Option “Addition of custom macro common variables”
Non Yes
Option Non #500 to #549 #500 to #999
“Embedded macro” Yes #500 to #549 #500 to #999
When the parameter PV5=1
Option “Addition of custom macro common variables”
Non Yes
#100 to #149 and #100 to #199 and
Non
Option #500 to #549 #500 to #999
“Embedded macro” #100 to #149, #200 to #499 #100 to #199, #200 to #499
Yes
and #500 to #549 and #500 to #999
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are:
0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
NOTE
Cleared variables are as the table according to the combination of
added options.
Option “Addition of custom macro common variables”
Non Yes
Non #100 to #149 #100 to #199
Option
#100 to #149 and #100 to #199 and
“Embedded macro” Yes
#200 to #499 #200 to #499
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499))
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 400
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 (up to #499 in a system with the embedded macro
option) may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of usable macro common
variables is not exceeded.
- 1932 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Example
When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #149: Used by each path independently
NOTE
1 To use up to #199, the option for adding custom macro common
variables is required.
2 To use up to #499, the embedded macro option is required.
3 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
4 When the option for embedded macro is effective and the option for
addition of custom macro common variables is not effective, #150
to #199 can not be used but this parameter should be set the
number which includes #150 to #199.
11311 Password for embedded macro
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word
[Valid date range] 0 to 99999999
The password to set the attribute of the folder for the embedded macro (MTB1 folder) is
set. When the values other than 0 are set to this parameter and the value is different from
the parameter No. 11312 of the key word, the attribute of the MTB1 folder is locked.
Thereafter, the attribute of the MTB1 folder is locked unless the same value as the
password is set to the key word. Moreover, the value of the password cannot be changed.
- When the key is open,
The attribute of the MTB1 folder can be changed.
- When it locks or the key is not set,
The attribute of the MTB1 folder can not be changed.
11312 Key word for embedded macro
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word
[Valid date range] 0 to 99999999
The key word in order to set the attribute of the folder for the embedded macro (MTB1
folder) is set.
NOTE
The value is not displayed even if the parameter is set. Moreover,
when the power is turned off, this parameter becomes 0.
12020 G code number for the embedded macro (first)
12023 G code number for the embedded macro (second)
12026 G code number for the embedded macro (third)
- 1933 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
12029 G code number for the embedded macro (fourth)
12032 G code number for the embedded macro (fifth)
12035 G code number for the embedded macro (sixth)
12038 G code number for the embedded macro (seventh)
12041 G code number for the embedded macro (eighth)
12044 G code number for the embedded macro (ninth)
12047 G code number for the embedded macro (tenth)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid date range] 1 to 999
12021 Macro program number for the embedded macro (first)
12024 Macro program number for the embedded macro (second)
12027 Macro program number for the embedded macro (third)
12030 Macro program number for the embedded macro (fourth)
12033 Macro program number for the embedded macro (fifth)
12036 Macro program number for the embedded macro (sixth)
12039 Macro program number for the embedded macro (seventh)
12042 Macro program number for the embedded macro (eighth)
12045 Macro program number for the embedded macro (ninth)
12048 Macro program number for the embedded macro (tenth)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid date range] 1 to 9999
12022 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (first)
12025 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (second)
12028 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (third)
12031 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (fourth)
12034 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (fifth)
12037 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (sixth)
- 1934 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
12040 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (seventh)
12043 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (eighth)
12046 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (ninth)
12049 Number of G code macro for embedded macro (tenth)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid date range] 1 to 255
The data of the macro call by G code added by the embedded macro is set. G code
number and the macro program number for it are set, and the number of G codes is set.
These sets can be set up to ten. If G code number duplicates, it gives priority from former
set. The set that the G code number or the macro program number or numbers is 0 is
invalid.
[Example] In case that the range of macro program number is 7000 to 8999:
First group Second group Third group
G code No. 12020=100 No. 12023=150 No. 12026=900
Program number No. 12021=8000 No. 12024=7500 No. 12027=8300
Number No. 12022=10 No. 12025=5 No. 12028=30
The following program is called by each G code.
G code Called program
G100 toG109 O8000 to O8009
G150 to G154 O7500 to O7504
G900 to G929 O8300 to O8329
NOTE
The parameter value is regarded as 0, when each parameter is set
a out of range value.
Note
NOTE
1 The programs in the folder dedicated to embedded macros (MTB1 folder) can
also be deleted by the following operations:
- SRAM initialization operation
- Clearing of program files with the IPL function
2 The programs in the MTB1 folder can be saved/restored in a batch by the
following operations:
- Saving/restoring of SRAM data in a batch with the BOOT function
- Saving/restoring with the automatic data backup function
(when programs are included as targets)
- Output to an external device/input from an external device
3 To the programs in the MTB1 folder, the following protection functions are
applied in addition to the protection of this function based on the folder attribute:
- Parameter-based protection function for programs with O numbers in the
eight thousands and nine thousands
- Protection function based on a key and program encryption
- Attribute setting for programs
- 1935 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
4 This function differs from the embedded macro function of the FS16/18/21i-B in
the following:
- Program storage method
- Program creation procedure
- Program protection mechanism, etc.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
EDITING PROGRAMS
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
- 1936 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING
13.7.1 Canned Cycle for Drilling
Overview
Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle for
drilling, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G code; without
canned cycles for drilling, normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned cycles
for drilling can shorten the program to save memory.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 4 (NCD) of parameter No.8137 to 0.
Explanation
A canned cycle for drilling consists of a sequence of six operations.
Operation 1 Positioning a hole position
Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 Hole machining
Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2 Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Rapid traverse
Operation 4 Cutting feed
Fig. 13.7.1 (a) Canned cycle for drilling operation sequence
- Spindle control
In some canned cycles for drilling, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be
output.
The following canned cycles for drilling require spindle control:
<Machining center system> <Lathe system>
Counter tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle G84
Fine boring cycle G76 Side tapping cycle G88
Tapping cycle G84
Boring cycle G86
Back boring cycle G87
Boring cycle G88
- 1937 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are used:
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
M03 CW spindle rotation
M04 CCW spindle rotation
M05 Spindle stop
M19 Spindle orientation (machining center system)
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one direction to the other (for example,
when M04 is output during M03 operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time
switching.
Timing charts are described in the following page:
- 1938 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
G74 (Counter tapping cycle)
X,Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M03 M05 M04 Next block
(Note) It is possible to not output M05 (G98 mode)
code by using parameter M5T MF MF MF MF
(No. 5105#3).
Next block
FIN FIN FIN FIN (G99 mode)
G76 (Fine boring cycle)
X,Y X or Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
(Note) Return to initial
(’ ) M03 M03
M05 M19 level in G98
Note) It is possible to not output M05 mode
code by using parameter M5B (No. MF MF MF MF
Next block
5101#7). (G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN FIN Next block
(G99 mode)
G84 (Tapping cycle)
X,Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M04 M05 M03 Next block
Note) It is possible to not output M05 (G98 mode)
code by using parameter M5T (No. MF MF MF MF
5105#3).
Next block
FIN FIN FIN FIN (G99 mode)
Fig. 13.7.1 (b) Canned cycle for machining center system (1/2)
- 1939 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
G86 (Boring cycle)
X,Y
Return to initial level in G98 mode
Z Z
M05 M03 M03
MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN Next block
(G99 mode)
G87 (Back boring cycle)
X or Y X or Y
X,Y X or Y X or Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M19 M03 M05 M19 M03
MF MF MF MF MF MF
FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN
(Note) It is possible to not output M05 code using
parameter M5B (No. 5101#7).
Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in
G98 mode.
G88 (Boring cycle)
X,Y
Manual feed Cycle start
Z Z
Z Z
Dwell
M05 M03
MF Return to initial level in G98 MF
mode or R point level in G99
mode.
FIN FIN
Fig. 13.7.1 (c) Canned cycle for machining center system (2/2)
- 1940 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
G84 (Face tapping cycle)
G88 (Side tapping cycle)
X,C
(Z,C)
Z Z(X)
(X) Z(X)
Z
Dwell (X)
Dwell
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2)
M05 M04 M05 M03 Next block
(Note 1) When parameter M5T (No. (G98 mode)
5105#3)=0, M05 is not output. MF MF MF MF
(Note 2) Another M code can be used by
parameter No. 5112 and 5113. Next block
FIN FIN FIN FIN (G99 mode)
Fig. 13.7.1 (d) Canned cycle for lathe system
- M code used for C-axis clamp/unclamp (T Series)
T
When an M code specified in parameter No. 5110 for C-axis clamp/unclamp is programmed, the CNC
issues the M code for C-axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid traverse
to the point-R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code C-axis clamp +1) for C-axis unclamp after
the tool retracts to the point-R level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.
- Tapping signal
During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal TAP <Fn001.5> is output. The tapping signal is also output
while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid.
- Override
During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.
- Feed hold
When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not stopped immediately but the
movement is stopped when the tool is returned to level R.
- Dry run
The bit 5 (TDR) of parameter No. 1401 specifies whether dry run is valid during tapping.
- Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (M Series)
M
In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2
<Fn066.5> is output when positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis is started after positioning
at a specified hole position is performed with G83 specified. This signal is not output if another canned
cycle is specified or this mode is canceled by G80, a reset, or an emergency stop.
- Overload torque detection signal (M Series)
M
For the overload torque detection signal in the small-hole peck drilling cycle, a skip signal SKIP#1
<X004.7>, SKIP#2 <X013.7>, or SKIP#3 <X011.7> is used. The skip signal is valid (a retract operation is
performed) only when the tool on the drilling direction axis is located between point R and point Z and
the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.
- 1941 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Signal
Tapping signal TAP<Fn001.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
[Output cond.] The signal is set to “1” when:
- The system is in tapping cycle mode.
(G74,G84 : for M series)
(G84,G88 : for T series)
- The system is in tapping mode.
(G63 : for M series)
The signal is set to “0” when:
- The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.
- A reset or emergency stop is specified.
Overload torque detection signal SKIP#1<X004.7>, SKIP#2<X013.7>, SKIP#3<X011.7>
M
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Refracts the tool on which an overload torque is imposed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the control unit performs the following operation:
- When an overload torque is imposed, the tool is retracted to point R then machining
is repeated after changing the spindle speed and cutting feedrate.
- This signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the
drilling axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward
or performing a cutting operation.
NOTE
This signal is used also as a skip signal.
Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2<Fn066.5>
M
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts whether the small-hole peck drilling cycle is being executed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” for the following period:
- Period from the start time of positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis after
positioning at a hole position is performed with G83 specified in this cycle mode
until another canned cycle, which may be G80, or a G code of group 01 is specified
or until this mode is canceled by a reset or emergency stop.
- This signal is not set to “1” in a state other than the above.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1
X004 SKIP
#3
X011 SKIP
#2
X013 SKIP
Fn001 TAP
Fn066 PECK2
- 1942 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 FCV Program format
0: Series 0 standard format
1: Series 10/11 format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used
for operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98
2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series)
3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle
G71 to G76 (T series) / G71.7 to G71.6 (M series)
5 Drilling canned cycle
G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) / G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89 (M
series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 TDR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 TSO
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:
0: Disabled (tied to 100%).
1: Enabled.
NOTE
During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.
- 1943 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTR EXC FXY
5101
M5B EXC FXY
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle
is:
0: Z-axis at all times.
1: Axis selected by the program
NOTE
In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format.
#1 EXC G81
0: Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1: Specifies an external operation command
#2 RTR G83 and G87
0: Specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle
1: Specify a peck drilling cycle
#7 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:
0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RDI RAB F16
5102
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 F16 When the Series 10/11 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1), a
canned drilling cycle is specified using :
0: Series 10/11 format
1: Series 0 format. However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.
#6 RAB When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
specifies:
0: Increment command.
1: Absolute command with G code system A. With G code system B or C, G90 and
G91 are followed.
#7 RDI When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
is based on:
0: Radius specification.
1: Diameter/radius specification of the drilling axis.
- 1944 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TCZ PNA DCY
5103
TCZ DCY SIJ
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SIJ When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001
set to 1), a tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by:
0: Address Q. Set a tool retraction direction in parameter No. 5148.
1: Address I, J, or K.
#2 DCY When an axis (to be used as a drilling axis) perpendicular to the positioning plane is
specified in a drilling canned cycle:
0: The specified axis is used as a drilling axis.
1: The axis specified in the block where the G code for the drilling canned cycle is
specified is used as a drilling axis. The specified axis is used as a positioning axis.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is
set to 1.
#3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 10/11 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter
No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no
axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode:
0: An alarm is issued.
1: No alarm is issued.
#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), an accumulated zero check in the tapping
step (forward, backward) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Execute a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping) with the servo feed forward (bit 1
(FEED) of parameter No. 2005). If an impact is detected, set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K0D M5T SBC
5105
M5T SBC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G88 with the
T series, or G84/G74 with the M series):
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03.
- 1945 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89):
0: Drilling operation is not performed, but drilling data only is stored.
1: One drilling operation is performed.
M code for C-axis clamping in canned cycles for drilling
5110
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999998
This parameter sets the M code for C-axis clamping in canned cycles for drilling.
NOTE
When bit 4 (CME) of parameter No. 5161 is 1, the M code for
C-axis clamping for the first pair is assumed.
Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle
5111
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
10 1 0.1 msec
(The increment system does not depend on whether inch input or metric input is used.)
This parameter sets the dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in a drilling
canned cycle.
Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle
5112
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the spindle forward-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.
NOTE
M03 is output when 0 is set.
Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle
5113
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the spindle reverse-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.
NOTE
M04 is output when 0 is set.
- 1946 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
5114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle.
G73 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the bit 2 (RTR) of parameter No. 5101 is set to 0)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
5115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.
G83 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the bit 2 (RTR) of parameter No. 5101 is set to 1)
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
5148
Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] -24 to 24
- 1947 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spindle orientation in a
fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For each boring axis, an axis and direction for tool
retraction after orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number.
[Example] Suppose that:
When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -Y.
When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is +Z.
When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -X.
Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes are the X-axis,
Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively):
Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.)
Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction direction is +Z.)
Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction is -X.)
Set 0 for other axes.
5149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85/G89)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 2000
This parameter sets an override value for the feedrate of retraction in a boring cycle. The
cutting feedrate override signal and the second feedrate override signal are valid,
regardless of the setting of this parameter. The setting of this parameter is valid even
when the override cancel signal is set to “1”.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the following operation is performed:
For the T series
Operation performed when 200 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is two
times greater than the cutting feedrate.)
For the M series
Operation performed when 100 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is the
cutting feedrate.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CYM
5160
TSG CYM NOL OLS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque detection signal
is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
- 1948 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block specifying other commands in the canned
cycle mode:
0: No alarm is issued. (When a command of address P is specified, the command is
handled as both a command specifying a dwell time and a command specifying a
subprogram number in a canned cycle.)
1: An alarm is issued.
#4 TSG The overload torque detection signal for a small-hole peck drilling cycle:
0: Depends on the parameter settings for the skip function.
1: Does not depend on the parameter settings for the skip function.
When this parameter is set to 1, the X address can be used for the overload torque signal
even with the skip signal setting disabled. Even when the overload torque detection signal
does not depend on the skip function parameter settings, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1
(SK0) of parameter No. 6200 remain valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5162
RCK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 RCK When the command which relates to the reference position return such as G28 is
commanded during the canned cycle for drilling:
0: Alarm PS0044 is not detected, and execute the program command.
1: Alarm PS0044 is detected.
5163
M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small
diameter.
5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload
torque detection signal is received
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted because the overload torque detection signal is
received.
S2 = S1 × d1 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d1 as a percentage.
- 1949 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing when no overload
torque detection signal is received
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted without the overload torque detection signal
received.
S2 = S1 × d2 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d2 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
5166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque
detection signal is received
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances because the overload torque detection
signal is received.
F2 = F1 × b1 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b1 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting when no overload
torque detection signal is received
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances without the overload torque detection
signal received.
F2 = F1 × b2 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
- 1950 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b2 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5168
Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 255
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed
repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F × b3 ÷ 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
Set b3 as a percentage.
5170
Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions during cutting
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting. The total number cannot be
output to common variables #500 to #599.
5171 Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions because of the
reception of an overload torque detection signal
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 100 to 149
This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted after the overload torque detection signal is
received during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500 to
#599.
5172
Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified.
- 1951 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
5173
Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is specified
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a
previously machined hole when no address I is specified.
5174
Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8137 NCD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#4 NCD Canned cycle for drilling is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED The command which relates to the reference position return is
CYC commanded in canned cycle mode for drilling. Modify the
program.
PS0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND In a high-speed peck drilling cycle or peck drilling cycle, the
(G73/G83) amount of each-time cutting is not specified. Modify the
program.
PS0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
Modify the program.
- 1952 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Diagnosis data
520 Total number of retract operations during cutting after G83 is specified
Total number of retract operations based on reception of the overload torque detection signal during
521
cutting after G83 is specified
NOTE
The total number of retract operations output to Nos. 520 and 521
is cleared to zero by the G83 command after the small-hole peck
drilling cycle mode is set.
522 Coordinate on the drilling axis where a retract operation was started (least input increment)
Difference between the coordinate on the drilling axis where the previous retract operation was started
523 and the coordinate on the drilling axis where the current retract operation was started (least input
increment: previous value - current value)
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Canned cycle for drilling
- 1953 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)
Overview
The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape
describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 3 (NMR) of parameter No.8137 to 0.
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A' to B is given by a program as in the figure below, the specified area is
removed by Δd (depth of cut), with finishing allowance Δu/2 and Δw left.
(R) C
B
A
(R) △d
(F)
45° e Δd : Depth of cut (radius designation)
(F) Designate without sign. The cutting direction
depends on the direction AA'. This
designation is modal and is not changed until
the other value is designated. Also this value
can be specified by the parameter (No.
5132), and the parameter is changed by the
program command.
Finishing shape e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed
△u/2 until the other value is designated. Also this
A' value can be specified by the parameter (No.
+X 5133), and the parameter is changed by the
program command.
(F) : Cutting feed ns : Sequence number of the first block for the
+Z △W program of finishing shape.
(R) : Rapid traverse
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the
program of finishing shape.
Δu : Distance and direction of finishing allowance
G71 U(Δd) R(e);
in X direction (diameter / radius
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F(f) S(s) T(t);
designation).
N(ns). . . .
........ Δw : Distance and direction of finishing allowance
F_ The move command of a finished shape in Z direction.
S_ of A to A' to B is specified in the blocks f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks
T_ from sequence number ns to nf. ns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and the F, S,
N(nf) . . . . ; or T function in this G71 block is effective.
Signal
Chamfering signal *CDZ<Gn053.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle (G92 (T series), G76 (T series), or G76.7 (M
series)). Specify the chamfering distance in parameter No. 5130.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
- 1954 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Approx. Approx.
45° 45°
r r
Fig. 13.8 (a) Straight threading and taper threading
Set the chamfering distance r to the parameter No. 5130. When the multiple repetitive
canned cycle is enabled (bit 3 (NMR) of parameter No.8137 is 0), the chamfering
distance can be specified in G76 or G76.7.
The chamfering angle is made smaller than 45° by the remaining pulses in the automatic
acceleration/ deceleration circuit and servo system. In addition, the angle can be changed
to other than 45° by setting an angle for parameter No. 5131.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 *CDZ
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 FCV Program format
0: Series 16 standard format
1: Series 10/11 program format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used
for operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98
2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series)
3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle
G71 to G76 (T series) / G71.7 to G71.6 (M series)
5 Drilling canned cycle
G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series) / G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89 (M
series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 RTV ROC
[Input type] Parameter input
- 1955 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
[Data type] Bit path
#4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 (T series), G76 (T series), and G76.7 (M series), rapid
traverse override for retraction after threading is finished is:
0: Effective
1: Not effective (Override of 100%)
#7 RTV Rapid traverse override while the tool is retracting in threading
0: Rapid traverse override is effective.
1: Rapid traverse override is not effective.
Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92 or G76
1466
Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G76.7
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
When threading cycle G92, G76 or G76.7 is specified, retraction is performed after
threading. Set a feedrate for this retraction.
WARNING
When the manual handle interruption is valid, set the same value
as the parameter No.1430 to the parameter No.1466.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0 or bit 1 (CFR) of parameter No.
1611 is set to 1, the rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1420
is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 THLx CTBx CTLx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#1 CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
- 1956 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#5 THLx Acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
As the time constant and FL rate, however, the settings of parameters Nos. 1626 and
1627 for threading cycles are used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1611 CFR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 (T series), G76 (T series), and
G76.7 (M series):
0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used
together with the threading time constant (parameter No. 1626) and FL rate
(parameter No. 1627).
1: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse is used
together with the rapid traverse time constant.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, a check is made before a retraction to
see that the specified feedrate has become 0 (the delay in
acceleration/deceleration has become 0). For retraction, the rapid
traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used, regardless of the
setting of parameter No. 1466. When this parameter is set to 0,
parameter No. 1466 is used as the feedrate for retraction. As
acceleration/deceleration used for retraction, only
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and optimum torque
acceleration/deceleration are disabled.
1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 (T series), G76 (T series), and G76.7 (M series) for each axis.
1627 FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
- 1957 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set an FL rate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles G92
(T series), G76 (T series), and G76.7 (M series) for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in
a special case. The FL rate is valid only for exponential acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5102 QSR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 (T series), G70.7 (M series) to G73 (T
series), G73.7 (M series)) is started, a check to see if the program contains a block that
has the sequence number specified in address Q is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
When 1 is set in this parameter and the sequence number specified in address Q is not
found, the alarm PS0063 is issued and the canned cycle is not executed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5104 FCK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 (T series), G71.7 (M series), G72 (T series),
G72.7 (M series)), the machining profile is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
The target figure specified by G71, G71.7, G72, or G72.7 is checked for the following
before machining operation:
- If the start point of the canned cycle is less than the maximum value of the
machining profile even when the plus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the
alarm PS0322 is issued.
- If the start point of the canned cycle is greater than the minimum value of the
machining profile even when the minus sign is specified for a finishing allowance,
the alarm PS0322 is issued.
- If an unmonotonous command of type I is specified for the axis in the cutting
direction, the alarm PS0064 or PS0329 is issued.
- If an unmonotonous command is specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the
alarm PS0064 or PS0329 is issued.
- If the program does not include a block that has a sequence number specified by
address Q, the alarm PS0063 is issued. This check is made, regardless of bit 2 (QSR)
of parameter No. 5102.
- If a command (G41/G42) on the blank side in tool nose radius compensation is
inadequate, the alarm PS0328 is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5105 RF2 RF1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 1958 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 (T series), G71.7 (M series), G72 (T series),
G72.7 (M series)) of type I, roughing is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
setting of this parameter.
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 (T series), G71.7 (M series), G72 (T series),
G72.7 (M series)) of type II, roughing is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NT2 NT1
5106
NT2 NT1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 NT1 In the multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72/G73 (G-code system A), when the tool nose
radius compensation G40/G41/G42 is commanded in the target figure program:
0: The alarm PS0325 is occurred.
1: No alarm is occurred. However, the tool nose radius compensation command in the
target figure program is ignored.
#3 NT2 In the multiple repetitive cycle G70 (G-code system A), when the tool nose radius
compensation G40/G41/G42 is commanded in the target figure program:
0: The alarm PS0325 is occurred.
1: No alarm is occurred. The tool nose radius compensation command is valid.
- 1959 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Make the program by following ways to enable the tool nose radius
compensation in the finishing cycle G70 by commanded the tool
nose radius compensation in the target figure program.
- The tool nose radius compensation cancel G40 is selected as
the modal when the finishing cycle G70 is commanded.
- It is necessary to specify G41 or G42 excluding the end block in
the target figure program (the block specified with address Q).
- Command G40 at the last block of the target figure program
(commanded by Q address).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OCM ASC ASU
5107
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 ASU For G70/G72 (G-code system A) , movement to the last turning start position is
performed by:
0: Cutting feed.
1: Rapid traverse.
For two-cycle operation to move toward the current turning start position, this parameter
selects the feed in the first cycle (movement to the last turning start position). The feed in
the second cycle (movement from the last turning start position to the current turning start
position) follows the feed in the first block of the shape program.
This parameter is valid to both of type-I and type-II commands.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#1 ASC The G70/G72 (G-code system A) TYPE1 commands execute the movement toward the
current turning start position in:
0: Two cycles.
1: One cycle.
You can change the two-cycle operation to move to the current turning start position from
two cycles to one cycle. The feed mode follows the mode (G00, G01) in the first block of
the shape program. This parameter is valid only to type-I commands.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#2 OCM In G70-G73 (G-code system A), the cycle operation is executed by :
0: Conventional method.
1: Improved method.
- 1960 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NIC NSP DTP R16
5108
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 R16 In the cutting up movement of the multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72 (G-code system A)
of typeⅡ, if there is the block that commands just the movement of the first axis on the
plane in the finishing shape:
0: The cutting up movement is executed before the cutting of the first axis on the plane.
1: The cutting up movement is not executed and the cutting is continued along the
finishing shape of the first axis on the plane.
#1 DTP In the multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72 (G-code system A) of type I, after rough cutting
of the finishing shape program is finished, the tool return to the cycle start point:
0: After the tool moves to (cycle start point + distance of the finishing allowance) in
order X-axis, Z-axis.
1: Directly from the end point of the finishing program.
#3 NSP In the multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72 (G-code system A) of type II, the cutting is
executed:
0: By conventional path. (The same cutting path might be executed.)
1: Not to repeat the same cutting path.
#5 NIC In Multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72 (G-code system A), in-position check between
cutting blocks is:
0: Executed.
1: Not executed.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TAE CCI DSA
5109
TAE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 DSA When an axis, which is not included in the specified plane, is commanded in the multiple
repetitive cycle(G70-G76 (T series)) :
0: An alarm does not occur.
1: An alarm PS0021,"ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT" occurs.
- 1961 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#1 CCI In the canned cycle for turning(G90,G92,G94) (T series), the address of the taper
amount :
0: Is dependent on the setting of bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001.
1: Can be specified with I,J,K and R.
The address for the taper amount is dependent on the setting of the parameter of the table
below.
Bit 1 (FCV) of Bit 1 (CCI) of parameter
Address for the taper amount
parameter No.0001 No.5109
0 0 R
1 0 I,J,K
0 1 I,J,K and R
1 1 I,J,K and R
#2 TAE When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001
set to 1),
address E of threading is :
0: Inch threading (The number of threads per inch).
1: Thread lead.
NOTE
1 This parameter setting is valid when bit 1 (FCV) of parameter
No.0001 is set to 1.
2 This parameter setting is available for the following G codes.
G code G code In the lathe system
in the Machining Function
system A B C
G33 G32 G33 G33 Threading
G34 G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading
G35 G35 G35 G35 Circular threading CW
G36 G36 G36 G36 Circular threading CCW
G76.7 G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle
- G92 G78 G21 Threading cycle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRS
5125
PRS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 PRS In Pattern repeating cycle G73 (G-code system A), the stop position of single block
operation are:
0: The end point of each cycles and the end point of each blocks in the finishing shape.
1: The end point of each cycles and the end point of escape from the cycle start point.
(FS16i compatible specification)
- 1962 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76
5130
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] 0.1
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the thread cutting cycle
(G76/G76.7) of a multiple repetitive canned cycle and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of
a canned cycle.
Let L b a lead. Then, a cutting value range from 0.1L to 12.7L is allowed.
To specify a cutting value of 10.0L, for example, specify 100 in this parameter.
Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76
5131
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 1 to 89
This parameter sets a thread cutting angle in a thread cutting cycle (G92/G76/G76.7).
When 0 is set, an angle of 45 degrees is specified.
Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5132
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 or
G71.7 and G72.7.
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5133
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 or G71.7
and G72.7.
- 1963 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Clearance value in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5134
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a clearance value up to the cutting feed start point in multiple
repetitive canned cycles (G71/G72 or G71.7/G72.7).
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (second axis on the plane)
5135
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a retraction distance along the second axis on the plane in the
multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 or G73.7. This parameter is not used with the Series
10/11 program format.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (first axis on the plane)
5136
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a retraction distance along the first axis on the plane in the multiple
repetitive canned cycle G73 or G73.7. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11
program format.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
- 1964 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
5137
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Cycle
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
or G73.7.
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
Return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75
5139
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75 or G74.7
and G75.7.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
5140
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets a minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
or G76.7 so that the depth of cut does not become too small when the depth of cut is
constant.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
5141
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
- 1965 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 or
G76.7.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
5142
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Cycle
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
This parameter sets the number of final finishing cycle repeats in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76 or G76.7.
When 0 is set, only one final finishing cycle is executed.
Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
5143
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 or G76.7.
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5145
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real path
[Unit of data]
mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range]
0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
If a monotonous command of type I or II is not specified for the axis in the roughing
direction, the alarm PS0064 or PS0329 is issued. When a program is created
automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned
allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 or G71.7
and G72.7 cycles can be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure.
[Example] Suppose that a G71 or G71.7 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is
minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case,
when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the plus direction along the
Z-axis is specified in a target figure program, roughing can be performed according to the
programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.
- 1966 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 or G71.7 and G72.7 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is
checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a
path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of
parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71, G72,
G71.7, or G72.7 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool
nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.
Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72
5146
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real path
[Unit of data]
mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range]
0 to cut of depth
If a monotonous command of type I is not specified for the axis in the cutting direction,
the alarm PS0064 or PS0329 is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very
small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such
an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 or G71.7 and G72.7 cycles can be
executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure.
The allowable value is clamped to the depth of cut specified by a multiple repetitive
canned cycle.
[Example] Suppose that a G71 or G71.7 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is
minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a case,
when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the minus direction along the
X-axis is specified in a target figure program for moving from the bottom of cutting to the
end point, roughing can be performed according to the programmed figure without an
alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.
NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 or G71.7 and G72.7 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is
checked. When tool nose radius compensation is performed, a
path after compensation is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of
parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a check is made before G71, G72,
G71.7, or G72.7 cycle operation. In this case, not a path after tool
nose radius compensation but a programmed path is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NMR
8137
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 1967 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#3 NMR Multiple repetitive canned cycle is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0061 P OR Q COMMAND IS NOT IN THE Address P or Q is not specified in multiple repetitive cycle
MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command.
BLOCK
PS0062 THE CUTTING AMOUNT IS A zero or a negative value was specified in a multiple
ILLEGAL IN THE ROUGH CUTTING repetitive canned rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72) as the
CYCLE depth of cut.
PS0063 THE BLOCK OF A SPECIFIED The sequence number specified by addresses P and Q in
SEQUENCE NUMBER IS NOT multiple repetitive cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command
FOUND cannot be searched.
PS0064 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(FIRST rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command for the first
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
PS0065 G00/G01 IS NOT IN THE FIRST In the first block of the shape program specified by P of the
BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73),
G00 or G01 was not specified.
PS0066 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN An unavailable command was found in a multiple repetitive
THE MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command block.
BLOCK
PS0067 THE MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73)
IS NOT IN THE PART PROGRAM command is not registered in a tape memory area.
STORAGE
PS0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle
PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or
COMMAND corner R in the last block is terminated in the middle.
PS0315 ILLEGAL NOSE ANGLE COMMAND An invalid tool tip angle is specified in a multiple repetitive
IS IN THE THREAD CUTTING canned threading cycle (G76).
CYCLE
PS0316 ILLEGAL CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN A minimum depth of cut higher than the thread height is
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE specified in a multiple repetitive canned threading cycle (G76).
PS0317 ILLEGAL THREAD COMMAND IS IN A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE canned threading cycle (G76) as the thread height or the
depth of cut.
PS0318 ILLEGAL RELIEF AMOUNT IS IN Although an escape directions is set in a multiple repetitive
THE DRILLING CYCLE canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a negative value is
specified for ∆d.
PS0319 THE END POINT COMMAND IS Although the ∆i or ∆k travel distance is set to 0 in a multiple
ILLEGAL IN THE DRILLING CYCLE repetitive canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a value other
than 0 us specified for a U or W.
PS0320 ILLEGAL MOVEMENT A negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive canned
AMOUNT/CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75) as ∆i or ∆k (travel distance/the
THE DRILLING CYCLE depth of cut).
PS0321 ILLEGAL REPEATED TIME IS IN A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
THE PATTERN REPEATING CYCLE canned closed loop cycle (G73) as a repeated time.
PS0322 FINISHING SHAPE WHICH OVER An invalid shape which is over the cycle starting point is
OF STARTING POINT specified in a shape program for a multiple repetitive canned
rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72).
- 1968 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Number Message Description
PS0323 THE FIRST BLOCK OF SHAPE Type II is specified in the first block of the shape program
PROGRAM IS A COMMAND OF specified by P in a multiple repetitive canned rough-cutting
TYPE II cycle (G71 or G72). Z (W) command is for G71.
X (U) command is for G72.
PS0324 THE INTERRUPTION TYPE MACRO An interruption type macro was issued during the multiple
WAS DONE IN THE MULTIPLE repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
REPETIVE CYCLES
PS0325 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN 1) An usable command was issued in a shape program for a
SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
2) In the multiple repetitive cycle (G70), when the tool nose
radius compensation can be commanded in the target
figure program (parameter NT2(No.5106#3)=1), G41 or
G42 is commanded at the target figure program other
than the first block.
PS0326 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle
PROGRAM IS A DIRECT DRAWING (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for direct input of
DIMENSIONS drawing dimensions in the last block is terminated in the
middle.
PS0327 MODAL THAT MULTIPLE A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73)
REPETIVE CYCLES CANNOT BE was commanded in a modal state in which a multiple
DONE repetitive canned cycle could not be commanded.
PS0328 ILLEGAL WORK POSITION IS IN The specification for the blank side for a tool nose radius
THE TOOL NOSE RADIUS compensation (G41 or G42) is incorrect in a multiple repetitive
COMPENSATION canned cycle (G71 or G72).
PS0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
PS0330 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned
THE TURNING CANNED CYCLE cycle(G90, G92, or G94).
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Cutting feed
OPERATOR’S MANUAL For Lathe Constant lead threading (G32)
System (B-64604EN-1) Multiple threading
Canned cycle
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
OPERATOR’S MANUAL For Machining Threading (G33)
Center System (B-64604EN-2) Multiple threading
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
- 1969 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M
SERIES)
M
Overview
Each time an external signal is input at the table swing end point, a workpiece is cut by a constant depth
of cut along a programmed figure on the specified Y-Z plane. This makes it possible to perform grinding
and cutting in a timely manner and facilitating the grinding of a workpiece with a profile.
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Grinding function A" and "Grinding
function B".
To use this function, the above option is required.
X=a •
C
•E
External
signal input (2)
(3)
A• α
• •
(1)B(4)
D
Y X=0
X Sensor placement
Z
For example, it is possible to machine a workpiece with a profile programmed with linear interpolation,
circular interpolation, and linear interpolation on the YZ plane, such as that shown in the figure above.
A sensor is placed at a X = 0 position so that the external signal is input when the sensor detects the
grinding wheel. When the program is started at point A, the machine is first placed in the state in which it
waits for the input of the external signal. Then, when the sensor detects the grinding wheel, the external
signal is input, and the machine makes a cut by the constant amount α along the programmed profile on
the specified YZ plane and moves to point B (operation (1)). The machine is then placed in the state in
which it waits for the input of the external signal again, and performs a grinding operation along the
X-axis. It grinds from point B to point C (operation (2)) and grinds back from point C to point B
(operation (3)). When the machine returns to point B, the sensor detects the grinding wheel again, and the
external signal is input, so that the machine makes a cut by the amount of α and moves to point D
(operation (4)). At point D, the machine performs a grinding operation along the X-axis.
Afterwards, each time the external signal is input, the machine makes a cut by the amount of α along the
profile program, so that the workpiece is machined to a profile such as that shown in the figure above.
Signal
In-feed control cut start signal INFD<Gn063.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Exercises in-feed control.
- 1970 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Operation] When this signal is set from 0 to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- A movement is made by a specified depth of cut along a program figure.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn063 INFD
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0230 R CODE NOT FOUND Cut depth R is not specified in the block including G161.
Alternatively, the value specified for R is negative.
Modify the program.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) In-feed control (for grinding machine)
(B-64604EN-2)
13.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
Overview
With the canned grinding cycle, repetitive machining operations that are specific to grinding and are
usually specified using several blocks can be specified using one block including a G function. So, a
program can be created simply. At the same time, the size of a program can be reduced, and the memory
can be used more efficiently. Four types of canned grinding cycles are available:
T
- Traverse grinding cycle
- Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle
- Oscillation grinding cycle
- Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle
M
- Plunge grinding cycle
- Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle
- Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle
- Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Grinding function A" and "Grinding
function B".
To use this function, the above option is required.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 FXY
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 1971 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle
is:
0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle:
Z-axis at all times.
In case of the Grinding canned cycle:
- For the Lathe system
Z-axis at all times.
- For the Machining Center system
G75,G77 command :Y-axis
G78,G79 command :Z-axis
1: Axis selected by the program
NOTE
In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 program format.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GFX
5106
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 GFX When the options of multiple respective canned cycle and grinding canned cycle are both
specified, G71/G72/G73/G74 commands are:
0: Multiple respective canned cycle.
1: Grinding canned cycle.
Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71)
5176
Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, an alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, the alarm PS0456 is also
issued.
- 1972 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72)
5177
Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle
(G77).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, an alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, the alarm PS0456 is also
issued.
Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73)
5178
Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, an alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, the alarm PS0456 is also
issued.
Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74)
5179
Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding
Cycle(G74).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).
- 1973 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, an alarm
PS0456 is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, the alarm PS0456 is also
issued.
5180
Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, an alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.
5181
Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G77)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding
cycle(G77).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, an alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.
5182
Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).
- 1974 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, an alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.
5183
Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, an alarm PS0456 is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the alarm
PS0456 is also issued.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The
address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The
address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
3) P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
4) <T series > The specified value of address P of G72 or G74 falls
outside the range. Address P ranges from 1 to 4 in the multistage
skip function. P1-4 was specified in G72 or G74 even though the
multistage skip function option is not present.
PS0455 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In grinding canned cycles:
GRINDING 1) <M series> The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not match.
2) <M series/T series > The amount of travel of the grinding axis is
not specified.
PS0456 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN Parameters related to grinding canned cycles are incorrectly set.
GRINDING Probable causes are given below.
1) <M series/T series> The axis number of the grinding axis is
incorrectly set (parameters Nos. 5176 to 5179).
2) <M series> The axis number of the dressing axis is incorrectly set
(parameters Nos. 5180 to 5183).
3) <M series/T series> The axis numbers of the cut axis, grinding
axis, and dressing axis (only for the M series) overlap.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
(B-64604EN-1)
- 1975 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
(B-64604EN-2)
13.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)
T
Overview
In a machine having double turrets comprising two facing turrets placed on the same control axis, a
machining program for facing turrets can be created using G codes as if it existed on the same coordinate
system for symmetric cutting by creating a mirror image relative to the X-axis.
G68 : Start double turret mirror image
G69 : Mirror image cancel
NOTE
This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be
used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series
(2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this
function can be used.
Explanation
A mirror image can be created using G codes relative to the X-axis of basic three axes set by parameter
No. 1022. When G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret, and the X-axis sign is
reversed from the programmed command. To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets in
a parameter No. 1290.
Example) Program for double turrets
X
Offset value of turret A
<3> Turret A
60
120
<1> Z
80φ 40φ
180
120φ
<2> 120
Offset value of turret B
Turret B
X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <1>
G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120mm), and turn mirror
image on.
X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at,<2>
- 1976 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A, and cancel mirror image.
X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <3>
* X axis is programmed diameter command.
Parameter
Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image
1290
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NVC
8137
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 NVC Balance cutting is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror
image of facing tool posts cannot be used. To use the mirror image
of facing tool posts, set this parameter to 1.
Note
NOTE
1 When the G68 command based on this function is enabled, the X-coordinate
value that can be read with the custom macro system variables #5041 and up or
#100101 and up (current specified position (in the workpiece coordinate system))
is a position with mirror image applied.
2 This function and the balance cut function cannot be used at the same time. If
the optional functions of both functions are specified, this function is enabled or
disabled depending on the system combination.
This function is enabled in:
- One path system
This function is disabled in:
- Two or more path system
- 1977 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe Mirror image for double turret
System) (B-64604EN-1)
13.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)
M
Overview
By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index
table of the machining center can be indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or clamped.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 3 (IXC) of parameter No.8132 to 1.
Explanation
- Basic Procedure
The control axis used for index table indexing is usually referred to as axis A, B, or C.
In the explanation below, the control axis used for index table indexing is axis B. If the axis name in the
actual machine is not B, the user should read axis B as referring to that axis name.
The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numeric following "B" in the program
command, which is an independent block. Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the
value after "B" is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command (Positioning angle 10 degrees)
G00G91B20.0; Incremental command (Move distance 20 degrees)
There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the index table position; the
difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the position control servo. The sequence of events and the
difference between the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them graphically.
(1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program.
(2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP <Fn061.0> to “1”. (Type B -- When BUCLP is
turned to " 1 ", the position control servo for the B axis is turned ON.)
(3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed, the B axis unclamp
completion signal *BEUCP <Gn038.6> turns to “0”.
(4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to “0”, to indicate it received the *BEUCP
signal.
(5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to 0, the PMC should turn *BEUCP to “1”.
In type A, B-axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to “0”, B-axis position control is made in
servo-on state, B-axis is rotated, and the B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always
moves at rapid traverse.
(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B-axis clamp signal BCLP <Fn061.1> to
“1”. In type A, signal BCLP is set to “1” and B-axis position control is made in servo-off state.
(7) When BCLP is turned to “1” on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped mechanically (with a clutch or
shot pin, for example). When the clamp is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
<Gn038.7> is turned to “0”.
(8) When *BECLP is turned to “0”, the CNC then turns BCLP to “0”, informing it received the
*BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to 0, the B axis position control servo is turned off.)
(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to “0”, *BECLP is turned to “1”.
This completes the sequence.
The time charts for these operations are shown in the Fig. 13.12 (a) and Fig. 13.12 (b).
- 1978 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command (independent)
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP
<Fn061.0>
B axis unclamp completion signal
*BEUCP <Gn038.6>
B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal BCLP <Fn061.1>
B axis clamp completion signal
*BECLP <Gn038.7>
Fig. 13.12 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command (independent)
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP
<Fn061.0>
B axis unclamp completion signal
*BEUCP <Gn038.6>
B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal BCLP <Fn061.1>
B axis clamp completion signal
*BECLP <Gn038.7>
Fig. 13.12 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)
The Fig. 13.12 (c) shows the timing chart for type-A manual reference position return of the B axis.
B axis manual feed selection signal
+Jα <Gn100>
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP
<Fn061.0>
B axis unclamp completion signal
*BEUCP <Gn038.6>
B axis rotation
B axis deceleration signal *DECα
<X009>
B axis return completion signal ZPα
<Fn094>
B axis clamp signal BCLP <Fn061.1>
B axis clamp completion signal
*BECLP <Gn038.7>
- 1979 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 13.12 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)
- Type A and Type B
As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the servo used for B-axis position
control is turned on or off at the different timing.
Type A is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with shot pins.
Type B is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with a clutch.
- Minimum indexing angle
The minimum index table indexing angle set in parameter No. 5512 is used. An integral multiple of a set
value can be specified as an indexing angle. If a value other than an integral multiple is specified, an
alarm PS1561 is issued.
- Indexing axis setting
Be sure to set a rotation axis (A type) as an index table indexing axis.
(Set bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1 and set bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No. 1006 to 0.)
Be sure to set a non roll-over invalidity axis as an index table indexing axis.
(Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 0.)
- Absolute/incremental programming
Setting bit 4 (G90) of parameter No .5500, specifies absolute programming, and override the G90/G91
G-codes.
- Indexing direction
If a value other than 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No. 5511),
movement in the negative direction is made only when a move command is specified together with the M
code. In this case, movement is performed in the negative direction, regardless of whether
absolute/incremental programming is used.
If 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No. 5511), the rotation
direction in G90 mode is determined by bit 3 (INC) of parameter No. 5500, as described below.
The rotation direction in G90 mode is
0: Not shortcut direction
1: Shortcut direction (The amount of movement is always less than 180 degrees.)
- Feedrate
The table is always rotated around the indexing axis in rapid traverse mode.
Dry run cannot be executed for the indexing axis.
- Reset
If a reset is performed in the clamp or unclamp completion wait state, the clamp or unclamp signal is
cleared, and the CNC exits from the completion wait state.
- Index table indexing function and other functions
Item Explanation
Relative position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 1 (REL) of parameter No. 5500.
Absolute position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No. 5500.
Single direction positioning (G60) Not specifiable
Skip function (G31) Not specifiable
Second auxiliary function Ensure that a second auxiliary function axis name does not duplicate an
indexing axis name.
Operation during index table Unless otherwise processed by the machine, feed hold, interlock, and
indexing axis movement emergency stop can be executed during index table indexing axis movement.
Machine lock can be executed after indexing has been completed.
- 1980 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Item Explanation
Servo-off signal Disable the servo-off signal for the index table indexing axis. That is, set bit 0
(FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 to 1. Usually, the index table indexing axis is in
the servo-off state.
Incremental command for the When incremental programming is used for index table indexing (when bit 4
index table indexing axis (G90) of parameter No. 5500 is set to 0), the workpiece origin offset of the
index table axis must always be 0. That is, there must always be a match
between the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of
an index table indexing axis.
Operation for an index table Operation in JOG/INC/HANDLE mode for an index table indexing axis is
indexing axis disabled. However, manual reference position return is possible. If the axis
selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return, the
movement stops immediately, and the clamp command is not executed.
NOTE
Setting for an index table indexing axis is set by parameter No. 5500 and over
described as "Parameter - Setting for positioning the index table" later.
Limitation
- Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block:
• When the command is to be executed with all axes:
Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.
• When axes for which the command is executed are to be selected:
Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 0. Next, set bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502 to 1 for
other controlled axes to be selected in the same block.
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block in a case other
than the above, alarm PS1564 is issued.
Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes (when G00, G28, or G30 (or G00 mode) is set)
SIM = 0 SIM = 1
Axis with IXS = 0 Alarm PS1564 The command is executed for all
Axis with IXS = 1 The command is executed. axes.
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block when a command
other than G00, G28, and G30 (or G00 mode) is specified, alarm PS1564 is issued.
- Command specifying zero move amount
When the amount of movement is 0, a clamp/unclamp operation is not performed.
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
In a block specifying an index table axis, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled.
- Functions that cannot be used at the same time
An axis used with any of the following functions is uncontrollable as an index table indexing axis:
- PMC axis control
- Pole position detection function
- 3-dimensional manual feed
- Tilted working plane indexing
- Cs contour control
- Polar coordinate interpolation
- Cylindrical Interpolation
- Spindle control with servo motor
- 1981 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- High precision oscillation function
- Polygon Turning
- Electronic Gear Box
The following function cannot be used for the index table indexing axis.
- Reference position setting with mechanical stopper
- Manual numeric command
- Real-time custom macro
- Retrace
- Program restart
NOTE
Functions that cannot be used at the same time might be changed or added by
adding new CNC function.
Caution
CAUTION
1 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that reset the CNC, such
as emergency stop signal *ESP <X008.4>, (external reset signal) ERS
<Gn008.7>, and reset & rewind signal RRW <Gn008.6>, are functional.
When reset is applied to the CNC, indexing stops. Further, if automatic operation
stop signal *SP <Gn008.5> turns to 0, axis movement is stopped and the
equipment enters the automatic operation stop state.
If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine, appropriate
processing is required on the machine.
2 If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return,
movement is stopped immediately, and the clamp command is not executed. If
this proves inconvenient, measures must be taken on the machine side so that,
after the axis selection signal is set to 1, it is not set to 0 until reference position
return is completed.
3 When an incremental command is used for indexing the index table, the
workpiece origin offset for the index table axis must always be 0. This means
that the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of the
index table axis must always match.
4 If a reset is made during indexing of the index table, a reference position return
must be made before the index table is indexed subsequently.
5 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but its address must be different
from that of the indexing axis.
6 For a path on which the index table indexing function is not to be used, disable
the index table indexing function (set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0).
Note
NOTE
For positioning on an index table indexing axis, the dry run signal DRN
<Gn046.7> has no effect.
Signal
B axis clamp signal BCLP <Fn061.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin.
- 1982 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP <Gn038.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP <Fn061.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP <Gn038.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn038 *BECLP *BEUCP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn061 BCLP BUCLP
Parameter
- Setting linear or rotation axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis.
#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
- 1983 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 1 Rotary axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008. (Bits 2 (ABS) and 1 (REL) of parameter No. 5500 are
used for an index table indexing axis.)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotary axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotary axis roll-over function and the index table
indexing function (M series)
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
- Setting for positioning the index table
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5500 IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DDP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command for the index table indexing
axis:
0: The conventional method is used.
1: The pocket calculator method is used.
#1 REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
#2 ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
- 1984 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
Be sure to set this parameter to 1.
If an absolute programming is commanded to the index table
indexing axis when this parameter is set to 0, the position display of
the absolute coordinate system may be not corresponding to the
absolute programming value like the following example.
Example) When indexing by rotating in a positive direction :
N10 G90 B20.;
N20 B10.; ← It rotates in a positive direction by 350 degree.
At this time, 370.0 is displayed to the position
display of the absolute coordinate system.
#3 INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction (parameter No. 5511) is
not set, rotation in the G90 mode is:
0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference.
1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference.
#4 G90 A command for the index table indexing axis is:
0: Assumed to be an absolute or incremental programming according to the mode.
1: Always assumed to be an absolute programming.
#6 SIM When the same block includes a command for the index table indexing axis and a
command for another controlled axis:
0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502 is followed.
1: The commands are executed.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm PS1564, “INDEX
TABLE AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME” is issued if the block is
neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
#7 IDX Operation sequence of the index table indexing axis:
0: Type A
1: Type B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5501 ISP ITI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 ITI The index table indexing function is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#1 ISP Servo-off for an index axis at the completion of clamping is:
0: Processed by the CNC.
1: Not processed by the CNC. (The CNC follows the status of the servo-off signal
<Gn0126> input from the PMC.)
- 1985 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5502 IXS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 IXSx When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for the index table
indexing axis:
0 : An alarm PS1564, “INDEX TABLE AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME” is
issued.
1 : The command is executed.
If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous operation with all axes
except the index table indexing axis can be performed regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set SIM to 0, and set this
parameter.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm PS1564, “INDEX
TABLE AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME” is issued if the block is
neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
- Setting of an index table indexing axis
5510 Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the number of a controlled axis to be used as the index table indexing
axis.
When 0 is set, the fourth axis is assumed.
If the system does not have the fourth axis or the index table indexing function is not used,
set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 1 to disable the function.
- Negative direction rotation command M code
5511 M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table indexing
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is determined according to
the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter No. 5500 and a command.
1 to 99999999:
The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always performed in the positive
direction. It is performed in the negative direction only when a move command is
specified together with the M code set in this parameter.
- 1986 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
NOTE
Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.
- Setting of a minimum positioning angle for index table indexing
5512 Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance) for the index table
indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the positioning command must always be
an integer multiple of this setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked.
The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command, but also for the
coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.
Alarm and message
Number Message Contents
PS1508 DUPLICATE M-CODE (INDEX TABLE The M code value (parameter No. 5511) for specifying
REVERSING) negative direction rotation is already used by other functions.
(Index table indexing)
PS1561 ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of
the minimum indexing angle.
PS1564 INDEX TABLE AXIS – OTHER AXIS The index table indexing axis and another axis have been
SAME TIME specified in the same block.
PS1567 INDEX TABLE AXIS DUPLICATE AXIS Index table indexing was specified during axis movement or
COMMAND on an axis for which the index table indexing sequence was
not completed.
Note
NOTE
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the
block, G00 performs nonlinear positioning. So, if rapid traverse based on
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is set, the setting is switched
automatically to acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining center system) Index table indexing
(B-64604EN-2)
- 1987 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.13 SCALING
Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
One scaling method multiples the same magnification rate and the other scaling method (axis-by-axis
scaling) multiples the different magnification rate for each axis.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program or by a parameter.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 5 (SCL) of parameter No.8132 to 1.
P4
P3
P4’ P3’
P0
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
O X
P0 : Scaling center
P1 to P4 : Programmed figure
P1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure
Fig. 13.13 (a) Scaling
Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
(When the bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 0)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start
: Scaling is effective. IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling
: (Scaling mode) P_ : Scaling magnification
G50 ; Scaling cancel
Scaling along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image) (When the bit 6 (XSC) of parameter
No. 5400 is set to 1)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_ I_J_K_ ; Scaling start
IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling
: Scaling is effective.
(Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y, and Z axes)
:
respectively
G50 ; Scaling cancel
- 1988 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
T
NOTE
This function is available when the G-code system B or C is set.
CAUTION
1 Specify G51 in a separate block.
2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50 to cancel the scaling mode.
NOTE
1 Entering pocket calculator decimal point input mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 = 1) does not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K
to change.
2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times the least command increment
(bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 = 1) does not cause the units of the
magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change.
3 An attempt to specify 0 as a magnification rate causes alarm PS0142, “ILLEGAL
SCALE RATE”, to occur in a G51 block.
Explanation
- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set bit 0 (SCL) of parameter No. 5401 to 1.
- Minimum unit of scaling magnification
Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.
- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block
are assumed those of an absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the
scaling center.
CAUTION
With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute
(G90 mode) position command.
If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position
when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute position
command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates specified in
the G51 block, after that block.
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification
Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 to 0.
If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter No. 5411 is used.
Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm PS0007,
“ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT”, will occur.
A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm
PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN”, will occur.
The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.
- 1989 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)
Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a
mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center.
Set a bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image).
Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No.
1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes.
For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J, and K are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3
axes, the magnification set with parameter No. 5421 is used.
A value other than 0 must be set to parameter No. 5421.
Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K).
Magnification can be set within the range ±0.00001 ±9999.99999.
CAUTION
Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be
executed in the order indicated below:
<1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
<2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification)
<3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the
CNC
In this case, the programmable mirror image is effective to the scaling center
and magnification as well.
To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time, specify them in this order; to cancel
them, specify them in the reverse order.
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis
c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
0 : Scaling center
Y axis
Programmed figure
d
Scaled figure
c
0
X axis
a
b
Fig. 13.13 (b) Scaling of each axis
- Scaling of circular interpolation
Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an
ellipse.
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000; (A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a
magnification of 1 is applied to the Y-component.)
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
Above commands are equivalent to the following command:
- 1990 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)
Scaled shape
X
(0,0) (100,0) (200,0)
Fig. 13.13 (c) Scaling for circular interpolation1
Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted
into a vector in the center direction of each axis.
If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as
that in which I and J are specified.
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation
If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first,
followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well.
To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them,
specify them in the reverse order.
Example
Main program
O1
G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (× 3 in the X direction and × 2 in the Y direction)
M98 P1000 ;
G17 G68 X35.0 Y20.0 R30.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G69 ;
G50 ;
M30 ;
Subprogram
O1000 ;
G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ;
G01 X50.0 ;
G01 Y30.0 ;
G01 X20.0 ;
G01 Y10.0 ;
M99 ;
- 1991 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Rotation center
before scaling
Rotation center
after scaling
Original program
Shape after X
coordinate system
Scaling center rotation Scaled shape
Fig. 13.13 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation
- Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding
Chamfering
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
Corner rounding
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner rounding
results in a spiral, not an arc, because scaling is applied to the end point and
radius of the arc.
Fig. 13.13 (e) Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding
Limitation
- Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to cutter/tool nose radius compensation values, tool length offset values,
and tool offset values (Fig. 13.13 (f)).
- 1992 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
Cutter compensation values are not scaled.
Fig. 13.13 (f) Scaling during cutter compensation
- Invalid scaling
M
Scaling is not applicable to the Z-axis movement in case of the following canned cycle.
• Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73).
• Fine boring cycle (G76)
• Shift value Q of X and Y axes in back boring cycle (G87).
In manual operation, the travel distance cannot be increased or decreased using the scaling function.
T
This function is available to G-code systems B and C only; it is not available to G-code system A.
During scaling, the following functions cannot be used. If any of them is specified, alarm (PS0300),
“ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING”, will occur.
• Finishing cycle (G70, G72)
• Outer surface rough cutting cycle (G71, G73)
• End rough cutting cycle (G72, G74)
• Closed loop cutting cycle (G73, G75)
• End cutting off cycle (G74, G76)
• Outer/inner surface cutting off cycle (G75, G77)
• Multiple threading cycle (G76, G78)
• Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G71, G72)
• Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G72, G73)
• Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G73, G74)
• Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle (G74, G75)
• Face drilling cycle (G83, G83)
• Face tapping cycle (G84, G84)
• Face boring cycle (G85, G85)
• Side drilling cycle (G87, G87)
• Side tapping cycle (G88, G88)
• Side boring cycle (G89, G89)
• Outer/inner surface turning cycle (G77, G20)
• Threading cycle (G78, G21)
- 1993 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
• End turning cycle (G79, G24)
(The G code in system B is given first, followed by that of system C.)
Scaling is not applied to the travel distance during manual operation.
If tool offset by shifting the coordinate system is specified (by setting bit 2 (LWT) of parameter No. 5002
to 1 or bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No. 5002 to 0) during scaling, alarm PS0509, “TOOL OFFSET
COMMAND IS NOT AVAILABLE”, will occur.
The same alarm will occur if a tool compensation value is modified by setting bit 6 (EVO) of parameter
No. 5001.
Caution
CAUTION
1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without
specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling
magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective.
2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30)
or coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92), cancel the scaling mode.
3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and
disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the
block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool
movement by cutter compensation. See the description of cutter compensation.
4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled.
Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in
unexpected movement.
Note
NOTE
1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the
following results:
(1) Circular command Direction of rotation is reversed.
(2) Cutter/tool nose radius compensation Offset direction is reversed.
(3) Coordinate system rotation Rotation angle is reversed.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 SCR XSC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit:
0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times
- 1994 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401 SCLx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis:
0: Invalidated
1: Validated
5411 Scaling (G51) magnification
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] 1to999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with
bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in
the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
range is 1 to 9999999.
5421 Scaling magnification for each axis
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] -999999999 to -1, 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is
enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first spindle to the
third spindle (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling
magnification if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132
SCL
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 SCL Scaling is:
0: Not Used.
1: Used.
- 1995 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Alarm and message
- Alarms common to lathe systems and machining center systems
Number Message Description
PS0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or system
variable where no minus signal may be specified.
PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no decimal
POINT point may be specified, or two decimal points were specified.
PS0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ . . . or
G51I_J_K_ . . . or parameter No. 5411 or 5421)
PS5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that exceeds
the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation amounts.
- Alarms only for lathe systems
Number Message Description
PS0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the
SCALING program. For the T system, one of the following functions is
specified during scaling, this alarm is generated.
- Finishing cycle (G70 or G72)
- Outer surface rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G73)
- End side rough-cutting cycle (G72 or G74)
- Closed loop cutting cycle (G73 or G75)
- End side cutting-off cycle (G74 or G76)
- Outer surface or inner surface cutting-off cycle (G75 or G77)
- Multiple repetitive threading cycle (G76 or G78)
- Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G71, G72)
- Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle (for grinding
machines) (G72, G73)
- Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G73, G74)
- Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle (G74, G75)
- Face drill cycle (G83 or G83)
- Face tap cycle (G84 or G84)
- Face boring cycle (G85 or G85)
- Side drill cycle (G87 or G87)
- Side tap cycle (G88 or G88)
- Side boring cycle (G89 or G89)
- Outer surface turning cycle or inner surface boring cycle (G77
or G20)
- Threading cycle (G78 or G21)
- End side turning cycle (G79 or G24)
(Specify G codes for systems B and C in that order.)
PS0509 TOOL OFFSET COMMAND IS Tool offset by shifting the coordinate system was specified (by
NOT AVAILABLE setting bit 2 (LWT) of parameter No. 5002 to 1 or bit 4 (LGT) of
parameter No. 5002 to 0) in the scaling mode, coordinate system
rotation mode, or programmable mirror image mode.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Scaling
- 1996 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION
Overview
A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function, it becomes possible, for example, to correct
the position of a mounted workpiece using a rotation command when the workpiece is placed with some
angle rotated from the machine coordinates. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical
shapes in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the
program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of
rotation
X
0
Parameter
- Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 RIN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R) :
0: Specified by an absolute method
1: Specified by an absolute method (G90) or incremental method (G91)
- Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for
coordinate system rotation
5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] 0.001 degree
[Valid data range] -360000 to 360000
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. When the
angular displacement for coordinate system rotation is not specified with address R in the
block where G68 is specified, the setting of this parameter is used as the angular
displacement for coordinate system rotation.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose radius
compensation plane must be the same. Modify the program.
- 1997 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Number Message Description
PS0509 TOOL OFFSET COMMAND IS Tool offset by shifting the coordinate system was specified (by
NOT AVAILABLE setting bit 2 (LWT) of parameter No. 5002 to 1 or bit 4 (LGT) of
parameter No. 5002 to 0) in the scaling mode, coordinate system
rotation mode, or programmable mirror image mode.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Coordinate system rotation
Limitation
- R-specified arc
When an R-specified arc is specified after beginning the coordinate system rotation mode, please specify
the command to the start point by the absolute commands in the previous block.
- Tool offset
T
If tool offset by shifting the coordinate system is specified (by setting bit 2 (LWT) of parameter No. 5002
to 1 or bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No. 5002 to 0) in the coordinate system rotation mode, alarm PS0509,
“TOOL OFFSET COMMAND IS NOT AVAILABLE”, will occur.
The same alarm will occur if a tool compensation value is modified by setting bit 6 (EVO) of parameter
No. 5001.
13.15 3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION
Overview
The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the center of rotation, direction of the
axis of rotation, and angular displacement.
This coordinate conversion function is quite useful for 3-dimensional machining on a diesinking machine.
By applying this conversion to a program generated for machining on the XY plane, identical machining
can be executed on the desired plane.
When rigid tapping is commanded in 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, tapping can be done at
the angle specified by a 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command. (This is called 3-dimensional
rigid tapping.)
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
- 1998 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Z
X z
Three- y
dimensional
Explanation
- Rapid traverse in a canned cycle for drilling
By using bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221, rapid traverse in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for
drilling in the tilted working plane indexing mode or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode can be
selected and the rapid traverse mode for shift operation in fine boring (G76) or back boring (G87) for the
M system can also be selected. When D3R is set to 0, the cutting feed mode is selected; when it is set to 1,
the rapid traverse mode is selected. For positioning to the initial level at the start of a canned cycle for
drilling, however, the rapid traverse mode is used, regardless of whether D3R is set to 0 or 1. Rapid
traverse override can be applied in the rapid traverse mode, and cutting feed override can be applied in the
cutting feed mode. D3R can also be used to change the mode of rapid traverse in the rigid tapping
direction.
For acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), rapid traverse in
the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted working plane indexing mode or
3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is accelerated/decelerated along each axis independently
according to the time constants specified in parameters Nos. 1620 and 1621. So, when performing
positioning of linear interpolation type with D3R set to 1, make the following settings:
Bit 1 of (LRP) of parameter No. 1401=1 Selects positioning of linear interpolation type.
Bit 1 of (PRT) of parameter No. 1603)=1 Selects acceleration/deceleration of constant time type.
Parameter No. 1620 Set the same value for all.
Parameter No. 1621 Set the same value for all.
For acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
In a canned cycle for drilling, linear rapid traverse in the drilling direction is performed at all times.
Feedrate
When bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221 is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), the rapid traverse
rate in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for drilling in the tilted working plane indexing mode
or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is clamped to a parameter value indicated below if the
rapid traverse override is 100%. In the rapid traverse override F0 mode, however, the rapid traverse
rate is clamped to the value of parameter No. 1421 or a parameter value listed in Table 13.15 (a),
whichever smaller.
- 1999 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Table 13.15 (a) Feedrate in the rapid traverse mode
Parameter No. 5412=0 Parameter No. 1420
Parameter No. 5412≠0 Value of parameter No. 1420 or value of parameter 5412, whichever smaller
However, when the external deceleration function is enabled, the feedrate is clamped to a parameter
value listed in Table 13.15 (a) that is overridden or an external deceleration speed, whichever
smaller.
NOTE
1 Set a rapid traverse rate for each axis in parameter No. 1420 and a tangential
rapid traverse rate in parameter No. 5412.
2 If rapid traverse of nonlinear interpolation type is performed, the feedrate is
clamped to the value of parameter No. 1420, regardless of the setting of
parameter No. 5412.
3 When the cutting feed mode is selected (when bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No.
11221 is set to 0), set a tangential rapid traverse rate in parameter No. 5412.
- Cutting feedrate clamp
The cutting feedrate is clamped so that the feedrate of each real axis after the 3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate （ Parameter No.1432 if
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled and parameter No.1430 otherwise).
- Interlock signal for each axis direction, interlock signal for each axis, external
deceleration signal
When bit 2 (D3IT) of parameter No.11600 is set to 1 and bit 5 (ITM) of parameter No.11223 is set to 1,
the following signals are enabled for axis of machine coordinate system.
- Interlock signal for each axis direction during manual intervention / manual handle interrupt in
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
- Interlock signal for each axis during manual intervention / manual handle interrupt in 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode
- External deceleration signal during manual intervention / manual handle interrupt in 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode
- External deceleration signal during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
By this setting, all signals of controlled axis type are enabled for axis of machine coordinate system
during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
Table13.15 (b) Relationship between coordinate system of target axis of each signal during 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion (automatic operation) and parameter setting
Interlock for each axis
D3IT ITM Interlock for each axis External deceleration
direction
Programming coordinate Programming coordinate
0 - Interlock all X, Y, Z-axis
system system
Programming coordinate
0 Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system
1 system
1 Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system
- 2000 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Table13.15 (c) Relationship between coordinate system of target axis of each signal during manual
intervention / manual handle interrupt in 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode and parameter
setting
Interlock for each axis
D3IT ITM Interlock for each axis External deceleration
direction
Programming coordinate Programming coordinate Programming coordinate
0 -
system system system
Programming coordinate Programming coordinate Programming coordinate
0
1 system system system
1 Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system
Limitation
- Manual reference position return
An attempt to make a manual reference position return during the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode results in alarm PS5324, “REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE”, being issued. Before
attempting to make a manual reference position return, cancel the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode.
- Positioning by optimum accelerations
The function for positioning by optimum accelerations is disabled during the 3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion mode.
Signal
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion manual interruption switch signal
M3R<Gn031.3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Specifies whether to apply 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion to a manual
operation (manual continuous feed, manual incremental feed, or manual handle feed) in
the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 0, 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion is not applied
(the workpiece coordinate system is used).
When this signal is set to 1, 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion is applied (the
program coordinate system is used).
3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode signal D3ROT<Fn062.6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts whether the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set.
[Output cond.] When this signal is set to 1, the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn031 M3R
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn062 D3ROT
- 2001 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter
- Setting relative position and absolute position
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAC
3104
DAC DAL DRL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 DRL Relative position
0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
#6 DAL Absolute position
0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
NOTE
In lathe systems, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying
the absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No. 3129.
#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:
0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
NOTE
When the parameter DAC is set to 1, in the command like circle
interpolation where the cutter compensation vector is changed
constantly, an absolute position is not correctly displayed during its
interpolation except its start point and its end point.
- Setting absolute coordinates in the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 DAK
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#6 DAK Specifies whether to display coordinates in the program coordinate system or workpiece
coordinate system as absolute coordinates when the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode or the tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
0: Display coordinates in the program coordinate system.
1: Display coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11221 D3R
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2002 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#1 D3R In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode or tilted working plane indexing
mode, rapid traverse in canned cycle for drilling is:
0: Performed in the cutting feed mode.
1: Performed in the rapid traverse mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11223 ITM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 ITM When bit 2 (D3IT) of parameter No.11600 = 1, during 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion, the following signals are:
0: Enabled for axis of programming coordinate system.
1: Enabled for axis of machine coordinate system.
(Intended signals)
- Interlock signal for each axis direction during manual intervention / manual handle
interrupt in 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
- Interlock signal for each axis during manual intervention / manual handle interrupt in
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
- External deceleration signal during manual intervention / manual handle interrupt in
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
- External deceleration signal during 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11600 D3IT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 D3IT In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, the valid interlock signals
(interlock signal for each axis (*ITx) or interlock signal for each axis direction (MITx,
PITx)) are:
0: The signals for all of the target axes for 3-dimensional coordinate system
conversion.
1: The signals for axes along which a movement is made during 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19602 D3D
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 D3D Specifies whether to display the distance to go in the program coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system during the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion or
the tilted working plane indexing.
0: Display the distance to go in the program coordinate system.
1: Display the distance to go in the workpiece coordinate system.
- 2003 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Two or more parallel axes (in parallel with a basic axis) have been
specified upon start-up of 3-dimensional coordinate conversion.
PS0048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Start-up of 3-dimensional coordinate conversion has been attempted,
but the three basic axes used when Xp, Yp, or Zp is omitted are not set
in parameter No. 1022.
PS5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING 3-dimensional coordinate conversion has been specified three or more
times.
To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation, then
specify the coordinate conversion.
PS5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR Errors for 3-dimensional coordinate conversion command are:
(1) No I, J, or K command was issued in 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion command block. (Coordinate rotation is disabled)
(2) All of I, J, or K command were 0 in 3-dimensional coordinate
conversion command block.
(3) No rotation angle R was not commanded in 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion command block.
PS5324 REFERENCE RETURN No manual reference position return can be made during 3-dimensional
INCOMPLETE coordinate conversion or tilted working plane indexing execution.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
- 2004 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.16 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
M
NOTE
This function is included in the option "Multi-system for manual handle retrace".
To use this function, the above option is required.
13.16.1 Tilted Working Plane Indexing
Overview
Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the
workpiece would be easy if commands can be specified in a coordinate system fixed to this plane (called
a feature coordinate system). This function enables commands to be specified in the feature coordinate
system. The feature coordinate system is defined in the workpiece coordinate system.
For explanations about the relationship between the feature coordinate system and workpiece coordinate
system, see Fig. 13.16.1 (a).
• Feature coordinate system
Feature coordinate
Workpiece system
coordinate system (G68.2)
(G54)
Machine coordinate system
Fig. 13.16.1 (a) Feature coordinate system
The G68.2 command causes the programming coordinate system to switch to the feature coordinate
system. The commands in all subsequent blocks are assumed to be specified in the feature coordinate
system until G69 appears.
If G68.2 specifies the relationship between the feature coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate
system, G53.1 automatically specifies the +Z direction of the feature coordinate system as the tool axis
direction even if no angle is specified for the rotation axis. (See Fig. 13.16.1 (c).)
For explanations about the tool axis direction, see Fig. 13.16.1 (b).
- 2005 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
• Tool axis direction Z
The tool axis direction is the
+Z-axis direction.
The tool axis direction is the
+Y-axis direction.
The tool axis direction is the +X-axis direction.
X
Fig. 13.16.1 (b) Tool axis direction
This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature
coordinate system. After the G53.1 command, the tool is controlled so that it remains perpendicular to the
machining plane.
• Only G68.2 is specified
Z
Zc
Yc
Xc
Feature coordinate
Y
system
Xc-Yc-Zc
Coordinate system
origin shift
(xo,yo,zo)
Workpiece
coordinate system
X-Y-Z X
• G53.1 is specified after G68.2
G53.1 automatically controls
the rotation axis.
Zc C
Z B Yc
Control point shift (by
another command) Xc
Feature coordinate
Y system
Xc-Yc-Zc
Coordinate system
origin shift
(xo,yo,zo)
Workpiece
coordinate system
X-Y-Z X
Fig. 13.16.1 (c) G68.2 and G53.1 commands
This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig. 13.16.1 (d).)
(1) Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes
- 2006 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
(2) Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rotation axes
(3) Composite type machine controlled with one tool rotation axis and one table rotation axis
The function can also be used for a machine configuration in which the rotation axis for controlling the
tool does not intersect the rotation axis for controlling the table.
<1> Tool rotation
type machine
Z
X
Y
<2> Table rotation type
machine
Z
Y
C
A
<3> Composite type machine
Z
Y
C
Fig. 13.16.1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine
13.16.1.1 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle
- Coordinate conversion using an Euler's angle
Coordinate conversion by rotation is assumed to be performed around the workpiece coordinate system
origin.
Let the coordinate system obtained by rotating the workpiece coordinate system around the Z-axis by an
angle of α degrees be coordinate system 1. Similarly, let the coordinate system obtained by rotating
coordinate system 1 around the X’-axis by an angle of β be coordinate system 2. The feature coordinate
- 2007 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
system is the coordinate system obtained by shifting the coordinate system that is obtained by rotating
coordinate system 2 around the Z”-axis through an angle of γ degrees from the workpiece coordinate
system origin by (Xo, Yo, Zo).
Fig. 13.16.1 (e) shows the relationship between the workpiece coordinate system and the feature
coordinate system.
The figure also gives examples of displacement on the X-Y plane.
z
y'
Conversion from workpiece
y coordinate system X-Y-Z to
α coordinate system 1 X'-Y'-Z
x x'
z y''
β
z''
β
y' Conversion from coordinate
system 1 X'-Y'-Z to
coordinate system 2 X'-Y"-Z"
X'
yc y''
zc γ
Conversion from coordinate system 2
γ xc X'-Y"-Z" to feature coordinate system
Xc-Yc-Zc
x'
Fig. 13.16.1 (e) Coordinate conversion using an Euler's angle
- I0 J0 K0 command
When I0 J0 K0 is specified as an Euler's angle, the alarm PS5457, “G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR”
usually occurs. When bit 1 (ATW) of parameter No. 13451 is set to 1, the feature coordinate system with
a tilted angle of 0 degree is used.
13.16.1.2 General specifications of the tilted working plane indexing
- Constant surface speed control
Constant surface speed control is exercised by using as the reference the following axis according to bit 6
(3CS) of parameter No.11221. (Refer to the explanation of “CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL" for details)
- 3CS=0 : the machine axis specified in address P in a G96 block or the machine axis (in the actually
operating workpiece coordinate system) set in parameter No. 3770.
- 3CS=1 : the axis in the feature coordinate system
- 2008 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
- Rapid traverse in a canned cycle for drilling
By using bit 1 (D3R) of parameter No. 11221, rapid traverse in the drilling direction in a canned cycle for
drilling during the tilted working plane indexing mode or 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
mode can be selected and the rapid traverse mode for shift operation in fine boring (G76) or back boring
(G87) for the M system can also be selected. When parameter D3R is set to 0, the cutting feed mode is
selected. When parameter D3R is set to 1, the rapid traverse mode is selected. For positioning to the
initial level at the start of a canned cycle for drilling, however, the rapid traverse mode is used, regardless
of the setting of parameter D3R. Rapid traverse override is applied during the rapid traverse mode, and
cutting feed override is applied during the cutting feed mode. Parameter D3R is also usable to change the
mode of rapid traverse in the rigid tapping direction.
For acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
When parameter D3R is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), rapid traverse in the drilling direction
in a canned cycle for drilling during the tilted working plane indexing mode or 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode is accelerated/decelerated on each axis independently according
to the time constants specified in parameter No. 1620 and parameter No. 1621. So, when performing
positioning of linear interpolation type with parameter D3R set to 1, make the following settings:
Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401=1 Selects positioning of linear interpolation type.
Bit 4 (PRT) of parameter No. 1603=1 Selects acceleration/deceleration of constant time type.
Parameter No. 1620 Set the same value for all.
Parameter No. 1621 Set the same value for all.
For acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
In a canned cycle for drilling, linear rapid traverse in the drilling direction is performed at all times.
Feedrate
When parameter D3R is set to 1 (for the rapid traverse mode), the rapid traverse rate in the drilling
direction in a canned cycle for drilling during the tilted working plane indexing mode or
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode is clamped to a parameter value indicated below
if the rapid traverse override is 100%. In the rapid traverse override F0 mode, however, the rapid
traverse rate is clamped to the value of parameter No. 1421 or a parameter value in Table 13.16.1 (a),
whichever smaller.
Table 13.16.1 (a) Feedrate for rapid traverse mode
Parameter No. 5412=0 Parameter No. 1420
Parameter No. 5412≠0 Value of parameter No. 1420 or value of parameter No. 5412, whichever smaller
However, when the external deceleration function is enabled, the feedrate is clamped to a parameter
value in Table 13.16.1 (a) that is overridden or an external deceleration speed, whichever smaller.
NOTE
1 Set a rapid traverse rate for each axis in parameter No. 1420, and set a
tangential rapid traverse rate in parameter No. 5412.
2 If rapid traverse of nonlinear interpolation type is performed, the feedrate is
clamped to the value of parameter No. 1420, regardless of the setting of
parameter No. 5412.
3 When the cutting feed mode is selected (parameter D3R = 0), set a tangential
rapid traverse rate in parameter No. 5412.
- 2009 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- Workpiece coordinate system selection command during the tilted working
plane indexing
By executing the workpiece coordinate system selection command (G54 to G59, G54.1) during the tilted
working plane indexing when bit 6 (3TW) of parameter No. 1205 is 1, it is possible to change the
workpiece coordinate system. In this case, the coordinate system zero point shift of the tilted working
plane indexing is maintained.
If an attempt is made to execute the workpiece coordinate system selection command (G54 to G59,
G54.1) during the tilted working plane indexing when bit 6 (3TW) of parameter No. 1205 is 0, alarm
PS5462, “ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69)” is issued.
Program coordinate system
Program coordinate
G54 system
G55
Machine coordinate system
Fig. 13.16.1 (f) Workpiece coordinate system selection command during the tilted working plane indexing
- Minimum command unit of rotation angles
The minimum command unit of the rotation angles (I, J, K, and R) of the tilted working plane indexing is
0.001 degree regardless of the increment system. By setting bit 2 (TRF) of parameter No. 11630 to 1, the
minimum command unit of the rotation angles can be set to 0.00001 degree.
- Cutting feedrate clamp
The cutting feedrate is clamped so that the feedrate of each real axis after the conversion by the tilted
working plane indexing does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (Parameter No.1432 if
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is enabled and parameter No.1430 otherwise).
- Local Coordinate System
The local coordinate system is available to the feature coordinate system during the tilted working plane
indexing.
X,Y,Z commands of the local coordinate system defines a local coordinate system that the feature
coordinate system is translated in X,Y,Z direction.
Alarm PS5462 occurs when the tilted working plane indexing is specified on the condition that the offset
of the local coordinate system is not zero,
- 2010 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
IP_ (Local coordinate system)
(Feature coordinate system)
(G54: Workpiece coordinate system)
Machine coordinate system origin (Machine coordinate system)
Reference position
13.16.1.3 Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw
Overview
With the tilted working plane indexing, coordinate system conversion by rotation about the X-axis,
Y-axis, and Z-axis of a workpiece coordinate system in this order can be used (roll-pitch-yaw).
The order of rotary axes can be specified using address Q.
Yc
Zc
Xc
Z
(3)
Y
(2)
(1)
Fig. 13.16.1 (g) Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw
Explanation
Suppose that the coordinate system is rotated about (1) the X-axis, (2) the Y-axis, and (3) the Z-axis in
this order.
A "workpiece coordinate system" rotated by angle α about the X-axis is "coordinate system 1".
"Coordinate system 1" rotated by angle β about the Y-axis is "coordinate system 2". "Coordinate system
2" rotated by angle γ about the Z-axis then shifted by (X0,Y0,Z0) from the workpiece coordinate system
origin is a "feature coordinate system".
- 2011 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
z
z’
α
y’
Conversion from the workpiece
α coordinate system X-Y-Z to coordinate
y system 1 X’-Y’-Z’
z
z’
z’’ β y’
Conversion from coordinate system 1
β X’-Y’-Z’ to coordinate system 2 X"-Y"-Z"
y’’
y
β
x x’’
z’’
yc γ
γ
y’’ Conversion from coordinate system 2
zc X"-Y"-Z" to the feature coordinate system
y Xc-Yc-Zc
γ
x x’’ xc
Fig. 13.16.1 (h) Determination of a feature coordinate system
13.16.1.4 Tilted working plane indexing based on three points
Overview
With the tilted working plane indexing, a tilted working plane can be specified by specifying three points
in a feature coordinate system.
P3
Yc
Zc
P1 P2
Xc
Z
Y
X
Fig. 13.16.1 (i) Tilted working plane indexing based on three points
- 2012 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Explanation
- Determination of a feature coordinate system
Three entered points are named P1, P2, and P3 in the order of entry.
The P1-to-P2 direction is defined as the X-axis of a feature coordinate system. Among the directions that
are on the plane containing the three points and are normal to the X-axis of the feature coordinate system,
the direction that makes a smaller angle with the P1→P3 vector is defined as the Y-axis of the feature
coordinate system. The Z-axis of the feature coordinate system is defined according to the right-handed
system.
Zc
P2
P3
Xc
Yc
(Yc1) α
β
Z Yc2
P1
Feature coordinate
Y
system
Xc－Yc－Zc
Workpiece
X coordinate system
X－Y－Z
On the plane containing three points, there are two directions normal to
Xc: Yc1 and Yc2. Angles α and β formed relative to the P1→P3 vector
satisfy α < β, so that Yc1 is selected as Yc.
Fig. 13.16.1 (j) Determination of a feature coordinate system
- Origin of the feature coordinate system
The origin of the feature coordinate system is the first specified point P1.
By setting an origin shift amount (G68.2 P2 Q0 X_Y_Z_), the origin of the feature coordinate system is
shifted by (X,Y,Z) from P1. Specify (X,Y,Z) in the feature coordinate system.
- Angular displacement R
The angular displacement R is positive for clockwise rotation viewed in the Z-axis direction in the feature
coordinate system.
- 2013 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.16.1.5 Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors
Overview
With the tilted working plane indexing, a tilted working plane can be specified by specifying an X-axis
direction vector and a Z-axis direction vector in the feature coordinate system.
Yc V2
Zc V1
Xc
Z
Y
X
Fig. 13.16.1 (k) Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors
Explanation
- Determination of a feature coordinate system
The first vector is defined as the X-axis of the feature coordinate system, and the second vector is defined
as the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system. The Y-axis of the feature coordinate system is defined
according to the right-handed system.
Yc (Yc1)
Zc
V2
Xc
V1
Yc2
There are two vectors normal to the Xc-axis and
Zc-axis. However, Yc1 is defined as the Yc-axis of
the feature coordinate system according to the
right-handed system.
Fig. 13.16.1 (l) Determination of a feature coordinate system
- When the first and second vectors are not normal
When the first vector and second vector are not normal, the orthographical vector from the second vector
to plane P normal to the first vector is defined as the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system.
- 2014 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Zc Second vector
Xc (first vector)
Plane P normal to the first vector
Fig. 13.16.1 (m) When the first and second vectors are not normal
13.16.1.6 Tilted working plane indexing based on projection angles
Overview
With the tilted working plane indexing, a tilted working plane can be specified based on projection
angles.
A plane determined by vector A and vector B produced by rotating the X-axis vector and Y-axis vector of
the workpiece coordinate system is defined to be a tilted working plane.
Xc
Y X
B A
β -α
Yc
Fig. 13.16.1 (n) Tilted working plane indexing based on projection angles
Explanation
- Determination of a feature coordinate system
The X-axis direction vector of the workpiece coordinate system rotated by α about the Y-axis of the
workpiece coordinate system is defined as vector A. The Y-axis direction vector of the workpiece
coordinate system rotated by β about the X-axis of the workpiece coordinate system is defined to be
vector B.
The direction normal to plane P containing vector A and vector B (direction of the outer product of A ×
B) is defined to be the Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system.
- 2015 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Vector A rotated by γ about the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system is defined to be the X-axis
direction of the feature coordinate system. The Y-axis of the feature coordinate system is defined
according to the right-handed system.
Z Plane P
A
β X
-α
Y
Zc
Fig. 13.16.1 (o) Determination of a feature coordinate system (Z axis)
By the third command angle α and second command angle β, the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system
are determined.
Z Plane P
B
Xc
Yc
A
γ
X
Y
Zc
Fig. 13.16.1 (p) Determination of a feature coordinate system (X and Y axes)
By the third command angle γ, the X-axis and Y-axis of the feature coordinate system are determined.
NOTE
When vector A and vector B are considered to be parallel with each other (when
the angle formed by the two vectors is smaller than 1°), alarm PS5457,
"G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR" is issued.
- 2016 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.16.1.7 Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction
Overview
By specifying G68.3, a coordinate system (feature coordinate system) where the tool axis direction is the
+Z-axis direction can be automatically specified. When a feature coordinate system is used, a program for
cutting a hole or pocket in a plane tilted relative to the workpiece coordinate system can be made simpler.
This function can automatically generate a feature coordinate system that is normal to the tool direction.
Zc
Yc
Xc
Feature coordinate system (G68.3)
Workpiece coordinate system (G54)
Machine coordinate system
Fig. 13.16.1 (q) Feature coordinate system
When G68.3 is specified in a block, the coordinate system for programming is changed to a feature
coordinate system. All commands after the block are regarded as commands in the feature coordinate
system until G69 is specified.
Explanation
- Feature coordinate system
By specifying G68.3, a feature coordinate system with the tool axis direction being the +Z-axis direction
can be created. The tool axis direction means the tool axis direction based on the rotation axis position
reached by automatic operation or manual operation.
- Origin of a feature coordinate system
The origin of a feature coordinate system must be specified using an absolute command.
Even in the incremental command mode, the specified origin is regarded as an absolute position.
When 1 address or 2 addresses are omitted in X, Y, Z, alarm PS5457, "G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR"
is issued.
When the origin of a feature coordinate system is not specified, the position when G68.3 is specified is
used as the origin.
- Determination of a feature coordinate system
Determination of a feature coordinate system depends on whether P1 command is present.
(1) When G68.3 block does not include P1 command (G68.3)
r r
When G68.3 is specified, the tool axis direction vector ( T ) represents the +Z direction ( Z c ) of the
feature coordinate system.
r
The vector normal to a plane formed by the +Z direction ( Z c ) of the feature coordinate system and the
r r
vertical axis direction vector ( P ) (parameter No. 12321) represents the +X direction ( Xc ) of the feature
coordinate system.
r r r
Expression: Xc = P × Zc
r r
The vector normal to the +Z direction ( Z c ) of the feature coordinate system and the +X direction ( Xc )
r
of the feature coordinate system represents the +Y direction ( Yc ) of the feature coordinate system.
- 2017 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
r r r
Expression: Yc = Zc × Xc
When R is commanded, a coordinate system rotated by R around Zc from the above-mentioned
coordinate system is the feature coordinate system.
Vertical axis direction: P
Zc
Z-axis of feature coordinate
system (Tool axis direction:
T)
Yc
Xc
Y-axis of feature X-axis of feature coordinate
coordinate system system
Fig. 13.16.1 (r) Determination of a feature coordinate system
r r
When the tool axis direction vector ( T ) is parallel with the vertical axis direction vector ( P ) (parameter
r r
No. 12321) (when the angle between the vector ( T ) and the vector ( P ) is equal to or less than the value
of parameter No. 12322), the feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is as indicated below. By specifying
angular displacement R, a feature coordinate system rotated about the Z-axis of this coordinate system
can be specified.
Table 13.16.1 (b) Feature coordinate system
Parameter Z-axis of feature coordinate X-axis of feature coordinate Y-axis of feature coordinate
No. 12321 system Zc system Xc system Yc
1 +X direction +Y direction +Z direction
2 +Y direction +Z direction +X direction
3 +Z direction +X direction +Y direction
When 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the vertical axis direction is the reference tool axis direction
(parameter No. 19697).
If a value other than 0 through 3 is set in parameter No. 12321, the alarm PS5459, “MACHINE
PARAMETER INCORRECT” is issued.
CAUTION
Tool axis direction is Z-axis direction of feature coordinate system regardless of
the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697).
- Angular displacement R
Angular displacement R is positive when a rotation is made clockwise viewed in the Z-axis direction of
the feature coordinate system. The range of angular displacement R is: 0.0° ≤ R ≤ 360.0°.
(2) When G68.3 block includes P1 command (G68.3 P1)
"G68.3 P1" command defines the feature coordinate system corresponding to tool rotation axis position.
The direction of the feature coordinate system is the direction of reference coordinate system rotated by
tool rotation axes. The direction of this feature coordinate system is the same as the direction of tool axis
- 2018 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
direction feed / tool axis right-angle direction feed of 3-dimensional manual feed when the parameter FLL
(No.12320#1) is set to zero.
The reference coordinate system of feature coordinate system (the feature coordinate system that is
defined when absolute coordinate system of tool rotation axes is zero) is as follows by the parameter
(No.19697) for reference tool axis direction.
The feature coordinate system defined by "G68.3 P1" command is the coordinate system that the
reference coordinate system is rotated by tool rotation axis position and parameter RA (No.19698), RB
(No.19699).
Zw Zw Zw
ZF YF XF
Yw Yw Yw
ZF YF
XF YF XF
ZF
Xw Xw Xw
Reference tool axis direction : Reference tool axis direction : Reference tool axis direction :
Z-axis direction X-axis direction Y-axis direction
Parameter (No.19697)=3 Parameter (No.19697)=1 Parameter (No.19697)=2
Fig. 13.16.1 (s) The reference coordinate system of feature coordinate system (G68.3 P1)
B C
X,Y direction of
feature coordinate system Z direction of
feature coordinate system
Z
C
B
Y
- 2019 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Tool rotation axis : C=45deg, B=0deg. Tool rotation axis : C=45deg, B=20deg.
Z Z Z direction of
Z direction of Feature coordinate system
Feature coordinate system B
Y direction of Y direction of
Feature coordinate system Feature coordinate system
C C
Z
Y Y
C B
X direction of B Y
C C
X Feature coordinate system X
X direction of X
Feature coordinate system
Fig. 13.16.1 (t) Example that reference tool axis direction is Z direction
- Machine of table rotation type
On a machine of table rotation type, the tool direction remains unchanged. So, a feature coordinate system
based on the reference tool axis direction (parameter No.19697) is set. However, the origin specification
of the feature coordinate system and angular displacement R about the Z-axis are valid.
Example: When reference tool axis direction represents +Z-axis direction
(with 3 set in parameter No. 19697)
Z
Zc Feature coordinate system
Xc-Yc-Zc
Y Yc
Xc
X
Workpiece coordinate system X-Y-Z
Fig. 13.16.1 (u) Machine of table rotation type
- G53.1 / G53.6 command in G68.3 mode
When G53.1 or G53.6 command is executed in G68.3 mode, alarm PS5458 “ILLEGAL USE OF
G53.1/G53.6” occurs.
- Use in combination with tool length compensation
The G68.3 command can be specified even during tool length compensation.
- 2020 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
- Example of operation
An example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type is given below.
The machine configuration is "BC type reference tool axis Z-axis".
BC type tool axis Z-axis
(Axes are intersecting.) C: 1st rotation axis (master)
B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)
Tool holder offset value
= Parameter No. 19666 Control point
Tool length offset = H01
Tool center point
Fig. 13.16.1 (v) Example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type
Sample program 1
O0100 ;
N1 G55 ;
N2 G90 G01 X0Y0Z50.0 F1000 ;
N3 G43 H01 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
N4 B-45.0 ;
N5 G68.3 ;
:
N6 G69 ;
:
- 2021 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Machine operation by sample program 1
N3 command
Workpiece coorditate system
X-Y-Z
X
N4 command
Zc
N5 command
Yc
Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc
Xc
Z
N6 command
Workpiece coorditate system
X-Y-Z
X
Fig. 13.16.1 (w) Machine operation with sample program 1
N3 block: Performs tool length compensation in the workpiece coordinate system.
The tool center point moves to the origin of the workpiece coordinate system.
N4 block: Tilts the tool.
N5 block: Sets a feature coordinate system where the tool axis direction is the Z-axis direction and the
tool
center point is placed at the origin.
N6 block: Cancels the feature coordinate system to return to the workpiece coordinate system.
Sample program 2
O0100 ;
N1 G54 G90 G00 B0 C0 ;
N2 B45.0 ;
N3 C60.0 ;
- 2022 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
N4 G68.3 P1 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
Sample program2
Z
N2 command
Y
B45.0
Workpiece coordinate
system X-Y-Z
X
N3 command Z
Y
C60.0
Workpiece coordinate
system X-Y-Z
X
Z
ZF
N4 command
Y
C60°
YF B45°
XF
C60° X
Feature coordinate system XF-YF-ZF
Fig.13.16.1 (x)
N2 block: Tilts the tool. (B45 deg)
N3 block: Tilts the tool. (C60 deg)
N4 block: The direction of the reference coordinate system of feature coordinate system is the direction
of workpiece coordinate system because the reference tool axis direction is Z direction. The
feature coordinate system is the coordinate system that the reference coordinate system is
rotated by 45 deg. around Y direction and 60 deg. around Z direction.
XF : The direction that X direction of workpiece coordinate system is rotated by 60 deg. around Z
direction after by 45 deg. around Y direction of workpiece coordinate system.
YF : The direction that Y direction of workpiece coordinate system is rotated by 60 deg. round Z
direction of workpiece coordinate system.
ZF : The direction that Z direction of workpiece coordinate system is rotated by 60 deg. around Z
direction after by 45 deg. around Y direction of workpiece coordinate system.
- Multiple G68.3
After the tool axis direction is changed in G68.3 mode, by specifying G68.3, a new feature coordinate
system where the tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction can be specified.
Example of operation
An example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type is given below.
The machine configuration is "BC type reference tool axis Z-axis".
- 2023 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
BC type tool axis Z-axis
(Axes are intersecting.) C: 1st rotation axis (master)
B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)
Tool holder offset value
= Parameter No. 19666 Control point
Tool length offset = H01
Tool center point
Fig. 13.16.1 (y) Example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type
Sample program 2
O0200 ;
N1 G55 ;
N2 G01 A90.0 F1000 ;
N3 G68.3 X0 Y0 Z0 R0;
:
N4 X10.0 Y0 Z0 ;
N5 C90.0;
N6 G68.3 X10.0 Y0 Z0 ;
:
N7 G69 ;
:
- 2024 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Machine operation by sample program 2
Z
N3 command
Y
Yc
X
Xc
Zc Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc
Z
N4 command
Y
Yc
Xc
X
Zc
Z
N5 command
Y
Yc
Xc
X
Zc
N6 command Z
Y
Yc
Xc
X
Zc
Fig. 13.16.1 (z) Machine operation with sample program 2
N3 block: Sets a feature coordinate system according to the tool direction.
N4 block: Specifies coordinates in the feature coordinate system.
N5 block: Changes the tool direction.
N6 block: Sets a feature coordinate system according to the tool direction.
- 2025 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.16.2 Multiple Command of Tilted Working Plane Indexing
13.16.2.1 Absolute multiple command
By additionally specifying G68.2 in the tilted working plane indexing mode, a feature coordinate system
produced by additionally applying coordinate system conversion to the workpiece coordinate system can
be set. The workpiece coordinate system is resumed by specifying G69.
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (MTW) of parameter No. 11221.
Format
The format of the tilted working plane indexing (G68.2) is applicable.
Specify the origin of a feature coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system.
Example of operation
An example of operation on a tool rotation type machine is explained below.
The machine configuration is "BC type with the reference tool axis being the Z-axis".
Machine on which tool rotary
axes cross each other C: 1st rotation axis (master)
B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)
Tool holder offset value
= Parameter No. 19666 Control point
Tool length offset = H01
Tool center point
Fig. 13.16.2 (a) Example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type
Sample program 1
O0100 ;
N1 G55 ;
N2 G90 G01 X20.0 Y5.0 Z0 F1000 ;
N3 G68.2 X20.0 Y5.0 Z0 I0 J90.0 K0 ;
N4 G53.1 ;
:
N5 X-15.0 Y0 Z-15.0 ;
N6 G68.2 X5.0 Y20.0 Z0 I90.0 J90.0 K0 ;
N7 G53.1;
:
N8 G69 ;
:
- 2026 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Machine operation by sample program 1
Z
N4 command
Y Yc
Xc
X
G55
Machine Zc Feature coordinate system
origin Xc-Yc-Zc
N5 command
Z
Y
Yc
Xc
Zc
N6 command
Yc Xc
Y Zc
Feature coordinate system
Xc-Yc-Zc
X
N7 command
Yc
Xc
Y Zc
X
Fig. 13.16.2 (b) Machine operation with sample program 1
N4 block: Rotates the tool in the Z-axis direction in the feature coordinate system.
N5 block: Specifies coordinates in the feature coordinate system.
N6 block: Sets a new feature coordinate system.
N7 block: Rotates the tool in the Z-axis direction in the new feature coordinate system.
- 2027 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.16.2.2 Incremental multiple command
By specifying G68.4, coordinate system conversion can be applied to the currently set feature coordinate
system.
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (MTW) of parameter No. 11221.
Format
The format of the tilted working plane indexing (G68.2) is applicable.
Specify the origin of a feature coordinate system in the immediately preceding feature coordinate system.
Table 13.16.2 (a) Incremental multiple command format
Specification method Incremental multiple command
Eulerian angle G68.4
Roll-pitch-yaw G68.4 P1
Three points G68.4 P2
Two vectors G68.4 P3
Projection angles G68.4 P4
Example of operation
An example of operation on a tool rotation type machine is explained below.
Rotary axis C rotates about the Z-axis (master axis).
Rotary axis B rotates about the Y-axis (slave axis).
BC type tool axis Z-axis
(Axes are intersecting.) C: 1st rotation axis (master)
B: 2nd rotation axis (slave)
Tool holder offset value
= Parameter No. 19666 Control point
Tool length offset = H01
Tool center point
Fig. 13.16.2 (c) Example of operation on a machine of tool rotation type
Sample program 2
O0200 ;
N1 G55 ;
N2 G90 G01 X20.0 Y5.0 Z0 F1000 ;
N3 G68.2 X20.0 Y5.0 Z0 I0 J90.0 K0 ;
N4 G53.1 ;
:
N5 X-15.0 Y0 Z-15.0 ;
N6 G68.4 X-15.0 Y0 Z-15.0 I90.0 J90.0 K-90.0 ;
N7 G53.1;
:
N8 G69 ;
:
- 2028 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Machine operation by sample program 2
N4 command
Y Yc1
Xc1
Zc1 Feature coordinate system
Xc1-Yc1-Zc1
N5 command
Z
Y
Yc1
Xc1
Zc1
N6 command
Yc2 Xc2
Feature coordinate system
Z
Xc2-Yc2-Zc2
Y Zc2
Yc1
Xc1
X
Zc1
N7 command Yc2
Xc2
Y Zc2
Yc1
Xc1
X
Zc1
Fig. 13.16.2 (d) Machine operation with sample program 2
N4 block: Rotates the tool in the Z-axis direction in the feature coordinate system.
N5 block: Specifies coordinates in the feature coordinate system.
N6 block: Applies coordinate system conversion to the feature coordinate system based on Eulerian angle
to set a new feature coordinate system.
N7 block: Rotates the tool in the Z-axis direction in the new feature coordinate system.
- 2029 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.16.3 Tool Axis Direction Control
13.16.3.1 Tool axis direction control
G53.1 automatically specifies the +Z direction of the feature coordinate system as the tool axis direction.
Example of operation
The following gives an operation example in the machine configuration below.
- Table rotation type
- Master axis: About the Y-axis (B axis)
- Slave axis: About the Z-axis (C axis)
- Reference tool axis direction: Z direction
- Increment system for the rotation axis: 1/10(IS-C)
Program example 1
G68.2 I90.0 J0.0005 K-90.0 (rotation by 0.0005 degree about the Y-axis)
G53.1
The rotation axis position after the G53.1 command is as follows:
• Bit 2 (TFR) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 0 (minimum command unit of the rotation angles:
0.001 degree):
B axis: 0.0010 degree
C axis: 0.0000 degree
• Bit 2 (TFR) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1 (minimum command unit of the rotation angles:
0.00001 degree):
B axis: 0.0005 degree
C axis: 0.0000 degree
Program example 2
G68.2 I90.0 J10 K-90.0 (rotation by (minimum command unit of the rotation angles × 10) about the
Y-axis)
G53.1
The rotation axis position after the G53.1 command is as follows:
• Bit 2 (TFR) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 0 (minimum command unit of the rotation angles:
0.001 degree):
B axis: 0.0100 degree
C axis: 0.0000 degree
• Bit 2 (TFR) of parameter No. 11630 is set to 1 (minimum command unit of the rotation angles:
0.00001 degree):
B axis: 0.0001 degree
C axis: 0.0000 degree
About parameters
(1) Machine configuration
When parameters are set, it is important to determine the target machine configuration for parameter
setting.
The following explains the machine configuration.
- Master and slave
When there are two rotation axes for controlling the orientation of a tool or two rotation axes for
controlling the orientation of a table, a typical structure is such that a rotation mechanism is on the tip of
another rotation mechanism. The former rotation mechanism is called the slave, and the latter is called the
master.
The master and slave are sometimes called the first axis and second axis, respectively.
- 2030 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
The rotation center axis for the master is called the first rotation axis, while the rotation center axis for the
slave is called the second rotation axis. (Fig. 13.16.3 (a))
Master and slave
Second rotary axis
Slave = second axis
First rotary axis
Master = first axis
Fig. 13.16.3 (a) Relationships between the master and slave
- When the rotation axes of the table do not intersect
Explained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation centers do not intersect.
In the mechanism shown in the following example, the master and slave do not intersect each other.
(Fig.13.16.3 (b))
When both the master and slave are at 0 degrees, a vector from the origin of the machine coordinate
system to a point on the first rotation axis of the table is set as a rotary table position in parameters Nos.
19700 to 19702.
Similarly, when both the master and slave are at 0 degrees, a vector from the above point to a point on the
second rotation axis is set as an intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the
table in parameters Nos. 19703 to 19705.
Machine in which table rotary axes do not intersect
Slave = 0 degrees
Master = 0 degrees
Zm
Ym
Intersection offset vector between first rotary axis and second
rotary axis of table
Xm
Rotary table position
Fig.13.16.3 (b) Mechanism in which the master and slave do not intersect
- When the first rotation axis of the tool and the tool axis do not intersect
Explained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindle rotation center axis) and the first rotation
axis of the tool do not intersect.
When both the master and slave are at 0 degrees, a vector from a point at a distance of the tool length
compensation value plus the tool holder offset value from the tool center point along the tool axis to a
point on the first rotation axis of the tool is set as an intersection offset vector between the tool axis and
the first rotation axis of the tool in parameters Nos. 19709 to 19711.
- 2031 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- When the rotation axes of the tool do not intersect
Explained below is a mechanism in which the rotation axes of the tool do not intersect each other.
The Fig. 13.16.3 (c) is an example of a mechanism in which the first and second rotation axes of the tool
do not intersect.
When both the master and slave are at 0 degrees, a vector from a point on the second rotation axis of the
tool to a point on the first rotation axis of the tool is set as an intersection offset vector between the
second rotation axis of the tool and the first rotation axis of the tool in parameters Nos. 19712 to 19714.
The controlled point can be shifted by setting a shift vector from the point mentioned above in
parameters.
Machine in which rotary axes of tool do not intersect
First rotary axis of tool
Intersection offset vector between second and first rotary
axes of tool
Second rotary axis of tool
Intersection offset vector between tool axis and
second rotary axis
Fig. 13.16.3 (c) Mechanism in which the rotation axes of the tool do not intersect
(2) Examples of setting parameters
There are many parameters related to this function.
Therefore, it is recommended that parameters for a target machine be set based on some examples. These
examples are given below.
<1> Example of setting parameters for a composite type machine
In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the
fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C.
Fig. 13.16.3 (d) is an example of setting parameters for a composite type machine.
Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis on the X-axis.
Rotation axis B is a tool rotation axis on the Y-axis.
- 2032 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
composite type machine
Zm B
Ym
Xm
Rotation center of rotary
A table
Rotary table position
(Parameters Nos. 19700,19701,19702)
Intersection offset vector between tool axis
and tool rotary axis
(Parameters Nos. 19709,19710,19711)
Tool holder offset value
(Parameter No. 19666)
Fig. 13.16.3 (d) Composite type machine example
In the above composite type machine (Fig. 13.16.3 (d)), if rotation axis B is at 0 degrees, assume the
following:
Tool holder offset value = 2.0
Rotary table position = (5.0, 2.0, -15.0)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis = (3.0, 0, 2.0)
Then, the parameters for the above composite type machine are set as follows:
Table 13.16.3 (b) Example of setting parameters for a composite type machine
Parameter Setting
Description
No. example
19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting
19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift
19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value
X0.0
19667 Y0.0 Controlled-point shift vector
Z0.0
19680 21 Mechanical unit type
19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis
19682 2(Y) Axis direction of the first rotation axis
19684 0 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis
19685 0.0 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19686 4(A) Controlled axis number for the second rotation axis
19687 1(X) Axis direction of the second rotation axis
19689 1 Rotation direction of the second rotation axis
19690 0.0 Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19696#0 0 The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19696#1 0 The second rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19697 3 Direction of the reference tool axis
19700 5.0 Rotary table position (X-axis)
19701 2.0 Rotary table position (Y-axis)
19702 -15.0 Rotary table position (Z-axis)
- 2033 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter Setting
Description
No. example
19703 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis)
19704 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis)
19705 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Z-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19709 3.0
(X-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19710 0.0
(Y-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19711 2.0
(Z-axis)
19712 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis)
19713 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis)
19714 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Z-axis)
CAUTION (Machine configurations resulting in an alarm)
In the machine settings shown below, there may be no angle solution when
G53.1 is issued.
So, specifying G53.1 results in an alarm.
<1> The table rotation axis and tool rotation axis are on the same axis.
Example: Parameter No. 19682 = parameter No. 19687 = 1 (X)
<2> The tool axis direction and tool rotation axis are in the same axis
direction.
Example: Parameter No. 19682 = parameter No. 19697 = 3 (Z)
<2> Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine
Fig. 13.16.3 (e) is an example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine.
Rotation axis C is a tool rotation axis (master) on the Z-axis.
Rotation axis B is a tool rotation axis (slave) on the Y-axis.
Tool rotation type machine
Zm
C
Ym
Xm
B
Intersection offset vector between second and
first rotary axes of tool
(Parameters Nos. 19712,19713,19714)
Intersection offset vector between tool axis and
second rotary axis of tool
(Parameters Nos. 19709,19710,19711)
Tool holder offset value
(Parameter No. 19666)
Fig. 13.16.3 (e) Tool rotation type machine example
In the above tool rotation type machine (Fig. 13.16.3 (e)), if rotation axes B and C are at 0 degrees,
assume the following:
Tool holder offset value = 2.0
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the second rotation axis of the tool = (5.0,0,3.0)
Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool = (3.0,3.0,8.0)
- 2034 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Then, the parameters for the above tool rotation type machine are set as follows:
Table13.16.3 (c) Setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine
Parameter Setting
Description
No. example
19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting
19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift
19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value
X0.0
19667 Y0.0 Controlled-point shift vector
Z0.0
19680 2 Mechanical unit type
19681 6(C) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis
19682 3(Z) Axis direction of the first rotation axis
19684 0 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis
19685 0.0 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19686 5(B) Controlled axis number for the second rotation axis
19687 2(Y) Axis direction of the second rotation axis
19689 0 Rotation direction of the second rotation axis
19690 0.0 Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19696#0 0 The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19696#1 0 The second rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19697 3 Direction of the reference tool axis
19700 0.0 Rotary table position (X-axis)
19701 0.0 Rotary table position (Y-axis)
19702 0.0 Rotary table position (Z-axis)
19703 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis)
19704 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis)
19705 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Z-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19709 5.0
(X-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19710 0.0
(Y-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19711 3.0
(Z-axis)
19712 3.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis)
19713 3.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis)
19714 8.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Z-axis)
CAUTION (Machine configurations resulting in an alarm)
In the machine settings shown below, there may be no angle solution when
G53.1 is issued.
So, specifying G53.1 results in an alarm.
<1> The first rotation axis (master) and second rotation axis (slave) of the
tool are on the same axis.
Example: Parameter No. 19682 = parameter No. 19687 = 1 (X)
<2> The tool axis direction and the second rotation axis (slave) of the tool
are in the same axis direction.
Example: Parameter No. 19697 = parameter No. 19687 = 3 (Z)
<3> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine
Fig. 13.16.3 (f) is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine.
Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis (master) on the X-axis.
Rotation axis B is a table rotation axis (slave) on the Y-axis.
- 2035 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Table rotation type machine
Ym Center of second rotary axis of table
Zm B
Xm
Center of first rotary axis of table
Rotary table position Intersection offset vector between first and
(Parameters Nos. 19700,19701,19702) second rotary axes of table
(Parameters Nos. 19703,19704,19705)
Fig. 13.16.3 (f) Table rotation type machine example
In the above table rotation type machine (Fig. 13.16.3 (f)), if rotation axes A and B are at 0 degrees,
assume the following:
Tool holder offset value = 2.0
Rotary table position = (-10.0,-30.0,0)
Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table = (0,8.0,8.0)
Then, the parameters for the above table rotation type machine are set as follows:
Table 13.16.3 (d) Setting parameters for a table rotation type machine
Parameter Setting
Description
No. example
19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting
19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift
19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value
X0.0
19667 Y0.0 Controlled-point shift vector
Z0.0
19680 12 Mechanical unit type
19681 4(A) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis
19682 1(X) Axis direction of the first rotation axis
19684 1 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis
19685 0.0 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19686 5(B) Controlled axis number for the second rotation axis
19687 2(Y) Axis direction of the second rotation axis
19689 1 Rotation direction of the second rotation axis
19690 0.0 Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
19696#0 0 The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19696#1 0 The second rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
19697 3 Direction of the reference tool axis
19700 -10.0 Rotary table position (X-axis)
19701 -30.0 Rotary table position (Y-axis)
19702 0.0 Rotary table position (Z-axis)
19703 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis)
19704 8.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis)
19705 8.0 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Z-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19709 0.0
(X-axis)
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19710 0.0
(Y-axis)
- 2036 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter Setting
Description
No. example
Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotation axis of the tool
19711 0.0
(Z-axis)
19712 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis)
19713 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis)
19714 0.0 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Z-axis)
CAUTION (Machine configurations resulting in an alarm)
In the machine settings shown below, there may be no angle solution when
G53.1 is issued.
So, specifying G53.1 results in an alarm.
<1>The first rotation axis (master) and second rotation axis (slave) of the tool
are on the same axis.
Example: Parameter No. 19682 = parameter No. 19687= 1 (X)
<2>The tool axis direction and the first rotation axis (master) of the table are in
the same axis direction.
Example: Parameter No. 19697 = parameter No. 19682 = 3 (Z)
NOTE
1 By setting bit 0 (NSC) of parameter No. 19605 to 1, control point shifting in the
tilted working plane indexing of table rotation type can be disabled.
2 The alarm PS5459, "MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT" is issued, when
tool axis direction control (G53.1/G53.6) is specified on the following condition
that parameter is set incorrectly by setting bit 7 (AIR) of parameter No.11221 to
1.
- In case that the movement range of rotation axis (parameter No.19741, 19742,
19743, 19744) is set to the roll-over axis (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is
1)
- In case that roll-over function is set to rotary axis (B type) (bit 0 (ROTx) of
parameter No.1006 is 1 and bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No.1006 is 1)
Second Rotation Axis Control in Tool Axis Direction Control Where the End
Point is a Singular Point
When the end point of tool axis direction control (G53.1/G53.6) during execution of the tilted working
plane indexing is a singular point, the second rotation axis is controlled so that the direction of the second
feature coordinate system matches that of the workpiece coordinate system.
To enable this function, set bit 4 (CFW) of parameter No. 11221 to 1.
When bit 4 (CFW) of parameter No. 11221 is se to 0, if the end point of tool axis direction control
(G53.1/G53.6) is a singular point, the second rotation axis does not operate and only the first rotation axis
turns. As a result, the X- and Y-directions of the feature coordinate system depend on the second
rotation axis immediately before tool axis direction control. (Fig. 13.16.3 (g),Fig. 13.16.3 (h))
- 2037 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Yw Yw
A0 B45 ZF Xw A-90 B45 Xw
YF
Zw Zw
XF
YF
ZF
XF
Fig. 13.16.3 (g) Before G53.1 Fig. 13.16.3 (h) After G53.1
The second rotation axis (B-axis) does not turn.
When this function is enabled (bit 4 (CFW) of parameter No. 11221 = 1), the second rotation axis is
controlled so that the direction of the second feature coordinate system matches that of the workpiece
coordinate system. (Fig. 13.16.3 (i),Fig. 13.16.3 (j))
Yw A-90 B0 Yw
A0 B45 ZF Xw Xw
YF
Zw Zw
XF
Yw
Xw
Zw
Fig. 13.16.3 (i) Before G53.1 Fig. 13.16.3 (j) After G53.1
The second rotation axis (B-axis) moves so that the
direction of the second feature coordinate system
matches that of the workpiece coordinate system.
13.16.3.2 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control
In tilted working plane indexing, tool center point retention type tool axis direction control (G53.6) can
be specified so that tool can be perpendicular to the tilted plane with the tool center point maintained on
the workpiece. In tool center point retention type tool axis direction control, end point of tool center point
can be specified. Then tool center point moves on the feature coordinate system fixed on the workpiece.
The cycle time can be shortened by moving tool axis direction and tool center point simultaneously.
By specifying the distance between the tool center point to the rotation center with R, it is possible to
move the tool so that it is perpendicular to the titled plane while retaining the rotation center shifted from
the tool center point.
Explanation
Fig. 13.16.3 (k) and Fig. 13.16.3 (l) show tool center point retention type tool axis direction control with
R not specified. The tool moves so that it is perpendicular to the tilted plane while retaining the tool
center point on the workpiece.
This function can be used by specifying G53.6 and specifying a tool length offset number with H (D for
the T series). (If H (D) has the modal information for the currently used tool, this function can be used
without specifying H (D).)
- 2038 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
O0002(TCP-HOLD-TYPE)
G00 B0 C0
G5.1 Q1
G68.2 X0 Y0 Z0 I90.0 J45.0 K0
G53.6 H1 (G53.6 D1 for the T series)
Control point
W orkpiece coordinate system
Z
Tool length vector
Tool center
X point
Fig. 13.16.3 (k) Operation of tool center point retention type tool axis direction control
(tool rotation type)
Control point
Tool length vector
Tool center point
Z Workpiece
coordinate system Z’’
X
2nd feature coordinate system
Y’’ Z’
Y’
1st feature
coordinate system
Table
Fig. 13.16.3 (l) Operation of tool center point retention type tool axis direction control
(table rotation type)
- 2039 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
2nd feature
coordinate
system
Zf Zf
1st feature coordinate
system
Xf Xf
Table
Fig.13.16.3 (m) and
Fig.13.16.3 (n) show tool center point retention type tool axis direction control specified with end point of
tool center point. Tool center point moves on the feature coordinate system fixed on the workpiece.
O0012(TCP-HOLD-TYPE-TOOL_ROT)
G00 B0 C0
G5.1 Q1
G68.2 X0 Y0 Z0 I90.0 J45.0 K-90.0
G53.6 H1 X100.0 Y0 Z0 (G53.6 D1 X100.0 Y0 Z0 for the T series)
Control point
Tool length vector
Workpiece Zf
coordinate Tool center
system point
Z Xf
Feature
coordinate
X system
Fig.13.16.3 (m) Operation of tool center point retention type tool axis direction control specified with end
point of tool center point (tool rotation type)
O0022(TCP-HOLD-TYPE-TABLE_ROT)
G00 B0 C0
G5.1 Q1
G68.2 X0 Y0 Z0 I90.0 J45.0 K-90.0
G53.6 H1 X0 Y0 Z0 (G53.6 D1 X0 Y0 Z0 for the T series)
- 2040 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
2nd feature
coordinate
system
Zf Zf
1st feature coordinate
system
Xf Xf
Table
Fig.13.16.3 (n) Operation of tool center point retention type tool axis direction control specified with end
point of tool center point (table rotation type)
Rotation center compensation with the tool center point retention type
In tool center point retention type tool axis direction control, the rotation center can be shifted from the
tool center point by specifying R.
Fig. 13.16.3 (o) and Fig. 13.16.3 (p) show cases in which the rotation center is shifted by specifying the
distance from the tool center point to the workpiece with R.
By specifying this, the tool moves so that it is perpendicular to the titled plane while retaining the rotation
center on the workpiece.
This function can be used by specifying G53.6 and specifying a tool length offset number with H (D for
the T series) and specifying the distance from the tool center point to the rotation center with R.
O0003(CENTER-OF-ROTATION-HOLD-TYPE)
G00 B0 C0
G5.1 Q1
G68.2 X0 Y0 Z0 I90.0 J45.0 K0
G53.6 H1 R200.0 (G53.6 D1 R200.0 for the T series)
- 2041 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Control point
Workpiece
coordinate system
Tool length vector
Z
r Tool center point
X
r
Rotation center
Z’
Y’
Feature coordinate
system
r: Distance from the tool center point to the rotation center
Fig. 13.16.3 (o) Operation of rotation center compensation with tool center point retention type tool axis
direction control (tool rotation type)
Control point
Tool length vector
Workpiece
coordinate
system
Z
Tool center point
r Z’’
X
r 2nd feature coordinate system
Rotation Y’’ Z’
center
Y’
1st feature
coordinate system
Table
r: Distance from the tool center point to the rotation center
Fig. 13.16.3 (p) Operation of rotation center compensation with tool center point retention type tool axis
direction control (table rotation type)
13.16.4 Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length Compensation
Overview
In tool length compensation (G43), G68.2/G68.4 (tilted working plane indexing) and G53.1 (tool axis
direction control)/G53.6 (tool center point retention type tool axis direction control) can be specified.
- 2042 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Accordingly, the G68.2/G68.4 and G53.1/G53.6 commands can be used without canceling tool length
compensation.
Explanation
- G68.2/G68.4 command in tool length compensation
The G68.2/G68.4 command can be executed in tool length compensation.
Absolute coordinates after the G68.2/G68.4 command are based on the position of the tool center point on
the feature coordinate system.
When the tilted working plane indexing is executed with the tool or table tilted on the rotation axis,
absolute coordinates are based on the position of the tool center point with the position of the rotation
axis considered.
Accordingly, machining is allowed even when the tool axis direction is not the Z-axis direction on the
feature coordinate system.
Example of operation 1
N10 G69 ;
N20 G54 G43 H1 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
N30 G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I90. 0J-30.0 K-90.0 ; (rotation by -30 degrees about the Y-axis)
N40 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ;
Z
ZF
XF
G54
X
N40
Feature coordinate N20
system
N30
Fig. 13.16.4 (a) Example of operation 1
Example of operation 2
N10 G69 ;
N20 G54 G43 H1 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 ;
N30 B20.0 ;
N40 G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I90.0 J-30.0 K-90.0 ; (rotation by -30 degrees about the Y-axis)
N50 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ;
Z
ZF
XF
G54
X
N50
Feature coordinate N30 N20
system
N40
Fig. 13.16.4 (b) Example of operation 2 (tool rotation type)
- 2043 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
ZF
XF Z
Specify the tilted
working plane in
the B0 state in G54
N40. X
N20
N50 XF Z
ZF
G54
X
Feature coordinate
system N30
N20
N40
The feature coordinate system specified in N40 moves
according to the movement about the table rotation axis.
Fig. 13.16.4 (c) Example of operation 2 (table rotation type)
Example of operation 3
N30 G43 X0 Y0 Z0 B20.0 ;
N40 G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I90.0 J-30.0 K-90.0 ; (rotation by -30 degrees about the Y-axis)
N50 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ;
N60 B-20.0
N70 G68.4 X_ Y_ Z_ I90.0 J40.0 K-90.0 ;（incremental multiple command: rotation by 40 degrees about
the Y-axis）
N80 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ;
ZF1
ZF1
N50
XF1 XF1
N60
Feature coordinate Feature coordinate
system system N80
N40 N70
Fig. 13.16.4 (d) Example of operation 3 (tool rotation type)
- 2044 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
ZF2
XF2
N50 XF1
ZF1
Specify the tilted
working plane in the
B20 state in N70.
Feature coordinate
system
N40
ZF1
ZF2
XF1
N80
XF2
N60 Feature coordinate
system
N70
The feature coordinate system specified in N70 moves
according to the movement about the table rotation axis.
Fig. 13.16.4 (e) Example of operation 3 (table rotation type)
G53.1 command in tool length compensation
The G53.1 command can be executed in tool length compensation.
G53.1 operation in tool length compensation is performed in the same way as in the tool length
compensation cancel mode.
Absolute coordinates after the G53.1 command are based on the position of the tool center point on the
feature coordinate system after the G53.1 command is specified.
Example of operation 4
N10 G54 G43 H1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
N20 G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I90.0 J-30.0 K-90.0 ; (rotation by -30 degrees about the Y-axis)
N30 G53.1 ;
N40 X100.0 Y0 Z0 ;
- 2045 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Z
ZF
XF
G54
N30 X
N4 N10
Feature coordinate
system
N20
Fig. 13.16.4 (f) Example of operation 4 (tool rotation type)
ZF
XF Z
Feature coordinate
system G54
N20
X
N10
ZF
Second feature
coordinate system N40
N30 Z
XF
G54
X
N30
Fig. 13.16.4 (g) Example of operation 4 (table rotation type)
G53.6 command in tool length compensation
The G53.6 command can be executed in tool length compensation.
G53.6 operation in tool length compensation is performed in the same way as in the tool length
compensation cancel mode.
G69 command in tool length compensation
The G69 command can be executed in tool length compensation.
After G69 operation in tool length compensation, the tool length compensation vector represents the Z
direction of the workpiece coordinate system regardless of the position of the rotation axis.
- 2046 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1205 3TW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 3TW When workpiece coordinate system selection is specified with G code in tilted working
plane indexing mode:
0: The alarm PS5462, "ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69)" is issued.
1: Workpiece coordinate system selection is executed.
CAUTION
When this parameter is 1, only G54 to G59 or G54.1 can be
specified. Specifying G52 or G92 causes alarm PS5462. Specifying
G54 to G59 or G54.1 suppresses buffering.
Feature coordinate Feature coordinate
system (G68.2) system (G68.2)
Coordinate Coordinate
system zero system zero
point shift point shift
amount amount
Machine
zero point
G54 G55
Feature coordinate
system (G68.2) Feature coordinate
system (G68.2)
Coordinate
Coordinate system zero
system zero point shift
point shift amount
amount
G56 G57
Program example
G90 G17
G54
G68.2 X_Y_Z_ I_ J_ K_
X_Y_Z_: Coordinate system zero point shift amount
G53.1
G43H_
G55 X_Y_Z_
G56 X_Y_Z_
G57 X_Y_Z_
G49
G69
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 DAK
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#6 DAK Specifies whether to display coordinates in the program coordinate system or workpiece
coordinate system as absolute coordinates when the 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode or the tilted working plane indexing mode is set.
0: Display coordinates in the program coordinate system.
1: Display coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system.
- 2047 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 LV3
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 LV3 When system variables #100101 to #100132 (current position coordinates) and #100151
to #100182 (skip coordinates) are read in the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
mode or tilted working plane indexing mode:
0: Coordinates of the workpiece coordinate system can be read.
1: Coordinates of the program coordinate system after 3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion or tilted working plane indexing can be read.
This parameter applies also to system variables #5041 to #5060 (current position
coordinates) and #5061 to #5080 (skip coordinates).
5412 Rapid traverse rate for canned cycle for drilling in 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for canned cycle for drilling in the 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode or the tilted working plane indexing mode.
Minimum distance used for determining a plane when a tilted working plane indexing with three points
11220
is specified
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
When a tilted working plane indexing with three points is specified, if the distance (used
for determining a place) between a straight line passing two points and the remaining one
point is short, the plane is unstable. In this parameter, set the minimum distance used for
determining a plane. If the distance is shorter than the value set in this parameter, an
alarm PS5457, “G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR” is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11221 AIR CFW D3R MTW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 MTW Multiple commands of tilted working plane indexing are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 2048 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#1 D3R In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode or tilted working plane indexing
mode, rapid traverse in canned cycle for drilling is:
0: Performed in the cutting feed mode.
1: Performed in the rapid traverse mode.
#4 CFW When the end point of tool axis direction control (G53.1/G53.6) during execution of the
tilted working plane indexing is a singular point:
0: The second rotation axis is not operated.
1: The second rotation axis is controlled so that the direction of the second feature
coordinate system matches that of the workpiece coordinate system.
#7 AIR If the movement range of rotation axis (parameter No.19741, 19742, 19743, 19744) is set
to the roll-over axis, or roll-over function is set to rotary axis (B type), when tool axis
direction controll is executed:
0: The alarm PS5459, "MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT" is not issued.
1: The alarm PS5459, "MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT" is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 GGD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#1 GGD The G code guidance screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 TFR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 TFR The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of the tilted working plane indexing
is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree.
12321 Normal axis direction
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
When a tilted working plane indexing (G68.3) is issued to perform 3-dimensional
machining manual feed in the latitude direction, longitude direction, and tool axis
direction, this parameter sets an axis parallel to the normal direction.
1 : Positive (+) X-axis direction
2 : Positive (+) Y-axis direction
3 : Positive (+) Z-axis direction
0 : Reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697)
- 2049 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Angle used to determine whether to assume the tool axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction
12322
(parameter No. 12321)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] deg
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 90
When a tilted working plane indexing (G68.3) is issued to perform 3-dimensional
machining manual feed in the latitude direction, longitude direction, and tool axis
direction, if the angle between the tool axis direction and normal direction (parameter No.
12321) is too small, the tool axis direction is assumed to be parallel to the normal
direction (parameter No. 12321). This parameter sets the maximum angle at which the
tool axis direction is assumed to be parallel to the normal direction.
When this parameter is set to 0 or a value outside the valid range, it is set to 1 degree.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13451 ATW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 ATW When I, J, and K are all set to 0 in a block that specifies a feature coordinate system setup
command (G68.2), which is a tilted working plane indexing:
0: An alarm PS5457 “G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT ERROR” is issued.
1: A feature coordinate system with a tilted plane angle of 0 degrees is assumed for
operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19602 D3D
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 D3D Specifies whether to display the distance to go in the program coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system during the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion or
the tilted working plane indexing.
0: Display the distance to go in the program coordinate system.
1: Display the distance to go in the workpiece coordinate system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19605 NSC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 NSC For the machine type that has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No.
19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type), control point shifting in the tilted
working plane indexing is:
0: Enabled.
Set bit 4 (SPR) and bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665.
1: Disabled.
- 2050 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19608 PRI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 PRI Among multiple end point candidates that exist when a movement is made on a rotation
axis by a command such as I, J, and K when a slanted surface machining command is
specified under tilted working plane indexing:
0: A combination in which the master (first rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of tool rotation type or table rotation type. A
combination in which the table (second rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of composite type.
1: A combination in which the slave (second rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of tool rotation type or table rotation type. A
combination in which the tool (first rotation axis) makes a smaller angular
movement is selected for a machine of composite type.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19665 SVC SPR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by:
0: Automatic calculation.
1: Using parameter No. 19667.
Bit 5 (SVC) of Bit 4 (SPR)
parameter of parameter Shift of controlled point
No. 19665 No. 19665
0 - Shift is not performed as not done conventionally.
The controlled point is shifted according to the result of the
following automatic calculation:
- (Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first
1 0 rotation axis of the tool + intersection offset vector between the
second and first rotation axes of the tool + tool holder offset
(parameter No. 19666))
(See the figure next.)
The controlled point is shifted.
1 1 As the shift vector, the vector set in parameter No. 19667 is
used.
- 2051 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Shift of controlled point
First rotary axis of tool
F Controlled point
Controlled-point shift vector
E
Second rotary axis of tool
D
Tool holder offset
Tool length offset
Tool center point
[Controlled-point shift vector when automatically calculated]
#5 SVC The controlled point is:
0: Not shifted.
1: Shifted.
The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665.
NOTE
When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when
parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type),
the controlled point is not shifted regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
19666 Tool holder offset value
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) specific to the machine from the control
point to the tool attachment position in tool length compensation (after specification of
G53.1 in the tilted working plane indexing mode) or 3-dimensional manual feed. In tool
length compensation (not in the tilted working plane indexing mode), however, tool
holder offset can be enabled or disabled with bit 7 (ETH) of parameter No. 19665.
NOTE
Set a radius value.
19667 Controlled-point shift vector
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
- 2052 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Set the shift vector for the controlled point. This value becomes valid when bit 5 (SVC)
of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1, and bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665 is set to 1.
NOTE
Set a radius value.
19680 Mechanical unit type
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 21
Specify the type of the mechanical unit.
Parameter Mechanical Controlled rotation
Master and slave
No. 19680 unit type axis
Mechanism having no
0
rotation axis
Tool rotation Two rotation axes of The first rotation axis is the master, and
2
type the tool the second rotation axis is the slave.
Table Two rotation axes of The first rotation axis is the master, and
12
rotation type the table the second rotation axis is the slave.
One rotation axis of The first rotation axis is the tool rotation
21 Mixed type the tool + one rotation axis, and the second rotation axis is the
axis of the table table rotation axis.
First rotary axis (master)
Tool rotary
Second rotary axis (slave) axes
Second rotary axis (slave)
Table rotary
First rotary axis (master) axes
NOTE
A hypothetical axis is also counted as a controlled rotary axis.
<Hypothetical axis>
In some cases, it is convenient to use an imaginary rotary axis
whose angle is fixed to a certain value. For example, suppose that
a tool is mounted in a tilted manner through an attachment. In such
a case, the rotary axis considered hypothetically is a hypothetical
axis. Bits 0 (IA1) and 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696 determine
whether each rotary axis is an ordinary rotary axis or a hypothetical
axis.
19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
- 2053 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis.
For a hypothetical axis (when bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0.
Example)
Assuming that the axis configuration in path 1 is X,Y,Z,B,C and the axis configuration in
path 2 is X,Z,C,Y,B, set the parameter to 5 in path 1 and to 3 in path 2 if C is the first
rotation axis in each path.
19682 Axis direction of the first rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Specify the axis direction of the first rotation axis.
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis
2
Y
X Parameter No.19682
19684 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a
positive move command is issued.
0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the axis
specified in parameter No. 19682 (right-hand thread rotation)
1: Counterclockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the
axis specified in parameter No. 19682 (left-hand thread rotation)
Normally, 0 is set for a tool rotation axis, and 1 is set for a table rotation axis.
19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
- 2054 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis (bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is
1), set the rotation angle.
19686 Controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis.
For a hypothetical axis (bit 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0.
[Example] Assuming that the axis configuration in path 1 is X,Y,Z,B,C and the axis configuration in
path 2 is X,Z,C,Y,B, set the parameter to 4 in path 1 and to 5 in path 2 if B is the second
rotation axis in each path.
19687 Axis direction of the second rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Specify the axis direction of the second rotation axis.
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis
When the second rotation axis is the slave axis, the direction when the master axis is at 0
degrees must be set.
19689 Rotation direction of the second rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 1
Set the direction in which the second rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a
positive move command is issued.
0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the axis
specified in parameter No. 19687 (right-hand thread rotation)
1: Counterclockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the
axis specified in parameter No. 19687 (left-hand thread rotation)
Normally, 0 is set for a tool rotation axis, and 1 is set for a table rotation axis.
19690 Rotation angle when the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis (bit 1 (IA2) of parameter No. 19696
is 1), set the rotation angle.
- 2055 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19696 IA2 IA1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 IA1
0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis.
If IA1 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis (parameter No.
19681).
Also, set parameters Nos. 19682 to 19685 on the assumption that there is a rotation axis.
#1 IA2
0: The second rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis.
1: The second rotation axis is a hypothetical axis.
If IA2 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the second rotation axis (parameter No.
19686).
Also, set parameters Nos. 19687 to 19690 on the assumption that there is a rotation axis.
19697 Reference tool axis direction
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for
controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees. Also, set the tool axis direction in the machine
coordinate system in a mechanism in which only the rotation axes for controlling the
table are present (there is no rotation axis for controlling the tool).
1: Positive X-axis direction
2: Positive Y-axis direction
3: Positive Z-axis direction
When the reference tool axis direction is neither the X-, Y-, nor Z-axis direction, set the
reference direction in this parameter, then set appropriate angles as the reference angle
RA and reference angle RB (parameters Nos. 19698 and 19699).
- 2056 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Reference tool axis direction
Tool axis direction is positive Z-axis direction.
Tool axis direction is positive Y-axis direction.
X
Tool axis direction is positive X-axis direction.
19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes)
19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes)
19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 or 21. The vector from the
origin of the machine coordinate system to point A on the first rotation axis of the table is
set as the rotary table position in the machine coordinate system.
Rotary table position
A
First rotary axis of table
Zm
Ym
Rotary table position
Xm
NOTE
As point A, set a position that is easy to measure on the first rotary
axis of the table.
Set a radius value.
If the rotary table is moved along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis or all of these
axes, set the position of the rotary table when the machine
coordinates of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes are all set to 0.
- 2057 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table
19703
(X-axis of the basic three axes)
Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table
19704
(Y-axis of the basic three axes)
Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table
19705
(Z-axis of the basic three axes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when the first rotation axis and second rotation axis of the table do
not intersect. These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12. When
the rotation axes for controlling the table are all at 0 degrees, the vector from point A to
point B on the second rotation axis of the table is set as the intersection offset vector in
the machine coordinate system.
When table rotary axes do not intersect
Second rotary axis of table
A
First rotary axis of
table
Zm
Ym Intersection offset vector between first and second rotary
axes of table
Xm
Rotary table position
NOTE
As point B, set a position that is easy to measure on the second
rotary axis of the table.
Set a radius value.
19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes)
19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes)
19711 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Z-axis of the basic three axes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
- 2058 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Set these parameters when the tool axis and tool rotation axis do not intersect.
These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 2 or 21.
If parameter No. 19680 is 21, set the vector from point D on the tool axis to point E
determined on the tool rotation axis as the intersection offset vector in the machine
coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees.
If parameter No. 19680 is 2, set the vector from point D on the tool axis to point E
determined on the second rotation axis of the tool as the intersection offset vector in the
machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0
degrees.
When tool axis and tool rotary axis do not intersect
Controlled point
Intersection offset vector between tool axis and
tool rotary axis
E
Tool rotary
axis
D
Tool holder offset
Tool length offset
Tool center point
NOTE
Point D is determined by adding the tool length offset and tool
holder offset (parameter No. 19666) to the tool tip. As point E, set a
position that is easy to measure.
Set a radius value.
Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool
19712
(X-axis of the basic three axes)
Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool
19713
(Y-axis of the basic three axes)
Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool
19714
(Z-axis of the basic three axes)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set these parameters when the rotation axes of the tool do not intersect.
These parameters are valid when parameter No. 19680 is set to 2.
Set the vector from point E on the second rotation axis of the tool to point F on the first
rotation axis of the tool as the intersection offset vector in the machine coordinate system
when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees.
- 2059 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
When tool axis and tool rotary axis do not intersect
First rotary axis of tool Controlled point
Intersection offset vector between second and first
F rotary axes of tool
Intersection offset vector between tool axis and second
E rotary axis of tool
Second rotary
axis of tool D
Tool holder offset
Tool length offset
Tool center point
NOTE
As point F, set a position that is easy to measure.
Set a radius value.
19741 Upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis in tool
axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the movement
range of the first rotation axis is not specified or the first rotation axis is the roll-over axis,
this parameter and parameter No. 19742 must both be set to 0.
19742 Lower limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the lower limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis in tool
axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the movement
range of the first rotation axis is not specified or the first rotation axis is the roll-over axis,
this parameter and parameter No. 19741 must both be set to 0.
19743 Upper limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
- 2060 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the upper limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis in
tool axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the
movement range of the second rotation axis is not specified or the second rotation axis is
the roll-over axis, this parameter and parameter No. 19744 must both be set to 0.
19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
This parameter sets the lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis in
tool axis direction control of the tilted working plane indexing (G53.1). When the
movement range of the second rotation axis is not specified or the second rotation axis is
the roll-over axis, this parameter and parameter No. 19743 must both be set to 0.
13.16.5 Restrictions of Tilted Working Plane Indexing
- Basic restrictions
The restrictions imposed on 3-dimensional coordinate conversion also
apply to the tilted working plane indexing.
The following presents the restrictions to bear in mind in particular:
- Increment system
The same increment system must be used for the basic three axes used by this function.
- Rapid traverse command
Linear rapid traverse (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401=1) must be set for the rapid traverse command.
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
If an attempt is made to set a new coordinate system by performing 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
in a feature coordinate system, an alarm is also raised.
- Positioning in the machine coordinate system
Positioning commands in the machine coordinate system such as G28, G30, and G53 operate in the
machine coordinate system rather than the feature coordinate system.
- 2061 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- External mirror image
If an attempt is made to use this function and an external mirror image function simultaneously, this
function takes effect before the external mirror image function.
Y
Yc
Actual path Programmed path
Xc
Feature coordinate system
Workpiece coordinate system Position where mirroring is applied
Fig. 13.16 (a)
- Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control
Reset
Performing a reset during tool center point retention type tool axis direction control results in the
operation to be performed when the following parameters are set regardless of whether the reset is
performed in the foreground or background. Thus, do not use the background during tool center point
retention type tool axis direction control.
(1) Bit 2 (D3R) of parameter No. 5400 = 0: Clears the tilted working plane indexing.
(2) Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 = 1: Clears with a reset.
(3) Bit 0 (C08) of parameter No. 3407 = 0: Clears the G code in group 08.
(4) Bit 7 (C23) of parameter No. 3408 = 0: Clears the G code in group 23.
(5) Bit 7 (CFH) of parameter No. 3409 = 0: Clears the F, H, D, and T codes.
(6) Bit 6 (LVK) of parameter No. 5003 = 0: Clears the tool length compensation vector.
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
When using tool center point retention type tool axis direction control, use acceleration/deceleration
before look ahead interpolation at the same time. If acceleration/deceleration before look ahead
interpolation is not used, a shock may result. Furthermore, be sure to set the following parameters:
(1) Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 1:
Linear rapid traverse
(2) Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 = 1:
For rapid traverse, uses acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
(3) Parameter No. 1671:
Acceleration of acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse.
(4) Parameter No. 1672:
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for rapid
traverse.
(5) Parameter No. 1660:
Maximum permissible acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
If any of these settings is not made, alarm PS5458, "ILLEGAL USE OF G53.1/G53.6", occurs.
- Relationships with other modal commands
G41, G42, and G40 (cutter compensation), G43, G49 (tool length compensation), G51.1 and G50.1
(programmable mirror image), and canned cycle commands must have nesting relationships with G68.2.
- 2062 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
In other words, first issue G68.2 when the modes mentioned above are off, turn the modes on and off,
then issue G69.
- Manual reference position return
Execution of manual reference position return in the tilted working plane indexing mode issues alarm
PS5324, “REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE”. Before performing manual reference position return,
cancel the tilted working plane indexing mode.
- Hypothetical axis of a table rotation axis
When a table rotation axis is set as a hypothetical axis, tilted working plane indexing is performed on the
assumption that the table rotation axis is at 0 degrees.
- Specifiable G codes
The G codes that can be specified in the tilted working plane indexing mode are listed below.
Specifying a G code other than these codes results in alarm PS5462 “ILLEGAL COMMAND
(G68.2/G69)”.
- Positioning (G00)
- Linear interpolation (G01)
- Circular interpolation / helical interpolation (G02/G03)
- Dwell (G04)
- AI advanced preview control (M Series), AI contour control, Nano smoothing OFF/ON (G05.1
Q0/Q1/Q3)
- Exact stop (G09)
- Programmable data input (G10)
- Programmable data input mode cancel (G11)
- Plane selection (G17/G18/G19)
- Automatic return to reference position (G28)
- Movement from reference position (G29)
- 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return (G30)
- Skip function (G31)
- Cutter compensation : cancel (G40)
- Tool radius or tool nose radius compensation (G41/G42)
- Tool length compensation + (G43)
- Tool length compensation - (G44)
- Tool length compensation cancel (G49,G49.1)
- Programmable mirror image cancel (G50.1)
- Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
- Local coordinate system (G52)
- Machine coordinate system setting (G53)
- Tool axis direction control (G53.1)
- Workpiece coordinate system selection (G54 to G59, G54.1)
- Exact stop mode (G61)
- Tapping mode (G63)
- Cutting mode(G64)
- Macro call (G65)
- Macro modal call A (G66)
- Macro modal call B (G66.1)
- Macro modal call A/B cancel (G67)
- Canned cycle for drilling (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89)
- Absolute programming (G90)
- Incremental programming (G91)
- Constant surface speed control (G96)
- Constant surface speed control cancel (G97)
- Canned cycle : return to initial level (G98)
- 2063 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- Canned cycle : return to R point level (G99)
M
- Tool offset increase (G45)
- Tool offset decrease (G46)
- Tool offset double increase (G47)
- Tool offset double decrease (G48)
- Scaling cancel (G50)
- Scaling (G51)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode off (G69)
- Inverse time feed (G93)
- Feed per minute (G94)
- Feed per revolution (G95)
- Modal G codes that allow specification of a tilted working plane indexing
A tilted working plane indexing can be specified in the modal G code states listed below.
In a modal state other than the following modal G codes, specifying the tilted working plane indexing
results in alarm PS5462 “ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69)”:
- Positioning (G00)
- Linear interpolation (G01)
- Programmable data input mode cancel (G11)
- Plane selection (G17/G18/G19)
- Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel (G13.1)
- Polar coordinates command cancel (G15)
- Input in inch (G20 (G70))
- Input in mm (G21 (G71))
- Stored stroke check function (G22/G23)
- Cutter compensation : cancel (G40)
- Tool length compensation cancel (G49,G49.1)
- Programmable mirror image cancel (G50.1)
- Workpiece coordinate system selection (G54 to G59, G54.1)
- Exact stop mode (G61)
- Tapping mode (G63)
- Cutting mode (G64)
- Macro modal call A/B cancel (G67)
- Canned cycle cancel (G80)
- Absolute programming (G90)
- Incremental programming (G91)
- Constant surface speed control cancel (G97)
- Canned cycle : return to initial level (G98)
- Canned cycle : return to R point level (G99)
M
- Scaling cancel (G50)
- Automatic corner override (G62)
- Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode off (G69)
- Inverse time feed (G93)
- Feed per minute (G94)
- Feed per revolution (G95)
- Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel (G113)
- 2064 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0438 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN A parameter when Tool center point retention type tool axis direction
TOOL DIRC CMP control (G53.6) is performed is illegal on a 5-axis machine.
Parameter settings
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. Set
parameter No. 1660.
- Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled. Set bit 1 of parameter No. 1401, bit 5 of parameter No.
19501, and parameter No. 1671.
- Any of machine configuration parameters Nos. 19680 to 19714 is
illegal.
- The axis set in parameter No. 19681 or 19686 is not a rotation axis.
- The basic three axes are not set in parameter No. 1022.
PS5324 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return cannot be performed during
INCOMPLETE three-dimensional coordinate conversion or execution of the tilted
working plane indexing.
PS5456 TOO MANY G68.2 Tilted working plane indexing G68.2 was specified more than once.
NESTING To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation, then
specify the coordinate conversion.
PS5457 G68.2/G68.3 FORMAT A G68.2/G68.3 format error occurred.
ERROR
PS5458 ILLEGAL USE OF - G53.1/G53.6 is specified before a G68.2 command.
G53.1/G53.6 - G53.1/G53.6 is not specified alone.
- No tool is specified with a G53.6 command.
PS5459 MACHINE PARAMETER - A machine configuration parameter (parameters Nos. 19665 to
INCORRECT 19667, 19680 to 19714, or 12321) is incorrect.
- The axis set in parameter No. 19681 or 19686 is not a rotation axis.
- The basic three axes are not set in parameter No. 1022.
- A rotary axis end point found by the NC with the tilted working plane
indexing is not within the range set by parameters No 19741 to
19744.
- When tool axis direction control (G53.1/G53.6) is specified on the
following condition that parameter is set incorrectly if bit 7 (AIR) of
parameter No.11221 is set 1.
- In case that the movement range of rotation axis is set to the
roll-over axis
- In case that roll-over function is set to rotary axis (B type)
5462 ILLEGAL COMMAND (1) The modal setting used when G68.2 or G69 is specified is incorrect.
(G68.2/G69) (2) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the G68.2 mode.
(3) The offset vector of tool radius/tool nose radius compensation is not
canceled when G68.2 or G69 is specified.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Tilted working plane indexing
- 2065 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.17 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER
Overview
The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable
programs, registers them in the FLASH ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described
below.
NC programs are divided into two types: Programs that are hardly modified after created (programs
created using custom macros) and programs that differ depending on the workpiece (machining
programs). Since different types of programs are processed in the same way, a custom macro may be
destroyed due to a battery failure or operator error.
Features
• Since the program is stored in executable form program, the execution speed is high. Machine time
is then reduced, and precision is improved.
• Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no lost of data of battery failure or corruption.
Reliability is improved.
• Stored programs are not displayed on the program screen, so know-how of the machine tool builders
is kept protected.
• Since custom macros are stored in FLASH ROM, the program editing memory can be used
effectively.
• The user can call the macro without knowing the stored program. A custom macro can be created
and executed in the program edit memory.
• An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or by selecting screens by the soft key.
The machine tool builder can extend the control function by using such functions as machine
program creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC data read/write
functions.
NOTE
This macro executor function is an optional function.
Note
NOTE
To display graphics for the macro executor, enable the "Graphic display" (bit 3
(NGR) of parameter No.8134 is 0).
Reference item
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63943EN-2)
- 2066 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
13.18 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER
ROUNDING (M SERIES)
M
Overview
Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following:
• Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5105 SBC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
- 2067 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.19 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING
T
Overview
A chamfering or corner rounding block can automatically be inserted between linear interpolation (G01)
along a single axis and that along a single axis normal to that single axis.
Chamfering or corner rounding is inserted for a command to move the tool along two axes on the plane
determined by the plane selection (G17, G18, or G19) command.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No.8134 to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CCR
3405
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering
0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”.
In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with
comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".
1: Address is “C”.
Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A"
without comma.
NOTE
If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the
compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the
cutter compensation/ tool nose radius compensation mode cannot
be used.
If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis
name, the chamfer function cannot be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRD
3453
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming
are both enabled,
0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
- 2068 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5105 SBC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CCR
8134
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:
0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01
CHF/CNR (or vertical line). Modify the program.
PS0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I,
J, K and R are specified.
PS0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the
CHF/CNR corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the
program.
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
PS0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle
PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or
COMMAND corner R in the last block is terminated in the middle.
PS0306 MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or
K command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is
specified.
- 2069 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.20 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T
SERIES)
T
Overview
Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and other dimensional values on
machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering
and corner rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an optional angle.
This programming is only valid in memory operation mode.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 2 (NDD) of parameter No.8137 to 0.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DDP CCR
3405
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering
0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”.
In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with
comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".
1: Address is “C”.
Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A"
without comma.
NOTE
If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the
compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the
cutter compensation/ tool nose radius compensation mode cannot
be used.
If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis
name, the chamfer function cannot be used.
#5 DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming
0: Normal specification
1: A supplementary angle is given.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRD
3453
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2070 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
#0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming
are both enabled,
0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRC
3458
#7 CRC In Direct drawing dimension programming function, when a minus value is commanded
as a chamfering value / corner R value:
0: Alarm PS0055 “MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR” is issued.
1: Alarm is not issued. A minus value is converted to a plus value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NDD
8137
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#2 NDD Direct drawing dimension programming is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
PS0056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point
CHF/CNR and an angle were specified in the block next to the block in
which only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program.
PS0057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension
drawing programming. Modify the program.
PS0058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
programming. Modify the program.
PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during
direct input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (bit 4 of parameter No. 3405
= 1) was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a
comma was specified.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Direct drawing dimensions programming
- 2071 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
13.21 PATTERN DATA INPUT
Overview
In the program of the fixed form processing with the custom macro, the operator select the processing
pattern on the menu screen and specified the size, number and so on to the variable on the custom macro
screen. As above mentioned, this function enables users to perform programming simply without
programming using an existing NC language.
With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can prepare the program of a hole machining cycle
(such as a boring cycle or tapping cycle) using the custom macro function, and can store it into the
program memory.
This cycle is assigned pattern names, such as BOR1, TAP3, and DRL2.
An operator can select a pattern from the menu of pattern names displayed on the screen.
Data (pattern data) which is to be specified by the operator should be created in advance with variables in
a drilling cycle.
The operator can identify these variables using names such as DEPTH, RETURN RELIEF, FEED,
MATERIAL or other pattern data names. The operator assigns values (pattern data) to these names.
The operator selects the pattern on the menu screen, and the selected pattern number is assigned to the
system variable. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a program then
referring to the system variable in the program.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 7 (NPD) of parameter No.8135 to 0.
Explanation
This function is consist of Pattern menu screen and Custom macro screen.
The process pattern is selected on the pattern screen.
Then the process pattern is selected, the custom macro screen is displayed.
On this custom macro screen, the variable with the name and comment is displayed according to the
selected process pattern.
The process data can be input by referring to the variable name with the numerical value on the drawing.
A sample pattern menu screen and custom macro screens are shown below.
(1) Pattern menu screen
Fig. 13.21 (a) Pattern data menu screen
- 2072 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
(2) Custom macro screen
The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen.
The menu title and pattern name on the pattern menu screen and the variable name on the custom
macro screen can be defined
The position of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen can be selected by setting bit 0
(POC) of parameter No. 11318.
Fig. 13.21 (b) Custom macro screen (parameter No. 11318#0=0)
Fig. 13.21 (c) Custom macro screen (parameter No. 11318#0=1)
Explanation of operation
The following steps 1-3 explain how to display the pattern menu screen.
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU].
- 2073 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- Pattern menu screen
The pattern menu in the Fig. 13.21 (d) is displayed.
Fig. 13.21 (d) Pattern data menu screen
Select the pattern on this screen
The next two methods are effective.
• Selection by cursor
Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the soft key
[SELECT] or key.
• Selection by setting of pattern number
Enter the number on the left of the pattern name, and press the soft key [SELECT] or key.
The selected pattern number is registered to system variable #5900. The custom macro of the selected
pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program No. search) with an external signal.
This program refers to the system variable #5900 in the program. This system variable #5900 is kept after
power-off.
- 2074 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
- Custom macro variable screen
The custom macro screen in the Fig. 13.21 (e) is displayed.
Fig. 13.21 (e) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input
When the screen is changed to the custom macro screen, the macro variable number that is selected first is
specified with the parameters Nos.6101 to 6110. The macro variables that variable name is not defined
can be input, too.
NOTE
1 The variable name that is displayed cannot be used as the common variable
name of the NC program.
2 When the common variable name is defined by SETVN command, the variable
name defined by pattern data input function is given priority.
3 When the bit 0 (POC) of parameter No. 11318 is set to 1, The variable number is
three digit display.
And the value of 12 digits or more is input, 11 digits from head of value are
displayed.
Example)
Input: -123456789.123 → Display: -123456789.1
Parameter
6101 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 1 is selected
6102 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 2 is selected
6103 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 3 is selected
6104 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 4 is selected
6105 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 5 is selected
6106 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 6 is selected
6107 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 7 is selected
6108 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 8 is selected
- 2075 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
6109 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 9 is selected
6110 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 10 is selected
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0,100 to 199,500 to 999
Set the macro variable number to be selected first when a pattern menu is selected on the
custom macro screen.
If 0 is specified, 500 is assumed.
If a value beyond the above range is entered, 100 is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NPD
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 NPD Pattern data input is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11318 POC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 POC When the pattern data input function is used, on the custom macro screen a comment is:
0: Displayed in the lower part of the screen.
1: Displayed on the right side of the screen.
NOTE
This parameter is not used when a 15-inch display unit is used.
Definition of the screen
The definition of the screen is performed by NC program.
- Program configuration
This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten
programs for the definition of custom macro screen.
Register the macro program for the pattern data input function to the following folder.
//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY/PATH1 to PATH[n]
* [n] is the maximum path number of the system
* The PATH1 to PATH[n] should be made by the machine tool builder.
The program number is as follows
Table 13.21 (a) Program Number and screen
Program No. Screen
O9500 Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu.
O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.1
- 2076 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Program No. Screen
O9502 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.2
O9503 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.3
O9504 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.4
O9505 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.5
O9506 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.6
O9507 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.7
O9508 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.8
O9509 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.9
O9510 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.10
Table 13.21 (b) Macro commands used in the pattern data input function
G code H code Function
G65 H90 Specifies the menu title.
G65 H91 Specifies the pattern name.
G65 H92 Specifies the pattern data title.
G65 H93 Specifies the variable name.
G65 H94 Specifies the comment.
Table 13.21 (c) System variables used in the pattern data input function
System variable Function
#5900 Pattern No. selected by user.
Definition of the pattern menu screen
Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows.
Menu title
Pattern name
Fig. 13.21 (f) Pattern menu screen
Definition of menu title
The character string displayed in the menu title of the pattern menu screen is defined.
The menu title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size
letter such as kanji character.
- 2077 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
- Format
G65 H90 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H90 : Specifies the menu title
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of title
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of title
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of title
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of title
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of title
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of title
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
Definition of pattern name
The character string displayed in the pattern name which becomes a menu item is defined.
The pattern name is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size
letter.
- Format
G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H91 : Specifies the pattern name
P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name
The menu number = 1 to 10
Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name
R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of pattern name
I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of pattern name
J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of pattern name
K_ : The code of 9thd and 10th characters of pattern name
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
Example
The following is example for pattern menu screen.
Fig. 13.21 (g) Pattern menu screen
- 2078 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
O9500
N1 G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080 I065084 J084069 K082078;... "HOLE PATTERN"
N2 G65 H91 P1 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032; ............ "BOLT HOLE"
N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071082 R073068; ........................................................ "GRID"
N4 G65 H91 P3 Q076073 R078069 I032065 J078071 K076069; ............ "LINE ANGLE"
N5 G65 H91 P4 Q084065 R080080 I073078 J071032; .......................... "TAPPING"
N6 G65 H91 P5 Q068082 R073076 I076073 J078071;............................ "DORILLING"
N7 G65 H91 P6 Q066079 R082073 I078071; .......................................... "BORING"
N8 G65 H91 P7 Q080079 R067075 I069084; .......................................... "POCKET"
N9 G65 H91 P8 Q080069 R067075; ........................................................ "PECK"
N10 G65 H91 P9 Q084069 R083084; ...................................................... "TEST"
N11 G65 H91 P10 Q066065 R067075; .................................................... "BACK"
N12 M99;
Definition of the custom macro screen
The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows.
Macro variable name Title
Comment
Fig. 13.21 (h) Custom macro screen
Definition of title
The character string displayed in the title of the custom macro screen is defined.
The title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter.
- Format
G65 H92 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H92 : Specifies the menu title
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the menu title
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the menu title
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the menu title
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the menu title
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the menu title
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of the menu title
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
- 2079 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Definition of macro variable
The character string displayed in the macro variable name is defined.
The macro variable is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size
letter.
The following macro variable numbers can be used:
#100 to 199 (100 variables)
#500 to 999 (500 variables), 600 variables in total
- Format
G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H93 : Specifies the variable name
P_ : Specifies the variable number
Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999
Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name
R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the variable name
I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the variable name
J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the variable name
K_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the variable name
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
Definition of a comment
The character string of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen is defined.
The comment is specified by up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size
letter per one block.
• When the comment is displayed at the bottom(bit 0 of parameter No. 11318=0)
The number of blocks is defined up to maximum 9 blocks.
One line is composition of 3 blocks and maximum 3 lines can be displayed.
The comment is displayed in the order specified by program as the Fig. 13.21 (i).
The block is arranged in defined order.
Block 1 Block 2 Block 3
Block 4 Block 5 Block 6
Block 7 Block 8 Block 9
Fig. 13.21 (i) Block layout of comment
• When the comment is displayed at the right (bit 0 of parameter No. 11318=1)
1 line is composed by 1 blocks, the maximum number of lines is 8 on the 8.4-inch display unit or 12
on the 10.4-inch display unit.
- 2080 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
- Format
G65 H94 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H94 : Specifies the comment
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of comment
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of comment
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of comment
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of comment
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of comment
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of comment
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
Example
The Fig. 13.21 (j) and Fig. 13.21 (k) are example of the custom macro screen.
Fig. 13.21 (j) Custom macro screen (No. 11318#0=0)
Fig. 13.21 (k) Custom macro screen (No. 11318#0=1)
O9501;
N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032;...................."BOLT HOLE"
N2 G65 H93 P500 Q084079 R079076; ......................................................"TOOL"
N3 G65 H93 P501 Q079082 R071032 I08832; .........................................."ORG X"
N4 G65 H93 P502 Q079082 R071032 I08932; .........................................."ORG Y"
N5 G65 H93 P503 Q082065 R068073 I085803; ........................................"RADIUS"
N6 G65 H93 P504 Q083046 R032065 I078071 J076032..........................."S. ANGL"
- 2081 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
N7 G65 H93 P505 Q072079 R076079 I083032 J078079 K046032............"HOLES NO."
N8 G65 H94 P032042 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032;....." *BOLT HOLE"
N9 G65 H94 P067073 Q082067 R076069 I042032; .................................."CIRCLE*"
N10 G65 H94 P083069 Q084032 R080065 I084084 J069082 K078032;..."SET PATTERN"
N11 G65 H94 P068065 Q084065 R032084 I079032 J086065 K082046;..."DATA NO VAR."
N12 G65 H94 P078079 Q046053 R048048 I045053 J048053 K046032;..."NO500-505"
N13 M99;
Setting the character-codes
The character cannot be used to specify the NC program.
Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified.
One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a full size letter.
The character code is specified for each address of the G65 instruction by six digits.
Refer to the table for the character code for the character code.
Example)
When "ABCDEFGH" is specified, the description of the code is as follows.
Encoded character string : 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072
P065066 Q067068 R069070 I071072 ;
AB CD EF GH
NOTE
1 Space (032) is added ahead of the character-code, when the character-code of
three digits or less is specified.
Example)
P065066 Q067; → " AB C "
032(space) is put at the end, when "ABC" is displayed.
P065066 Q067032; → " ABC "
2 It is assumed in that the space of two characters was defined in the address
when there is an address not defined.
Example)
P065066 I067068; → "AB CD"
Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Hash sign
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 ’ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 * 042 Asterisk
N 078 + 043 Plus sign
O 079 , 044 Comma
P 080 - 045 Minus sign
Q 081 . 046 Period
R 082 / 047 Slash
- 2082 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
S 083 : 058 Colon
T 084 ; 059 Semicolon
U 085 < 060 Left angle bracket
V 086 = 061 Equal sign
W 087 > 062 Right angle bracket
X 088 ? 063 Question mark
Y 089 @ 064 At mark
Z 090 [ 091 Left square bracket
0 048 ¥ 092 Yen sign
1 049 ] 093 Right square bracket
2 050 ^ 094
3 051 _ 095 Underscore
4 052
5 053
The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows.
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
ア 177 ム 209
イ 178 メ 210
ウ 179 モ 211
エ 180 ヤ 212
オ 181 ユ 213
カ 182 ヨ 214
キ 183 ラ 215
ク 184 リ 216
ケ 185 ル 217
コ 186 レ 218
サ 187 ロ 219
シ 188 ワ 220
ス 189 ヲ 166
セ 190 ン 221
ソ 191 ァ 167
タ 192 ィ 168
チ 193 ゥ 169
ツ 194 ェ 170
テ 195 ォ 171
ト 196 ャ 172
ナ 197 ュ 173
ニ 198 ョ 174
ヌ 199 ッ 175
ネ 200 ″ 222 Diacritical mark
ノ 201 ° 223 Diacritical mark
ハ 202 。 161 Punctuation
ヒ 203 「 162 Left quotation mark
フ 204 」 163 Right quotation mark
ヘ 205 、 164 Comma
ホ 206 ・ 165 Point
マ 207 000 Space
ミ 208
NOTE
Diacritical mark is one character.
- 2083 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
The characters and the codes of the hiragana and the kanji are as follows. The following hiraganas and
kanjis use two characters of the alphanumeric character.
ぁ あ ぃ い う う ぇ え ぉ お
002 000 002 002 002 004 002 006 002 008 002 010 002 012 002 014 002 016 002 018
か が き ぎ く ぐ け げ こ ご
002 020 002 022 002 024 002 026 002 028 002 030 002 032 002 034 002 036 002 038
さ ざ し じ す ず せ ぜ そ ぞ
002 040 002 042 002 044 002 046 002 048 002 050 002 052 002 054 002 056 002 058
た だ ち ぢ っ つ づ て で と
002 060 002 062 002 064 002 066 002 068 002 070 002 072 002 074 002 076 002 078
ど な に ぬ ね の は ば ぱ ひ
002 080 002 082 002 084 002 086 002 088 002 090 002 092 002 094 002 096 002 098
び ぴ ふ ぶ ぷ へ べ ぺ ほ ぼ
002 100 002 102 002 104 002 106 002 108 002 110 002 112 002 114 002 116 002 118
ぽ ま み む め も ゃ や ゅ ゆ
002 120 002 122 002 124 002 126 002 128 002 130 002 132 002 134 002 136 002 138
ょ よ ら り る れ ろ わ わ 素
002 140 002 142 002 144 002 146 002 148 002 150 002 152 002 154 002 156 002 158
材 を ん 種 類 棒 穴 成 形 質
002 160 002 162 002 164 002 166 002 168 002 170 002 172 002 174 002 176 002 178
寸 法 外 径 長 端 面 最 小 内
002 180 002 182 002 184 002 186 002 188 002 190 002 192 002 194 002 196 002 198
大 加 工 切 削 倣 正 途 中 荒
002 200 002 202 002 204 002 206 002 208 002 210 002 212 002 214 002 216 002 218
具 番 号 仕 上 込 点 方 向 速
002 220 002 222 002 224 002 226 002 228 002 230 002 232 002 234 002 236 002 238
度 送 量 開 始 深 主 軸
002 240 002 242 002 244 002 246 002 248 002 250 002 252 002 254
回 転 数 位 置 決 直 線 時 円
003 000 003 002 003 004 003 006 003 008 003 010 003 012 003 014 003 016 003 018
反 現 在 指 令 値 領 域 診 断
003 020 003 022 003 024 003 026 003 028 003 030 003 032 003 034 003 036 003 038
操 作 手 引 機 械 残 移 動 次
003 040 003 042 003 044 003 046 003 048 003 050 003 052 003 054 003 056 003 058
早 電 源 投 入 間 分 秒 自 運
003 060 003 062 003 064 003 066 003 068 003 070 003 072 003 074 003 076 003 078
負 荷 実 使 用 寿 命 新 規 除
003 080 003 082 003 084 003 086 003 088 003 090 003 092 003 094 003 096 003 098
隅 取 単 補 能 独 終 了 記 角
003 100 003 102 003 104 003 106 003 108 003 110 003 112 003 114 003 116 003 118
溝 刃 幅 広 設 定 一 覧 表 部
003 120 003 122 003 124 003 126 003 128 003 130 003 132 003 134 003 136 003 138
炭 合 金 鋼 超 硬 先 付 摩 耗
003 140 003 142 003 144 003 146 003 148 003 150 003 152 003 154 003 156 003 158
仮 想 副 行 挿 消 去 山 高 準
003 160 003 162 003 164 003 166 003 168 003 170 003 172 003 174 003 176 003 178
備 完 後 弧 助 択 無 視 器 原
003 180 003 182 003 184 003 186 003 188 003 190 003 192 003 194 003 196 003 198
登 録 再 処 理 描 画 過 容 編
003 200 003 202 003 204 003 206 003 208 003 210 003 212 003 214 003 216 003 218
集 未 対 相 座 標 示 名 歯 変
003 220 003 222 003 224 003 226 003 228 003 230 003 232 003 234 003 236 003 238
- 2084 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
呼 推 馬 力 系 選 達 閉
003 240 003 242 003 244 003 246 003 248 003 250 003 252 003 254
禁 復 帰 書 個 桁 稼 由 両 半
004 000 004 002 004 004 004 006 004 008 004 010 004 012 004 014 004 016 004 018
逃 底 逆 下 空 四 触 平 代 辺
004 020 004 022 004 024 004 026 004 028 004 030 004 032 004 034 004 036 004 038
格 子 周 心 本 群 停 止 巾 微
004 040 004 042 004 044 004 046 004 048 004 050 004 052 004 054 004 056 004 058
状 路 範 囲 倍 率 注 側 特 殊
004 060 004 062 004 064 004 066 004 068 004 070 004 072 004 074 004 076 004 078
距 離 連 続 増 隔 件 初 期 条
004 080 004 082 004 084 004 086 004 088 004 090 004 092 004 094 004 096 004 098
経 握 圧 扱 陰 隠 右 押 横 黄
004 100 004 102 004 104 004 106 004 108 004 110 004 112 004 114 004 116 004 118
億 屋 化 何 絵 階 概 該 巻 換
004 120 004 122 004 124 004 126 004 128 004 130 004 132 004 134 004 136 004 138
気 起 軌 技 疑 供 共 境 強 教
004 140 004 142 004 144 004 146 004 148 004 150 004 152 004 154 004 156 004 158
掘 繰 係 傾 型 検 権 研 肩 見
004 160 004 162 004 164 004 166 004 168 004 170 004 172 004 174 004 176 004 178
験 元 弦 減 孔 巧 控 更 校 構
004 180 004 182 004 184 004 186 004 188 004 190 004 192 004 194 004 196 004 198
根 左 差 雑 参 散 産 算 治 耳
004 200 004 202 004 204 004 206 004 208 004 210 004 212 004 214 004 216 004 218
式 失 修 十 従 勝 商 少 尚 昇
004 220 004 222 004 224 004 226 004 228 004 230 004 232 004 234 004 236 004 238
植 色 食 伸 信 侵 振 浸
004 240 004 242 004 244 004 246 004 248 004 250 004 252 004 254
真 暗 以 意 異 影 鋭 越 価 可
005 000 005 002 005 004 005 006 005 008 005 010 005 012 005 014 005 016 005 018
科 果 箇 課 各 拡 核 学 掛 漢
005 020 005 022 005 024 005 026 005 028 005 030 005 032 005 034 005 036 005 038
簡 観 関 含 却 客 休 急 業 曲
005 040 005 042 005 044 005 046 005 048 005 050 005 052 005 054 005 056 005 058
均 筋 継 計 軽 言 限 互 降 採
005 060 005 062 005 064 005 066 005 068 005 070 005 072 005 074 005 076 005 078
済 細 姿 思 写 射 斜 者 車 借
005 080 005 082 005 084 005 086 005 088 005 090 005 092 005 094 005 096 005 098
縦 重 出 述 術 渉 照 省 章 証
005 100 005 102 005 104 005 106 005 108 005 110 005 112 005 114 005 116 005 118
象 身 進 人 図 違 印 沿 遠 央
005 120 005 122 005 124 005 126 005 128 005 130 005 132 005 134 005 136 005 138
奥 往 応 会 解 改 割 活 願 基
005 140 005 142 005 144 005 146 005 148 005 150 005 152 005 154 005 156 005 158
奇 寄 岐 既 近 区 矩 駆 偶 旧
005 160 005 162 005 164 005 166 005 168 005 170 005 172 005 174 005 176 005 178
求 球 究 級 欠 結 口 語 誤 交
005 180 005 182 005 184 005 186 005 188 005 190 005 192 005 194 005 196 005 198
厚 項 刻 告 黒 財 策 糸 試 資
005 200 005 202 005 204 005 206 005 208 005 210 005 212 005 214 005 216 005 218
事 持 似 釈 弱 受 収 純 順 所
005 220 005 222 005 224 005 226 005 228 005 230 005 232 005 234 005 236 005 238
- 2085 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
序 剰 場 常 飾 水 錐 据
005 240 005 242 005 244 005 246 005 248 005 250 005 252 005 254
制 整 製 前 全 然 則 属 即 他
006 000 006 002 006 004 006 006 006 008 006 010 006 012 006 014 006 016 006 018
多 存 谷 探 短 徴 鎮 調 頂 鉄
006 020 006 022 006 024 006 026 006 028 006 030 006 032 006 034 006 036 006 038
添 頭 同 導 道 熱 年 濃 箱 発
006 040 006 042 006 044 006 046 006 048 006 050 006 052 006 054 006 056 006 058
抜 伴 必 百 複 物 文 聞 併 忘
006 060 006 062 006 064 006 066 006 068 006 070 006 072 006 074 006 076 006 078
末 密 有 余 与 裏 立 略 青 席
006 080 006 082 006 084 006 086 006 088 006 090 006 092 006 094 006 096 006 098
石 積 赤 接 折 粗 創 双 捜 太
006 100 006 102 006 104 006 106 006 108 006 110 006 112 006 114 006 116 006 118
打 体 待 態 替 段 知 地 致 遅
006 120 006 122 006 124 006 126 006 128 006 130 006 132 006 134 006 136 006 138
追 通 伝 得 読 凸 凹 突 鈍 敗
006 140 006 142 006 144 006 146 006 148 006 150 006 152 006 154 006 156 006 158
杯 背 配 品 不 布 並 頁 別 片
006 160 006 162 006 164 006 166 006 168 006 170 006 172 006 174 006 176 006 178
返 勉 弁 保 明 滅 木 目 歪 揺
006 180 006 182 006 184 006 186 006 188 006 190 006 192 006 194 006 196 006 198
様 溶 要 抑 良 輪 和 話 枠 節
006 200 006 202 006 204 006 206 006 208 006 210 006 212 006 214 006 216 006 218
説 絶 千 専 浅 旋 総 走 退 台
006 220 006 222 006 224 006 226 006 228 006 230 006 232 006 234 006 236 006 238
第 題 卓 室 着 柱 鋳 丁
006 240 006 242 006 244 006 246 006 248 006 250 006 252 006 254
低 訂 肉 日 白 薄 比 皮 被 非
007 000 007 002 007 004 007 006 007 008 007 010 007 012 007 014 007 016 007 018
美 普 伏 歩 包 門 問 絡 列 万
007 020 007 022 007 024 007 026 007 028 007 030 007 032 007 034 007 036 007 038
利 訳 礼 乱 放 枚 約 練 油 劣
007 040 007 042 007 044 007 046 007 048 007 050 007 052 007 054 007 056 007 058
例 郭 戻 冷 垂 緑 紫 許 測 精
007 060 007 062 007 064 007 066 007 068 007 070 007 072 007 074 007 076 007 078
効 → ↑ ← ↓
007 080 007 082 007 084 007 086 007 088 007 090 007 092 007 094 007 096 007 098
板 予 〃 家 装 管
007 100 007 102 007 104 007 106 007 108 007 110 007 112 007 114 007 116 007 118
粉 等 貫 安 α β
007 120 007 122 007 124 007 126 007 128 007 130 007 132 007 134 007 136 007 138
程 抗 張 任 破 損 御 足 守 般
007 140 007 142 007 144 007 146 007 148 007 150 007 152 007 154 007 156 007 158
納 義 丸 汎 固 毎 当 的 詳 鳥
007 160 007 162 007 164 007 166 007 168 007 170 007 172 007 174 007 176 007 178
適 論 額 縁 温 給 界 混 監 締
007 180 007 182 007 184 007 186 007 188 007 190 007 192 007 194 007 196 007 198
護 己 称 樹 脂 料 落 確 認 報
007 200 007 202 007 204 007 206 007 208 007 210 007 212 007 214 007 216 007 218
排 性 生 績 判 搬 砥 θ 島 壁
007 220 007 222 007 224 007 226 007 228 007 230 007 232 007 234 007 236 007 238
- 2086 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
] [ ■
007 240 007 242 007 244 007 246 007 248 007 250 007 252 007 254
13.22 G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING
Overview
By specifying G04.1, buffering of the following block from the block of G04.1 is prevented until
finishing the block of G04.1. (At the following, preventing buffering by G04.1 is called non-buffering
command by G code. On the other hand, preventing buffering by M codes, command of only G31,
command of only G53 and etc. are called non-buffering commands of normal.)
The processing time of non-buffering command by G code reduce compared with non-buffering
commands of normal. Therefore, the cycle time of automatic operation can be reduced by using
non-buffering command by G code instead of non-buffering commands of normal.
Specification
By specifying G04.1, the block which includes G04.1 becomes the prevented block of buffering.
Format
G04.1 (P_) ;
P_ : The operation mode of G04.1.
Compatible operation to preventing buffering by command of only G31 or G53 is
possible when P1 or P2 is specified with G04.1 in the same block.
P1: Compatible operation to preventing buffering by command of only G31.
P2: Compatible operation to preventing buffering by command of only G53.
However, alarm PS2085, “G04.1 FORMAT ERROR” occurs when P code except
P1 and P2 is specified.
NOTE
1. When P1 is specified, the system variables (#100151 to #100182) of skip
position are updated by executed position of the block that includes G04.1.
(When the system up to 20 axes, the system variables (#5061 to #5080)
compatible with FS16 is uploaded too.)
2. About preventing buffering by M codes or command of only G31 or command of
only G53, those behaviors are different respectively. When each preventing
buffering is exchanged for G04.1, it is necessary to use the compatible operation
mode.
Explanation
About G04.1
G04.1 is a one-shot G code. When the commands except sequence number, P codes and comment are
specified with G04.1 in the same block, alarm PS2085, “G04.1 FORMAT ERROR” occurs.
About processing time
Because the processing time of non-buffering command by G code reduce compared with non-buffering
commands of normal, the execution time of the block which includes non-buffering command is reduced.
- 2087 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code invalid signal NHSW<G0579.6>
Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code is invalid when Speed-up of non-buffering command by
G code invalid signal NHSW<G0579.6> is set to “1”. And the processing time of non-buffering
command by G code is equal with non-buffering commands of normal.
Suppressing single block stop
Single block stop is not performed in G04.1 block when bit 6 (MSB) of parameter No.11279 is set to 1.
In this case, the function of preventing buffering in G04.1 block is not invalid.
NOTE
Single block stop is not performed in G04.1 block regardless of the state of
#3003 when bit 6 (MSB) of parameter No.11279 is set to 1.
Limitation
Display of the currently executing program
The block of non-buffering command by G code is not displayed in the currently executing program.
However, the block of non-buffering command by G code is displayed in the currently executing program
when speed-up is invalid by the condition which is described in “Condition to treat non-buffering
command by G code as non-buffering commands of normal”.
Condition to treat non-buffering command by G code as non-buffering commands
of normal
When one of the following conditions is satisfied, speed-up of non-buffering command by G code is
invalid, and the processing time of non-buffering command by G code is equal with non-buffering
commands of normal. Moreover, non-buffering command by G code is treated as non-buffering
commands of normal.
- Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code invalid signal is set to “1”.
- The single-block operation is enabled.
- Non-buffering command by G code is specified in the same block as the program number.
- In manual handle retrace function, the checking mode synchronizing an operation with a manual handle
pulse is selected.
- Animation or path drawing of dynamic graphic display is operated.
- Bit 7(HMA) of parameter No.11279 is set to 1, and non-buffering command by G code is specified
during Nano smoothing, Relation of cutter compensation, Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to G73.
Manual handle retrace function
In Manual handle retrace function, a backward movement cannot be executed while the block of
non-buffering command by G code is executing except the checking mode synchronizing with a manual
handle pulse. The backward movement ends when an operation enters the next block of non-buffering
command by G code during the backward movement. And ‘RVED’ is displayed.
However, in the checking mode synchronizing with a manual handle pulse, the backward movement can
be executed when non-buffering command by G code was executed once during forward movement,
because the non-buffering command by G code is treated as non-buffering commands of normal in this
case.
Retrace
The backward movement cannot be executed by Retrace function in the block of non-buffering command
by G code. The backward movement ends when the next block of non-buffering command by G code just
starts executing during the backward movement. And ‘RVED’ is displayed.
Nano smoothing
Non-buffering command by G code cannot be specified during Nano smoothing. Alarm (PS0343),
“ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO SMOOTHING” occurs when such a command is specified. Use
- 2088 -
B-64603EN-1/01 13.PROGRAM COMMAND
non-buffering commands of normal during Nano smoothing, or set bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279
to 1.
Relation of cutter compensation
Non-buffering command by G code cannot be specified during the following cutter compensation
functions. Alarm (PS0010), “IMPROPER G-CODE” occurs when such a command is specified. Use
non-buffering commands of normal during the following cutter compensation functions, or set bit 7
(HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1.
- Cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation
NOTE
Non-buffering command by G code cannot be specified just after the cancel
command of cutter Compensation or tool nose radius compensation. Moreover,
non-buffering command by G code cannot be specified while the vector of cutter
compensation is being held.
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
Non-buffering command by G code cannot be specified during Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to
G73. Alarm (PS0010) occurs when such a command is specified. Use non-buffering commands of normal
during Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to G73, or set bit 7 (HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1.
Chamfering and corner R, Optional chamfering and corner R and Direct drawing
dimension programming
In the condition to treat non-buffering command by G code as non-buffering commands of normal, alarm
(PS0051) occurs when non-buffering command by G code is specified during Chamfering and corner R
or Optional chamfering and corner R. And alarm (PS0312) occurs when non-buffering command by G
code is specified during Direct drawing dimension programming.
Block start interlock signal
Block start interlock signal *BSL<Gn008.3> is invalid for non-buffering command by G code. However,
block start interlock signal *BSL<Gn008.3> is valid in the condition to treat non-buffering command by
G code as non-buffering commands of normal.
Signal
Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code invalid signal NHSW<G0579.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code is invalidated.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1:
Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code is invalidated, and non-buffering
command by G code is treated as non-buffering commands of normal.
When this signal becomes 0:
Speed-up of non-buffering command by G code is validated.
NOTE
This signal cannot be changed during operating a program. The
state of signal at cycle start is kept.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11279 HMA MSB
[Input type] Parameter input
- 2089 -
13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64603EN-1/01
[Data type] Bit
#6 MSB When single block signal SBK <Gn046.1> is set to “1”, single block stop in G code
preventing buffering (G04.1) is:
0: performed.
1: not performed.
NOTE
Single block stop is not performed in G04.1 block regardless of the
state of #3003 when bit 6 (MSB) of parameter No.11279 is set to 1.
#7 HMA When non-buffering command by G code is specified during Nano smoothing, Relation
of cutter compensation, Multiple repetitive canned cycle G70 to G73, :
0: alarm occurs.
1: alarm not occurs.
NOTE
1. Processing time of non-buffering command by G code during
Nano smoothing, Relation of cutter compensation, Multiple
repetitive canned cycle G70 to G73 is equal with non-buffering
commands of normal when setting this parameter to 1.
2. Non-buffering command by G code during "Nano smoothing,
Relation of cutter compensation, Multiple repetitive canned cycle
G70 to G73" is treated with non-buffering commands of normal
when setting this parameter to 1. Please note enough about the
function which changes operation by the non-movement block (For
example, Cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation
or etc.)
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE Non-buffering command by G code was specified during/just
behind the command of relation of cutter compensation.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during
direct input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (bit 4 of parameter No. 3405
= 1) was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a
comma was specified.
PS0343 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO (1) G43, G44, or G49 was commanded during Nano
SMOOTHING smoothing.
(2) Non-buffering command by G code (G04.1) was
commanded during Nano smoothing when setting bit 7
(HMA) of parameter No.11279 to 1.
PS2085 G04.1 FORMAT ERROR G04.1 block is not specified singly.
- 2090 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
14 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Chapter 14, "DISPLAY/SET/EDIT", consists of the following sections:
14.1 DISPLAY/SET..............................................................................................................................2091
14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ...............................................................................2091
14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel..............................................................................................2096
14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function..................................................................................2112
14.1.4 Touch Panel Control......................................................................................................2118
14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface .....................................................................................2123
14.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function ....................................................................................2128
14.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal.............................................................................................2139
14.1.8 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals ........................................................2141
14.1.9 CNC Screen Dual Display .............................................................................................2144
14.1.10 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor.......................................2148
14.1.11 Screen Switching by Mode............................................................................................2150
14.1.12 Screen Switching at Path Switching ..............................................................................2153
14.1.13 Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure Function ...............................2153
14.1.14 Screen Hard Copy Function ..........................................................................................2155
14.1.15 Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals ...............................................................2159
14.1.16 Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters .............................................2160
14.1.17 Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm ........................................................2164
14.1.18 Periodic Maintenance Screen ........................................................................................2164
14.1.19 Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen ..............................................2166
14.1.20 Power Consumption Monitor ........................................................................................2168
14.1.21 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function ......................................................................2183
14.1.22 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion Function .......................................2192
14.1.23 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting ......................................................2200
14.1.24 Title Display Function in Initial Screen.........................................................................2214
14.2 EDIT .............................................................................................................................................2217
14.2.1 Memory Protection Keys...............................................................................................2217
14.2.2 Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter .............................................................2218
14.2.3 MDI Key Setting ...........................................................................................................2219
14.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ......................................................................2220
14.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT .........................................................................................2221
14.3.1 Multi Path Display.........................................................................................................2221
14.3.2 Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing ....................................................................2226
14.4 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT.............................................................................2229
14.1 DISPLAY/SET
14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display
Overview
This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated
cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, by the operator.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total number of parts machined, the
number of parts required and the number of completed parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a
parameter set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and the number of
parts completed is incremented by 1.
- 2091 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M code each time one part
machining is completed, the number of parts machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to
the PMC side.
It is possible for the operator to change and preset the number of parts required and the number of parts
completed.
Bit 7 (NCT) of parameter No. 8134 can be used to specify whether to use this function. Items such as
parts machined are displayed on the Setting (timer) screen even when this function is not used, but
operation such as counting up is not performed.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 7 (NCT) of parameter No.8134 to 0.
Signal
General-purpose integrating meter start signal TMRON<Gn053.0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The CNC has an meter which is started by an input signal from the PMC. Additionally,
there are meters for counting the automatic operation time and counting cutting time. The
count for these meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by the
operator.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the meter starts counting.
Target part count reached signal PRTSF<Fn062.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined.
[Output cond.] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:
- The number of parts machined counts up and reaches the required number of parts
when M02, M30, or the M code set in parameter No. 6710 is executed.
When the required number of parts is zero, this signal is not set.
The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when:
- Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been completed.
- The system is reset.
When PRT (bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6700) = 1, however, the PRTSF signal is
not set to 0 even if the system is reset.
- 2092 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 TMRON
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn062 PRTSF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PRT PCM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
#1 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal PRTSF <Fn062.7> is:
0: Set to 0.
1: Not set to 0.
6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1)
when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with
M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even
when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed,
ignoring the M code.)
6711 Number of machined parts
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of
machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when bit 0 (PCM)
of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6712 Total number of machined parts
[Input type] Setting input
- 2093 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of
machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as
infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power-on period
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither
stops nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6751
and 6752.
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6754.
- 2094 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting
feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6753 and
6754.
6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6756.
6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a general-purpose integrating meter start
signal TMRON <Gn053.0> from PMC is “1”.
The actual integrated time is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6755 and 6756.
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 59999
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6758.
6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold
state included). The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of this
parameters Nos. 6757 and 6758. The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during
the power-on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
- 2095 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8134 NCT
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11651 DCO
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#7 DCO During dry run, the cutting time is:
0: Not counted.
1: Counted.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Displaying and setting run time, parts count, and time
14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel
Overview
The MDI unit can replace the switches on the machine operator's panel. That is, the MDI unit can select a
mode or jog feed override, omitting the corresponding switches on the machine operator's panel.
The control switches for the functions listed in the following table can be replaced with soft switches.
Also available are 16 general-purpose soft switches which can be assigned by the machine tool builder.
These 16 general-purpose soft switches can be optionally named by the machine tool builder. For control
switches in groups 1 to 7, parameter can be used to select whether the control switches on the machine
operator's panel or soft switches on the MDI of the control unit are used.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification
Group4 : Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
Group8 : General purpose
The states of all soft switches are input to the PMC by output signals. Based on these output signals, the
PMC should turn 1 or 0 input signals related to the soft switch functions.
- 2096 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
When the soft switch provided for single block operation is turned on, for instance, the control unit does
not select the single block operation internally. The single block operation is selected just when the PMC
sets the input signal for single block operation to 1.
NOTE
1 To use the "Software operator's panel", set bit 3 (NOP) of parameter No.8136 to
0.
2 To use the "Software operator's panel general purpose switch", set bit 4 (NOW)
of parameter No.8136 to 0.
Signal
Related input
Group Function Output signal
signal
1 Mode selection MD1O <Fn073.0> MD1
MD2O <Fn073.1> MD2
MD4O <Fn073.2> MD4
ZRNO <Fn073.4> ZRN
2 Jog feed axis select +J1O to +J4O <Fn081> +J1 to +J4
-J1O to -J4O -J1 to -J4
Manual rapid traverse RTO <Fn077.6> RT
3 Manual pulse generator feed axis HS1AO <Fn077.0> HS1A
select HS1BO <Fn077.1> HS1B
HS1CO <Fn077.2> HS1C
HS1DO <Fn077.3> HS1D
Manual pulse generator MP1O <Fn076.0> MP1
magnification rate select MP2O <Fn076.1> MP2
4 Jog feed rate override *JV0O to *JV15O <Fn079, Fn080> *JV0 to *JV15
Feedrate override *FV0O to *FV7O <Fn078> *FV0 to *FV7
Rapid traverse override ROV1O <Fn076.4> ROV1
ROV2O <Fn076.5> ROV2
5 Optional block skip BDTO <Fn075.2> BDT
Single block SBKO <Fn075.3> SBK
Machine lock MLKO <Fn075.4> MLK
Dry run DRNO <Fn075.5> DRN
6 Protect key KEYO*1 <Fn075.6> KEY1 to KEY4
7 Feed hold SPO <Fn075.7> *SP
8 General purpose switch 1 to 8 OUT0 to OUT7 <Fn072>
General purpose switch 9 to 16 OUT8 to OUT15 <Fn074>
*1 : For a multi-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is
common to all paths.
- 2097 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
Fn073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
Fn074 OUT15 OUT14 OUT13 OUT12 OUT11 OUT10 OUT9 OUT8
*1
Fn075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
Fn076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O
Fn077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
Fn078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
Fn079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O
Fn080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O
Fn081 -J4O +J4O -J3O +J3O -J2O +J2O -J1O +J1O
*1 : For a multi-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is
common to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select
on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
- 2098 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7201 JPC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 JPC To the name of a general-purpose switch on the software operator's panel , the full-size
character such as Chinese character
0: can not be set.
1: can be set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:
0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.
Signal of negative logic:
- Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<Gn012>
- Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<Gn013>
- Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187>
- Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<Fn078>
Signals of positive logic:
- Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<Gn014.0, Gn014.1>
- Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<Fn076.4, Fn076.5>
- Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, G0150.1/G0162.0, G0162.1/G0174.0,
G0174.1/G0186.0, G0186.1>
The signals indicated below are not affected.
- 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV <Gn096.7>
- 2099 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
- 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 <Gn096.0 to
Gn096.6>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV <Gn353.7>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 <Gn352.0 to
Gn352.7, Gn353.0 to Gn353.1>
7210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”
7211 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”
7212 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”
7213 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”
7214 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”
7215 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”
7216 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”
7217 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI
unit when jog feed is performed.
Arrow keys on MDI unit
Setting value Feed axis and direction
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction 7 8 9
2 First axis, negative direction
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction
5 Third axis, positive direction 4 5 6
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction
8 Fourth axis, negative direction
1 2 3
[Example] Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction
specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. <8↑> to the positive
direction of the Z axis, <2↓> to the negative direction of the Z axis, <6→> to the positive
direction of the X axis <4←> to the negative direction of the X axis, <1 > to the
positive direction of the Y axis, <9 > to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No. 7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No. 7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No. 7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No. 7217 = 0 (Not used)
- 2100 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
7220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first half-size character)
to To
7283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth half-size character)
7284 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's panel (first half-size character)
to To
7299 Name of general-purpose switch 10 on software operator's panel (eighth half-size character)
7352 Name of general-purpose switch 11 on software operator's panel (first half-size character)
to To
7399 Name of general-purpose switch 16 on software operator's panel (eighth half-size character)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] -128 to 127
Each of these parameters sets the name of a general-purpose switch on the software
operator's panel with the following character codes.
When bit 0 (JPC) of parameter No. 7201 is set to 0, the character codes in the “Half-size
character code list” can be specified.
When bit 0 (JPC) of parameter No. 7201 is set to 1, the character codes in the “Half-size
character code list” and the “Full-size character code list (a) to (f)” can be specified. The
full-size character which uses two characters of the half-size can be specified by the
high-code and the low-code.
A switch name consists of up to eight half-size characters (or four full-size characters).
Parameters Nos. 7220 to 7227 : Name of general-purpose switch 1
Parameters Nos. 7228 to 7235 : Name of general-purpose switch 2
Parameters Nos. 7236 to 7243 : Name of general-purpose switch 3
Parameters Nos. 7244 to 7251 : Name of general-purpose switch 4
Parameters Nos. 7252 to 7259 : Name of general-purpose switch 5
Parameters Nos. 7260 to 7267 : Name of general-purpose switch 6
Parameters Nos. 7268 to 7275 : Name of general-purpose switch 7
Parameters Nos. 7276 to 7283 : Name of general-purpose switch 8
Parameters Nos. 7284 to 7291 : Name of general-purpose switch 9
Parameters Nos. 7292 to 7299 : Name of general-purpose switch 10
Parameters Nos. 7352 to 7359 : Name of general-purpose switch 11
Parameters Nos. 7360 to 7367 : Name of general-purpose switch 12
Parameters Nos. 7368 to 7375 : Name of general-purpose switch 13
Parameters Nos. 7376 to 7383 : Name of general-purpose switch 14
Parameters Nos. 7384 to 7391 : Name of general-purpose switch 15
Parameters Nos. 7392 to 7399 : Name of general-purpose switch 16
Ex) Setting of the name of general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator's panel
The name of general-purpose switch 1 on the software operator's panel can be set to
“OVR 1”, in the following setting of the parameters Nos. 7220 to 7227.
(When bit 0 (JPC) of parameter No. 7201 is set to 1)
Parameter Setting value Character
7220 79 O
7221 86 V
7222 82 R
7223 4
7224 -8
7225 2
7226 -32
7227 49 1
- 2101 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NOW NOP
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#3 NOP Software operator's panel is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#4 NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Half-size character code list
NOTE
The dakuten ( )(voiced sound mark), the han-dakuten( )(semi-voiced sound
mark) in Japanese katakana are counted as one half-size character.
- 2102 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Full-size character code list (a)
- 2103 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Full-size character code list (b)
- 2104 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Full-size character code list (c)
- 2105 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Full-size character code list (d)
- 2106 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Full-size character code list (e)
- 2107 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Full-size character code list (f)
- 2108 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
1 The character can be displayed up to the character code just before the
parameter Nos. 7220 to 7399 is set to 0, in the name of a general-purpose
switch on the software operator's panel. Therefore, if using the space, specify
the character code “32” (the space of the half-size character).
Ex1) When the parameter is set to 0 in the half-size character
Parameter Setting value Character
7220 3
7221 0
7222 3
7223 2
7224 0
7225 49 1
7226 50 2
7227 51 3
The character string of display : “ ”
Ex2) When the parameter is set to 32 (the space of the half-size character) in
the half-size character
Parameter Setting value Character
7220 3
7221 0
7222 3
7223 2
7224 32 (space)
7225 49 1
7226 50 2
7227 51 3
The character string of display : “ 123”
2 Do not specify the character codes of the blank in the “Full-size character code
list”. When it is specified, the space of the full-size character or an invalid
character is displayed.
3 Please specify two spaces of the half-size character to display a space of the
full-size character.
- 2109 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode
for DNC operation is to be required, then, all control switches for mode selection
should be on the machine operator's panel or a general-purpose soft switch
should be used to select the mode for DNC operation.
Soft switches available for mode selection
- Manual data input
- Automatic operation
- Memory edit
- Manual handle feed / incremental feed
- Jog feed
- Manual reference position return
2 Only one soft switch is available for the protection key. But, four input signals are
available for protection key (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4).
Generally, four input signals are simultaneously turned to 1 or 0 according to the
state of the protection soft switch.
For a multi-path system, the signals are as follows. These signals are common
to all paths.
- KEYO<F0075.6>
- KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to G0046.6>
3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal SPO is turned to 1,
and the PMC turns feed hold signal *SP to 0.
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold is turned off, output
signal SPO is turned 0 and the PMC turns signal *SP to 1. For soft switches
other than feed hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
corresponding to a soft switch is turned to 1, the corresponding input signal is
turned to 1.
- 2110 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
The Table 14.1.2 (a) lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
Table 14.1.2 (a)
*JV0O to *JV15O
Override values (%)
15 8 7 0
0 1111 1111 1111 1111
0.1 1111 1111 1111 0101
0.14 1111 1111 1111 0001
0.2 1111 1111 1110 1011
0.27 1111 1111 1110 0100
0.37 1111 1111 1101 1010
0.52 1111 1111 1100 1011
0.72 1111 1111 1011 0111
1.0 1111 1111 1001 1011
1.4 1111 1111 0111 0011
2.0 1111 1111 0011 0111
2.7 1111 1110 1111 0001
3.7 1111 1110 1000 1101
5.2 1111 1101 1111 0111
7.2 1111 1101 0010 1111
10.0 1111 1100 0001 0111
14.0 1111 1010 1000 0111
20.0 1111 1000 0010 1111
27.0 1111 0101 0111 0011
37.0 1111 0001 1000 1011
52.0 1110 1011 1010 1111
72.0 1110 0011 1101 1111
100.0 1101 1000 1110 1111
140.0 1100 1001 0100 1111
200.0 1011 0001 1101 1111
The Table 14.1.2 (b) lists the feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
Table 14.1.2 (b)
*FV0O to *FV7O
Override values (%)
7 0
0 1111 1111
10 1111 0101
20 1110 1011
30 1110 0001
40 1101 0111
50 1100 1101
60 1100 0011
70 1011 1001
80 1010 1111
90 1010 0101
100 1001 1011
110 1001 0001
120 1000 0111
130 0111 1101
140 0111 0011
150 0110 1001
160 0101 1111
170 0101 0101
180 0100 1011
190 0100 0001
200 0011 0111
- 2111 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Display and setting of the software operator’s panel
14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function
Overview
Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation and eight protection levels can be set for
various types of CNC and PMC data.
When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output externally, the system compares the
operation level with the protection level to determine whether change or external output is allowed.
NOTE
8-level data protection function is optional function.
Explanation
- Operation level
Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation.
Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key signal.
Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by a password.
Operation level Setting method Sample classification
7 (High) Password -
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer, Integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 1)
2 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 2)
1 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 3)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (Level 4)
NOTE
1 Once any of operation levels 4 to 7 is set, it is retained (even when the power is
turned off) until clear operation is performed by the corresponding password.
2 The initial values of the passwords for operation levels 4 to 6 are shown below.
- Operation level 4: "HC3V9ZEP"
- Operation level 5: "J72WB8YA"
- Operation level 6: "VLR6T92M"
3 Operation level 7 is reserved for the maintenance of the CNC and PMC.
CAUTION
When this function is provided, the conventional memory protection function is
disabled.
When this function is added, the programmer protection function of the PMC is
disabled. However, the sequence program password function can be used in
combination with this function.
- Data protection level
A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection
levels as shown below.
- 2112 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Change protection level
Protection level used for changing data
- Output protection level
Protection level used for externally outputting data (punching out).
Protection levels 0 (low) to 7 (high) can be set.
CNC data protection level setting items
Initial value of protection level
Data type
Change Output
Custom macro conversion data
0 0
(including variable data specific to the macro executor)
Periodical maintenance information data 0 0
Tool management data 0 0
Tool offset data
0 0
(for each type when classification is performed by figure and figure/wear)
Clock data 0 0
Workpiece origin shift data 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data 0 0
Ethernet setting data 0 0
Parameter data 4 0
Setting data 0 0
Pitch error compensation data 4 0
Power Mate CNC Manager function parameter data 0 0
Each part program 0 0
Part program editing 0 0
Presetting an absolute coordinate 0 0
PMC data protection level setting items
Initial value of protection level
Data type
Change Output
Configuration parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (for each path) 0 0
Sequence parameter 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
I/O configuration 0 0
I/O Link group selection 0 0
Registration of I/O device 0 0
- Changing or externally outputting of data
When various types of CNC and PMC data is changed or output externally, the change protection level or
output protection level set for the target data is compared with its current operation level.
If the operation level is equal to or higher than the protection level set for the target data (operation level
≥ protection level), it is assumed that the target data can be changed or output externally and the data is
allowed to be changed or output externally.
The operation level must be changed according to the purpose as needed.
The protection level must be set according to the confidentiality and severity of data.
- 2113 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
[Example of application]
(1) Set the change protection level as follows.
- Parameter (Change protection level 4)
- Tool offset data (Change protection level 0)
(2) The changeable data can be restricted by changing the operation level during CNC and PMC
operation.
- Operation level 4
Parameters and tool offset data can be changed.
- Operation level 0
Tool offset data can be changed.
Parameters cannot be changed.
Data
Parameter Tool offset data
Operation level
4 Changeable Changeable
0 Not changeable Changeable
Notes
- Tool management data
NOTE
Data related to tool information on the individual tool data screen of the tool
management function is protected on the tool offset data protection level.
- Tool offset data
NOTE
1 Valid types of tool offset data vary depending on the tool offset memory used.
See the tables below when setting a data protection level.
2 When a type of data that is not permitted to be changed or externally output is
found during tool offset data input/output, the following operation takes place.
- Input : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed
is changed.
- Output : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed
is output.
M
Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset memory A Tool offset memory B
Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (tool radius, geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool radius, wear) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool length, geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool length, wear) Not applicable Applicable
Data type/tool offset memory Virtual tool tip direction
Tool offset data Applicable
T
Without tool geometry and wear With tool geometry and wear
Data type/tool offset memory
compensation compensation
Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable
- 2114 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Without tool geometry and wear With tool geometry and wear
Data type/tool offset memory
compensation compensation
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable
Tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation
Y-axis offset Y-axis offset
Data type/tool offset memory
(without tool geometry and wear (with tool geometry and wear
compensation) compensation)
Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable
Data type/tool offset memory Virtual tool tip direction
Tool offset data Applicable
Data type/tool offset memory Second geometry tool offset data
Tool offset data (geometry) Applicable
- Part programs and part program editing
NOTE
1 When changing the protection level of a part program, use the program list
screen instead of the protection level setting screen. See the description of
"Operation/setting screen".
2 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode.
- Absolute coordinate preset operation
NOTE
When absolute coordinates are preset, workpiece coordinate system presetting is
protected.
- Other notes
NOTE
1 For some data, the output function is not provided.
2 When a higher protection level than the current operation level is set for data,
that protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a protection level higher than
the current operation level.
4 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode.
5 For details of the protection level of PMC data, refer to "PMC Programming
Manual (B-64513EN)".
6 In principle, the data change protection check is performed for changes made by
MDI. Changes made by machine operations and so on are not checked.
For example, a programmable parameter input by specifying G10L50 may be
changed regardless of the operation level and parameter change protection
level.
To protect data from illegal programmed commands, take appropriate measures;
for example, set an appropriate change protection level for program edit
operations not to create illegal programs.
- 2115 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to G0046.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals select the operation level for the 8-level data protection function.
The correspondence between signals and operation levels is shown below.
Operation level KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
3 0 1 0 0
2 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
NOTE
When a combination other than the above is set, operation level 0
is assumed.
[Caution] When the 8-level data protection function is not used, these signals are used as memory
protection keys.
Note that what these signals indicate changes depending on whether the 8-level data
protection function is used.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
Diagnosis data
1004 Current level of 8-Level Data Protection Function
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] None
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
Current operation level of 8-Level Data Protection Function
Operation/setting screen
Various settings or display about operation levels or protection levels can be performed on the following
screens.
- Password change screen
- Operation level setting screen
- Protection level setting screen
- Program list screen
- Password change screen
On the password change screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
(1) Displaying the current operation level
(2) Changing the passwords of operation levels 4 to 7
NOTE
1 A password consists of 3 to 8 characters including the following.
- Uppercase letter
- Numeric
- 2116 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
2 When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each of input characters.
3 The following shows whether passwords can be changed at the current
operation level.
- Password having a higher operation level than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
- Password having the same operation level as the current operation level
Can be changed.
- Password having a lower operation level than the current operation level
Can be changed (reverting to the initial password can only be performed).
CAUTION
The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
- Operation level setting screen
On the operation level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
(1) Displaying the current operation level
(2) Entering the password and then selecting one of operation levels 4 to 7
(3) Canceling the entered password and then selecting the operation level other than operation levels 4
to 7
NOTE
When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each character.
- Protection level setting screen
On the protection level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
(1) Displaying the current operation level
(2) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each data
(3) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each data
NOTE
1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection
level cannot be changed.
2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than
the current operation level.
- Program list screen
On the program list screen, the following display and operations can be performed.
(1) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each part program
(2) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each part program
NOTE
1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection
level cannot be changed.
2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than
the current operation level.
- 2117 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.4 Touch Panel Control
WARNING
FANUC’s touch panel is an analog resistive film type. When two or more points
are pressed at the same time, there is a possibility that it behaves as if the
center of these points was pressed, and this wrong output or malfunction may
cause an accident. Do not create a virtual machine operator’s panel screens on
which two or more points are pressed at the same time for touch panel
operation.
On the virtual machine operator panel screen, never support safety-related
operations that may lose human life or may cause serious damage, or real-time
operations such as emergency stop, program start, program stop, axis
movements, etc. If there is a failure in the CNC, peripheral units, or cable,
wrong outputs or malfunctions may cause an accident. In addition, real-time
operation is not guaranteed on the touch panel screen.
Overview
A display unit with a touch panel enables you to operate soft keys by touching the screen.
Moreover, an application using a touch panel can be created with the C Language Executor.
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 With a CNC of LCD-mounted type, RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36A) is occupied.
3 Touch panel pressing information is read at intervals of 32 msec.
4 A positional precision of 2.5 mm is provided.
Explanation
- C Language Executor
With the C Language Executor, touch panel functions can be used. For the specifications of the functions,
refer to "C Language Executor Operator's Manual".
- Calibration
When replacing the touch panel or clearing all memory (SRAM) data, set data for calibrating the
positional relation between the touch panel and LCD according to the procedure below.
Calibration procedure
1 Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.)
2 Press function key .
3 Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH PANEL] soft key is displayed.
4 Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key. The [TP CAL] soft key is
displayed.
- 2118 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
5 Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key displays the touch panel calibration screen for all screens.
6 Press the calibration points (9 points) with a dedicated pen. When a point is pressed correctly, the
"+" mark changes to the "Ο" mark. If a "+" mark is not pressed accurately, the message
"CALIBRATION POINT DOES NOT MATCH. PLEASE PUSH AGAIN." is displayed.
7 After entering the calibration points (9 points), press key to complete calibration. To cancel
calibration or retry, press key. The screen display returns to the previous screen. If
key is pressed before entering the calibration points (9 points), calibration operation is cancelled.
8 When calibration is terminated normally, the message "CALIBRATION WAS ENDED." is
displayed.
9 Upon completion of calibration, disable the touch panel calibration screen to protect against
operation errors. (Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 0.)
- 2119 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 If the screen display is switched from the touch panel calibration screen to
another screen such as the alarm screen by the automatic screen switching
function, calibration is automatically cancelled.
2 Calibration operation can be performed in any mode.
3 After system startup, perform calibration operation swiftly before starting
operation.
- Operation when two points are pressed
When the touch panel is pressed at two or more points, the position of the gravity center is obtained by
considering how each of these points is pressed, and the touch panel is assumed to be pressed at this
gravity center position. At this time the coordinates that can be obtained can be set by setting bit 1 (T2P)
of parameter No. 3192.
NOTE
When two points are pressed in a row in a short time interval, the touch panel
may react as if the center of the two points was pressed, even though parameter
T2P (No. 3192#1) is set to 1.
(1) Suppose that in Fig. 14.1.4 (a), as soon as point A is pressed, point B is pressed.
A
C
B
Fig. 14.1.4 (a) Pressed points on the touch panel
(2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 14.1.4 (b).
On Cont'd ... Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd ... Off
A A A C C
Fig. 14.1.4 (b) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0
(3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be held pressed even after the pressed point changes from point
A to point C (Fig. 14.1.4 (c)).
On Cont'd ... Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd ... Off
A A A A A
Fig. 14.1.4 (c) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1
- Operation when dragging is performed
When dragging (continuously pressing the touch panel while making a movement) is performed on the
touch panel, the system response varies depending on the setting of bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192.
When the drag function is used in C Language Executor applications, set T2P to 0.
1) Suppose that in Fig. 14.1.4 (d), point A is pressed first and then dragging is performed from point A
to B to C.
- 2120 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
A
B C
Fig. 14.1.4 (d) Dragging on the touch panel
2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 14.1.4 (e).
On Cont'd Cont'd
A B C
Fig. 14.1.4 (e) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0
3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be kept pressed even after the pressed point moves from point
A to point C (Fig. 14.1.4 (f)).
On Cont'd Cont'd
A A A
Fig. 14.1.4 (f) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 DCL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 DCL The touch panel compensation screen is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter to 0 usually. Touch panel compensation becomes necessary only when
the panel is replaced or memory all clear operation is performed. Set this parameter to 1
only when performing touch panel compensation. Upon completion of compensation, set
this parameter to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 DDS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 DDS The touch panel is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily, for example, at
start-up time.
- 2121 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3192 TRA T2P
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 T2P When more than one point is pressed on the touch panel:
0: The position at the center of gravity is obtained.
1: The point pressed first is obtained.
NOTE
1 When two points are pressed in a row in a short time interval, the
touch panel may react as if the center of the two points was
pressed, even though parameter T2P (No. 3192#1) is set to 1.
2 If a C executer application or the like has a touch panel drag (move
in pressed state) function, set parameter T2P to 0.
#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is kept pressed for a time specified in parameter No. 3197 or
longer,
0: An alarm is not raised.
1: An alarm SR5303, “TOUCH PANEL ERROR” is raised.
NOTE
1 If an C executer application or the like has a touch panel repeat
(continue pressing) function, set parameter TRA to 0.
2 In personal computer functions, the parameter is valid just for the
CNC screen display function.
3197 Detection time of continuous pressing on touch panel
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Set a period of continuous pressing on the touch panel which causes alarm SR5303,
“TOUCH PANEL ERROR” to be raised. When 0 is set, it is equivalent to 20.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is
set to 1.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
SR5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch
panel cannot be initialized when the power is turned on.
If bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is set to 1, this message
is issued also when the touch panel is being kept pressed.
Correct the cause then turn on the power again.
- 2122 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Caution
CAUTION
When all memory (SRAM) data is cleared, the soft keys on the touch panel are
not made usable yet. In this case, the MDI keys (such as the cursor keys and
page keys) need to be used for setting.
14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface
Outline
External Touch Panel (called "ETP" below) of SNP-X protocol can be connected with Series 0i-F.
ETP has functions that can read out/ write in from/to PMC such control signals as input signal(X), output
signal(Y), internal relay(R), keep relay(K), data table(D), extra relay(E), timer(T), counter(C), and the
function is almost the same as operating panel of machine.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
The remarkable function of ETP is drawing function.
Assignment between drawing and address (signal) can be specified freely.
For example, the data in data table can be set with the switch on the screen which is designed to assign
the setting of data table.
ETP CNC
DATA
Push the switch Data in data
on the screen. table is set.
- 2123 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Explanation
- Connection
RS-232C serial port 2(JD36A; for the 15” LCD-mounted type CNC, JD54) on main CPU board is used in
CNC.
Cable-A must be based on RS-232C standard, and are prepared by customer.
(1) Cable-A (connection diagram between JD36A or JD54 on CNC and SIO on ETP.)
ETP CNC
Cable-A
SIO JD36A or
JD54
ETP CNC
SIO(25pin) JD36A or JD54(20pin)
Shield
03 11
RD SD
02 01
SD RD
04 15
RS RS
05 05
CS
CS
07 08
SG
SG
03
DR
07
CD
13
ER
Cables must be shielded by cable clamp made of metal.
NOTE
For the 15” LCD-mounted type CNC, use pin 04 as SG for cabling. Leave pin 08
open.
- Power On sequence
Please turn on the power supply on ETP side first.
- 2124 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Data of CNC, read / write from ETP
The following CNC data can be read and written on the ETP side:
0i-F PMC
Signal type Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC
(optional) (optional)
Input signal to the PMC from the machine X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127
Note 1 X200 to X327 X200 to X327 X200 to X327
X400 to X527 X400 to X527 X400 to X527
X600 to X727 X600 to X727 X600 to X727
X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127 X1000 to X1127
Output signal from the PMC to the machine Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127
Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327
Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527
Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727
Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127 Y1000 to Y1127
Internal relay
- User area R0 to R7999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499
Keep relay
- User area K0 to K99 K0 to K19 K0 to K19
Data table D0 to D9999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999
Extra relay E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999
Note 2 Note 2 Note 2
Timer
- Variable timer T0 to T499 T0 to T79 T0 to T79
Counter
- Variable counter C0 to C399 C0 to C79 C0 to C79
- Fixed counter C5000 to C5199 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039
NOTE
1 These addresses are for read only.
2 Shared memory of the multi-path PMC. Programs can read and write the same
value from/to this memory.
- Protocol
Only direct command on SNP-X protocol is available in CNC.
ETP also must use the same protocol and the same command only.
The process required for writing data more than 3 bytes is the same as
that lass than 2bytes.
Please refer the documents of SNP-X protocol for the detail of SNP-X protocol.
- Combined use of the touch panel on the LCD of the CNC and External Touch
Panel
ETP cannot be used together with the touch panel on the LCD of the LCD-mounted type CNC.
Limitation
(1) Only addresses for the PMC set in parameter No. 11310 can be read and written. It is impossible to
perform reading from and writing to more than one PMC at the same time.
(2) ETP is Touch Panel made by DIGITAL Co. Ltd. ETPs which can be connected with CNC are as
follows.
- GP-450E
- GP-550T
- 2125 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
- GP-550S
- GP-2000 SERIES
- GP-3000 SERIES
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 TPA
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface is selected, the external touch
panel interface connection is:
0: Valid.
1: Invalid.
For an external touch panel (called ETP hereinafter), the RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36A or
JD54) on the main board of the CNC is used.
When using ETP, set bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119 to 0.
By this setting, JD36A or JD54 is used for ETP, regardless of the setting of I/O
CHANNEL (I/O device selection) of the existing parameters Nos. 0021 to 0023.
For other I/O devices, use JD56A and so forth.
By the setting above, the settings of the existing parameters Nos. 0100 and 0121 to 0123
become invalid for channel 2 (JD36A or JD54), and the following settings are applied at
all times:
- Baud rate : 19200 bps
- Stop bit : 1 bit
- Parity check : Even parity
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13101 TPB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#1 TPB Baud rate used with the external touch panel
0: 19200 bps is always used.
1: The baud rate with the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 is
used.
As mentioned in the description of bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119, when TPA is set
to 0, the baud rate is always set to 19200 bps.
To allow the baud rate to be changed, set bit 1 (TPB) of parameter No. 13101 to 1.
This allows the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 to be used.
- 2126 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
Baud rates that can be set may vary depending on the ETP used.
11310 Selection of a PMC that performs read and write operations with an external touch panel
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
This parameter selects an PMC for read and write operations among three PMCs, which
are the first PMC, second PMC, and third PMC.
0, 1 : First PMC
2 : Second PMC
3 : Third PMC
NOTE
1 It is impossible to perform read and write operations with more than
one PMC at the same time.
2 The second PMC and third PMC are optional.
- 2127 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function
Overview
Standard check sum of CNC parameter can be calculated previously and be saved in CNC. In the other
hand, a parameter check sum is calculated at CNC power-on. This value is compared with the standard
check sum to check whether there is difference between two values.
If there are changed parameters, an alarm will occur at next power-on. So the CNC can be averted from
miss operation such as miss setting of parameter and forgetting to correct the parameters changed
temporarily.
Explanation
When bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No. 13730 is changed from 0 to 1, the standard check sum is calculated.
In the other hand at CNC power-on, a parameter check sum is calculated and its value is compared with
standard check sum. If two values are different, alarm DS5340,” PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR”,
occurs.
This alarm is canceled by the operation pressing and , but if parameters are not corrected to
original value, alarm DS5340 will occur again at next check sum comparison at CNC power-on.
By parameter setting, some parameters can be excluded from check sum. Moreover, there are many
parameters that CNC system excludes from check sum.
NOTE
If bit 7 (CSR) of parameter No. 13730 is 1, alarm DS5340 can be canceled only
by key.
Parameter check sum information screen
The parameter check sum information screen shows the value of the standard check sum, the time and
date when the standard check sum was calculated, and the value of a check sum calculated at power-on.
Fig. 14.1.6 (a) Parameter check sum information screen (10.4”)
- 2128 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter check sum setting screen
- Setting parameters to be excluded
Setting the number of parameter excluded from check sum on this screen.
A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.
Fig. 14.1.6 (b) Parameter check sum setting (No.) screen (10.4”)
Fig. 14.1.6 (c) Parameter check sum setting screen: number setting (15”)
- Range of excluded parameters
Setting the range of parameters excluded from check sum.
A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.
- 2129 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 14.1.6 (d) Parameter check sum setting (range) screen (10.4”)
Fig. 14.1.6 (e) Parameter check sum setting screen: range setting (15”)
Operation procedure
The following explains how to display the parameter check sum information screen and how to make
settings on the parameter check sum setting screen.
- Displaying parameter check sum information
For the 10.4” display unit, follow the steps below.
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] appears.
3 Press horizontal soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].
4 Press horizontal soft key [CHKSUM INFO]. The screen in the Fig. 14.1.6 (f) is then displayed:
- 2130 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Fig. 14.1.6 (f) Parameter check sum information screen (10.4”)
For the 15” display unit, follow the steps below.
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is
displayed.
3 Press vertical soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].
4 Press vertical soft key [CHKSUM INFO]. The screen in the Fig. 14.1.6 (g) is displayed:
Fig. 14.1.6 (g) Parameter check sum information screen (15”)
- Setting parameters to be excluded
For the 10.4” display unit, follow the steps below.
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is displayed.
- 2131 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
3 Press horizontal soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].
4 Press horizontal soft key [CHKSUM SETING]. The screen in the Fig. 14.1.6 (h) is displayed:
Fig. 14.1.6 (h) Parameter check sum setting screen (10.4”)
5 By using page keys and , the parameter check sum setting screen changes as follows:
First page
Third page
6 Move the cursor to a target item.
7 Enter the number of a parameter to be excluded from the check sum, and press the key or soft
key [INPUT].
- 2132 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
8 When completing the setting of all parameters to be excluded, set bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No.
13730 to 1.
For the 15” display unit, follow the steps below.
1 Press function key .
2 Press vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is
displayed.
3 Press vertical soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].
4 Press vertical soft key [CHKSUM SETING]. The following screen is displayed:
Fig. 14.1.6 (i) Parameter check sum setting screen (15”)
5 Move the cursor to a target item.
6 Enter the number of a parameter to be excluded from the check sum, and press the key or soft
key [INPUT].
7 When completing the setting of all parameters to be excluded, set bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No.
13730 to 1.
NOTE
1 Items set on this screen correspond to parameter Nos. 13731 to 13770 as
shown below. These items can be set also on the parameter screen.
Exclusion Nos. 01 to 20 → Parameters Nos. 13731 to 13750
Exclusion ranges 01 to 10 → Parameters Nos. 13751 to 13770
2 When 0 is set as an exclusion number, it is ignored.
3 Numbers set as the start NO. and end NO. of each exclusion range are also
excluded.
4 In a combination of the start No. and end No., if the start No. is greater than the
end No. (start No. > end No.), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers
becomes invalid.
5 If the start No. equals the end No. (start No. = end No.), only the set number is
excluded.
- 2133 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Excluded parameters
A check sum is not the sum of all parameters but is calculated with particular parameters excluded. The
parameters to be excluded satisfy one of the following conditions:
(1) Parameters that can be input by setting input
(2) Parameters of which values may be changed by the system (see Table 14.1.6 (a))
(3) Parameters set on the parameter check sum setting screen
For parameters in (2), see the Table 14.1.6 (a):
Table 14.1.6 (a) Parameters excluded from the check sum
Parameter number Description
1244 Coordinates of the floating reference position
1320 to 1327 Coordinates at the boundary of stored stroke check 1
1330 to 1348 Chuck and tail stock barrier
3226 Keyword of the key lock for parameters related to dual check safety
4911 to 4914 Spindle speed fluctuation detection
5130 Amount of chamfering in thread cutting cycles G96 and G92
5132 to 5133 Depth of cut and escaping amount of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72
5134 Clearance value of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72
5135 Escaping amount along the X-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73
5136 Escaping amount along the Z-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73
5137 Divide number of multiple repetitive cycle G73
5139 Return amount in multiple repetitive cycles G74 and G75
5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5142 Number of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5660 to 5668 Flexible synchronization control
5669 Automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control
5670 to 5677 Flexible synchronization control
5680 to 5687 Flexible synchronization control
5690 to 5693 Flexible synchronization control
6581 to 6595 VGA character color number
6750 Integrated value of power-on period
7220 to 7283 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel
7310 Program restart
8210 Slant angle
8900 PWE
13420 Automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control
13425 to 13436 Automatic phase synchronization for flexible synchronization control
14717 Axis number of the C-axis in simulation (for MGi only)
When the machining condition selecting function is used, the parameters in the Table 14.1.6 (b) to Table
14.1.6 (d) are also excluded from the check sum:
Table 14.1.6 (b) Parameters excluded from the check sum
(when the machining condition selecting function is used)
Parameter number Description
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode
1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner
feedrate difference
- 2134 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter number Description
1788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on
acceleration change for each axis
1789 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on
acceleration change for each axis (linear interpolation)
1790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
13634 Precision level currently selected when AI contour control is used
Table 14.1.6 (c) Parameters for setting the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from the check
sum (when the machining condition selecting function is used)
Parameter No.
Parameter number set in parameter No. 13628 (parameter number corresponding to item 1 when AI contour
control is used)
Parameter number set in parameter No. 13629 (parameter number corresponding to item 2 when AI contour
control is used)
Table 14.1.6 (d) Parameters excluded from the check sum (when the machining condition selecting function
and the machining quality level adjustment function are used)
Parameter number Description
11681 Smoothing level
19581 Tolerance in nano smoothing
NOTE
1 When the machining condition selecting function is not used, these parameters
are included in the check sum.
2 The parameters of which numbers are set in parameter Nos. 13628, 13629,
13674, and 13675 are excluded, but parameter Nos. 13628, 13629, 13674, and
13675 are not excluded.
Parameter
11358 Power-On Checksum
[Data type] 2-word
When parameter checksum function is effective, checksum value which is calculated at
power-on is set.
0 is set when the parameter checksum function is invalid.
11359 Standard Checksum
[Data type] 2-word
Checksum value which is calculated at when parameter checksum function is changed
from invalid to effective is set. It is used as standard value, when checksum is executed at
power-on.
0 or last parameter checksum value is set when the parameter checksum function is
invalid.
11360 Calculation Data
[Data type] 2-word
The date when the parameter checksum function is changed to effective is set.
- 2135 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
The number of 8 digits which show year, month and day is set.
First 4 digits show year. Second 2 digits show month. Last 2 digits show day.
0 or last day when parameter checksum function was changed to effective is set when the
parameter checksum function is invalid.
11361 Calculation Time
[Data type] 2-word
The time when the parameter checksum function is changed to effective is set.
The number of 6 digits which show hour, minute and second is set.
First 2 digits show hour. Second 2 digits show minute. Last 2 digits show second.
0 or the last time when parameter checksum function has been changed to effective is set
when the parameter checksum function is invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13730 CSR CKS
[Data type] Bit
#0 CKS A power-on, a parameter check sum check is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 CSR Alarm DS5340,” PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR” is cleared with:
0: + keys.
1: key.
13731 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 01
13732 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 02
13733 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 03
13734 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 04
13735 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 05
13736 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 06
13737 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 07
13738 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 08
13739 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 09
13740 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 10
13741 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 11
13742 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 12
13743 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 13
13744 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 14
- 2136 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
13745 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 15
13746 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 16
13747 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 17
13748 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 18
13749 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 19
13750 Number to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 20
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number
These parameters set the numbers of the parameters to be excluded from the check sum in
the parameter check sum function.
13751 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 01
13752 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 02
13753 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 03
13754 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 04
13755 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 05
13756 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 06
13757 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 07
13758 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 08
13759 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 09
13760 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 10
13761 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 11
13762 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 12
13763 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 13
13764 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 14
13765 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 15
13766 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 16
13767 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 17
13768 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 18
13769 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 19
13770 Start number of the range to be excluded from the NC parameter check sum, 20
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number
These parameters specify the range of parameters to be excluded from the check sum in
the parameter check sum function. The parameters ranging from the start number to the
end number are excluded from the check sum.
- 2137 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 The parameters with the start and end numbers are also excluded.
2 In a combination of start and end numbers, if the start number is
greater than the end number (start number > end number), the
combination is invalid.
3 If the start and end numbers are the same (start number = end
number), the single parameter with that number is excluded.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
DS5340 PARAMETER CHECK Because parameters have been modified, the parameter check sum and
SUM ERROR the standard check sum do not match.
Restore the original parameter state, or set a standard check sum again.
- 2138 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
14.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal
Overview
This function outputs a signal to notify the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. The machine
tool builder can use this function for applications in which, for example, a buzzer is sounded after a press
of a virtual MDI key is detected.
NOTE
The "Virtual MDI function" is an optional function.
This function is enabled when the virtual MDI function is used.
Explanation
When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the touch panel check signal TPPRS<F0006.0> is output. (Fig. 14.1.7
(a) and Fig. 14.1.7 (b) show the range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output.)
In related functions, this function operates as follows:
- CNC screen display function
When the virtual MDI key function is used in the CNC screen display function, the signal is output.
- Macro executor
When the macro executor is used on the virtual MDI screen, the signal is output.
- C language executor
While the C language executor screen is being displayed, the signal is not output.
NOTE
When a virtual MDI key is pressed for a short time or when a virtual MDI key is
pressed several times successively, the CNC does not sometimes accept the
key input even if the signal is output.
Range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output
Fig. 14.1.7 (a) When the NC screen is displayed
- 2139 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 14.1.7 (b) When the PMC high-precision screen is displayed
When a virtual MDI key within the range indicated by in Fig. 14.1.7 (a) and Fig. 14.1.7 (b) is
pressed, the signal is output.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 TPP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#6 TPP When a virtual MDI key is pressed, signal TPPRS <F0006.0> is
0: Not output.
1: Output
Signal
- Touch panel check signal TPPRS<F0006.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed.
[Operation] The signal is set to 1 when:
- A virtual MDI key is pressed.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- A virtual MDI key is released.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0006 TPPRS
- 2140 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Timing chart
The following shows a timing chart of a press of a virtual MDI key and the touch panel check signal.
Virtual MDI key pressed
Touch panel check signal
32 msec or more
• When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal is output for 32 msec or longer.
Read the signal with a ladder program of which cycle period is shorter than 32 msec.
• When a virtual MDI key is held pressed continuously, the signal is kept output.
• There may be a delay from a press of a virtual MDI key until the touch panel check signal is output.
A delay may be generated also when the virtual MDI key is released.
• If the time from when a virtual MDI key is pressed until it is released is within 50 msec, the touch
panel check signal is not sometimes output.
14.1.8 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals
Overview
PMC signals can be used to change the display language of the CNC screen. In this function, a dial or
switch on the machine operator's panel can also be used to change the language of the CNC screen.
Explanation
To change the display language by the PCM ladder, set display language setting signals LANG1 to
LANG7 <G0581.0 to G0581.6> to a number and change display language switch start signal SLANG
<G0581.7> from “0” to “1”. This changes the value of parameter No.3281 to the language number that
was set in display language setting signals LANG1 to LANG7.
Upon completion of the change, display language switch completion signal FLANG <F0545.0> is set to
“1”.
For information on switching the language on the CNC screen, refer to the chapter "Displaying and
Switching the Display Language" in OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System) (B-64604EN).
NOTE
When the language is selected in the language specification screen, don’t set
signal SLANG to ‘1’.
Time chart
Follow the procedure below to switch the display language.
Set display language setting signals LANG1 to LANG7 to the language number of the language to be
used.
Set display language switch start signal SLANG from “0” to “1”.
The current language is switched to the language with the language number set in display language
setting signals LANG1 to LANG7.
The value of parameter No. 3281 is updated to the value set by display language setting signals LANG1
to LANG7.
Upon completion of the switching, set display language switch completion signal FLANG is set to “1”.
- 2141 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
In the PMC ladder, set display language switch start signal SLANG from “1” to 0 after display language
switch completion signal FLANG is set to “1”.
When display language switch start signal SLANG is set to 0, display language switch completion signal
FLANG is set to “0”.
Setting display language
setting signals LANG1 to
LANG7 to the language
number
1
Display language switch
start signal SLANG
0
Switching the
display language
Updating parameter No.
3281
1
Display language switch
completion signal
FLANG 0
Signal
Display language switch start signal SLANG <G0581.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal causes the current language to switch to the language set in display language
setting signals LANG1 to LANG7.
[Operation] When this signal is changed from “0” to “1”, the current language switches to the
language set in display language setting signals LANG1 to LANG7.
Display language setting signals LANG1 to LANG7 <G0581.0 to G0581.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals set a language number. Available languages and the corresponding input
signals are shown in the table.
Language LANG7 LANG6 LANG5 LANG4 LANG3 LANG2 LANG1
Language
number G0581.6 G0581.5 G0581.4 G0581.3 G0581.2 G0581.1 G0581.0
English 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Japanese 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
German 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
French 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Chinese 4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
(traditional
characters)
Italian 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Korean 6 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Spanish 7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Dutch 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Danish 9 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Portuguese 10 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
- 2142 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Language LANG7 LANG6 LANG5 LANG4 LANG3 LANG2 LANG1
Language
number G0581.6 G0581.5 G0581.4 G0581.3 G0581.2 G0581.1 G0581.0
Polish 11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Hungarian 12 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
Swedish 13 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Czech 14 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Chinese 15 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
(simplified
characters)
Russian 16 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Turkish 17 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Bulgarian 18 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Rumanian 19 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Slovak 20 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Finnish 21 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
Hindi 22 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
NOTE
Hindi is only supported on the 8.4" color LCD. It is not supported on
the 10.4"/15" color LCD.
Display language switch completion signal FLANG <F0545.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that switching to the language set in display language setting signals
LANG1 to LANG7 is completed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when:
- The display language has been switched.
This signal is set to “0” when:
- Display language switch start signal SLANG is set to “0”.
NOTE
Even if display language switch start signal SLANG is switched
from “0” to “1” when the conditions required for this function are not
met, the current language is not switched, but display language
switch completion signal FLANG is set to “1”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0581 SLANG LANG7 LANG6 LANG5 LANG4 LANG3 LANG2 LANG1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0545 FLANG
Parameter
3281 Display language
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 21
Select a display language from the following:
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
- 2143 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
4 : Chinese(traditional characters)
5 : Italian
6 : Korean
7 : Spanish
8 : Dutch
9 : Danish
10 : Portuguese
11 : Polish
12 : Hungarian
13 : Swedish
14 : Czech
15 : Chinese(simplified characters)
16 : Russian
17 : Turkish
18 : Bulgarian
19 : Rumanian
20 : Slovak
21 : Finnish
22 : Hindi
If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected.
NOTE
Hindi is only supported on the 8.4" color LCD. It is not supported on
the 10.4"/15" color LCD.
14.1.9 CNC Screen Dual Display
Overview
When a PC and a CNC are connected via Ethernet or HSSB, the CNC screen can be displayed on the PC
and the CNC at the same time by using the CNC screen display function. When the CNC screen display
function is started on the PC while a CNC screen is displayed on the display unit of the CNC, the dual
display mode is entered.
When the CNC screen display function is ended on the PC, the CNC screen is displayed only on the
display unit of the CNC.
In case the PC hangs up for a cause in the dual display mode, it is also possible to forcibly turn off the
CNC screen display function on the PC by using a DI signal to end the dual display mode.
Key input operation can be performed on one of the PC and CNC sides, which can be selected.
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 When the dual display function is being used, the same screen is displayed on
the PC and the CNC. The PC performance may have influence on the display
speed on the CNC side and slow down the display on the CNC.
Explanation
- Operation
When bit 7 (NS2) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, the CNC screen dual display function is enabled.
Then, when the CNC screen display function on the PC side is started, the CNC screen is displayed on
both the PC and the CNC .
- 2144 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Selection of key control
Either the keyboard of the PC or the MDI keys of the CNC become usable for key control.
The DI signal CNCKY<G0295.7> is used to select key control.
If CNCKY<G0295.7> is set to “1”, the MDI keys of the CNC become usable; if the signal is set to “0”,
the keyboard of the PC becomes usable.
The reset key, however, is always usable on both the PC and the CNC.
When the CNC is equipped with a touch panel, if bit 5 (S2K) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, it
becomes possible to select key control by pressing the upper left corner of the screen. In this case, the
signal cannot be used to select key control.
When the upper left part of the display screen on the CNC is pressed, the MDI keys become usable; when
the upper left part of the CNC screen display on the PC is clicked, the keyboard of the PC becomes
usable.
With a DO signal CNCKYO<F0295.7>, key control selection status can be checked to see which key
control, key control on the PC or key control on the CNC, is currently selected.
Selection of key control is disabled when the dual display function is not used.
- Data I/O
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 0300 is set to 1, the data input/output destination is determined by
the selection of key control. When the keyboard of the PC is selected, input and output operations on the
PC side are enabled; when the MDI keys of the CNC are selected, input and output operations on the
CNC side are enabled.
When the USB memory is selected with parameter No. 0020 set to 17, if bit 0 (PCU) of parameter No.
11506 is set to 1, data input/output operation is performed for the PC. If bit 0 (PCU) of parameter No.
11506 is set to 0, data input/output operation is performed for the CNC control unit.
NOTE
If key control selection is changed and so the data input/output destination is
changed when the All I/O screen is displayed, the file list displayed on the All I/O
screen is not updated automatically. In this case, press soft key [REFRESH] to
update the display.
- Forcible end by a DI signal
If the PC hangs up for a cause when the CNC screen dual display function is being performed, the CNC
can issue a DI signal to forcibly end the CNC screen display function on the PC.
When C2SEND<G0295.6> is set to “1”, the CNC screen display function on the PC is forcibly ended.
The status of the forcible end processing is indicated by a DO signal C2SENO<F0295.6>.
Forcible end by the DI signal is invalid when the dual display function is not used.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0300 PCM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 PCM If the FS0i–MODEL F is connected to a PC via HSSB or Ethernet, when the CNC screen
display function is started:
0: The memory card interface in the CNC is used.
1: The memory card interface or the hard disk on the PC side is used.
When the CNC screen dual display function is being used, the data input/output
destination conforms to the selection of key control.
- 2145 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
If a CNC does not contain a memory card interface, the memory card interface on the PC
side is used regardless of the setting of this parameter. This parameter is valid only when
the CNC screen display function is active.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 NS2 S2K
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 S2K In CNC screen dual display function,
0: Key control is selected by DI signal <G0295.7>.
1: Key control is selected by pushing at left upper corner on the screen. (Touch panel
only)
#7 NS2 CNC screen dual display function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11506 PCU
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 PCU If there is a USB memory interface on the CNC side, the USB memory interface used
when the CNC screen display function is started via the HSSB interface is on the:
0: CNC side.
1: PC side.
NOTE
1 With the PC function, a USB memory interface on the PC side is
used regardless of the setting of this parameter if there is no USB
memory interface on the CNC main unit side.
2 This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function
is active via the HSSB interface.
When setting 1 to this parameter, the CNC screen display function
must always be executed via the HSSB interface.
3 When using the CNC screen display function via the Ethernet
interface, set 0.
4 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
Signal
Key control selection signal CNCKY <G0295.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is to be enabled.
[Operation] If the signal is set to “0”, key control on the PC is enabled.
If the signal is set to “1”, key control from the MDI keys on the CNC is enabled.
- 2146 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND <G0295.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests forcible end of the CNC screen display function on the PC side.
[Operation] If the signal is set to “0”, no end request is issued.
If the signal is set to “1”, an end request is issued.
Key control selection status signal CNCKYO <F0295.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Indicates which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is currently selected.
[Operation] If this signal is set to “0”, key control on the PC side is selected.
If this signal is set to “1”, MDI input on the CNC is selected.
Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO <F0295.6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Indicates the status of end processing performed in response to the end request issued
with the dual display forcible end request signal.
[Operation] If this signal is set to “0”, the end processing is not yet completed.
If this signal is set to “1”, the end processing is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0295 CNCKY C2SEND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0295 CNCKYO C2SENO
- 2147 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.10 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor
Overview
Any servo motor axis can be selected to display its speed considering gear ratio.
Explanation
The screen display can be switched between the speed of the milling axis and the spindle speed by using
an input signal SDPC <Gn038.5>.
←(*)
Fig. 14.1.10 (a)
(*)→
Fig. 14.1.10 (b)
- 2148 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
←(*)
Fig. 14.1.10 (c)
- Switching to the display of the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor
With the speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>, the speed of a milling axis or the spindle speed
can be selected and indicated in the part marked by (*) in the Fig. 14.1.10 (a) and Fig. 14.1.10 (c).
- Displaying the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor
As the speed of a milling axis, the value obtained by multiplying the servo motor speed by the gear ratio
is indicated.
Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side (parameter No.1898)
Gear ratio
=
Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side (parameter No.1899)
To select the target servo motor axis, set a controlled axis number as the number of a servo motor axis
used as the axis of a milling tool (parameter No. 1895).
NOTE
1 If parameter Nos. 1898 and 1899 are not set, the gear ratio is assumed to be
1:1.
2 If an axis that uses a linear motor is selected, the speed cannot be displayed.
3 Even when the speed of a milling axis is displayed, the actual speed of feed per
revolution follows the speed of the spindle.
Signal
Speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Selects the speed to be displayed: the speed of the milling axis or the spindle speed.
[Operation] If this signal is set to “1”, the speed of the milling axis is displayed.
If this signal is set to “0”, the spindle speed is displayed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn038 SDPC
- 2149 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 DPS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 DPS The actual spindle speed is:
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
1895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a
milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
1898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the
speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.
1899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of
a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.
14.1.11 Screen Switching by Mode
Overview
One of the screens displayed using function key such as the program edit screen and the program
check screen can be selected according to the mode. When a mode switches to other mode, the screen
selected last in that mode is displayed.
- 2150 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
There are five modes, and immediately after the power is turned on in each mode, a screen is selected as
follows:
MEM : Program check screen (for MEM)
EDIT : Program edit screen (for EDIT)
MDI : Program edit screen (for MDI)
TJOG/THND : Program edit screen
Other modes : Program edit screen
Mode switching and screen examples
- Mode switching after power-on
When the MEM mode is selected and function key is pressed at power-on, the program check
screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program edit screen is displayed.
- Mode switching after screen operation
When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed.
Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
MEM mode
EDIT mode
- 2151 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
- Mode switching after screen operation
When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed.
Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
EDIT mode
MEM mode
EDIT mode
- 2152 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11302 CPG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 CPG PROG function screen selection is:
0: Not changed according to the CNC mode.
1: Changed according to the CNC mode.
14.1.12 Screen Switching at Path Switching
Overview
When switching from one path to another has been made, the same screen and soft keys as displayed for
the previous path can be displayed.
Since the same screen is displayed even after path switching, the user no longer has to change the screen
display.
It is also possible to change the screen display to the screen that was selected most recently for each path.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3208 PSC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:
0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.
If this parameter is set to 0, the screen selected for each path is stored.
Therefore, when path switching to a path is made, the screen selected last for that path is
displayed.
Even if the path is changed, FANUC PICTURE and manual guide i screen does not
change to other screen because these screens are common to each path.
Therefore, different behavior will exist together in case of PSC=0, like as some screen
stay in the screen and other screen changed to another screen when the path is changed.
Use with PSC=1 is recommended, so that the screen should not change by the path
change on all screens.
14.1.13 Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure
Function
Overview
Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the
life of the LCD.
To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a
key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically
when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.
- 2153 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Screen erasure function
When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any
function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by
pressing any function key.
Automatic screen erasure function
When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen
is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.
- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function
If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC
screen is erased.
Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen
- Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0
- None of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
- No alarm is issued.
- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function
If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed
again:
Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen
- One of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
- An alarm is issued.
- Screen erasure by using the key + function key
When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a
function key.
- Set time
Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid.
- Alarm in another path
When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.
Signal
Screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF<G0062.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal enables or disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure
function.
[Operation] 0: Enables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.
1: Disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.
Automatic screen erasure status in-progress signal ERTVA<Fn006.2>
[Classification] Output signal
- 2154 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
[Function] This signal indicates that the CNC screen is being erased by the automatic screen erasure
function.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when:
- The CNC screen is erased by the automatic screen erasure function.
This signal is set to “0” when:
- One of the following key operations is performed:
MDI key
Soft key
External key input
- An alarm is issued.
- The operation mode is changed.
- The automatic screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF <G0062.1> is set to “1”.
NOTE
This signal is not output when the screen is erased by pressing the
key and any function key.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0062 *CRTOF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn006 ERTVA
Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
After a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123 passes without key operation, the NC
screen is erased automatically. Pressing a key causes the NC screen to reappear.
NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.
If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen
erasure is disabled.
14.1.14 Screen Hard Copy Function
Overview
This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to
a memory card or USB memory. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a
personal computer.
Explanation
- Start/cancellation methods
The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds or by
changing the hard copy execution request signal HCREQ <G0067.7> from “0” to “1”. The function can
- 2155 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
be canceled by pressing key or by changing the hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT
<G0067.6> to “1”.
While the screen hard copy function is in progress, the hard copy execution status signal HCEXE
<F0061.3> is “1”, and upon completion, it is set to 0. When a screen hard copy cancellation request is
received, the hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2 <F0061.2> is set to “1” and remains
in the 1 state until the hard copy function is started again or a reset is made.
- Acquisition and output of screen data
When the screen hard copy function is started, the function acquires screen data and, immediately after
the acquisition, outputs bitmap format data to, for example, a memory card inserted into the LCD unit.
While screen data is being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen
data can be output from the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT"
blinks in the status display.
- Screen data file names
Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below:
In case of bit 4 (HCN) of parameter No. 3301 is 0, file name starts with “HDCPY000.BMP” and
increments the number to 999 as following.
"HDCPY000.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
"HDCPY001.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
:
:
"HDCPY999.BMP" (Name of a file to be 1000 output to a memory card etc. after power-on)
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the file name
returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the
capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy
already exists in the memory, the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded,
alarm SR1932 is issued. In this case, please delete unnecessary files or use a new USB memory.
In case of parameter HCN is 1, file name id defined by the date and the execute number of screen hard
copy function on that day as following.
"YYMMDD00.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. on that day)
"YYMMDD01.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. on that day)
:
:
"YYMMDD99.BMP" (Name of a file to be 100 output to a memory card etc. on that day)
(YY(00~99) means the year, MM(01~12) means the month and DD(01~31) means the day)
(Example)
If screen hard copy is executed on 2013/04/17 in the first time, bit map format file is created with the
name of “13041700.BMP”.
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with “YYMMDD99.BMP” is output, the file name
returns to "YYMMDD00.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, system searches number which does
not exist and output the file with that number. If all number files (00~99) exist on the memory card, alarm
SR1973 is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
- 2156 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy
already exists in the memory, system searches the file number which does not exist on the memory and
output the file with that number, same as memory card. If all number files (00~99) exist in the memory,
the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded, alarm SR1932 is issued. In this
case, please delete unnecessary files or use a new USB memory.
Limitation
- Screens whose hard copies cannot be made
Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.
- Foreground I/O devices
During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use.
- Canceling the hard copy function
If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data
that has been output is created.
- CNC screen display function
If CNC screen display function is working, the screen hard copy function is disabled. In this case, bit map
format data can be made by screen copy function of CNC screen display function. Please refer to the
operator’s manual of CNC screen display function.
- Output folder
The screen data is output to the root folder of the memory card or the USB memory.
Signal
Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT <G0067.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal requests the cancellation of the screen hard copy function.
[Operation] When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
- Cancels the screen hard copy function if it is being executed.
- Does nothing if the screen hard copy function is not being executed. Note that
changing HCREQ <G0067.7> from “0” to “1” when HCABT <G0067.6> is “1”
does not cause the screen hard copy function to be executed.
NOTE
If changing this signal from “0” to “1”, set it to “0” on the PMC after
the signal is maintained in the 1 state for at least 64 msec.
Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ <G0067.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal requests the execution of the screen hard copy function.
[Operation] When the signal is changed from “0” to “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
- Starts creating a hard copy.
NOTE
If changing this signal from “0” to “1”, set it to “0” on the PMC after
the signal is maintained in the “1” state for at least 64 msec. If
making another hard copy execution request, wait until the signal is
maintained in the “0” state for at least 64 msec.
- 2157 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2 <F0061.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that a screen hard copy cancellation request is made.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- HCABT <G0067.6> is set to “1” or key is pressed, so that the CNC receives
this as a screen hard copy cancellation request.
This signal is set to “0” in the following cases:
- A reset is made.
- The screen hard copy is started again.
Hard copy execution status signal HCEXE <F0061.3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies that the screen hard copy function is being executed.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- The screen hard copy function is started by changing HCREQ <G0067.7> from “0”
to “1” or by pressing and holding down key for five seconds.
This signal is set to “0” in the following cases:
- The screen hard copy function is completed.
- The screen hard copy function is canceled.
Timing charts for input/output signals are shown below Fig. 14.1.14 (a) shows a timing
chart of the screen hard copy function when it terminates normally, and Fig. 14.1.14 (b)
shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it is canceled and restarted.
Least 64 msec
Hard copy execution request signal
(HCREQ)
Hard copy execution status signal
(HCEXE)
Fig. 14.1.14 (a) When the screen hard copy function terminates normally
Least 64msec Least 64msec
Hard copy execution request signal Least 64msec
(HCREQ)
Hard copy execution status signal
(HCEXE)
Least 64msec
Hard copy cancellation request signal
(HCABT)
Hard copy cancellation request
reception signal (HCAB2)
Fig. 14.1.14 (b) When the screen hard copy function is canceled and restarted
- 2158 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0067 HCREQ HCABT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0061 HCEXE HCAB2
Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 35
Set the interface number for a foreground I/O device.
If enabling the screen hard copy function (by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301
to 1), set this parameter to 4 (memory card) or 17 (USB memory).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3301 HDC HCN H16
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 H16 Bit map data of screen hard copies uses:
0: 256 colors.
1: 16 colors.
#4 HCN Bit map file name of the screen hard copy is:
0: “HDCPYxxx.BMP”
(xxx(000~999) means the number of screen hard copy after power-on).
1: “YYMMDDxx.BMP”
(YY(00~99) means the year, MM(01~12) means the month, DD(01~31) means the
day and xx(00~99) means the number of screen hard copy in that day)
#7 HDC A screen hard copy function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Only the value of this parameter that is set for path 1 is effective.
14.1.15 Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals
Overview
These signals specify whether the speed of each axis is added to the display of actual speed.
The signals can be used when, for example, the movement speed of the slave axis is not added to the
display of actual speed during synchronous operation.
The signals are valid for reading of the actual speed of the control axis in the PMC window function
(function code 26).
- 2159 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The actual speed obtained by reading of the actual speed of the control axis in
the PMC window function (function code 26) is a value used for screen display
and cannot be used for control.
Signal
Actual speed display axis selection signals *ACTF1 to *ACTF8 <Gn580>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals specify whether the movement speed of each axis is added to the display of
actual speed.
[Operation] The movement speed of the axis for which 1 is set is not added to the display of actual
speed.
*ACTFx : x=1 . . . The speed of the first axis is not added.
x=2 . . . The speed of the second axis is not added.
x=3 . . . The speed of the third axis is not added.
: :
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn580 *ACTF8 *ACTF7 *ACTF6 *ACTF5 *ACTF4 *ACTF3 *ACTF2 *ACTF1
NOTE
These signals can be used together with bit 3 (NDF) of parameter
No. 3115, which specifies whether the movement speed of a
selected axis is considered during calculation of actual speed.
14.1.16 Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters
Overview
This function expands the names of custom macro common variables #500 to #549 to a maximum of 31
characters in length.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Explanation
A name of up to eight characters can be assigned to 50 custom macro common variables #500 to #549
using the following command.
SETVN n[ VAR500,VAR501,VAR502,……] ;
See Chapter II-16 in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B- 64604EN).
If this function is used, a custom macro common variable can have a variable name of up to 31 characters.
Up to 31 characters can be displayed on the macro variable screen when:
• The full-screen display of the custom macro variable screen is performed on the 10.4” display.
• The custom macro variable screen is displayed on the 15” display.
- 2160 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Fig. 14.1.16 (a) 31-character display
In the following cases, custom macro common variable names of up to 11 characters are displayed. If a
macro variable name is longer than 11 characters, only the 11 characters are displayed and the rest is
represented by "~".
• When the small-screen display of the custom macro variable screen is performed on the 10.4”
display.
• When the custom macro variable screen is displayed on the 8.4” display.
Fig. 14.1.16 (b) 11-character display
Display procedure
1. Press the function key .
2. Press the continuous menu key to display soft key [MACRO].
3. Press the soft key [MACRO].
10.4” display unit
The custom macro variable screen below is displayed.
In small screen display, custom macro common variable names of up to 11 characters are displayed.
- 2161 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 14.1.16 (c) 10.4” display (small screen display)
Press soft key [MACRO] again to change the custom macro variable screen to full screen display. In full
screen display, custom macro common variable names of up to 31 characters are displayed.
Fig. 14.1.16 (d) 10.4” display (full screen display)
NOTE
1 Bit 4 (SCM) of parameter No. 11355 specifies whether small screen display or
large screen display is selected in the initial state of the custom macro screen
during power-on.
2 If the pattern data input function is enabled and the comment of pattern data
input is set to be displayed on the right side, variable names of up to 10
characters are displayed in small screen display.
- 2162 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
3 If the macro compiler & executor function is enabled and custom macro common
variables #500 to #549 and P-CODE macro common variables are set to be
sharable, variable names of up to 31 or 11 characters are displayed on the
execution macro variable screen, conversational macro variable screen, and
auxiliary macro variable screen, as on the custom macro screen.
15” display unit
The custom macro variable screen below is displayed. Custom macro common variable names of up to 31
characters are displayed.
Fig. 14.1.16 (e) 15” display
NOTE
If the macro compiler & executor function is enabled and custom macro common
variables #500 to #549 and P-CODE macro common variables are set to be
sharable, variable names of up to 31 or 11 characters are displayed on the
execution macro variable screen, conversational macro variable screen, and
auxiliary macro variable screen, as on the custom macro screen.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 VRN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable names of common variables #500 to
#549 are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
- 2163 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11355 SCM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 SCM In the initial state, the custom macro screen is:
0: A small screen display.
1: A full screen display.
14.1.17 Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm
Overview
If an axis type alarm occurs, the type, number, and message of the alarm as well as the name of the axis
on which the alarm occurred are displayed on the alarm screen. The axis name is usually the axis name set
in parameter No. 1020, but bit 3 (DAA) of parameter No. 11368 can be set to switch the axis name to the
one set in parameter No. 3132.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11368 DAA
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#3 DAA The axis name used with axis type alarms is one set using parameter No.:
0: 1020.
1: 3132.
NOTE
1 Even when this parameter is 1, an axis name set in parameter No.
1020 is used if the value of parameter No. 3132 is 0.
2 If an extended axis name is in use, only the first letter in it is
replaced.
Limitation
Even when bit 3 (DAA) of parameter No. 11368 is 1, the axis name to be displayed on the operation
history screen and the alarm history screen is the one set in parameter No. 1020.
14.1.18 Periodic Maintenance Screen
Overview
The periodic maintenance screen function provides guidelines as to when consumables such as the
backup battery of the control unit and the backlight of the LCD unit are to be replaced and checked if the
lifetimes of these items have been set in advance.
Signal
Periodic maintenance lifetime warning signal LIFOVR<Fn093.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports that a lifetime warning is issued on the periodic maintenance screen.
- 2164 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when any of the items set on the periodic maintenance screen
enters the lifetime warning state.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn093 LIFOVR
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8900 PLC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 PLC When the remaining time of an item falls to a value less than the percentage of the life
specified in parameter No.8911, the life warning status is displayed at
0: Timer area on CNC status display area.
1: Alarm area on CNC status display area.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8901 MEN
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen and the maintenance information screen are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8903 PDM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 PDM When the remaining time of an item falls to a value less than the percentage of the life
specified in parameter No.8911, the life warning status on CNC status display area is
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8906 MPM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#6 MPM On the periodic maintenance screen,
0: the life time is counted in each path.
1: the life time is not counted in each path.
- 2165 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
8911 Percentage for life warning display on the periodic maintenance screen
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 99
On the periodic maintenance screen, if the remaining time of an item falls to a value less
than the percentage of the life specified in this parameter, the item name and remaining
time is displayed in red as a warning.
14.1.19 Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen
Overview
On the current position screen, it can be selected whether to display each axis position by setting the
parameter or signal.
Moreover, the order of displaying axis can be changed.
Explanation
- Selection of display axis
If bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115 is set to 1, the set axis is not displayed and the blank is displayed.
- Selection of display the absolute and relative coordinates and the
distance-to-go
If bit 1 (NDAx) of parameter No. 3115 is set to 1, the absolute and relative coordinates and the
distance-to-go is not displayed. (The machine coordinates are displayed)
- Change the order of displaying axis
If parameter No. 3130 is set, the order of displaying each axis can be changed.
NOTE
1 The order can be changed only in the current position screen, and it is
impossible in other screens such as the work-offset screen and the parameter
screen.
2 If the parameters of all axes are set to 0, this function is invalid.
3 The axis that 0 or value more than number of maximum axes in the path is set to
the parameter is not displayed.
- Close up display
If bit 0 (TAD) of parameter No. 13102 is set to 1, when the axis is not displayed by the bit 0 (NDPx) of
parameter No. 3115, the axes are closed up and displayed.
Moreover, when the order of displaying axes are changed by parameter No. 3130, the axis that 0 is set to
the parameter is closed up and displayed.
- Selection of display axis by the signal
If the axis non-displayed signal NPOS1 to NPOS8 <Gn198> is set to “1”, the set axis is not displayed and
the blank is displayed.
NOTE
If bit 0 (TAD) of parameter No. 13102 is set to 1, when the axis non-displayed
signal NPOS1 to NPOS8 <Gn198> is set to “1”, the axis is closed up.
- 2166 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 NDPx The current position is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
NOTE
When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function, set 1 for the
EGB dummy axis to disable current position display.
#1 NDAx The current position and the amount of the movement to be made in absolute and relative
coordinates are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed. (The machine coordinates are displayed.)
3130 Axis display order for current position display screens
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 32
Set the order in which axes are displayed on current position display screens.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13102 TAD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 TAD When the axis is not displayed by the bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter or parameter No.3130,
0: The set axis is displayed as blanks.
1: The axis is closed up and displayed.
Signal
Axis non-displayed signals NPOS1 to NPOS8<Gn198>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The display axis on the current position screen is selected.
[Operation] When these signals are set to “0”, the set axes are displayed.
When these signals are set to “1”, the set axes are not displayed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn198 NPOS8 NPOS7 NPOS6 NPOS5 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1
- 2167 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.20 Power Consumption Monitor
Function Overview
The electric power consumption and integral power consumption of servo motor and spindle motor can be
read through the interface of PMC window, FOCAS2 interface or etc. Custom application can observe
consumed power and regenerative power of servo and spindle axes. Then you can use them to appeal
your machine with the energy saving ability. Moreover, these values can be confirmed on the CNC
screen.
Because the power consumption data is in the diagnosis data, it is possible to read it from user's
application in the following way. For the details, please refer to each manual.
-PMC
WINDR function code 33 Reading diagnosis data (Low-speed)
For details of the WINDR instruction, please refer to PMC programming manual (B-64513EN).
-FOCAS2 function
cnc_diagnoss Read diagnosis data
cnc_diagnosr Read diagnosis data(area specified)
For details of the function specification, please refer to a data window library specifications
bundled to FOCAS1/2 Library disk (A02B-0207-K737).
-C language executor
cnc_diagnoss Read diagnostics data
For details of the function specification, please refer to C Language Executor programming
manual (B-63943EN-3).
Displaying power consumption
Power consumption monitoring screen
The electric power data of servo axis and spindle axis consumption and regeneration can be displayed.
Fig.14.1.20 (a) Power consumption monitoring screen for 10.4” display unit
Refer to Operator’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN) for
detailed operations on Power consumption monitoring screen.
- 2168 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Bar-graph display of whole power consumption
The bar-graph where the entire power consumption can be confirmed is displayed in the warning message
area. Power consumption can be confirmed on every screen.
Fig.14.1.20 (b) Bar-graph of entire power consumption
NOTE
1 The bar-graph display can be concealed by the setting of parameter APM
(No.11368#6)=1.
2 When the warning message is displayed, the bar-graph is not displayed.
3 The bar-graph displayed in the warning display area is only the entire power
consumption.
Diagnosis data
Present power consumption of all axes
4900 Present power consumption of all axes
[Data type] 2-Word
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
Present power consumption of each servo axis
4901 Present power consumption of each servo axis
[Data type] 2-Word axis
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
NOTE
This value becomes negative during regeneration of power that is
generated by deceleration of an axis
Present power consumption of each spindle axis
4901 Present power consumption of each spindle axis
[Data type] 2-Word spindle
[Unit of data] W
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
NOTE
This value becomes negative during regeneration of power that is
generated by deceleration of an axis
- 2169 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Integral power consumption of all axes
4910 Integral net power consumption of all axes
4911 Integral power consumption of all axes
4912 Integral power regeneration of all axes
[Data type] 2-Word
[Unit of data] 0.001kWh
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
NOTE
- These values are integrated from 0.000kWh every turning on CNC.
- No.4911 and No.4912 are counted as “consumption” when the
summational power of all axes is positive value and counted as
“regeneration” when the summational power of all axes is negative
value. This shows the result of including countervailing among all
axes in case that some axes consume power but other axes
regenerate power. Therefore these diagnosis data mean the net
consumption and net regeneration power exchanging between the
power supply and commercial power source.
Example)
Assume that the case of power
in a spindle axis: consumption 100kWh, regeneration 25kWh
in a servo axis: consumption 20kWh, regeneration 1kWh
The result of simple summation becomes consumption 120kWh
and regeneration 26kWh.
In this situation, assume that 1kWh power consumption in the
spindle axis and 1kWh power regeneration in the servo axis
occurs simultaneously. The each 1kWh is countervailed. As a
result, integral power consumption becomes 119kWh and the
integral power regeneration becomes 25kWh and the integral net
power consumption becomes 94kWh.
Integral power consumption of each servo axis
4920 Integral net power consumption of each servo axis
4921 Integral power consumption of each servo axis
4922 Integral power regeneration of each servo axis
[Data type] 2-Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001kWh
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
NOTE
These values are integrated from 0.000kWh every turning on CNC.
- 2170 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Integral power consumption of each spindle axis
4930 integral net power consumption of each spindle axis
4931 integral power consumption of each spindle axis
4932 integral power regeneration of each spindle axis
[Data type] 2-Word spindle
[Unit of data] 0.001kWh
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
NOTE
These values are integrated from 0.000kWh every turning on CNC.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2281 RDPRR RDPMU2 RDPMU1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 RDPMU1
#1 RDPMU2 Internal unit setting of power consumption monitor
Please set these bits according to the maximum motor output.
Table 14.1.20 (a) Internal unit setting (Servo)
Maximum output of motor RDPMU2 RDPMU1
300kW or more 0 0
30kW to 300kW 0 1
3kW to 30kW 1 0
3kW or less 1 1
Table 14.1.20 (b) Setting for each servo motor
Servo Motor RDPMU2 RDPMU1
αiS500/3000HV αiS1000/2000HV αiS2000/2000HV
*2
*2 *1,2
0 0
αiS1000/3000HV αiS3000/2000HV
*2 *1,2
αiF40/3000 αiS40/4000HV αiS100/2500HV
αiF40/3000FAN αiS50/2000 αiS100/2500HVFAN
αiS12/6000 αiS50/2000HV αiS200/2500
αiS12/6000HV αiS50/3000FAN αiS200/2500FAN
αiS22/4000 αiS50/3000HVFAN αiS200/2500HV
αiS22/4000HV αiS60/2000 αiS200/2500HVFAN 0 1
αiS22/6000 αiS60/2000HV αiS300/2000 *2
αiS22/6000HV αiS60/3000FAN αiS300/2000HV *2
αiS30/4000 αiS60/3000HVFAN αiS300/3000HV
αiS30/4000HV αiS100/2500 αiS500/2000 *2
αiS40/4000 αiS100/2500FAN αiS500/2000HV *2
- 2171 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Servo Motor RDPMU2 RDPMU1
αiF2/5000 αiS4/5000 βiS8/3000
αiF4/4000 αiS4/5000HV βiS8/3000HV
αiF4/4000HV αiS4/6000 βiSc8/3000
αiF8/3000 αiS4/6000HV βiS12/2000
αiF8/3000HV αiS8/6000 βiS12/3000
αiF12/3000 αiS8/6000HV βiS12/3000HV
αiF12/3000HV αiS8/4000 βiSc12/3000
αiF22/3000 αiS8/4000HV βiS22/2000 1 0
αiF22/3000HV αiS12/4000 βiS22/2000HV
αiF30/3000 αiS12/4000HV βiS22/3000
αiS2/5000 βiS1/6000 βiS22/3000HV
αiS2/5000HV βiS4/4000 βiS30/2000
αiS2/6000 βiS4/4000HV βiS30/2000HV
αiS2/6000HV βiSc4/4000 βiS40/2000
βiS40/2000HV
αiF1/5000 βiS0.4/5000 βiS2/4000
βiS0.2/5000 βiS0.5/6000 βiS2/4000HV 1 1
βiS0.3/5000 βiSc2/4000
Synchronous built-in servo motor *3 RDPMU2 RDPMU1
0 0
DiS1500/250(400V) DiS2000/150(400V) DiS5000/50(400V) 0 1
DiS15/1000(400V) DiS260/300(400V) DiS1000/200(200V)
DiS60/400(400V) DiS260/1000(200V) DiS1000/200(400V)
DiS70/300(400V) DiS370/300(200V) DiS1200/250(200V)
DiS85/1000(200V) DiS370/300(400V) DiS1200/250(400V)
DiS110/1000(200V) DiS400/250(200V) DiS1500/100(200V)
DiS150/300(200V) DiS400/250(400V) DiS1500/100(400V) 1 0
DiS150/300(400V) DiS500/250(200V) DiS1500/250(200V)
DiS200/300(200V) DiS500/250(400V) DiS2000/100(200V)
DiS200/300(400V) DiS800/250(200V) DiS2000/100(400V)
DiS250/250(200V) DiS800/250(400V) DiS2000/150(200V)
DiS250/250(400V)
DiS15/1000(200V) DiS60/400(200V) DiS110/400(200V)
DiS22/600(200V) DiS70/300(200V) DiS110/400(400V)
1 1
DiS22/600(400V) DiS85/400(200V) DiS260/300(200V)
DiS22/1500(200V) DiS85/400(400V)
*4
Linear motor RDPMU2 RDPMU1
0 0
LiS17000C3/2(400V) 0 1
LiS1500B1/4(200V) LiS7500B2/2(200V) LiS11000C2/2(200V)
LiS3000B2/2(200V) LiS7500B2/2(400V) LiS11000C2/2(400V)
LiS3000B2/2(400V) LiS7500B2/2HV LiS11000C2/2HV
LiS3000B2/4(200V) LiS9000B2/2(200V) LiS15000C2/2(200V)
LiS4500B2/2(200V) LiS9000B2/2(400V) LiS15000C2/2(400V)
LiS4500B2/2(400V) LiS9000B2/4(200V) LiS15000C2/3(200V)
1 0
LiS4500B2/2HV LiS3300C1/2(200V) LiS15000C2/3HV
LiS6000B2/2(200V) LiS3300C1/2(400V) LiS10000C3/2(200V)
LiS6000B2/2(400V) LiS9000C2/2(200V) LiS10000C3/2(400V)
LiS6000B2/2HV LiS9000C2/2(400V) LiS10000C3/2HV
LiS6000B2/4(200V) LiS9000C2/2HV LiS17000C3/2(200V)
LiS17000C3/2HV
LiS300A1/4(200V) LiS600A1/4(200V) LiS900A1/4(200V) 1 1
- 2172 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
*1) Power Consumption Monitor is not available to the axis using
αiS3000/2000HV or αiS2000/2000HV with torque control.
*2) In the case of “plural winding motor”, which is a motor driven by 2 or 4 amplifiers,
please set the following parameters for main axis only. (Please set to 0 for sub axis)
*3) In the case of synchronous built-in servo motors, please set No.2300#2=1. If you use
a non-binary type encoder, please set No.2010#2=1 at the same time.
*4) In the case of linear motors, please set No.2010#2=1.
*5) Regarding the other motors, please set it according to the maximum motor output
described in each motor manual.
NOTE
If these bits are wrong, the electric power consumption data is not
calculated correctly.
#2 RDPRR Regeneration method of servo amplifier is
0: regeneration to power source
1: register regeneration
NOTE
In case of using the amplifier with register regeneration,
regeneration power is not returned to power source. Therefore,
instantaneous power consumption should become greater than 0.
2468 RDPMR Motor winding resistance
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 2-12Ω
Please set the value of “Armature resistance (1 phase)” in the specifications of the motor.
Example) Case of αi S8/4000
Set value=0.31/2－12 =1270 where armature resistance=0.31Ω
- 2173 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 Be sure to set this parameter. Power consumption calculation
works when this parameter is set to more than 1.
2 Power consumption calculation works on main axis only in case of
the motor with plural winding. Set this parameter for a main axis
only. Set 0 for sub axis.
2469 RDPMA Lose coefficient A of a servo amplifier
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
Please set the value of loss coefficient A in Table Table 14.1.20 (c) .
Example) Case of αi SV80, Set value=832
Case of αi SV80/80, Set value (L axis) = 672, Set value (M axis) = 672
NOTE
1 Set this value only to main axis in case of a plural winding motor.
Set 0 to the sub axis.
2 When you use Serial feedback dummy function with servo
amplifier, add RDPMA value of dummy axis to No.2469 of other
non-dummy axis.
2490 RDPMB Lose coefficient B of a servo amplifier
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
Please set the value of loss coefficient B in Table Table 14.1.20 (c) .
Example) Case of αi SV80, αi SV80/80 HRV2, Set value=262
Case of αi SV80, αi SV80/80 HRV3, Set value=352
- 2174 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
1 Setting value depends on HRV.
2 Set this value only to main axis in case of a plural winding motor.
Set 0 to the sub axis.
Table 14.1.20 (c) Loss coefficient A, B setting value of servo amplifier
In case of multi-axis amplifier, please set the value corresponding to each axis. If there
are two columns, the upper column corresponds to L axis and the lower correspond to M
axis. If there are three columns, each corresponds to L, M and N axis from the upper.
Spec. Loss coefficient B
Name Loss coefficient A
(A06B) HRV2 HRV3
αiSV4 6240-H101 832 307 397
αi SV20 6240-H103 832 307 397
αi SV40 6240-H104 832 269 339
αi SV80 6240-H105 832 262 352
αi SV160 6240-H106 1152 288 371
αi SV360 6240-H109 1600 301 352
608 307 397
αi SV4/4 6240-H201
608 307 397
608 307 397
αi SV4/20 6240-H203
608 307 397
608 307 397
αi SV20/20 6240-H205
608 307 397
608 307 397
αi SV20/40 6240-H206
608 269 339
672 269 339
αi SV40/40 6240-H207
672 269 339
672 269 339
αi SV40/80 6240-H208
672 262 352
672 262 352
αi SV80/80 6240-H209
672 262 352
736 262 352
αi SV80/160 6240-H210
736 288 371
736 288 371
αi SV160/160 6240-H211
736 288 371
555 307 397
αi SV4/4/4 6240-H301 555 307 397
555 307 397
555 307 397
αi SV20/20/20 6240-H305 555 307 397
555 307 397
555 307 397
αi SV20/20/40 6240-H306 555 307 397
555 269 339
661 269 339
αi SV40/40/40 6240-H308 661 269 339
661 269 339
704 307 397
αi SVP20/20/20-5.5 6230-H001 704 307 397
704 307 397
- 2175 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Spec. Loss coefficient B
Name Loss coefficient A
(A06B) HRV2 HRV3
αi SV10HV 6290-H102 832 499 902
αi SV20HV 6290-H103 832 538 883
αi SV40HV 6290-H104 832 538 928
αi SV80HV 6290-H105 1152 550 749
αi SV180HV 6290-H106 1600 538 749
αi SV360HV 6290-H109 2176 474 672
αi SV540HV 6290-H110 2752 512 -
608 499 902
αi SV10/10HV 6290-H202
608 499 902
608 499 902
αi SV10/20HV 6290-H204
608 538 883
672 538 883
αi SV20/20HV 6290-H205
672 538 883
672 538 883
αi SV20/40HV 6290-H206
672 538 928
672 538 928
αi SV40/40HV 6290-H207
672 538 928
736 538 928
αi SV40/80HV 6290-H208
736 550 749
736 550 749
αi SV80/80HV 6290-H209
736 550 749
555 499 902
αi SV10/10/10HV 6290-H302 555 499 902
555 499 902
555 499 902
αi SV10/10/20HV 6290-H303 555 499 902
555 538 883
661 538 883
αi SV20/20/20HV 6290-H305 661 538 883
661 538 883
1056 499 902
αi SV10/10/10-5.5HV 6280-H001 1056 499 902
1056 499 902
Note) If βiSV amplifiers, which adopt resistor regeneration, are used, please set
No2281#2=1.
Spec. Loss coefficient Loss coefficient B
Name
(A06B) A HRV2 HRV3
βiSV4 6160-H001 960 320 416
βiSV20 6160-H002 960 320 416
βiSV40 6160-H003 960 294 378
βiSV80 6160-H004 960 275 371
512 320 416
βiSV20/20 6166-H201
512 320 416
512 288 365
βiSV40/40 6166-H203
512 288 365
βiSV10HV 6161-H001 960 525 947
βiSV20HV 6161-H002 960 563 928
βiSV40HV 6161-H003 960 563 979
- 2176 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
2463 RDPMC Loss coefficient C of power supply
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
Please set the value of loss coefficient C in Table Table 14.1.20 (d) to the PS loss
calculating axis. Please set 0 to the other axis.
PS lose calculating axis is :
One of the axes whose amplifier is connected to a common power supply (PS).
On PS loss calculating axis, the power loss of power supply (PS) is added to the power
consumption of the axis.
NOTE
If both main axis and sub axis of a plural winding motor have PS
respectively, set double value as loss coefficient C for main axis,
and set 0 for sub axis.
2491 RDPMD Loss coefficient D of power supply
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
Please set the value of loss coefficient D in Table Table 14.1.20 (d).
NOTE
1 Set the value to all servo axes.
2 Set this value only to main axis in case of a plural winding motor.
Set 0 to the sub axis.
Table 14.1.20 (d) Loss coefficient C, D setting of power supply
Spec.
Name C D
(A06B)
αi PS3 6200-H003 883 730
αi PS7.5 6200-H008 1037 659
αi PS11 6200-H011 1037 659
αi PS15 6200-H015 1037 653
αi PS26 6200-H026 1344 717
αi PS30 6200-H030 1344 704
αi PS37 6200-H037 1344 723
αi PS55 6200-H055 2266 672
αi PS11HV 6250-H011 1120 397
αi PS18HV 6250-H018 1120 378
αi PS30HV 6250-H030 1427 499
αi PS45HV 6250-H045 1427 486
αi PS60HV 6250-H060 1427 486
αi PS75HV 6250-H075 2349 480
αi PS100HV 6250-H100 2349 480
- 2177 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
If βiSV amplifiers, which adopt resistor regeneration, are used, please set No2281#2=1.
*1) The value in case of single-phase input.
Spec.
Name C D
(A06B)
6160-H001 621
βiSV4 0 *1
(1024)
6160-H002 621
βiSV20 0 *1
(1024)
βiSV40 6160-H003 0 646
βiSV80 6160-H004 0 646
βiSV20/20 6166-H201 0 710
βiSV40/40 6166-H203 0 710
βiSV10HV 6161-H001 0 320
βiSV20HV 6161-H002 0 320
βiSV40HV 6161-H003 0 320
2105 TRQCST Torque constant number
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.00001Nm / 1 Torque command
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter is used to specify a motor-specific torque constant.
Please check this parameter is same to standard setting value according to motor model.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2301 TQCT10
[Input type]Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#7 TQCT10 Setting of torque constant (No.2105) is used
0: without being any modified.
1: after being multiplied by 10.
Please check this parameter is same to standard setting value according to motor model.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2200 IQOB
[Input type]Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#2 IQOB IQ observer is
0: invalid.
1: valid.
Please set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4541 PWCBT1 PWCBT0 POWCAL
[Input type]Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle
- 2178 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#0 POWCAL Power consumption calculation of spindle is
0: invalid.
1: valid.
#1 PWCBT0
#2 PWCBT1 Internal unit setting of power consumption monitor.
Please set these bits according to the maximum motor output.
Table 14.1.20 (e) Internal unit setting (Spindle)
Maximum output of motor PWCBT1 PWCBT0
300kW or more 0 0
30kW to 300kW 0 1
3kW to 30kW 1 0
3kW or less 1 1
Table 14.1.20 (f) Setting for each spindle motor
Spindle motor PWCBT1 PWCBT0
αiI 22/7000 αiI 22/10000 αiI 30/6000
αiI 40/6000 αiI 50/6000 αiIP 50/6000
αiIP 60/4500 αiI 22/7000HV αiI 30/6000HV 0 1
αiI 40/6000HV αiI 60/4500HV αiI 100/4000HV
αiIP 50/6000HV αiIP 60/4500HV
αiI 1/15000 αiI 1.5/10000 αiI 1.5/15000
αiI 2/10000 αiI 2/15000 αiI 3/10000
αiI 3/12000 αiI 6/10000 αiI 6/12000
αiI 8/8000 αiI 8/10000 αiI 12/7000
αiI 12/10000 αiI 15/7000 αiI 15/10000
αiI 18/7000 αiI 18/10000 αiIP 12/6000
αiIP 12/8000 αiIP 15/6000 αiIP 15/8000 1 0
αiIP 18/6000 αiIP 18/8000 αiIP 22/6000
αiIP 22/8000 αiIP 30/6000 αiIP 40/6000
αiI 1.5/10000HV αiI 2/10000HV αiI 3/10000HV
αiI 6/10000HV αiI 8/8000HV αiI 12/7000HV
αiI 15/7000HV αiIP 15/6000HV αiIP 22/6000HV
αiIP 40/6000HV
αiI 0.5/10000 αiI 1/10000 αiI 0.5/10000HV
1 1
αiI 1/10000HV
Regarding the other motors, please set the value according to the maximum motor output
described in each motor manual.
4593 Loss coefficient E of a spindle amplifier
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle
Please set the value of loss coefficient E in Table 14.1.20 (g). 14.1.20 (g)
4594 Loss coefficient F of a spindle amplifier
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle
Please set the value of loss coefficient F in Table 14.1.20 (g). 14.1.20 (g)
- 2179 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Table 14.1.20 (g) Loss coefficient E and F of spindle amplifier
Spec. Loss Loss
Spindle amplifier
(A06B) coefficient E coefficient F
αi SP2.2 6220-H002 1043 326
αi SP5.5 6220-H006 1158 371
αi SP11 6220-H011 1274 326
αi SP15 6220-H015 1274 320
αi SP22 6220-H022 1478 378
αi SP26 6220-H026 1478 346
αi SP30 6220-H030 1478 346
αi SP37 6220-H037 1478 352
αi SP45 6220-H045 2662 326
αi SP55 6220-H055 2662 346
αi SVP20/20/20-5.5 6230-H001 0 371
αi SP5.5HV 6270-H006 1523 659
αi SP11HV 6270-H011 1523 653
αi SP15HV 6270-H015 1523 608
αi SP22HV 6270-H022 1766 704
αi SP30HV 6270-H030 1766 704
αi SP45HV 6270-H045 1766 730
αi SP75HV 6270-H075 2656 723
αi SP100HV 6270-H100 2656 723
αi SVP10/10/10-5.5 6280-H001 0 659
Please set above coefficient regardless of PWM frequency setting.
4595 Loss coefficient C of a power supply
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle
Please set the value of loss coefficient C in Table Table 14.1.20 (d) to the PS loss
calculating axis. Please set 0 to the other axis.
PS lose calculating axis is :
One of the axes whose amplifier is connected to a common power supply (PS).
On PS loss calculating axis, the power loss of power supply (PS) is added to the power
consumption of the axis.
4596 Loss coefficient D of a power supply
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word spindle
Please set the value of loss coefficient D in Table Table 14.1.20 (d).
NOTE
1 Set the value to all spindle axes.
2 Even if you used plural winding spindle motor, set the specified
value in Table 14.1.20 (d) as loss coefficient D in respective axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11368 APM PWC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2180 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
#5 PWC Power consumption monitoring screen is
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#6 APM Bar-graph display that shows the whole of power consumption is
0: Valid.
1: Invalid.
NOTE
This parameter is effective at PWC=1.
11371 Scale for PCM bar-graph
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] kW
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Specify the absolute value of maximum/minimum scale for the bar graph of power
consumption monitoring screen function.
If 0 is specified, the setting of parameter No.2281#0, #1(servo), and parameter
No.4541#1 and #2(spindle) are checked, and the biggest motor output value is used as a
maximum/minimum value for scale.
e.g.) If 3000 is specified, -3000kW/3000kW are displayed.
11392 Scale for PCM bar-graph of servo axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001kW
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify the absolute value of maximum/minimum scale for the bar graph of each servo
axis in power consumption monitoring screen.
Specify integer from 1 to 9999999.
4 digits from the top are displayed in power consumption monitoring screen, though the
value of bar graph is estimated by using this parameter itself.
If 0 is specified, the scale is decided by the parameters 2281#0 and #1.
e.g.) If 9999999 is specified, -9999kW/9999kW are displayed.
If 11100 is specified, -11.10kW/11.10kW are displayed.
11393 Scale of PCM bar-graph of spindle axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-Word spindle
[Unit of data] 0.001kW
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify the absolute value of maximum/minimum scale for the bar graph of each spindle
axis in power consumption monitoring screen.
Specify integer from 1 to 9999999.
4 digits from the top are displayed in power consumption monitoring screen, though the
value of bar graph is estimated by using this parameter itself.
If 0 is specified, the scale is decided by the parameters 4541#1 and #2.
e.g.) If 9999999 is specified, -9999kW/9999kW are displayed.
If 11100 is specified, -11.10kW/11.10kW are displayed.
- 2181 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11394 AND
[Input type]Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 AND Power consumption of each servo axis is
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11395 SND
[Input type]Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle
#0 SND Power consumption of each spindle axis is
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Power consumption monitoring screen
- 2182 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
14.1.21 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function
Function Overview
Power consumption in a machine can be categorized into power consumption in spindle motors, that in
servo motors and that in peripheral devices (such as a coolant pump) (See Fig.14.1.21 (a)). Suppressing
torque at acceleration/deceleration in spindles, where there is large power consumption, can reduce whole
power consumption of a machine, though machining time gets longer.
By utilizing this feature, this function makes it possible to switch between machining with shorter time
and that with less power consumption.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Fig.14.1.21 (a) Power consumption in machine
Fig.14.1.21 (b) shows the relation between power consumption and machining time.
Power consumption in spindle motors gets smaller by suppressing spindles’ torque at
acceleration/deceleration. However, machining time gets longer because acceleration/deceleration
requires longer time. Therefore, the longer machining time gets, the smaller the summation of power
consumption in spindle motors and in servo motors gets as shown in Fig.14.1.21 (b). On the other hand,
longer machining time makes power consumption in peripheral devices larger because running times of
them get longer (See power consumption in peripheral devices in Fig.14.1.21 (b)). Total power
consumption is the sum of these power consumptions above.
‘A’ in Fig.14.1.21 (b) shows the point of the fastest machining (normal machining). Utilizing full
spindles’ torque makes required time for acceleration/deceleration smaller, though total power
consumption gets larger because of large power consumption in spindle motors.
‘B’ shows the point of the least power consumption. As described above, machining time gets longer
because of suppression in spindles’ torque at acceleration/deceleration.
This function makes it possible to select machining levels (called Eco levels) between the fastest
machining (‘A’) and machining with the least power consumption (‘B’).
- 2183 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.14.1.21 (b) Power consumption vs. machining time
Therefore, selecting an Eco level provides both faster machining and less power machining.
By using this function, power consumption can be reduced effectively when, for example, there is enough
time to deadline or there is large difference in production time of each part in production line.
NOTE
1 This function can reduce power consumption in spindles only at
acceleration/deceleration. Power consumption during cutting does not change
even if the selected Eco level changes. Therefore, the effect of eco-machining
may get smaller for machining with less acceleration/deceleration of spindles.
2 Power consumption of a spindle motor may fluctuate depending on the
conditions of the motor temperature and the power supply voltage even though
the motor runs in the same operation.
Setting Overview
Three settings listed below are required before using this function.
- Setting to obtain power consumption in spindle and servo motors
- Setting to obtain power consumption in peripheral devices
- Setting to decide the point of the least power consumption
Obtaining power consumption in spindle and servo motors
Since power consumption in spindle and servo motors referred in this function is obtained by Power
consumption monitor, settings for the function are required.
Refer to Operator’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN) for
detail.
Obtaining power consumption in peripheral devices
Some settings are needed to obtain power consumption in peripheral devices such as oil pressure pumps,
illuminations and so on.
Power consumption in peripheral devices can be calculated by average power and operating time of each
device.
These settings are performed on Power consumption setting screen.
Refer to Operator’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN) for
detailed operations on the screen.
- 2184 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Deciding the point of the least power consumption
Adjustment of spindles’ torque is required so that Eco level 0 means normal machining and Eco level 3
means machining with the least power consumption as shown in Fig.14.1.21 (b).
No adjustment is needed for Eco level 0 because this is normal setting.
Adjust suppression on spindles’ torque at acceleration/deceleration (torque override) so that the sum of
power consumption in spindles, servos and peripherals is minimum at Eco level 3.
Eco levels 1 and 2 are automatically decided as settings dividing between Eco level 0 and 3 equally.
Refer to below for detailed explanations on torque overrides.
NOTE
1 In spindle speed control mode, the torque command is limited at
acceleration/deceleration according to the setting of torque overrides. In spindle
synchronization control mode and in rigid tapping mode, the time constants for
acceleration/deceleration are set longer according to the torque overrides.
2 If more detailed selection of an Eco level is needed, set bit 0 (ELV) of the
parameter No. 24303 to 1, which enhances divisions of Eco levels from 4 to 8.
About torque override
Torque override and output
Spindles’ torque at acceleration/deceleration used in eco-machining is that in normal machining
multiplied by torque override.
When torque override is set to 100%, torque in eco-machining is the same as that in normal machining.
If torque override is set to 50%, the torque becomes half.
Sorts of torque overrides
There are three torque overrides; one is for spindle speed control mode, one is for spindle synchronization
control mode and the other is for rigid tapping mode.
Relation between Torque overrides and Eco levels
The relation between torque overrides and Eco levels is shown as follows:
- Eco level 0 means normal machining, where torque overrides are equal to 100%.
- Eco level 3 means machining with torque overrides specified by the parameters Nos. 11397, 11398
and 5260. Note that these parameters can be changed on Eco setting screen.
- Eco levels 1 and 2 are defined as machining with torque overrides dividing between Eco level 0
(torque override 100%) and 3 equally. When the parameter No.11397 is set to 70, for example,
torque override of Eco level 1 is equal to 90% and that of level 2 is equal to 80%.
NOTE
1 When the number of divisions of Eco levels is equal to 8 (bit 0 (ELV) of the
parameter No.24303 is set to 1), torque overrides for level 7 are specified by the
parameters Nos. 11397, 11398 and 5260. Eco levels 1 to 6 are defined as
machining with torque overrides dividing between Eco level 0 and 7 equally.
2 Decimal sections of torque overrides are half adjusted.
Setting Details
Obtaining power consumption in peripheral devices
Power consumption in peripheral devices is calculated by average power and running time of each device.
Specify average power and reference PMC address, which is used to detect ON/OFF state of each device,
on Power consumption setting screen (Fig.14.1.21 (c)).
Up to 8 devices can be recorded for each path.
Complete this setting by the examples below.
- 2185 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Refer to Operator’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN) for
detailed operations on Power consumption setting screen.
NOTE
This setting is required for each path in multi-path systems.
Fig.14.1.21 (c) Power consumption setting screen
Examples
1 Complete setting by the examples below, corresponding to the ways to utilize devices.
In the case of a device switched ON/OFF during automatic operation:
Set 100W and R1000.0 into average power and PMC address of Port 0 respectively.
Use ladder programs including the ladder like below and set ON/OFF state of the device to the
address.
ON/OFF of device 1 R1000.0
2 In the case of a device always in operation during automatic operation:
Set 100W and R1000.1 into average power and PMC address of Port 1 respectively.
Use ladder programs including the ladder like below and set ON state of the device to the address at
any time.
Always ON R1000.1
3 In the case of a device whose power varies during operation:
Set 100W/R1000.2 to Port 2, 200W/R1000.2 to Port 3 and 300W/R1000.4 to Port 4 respectively.
Use ladder programs including the ladders like below.
Change addresses to set ON state of the device according to power consumption of the device.
- 2186 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
ON of device 3 (100W) R1000.2
ON of device 3 (200W) R1000.3
ON of device 3 (300W) R1000.4
4 In the case of a device used in multiple paths:
Divide average power by the number of paths and input the calculated value for each path.
When paths 1 and 2 use the same device with average power 100W, for example, 50W is assumed to
be input to Port 0 of path 1 and Port 0 of path 2. ON/OFF state of the device is needed to set into the
addresses specified in Port 0 of path 1 and 2 respectively.
Deciding the point of the least power consumption
Deciding the point of the least power consumption is performed on Eco setting screen.
Decide torque override for Eco level 3 with the help of data of power consumption and cycletime
obtained by actual operations so that total power consumption is minimum at Eco level 3. Adjust torque
override referring to the example below.
Refer to Operator’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN) for
detailed operations on Eco setting screen.
Example
Decide setting for the least power consumption by repeating operations at different torque overrides like
below.
1 Set bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 to 1 in order to enhance divisions of Eco levels from 4 to
8. In addition, switch the displayed unit of power consumption into “Wh” by soft-key operations.
These settings make it possible to decide the point of the least power consumption more precisely,
though these are not indispensable.
2 Set bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 to 1 so that torque override for Eco level 7 can be input
on Eco setting screen.
3 Set torque override for Eco level 7 to 30%.
4 Operate a test program at each Eco level 0 to 7 and obtain data of power consumption and cycletime
(An example of the result is shown in Fig.14.1.21 (d).).
A test program including more acceleration/deceleration of spindles makes it possible to decide the
point of the least power consumption more precisely because torque override effects on
acceleration/deceleration of spindles.
5 Assume the range of torque overrides minimizing power consumption from the graph on Eco setting
screen (Fig.14.1.21 (d) shows that torque override minimizing power consumption is between 60
and 80.).
6 Set torque override for Eco level 7 to 60%, which is the minimum value of the range assumed in 0th
step above.
7 Operate the test program at each Eco level 0 to 7 again and obtain data of power consumption and
cycletime (An example of the result is shown in Fig.14.1.21 (e)).
8 Assume the range of torque overrides minimizing power consumption again (Fig.14.1.21 (e) shows
that torque override minimizing power consumption is between 66 and 77.).
9 Repeat above operations in order to assume desired torque override more precisely.
10 After finishing this adjustment, set bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 to 0 (set the number of
divisions of Eco levels to 4), if needed.
- 2187 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 When using spindle synchronization control or rigid tapping, decision of the point
of the least power consumption is needed for spindle synchronization control
mode or for rigid tapping mode respectively, as well as for spindle speed control
mode.
2 With multiple spindles, decision of the point of the least power consumption is
needed for each spindle.
Fig.14.1.21 (d) Deciding the point of the least power consumption 1
Fig.14.1.21 (e) Deciding the point of the least power consumption 2
Restriction
This function can be used when Energy saving level selecting function is available in all spindle
amplifiers.
In addition, analog spindles cannot be used in this function.
- 2188 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Diagnosis data
Accumulated power consumption
4923 Accumulated power consumption in servo axes
4933 Accumulated power consumption in spindle axes
4943 Accumulated power consumption in peripheral devices
4953 Accumulated reduction of power consumption
[Data type] 2-Word
[Unit of data] 0.001kWh
[Valid data range] -2147483648 to 2147483647
NOTE
These data have been accumulated since last clear operation.
These data are not cleared by power off.
Parameter
11397 Minimum torque overrides at acceleration/deceleration in spindle speed control mode
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set minimum torque override at acceleration/deceleration in spindle speed control mode.
This value corresponds to Eco level 3 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set
to 0) or Eco level 7 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set to 1).
When torque override is set to 50%, for example, time constant for
acceleration/deceleration gets twice.
Note that 0% is considered as 100%.
If eco-machining is not necessary, please set 0 or 100 in this parameter.
When bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 is set to 1, this value can be changed on Eco
setting screen.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
11398 Minimum torque overrides at acceleration/deceleration in spindle synchronization control mode
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set minimum torque override at acceleration/deceleration in spindle synchronization
control mode.
This value corresponds to Eco level 3 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set
to 0) or Eco level 7 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set to 1).
When torque override is set to 50%, for example, time constant for
acceleration/deceleration gets twice.
- 2189 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Note that 0% is considered as 100%.
If eco-machining is not necessary, please set 0 or 100 in this parameter.
When bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 is set to 1, this value can be changed on Eco
setting screen.
CAUTION
Machine or work can be damaged by out-of-synchronization when
torque overrides of spindles in synchronization control mode differ
from each other. This is because this function differs the time
constant for acceleration/deceleration in spindle synchronization
mode.
Set a common value for spindles belonging to the same group of
synchronization.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
5260 Minimum torque overrides at acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set minimum torque override at acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping.
This value corresponds to Eco level 3 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set
to 0) or Eco level 7 (when bit 0 (ELV) of the parameter No.24303 is set to 1).
When torque override is set to 50%, for example, time constant for
acceleration/deceleration gets twice.
Note that 0% is considered as 100%.
If eco-machining is not necessary, please set 0 or 100 in this parameter.
When bit 0 (PWE) of the parameter No.8900 is set to 1, this value can be changed on Eco
setting screen.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
11399 Conversion factor from power consumption (kWh) to carbon-dioxide emission (kg)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.001kgCO2/kWh
[Valid data range] 0 to 1000
Specify conversion factor from power consumption (kWh) to carbon-dioxide emission
(kg). Adjust the value to correspond to power supplying circumstances in the area where
a machine is used.
If 0 or invalid value is specified, 0.555kgCO2/kWh is used as the conversion factor.
- 2190 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24303 EEP ELV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ELV Divisions of Eco levels are
0: 4 levels.
1: 8 levels.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
If this parameter is changed, adjust the parameters Nos. 11397,
11398 and 5260 again.
If the current Eco level gets invalid because of change in this
parameter, the current Eco level is set to Eco level 0.
#1 EEP An Eco level is
0: Not specified in each path.
The Eco level is common for all paths.
1: Specified in each path.
CAUTION
Machine or work can be damaged by out-of-synchronization when
Eco levels of spindles in synchronization control mode differ from
each other. This is because this function differs the time constant
for acceleration/deceleration in spindle synchronization mode.
Set “0” without fail when using spindle synchronization control
between paths.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Energy saving level selecting
function.
When this parameter is set to “0” from “1”, the current Eco level is
set to the Eco level of path 1 before changing this parameter.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604-EN) Power consumption monitoring screen
Eco setting screen
Eco monitoring screen
Power consumption setting screen
- 2191 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.22 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion Function
Overview
The number of axis data “current position“ and “Distance to go” that are displayed on the same screen
can be expanded up to 20.
Explanation
In initial setting, the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axis of current position is for 5. In
this function, the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes can be selected from 5, 10 and 20
axes by setting the parameter No.11305.
The relation of the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes and the set value of parameter is
shown in the following table.
Table. 14.1.22 (a) The related of the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes and the set value of
parameter
Maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes Parameter (No.11305)
5 0
10 1
20 2
When the number of axes is more than that of the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axis, you
can change to the axis coordinates of the remainder by pressing the chapter selection soft key.
(Example)
When 13 axes (X1 to X13) are displayed by each maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes,
the display of coordinates is shown in following figures.
Fig. 14.1.22 (a) Example when current position coordinates for 13 axes are displayed by number of
maximum each axes.
When the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes is 5.
The maximum number of simultaneous displaying axis becomes 5 by setting 0 to parameter No. 11305.
When the number of axes exceeds 5, by pressing the chapter selection soft key, axes for the 6th axis and
up are displayed.
- 2192 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Fig. 14.1.22 (b) Current position display of 10.4 inch (overall)
Fig. 14.1.22 (c) Current position display of 15 inch (overall)
- 2193 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
When the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes is 10.
The maximum number of simultaneous displaying axis becomes 10 by setting 1 to parameter No. 11305.
When the number of axes exceeds 10, by pressing the chapter selection soft key, axes for the 11th axis
and up are displayed.
Fig. 14.1.22 (d) Current position display of 10.4 inch (overall)
Fig. 14.1.22 (e) Current position display of 15 inch (overall)
When the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes is 20.
The maximum number of simultaneous displaying axis becomes 20 by setting 2 to parameter No. 11305.
When the number of axes exceeds 20, by pressing the chapter selection soft key, axes for the 21st axis
and up are displayed.
For 10.4 inch, absolute coordinate, relative coordinate, machine coordinate and the remaining distance are
displayed at the same time on overall position display screen. On the current position screen of the
absolute coordinate system, absolute coordinate and remaining distance, or absolute coordinate and
machine coordinate are displayed. And the modal data, actual feedrate and so on are also displayed.
- 2194 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Fig. 14.1.22 (f) Current position display of 10.4 inch (absolute)
Fig. 14.1.22 (g) Current position display of 10.4 inch (overall)
Fig. 14.1.22 (h) Current position display of 15 inch (overall)
- 2195 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Addition of the chapter selection soft key in 15 inch
The chapter selection soft key of "Absolute" and "Relative" is added setting 1 or 2 to parameter No.
11305.
When you press the chapter selection soft key of "Absolute", absolute coordinate is displayed with the
character of 6 times size.
When you press the chapter selection soft key of "Relative", relative coordinate is displayed with the
character of 6 times size.
Fig. 14.1.22 (i) Addition of the chapter selection soft key
Fig. 14.1.22 (j) Current position display of 15 inch (relative)
Change of display coordinates
When the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes is 20 (Parameter No.11305=2), Coordinates
displayed in the position display of each screen at the same time are two pairs. The combination of two
coordinates is decided by setting the order of displaying four coordinates systems displayed in overall
position display screen (parameter No.11307).
At power-on, the first combination of coordinate is displayed. You can change it the second one by
pressing the chapter selection soft key to selection after key. When you do it again, the
combination of coordinates is changed to the first one.
- 2196 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
(Example)
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen of 10.4 inch. The maximum number of
simultaneous displaying axes is 20.
Fig. 14.1.22 (k) Display change example in 10.4 inch.
- 2197 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
(Example)
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen of 15 inch. The maximum number of simultaneous
displaying axes is 20.
Fig. 14.1.22 (l) Display change example in 15 inch.
About the function for which this function is effective
This function is effective to positional coordinate screen concerning the following functions.
- Handle interruption
- Program restart
- Operating monitor display
This function is ineffective to positional coordinate screen concerning the following functions
- 3-dimensional manual feed
- 2198 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Simultaneous display of multiple paths
Caution
This function does not support 8.4 inch.
Parameter
11305 Maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
The maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes can be selected from 5, 10 and 20
axes by setting this parameter. The table below indicates the correspondence between the
max number of simultaneous displaying axes and the setting value.
Maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes 5 10 20
Setting 0 1 2
When the value other than 1 and 2 is set, the specification of 0 is assumed.
11307 The order of displaying coordinates of current position display
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 5
Set the order of coordinates displayed in the screen of the following size.
10.4inch, 15inch
- Overall Position Display
- Overall Position Display of each screen
8.4inch
- Overall Position Display
When the maximum number of simultaneous displaying axes is 20 (Parameter
No.11305=2), Coordinates displayed in the position display of each screen at the same
time are two pairs. The combination of two coordinates is decided by setting the order of
displaying four coordinates systems displayed in overall position display screen
(parameter No.11307).
At power-on, the first combination of coordinate is displayed. You can change it the
second one by pressing selection chapter soft key to selection after key. When you
do it again, the combination of coordinates is changed to the first one.
The correspondence of the order of the display and set value of coordinates is as follows.
- 2199 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Order of displaying
coordinates
1 2 3 4
Setting Value
Relative Absolute Machine Distance
0
coordinates coordinates coordinates to go
Relative Machine Absolute Distance
1
coordinates coordinates coordinates to go
Relative Distance Absolute Machine
2
coordinates to go coordinates coordinates
Absolute Machine Relative Distance
3
coordinates coordinates coordinates to go
Absolute Distance Relative Machine
4
coordinates to go coordinates coordinates
Machine Distance Relative Absolute
5
coordinates to go coordinates coordinates
When the value not within the valid data range is set, the specification of 0 is assumed.
When simultaneous display of multiple path is effect (Parameter No.13131≠0, parameter
No.13132≧1), this parameter is ineffective.
14.1.23 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting
14.1.23.1 Overview
This function is to protect important setting of parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder
programs on CNC and to detect unauthorized modifications on them. The following parameters and
programs can be protected.
- CNC Parameters (which are selected to be protected)
- C Language Executor program
- Ladder program (each of multi-path PMC programs)
- Dual Check Safety PMC Ladder program
After the registration of above parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs to this
function, those are verified by CNC, when the power of CNC is turned on. If any modification is applied
to registered parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs the signal that means some
modification is applied is output. And in this case, it is also possible to generate the alarm.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Procedure for protecting parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder
programs
Procedure
Preparation for registering protected parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs.
1) Install C Language Executor programs or ladder programs to be protected into the flash ROM.
2) Set the value of parameters to be protected.
3) Edit the ladder program and Dual Check Safety ladder program, if necessary.
Registration of protected parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs on setting
screen.
4) Enter password to enable operations on setting screen. (Refer to 14.1.27.3 and 14.1.27.4)
By this operation, the following operations 5), 6), 7) are enabled.
- 2200 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
5) Change the setting of items, if necessary. (Refer to 14.1.27.2)
6) Select the parameters to be protected. (Refer to 14.1.27.7)
7) Register the parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs to be protected. (Refer
to 1.1.3)
After this operation, if any unauthorized modification to the selected parameters, C Language
Executor programs, or ladder programs is detected, CNC outputs signal and alarm.
8) Disable operations on setting screen. (Refer to 14.1.27.3)
Even if the power of CNC is turned off or the screen is switched to other one without the operation 8),
operations on the setting screen become disabled automatically
Procedure for cancelling protection of parameters, C Language Executor programs,
or ladder programs
Procedure
Cancelling protection of parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs to be protected
on setting screen
1) Enter password to enable operations on setting screen. (Refer to 14.1.27.3 and 14.1.27.4)
By this operation, the following operation 2 is enabled
2) Cancel protection of parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs.（Refer to
14.1.27.6）
After this operation, the protection is cancelled.
3) Disable operations on the setting screen.（Refer to 14.1.27.3）
Even if the power of CNC is turned off or the screen is switched to other one without this operation,
operations on the setting screen become disabled automatically.
14.1.23.2 MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen
The operation and displayed information for this function are operated on the MODIFICATION
WARNING SETTING screen.
Fig 14.1.23.2 (a) MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen
- 2201 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
There are separate setting screens for each item to be protected as follows.
You can switch to each setting screen by soft key operation.
- Setting screen for CNC parameters
MODIFICATION - Setting screen for non-protected parameters
WARNING SETTING
screens - Setting screen for C language executor program
- Setting screen for ladder program (Dual Check Safety ladder program is contained.)
NOTE
1. You can select any parameters to be protected. Refer to the section "14.1.27.6
Select parameters".
2. Each ladder program for the 1st – 5th path PMC and Dual check safety PMC
can be protected independently. Each ladder program is protected by
independent password and settings.
Display setting screen
Procedure
1) Press function key .
2) Press chapter selection soft key [MODIFY WARN].
3) Press the following soft key according to the item which you want to display.
[PARAMETER] ： CNC parameters
[NO-PRT PARAM] ： Non-protected parameters
[C-EXE] ： C Language Executor program
[LADDER] ： Ladder program (Dual Check Safety ladder program is contained.)
NOTE
Setting screen for ladder program and setting screen for dual check safety
ladder program can be switched with the MDI key [PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN].
When the key [PAGE UP] / [PAGE DOWN] is pushed, the screen changes in the
following sequence.
1) 1st path ladder program
2) 2nd path ladder program
3) 3rd path ladder program
4) 4th path ladder program
5) 5th path ladder program
6) Dual check safety ladder program
Items on setting screen
The following items are displayed on each setting screen.
1) STATUS : Modification status
NORMAL : Not modified
MODIFIED : Modified
2) OPERATION STATUS : Status of operations on setting screen
ENABLED : Operations for changing the items on the setting screen are enabled
DISABLED : Operations are disabled
3) LAST REGISTRAION DATE and TIME: Registered date
4) CHECK CODE (REGISTERED) : Registered check code
5) CHECK CODE (CURRENT) : Current check code
6) CODE MODULATION : Code-modulation status of C Language Executor program
- 2202 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
ON : Modulated (difficult to analyze)
OFF : Not modulated (normal C Language Executor program)
NOTE
1. Current check code is displayed on ”CHECK CODE (CURRENT)”
When the parameter is changed, check code after it changes is displayed.
2. “CODE MODULATION” is displayed only in the setting screen for C Language
Executor program.
For details of code modulation, refer to the manual about C Language Executor
programming.
Setting items
You can set the following setting items on each setting screen. When you are to change those setting
items, enter the password to enable operations on setting screen.
1) When the modification is detected, CNC alarm is “generated” or “not generated”.
2) On the setting screen, check code is “displayed” or “not displayed”.
Procedure
1) Switch to the setting screen
Switch to the screen where you want to change the setting by soft key operation.
2) Enable operations on the setting screen
Press soft key [(OPRT)], then enter password and press the soft key [PASSWORD]. In this case, the
entered character is displayed as “*”. When the entered password is correct, the OPERATION
STATUS becomes “ENABLED”.
3) Select the setting item
Move the cursor to a setting item that you want to change.
4) Change setting
Change the setting by pressing soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0].
5) Disable operations on the setting screen
Press soft key [LOCK] to disable operations on the setting screen.
Fig 14.1.23.2 (b) Soft key of MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen
NOTE
1. The initial password “FFFF” is set to this function when shipping of CNC. Before
using this function at the first time, enter the initial password and change
password to another one.
2. Operation status becomes “ENABLED” form “DISABLED” automatically in the
following cases.
- When switching to other screens.
However, the state of the "operation enabled" is maintained in switching
between the screen for CNC PARAMETER SETTING and NON-PROTECTED
PARAMETER SETTING screen.
- The power of CNC is turned off and on.
3. In the state of the "operation disabled", the cursor of the check box and soft key
[LOCK], [REGISTER], [ON:1], [OFF:0] are not displayed.
- 2203 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.23.3 Registration and protection parameters, C Language
Executor programs, or ladder programs.
You can register parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs on each setting screen.
When a screen is displayed, operations for changing the setting items on the screen are disabled by
password. When you change any setting item, you have to enter the password first.
Each setting screen has independent password.
Procedure for registering parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder
programs
Procedure
1) Switch to the setting screen
Switch to the screen where you want to change the setting by soft key operation.
2) Enable operations on the setting screen
Press soft key [(OPRT)], then enter password and press the soft key [PASSWORD]. In this case, the
entered character is displayed as “*”. When the entered password is correct, the OPERATION
STATUS becomes “ENABLED”.
3) Registration
Press the soft key [REGISTER].
4) Disable operations on the setting screen
Press soft key [LOCK] to disable operations on the setting screen.
Fig 14.1.23.3 (a) Soft key of MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen
NOTE
1. The initial password “FFFF” is set to this function when shipping of CNC. Before
using this function at the first time, enter the initial password and change
password to another one.
2. Even after some parameters are registered, you can modify the parameter. But,
if you turn off the power of CNC after modifying parameters, CNC will notify the
modification of parameters when starting up of CNC. Then, corresponding signal
is set and the alarm is generated if you select the setting item to generate the
alarm. To remove this notification by signal and alarm, you should restore the
registered parameters or register the modified parameters. By this operation, the
signal is reset and the alarm is cleared.
3. Even if any parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs are
not registered, you can disable operations on setting screen. However in this
case, the parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs are
not protected.
4. Operation status becomes “ENABLED” form “DISABLED” automatically in the
following cases.
- When switching to other screens.
However, the state of the "operation enabled" is maintained in switching
between the screen for CNC PARAMETER SETTING and NON-PROTECTED
PARAMETER SETTING screen.
- The power of CNC is turned off and on.
5. In the state of the "operation disabled", soft key [LOCK], [REGISTER], [ON:1],
[OFF:0] are not displayed.
- 2204 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
14.1.23.4 Change of password
You can change password on each MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen.
When changing the password, you need to enter current password on the setting screen.
NOTE
Changing password is not necessary to register parameters, C Language
Executor programs, or ladder programs. You can repeatedly register
parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs using the
same password.
Procedure for changing password
Procedure
1) Switch to the setting screen
Switch to the screen where you want to change the password by soft key operation.
2) Enable operations on setting screen
Press soft key [(OPRT)], then enter password and press the soft key [PASSWORD]. In this case, the
entered character is displayed as “*”. When the entered password is correct, the OPERATION
STATUS becomes “ENABLED”.
3) Enter new password
Enter new password and press soft key [PASSWORD]. Repeat this operation twice. If these two
passwords are same, the password will be changed with the message “PASSWORD CHANGED” on
the screen.
If the two passwords are different, the message “PASSWORD MISMATCH” is displayed, and the
password is not changed.
In either case, the OPERATION STATUS is kept “ENABLED” and you are enabled to perform other
operations on the setting screen.
4) Disable operations on setting screen
Press soft key [LOCK] to disable operations on the setting screen.
Fig 14.1.23.4 (a) Soft key of MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen
NOTE
1. Following characters are available for password.
If the lower case alphabetical character, a-z, is set, it is recognized as identical
to corresponding upper case alphabetical character, A-Z.
- “A” to “Z”, “a” to “z”, “0” to “9”
2. The initial password “FFFF” is set to this function when shipping of CNC. When
using this function at the first time, enter the initial password to enable
operations on setting screen and change password to another one. In other
words, when the initial password is set, you cannot execute any operation
without changing password.
3. You cannot set “FFFF” as a new password.
4. In the state of the "operation disabled", soft key [LOCK], [REGISTER], [ON:1],
[OFF:0] are not displayed.
- 2205 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.23.5 Notification of the modification of setting
When any parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs are registered to this function,
CNC verifies them at start up of the CNC. When any modification is detected, corresponding signals will
be set to notify. In addition, you can enable setting item of this function to generate CNC alarm when any
modification is detected.
If you are to remove those notifications of modification, which are resetting signals and clearing CNC
alarm, you have to restore the registered parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs,
or you have to register the modified parameters or programs to this function.
NOTE
When some modification is detected, the notification signals are always set.
There is no setting item to specify whether or not to set these signals.
14.1.23.6 Unregistration and canceling protection of parameters, C
Language Executor programs, or ladder programs
If you would like to cancel protection of parameters, C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs,
unregister the check codes of them on each setting screen. When a screen is displayed, operations for
changing the setting items on the screen are disabled by password. When you change any setting item,
you have to enter the password first.
Each setting screen has independent password.
Procedure for unregistering of parameters, C Language Executor programs, or
ladder programs
Procedure
1) Switch to the setting screen.
Switch to the screen where you want to change the setting by soft key operation.
2) Enable operations on the setting screen.
Software key [(OPRT)] is pushed.
Enter password and press the soft key [PASSWORD]. In this case, the entered character is
displayed as “*”.
When the entered password is correct, the operation status becomes “ENABLED”.
3) Unregistration.
Press the continuous menu key and press the soft key [UNREGISTER].
4) Disable operations on the setting screen.
Press soft key [LOCK] to disable operations on the setting screen.
Fig 14.1.23.6 (a) Soft key of MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING for parameters (Page 1, 2)
- 2206 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
NOTE
1. When unregistering, the password is maintained.
2. Operation status becomes “ENABLED” form “DISABLED” automatically in the
following cases.
- When switching to other screens.
However, the state of the "operation enabled" is maintained in switching
between the screen for CNC PARAMETER SETTING and NON-PROTECTED
PARAMETER SETTING screen.
- The power of CNC is turned off and on.
3. In the state of the "operation disabled", soft key [LOCK], [REGISTER], [ON:1],
[OFF:0] are not displayed.
14.1.23.7 Selection of parameters
Any parameters can be selected to be protected or not to be protected by definition of non-protected
parameters from all of the parameters. Maximum 50 sets of the range of non-protected parameters can be
defined.
Parameters not to be protected can be defined on NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen.
Before the setting on this screen, the operations have to be enabled by entering the password on
MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for parameters. If the operations on the setting screen
are not enabled, you can not define the non-protected parameters.
Moreover, the parameter changed by the system is excluded from the protected parameter.
Fig 14.1.23.7 (a) NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen
Setting non-protected parameters
Procedure
1) Change to MDI mode.
2) Enable operations on the setting screen for parameters.
3) Press the return menu key.
4) Press the soft key [NO-PRT PARAM]. NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen is
displayed.
- 2207 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
PAGE
5) Move cursor by cursor key and page key PAGE
, then set the range of
non-protected parameters to “START NO.” and “END NO” by soft key [INPUT] or [+INPUT].
6) If all of the setting has been finished, press soft key [RETURN] to switch to MODIFICATION
WARNING SETTING screen for parameters.
7) Press soft key [REGISTER] to calculate check code from current parameter values. Then the
calculated check code is displayed on the item “CHECK CODE(REGISTERED)” and “CHECK
CODE(CURRENT)”
8) Press soft key [LOCK] to disable operations on setting screen.
Fig 14.1.23.7 (b) Soft key of MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for parameters (Page 1,2)
Fig 14.1.23.7 (c) Soft key of NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen (Page 1)
NOTE
1 Even if operations on the setting screen for parameters are prohibited, the
NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen can be displayed. But,
non-protected parameters cannot be set. (Cursor and soft key [INPUT] are not
displayed.)
2. Operation status becomes “ENABLED” form “DISABLED” automatically in the
following cases.
- When switching to other screens.
However, the state of the "operation enabled" is maintained in switching
between the screen for CNC PARAMETER SETTING and NON-PROTECTED
PARAMETER SETTING screen.
- The power of CNC is turned off and on.
Setting file of non-protected parameters
Non-protected parameters can be defined also by input of a text file describing the ranges of
non-protected parameters in designated format from external I/O devices.
Before input of the file from external I/O device, enable the operations on the screen by entering the
correct password on MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for parameters.
And setting of non-protected parameters can be output to external I/O devices. In case of output, you need
not to enter the password.
The default name of setting file of non-protected parameters is “MDPRMSET.TXT”.
Example
In case of protecting the following parameters
No.980 - No.982
No.1023
No.1240
N0.1829
No.1838 - No.1842
- 2208 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
%
G10L99;
N1S0E979;
N2S983E1022;
N3S1024E1239;
N4S1241E1828;
N5S1830E1837;
N6S1843E99999;
G11;
%
Input the setting file of non-protected parameters
Procedure
1) Make sure the external I/O device is ready for input.
2) Change to EDIT mode by operating the machine operator’s panel or enter emergency stop state.
3) Enable operations on the setting screen for parameters.
4) Press the return menu key.
5) Press the soft key [NO-PRT PARAM]. NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen is
displayed.
6) Press the continuous menu key , and then press soft key [F INPUT].
7) Type the name of the file that you want to input.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MDPRMSET.TXT” is assumed.
8) Press the soft key [EXEC].
This starts input, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the input operation
ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
9) After input has been finished, press the return menu key.
10) Press the soft key [PARAMETER]. The setting screen for parameters is displayed.
11) Press the soft key [REGISTER] to calculate the check code.
12) Press the soft key [LOCK] to disable operations.
Fig 14.1.23.7 (d) Soft key of NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen (Page2)
NOTE
In the state of the "operation disabled", soft key [F input] is not displayed.
Output the setting file of non-protected parameters
Procedure
1) Make sure the external I/O device is ready for output.
2) Change to EDIT mode by operating the machine operator’s panel or enter emergency stop state.
3) Press the soft key [NO-PRT PARAM]. NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen is
displayed.
4) Press the continuous menu key , and then press soft key [F OUTPUT].
5) Type the name of the file that you want to output.
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “MDPRMSET.TXT” is assumed.
6) Press the soft key [EXEC].
This starts input, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the input
operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
7) After output has been finished, press the return menu key.
- 2209 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig14.1.23.7 (e) Soft key of NON-PROTECTED PARAMETER SETTING screen (Page2)
Parameters excluded from protected parameters
Table14.1.23.7 (b) Parameters excluded from protected parameters
Parameter No. Description
1244 Coordinates of the floating reference position for each axis
1301 Stored stroke check
1320 to 1321 Coordinates at the boundary of stored stroke check 1
1330 to 1348 Chuck and tail stock barrier
3233 Program edit
3281 Displaying language
3290 Offset
4803, 4840 to 4843 Spindle position
4911 to 4914 Spindle speed fluctuation detection
5130 Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76
5132 to 5133 Depth of cut and escaping amount of multiple repetitive canned cycles G71
and G72
5134 Clearance value of multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 and G72
5135 Escaping amount of X axis in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
5136 Escaping amount of Z axis in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
5137 Divide number of multiple repetitive canned cycle G73
5139 Return amount in multiple repetitive canned cycle G74 and G75
5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive turning canned cycle G76
5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive turning canned cycle G76
5142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive turning canned cycle
G76
5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive turning canned cycle G76
5402 Manual handle interruption
5660 to 5677 Flexible synchronization control
5680 to 5687, 5690 to 5693 Flexible synchronization control
6404 Manual handle
6510 Specifying the graphic coordinate system
6581 to 6595 Color number of character
6750 Integrated value of power-on period
7220 to 7283 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel
7310 Program restart
8210 Slant angle
8370 to 8374 Oscillation
8860 to 8861 Trouble diagnosis function
8900 PWE
8940 to 8949 Initial screen title character code
10000 to 10329 Tool offsets
10331 to 10332 External workpiece zero point offsets
10421 to 10435, Screen display colors
10461 to 10475
10601 to 10719 Waveform diagnosis
11221 Tilted working plane indexing
11309 Menu number selected in pattern menu display
11318 Program list screen
11329 to 11331, 11334 to 11337, Dynamic graphic display function
11341 to 11349
11355 to 11356 Display
- 2210 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter No. Description
11358 to 11359 Parameter check sum
11364 Program edit
11369 Warning function against modification of setting
11496 Measurement result of thread groove
11501 Machine lock shift value check
11505 Code of Input/Output of data of USB memory
11681 Smoothing level currently selected when nano smoothing is used
12801 to 12820, 12841 to 12860 Operation history signal selection
13151 Serial number for the files output to a memory card by external output
command DPRNT/BPRNT
13203 to 13204, 13206 Tool management function
13420, 13425 to 13440 Flexible synchronization control
14500 to 14637 SERVO GUIDE Mate
14717 C axis’s number in simulation (for MGi)
Table 14.1.23.7 (c) Parameters excluded from protected parameters
(Machining condition selecting function is valid)
Parameter No. Description
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode
1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for
each axis
1735 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in
circular interpolation for each axis (Only at the setting of No.13600#0=0)
1737 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in
AI contour control for each axis
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in the
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode
1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner feedrate
difference
1788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on
acceleration change for each axis
1789 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on
acceleration change for each axis (linear interpolation)
1790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
13634 Current precision level in AI contour control
Table14.1.23.7 (d) Parameters for setting the parameter numbers of parameters
to be excluded from protected parameters (Machining condition selecting function is valid)
Parameter explanation
Parameter whose number is set in parameter No.13628 (Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when
AI contour control is used)
Parameter whose number is set in parameter No.13629 (Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when
AI contour control is used)
Table14.1.23.7 (e) Parameters excluded from protected parameters
(Machining condition selecting function and adjustment for machine quality level function are valid)
Parameter No. Description
11681 Smoothing level
19581 Tolerance smoothing for nano smoothing
- 2211 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 If machining condition selecting function is invalid, parameters in table 14.1.23.7
(b) and table 14.1.23.7 (c) are contained in protected parameters
2 Neither the machining condition selecting function or MACHINING QUALITY
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT is used, parameters in table 14.1.23.7 (d) are contained
in protected parameters.
3 The parameters of which numbers are set in parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629
are excluded, but parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629 are not excluded.
4 Setting parameters and locked parameters are contained in non-protected
parameters.
5 When the CNC software edition is changed, the alarm (DS5350) might be
generated. In this case, register the parameter again.
14.1.23.8 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11369 MDP MDL MDC
[Data type] Bit
#0 MDC MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for C Language Executor is
0: not displayed.
1: displayed.
#1 MDL MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for PMC ladder is
0: not displayed.
1: displayed.
#2 MDP MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen for parameters and non-protected
parameters is
0: not displayed.
1: displayed.
14.1.23.9 Signals
Notification signal for modification of C Language Executor program
CDCEX <F0558.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the modification of C Language Executor program
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, the program is not modified or not registered
When this signal becomes 1, the registered program is modified
Notification signal for modification of 1st path PMC Ladder program
CDLAD1 <F0558.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the modification of 1st path PMC Ladder program
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, the program is not modified or not registered
When this signal becomes 1, the registered program is modified
Notification signal for modification of 2nd path PMC Ladder program
CDLAD2 <F0558.2>
[Classification] Output signal
- 2212 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
[Function] Notify the modification of 2nd path PMC Ladder program
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, the program is not modified or not registered
When this signal becomes 1, the registered program is modified
Notification signal for modification of 3rd path PMC Ladder program
CDLAD3 <F0558.3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the modification of 3rd path PMC Ladder program
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, the program is not modified or not registered
When this signal becomes 1, the registered program is modified
Notification signal for modification of Dual Check Safety PMC Ladder program
CDDCL <F0558.4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the modification of Dual Check Safety PMC Ladder program
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, the program is not modified or not registered
When this signal becomes 1, the registered program is modified
Notification signal for modification of CNC parameter
CDPRM <F0558.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notify the modification of selected CNC parameters
[Output condition] When this signal becomes 0, any selected CNC parameters are not modified or
not registered
When this signal becomes 1, some selected CNC parameters are modified
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0558 CDPRM CDDCL CDLAD3 CDLAD2 CDLAD1 CDCEX
14.1.23.10 Alarm and Message
Number Message Contents
DS5345 C-EXECUTOR VERIFY ERROR C Language Executor program has been modified.
Restore the registered program or register the modified program.
DS5346 LADDER PROGRAM VERIFY Ladder program has been modified.
DS5347 ERROR Restore the registered ladder program or register the modified
DS5348 ladder program.
DS5349 DCS LADDER PROGRAM Ladder program of Dual Check Safety PMC has been modified.
VERIFY ERROR Restore the registered ladder program or register the modified
ladder program.
DS5350 PARAMETER VERIFY ERROR CNC parameter has been modified.
Restore the registered parameters or register the modified
parameters.
NOTE
The following DS alarm numbers are corresponding to ladder program of
multi-path PMC
DS5346 = 1st path PMC ladder program
DS5347 = 2nd path PMC ladder program
DS5348 = 3rd path PMC ladder program
- 2213 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.1.24 Title Display Function in Initial Screen
Overview
The character string (up to 10 characters) set by the parameter is displayed on the initial screen
immediately after power-on.
Details
The character string set by parameter No.8940 to No.8949 can be displayed on the initial screen
immediately after power-on as shown in the following figure 14.1.24(a). ("ABCDE01234" is displayed in
the example of figure)
Fig.14.1.24(a) Title display in initial screen（8.4/10.4” display unit）
The character string is enclosed with the frame (* mark) and displayed. The color of the character is only
white. It is possible to display up to ten characters, and the character that can be used is the following
characters.
0 to 9
A to Z
“-”（Negative sign）
“.”（period）
“ ”（space）
The frame becomes small in proportion to the number of characters when character strings are less than
10 characters.
Character string, series name, and COPYRIGHT are displayed at the center for the 8.4/10.4” display unit.
However, in 15” display unit, it is displayed as shown in the following figure 14.1.24(b).
- 2214 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Fig.14.1.24(b) Title display in initial screen（15” display unit）
When parameter No.8940-No.8949 is not set (When the parameter is all 0), the character string is not
displayed. A conventional initial screen is displayed as shown in Figure 14.1.24(c).
Fig.14.1.24(c) Initial screen（conventional display）
NOTE
1. The character string is displayed also on the IPL screen. However, when the IPL
menu screen ends, a conventional screen is displayed.
2. When the parameter is set by using "SRAM RESTORE" of the boot menu, the
set character string is not displayed on an initial screen immediately after
restore. It is necessary to restart CNC to display the character string.
Parameters
8940 Initial screen title character code 1
8941 Initial screen title character code 2
to to
8949 Initial screen title character code 10
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0,32,45,46,48 to 57,65 to 90
- 2215 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
This parameter sets the character codes of the character string to be displayed on the
initial screen immediately after power-on. If the number of characters to be displayed is
less than 10, the parameters corresponding to the space exceeding the character length are
set to 0.
The set character code is as follows.
A：65 N：78 0：48
B：66 O：79 1：49
C：67 P：80 2：50
D：68 Q：81 3：51
E：69 R：82 4：52
F：70 S：83 5：53
G：71 T：84 6：54
H：72 U：85 7：55
I：73 V：86 8：56
J：74 W：87 9：57
K：75 X：88 ：32 （Space）
L：76 Y：89 - ：45 （Negative sign）
M：77 Z：90 . ：46 （Period）
：0 （Null character）
When the codes other than the character that can be used are set, space is displayed.
When 10 parameters are all 0, this function is not executed.
Use example
For example, the parameter is set as follows when displaying as "FANUC_NC". ("_" is space )
Parameter No. Input value
8940 70
8941 65
8942 78
8943 85
8944 67
8945 0
8946 78
8947 67
8948 0
8949 0
Character-code 0 is basically considered to be space, and it is treated as a null character when there is
only character-code 0 since 0.
The input value “0” of parameter No.8945 is treated as space because there are character-codes other than
0 since No.8946.
The input value “0” of parameter No.8948 is treated as a null character because there is only
character-code 0 since No.8949.
- 2216 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
14.2 EDIT
14.2.1 Memory Protection Keys
Overview
Memory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertently store, change, or delete programs,
offset values, parameters, settings, and so forth.
For a multi-path system, protection keys are common to all paths.
Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to G0046.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals allow MDI panel operations that change the memory contents. There are
the following four signals. The target memory contents depend on the setting of bit 7
(KEY) of parameter No.3290.
When the KEY is “0” :
KEY1 : Allows the input of tool offset values, workpiece origin offsets, and
workpiece coordinate system shift values.
KEY2 : Allows the setting of data input, macro variable input, and tool life
management data input.
KEY3 : Allows program input and editing.
KEY4 : Allows PMC data (counter data table).
When the KEY is “1” :
KEY1 : Allows program input, program editing, PMC data input.
KEY2 to KEY4 : Not used.
[Operation] If a memory protection signal is set to “0”, the corresponding operation is disabled.
If a memory protection signal is “1”, the corresponding operation is enabled.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
NOTE
For a multi-path system, signal addresses are common to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#7 KEY For memory protection keys:
0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1: Only the KEY1 signal is used.
- 2217 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=”0” or
KEY=”1”.
When KEY = “0”:
- KEY1: Enables a tool offset value, workpiece zero point offset
value, and workpiece shift value to be input.
- KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life
management value to be input.
- KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
- KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input.
When KEY = “1”:
- KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables
PMC parameter input.
- KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
2 When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.
14.2.2 Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter
Overview
It is possible to use a signal to enable and disable parameter writing. This function is enabled and disabled
by setting bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299, and the signal KEYP<G0046.0> is used to enable and
disable parameter input.
Conventionally, parameter writing was enabled and disabled on the setting screen.
Signal
Memory protection signal KEYP<G0046.0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Enables or disables operation on CNC parameters from the MDI panel.
[Operation] If this signal is set to “0”, input of CNC parameters is disabled.
If this signal is set to “1”, input of CNC parameters is enabled.
This signal is valid only when bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 KEYP
NOTE
For a multi-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3299 PKY
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#0 PKY "PARAMETER WRITE" is:
0: Set on the setting screen (bit 0 (PWE) of setting parameter No. 8900).
1: Set by the memory protection signal KEYP<G0046.0>.
- 2218 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Notes
• When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1, “PARAMETER WRITE” on the setting screen
cannot be set.
• When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 has been set to 1 and bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8900
has been set to 0 at power-on, setting the signal KEYP<G0046.0> to “1” in the operation mode
causes alarm SW0100 and stops operation.
14.2.3 MDI Key Setting
Overview
Because the type of the MDI keys of the CNC is determined automatically, no additional setting is
required for the MDI keys. When the machine tool builder's own MDI keys are connected, valid key input
is made possible by parameter setting.
Parameter
3160 Setting of MDI unit type
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 4
Set the type of an MDI unit when the type of an MDI unit is not automatically identified.
Setting value Type
0 Depends on the system type and indicator type.
1 Standard MDI unit for the lathe system
2 Standard MDI unit for the machining center system
3 Small MDI unit for the lathe system
4 Small MDI unit for the machining center system
When 0 is set in this parameter, the type of a MDI unit is determined as follows:
Type of path control Type of indicator Type
When the type for the Type of 12 horizontal soft Standard MDI unit for the lathe
lathe system is used keys system
with path 1 Type of 7 horizontal soft keys Small MDI unit for the lathe system
When the type for the Type of 12 horizontal soft Standard MDI unit for the machining
machining center keys center system
system is used with Small MDI unit for the machining
Type of 7 horizontal soft keys
path 1 center system
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3204 PAR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, characters "[" and "]" are:
0: Used as "[" and "]".
1: Used as "(" and ")".
NOTE
When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.
- 2219 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
14.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function
Use of this function allows the user to enter characters such as "@", "(", and ")" by using soft keys when
the compact-type MDI unit is used.
Operation procedure
1. Press function key .
2. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press continuous menu key several times to display soft key
[KEY INPUT].
3. Press soft key [KEY INPUT].
4. As shown in Fig. 14.2.4 (a), characters such as "@" and "(" appear as soft keys.
Fig. 14.2.4 (a) Compact-type MDI key input
5. When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in
buffer.
Usable characters
The characters in the Table 14.2.4 (a) can be entered using soft keys:
Table 14.2.4 (a) Characters that can be entered using soft keys
( ) ? * & @ _ < > ¥
% $ ! ~ : " ‘ AB/ab(*)
* This soft key causes the input mode of alphabetical characters to alternate between the uppercase
input mode and the lowercase input mode.
- 2220 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13115 SI2 SI1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#4 SI1 Soft key input of the characters shown below is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
<>¥%$!~:"'
#5 SI2 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and
lowercase input modes by a soft key are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
()?*&@_
14.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT
14.3.1 Multi Path Display
Overview
In a multi path system, operations such as program creation and data input are performed with a
display/operation target path selected by switching. For path selection, the path select signals are used.
For a selected path, MDI key operation is performed.
By parameter setting, a selection can be made to display only one path on the screen at a time or display
multiple paths on the screen simultaneously. When multiple paths are displayed simultaneously, the order
of path display can be specified according to the machine configuration and layout.
Moreover, a selection can be made by a parameter to display the same screen at path switching or to store
the last displayed screen of each path and display the last displayed screen of a selected path.
Explanation
- Multi path simultaneous display
Information about multiple paths can be displayed on one screen simultaneously.
Multi path information can be displayed simultaneously on the following screens:
• Absolute position screen
• Relative position screen
• Overall position display
• Program screen
• Program check screen
MDI key operation is performed for a screen selected with the path select signals.
The maximum number of paths that can be displayed simultaneously depends on the size of the display
unit as indicated in the Table 14.3.1 (a).
Table 14.3.1 (a)
Size of display unit Maximum number of simultaneously displayable paths
8.4, or 10.4” 3 paths
15” 4 paths
- 2221 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Setting of multi path simultaneous display
- Simultaneous display group
When paths more than the maximum number of simultaneously displayable paths are involved, the paths
can be divided into several path groups for display. Those groups are referred to as multi path
simultaneous display groups.
Example)
When four paths are handled on a 10.4” display unit, all paths cannot be displayed simultaneously.
So, the paths are divided into two simultaneous display groups: a group consisting of paths 1 and 2,
and a group consisting of paths 3 and 4.
Table 14.3.1 (b)
Path number Simultaneous display group number
1, 2 1
3, 4 2
Use parameter No. 13131 to set a multi path simultaneous group number. Parameter No. 13131 is a
path-type parameter. In this parameter, specify a successive number not less than 1.
In this example, specify 1 in parameter No. 13131 for paths 1 and 2, and specify 2 in parameter No.
13131 for paths 3 and 4.
- Display order number
In a multi path simultaneous display group, the order of path display can be specified.
Path information can be displayed in a desired order by specifying display order numbers.
Example)
When four paths are involved and divided into two groups and group 1 is displayed in the order
from path 1 to path 2 and group 2 is displayed in the order from path 4 to path 3, specify display
order numbers in each multi path simultaneous display group.
Table 14.3.1 (c)
Display group Display order number Screen display
Number of
Path number (Parameter No. (The numbers in the illustration
CNC paths
(Parameter No. 13131) 13132) below represent path numbers.)
Path 1 1 1
1 2
Path 2 1 2
6 paths
Path 3 2 2
4 3
Path 4 2 1
Use parameter No. 13132 to set a display order number. Parameter No. 13132 is a path-type parameter. In
this parameter, specify a successive number not less than 1 for each of the paths belonging to a multi path
simultaneous display group.
In this example, specify 1 and 2 for paths 1 and 2 in display group number 1 respectively, and specify 2
and 1 for paths 3 and 4 in display group number 2 respectively.
- 2222 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
- Example of setting simultaneous display groups and display order numbers
Screen display
Number of Display group number Display order number
Path (The numbers in the illustration
CNC paths (Parameter No. 13131) (Parameter No. 13132)
below represent path numbers.)
1 path (*) Path 1 0 0 Group 1 1
Path 1 1 1
Group 1 1 2
Path 2 1 2
Path 1 1 2
Group 1 2 1
3 paths Path 2 1 1
Path 1 1 1 Group 1 1
Path 2 2 1 Group 2 2
Path 1 1 1 Group 1 1
4 paths Path 2 2 1 Group 2 2
Path 3 3 1
Group 3 3 4
Path 4 3 2
NOTE
When the number of CNC paths is 1, multi path simultaneous display is disabled.
In this case, parameters Nos. 13131 and 13132 need not be set.
Switching of simultaneous display group
When multi path simultaneous display groups are set, the screen display can be switched from the
currently displayed path group to another by performing a group switching operation.
Two methods described below can be used to switch from one group to another in multi path
simultaneous display.
- Switching by path select signal
By setting bit 0 (PGR) of parameter No. 11304 to 1, the display group switching function based on the
path select signals can be enabled. The simultaneous display group including a path selected with the path
select signals is displayed.
Display group Display order Screen display
Path selected
Number of number number (The numbers in the illustration
Path with the path
CNC paths (Parameter (Parameter below represent path numbers.)
select signals
No. 13131) No. 13132) (Box in heavy lines: Selected path)
Path 1 1 2 1 1 2
3 paths Path 2 1 1 2 1 2
Path 3 2 1 3 3
- 2223 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
- Switching by MDI key operation
The display group can be sequentially switched by + (pressing PAGE DOWN while
holding down SHIFT) or + .
Display group Display order Screen display
Number of number number (The numbers in the illustration below
Path
CNC paths (Parameter No. (Parameter No. represent path numbers.)
13131) 13132) (Example of SHIFT+PAGE DOWN)
Path 1 1 1
Path 2 2 1 1 2 3
Path 3 3 1
3 paths
Path 1 1 2
Path 2 1 1 2 1 3
Path 3 2 1
- Path select signal
The path select signals are used to select a path for which LCD/MDI operation and display are to be
performed.
A path to be selected is determined using a combination of three signals.
The following three signals (HEAD) are used:
HEAD <G0063.0>
LCBS <G0251.1>
LCB2 <G0251.2>
The table below indicates the relationships between the combinations of the path select signals and
selected paths.
Path select signal
Selected path
LCB2 <G0251.2> LCBS <G0251.1> HEAD <G0063.0>
0 0 0 Path 1
0 0 1 Path 2
0 1 0 Loader Path 1
1 0 0 Loader Path 2
Parameter
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 10
This parameter sets a group for simultaneous display on one screen in a multi-path
system.
The paths set to belong to the same group are displayed on one screen.
If the values for all paths are set to 0, the simultaneous multi-path display function is
disabled.
NOTE
When specifying groups, specify group numbers not less than 1
successively.
On 8.4” and 10.4” display units, up to three paths can be specified
for simultaneous display.
On a 15” display unit, up to four paths can be specified for
simultaneous display.
- 2224 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to number of paths included in a simultaneous multi-path display group
This parameter sets the display order of a path defined to belong to a simultaneous
multi-path display group.
Set the order, using numbers ranging from 1 to the number of paths included in the
simultaneous multi-path display group.
[Example] Setting of simultaneous display group numbers and simultaneous display order numbers
Number of Intra-group Screen display
Display group
paths of Path number
display order (Numbers represent displayed path
CNC number numbers.)
One path Path 1 1 1 1
Path 1 1 1
Path 2 1 2 1 2 3
Path 3 1 3
Path 1 1 1
Three path Path 2 2 1 1 2 3
Path 3 3 1
Path 1 1 2
Path 2 1 1 2 1 3
Path 3 2 1
NOTE
Specify successive order numbers not less than 1 for the paths
defined to belong to a group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3208 PSC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:
0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 PGR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
- 2225 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
#0 PGR When the path select signal is changed, the screen of the multi path simultaneous display
group:
0: Is not switched.
1: Is switched to the display group including the selected path.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
Signal
Path select signals
HEAD<G063.0>, LCBS<G0251.1>, LCB2<G0251.2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals select the target path for which MDI operation and display are to be
performed.
Operations with the MDI panel are performed for a path specified by the combination of
HEAD, HEAD2, HEAD3, and HEAD4.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0063 HEAD
G0251 LCB2 LCBS
14.3.2 Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing
Overview
Simultaneous multi path program editing allows the user to edit programs for more than one path on a
single screen according to the settings of the simultaneous multi path display parameters (parameters
Nos.13131 and 13132).
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No. 3106.
For details of parameter Nos. 13131 and 13132, see Subsection 14.3.1, "Multi Path Display".
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Screen display
Fig. 14.3.2 (a) to Fig. 14.3.2 (c) show sample screens on which simultaneous multi path program editing
is being performed.
The status line in the upper part of each program shows the name of the program, "FG-EDIT" indicating
that foreground editing is in progress, and the path name.
The status line of the currently edited program is highlighted.
- 2226 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Program being
edited
Fig. 14.3.2 (a) Simultaneous multi path program edit screen (10.4” display unit)
Fig. 14.3.2 (b) Simultaneous multi path program edit screen (15” display unit)
Explanation
- Mode
When the target paths for simultaneous display are in the EDIT mode or the MEM mode, the programs
for these paths are displayed simultaneously on the program screen. When the EDIT mode is selected for
a path, selecting that path allows program editing.
Fig. 14.3.2 (c) shows an example in which the EDIT mode and MEM mode are set together.
The first path is in the MEM mode (execution status screen), and the second path is in the EDIT mode
(edit screen).
Soft keys are displayed according to the mod of the path currently selected.
- 2227 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 14.3.2 (c) Screen showing the MEM mode and EDIT mode
- Changing the path to be edited
The path selected by the path selection signals is to be edited.
- Maximum number of paths for which simultaneous editing is enabled
The maximum number of paths for which simultaneous editing is enabled depends on the display unit as
follows:
Display unit size Maximum number of paths for simultaneous editing
8.4 and 10.4” 3 paths
15 4 paths
- Conditions for disabling simultaneous editing
Simultaneous multi path program editing is disabled in the following cases:
• The program screen is displayed with the entire screen size.
• The paths selected for simultaneous display include a path that is in a mode other than the EDIT and
MEM modes.
• The virtual MDI key function is enabled.
If background editing is started during simultaneous multi path program editing, background editing is
performed with the entire screen size. Simultaneous multi path program editing and background editing
cannot be performed at the same time.
- Simultaneous editing with a 8.4” display unit
When simultaneous editing is performed with a 8.4” display unit, displayed characters become smaller.
The number of characters displayed per path in the edit area is as follows:
• When simultaneous display is not performed, characters are displayed in 38 columns by 10 lines.
• For simultaneous display for one path, characters are displayed in 74 columns by 15 lines.
• For simultaneous display for two paths, characters are displayed in 35 columns by 14 lines.
• For simultaneous display for three paths, characters are displayed in 22 columns by 14 lines.
- 2228 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 DHD
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#0 DHD On the program screen:
0: Only a selected path can be edited and displayed.
1: Multiple paths can be edited and displayed at the same time.
14.4 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Overview
When many kinds of machining is arranged, this function can achieve the short processing time when
many programs are registered collectively or all programs are deleted. The program is not saved
automatically to nonvolatile memory at registration, modification, or deletion of program.
Explanation
In present program management, the program is saved automatically to nonvolatile memory at
registration, modification, or deletion of one program. Therefore, if many programs are registered at a
time or all programs are deleted, all processing time becomes long, because automatic save is frequently
done.
In this function, if bit 7 (HPM) of parameter No.11354 is set to 1, the processing time of registering many
programs or deleting all programs can be shorten because automatic save to nonvolatile memory is
invalid.
Perform saving operation by the all programs save request signal HPMRSV <G0514.4> or the application
by FOCAS2/ C Language Library, if it is necessary that programs are saved to nonvolatile memory.
Function Explanation
cnc_saveprog_start Start saving program to nonvolatile memory.
cnc_saveprog_end Check of end saving program to nonvolatile memory.
The status that programs aren't saved to nonvolatile memory can be confirmed by the programs not saved
status signal HPMNTS <F0547.5>.
During the saving all programs to nonvolatile memory, the programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM
<F0547.6> becomes "1".
NOTE
1 There are no changes about the display of programs and the editing operation
method of programs.
2 In cases that this function is enabled, if the power supply is turned off without
saving, the changed programs data is not saved.
The program selection by the following operation also is not saved.
- MDI operation
- External workpiece number search
- External program number search
Please perform saving operation by the signal or the application by FOCAS2/ C
Language Library, if it is necessary to preserve the changed programs data/ the
program selection after the power supply is turned off.
- 2229 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
3 When the automatic operation signal is "1" in any path, the save operation is
not executed.
4 When the programs not saved status signal HPMNTS is "0", if the all programs
save request to nonvolatile memory start, the save operation is not executed
because of unnecessary.
5 If the power supply is turned off during saving the programs programs (the
programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM is "1"), all programs are deleted.
In this case, an alarm PS0519 occurs when the power supply is turned ON
next.
6 Do not save all programs to nonvolatile memory too frequently.
7 In automatic data backup function, if this function is enabled, bit 2 (AAP) of
parameter No.10340 should be set to 0.
8 When the embedded macro program is registered, bit 7 (HPM) of parameter
No.11354 should be set to 0.
9 This function can be enabled only on CNC program storage memory
(CNC_MEM device).
10 If this function is enabled, MANUAL GUIDE i cannot be used.
The flow chart of all programs saving to nonvolatile memory by the signal
The command of saving all programs to nonvolatile memory
（The all programs save request signal HPMRSV "0"->"1"）
Is the programs not NO
saved signal HPMNTS "1"?
YES
Is the automatic
NO
operation signal OP "0"
in the all paths ?
YES
The programs saving in progress
signal HPMSVM "0"->"1"
The programs save error NO Is saving
signal HPMERR "0"->"1" operation success?
YES
The the programs not saved signal
HPMNTS "1"->"0"
The programs saving in progress
signal HPMSVM "1"->"0"
The saving operation end.
- 2230 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
The time chart of all programs saving to nonvolatile memory by the signal
- The case of success
The programs are registered, edited, deleted, or changed of selection
Programs not saved
status signal
HPMNTS
After confirming the
Please confirm programs not saved status complete of save
signal,if the programs are saved.
All programs save
request signal
HPMRSV
Programs saving in
progress signal
HPMSVM
- The case of error
The programs are registered, edited, deleted, or changed of selection
Programs not saved
status signal
HPMNTS The not saved status remains because the error occurred.
All programs save
request signal
HPMRSV
Programs saving in
progress signal
HPMSVM
When the error occur, If HPMRSV is set to "0" from "1",
Programs save error HPMSVM becomes "0". HPMERR becomes "0".
signal
HPMERR
If the all programs save request signal HPMRSV is set to "1" from "0" in the automatic operation, the
programs error signal becomes "1" at once.
Signal
All programs save request signal HPMRSV <G0514.4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] On high-speed program management, the save of all programs is requested by this signal.
[Operation] When the programs not saved status signal HPMNTS is "1", if this signal is set to "1"
from "0", the save of all programs to nonvolatile memory start.
During program saving, the programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM is "1".
This signal is effective when the parameter HPM (bit 7 of No.11354) is "1".
- 2231 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 In the case of the following conditions, the save request does not
start even if this signal is set to "1" from "0".
- When the automatic operation signal is "1" in any path.
- When the programs not saved status signal HPMNTS is "0".
- When the programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM is "1".
- When the automatic data backup executing signal ATBK is "1".
2 If the power supply is turned off during saving the programs (the
programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM is "1"), all programs
are deleted. In this case, an alarm (PS0519) occurs when the
power supply is turned ON next. Therefore, please preserve the
backup of the programs in the external memory beforehand.
3 Do not save all programs to nonvolatile memory too frequently.
Programs not saved status signal HPMNTS <F0547.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] On high-speed program management, the signal indicates the signal indicates the status
that the programs are not saved.
[Operation] When the programs are registered, edited, deleted, or changed of selection, this signal
becomes "1".
If the programs are saved to nonvolatile memory by the all programs save request signal
HPMRSV or the application by FOCAS2/ C Language Library, this signal becomes "0".
This signal is effective when the parameter HPM (bit 7 of No.11354) is "1".
Programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM <F0547.6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] On high-speed program management, the signal indicates the saving mode of the
programs.
[Operation] During saving the programs to nonvolatile memory by the all programs save request
signal HPMRSV or the application by FOCAS2/ C Language Library, this signal become
"1". When the saving operation ends, this signal becomes "0".
This signal is effective when the parameter HPM (bit 7 of No.11354) is "1".
NOTE
1 If the power supply is turned off when this signal is "1", all
programs are deleted. In this case, an alarm (PS0519) occurs
when the power supply is turned ON next.
2 If the time of saving is extremely short, this signal might not
become "1".
Programs save error signal HPMERR <F0547.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] On high-speed program management, the signal indicates the occurrence of the programs
saving error.
[Operation] In the following condition when the programs saved by the all programs save request
signal HPMRSV, this signal become "1" is requested, this signal becomes "1".
- When the automatic operation signal is "1" in either path.
- If the error is occurred, during saving to nonvolatile memory.
If all programs save request signal HPMRSV is set to "0" from "1", this signal becomes
"0".
This signal is effective when the parameter HPM (bit 7 of No.11354) is "1".
- 2232 -
B-64603EN-1/01 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0514 HPMRSV
F0547 HPMERR HPMSVM HPMNTS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 HPM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#7 HPM High-speed program management is
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 There are no changes about the display of programs and the editing
operation method of programs.
2 In cases that this function is enabled, if the power supply is turned off
without saving, the changed programs data is not saved.
The program selection by the following operation also is not saved.
- MDI operation
- External workpiece number search
- External program number search
Please perform saving operation by the all programs save request
signal HPMRSV or the application by FOCAS2/ C Language Library,
if it is necessary to preserve the changed programs data/ the
program selection after the power supply is turned off.
3 When the automatic operation signal is "1" in any path, the save
operation is not executed.
4 If the power supply is turned off during saving the programs
programs (the programs saving in progress signal HPMSVM is "1"),
all programs are deleted. In this case, an alarm PS0519 occurs
when the power supply is turned ON next.
5 Do not save all programs to nonvolatile memory too frequently.
6 In automatic data backup function, if this function is enabled, bit 2
(AAP) of parameter No.10340 should be set to 0.
7 When the embedded macro program is registered, bit 7 (HPM) of
parameter No.11354 should be set to 0.
8 This function can be enabled only on CNC program storage memory
(CNC_MEM device).
9 If this function is enabled, MANUAL GUIDE i cannot be used.
- 2233 -
14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64603EN-1/01
Alarm and message
No. Message Description
PS0519 PROGRAM FILES ARE BROKEN AND The program have been cleared, because the program
CLEARED were broken. The power supply might have been turned off
while the program files is being saved to nonvolatile
memory.
- 2234 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
15 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Chapter 15, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA", consists of the following sections:
15.1 RS232C INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................2235
15.3 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL........................................................................................2245
15.4 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ...............................................................................................2251
15.1 RS232C INTERFACE
Overview
The data shown below can be input/output through RS232C interface.
1. Program
2. Offset data
3. Parameter
4. Pitch error compensation data
5. Custom macro common variables.
6. Workpiece coordinate system setting data
7. Operation history data (output only)
8. Tool management data
The above data can be output to a memory card or USB memory via a memory card interface or USB
memory interface.
When a memory card is selected as the data input/output destination (parameter No. 20 = 4) at this time, if
a file with the same file name already exists during writing of NC data such as programs or parameters, it
is possible to select whether to overwrite the file or cancel the operation.
To enable this function, set bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308.
When a USB memory is selected as the data input/output destination (parameter No. 20 = 17), a file with
the same file name is already present during writing of NC data, the file is overwritten.
The channel for data I/O is determined by setting parameter No. 0020. In this case, foreground or
background data I/O is restricted to one channel. In addition, data I/O can be controlled separately by
setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. Concretely, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
Explanation
The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface (RS-232-C serial port) or
memory card interface for inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters) between
external input/output units and memory cards.
The channel to which an I/O unit is connected needs be specified by setting I/O CHANNEL (parameter
No. 0020). In addition, the specification number, baud rate, and number of stop bits of each I/O unit must
be set in the parameter corresponding to each channel in advance. For setting of channel 1, two types of
parameters for setting I/O units are provided.
Channel setting can be made for each of foreground I/O and background I/O by setting bit 0 (IO4) of
parameter No. 0110. At this time, channel setting is made with parameters Nos. 0020, 0021, 0022, and
0023.
The following shows correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels.
- 2235 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data
0020
or foreground input
I/O CHANNEL = 0 Number specified for
Specify a channel for an data 0102
(Channel 1) the input/output device
input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) 0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 Stop bit and other data
0111
=2 : Channel 2
: I/O CHANNEL = 1 Number specified for
0112
(Channel 1) the input/output device
In addition, input/output of memory
card interface is enabled. 0113 Baud rate
0121 Stop bit and other data
When set by IO4
I/O CHANNEL = 2 Number specified for
0122
(Channel 2) the input/output device
0021 Foreground output
0123 Baud rate
0022
0023
Background input
:
Background output
Channel settings are the same as I/O CHANNEL = 9
with parameter No. 0020.
Fig. 15.1 (a) Correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels
Diagnosis
- Foreground
030 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA
When the alarm SR0001, “TH ERROR” occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the
number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
031 TH DATA
Readout code of the number of characters in which an alarm SR0001, “TH ERROR” occurred
- Background
032 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA
When the alarm SR0001, “TH ERROR” occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the
number of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
033 TH DATA
Readout code of the number of characters in which an alarm SR0001, “TH ERROR” occurred
Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
0021 Foreground output device setting
0022 Background input device setting
0023 Background output device setting
[Input type] Setting input
- 2236 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 17
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
Data server interface
Embedded Ethernet interface
USB memory interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB memory interface
- Parameters Common to all Channels
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 ISO Code used for data output
0: EIA code
1: ISO code
NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0139.
2 The I/O setting of an USB memory is made by bit 0 (ISU) of
parameter No. 11505.
3 The I/O setting of a data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter
No. 0908.
4 When EIA code is used for data output (ISO = 0), set bit 3 (ASI) of
parameter No.101 and 111 and 121 to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PEC PRM PZS
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2237 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
#0 PZS When a part program is output, the O number is:
0: Not zero-suppressed.
1: Zero-suppressed.
#1 PRM When parameters are output, the parameters whose values are 0 are:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, the data whose value is 0 is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS IOP NCR CRF CTV
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.
0: Performed
1: Not performed
#2 CRF Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0: Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100.
1: CR, LF are output.
#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
#6 IOP Stopping a program output or input operation by a reset is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#7 ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0110 IO4
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter
No. 0020.
- 2238 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the
foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters Nos.
0020 to 0023 respectively.
Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing,
program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
3 DNC operation from a memory card also must set the parameter to
1, and execute DNC operation by ISO code. ASCII code is
dangerous because parity information is not included and a data
error during the data input is not detected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0908 ISO
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When a data server is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
3 DNC operation from a data server also must set the parameter to
1, and execute DNC operation by ISO code. ASCII code is
dangerous because parity information is not included and a data
error during the data input is not detected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 COW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2239 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
#1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card,
0: It is not overwritten
Alarm SR1973, “FILE ALREADY EXIST” is generated.
1: It is overwritten.
Because the confirmation message is displayed before overwriting even if COW is 1,
overwriting can be canceled.
NOTE
1 When the overwritten file is read only attribute, it is not possible to
overwrite even if bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 = 1.
2 This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11505 ISU
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit
#0 ISU When an USB memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed
using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11507 HSR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#3 HSR Speed-up of processing related to RS232C is
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 0, communication is performed at
lower than the specified baud rate of RS232C.
2 This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
- 2240 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
- Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 SB2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#3 ASI Code used at data input/output
0: EIA or ISO code (input: automatically distinguished/output: decided by the setting
parameter of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No.0000)
1: ASCII code
NOTE
When ASCII code is used for data input/output (ASI = 1), set bit 1
(ISO) of parameter No.0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0: Output
1: Not output
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=0.
The following table lists the specification numbers and corresponding input/output device
specifications.
Specification numbers and corresponding input/output device specifications
Specification number Input/output device specification
0 RS-232-C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1(FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3(FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate、FANUC FA Card Adaptor,
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
- 2241 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
Specification number Input/output device specification
4 RS-232-C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0.
When setting this parameter, see the following table:
Baud rates and corresponding settings
Setting Baud rate (bps) Setting Baud rate (bps)
1 50 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
6 300 11 9600
7 600 12 19200
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(initialized type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
- Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 SB2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
#3 ASI Code used at data input/output
0: EIA or ISO code (input: automatically distinguished/output: decided by the setting
parameter of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No.0000)
1: ASCII code
NOTE
When ASCII code is used for data input/output (ASI = 1), set bit 1
(ISO) of parameter No.0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0: Output
1: Not output
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
- 2242 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=1.
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1.
- Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 SB2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
#3 ASI Code used at data input/output
0: EIA or ISO code (input: automatically distinguished/output: decided by the setting
parameter of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No.0000)
1: ASCII code
NOTE
When ASCII code is used for data input/output (ASI = 1), set bit 1
(ISO) of parameter No.0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0: Output
1: Not output
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 6
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=2.
0123 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 12
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=2.
- 2243 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
- Parameters of DNC operation from the memory card
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC SCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#5 SCH Schedule operation function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the
memory card are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it
is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen.
SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of parameter
No. 0000 to 0.
SR1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
SR1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently selected in
the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even
though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
SR1807 PARAMETER SETTING An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was specified.
ERROR The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol selection
settings are erroneous.
SR1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory card.
- Channel 1
Number Message Description
SR0085 OVERRUN ERROR During a read by RS232C interface 1, an overrun, parity, or framing error
occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud
rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect.
SR0086 DR OFF During I/O process by RS232C interface 1, the data set ready input signal
of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not
turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board.
SR0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by RS232C interface 1, although a read stop command was
issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed
circuit board was defective.
- Channel 2
Number Message Description
SR1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by RS232C interface 2, the data set ready input signal
of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible causes are an I/O device not
turn on, a broken cable, and a defective printed circuit board.
- 2244 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Number Message Description
SR1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) During a read by RS232C interface 2, an overrun, parity, or framing error
occurred. The number of bits for entered data was not matched, or baud
rate setting or I/O device specification number was incorrect.
SR1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) During a read by RS232C interface 2, although a read stop command was
issued, more than 10 characters were input. The I/O device or printed
circuit board was defective.
- DNC operation
Number Message Description
PS0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the program in
GOTO/WHILE/DO the MDI or DNC mode.
PS1081 EXT DEVICE SUB 1. M198 or M99 was executed during scheduled operation. Alternatively,
PROGRAM CALL MODE M198 was executed during DNC operation. Modify the program.
ERROR 2. An interruption macro was specified and M99 was executed during
pocketing of multiple repetitive canned cycles.
15.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL
Overview
The registration or output of a program can be specified externally.
- Registration
External input start signal EXINP <Gn058.1> can be used to register a program in the part program
memory from an external input device with the background edit function.
- Output
External output start signal EXOUT <Gn058.3> can be used to output all programs registered in part
program memory to an external output device with the background edit function.
The program registered by this function is stored in the default folder of the background which is set on
the program list screen. Moreover, the program to be output is also the program stored in the default
folder of the background.
Before using this function, set the default folder of the background correctly. Refer to the Operator's
Manual as for the default folder of the background.
Signal
External input start signal EXINP<Gn058.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Programs are registered in the part program memory through the RS232C interface.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the CNC operates as follows:
- The background edit function reads programs from an external input device and
register them in the part program memory.
- Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to specify either a single program or
all programs in the file are registered at a time.
Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs before being
registered. However, it is impossible to delete programs protected by bit 0 (NE8)
and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 or by their attributes.
- During registration, input/output busy signal IOBSY is “1”.
- When external input/output stop signal EXSTP is set to “1” during registration, the
registration stops.
- If the RS232C interface is already used in the foreground processing (for example,
inputting or outputting of a program in the edit mode), external input start signal
EXINP waits until the forground processing is completed.
- 2245 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
- There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered.
For example, a program with the same program number or file name as the program
to be registered is not allowed to be executed in the foreground.
NOTE
1 The registered program is stored in the background default folder
to be set on the program list screen. Before operating this signal,
set the background default folder correctly.
2 In the multipath system, do not input these signals for two or more
paths at the same time.
External output start signal EXOUT<Gn058.3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit via the
RS232C interface.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the CNC operates as follows:
- The background edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program
memory to an external output device.
- When programs are being output, input/output busy signal IOBSY is set to “1”.
- When external input/output stop signal EXSTP is set to “1” during output, the
output stops.
- If the RS232C interface is already used in the foreground processing (for example,
inputting or outputting of a program in the edit mode), external output start signal
EXOUT waits until the forground processing is completed.
- There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs can be output.
For example, the program protected by bit 0 and bit 4 of parameter No. 3202 cannot
be output.
NOTE
1 The programs to be output are stored in the background default
folder which is set on the program list screen. Before operating this
signal, set the background default folder correctly.
2 In the multipath system, do not input these signals for two or more
paths at the same time.
External input/output stop signal EXSTP<Gn058.2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Program registration or output via the RS232C interface is forcibly stopped.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the CNC operates as follows:
- Program registeration or output by the external input start signal EXINP or external
output start signal EXOUT is stopped immediately.
Input/output busy signal IOBSY<Fn053.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that program registeration or output triggered by the external input
start signal EXINP or external output start signal EXOUT is under way.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1”, when:
- The external input start signal EXINP or external output start signal EXOUT
triggers program registeration or output.
This signal becomes “0”, when:
- 2246 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
- Program registeration or output triggered by the external input or output start signal
ends.
This signal also becomes “1” when the program registeration or output ends
normally or is forcibly ended by external input/output stop signal EXSTP.
Input/output alarm signal IOALM<Fn053.3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registeration or
output triggered by the external input start signal EXINP or external output start signal
EXOUT.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1”, when:
- An alarm occurs during program registeration or output triggered by the external
input or output start signal.
This signal becomes “0”, when:
- A reset or external input/output stop signal EXSTP is input.
Background editing signal BGEACT <Fn053.4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1”, when:
- The background edit mode is started. (Both of the EDIT mode and the reference
mode are included.)
This signal becomes “0”, when:
- The background edit mode is ended.
The signals for all paths are turned on and off at the same time.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn058 EXOUT EXSTP EXINP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn053 BGEACT IOALM IOBSY
Parameter
I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data
0020
or foreground input
I/O CHANNEL = 0 Number specified for
Specify a channel for an data 0102
(Channel 1) the input/output device
input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 2) 0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 Stop bit and other data
=2 : Channel 2 0111
I/O CHANNEL = 1 Number specified for
0112
(Channel 1) the input/output device
When IO4(No.0110#0) is set
0113 Baud rate
0021 Foreground output
0121 Stop bit and other data
0022 Background input
I/O CHANNEL = 2 Number specified for
0122
0023 Background output (Channel 2) the input/output device
0123 Baud rate
Channel settings are the same as
with parameter No. 0020.
- 2247 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control
0: The new program is registered following the programs already registered.
1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that
programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted.
NOTE
Registered programs are placed in the background default folder
set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set
the default folder in the background correctly.
#1 RAL When programs are registered by external I/O device control:
0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
NOTE
Registered programs are placed in the background default folder
set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set
the default folder in the background correctly.
#2 REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that
of an existing program
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the
existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is
generated.
#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 is set to 0, program
registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 PSR NE9 NE8
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
- 2248 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
1 If parameter DMP (No.11375#0) is effective, this parameter is
applied to the program in the data server. However, the prohibited
content is different. Refer to NC parameter DMP (No.11375#0) for
details.
2 This parameter setting does not affect the programs for running
and editing memory card programs on a memory card.
#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
1 If parameter DMP (No.11375#0) is effective, this parameter is
applied to the program in the data server. However, the prohibited
content is different. Refer to NC parameter DMP (No.11375#0) for
details.
2 This parameter setting does not affect the programs for running
and editing memory card programs on a memory card.
#6 PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, the protected programs are also
displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11375 DMP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2249 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
#0 DMP The program protection function on the data server is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program copy
(7) Program move
(8) File input/output by GET/PUT/LIST-GET/LIST-PUT operation from PC
(9) Memory card format
(10) File input/output by FTP operation from PC
(11) File rename by FTP operation from PC
(12) File deletion by FTP operation from PC
CAUTION
The CF card can be mounted on other CNC and PC by pulling out
the CF card for the data server. Therefore, the content of the
program cannot be protected. It is protection for the unauthorized
operation prevention, and not protection for security.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 When this parameter is set to 1, the following parameters become
effective.
NE8(No.3202#0)､NE9(No.3202#4)､PSR(No.3202#6)
3 For the multi path system, the parameter NE8 and NE9 of path 1
are effective.
4 When parameter DMP (No.11375#0) is set to one, the format is
impossible regardless of the target program number for protection.
5 When the parameter No. 3210 (PSW) set to a value other than 0
that is not the value set in parameter No. 3211 (KEY), parameter
MDP(No.11375#0) cannot be changed.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
BG0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
BG0072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic),
125 (option), 200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option).
Delete unnecessary programs and execute program
registration again.
BG0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary
programs and execute program registration again.
- 2250 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Number Message Description
BG0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number
was protected.
In program matching, the password for the encoded program
was not correct.
BG0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW The NC received more than 10 characters even though the
NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to
RS232C interface 1 during data reception.
BG0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete
USE the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the
correct operation for the background edition.
BG0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were
using it.
BG0434 WRITE PROTECT The registration of the program is prohibited.
BG0435 ILLEGAL FORMAT The format is illegal.
- Confirm the format of the program number or file name
set for the program.
BG1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being
accessed.
BG0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 1 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 2 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG0086 DR OFF During I/O process by RS232C interface 1, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.
BG1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by RS232C interface 2, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.
BG1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data even
though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device
connected to RS232C interface 2 during data reception.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Program management
Inputting/Outputting a Program
15.3 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION
Overview
This function outputs the following various data into memory card or USB memory by one operation.
- SRAM data
- User files (made by user such as PMC ladder)
- Text data (Parameter, program, and so on)
This function enables to back up the system data easily.
Moreover, the contents of SRAM data can be confirmed immediately because both SRAM data and text
data are output.
NC data output signal ALLO<F0578.5> is set to “1” from the beginning to the end of outputting text
data.
- 2251 -
15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64603EN-1/01
Signal
NC data output signal ALLO<G0578.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that text data are under output by NC data output function.
[Output condition] This signal becomes “1”, when:
- Outputting text data by NC data output function is started.
This signal becomes “0”, when:
- Outputting text data by NC data output function is finished.
- Outputting text data by NC data output function is terminated abnormally.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn578 ALLO
Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
0021 Foreground output device setting
0022 Background input device setting
0023 Background output device setting
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 17
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
Data server interface
Embedded Ethernet interface
USB memory interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
Memory card interface of CNC
4 Memory card/USB interface in the secondary display unit for Ethernet
connection or the shared display unit for Ethernet connection
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB memory interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0110 IO4
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2252 -
B-64603EN-1/01 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter
No. 0020.
If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the
foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters No.
0020 to No. 0023 respectively.
Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing,
program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MDP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is:
0: Not added.
1: Added.
NOTE
If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored, and
a path number is not added to the extension.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0313 TFO BOP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 BOP NC data output function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
If a file with the same name already exists in the external I/O device,
the file is overwritten. It is recommended to clear the external I/O
device before using this function.
#1 TFO On NC data output function, text data (such as parameter, program) is:
0: Output.
1: Not output.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64484EN) NC data output function
- 2253 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
16 MEASUREMENT
Chapter 16, "MEASUREMENT", consists of the following sections:
16.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ........................................................................2254
16.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET (T SERIES)......................................................................................................................2255
16.3 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................2264
16.3.1 Skip Function......................................................................................................................2264
16.3.2 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function .............................................................................2272
16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................................2272
16.3.4 Continuous High-Speed Skip Function ..............................................................................2276
16.3.5 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................................2279
16.3.6 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................................2287
16.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ..............................................................................................2294
16.4.1 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series) .....................................................2294
16.4.2 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series) ..........................................................2295
16.4.3 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B" (T Series) ..............2313
16.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)
M
Overview
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key.
Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also displayed on this
screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the fixed point on the machine by manual operation.
Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the
machine by manual operation. The relative position display at this point shows difference between the
reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset amounts.
Reference
tool
This difference
is set as offset
amount
Fixed point
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64484EN) Tool length compensation
- 2254 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
16.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)
/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)
Overview
When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the
CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate
value of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for the tool. When the tool has
been already offset, it is moved to the measurement position with that offset value.
The difference between the coordinate value of a measuring position and a specified coordinate value is
added to current compensation.
Z
A (start position)
Rapid traverse G37 for specifying measuring position
B (deceleration position)
Measurement
speed
C (measuring position)）
Tool stops when measuring position
reached signal goes on.
0 X
Compensation = (Current compensation) + [(Coordinate at tool stop) - (Coordinate at
specification of measuring position)]
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 7 (IGA) of parameter No.6240 to 0.
Format
M
Hxx ; Specifies an offset number for tool length compensation.
G90 G37 IP_ ; Automatic tool length measurement. Absolute programming.
G37 is valid only in the block in which it is specified.
IP_ indicates the X-, Y-, Z-, or fourth axis.
T
Txx ; Specifies an offset number for tool position compensation.
G36 X_ ; or G37 Z_ ;
Automatic tool offset. Absolute programming.
G36 and G37 are valid only in the block in which it is specified.
- 2255 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Signal
Measuring position reached signals
XAE1#1<X0004.0>, XAE2#1<X0004.1> (M/T series), XAE3#1<X0004.2> (M series only)
XAE1#2<X0013.0>, XAE2#2<X0013.1> (M/T series), XAE3#2<X0013.2> (M series only)
XAE1#3<X0011.0>, XAE2#3<X0011.1> (M/T series), XAE3#3<X0011.2> (M series only)
GAE1<Gn517.0>,GAE2<Gn517.1>, GAE3<Gn517.2> (M/T series)
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from the measuring
position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the position at the moment the
measuring position reached signal has just been turned “1”, the difference in the
coordinate value is added to the current tool compensation value to update the
compensation value. The tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid
traverse in a block where one of the following commands has been specified:
G37 (Mseries)
G36,G37 (Tseries) (G37.1, G37.2 if the bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210 is set to 1)
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before the measuring position.
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameters Nos.
6241 to 6243. If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G code is
turned “1” after the tool has approached within distance ε of the measuring position and
before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit updates
the compensation value and terminates the move command for the block.
If the measuring position reached signal is not turned “1” even after the tool has overshot
the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters an alarm state and terminates
the move command for the block without updating the compensation value.
Presumed measuring position
FR FP
U V
X, Z
A B C D
S (xs, zs) T
ε ε
Start
point γ Measuring position
reached signal
|xa-xs|. |za-zs|
U (xa, za)
FR : Rapid traverse
FP : Parameters Nos.6241 to 6243（feedrate）
γ : Parameters Nos.6251 to 6253
ε : Parameters Nos.6254 to 6256
Axis specification Signal input Valid parameters
Command code
T series M series T series M series T series M series
G36
XAE1 6241,
(bit 3 (G36) of Basic 1st
or 6251,
parameter No. axis
GAE1 6254
3405=0)
6241 to
XAE1 to
G37 6243,
XAE2 XAE3 6242,
(bit 3 (G36) of Basic 3rd Basic1st to 6251 to
or or 6252,
parameter No. axis 3rd axes 6253,
GAE2 GAE1 to 6255
3405=0) 6254 to
GAE3
6256
G37.1
XAE1 XAE1 6241, 6241,
(bit 3 (G36) of Basic 1st Basic 1st
or or 6251, 6251,
parameter No. axis axis
GAE1 GAE1 6254 6254
3405=1)
- 2256 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Axis specification Signal input Valid parameters
Command code
T series M series T series M series T series M series
G37.2
XAE2 XAE2 6242, 6242,
(bit 3 (G36) of Basic 3rd Basic 2nd
or or 6252, 6252,
parameter No. axis axis
GAE2 GAE2 6255 6255
3405=1)
G37.3
XAE3 6243,
(bit 3 (G36) of Basic 3rd
or 6253,
parameter No. axis
GAE3 6256
3405=1)
NOTE
If parameters Nos. 6242 and 6243 are set to 0, the setting of
parameter No. 6241 becomes valid.
[Operation] When the measuring position reached signals (XAE1-XAE3 or GAE1-GAE3) is turned
“1”, the control unit works as follows:
- Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and updates the
current compensation value based on the difference between the specified measuring
position and the read measuring position in the following case: When the measuring
position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where
G36 (T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the measuring
position specified by a program and before the tool overshoots the measuring
position by distance ε. The control unit then stops the tool, and terminates the move
command for the block.
- Enters an alarm (PS0080) “G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS
NOT PROPERLY INPUT” state and terminates the move command for the block
without updating the compensation value in the following case: When the measuring
position reached signal corresponding to the command is turned “1” in a block
where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after the tool is within distance γ of the
measuring position but before the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.
- The measuring position reached signal is not monitored on the rising edge, but the
state of the signal is simply monitored. So, if the measuring position reached signal
remains to be set to “1”, and automatic tool length measurement (M series)
(automatic tool offset (T series) (G36, G37) is then specified, the CNC issues the
PS0080 alarm when a movement has been made to distance γ before the
measurement position.
NOTE
1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec.
2 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached
signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side.
Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay
or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on
the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by
the feedrate specified in parameter No. 6241.
3 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position
reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is
calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC
delay must also be considered.
- 2257 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
4 Measuring position reached signals XAE1 to XAE3 need not be
processed on the PMC side because the CNC reads the signals
directly from the machine.
5 If the tool length measurement function is not used, the PMC can
use the pins corresponding to the measuring position reached
signals for general-purpose input signals.
6 When the bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1, address
<X0004> including measuring position reached signals can be
assigned to an X address specified in parameter No. 3019.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1 #1
X0004 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#1 #1 #1
XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)
#2 #2
X0013 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#2 #2 #2
XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)
#3 #3
X0011 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#3 #3 #3
XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)
#P #P #P
Gn517 GAE3 GAE2 GAE1
NOTE
To use independent measuring position reached signals for all the paths in a
system having four or more paths, use a G address.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:
0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
- 2258 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are not set,
the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to
bit 0 of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set,
the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
WARNING
Please set an appropriate value to parameters (Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019) beforehand when you set 1 to this parameter.
If you used the set address in the parameters (Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019) by another usage, it may cause an unexpected
machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must prevent the
competition of the used X address.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and tool offset
3019
write signals are assigned
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position
arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool
offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 G36
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 G36 As a G code to be used with the automatic tool length measurement function (M
series)/automatic tool offset function (T series) is:
0: G36 (T series only)/G37 is used.
1: G37.1/G37.2/G37.3 is used.
- 2259 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
If it is necessary to perform circular threading (counterclockwise),
set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SEB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SEB When a skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on
while the skip function, the continuous high-speed skip function or the automatic tool
length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the
accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes
on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MDC
6210
CCM MDC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic
tool compensation (T series) is:
0: Added to the current offset.
1: Subtracted from the current offset.
#7 CCM The current offset amount of automatic tool length measurement (M series) is:
0: The offset amount set to the offset screen.
In case of tool offset memory B or C, the value for tool wear offset is selected.
1: The offset amount actually effected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6240 AE0
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the measuring position reached signals
XAE1, XAE2, GAE1<Gn517.0> and GAE2<Gn517.1> (T series) or the measuring
position reached signals XAE1, XAE2, XAE3, GAE1<Gn517.0>, GAE2<Gn517.1> and
GAE3<Gn517.2> (M series) are:
0: 1.
1: 0.
- 2260 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
Setting this parameter to 1, input measuring position reached
signals to both XAE1, XAE2, XAE3 and GAE1, GAE2,
GAE3<Gn517.0, Gn517.1, Gn517.2>. If the other measuring
position reached signals are not input, the CNC issues the PS0080
alarm to the movement to the position of the distance γ.
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1
signals)
6241
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and
GAE1 signals)
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2
signals)
6242
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and
GAE2 signals)
6243 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and
GAE3 signals)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of automatic tool
compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
NOTE
When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is 0, the setting of
parameter No. 6241 is used.
γ value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)
6251
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals)
γ value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)
6252
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2 signals)
6253
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and GAE3 signals)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the relevant γ value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
- 2261 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is Diameter
specification, specify the diameter value. When the Reference axis
(parameter No.1031) is Radius specification, specify the radius
value.
ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)
6254
ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals)
ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)
6255
ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE2 and GAE2 signals)
6256
ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE3 and GAE3 signals)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
These parameters set the relevant ε value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
NOTE
When the Reference axis (parameter No.1031) is Diameter
specification, specify the diameter value. When the Reference axis
(parameter No.1031) is Radius specification, specify the radius
value.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0080 G37 MEASURING POSITION When the tool length measurement function (G37) is
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front
PROPERLY INPUT (M series) of the area determined by the ε value specified in parameter
No. 6254. Alternatively, the signal does not go “1”.
G37 MEASURING POSITION When the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT used, a measuring position reached signals (XAE1, XAE2)
PROPERLY INPUT (T series) does not go 1 within the range determined by the ε value
specified in parameters Nos. 6254 and 6255.
PS0081 G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (M When the tool length measurement function is performed, the
series) tool length measurement function (G37) is specified without
specifying an H code.
Correct the program.
G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (T When the automatic tool compensation function is used, the
series) automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified
without specifying a T code.
Correct the program.
- 2262 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Number Message Description
PS0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE (M When the tool length measurement function is performed, the
series) tool length measurement function (G37) is specified together
with an H code in the same block.
Correct the program.
G37 SPECIFIED WITH T CODE (T When the automatic tool compensation function is used, the
series) automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is specified
together with a T code in the same block.
Correct the program.
PS0083 G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND An error has been found in axis specification of the tool length
(M series) measurement function (G37). Alternatively, a move command
is specified as an incremental command.
Correct the program.
G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND An error has been found in axis specification of the automatic
(T series) tool compensation function (G36, G37). Alternatively, a
command is specified as an incremental command.
Correct the program.
Note
NOTE
1 If an H code and G37 are specified in the same block, an alarm will be raised.
Specify an H code before a block including G37.
2 A measurement speed (FP), γ, and ε are specified as parameters (FP: No.6241,
γ: No.6251, ε: No.6254) by the machine tool builder. As ε, specify a positive
value satisfying the condition of γ > ε.
3 The compensation value is updated by the following formula:
New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of
the tool along the specified axis when the measuring position reached signal is
1) - (specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1) In an M series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool
compensation number selected by an H code.
When offset memory A is used, the offset value is changed.
When offset memory B is used, the tool wear compensation value is
changed.
When offset memory C is used, the tool wear compensation value for the H
code is changed.
(2) In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool
compensation number selected by a T code and to the specified axis (X, Z) in
G36, G37.
4 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms
just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement
error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring
position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation),
multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No. 6241.
5 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal
until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an
acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be
considered.
- 2263 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
6 A measuring position reached signal is monitored just as a state not by the rising
edge. Accordingly, if a measuring position reached signal is held to 1 and if the
corresponding tool length measurement function (G37) is specified, the CNC will
raise alarm PS0080 when a movement is made to a position at a distance of γ, in
front of the measuring position.
7 When using this function, set the parameter EVO (bit 6 of parameter No. 5001)
to zero. (If the tool compensation value of tool length compensation A or B is
changed in the offset mode (G43 or G44), the new value becomes effective from
a subsequent block including G43, G44, or an H code.)
Reference item
Manual name Item name
DESCRIPTIONS (B-64482EN) Automatic tool length measurement
Automatic tool offset
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Lathe system) (B-64484EN-1) Automatic tool offset (G36,G37)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Machining center system) (B-64484EN-2) Automatic tool length measurement (G37)
16.3 SKIP FUNCTION
16.3.1 Skip Function
Overview
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01.
If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from
the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
The coordinates when the skip signal turned on are stored in the system variables (#100151 to #100182)
for custom macros, so they can be used by custom macros. For a system with up to 20 axes, the system
variables (#5061 to #5080) compatible with FS16 can also be used.
#100151 (#5061) : First axis coordinate value
#100152 (#5062) : Second axis coordinate value
:
:
#100170 (#5080) : 20th axis coordinate value
#100171 : 21st axis coordinate value
#100172 : 22nd axis coordinate value
:
:
#100182 : 32nd axis coordinate value
- Feedrate
Two types of feedrate can be selected for the G31 block, using bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No.6207.
(1) If parameter SFP (No.6207#1) is 0
Feedrate specified with address F (may be specified before or in the G31 block).
(2) If parameter SFP (No.6207#1) is 1
Feedrate set for parameter No.6281.
- 2264 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and automatic acceleration/deceleration
are disabled when a feedrate with the G31 command is the feedrate which is set for parameter
No.6821.
CAUTION
To increase the precision of the tool position when the skip signal is input,
feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled
in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate which is specified as a
feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
To enable these functions, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 to 1.
However, even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 1 (SFP) of parameter
No.6207 is set to 1.
- Acc./Dec. after interpolation of the skip function
To enable the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter
No. 6200 to 1. When SKF is 0, the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function is
disabled.
If the Acc./Dec. type is set by bit 3 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 and the time constant is set by bit 4
(ASB) of parameter No. 6210 when SKF is 1, it is possible to set a separate Acc./Dec. type and time
constant that are different from those of the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation. When ASB
is 0 and ASL is 0, the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation is assumed.
In this case, the Acc./Dec. type set by bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610 and bit 1 (CTBx) of parameter
No. 1610 and the time constant set by parameter No. 1622 are enabled.
Signal
Skip Signals SKIP <X0004.7>, SKIPP <Gn006.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to 1 in a
block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the
block is terminated at the same time.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to 1, the control unit works as described below.
- When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit reads and
stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops
the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
- 2265 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in
detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the
measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation
(including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal
on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.
3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip
signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider
delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the
PMC side.
4 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP <X0004.7> from the
machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to process the signal.
5 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal
terminal SKIP <X0004.7> corresponding to the skip signal as a
general purpose input signal.
6 When the skip signal is monitored, the state rather than the rising
edge is sampled. Therefore, when the level remains 1, the skip
condition is assumed to be met immediately after skip cutting is
specified next.
7 Address <X0004>including skip signal SKIP <X0004.7> can be
assigned to the X addresses that were set for parameters Nos.
3012 and 3019 when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1.
8 When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 0, the address of the
skip signal SKIP is <X0013.7> in case of the 2nd path and
<X0011.7> in case of the 3rd path.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 SKIP
#3
X0011 SKIP
#2
X0013 SKIP
Gn006 SKIPP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:
0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
- 2266 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameters Nos. 3013 and 3014 are not set, the
deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0
of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set, the
skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
WARNING
Please set an appropriate value to parameters ( Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, 3019 ) beforehand when you set 1 to this parameter.
If an input signal of the set address in parameters ( Nos. 3013,
3014, 3012, 3019 ) is used by another usage, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used X address.
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
- 2267 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and tool offset
3019
write signals are assigned
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position
arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool
offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
Example 1. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 6
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0006 ESKIP ZAE XAE (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series)
Example 2. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 5
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 ESKIP ZAE XAE
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
- 2268 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
CAUTION
1 When bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 0, feedrate
override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are
disabled in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate
which is specified as a feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
2 Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 1 (SFP)
of parameter No.6207 is set to 1. When the multi-step skip is used
and bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are similarly disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SKPXE IGX SEB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SEB When a skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on
while the skip function, the continuous high-speed skip function or the automatic tool
length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the
accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes
on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.
- 2269 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 SKPXE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) Bit 0 (GSK)
Bit 7 (SKPXE) Skip Skip Multistage skip
of of
Parameter of parameter signal signal signals
parameter parameter
No .6201 SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
No. 6201 No. 6200
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 ASB ASL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 ASL
#4 ASB The ASB and ASL bits set the type and time constant of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in the skip function as follows:
ASB ASL Type of acceleration/ deceleration Parameter No. for time constant
0 1 Linear type
Parameter No. 6280
1 － Bell-shaped
0 0 This function is disabled(NOTE).
- 2270 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is specified, T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 are obtained
as with normal acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, where T is the
time constant. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration type includes no linear part.
NOTE
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration type is set in bits 0 and 1
of parameter No. 1610, and the time constant is set in parameter
No. 1622.
6280 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
This parameter sets a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the
skip function for each axis.
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 or bit 4 (ASL) of
parameter No. 6210 is set to 1.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of parameters Nos. 6282 to 6285.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of
group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the
PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by
address Q.
Note
NOTE
This function is disabled for the synchronous slave axis and enabled for axes not
related to composite control.
- 2271 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
16.3.2 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function
Overview
In a G31 block, the move command can be executed for multiple axes. When the skip signal is input
externally during execution of this command, the execution is aborted for all axes and the next block is
executed.
The skip positions of all of the specified axes are set in macro variables #5061 to #5080 (#100151 to
#100182 for a system having 20 or more axes) corresponding to the axes.
Note
NOTE
This function is disabled for the synchronous slave axis and enabled for axes not
related to composite control.
16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal
Overview
The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 to HDI3 : connected directly to the
CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input.
(Either can be enabled/disabled, using parameters HSS and IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201 and bit 4 of
parameter No. 6200).) If a high-speed skip signal is used, up to eight signals can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 to 2 msec at the CNC side (not considering those at the PMC
side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high
precision measurement.
This function is an optional function.
Signal
High-Speed Skip Status Signals HDO0 to HDO7<Fn122>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. The
signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows:
High-speed skip signal Bit name
HDI0 HDO0
HDI1 HDO1
HDI2 HDO2
HDI3 HDO3
[Output cond.] Each bit is set to 1 when:
- The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical “1”.
Each bit is set to 0 when:
- The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical “0”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn122 HDO7 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
- 2272 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 RHB SFN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameters Nos. 6282 to 6285.
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
#5 RHB The high-Speed skip status signals HDO is:
0: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed.
1: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.
NOTE
The high-speed skip signal HDI does not change by setting RHB
(bit 5 of parameter No.6207). When the contact of the high-speed
skip signal is open, the signal HDI is set to "0" and the signal is not
assumed to be input regardless of the setting of parameter RHB.
To assume that the high-speed skip signal is input when the
contact of the signal is open, set SRE (bit 6 of parameter No.6200)
to 1.
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)
6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)
6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2273 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SEB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SEB When a skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on
while the skip function, the continuous high-speed skip function or the automatic tool
length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the
accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes
on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
1S1 to 1S4 These parameters specify whether to enable or disable each high-speed skip signal when
the G31 skip command is issued.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The settings of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Parameter High-speed skip signals
1S1 HDI0
1S2 HDI1
1S3 HDI2
1S4 HDI3
NOTE
Do not specify the same signal simultaneously for different paths.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell
SIGNAL SELECTED commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed
signal is selected in different paths.
- 2274 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Note
NOTE
This function is disabled for the synchronous slave axis and enabled for axes not
related to composite control.
Notes on using high speed skip
- Overview
Note that the contact state during a skip is different from that of Series 0i-C in the high speed skip signal
of Series 0i-F.
• Series 0i-F :
The skip signal is assumed to be input when an open contact is closed.
• Series 0i-C :
The skip signal is assumed to be input when an closed contact is opened.
- Detail
The difference in the specification of the high speed skip signal between Series 0i-F and Series 0i-C is as
follows.
• For Series 0i-F
The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is at a low level and assumed
to be 0 at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be 1 when a contact is closed.
Therefore the skip signal is input when an open contact is closed.
• For Series 0i-C
The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 0 when the input voltage is at a low level and assumed
to be 1 at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be 1 when a contact is opened.
Therefore the skip signal is input when a closed contact is opened.
When the wiring designed for Series 0i-F is applied to Series 0i-F, the modification of wiring is not
necessary by setting the following parameter.
Depending on the detector to be used, the settings on the detector are used instead of parameter
settings to switch between contact A and contact B of for output signals. For details, see the manual
of the detector.
- Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
- Signal
High-speed skip status signal HDO0 to HDO7<Fn122>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn122 HDO7 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal.
[Output cond.] 1: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed.
(The input voltage is at a low level.)
0: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.
- 2275 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
(The input voltage is at a high level.)
16.3.4 Continuous High-Speed Skip Function
Overview
The continuous high-speed skip function enables reading of absolute coordinates by using the high-speed
skip signals (HDI0 to HDI3). Once a high-speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute
coordinates are written to custom macro variables #5061 to #5080. For a system with more than 20 axes,
#100151 to #100182 are used. The input of a skip signal does not stop axial movement, thus continuous
reading of the coordinates of two or more points is possible.
Both the rising and falling edges of the high-speed skip signal can be used as a trigger by setting bit 5
(CSE) of parameter No. 6201.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Explanation
- Custom macro variables
Once a high–speed skip signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute coordinates are written to
custom macro variables #5061 to #5080. For a system with more than 20 axes, #100151 to #100182 are
used.
These variables are immediately updated once the tool reaches the next skip position. The feedrate must,
therefore, be specified so that the tool does not reach the next skip position before the application
completes reading of the variables.
System with up to 20 axes System with more than 20 axes
#5061 Coordinate along the first axis #100151 Coordinate along the first axis
#5062 Coordinate along the second axis #100152 Coordinate along the second axis
#5063 Coordinate along the third axis #110153 Coordinate along the third axis
: :
#5079 Coordinate along the 19th axis #100181 Coordinate along the 31st axis
#5080 Coordinate along the 20th axis #100182 Coordinate along the 32nd axis
High–speed skip signal
This function is enabled only for high-speed skip signals.
The high-speed skip signal to be used is selected by bits 0 to 7 (9S1 to 9S8) of parameter No. 6208.
End of block
The G31P90 block is terminated when the axis reaches the end point.
Limitations
Only one axis can be specified in the block for the continuous high-speed skip function (G31P90). If two
or more axes are specified, alarm PS5068, "FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90" is issued.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2276 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 CSE SEB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SEB When a skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on
while the skip function, the continuous high-speed skip function or the automatic tool
length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the
accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes
on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#5 CSE For the continuous high-speed skip command, high-speed skip signals are:
0: Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of bit 6 (SRE) of
parameter No. 6200).
1: Effective at both the rising and falling edges.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6208 9S4 9S3 9S2 9S1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
9S1 to 9S4 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled for the continuous high-speed skip
command G31P90 or the EGB skip command G31.8.
The settings of each bit have the following meaning:
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
The bits correspond to signals as follows:
Parameter High-speed skip signal
9S1 HDI0
9S2 HDI1
9S3 HDI2
9S4 HDI3
Period during which skip signal input is ignored for the continuous high-speed skip function and EGB
6220
axis skip function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] 8msec
[Valid data range] 3 to 127(× 8msec)
- 2277 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
This parameter specifies the period from when a skip signal is input to when the next skip
signal can be input for the continuous high-speed skip function and EGB axis skip
function. This parameter is used to ignore chattering in skip signals.
If a value that falls outside the valid range is specified, the setting is assumed to be 24
msec.
Example 1)
When bit 5 (CSE) of parameter No. 6201 is 0
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)
Skip signal
This signal is ignored.
Example 2)
When bit 5 (CSE) of parameter No. 6201 is 1
Signal ignoring period (parameter No. 6220)
High-speed skip
signals
These signals are ignored.
Signal
In a continuous high-speed skip, the high-speed skip signal is used. For details on the signal, see Section,
"High-Speed Skip Signal".
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS5068 FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90 No travel axis was specified. Two or more travel axes were
specified.
PS0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the
torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).
- The specified torque Q value in the torque limit switch
instruction is out of range. The torque Q range is 1 to 254.
- The high-speed continuous skip option is not present.
Note
NOTE
To use this function, the continuous high-speed skip, high-speed skip and custom
macro option is required.
- 2278 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
16.3.5 Multi-step Skip
Overview
The multi-step skip function stores the coordinate values when skip signals (four or eight signals when
normal skip signals are used or eight signals when high-speed skip signals are used) are input in the block
where G31P1 to G31P4 are specified, and skips the remaining movement. In the block where Q1 to Q4
are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals (four or eight signals, or eight signals
when high-speed skip signals are used) are input.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip
programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough machining to spark-out can be
performed automatically by applying a skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, fine-
machining, or spark-out operation is completed.
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 This function is included in the option "Grinding function A" and "Grinding
function B".
- Feedrate
Two types of feedrate can be selected for the multi-step skip block, using bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207.
(1) If parameter SFN (No.6207#2) is 0
Feedrate specified with address F (may be specified before or in the multi-step skip block).
(2) If parameter SFN (No.6207#2) is 1
Feedrate set for parameters Nos.6282 to 6285.
Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and automatic acceleration/deceleration are
disabled when a feedrate with the G31 command is the feedrate which is set for parameters Nos.6282 to
6285.
CAUTION
To increase the precision of the tool position when the skip signal is input,
feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled
in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate which is specified as a
feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
To enable these functions, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 to 1.
However, even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter
No.6207 is set to 1.
Signal
Skip signals SKIPP<Gn006.6>,SKIP<X0004.7>,SKIP2<X0004.2>,SKIP3<X0004.3>
SKIP4<X0004.4>,SKIP5<X0004.5>,SKIP6<X0004.6>,SKIP7<X0004.0>
SKIP8<X0004.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to 1 in
a command program block containing G31P1 (or G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is
stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at
the same time. Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or
G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated.
In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions) of the block are
completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
- 2279 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to select the signals to be enabled from four or
eight signals (eight signals when the high-speed skip signal is used). The eight skip
signals can correspond to the G codes on a one-to-one basis. One skip signal can also be
made applicable to multiple G codes. Conversely, multiple skip signals can be made
applicable to one G code.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to 1, the control unit functions as described below.
- When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip cutting, and the
skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control
unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the axis was supposed to
be moved in that block.
- When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the skip signal is
made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit stops dwell
operation, and cancels any remaining dwell time.
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in
detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the
measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation
(including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal
on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.
3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip
signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider
delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the
PMC side.
4 The G codes for skip cutting (G31P1, G31P2, G31P3, and G31P4)
are the same except for their correspondence with skip signals.
G31 and G31P1 are equivalent.
5 The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state.
So, if a skip signal continues to be 1, a skip condition is assumed to
be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell
operation is specified.
6 Address <X0004> can be allocated optionally to the X addresses
set in parameter No. 3012 and parameter No. 3019 when bit 2
(XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn006 SKIPP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 ESKIP ZAE XAE
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
- 2280 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3 #3 #3
X0011 #3 ESKIP ZAE XAE
SKIP #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3 #3 #3 #3
#3 ESKIP #3 #3 #3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP #3 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #3 #3 #3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2
X0013 #2 ESKIP ZAE XAE
SKIP #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2 #2
#2 ESKIP #2 #2 #2 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
#2 #2 #2 #2
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
WARNING
1 SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP (PMC axis
control) and measurement position arrival signal XAE and ZAE (tool length
automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (T series)
2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP
(PMC axis control) and measurement position arrival signal XAE, YAE, and ZAE
(tool length automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M series)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:
0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameters Nos. 3013 and 3014 are not set, the
deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0
of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set, the
skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
- 2281 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
WARNING
Please set an appropriate value to parameters ( Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, 3019 ) beforehand when you set 1 to this parameter.
If an input signal of the set address in parameters ( Nos. 3013,
3014, 3012, 3019 ) is used by another usage, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used X address.
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and tool offset
3019
write signals are assigned
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position
arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool
offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
- 2282 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SLS SK0 GSK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are “1”.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are “0”.
#5 SLS 0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals
are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are
input.
NOTE
The skip signals (SKIP and SKIP2 to SKIP8) are valid regardless of
the setting of this parameter. They can also be disabled using bit 4
(IGX) of parameter No. 6201.
If you want to use high-speed skip signals when the multi-step skip
function option is used, set this parameter to 1.
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
- 2283 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
CAUTION
1 When bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 0, feedrate
override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are
disabled in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate
which is specified as a feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
2 Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 1 (SFP)
of parameter No.6207 is set to 1. When the multi-step skip is used
and bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are similarly disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SKPXE IGX SEB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SEB When a skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on
while the skip function, the continuous high-speed skip function or the automatic tool
length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series) is used, the
accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal, high-speed skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes
on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.
#7 SKPXE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) Bit 0 (GSK)
Bit 7 (SKPXE) Skip Skip Multistage skip
of of
Parameter of parameter signal signal signals
parameter parameter
No .6201 SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
No. 6201 No. 6200
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
- 2284 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1
6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1
6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8
Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4)
and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip
function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Multi-step skip function
Command G31
Input G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G04
signal G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4
SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2
SKIP3/HDI2 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 DS3
SKIP4/HDI3 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 DS4
SKIP5 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 DS5
SKIP6 1S6 2S6 3S6 4S6 DS6
SKIP7 1S7 2S7 3S7 4S7 DS7
SKIP8 1S8 2S8 3S8 4S8 DS8
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI3 are high-speed skip signals. Do not specify the same
signal simultaneously for different paths.
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1, commands to be skipped can be
selected by setting the following parameter:
Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006.6>
Parameter Command skipped
When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G31P1,G04Q1
When bit 0 (2S1) of parameter No. 6203 is set to 1 G31P2,G04Q2
When bit 0 (3S1) of parameter No. 6204 is set to 1 G31P3,G04Q3
When bit 0 (4S1) of parameter No. 6205 is set to 1 G31P4,G04Q4
When bit 0 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04,G04Q1,G04Q2,G04Q3,G04Q4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN
[Input type] Parameter input
- 2285 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
[Data type] Bit path
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameters Nos. 6282 to 6285.
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)
6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)
6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of
group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the
PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by
address Q.
PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The address
P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The address
Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
Or, P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell commands
SIGNAL SELECTED (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed signal is selected in
different paths.
Note
NOTE
This function is disabled for the synchronous slave axis and enabled for axes not
related to composite control.
- 2286 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
16.3.6 Torque Limit Skip Function
Overview
When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is executed with the servo motor torque
limit*1 overridden, cutting feed similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the servo
motor torque reaches the torque limit (overridden servo motor torque limit) by pushing or the skip signal
(including the high-speed skip signal) is input during the movement, the remaining movement commands
are canceled and then the next block is executed. (The operation that executes the next block by canceling
the remaining movement command is called skip operation later.)
The servo motor torque limit can be overridden by:
(1) Executing the torque limit override command for the PMC window.
(2) Executing the address Q command in the same block in which G31 P99 (or G31 P98) exists.
*1
: The servo motor torque limit is automatically set according to the settings of the motor model. The
override is applied to the maximum torque of the servo motor.
In order to override the torque limit on the servo motor, set bit 0 (TQO) of parameter No. 6286 to 1.
Signal
Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL 8<Fn114>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached.
[Output cond.] Set to 1 when:
- The torque limit has been reached.
Set to 0 when:
- The torque limit has not been reached.
Indicates the signal for each axis. The value at the end of a signal name indicates the
number of each control axis.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQA TQI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time/move-time error is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2287 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:
0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameters Nos. 3013 and 3014 are not set, the
deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0
of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set, the
skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
WARNING
Please set an appropriate value to parameters ( Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, 3019 ) beforehand when you set 1 to this parameter.
If an input signal of the set address in parameters ( Nos. 3013,
3014, 3012, 3019 ) is used by another usage, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used X address.
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
- 2288 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signal are
3019
assigned
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and measurement
position arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)) are
to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
WARNING
If you used the set address in this parameter by another usage, it
may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used X address.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are “1”.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are “0”.
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
- 2289 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
CAUTION
1 When bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 0, feedrate
override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are
disabled in moving by the skip function regardless of the feedrate
which is specified as a feed per minute or a feed per rotation.
2 Even if bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled when bit 1 (SFP)
of parameter No.6207 is set to 1. When the multi-step skip is used
and bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207 is set to 1, dry run and
automatic acceleration/deceleration are similarly disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SKPXE IGX TSE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a
system variable (#5061 to #5080 (#100151 to #100182 for a system having more than 20
axes)) is:
0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the
servo system.
1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.
Position during skip operation
Current position of CNC
Machine position Error amount
Origin of the coordinate system Stop point
Position in consideration of delay
Position without consideration of delay
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.
#7 SKPXE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
- 2290 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) Bit 0 (GSK)
Bit 7 (SKPXE) Skip Skip Multistage skip
of of
Parameter of parameter signal signal signals
parameter parameter
No .6201 SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
No. 6201 No. 6200
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 0 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN SFP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameters Nos. 6282 to 6285.
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
- 2291 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of parameters Nos. 6282 to 6285.
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)
6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)
6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 2msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time.
If G31P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to “1”.
If G31P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to “1”.
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of
time set in this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6286 TQO
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 TQO The torque limit override function is:
0: Disabled. (Override of 100%)
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Before the torque limit skip function can be used, this parameter
must be set to 1.
6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
- 2292 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
[Valid data range] 0 to 327670
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit
skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation
limit, the alarm SV0004, “EXCESS ERROR (G31)” is issued and an immediate stop
takes place.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of
group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in
the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
override by address Q.
PS0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the
torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).
- The specified torque Q value in the torque limit switch
instruction is out of range. The torque Q range is 1 to 254.
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip
command operation exceeded the limit value of the parameter No.
6287.
Note
NOTE
This function is disabled for the synchronous slave axis and enabled for axes not
related to composite control.
- 2293 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
16.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT
T
16.4.1 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series)
T
Overview
This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece dimension manually cut and
measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or cross direction
manually. When the position record signal is turned “1” (prepare a button on the machine operator’s
panel) on completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value of X axis(X axis of the basic three
axes) and Z axis(Z axis of the basic three axes) at that time is recorded in the CNC. Then, withdraw the
tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter or the radius if the cutting was on the longitudinal
direction or measure the distance from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference
face is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered on the offset value display screen, NC inputs
the difference between the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset
value of the offset number. If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an
offset value is entered but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset value can be set without using the
position record signal. The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly
inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the coordinate system planned in the
program does not match with the coordinate system actually set. The procedures are the same as those for
direct input for offset, except a difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.
NOTE
Input the measured value according to diameter specification/radius specification
(parameter DIAx (No.1006#3)).
Signal
Position record signal PRC <Gn040.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal is prepared for the function of direct input of tool offset value measured.
It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the tool for tentative
cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece, input the measured value by the
specified manual operation. The difference is then stored as the specified tool
compensation value.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the signal turns to
“1”.
CAUTION
To use this signal, set bit 2 (PRC) of parameter No. 5005 to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn040 PRC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 PRC
- 2294 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 PRC For direct input of a tool offset value or workpiece coordinate system shift amount:
0: The position record signal PRC <Gn040.6> is not used.
1: The position record signal PRC <Gn040.6> is used.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Setting and displaying data
16.4.2 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series)
T
Overview
When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be automatically settable in the tool offset
memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The
workpiece coordinate system shift amount can also be automatically set.
Explanation
- Touch sensor
Either of the following two cases may be selected depending on parameter setting.
1) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 0
The touch sensor has two direction–specific contact faces for each axis, thus outputting four signals
(+MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT1, and –MIT2) when contact is detected.
2) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1
A touch sensor based on one contact input outputs one signal (+MIT1) when the one–contact input
detects contact. So, which of directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, and
feeding in the corresponding axis direction is disabled.
X axis －contact face
(-MIT1)
Z axis＋contact face Z axis －contact face
(+MIT2) (-MIT2)
+X
X axis ＋contact face
+Z (+MIT1)
Fig. 16.4.2 (a) Touch Sensor
- Setting tool offset value
Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference position. In advance, set the
distance from this point to the measuring position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value,
using parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be measured, and bring it to
touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal). The
mechanical coordinate value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at the
mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set the difference between this value and
the reference value (parameter setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset value.
The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0.
- 2295 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
(Tool offset value to be set)
= (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become 1) – (Reference
value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal)
The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of determining the measuring reference
position.
- If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one-contact input
If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one–contact input (the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of parameter
No. 5004) is 1), when a contact detected signal (tool compensation amount write signal +MIT1) is
received from the touch sensor, which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically
determined according to several pulses stored as a result of the axis movement that was made before the
signal reception. So the number of interpolation cycles related to the stored pulses must previously be set
in parameter No. 5021.Once which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically
determined, the corresponding axis direction is subjected to axis interlock to stop feeding, and the
obtained tool compensation amount is stored in tool compensation memory. If the directions of stored
pulses are not unified, or no pulse has been stored, for example, because the servo power has been shut
off (servo off) or no axis movement occurred, an alarm (PS5195) is issued. A PS alarm is issued also if
the tool moves along two axes (X–axis and Z–axis) simultaneously; move the tool along one axis at a
time. If a PS alarm is issued, no tool compensation amount will be set up, resulting in the four directions
(two axes) being subjected to interlock.
NOTE
1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in the manual mode while the
GOSQM <Gn039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal is “1”.
Stored pulses are lost if:
a. The manual mode is exited,
b. The GOSQM <Gn039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select)
signal becomes 0,
c. A contact detected signal is received from the touch sensor, resulting in a tool
compensation amount being set or an alarm PS5195 being issued,
d. The servo power becomes off (resulting in the stored pulses for the related
axis being lost), or
e. Axis movement occurs (resulting in the stored pulses for the other axis being
lost).
2 Axis interlock that has occurred for the axis direction identified by
parameter–based automatic decision and two–axis, four–direction interlock that
has occurred because of a PS alarm being issued are canceled when the
manual mode is exited or the GOSQM <Gn039.7> (tool compensation mount
write mode select) signal becomes 0.
A reset does not cancel interlock.
- Determination of the axis movement direction in four-contact input
Set bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 to 0 and bit 4 (TSD) of parameter No. 5009 to 1 to enable the input
signals from the touch sensor and the movement direction of an axis to be monitored during measurement
in the tool compensation write mode.
When the measurement is determined to be invalid, the moving axis is interlocked and an alarm PS5195
occurs.
- 2296 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
- Conditions under which measurement is determined to be invalid
The movement direction of an axis and the tool compensation write signals (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1,
-MIT2) are monitored in the tool compensation write mode (GOQSM<Gn039.7>=1). In the
following case, the operation is determined to be invalid, the axis is interlocked, and an alarm
PS5195 occurs.
(1) A tool compensation write signal whose direction did not match the axis was input during
measurement.
(2) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input while the X- and Z-axes moved together.
(3) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input without the axis being moved.
(4) The movement direction of the axis was not constant when the movement direction of the axis
was determined (*1).
(*1) When the axis moves in one direction of one axis by the compensation cycle count set in
parameter No. 5021, the axis is assumed to move in the direction.
X axis - contact face
( -MIT1 )
Z axis + contact Z axis - contact face
face ( -MIT2 )
( +MIT2 )
Valid operation
+x X axis + contact face
( +MIT1 )
+z
Invalid operation (1) Invalid operation (2)
Fig. 16.4.2 (b) Examples of operations determined to be invalid
- Interlock applied when measurement is invalid
When measurement is determined to be invalid, movement only in the direction opposite to the
previous movement direction is allowed. That is, the directions other than the direction opposite to
the previous movement direction are interlocked.
Examples of interlock
(1) When a tool compensation write signal other than Z-axis/contact surface (-MIT2) is input
during movement in the minus direction of the Z-axis, the minus direction of the Z-axis and the
plus and minus directions of the X-axis are interlocked.
(2) When any of tool compensation write signals is input during movement in the plus direction of
the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis, the plus directions of the X-axis and the minus
direction of the Z-axis are interlocked.
(3) When any of tool compensation write signals is input without axis movement, the four
directions of the two axes are interlocked.
- 2297 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
+X
-Z
+Z
Z axis - contact face
( -MIT2 )
: Movable
-X
+x
: Interlock
(Unmovable)
+z
Fig. 16.4.2 (c) Interlock direction in example (1)
The release interlock applied because measurement is determined to be invalid, keep the tool away from
the touch sensor (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, -MIT2 = 0) and reset the CNC. If the tool is not kept away
from the touch sensor, resetting the CNC does not release interlock.
In conditions (3) and (4) in which measurement is determined to be invalid, no axis can be moved
because the four directions of the two axes are interlocked. In such a case, cancel the tool compensation
write mode and reset the CNC to release the interlock. To cancel the tool compensation write mode, set
the tool compensation write mode signal GOQSM <Gn039.7> is to “0” or select the MDI mode, MEM
mode, or EDIT mode.
A reset releases interlock and an alarm. Even if another tool compensation write signal (+MIT1, +MIT2,
-MIT1, or -MIT2) is input before the interlock or alarm is released, the signal is ignored.
- For direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe
When the tool compensation number specification signal ONSC is to “0”, parameter No. 5053 is used to
specify for which spindle (1 or 2) tool compensation numbers (tool compensation amount memory) are to
be used.
(Example)
When there are 32 tool compensation pairs
Parameter No. 5053
Tool compensation number
8 10
Spindle 1 1 to 8 1 to 10
Spindle 2 9 to 32 11 to 32
NOTE
If parameter No. 5053 for grouping tool compensation numbers is 0 or greater than the
maximum allowable number of tool compensation sets, grouping is carried out as listed
below.
Number of tool compensation pairs 32 pairs 64 pairs 99 pairs 200 pairs
Spindle 1 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 49 1 to 100
Spindle 2 17 to 32 33 to 64 50 to 98 101 to 200
Number of tool compensation pairs 400 pairs 499 pairs 999 pairs
Spindle 1 1 to 200 1 to 249 1 to 499
Spindle 2 201 to 400 250 to 498 500 to 998
When tool compensation number specification signal ONSC is 1, the tool compensation amount memory
is shared between spindle 1 and spindle 2 regardless of the setting of parameter No. 5053. Spindle
measurement selection signal S2TLS <Gn040.5> is used only to select which spindle is measured; any
tool compensation number within the number of tool compensation pairs can be selected for each spindle.
- 2298 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
(Example)
When the following settings are made, the tool compensation number to be selected is shown in the
table below.
Number of tool compensation pairs is 32.
Bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005 = 1:
The tool compensation number is set by signal input from the PMC.
Parameter No. 5053 = 10:
Tool compensation number shift amount
Tool offset number selection signals OFN0 to OFN9=2:
A tool compensation number of 3 is specified.
Tool compensation number
Spindle measurement select signal Tool compensation
specification signal
S2TLS number to be selected
ONSC
0 0 3
0 1 13
1 0 3
1 1 3
Example 1
The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can
be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference
position (machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the distances Xp, Zp, Xm,
Zm, from the measuring reference position to the contact faces of the sensor in parameters.
(0,0) Measuring reference
OFSx position (reference tool
Xm nose position at the
mechanical reference
X axis –contact face (0,0) position)
Xt
Xp
Measuring tool nose
Z axis –contact face position at the
OFSz mechanical reference
Zt position
+X
Zm
+Z Zp
Xp: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5015)
Xm: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5016)
Zp: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5017)
Zm: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5018)
Xt: X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(X-axis machine coordinate value)
Zt: Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(Z-axis machine coordinate value)
(when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis (–) contact face and Z-axis (–) contact face in the above figure)
OFSx: Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm
OFSz: Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
Fig. 16.4.2 (d) When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position
- 2299 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Example 2
The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the Fig.
16.4.2 (e). The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at
the mechanical reference point can be set as the tool offset value of the measuring tool, by setting the
distances from the imaginary zero point to the respective contact faces in parameters.
Machine zero
Zt point
OFSZ
Xt (0,0)
+X Measuring tool nose
position at the mechanical
reference position
+Z
Zm Xm OFSx
Zp
Xp
Measuring reference position
(Imaginary zero point)
Fig. 16.4.2 (e) When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position
- Setting the workpiece coordinate system shift amount
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis can be set as follows: Bring the tool to
touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the
coordinate system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value (the distance from the
measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero point) to the
workpiece end face).The result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value.
[Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set (EXOFSz) ]
= [Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool (OFSz)] – [Z axis machine coordinate
value(Zt)]
Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with the workpiece end face (the contact
point of the sensor) specified as the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the
Z-axis.
- If the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe is used
For the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe, the workpiece coordinate shift
amount for the Z–axis is automatically set in any of workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 for
workpiece coordinate system memory.
[Z–axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set up]
= –([corresponding Z–axis tool geometry compensation amount] – [Z–axis machine coordinate
value])
Select the desired workpiece coordinate systems from G54 to G59 manually or automatically, using
the 2AT parameter (bit 1 of No. 5051).
- 2AT = 0 (manual selection)
Set the cursor to the desired workpiece coordinate system G54 to G59
by operating the MDI (such as page and cursor keys).
- 2300 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
It is inhibited to select an external workpiece coordinate system offset (EXT). If
the cursor is set to it, the warning message ”Write inhibited” is displayed when
the workpiece coordinate system shift write amount signal becomes 1.
- 2AT = 1 (automatic selection)
Previously set any of workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 in parameter No. 5054 for
spindle 1 and parameter No. 5055 for spindle 2. When the workpiece coordinate system shift
amount write mode is entered, the cursor is set to any of workpiece coordinate systems G54 to
G59.
NOTE
If 0 or a value out of the valid data range is set in parameter No. 5053 or 5054,
workpiece coordinate systems G54 and G57 are set up, respectively, for
spindles 1 and 2.
Also select a tool compensation number to be used in measurement manually or automatically, using
the bit5 (QNI) of parameter No.5005.
- QNI = 0 (manual selection)
Specify the desired tool compensation number in parameter No. 5020.
- QNI = 1 (automatic selection)
The cursor is set to the desired tool compensation number, using the tool compensation number
input signal.
For spindle 1, the cursor is set to a tool compensation number selected by the input signal.
For spindle 2, the cursor is set to the sum of the value specified in parameter No. 5053 and the
tool compensation number selected by the input signal is used.
Machine
Zt zero point
+X
+Z OFSz
-EXOFSz (0,0) Measuring tool nose
position at the
Workpiece coordinate OFSx mechanical machine
System zero point position
(programmed zero point)
EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set
OFSz : Tool geometry offset value
Zt : Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)
Fig. 16.4.2 (f) Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount
To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system from the workpiece end face,
such as by adding a cutting allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate system shift
amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from the programmed zero point to the workpiece end
face with a sign, the numeric value input is added to the preset amount.
- 2301 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
+X
EXOFSz(NEW)
Cutting allowance
W EXOFSz(OLD)
Workpiece coordinate system
zero point
(programmed zero point)
+Z
Imaginary zero point
EXOFSz(OLD) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the function of input
of tool offset value measured B
W : Cutting allowance (incremental input value)
EXOFSz(NEW) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the cutting allowance
Fig. 16.4.2 (g) Setting of cutting allowance
- Basic procedure to set tool offset value
To use the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe, first specify the spindle to be
measured, using the S2TLS (spindle measurement select) signal.
(1) Execute manual reference position return.
By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate system is established.
The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system.
(2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set the tool compensation value
write mode select signal GOQSM to 1. The display is automatically changed to the tool offset screen
(geometry), and the “OFST” indicator starts blinking in the status indication area at the bottom of
the screen, which indicates that the tool compensation value writing mode is ready. When the direct
input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or S2MES (spindle
under measurement) signal, whichever is applicable, becomes 1.
NOTE
After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)
signal until the GOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(3) Select a tool to be measured.
(4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired to be set, move the cursor to
the desired offset number using the page key and cursor key.
The cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number desired to be set automatically by the
tool offset number input signals (when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005=1).
In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool compensation screen using page
keys or cursor keys.
(5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation.
(6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual handle feed.
Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool compensation value writing
signals to input to be CNC.
The following tool compensation amount write signals are set up according to the setting of the TS1
parameter (bit 3 of No. 5004).
When the parameter is 0: +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2
When the parameter is 1: +MIT1 only
The tool compensation value writing signal is set to 1, and then :
i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feed is stopped.
ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool geometry offset value) which
corresponds to the offset number shown by the cursor is set up.
(7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset values are set by operations (5) and (6).
(8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for all necessary tools.
(9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to 0.
- 2302 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light goes off.
When the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or S2MES
(spindle under measurement) signal for the spindle being measured becomes 0.
- Basic procedure to set workpiece coordinate shift value
To use the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe, first specify the spindle to be
measured, using the S2TLS (spindle measurement select) signal.
(1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance.
(2) Execute manual reference position return.
By executing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate system is established.
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount is computed based on the machine coordinate system
of the tool.
(3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode select signal WOQSM <Gn039.6>
to 1.
The display automatically switches to the workpiece shifting screen, the “WFST” indicator starts
blinking at the status indicator area in the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the workpiece
coordinate system shift amount writing mode is ready.
When the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe is in use, the workpiece
coordinate system screen is selected, and the S1MES or S2MES (spindle under measurement) signal,
whichever is applicable, becomes 1.
NOTE
After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)
signal until the WOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(4) Select a tool to be measured.
(5) Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for measurement, shall be set in the
parameter No. 5020 in advance.
The tool offset number can also be set automatically by setting the tool offset number input signal
(with bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005=1).
(6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece.
(7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece using manual handle feed.
When the tool edge contacts the end face of the workpiece, input the workpiece coordinate system
shift amount signal WOSET.
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount on the Z–axis is automatically set.
(8) Release the tool.
(9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select signal WOQSM to 0.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator light goes off.
When the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or
S2MES (spindle under measurement) signal, whichever is applicable, becomes 0.
- Switching from a customized user screen to the measurement screen
When the MANUAL GUIDE i screen or a user screen customized by C Language Executor or macro
executor is displayed, if tool compensation amount write mode select signal GOQSM or workpiece
coordinate system shift amount write mode signal WOQSM is set to 1, a shift to the measurement screen
is made automatically.
When a user screen customized by C Language Executor is assigned as the tool geometry compensation
screen or workpiece shift screen, turning on the measurement mode switches to the user screen, not to the
CNC screen.
Limitation
This function cannot be used with the following functions.
• Composite control
- 2303 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
• Mirror image
• Programmable mirror image
• Mirror image for double turret
Signal
Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM <Gn039.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select the mode for writing tool compensation
[Operation] When this signal is turned 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing tool
compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen on the
display to the tool geometry compensation screen and blinks the “OFST” status display at
the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing
tool compensation.
Tool offset write signals
(Path 1) +MIT1#1, +MIT2#1<X0004.2, X0004.4> -MIT1#1, -MIT2#1<X0004.3, X0004.5>
(Path 2) +MIT1#2, +MIT2#2<X0013.2, X0013.4>-MIT1#2, -MIT2#2<X0013.3, X0013.5>
(Path 3) +MIT1#3, +MIT2#3<X0011.2, X0011.4>-MIT1#3, -MIT2#3<X0011.3, X0011.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is set to 1, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry
compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool
compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned 1 during tool offset write mode, the control unit operates as
follows:
- Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation.
If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 0
+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along
the X-axis.
–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along
the X-axis.
+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along
the Z-axis.
–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along
the Z-axis.
If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1
+MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be
subjected to interlock.
–MIT1 : Not used
+MIT2 : Not used
–MIT2 : Not used
- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned
1, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry
compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets
the result in tool compensation memory.
NOTE
1 This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in each axis
direction.
2 This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.
5009 is 0.
- 2304 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
3 In case of bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008=1, the address
assigned by parameter No. 3019 is used
Tool offset write signals
+MIT1to +MIT2 <Gn132.0 to Gn132.1>, -MIT1 to-MIT2 <Gn134.0 to Gn134.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is set to 1, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry
compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool
compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation.
When bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is 0 and the X-axis is assumed to be the
first axis and the Z-axis to be the second axis
+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along
the X-axis.
–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along
the X-axis.
+MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along
the Z-axis.
–MIT2 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along
the Z-axis.
If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1
+MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be
subjected to interlock.
–MIT1 : Not used
+MIT2 : Not used
–MIT2 : Not used
- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned
1, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry
compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets
the result in tool compensation memory.
NOTE
This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.
5009 is 1.
Tool offset number select signals
FN0 to OFN5, OFN6 to OFN9 <Gn039.0 to Gn039.5, Gn040.0 to Gn040.3>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select the tool offset number.
[Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically
positioned on the tool geometry compensation number selected by these signals.
A tool offset number is specified by a 10–bit binary number. Numbers 0 to 998
correspond to the compensation number 1 to 999.
NOTE
This signal is available only when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No.
5005 =1.
- 2305 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal
WOQSM <Gn039.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Select the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal is turned to 1 in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing the shift
amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected. The control unit then
automatically switches the screen displayed to the WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the
“OFST” status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been
changed to the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
However, this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values is
selected.
Spindle measurement select signal S2TLS <Gn040.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] For the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe, a spindle is selected
for measurement. If the signal is 0, spindle 1 is selected. If it is 1, spindle 2 is selected.
If spindle 2 is to be selected for measurement, the tool compensation amount write mode
signal and the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode signal as well as the
spindle measurement select signal must be set to 1.
[Operation] If the signal is 0, spindle 1 is selected. If it is 1, spindle 2 is selected.
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET <Gn040.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal turns to 1 in the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece
coordinate system, it triggers the automatic calculation and setting of the shift amount for
the workpiece coordinate system.
Tool compensation number specification signal ONSC <Gn547.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] When bit 5 (QNI) of parameter No. 5005 is 1 in 2-spindle lathe tool compensation
amount measurement value direct input B, the tool compensation number specified by
tool compensation amount select signals OFN0 to OFN9 is selected as is, regardless of
spindle measurement select signal S2TLS and the setting of parameter No. 5053.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the tool compensation number specified by tool
compensation amount select signals OFN0 to OFN9 is selected as is, regardless of spindle
measurement select signal S2TLS and the setting of parameter No. 5053.
Spindle 1 under measurement signal S1MES <Fn062.3>
Spindle 2 under measurement signal S2MES <Fn062.4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] For the direct input of offset value measured B for two-spindle lathe, it is indicated which
spindle, 1 or 2, is under measurement.
[Operation] These signals check which head is being measured in the tool compensation amount write
mode or workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode according to the S2TLS
(spindle measurement select) signal.
If spindle 1 is selected, S1MES = 1 and S2MES = 0. If spindle 2 is selected, S1MES = 0
and S2MES = 1.
- 2306 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Signal address
(Path 1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
(Path 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2 #2
X0013 -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
#2 #2 #2 #2
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
(Path 3)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3 #3 #3 #3
X0011 -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
#3 #3 #3 #3
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
WARNING
Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, MIT1,+MIT2, –MIT2 and
skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multi–step skip), be careful when using these two
signal types.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn040 WOSET S2TLS OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn132 +MIT2 +MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn134 -MIT2 -MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn547 ONSC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn062 S2MES S1MES
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
#3 DIT The interlock signal for each axis direction is:
0: Valid.
1: Invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
- 2307 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:
0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, and 3019. If parameters Nos. 3013 and 3014 are not set, the
deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned to bit 0
of <X0000>. If parameters Nos. 3012 and 3019 are not set, the
skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the measurement
position arrival signal, the manual feed interlock signal for each axis
direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to <X0000>.
WARNING
Please set an appropriate value to parameters (Nos. 3013, 3014,
3012, 3019) beforehand when you set 1 to this parameter.
If an input signal of the set address in parameters (Nos. 3013,
3014, 3012, 3019) is used by another usage, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used X address.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signal, and tool offset
3019
write signals are assigned
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to 727
Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, measurement position
arrival signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE (M series) or XAE and ZAE (T series)), and tool
offset write signals (±MIT1 and ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
Example 1. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 6
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0006 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series)
- 2308 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
Example 2. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 5
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable
X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>, <X0400 to X0527>,
<X0600 to X0727>
2 When this parameter is 0, an input signal from address X0 is used.
WARNING
If an input signal of the set address in this parameter is used by
another usage, it may cause an unexpected machine behavior. Be
careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the used X
address.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 TS1
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for direct input of offset value
measured B:
0: Four-contact input is used.
1: One-contact input is used.
NOTE
For the machining center system, set TS1 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 TLE QNI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 QNI With the tool length measurement function or the function for direct input of offset value
measured B, a tool compensation number is selected by:
0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection based on cursor
operation).
1: Signal input from the PMC.
- 2309 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
#6 TLE The "direct input of offset value measured B" function updates the offset value in offset
write mode:
0: Constantly.
1: During axis movement.
Axis movement assumes a positional deviation other than 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5009 TSD GSC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value measured B is used, an offset write
input signal is input from:
0: Machine side
1: PMC side
When the interlock function for each axis direction is enabled (when bit 3 (DIT) of
parameter No. 3003 is set to 0), switching can also be made between input from the
machine side and input from PMC side for the interlock function for each axis direction.
#4 TSD In the function for direct input of offset value measured B, the movement direction
determination specifications:
0: Do not apply.
1: Apply.
This parameter is valid when four-contact input is used (bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.
5004 is set to 0).
5015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P)
5016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M)
5017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P)
5018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1M)
5056 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 (X2P)
5057 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 (X2M)
5058 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 (Z2P)
5059 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 (Z2M)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
This parameter is related to the function for direct input of offset value measured B.
Set the distance (signed) from a measurement reference position to each contact surface
of a sensor. For a diameter specification axis, set a diameter value.
When arbitrary angular axis control is performed, set the distance in the Cartesian
coordinate system.
- 2310 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
NOTE
Parameters Nos. 5056 to 5059 are valid when bit 0 (2NR) of
parameter No. 5051 is set to 1.
○Measurement
reference
position
X1m X-axis - contact surface
↓
X1p
←Z-axis + contact surface
Z-axis - contact surface
+X Z1m
↑
X-axis + contact surface
Z1p
+Z
Measuremenet
reference
position
X-axis − contact surface X2m
↓
X2p
← Z-axis + contact
Z-axis − contact surface → surface
+X Z2m
↑
X-axis + contact surface
Z2p
+Z
5020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
Set a tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B
(when a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set). (Set the tool offset number
corresponding to a tool under measurement beforehand.) This parameter is valid when
automatic tool offset number selection is not performed (when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter
No. 5005 is set to 0).
- 2311 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
5021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to touch the touch sensor
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
When a touch sensor with one contact signal input is used for the "direct input of offset
value measured B" function or when the movement direction determination specification
is enabled, set the number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to
touch the touch sensor by manual operation. When 0 is set, the specification of the
maximum value 8 is assumed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 or bit
4 (TSD) of parameter No. 5009 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5051 2AT 2NR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 2NR When the direct input of offset value measured B for 2 spindle lathe is used:
0: One touch sensor is used.
1: Two touch sensors are used.
#1 2AT When a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set in the workpiece coordinate
system memory with the direct input of offset value measured B for 2 spindle lathe:
0: A setting is made at the current cursor position.
1: An automatic selection is made.
Tool compensation number shift amount for the direct input of offset value measured B for 2 spindle
5053
lathe
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
When the direct input of offset value measured B for 2 spindle lathe is used, tool
compensation numbers used to set measured tool compensation values are divided into
two groups, one for spindle 1 and the other for spindle 2.
[Example] When there are 32 tool offset pairs
Setting
8 10
Spindle 1 1 to 8 1 to 10
Spindle 2 9 to 32 11 to 32
When this parameter is set to 0 or a value greater than the maximum number of tool offset
pairs, the table below is applied.
Number of tool offset pairs 32 pairs 64 pairs 99 pairs 200 pairs 400 pairs 499 pairs 999 pairs
Spindle 1 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 49 1 to 100 1 to 200 1 to 249 1 to 499
Spindle 2 17 to 32 33 to 64 50 to 98 101 to 200 201 to 400 250 to 498 500 to 998
- 2312 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
5054 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1
5055 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 54 to 59
Specify a workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 for which a workpiece
coordinate system shift amount is set. When parameter No. 5054 or No. 5055 is set to 0
or a value beyond the valid data range, the specification of 54 is assumed for the
workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1, or the specification of 57 is assumed
for the workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2.
NOTE
These parameters are valid when bit 1 (2AT) of parameter No.
5051 is set to 1.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
PS5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement value direct
JUDGED input B function.
[For 1-contact input]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis).
[For the movement direction discrimination specification]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis).
3. The direction indicated by the tool compensation write signal does not
match the movement direction of the axis.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) Setting and displaying data
16.4.3 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value
Measured B" (T Series)
T
Overview
This function is provided by the "direct input of offset value measured B" function to prevent an invalid
offset value from being set even when the input signal from a touch sensor chatters due to mechanical
vibration.
- 2313 -
16.MEASUREMENT B-64603EN-1/01
Explanation
If the "direct input of offset value measured B" function encounters a chattering input signal from a touch
sensor, for example, due to mechanical vibration, the same signal input later can be ignored. Once an
offset value is measured with a signal from the touch sensor, any signal input that follows is rejected until
movement over at least the distance set by parameter No. 5019 later is specified. Signals are ignored if
input.
Assuming that an offset value is measured correctly at point A in Fig. 16.4.3 (a), even when movement
from A to B is specified, measurement at point C is invalid and ignored as the travel distance is smaller
than the setting of parameter No. 5019.
Touch
Next m easureme nt is ignored unless travel
sensor distance after measurement exceeds the setting
of parameter No. 5019.
Touch
sensor
Setting of parameter No. 5019
Touch
sensor
Fig. 16.4.3 (a) Chattering prevention 1
- 2314 -
B-64603EN-1/01 16.MEASUREMENT
When movement from A to D is specified, measurement at point E is valid and an offset value is
measured as the travel distance is larger than the setting of parameter No. 5019.
Touch
Next measurement is en abled when travel
sensor distance after measurem ent exceeds the
setting of parameter No. 5019.
Touch
sensor
Setting of parameter No. 5019
Touch
sensor
Fig. 16.4.3 (b) Chattering prevention 2
Parameter
5019 Chattering preventive distance of "direct input of offset value measured B"
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Unit of data] Detection
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
Once a signal is input from a touch sensor, any signal input from the touch sensor is
ignored until movement over at least the distance set by this parameter is specified. If the
setting is 0, this function is disabled and any input from the touch sensor is always
accepted. Note that changing the setting of this parameter cancels the input signal
ignoring status.
Caution
CAUTION
1 This function is available to both of tool offset value setting and workpiece
coordinate shift amount setting.
2 The function is valid whether the contact detection type of the touch sensor is
four-contact or one-contact.
- 2315 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Chapter 17, "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
17.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................2316
17.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................2415
17.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT......................................................2428
17.4 EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT
SHIFT..............................................................................................................................................2431
17.5 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH.........................................................................2433
17.6 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT..............................................................................................................2437
17.7 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL.......................................................................................................2443
17.8 PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE .......................................................................................2450
17.9 DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC ................................................................2458
17.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL
17.1.1 PMC Axis Control
Overview
The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. An axis can be controlled by
signals alone without using an NC program. For example, by specifying an amount of travel, feedrate,
and so forth from the PMC, a movement can be made along an axis independently of other axes operated
under CNC control. This enables the control of turrets, pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices
using any given axes of the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input signal provided for that particular
axis.
Table17.1.1 (a) Commands that can be executed by PMC axis control
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed - feed per minute
Cutting feed - feed per revolution
Skip - feed per minute
Dwell
Reference position return
Continuous feed
1st to 4th reference position return
External pulse synchronization - Position code
External pulse synchronization - 1st to 3rd manual handle
Feedrate control
Torque control
Auxiliary function, Auxiliary function 2, Auxiliary function 3
Selection of the machine coordinate system
Cutting feed - sec/block
Explanation
Under PMC axis control, various types of control are exercised using signals.
To allow the command operations indicated in Table17.1.1 (a), maximum 16 groups of input/output
signals are available. The groups are named group 1, group 2, ..., group 15, and group 16. (The number of
available groups depends on the number of NC path.)
- 2316 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Each of these groups of input/output signals used with PMC axis control serves as the unit of PMC axis
control. Which axis is to be controlled by each group must be set in parameter No. 8010 beforehand.
One group may be able to be assigned to multiple axes so that the same operation can be performed on
the multiple axes. (Supplement 2)
By specifying multiple groups at the same time, multiple axes can be controlled independently.
(Supplement 3)
PMC CNC
DI / DO
α axis control
Group 1 command Group 1
β axis control
Group 2 command Group 2
γ axis control
Group 3 command Group 3 δ axis control
Group 4 command Group 4 ε axis control
Group 5 command Group 5 η axis control
θ axis control
: :
ι axis control
Gr oup 15 Group 15
κ axis control
Gr oup 16 Group 16
λ axis control
(Supplement 1) The relationships betwee n groups and a xes are set in parameter No. 8010.
(Supplement 2) Multiple axes can be specified as with group 3.
(Supplement 3) Group 1 and group 2 can be specified independentl y.
Fig.17.1.1 (a) Concept of PMC axis control
- Signals
Three types of signals are used with PMC control:
Group-by-group signals are assigned to each group.
Axis-by-axis signals are assigned to each axis.
Path-by-path signals are assigned to each path.
- Relationships between groups and axes (group-by-group signals)
Group-by-group signal addresses are allocated in the signal area of each path. (See Table 17.1.1 (b).)
Note, however, that PMC axis control and multi-path control are independent of each other.
NOTE
The number of available groups depends on the number of NC path.
In general, groups equal to 4 times the number of NC path are available.
Table 17.1.1 (b) Allocation of group-by-group signals
Group-by-group signal Input signal (G) address Output signal (F) address
Group 1 G0142 to G0149, G0150.5, G0151 F0130 to F0132, F0142
Group 2 G0154 to G0161, G0162.5, G0163 F0133 to F0135, F0145
Group 3 G0166 to G0173, G0174.5, G0175 F0136 to F0138, F0148
Group 4 G0178 to G0185, G0186.5, G0187 F0139 to F0141, F0151
- 2317 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Group-by-group signal Input signal (G) address Output signal (F) address
Group 5 G1142 to G1149, G1150.5, G1151 F1130 to F1132, F1142
Group 6 G1154 to G1161, G1162.5, G1163 F1133 to F1135, F1145
Group 7 G1166 to G1173, G1174.5, G1175 F1136 to F1138, F1148
Group 8 G1178 to G1185, G1186.5, G1187 F1139 to F1141, F1151
Group 9 G2142 to G2149, G2150.5, G2151 F2130 to F2132, F2142
Group 10 G2154 to G2161, G2162.5, G2163 F2133 to F2135, F2145
Group 11 G2166 to G2173, G2174.5, G2175 F2136 to F2138, F2148
Group 12 G2178 to G2185, G2186.5, G2187 F2139 to F2141, F2151
Group 13 G3142 to G3149, G3150.5, G3151 F3130 to F3132, F3142
Group 14 G3154 to G3161, G3162.5, G3163 F3133 to F3135, F3145
Group 15 G3166 to G3173, G3174.5, G3175 F3136 to F3138, F3148
Group 16 G3178 to G3185, G3186.5, G3187 F3139 to F3141, F3151
The notation of group-by-group signals is described below.
For example, the group-by-group signals include the axis control command read signal EBUF (described
later). This signal is represented as:
EBUFg#p
A group number is represented by "p" and "g".
"g" is replaced with A, B, C, or D, and A = 1, B = 2, C=3, and D = 4 are assumed.
"p" is replaced with a number from 1 to 4.
A group number is related with "p" and "g" as follows:
Group number = g+(p-1)×4
EBUFA#1 represents group 1 (1+(1-1)×4).
EBUFB#2 represents group 6 (2+(2-1)×4).
EBUFC#3 represents group 11 (3+(3-1)×4).
EBUFD#4 represents group 16 (4+(4-1)×4).
Note, however, that a signal named EBUFg#p does not actually exist.
In the text, signal names such as "EBUFA", "EBUFB", "EBUFC", "EBUFD", and "EBUFg" are used.
Unless otherwise noted, these signal names are the abbreviations of "EBUFA#1" for group 1,
"EBUFB#1" for group 2, "EBUFC#1" for group 3, "EBUFD#1" for group 4, and "EBUFg#1 to
EBUFg#4" for general EBUF signals, respectively.
When assigning multiple axes to one group, set parameter No. 8010 so that the axes belong to the same
path. A setting in which the assigned axes do not belong to the same path is erroneous (see "Example of
incorrect relationships between groups and axes"). (Fig. 17.1.1 (c))
In Fig. 17.1.1 (b) , the first and second axes specified with group 1 belong to the same path (path 1), and
the third and fourth axes specified with group 2 belong to the same path (path 2), so that operation is
performed correctly.
PMC CNC
DI / DO
First axis control
Path 1
Group 1 command Group 1
Second axis control
Group 2 command Group 2
Third axis control
Path 2
Fourth axis control
- 2318 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Fig. 17.1.1 (b) Example of correct relationships between groups and axes
In Fig. 17.1.1 (c), " Example of incorrect relationships between groups and axes", the first and second
axes specified with group 1 belong to path 1, but the third axis specified with group 1 belongs to path 2,
so that an intended operation is not performed.
PMC CNC
DI / DO
First axis control Path 1
Group 1 command Group 1
Second axis control
Group 2 command Group 2
Third axis control
Path 2
Fourth axis control
Fig. 17.1.1 (c) Example of incorrect relationships between groups and axes
As mentioned earlier, in PMC axis control, group-by-group signal addresses are allocated in the signal
area of each path, but PMC axis control and multi-path control are independent of each other.
So, from the path to which group-by-group signal addresses are allocated, commands can be issued to
axes that belong to another path. In this case, however, check that the target axes belong to the same path.
In Fig. 17.1.1 (d), “Commands to different paths”, the group-by-group signal addresses of group 1 are
allocated to path 1, and the group-by-group signal addresses of group 5 are allocated to path 2. (See Table
17.1.1 (b), “Allocation of group-by-group signals”.)
Group 1 can issue commands to the axes that belong to path 2. Similarly, group 5 can issue commands to
the axes that belong to path 1.
PMC DI / DO CNC
Group 1 First axis control
Group 1 command
(Signal addresses are Path 1
allocated to path 1.)
Second axis control
Group 5
Group 5 command (Signal addresses are Third axis control
Path 2
allocated to path 2.)
Fourth axis control
Fig. 17.1.1 (d) Commands to different paths
- Relationships between paths and groups (path-by-path signals, path-by-path
parameters)
Path-by-path signal addresses are allocated in the signal area of each path. (See Table 17.1.1 (c),
“Example of Path-by-path signal (PMC axis control override signal) allocation”.)
However, PMC axis control and multi-path control are independent of each other.
The path-by-path direct signal (X) is described later.
- 2319 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The number of available groups depends on the number of NC path.
Generally, the maximum number of available groups equals the number of NC
paths multiplied by 4.
Table 17.1.1 (c) Example of Path-by-path signal (PMC axis control override signal) allocation
Group-by-group signal Input signal (G) address Output signal (F) address
Group 1 G0150.0,1,6,7, G0151 F0129.5,7
Group 2 G0150.0,1,6,7, G0151 F0129.5,7
Group 3 G0150.0,1,6,7, G0151 F0129.5,7
Group 4 G0150.0,1,6,7, G0151 F0129.5,7
Group 5 G1150.0,1,6,7, G1151 F1129.5,7
Group 6 G1150.0,1,6,7, G1151 F1129.5,7
Group 7 G1150.0,1,6,7, G1151 F1129.5,7
Group 8 G1150.0,1,6,7, G1151 F1129.5,7
Group 9 G2150.0,1,6,7, G2151 F2129.5,7
Group 10 G2150.0,1,6,7, G2151 F2129.5,7
Group 11 G2150.0,1,6,7, G2151 F2129.5,7
Group 12 G2150.0,1,6,7, G2151 F2129.5,7
Group 13 G3150.0,1,6,7, G3151 F3129.5,7
Group 14 G3150.0,1,6,7, G3151 F3129.5,7
Group 15 G3150.0,1,6,7, G3151 F3129.5,7
Group 16 G3150.0,1,6,7, G3151 F3129.5,7
A path-by-path signal is input/output to and from a signal of the path to which the group belongs (for
example, path 1 when a command is issued from group 1). No path-by-path signal is input/output to and
from the path to which the axis assigned to the group belongs.
In Fig. 17.1.1 (e), "Relationships between paths and groups for path-by-path signals (G, F)", for example,
the signal EBUFB#2 (described later) input from group 5 (whose signal addresses are allocated to path 2)
is output to EOV#2 (path-by-path signal described later) of path 2 to which group 5 addresses are
allocated.
EBUFB#2 is not output to EOV#1 of path 1, to which the first axis assigned to group 5 belongs.
PMC DI / DO CNC
Group 1
Path-by-path signal (Signal
addresses are Path 1
EOV#1 First axis control
allocated to path
1.)
Group 5
Group 5 command
(Signal
addresses are Second axis control Path 2
Path-by-path signal allocated to path
EOV#2 2.)
Fig. 17.1.1 (e) Relationships between paths and groups for path-by-path signals (G, F)
Restrictions on the number of groups
Basically, PMC axis control and multi-path control are independent of each other, but there are the
following restrictions.
- 2320 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
1. When PMC/L is used as PMC, the groups up to group 8 can be used. Group 9 and later groups
cannot be used.
2. When PMC control is performed with more than four times as many groups as the number of NC
paths, the signals shown in (A) and (B) below cannot be used for the excess paths and groups.
To use feedrate override signals, etc., set bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 to 1.
(A) Path-by-path signals common to all groups
Fx129.7 *EAXSL
Fx129.5 EOV0
(B) Signals common to the CNC
Gx012 *FV0-*FV7
Gx006.4 OVC
Gx014.0,1 ROV1,2
Gx046.7 DRN
Gx019.7 RT
For example, when the number of NC paths is 2, the signals in (A) and (B) can be used by the groups up
to group 8.
The restrictions on the number of NC paths, available (A) signals, and available (B) signals are shown
Table 17.1.1 (d).
Table 17.1.1 (d)
Number of NC paths Available (A) signals Available (B) signals
1 F129.5,7 (B) signals in the range from G0 to G0767
2 F129.5,7,…, F1129.5,7 (B) signals in the range from G0 to G1767
3 F129.5,7,…, F2129.5,7 (B) signals in the range from G0 to G2767
4 F129.5,7,…, F3129.5,7 (B) signals in the range from G0 to G3767
- Direct signal, path-by-path parameter
The direct signal (X) and path-by-path parameter differ from the path-by-path signals (G, F).
The direct signals and parameter values set for the paths to which all axes related to a group belong are
valid.
The direct signals and parameter values are irrelevant to values set for the path to which a group belongs.
In Fig. 17.1.1 (f), "Relationships between paths and groups for the direct signal (X)", when a command is
issued from group 5 to an axis of path 1, the valid direct signal ESKIP (described later) is ESKIP#1 of
path 1. The signal ESKIP#2 of path 2 is invalid.
PMC DI / DO CNC
Signal address
Direct signal Path 1
area of path 1 First axis control
ESKIP#1
Group 5 command Signal address
area of path 2
Path 2
Second axis control
Direct signal (Group 5)
ESKIP#2
Fig. 17.1.1 (f) Relationships between paths and groups for the direct signal (X)
- 2321 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
In Fig. 17.1.1 (g), "Relationships between path-by-path parameters and groups", when a command is
issued from group 5 to path 1, the setting of 0 with bit 2 (OVE) of the path-by-path parameter No. 8001
for path 1 is valid.
PMC CNC
Parameter for path 1
Path 1
8001#2=0 First axis control
DI / DO
Group 5 command Signal address area of
path 2 (group 5) Path 2
Second axis control
Parameter for path 2
8001#2=1
Fig. 17.1.1 (g) Relationships between path-by-path parameters and groups
- Relationships between axes and paths (axis-by-axis signals, axis-by-axis
parameters)
The specifications of the axis-by-axis signals and axis-by-axis parameters associated with the
relationships between paths and axes are the same as the NC specifications.
Signals and parameters set for an axis are valid for the axis, and are not affected by groups.
PMC axis control consists of groups, axes, and paths.
Among the three relationships, that is, the group-axis, path-group, and path-axis relationships, the two
relationships other than the path-axis relationship represent a concept specific to PMC axis control.
CAUTION
1 PMC axis control cannot be used to an axis under the axis synchronous control.
Cancel axis synchronous control before starting PMC axis command.
2 PMC axis control cannot be used to an axis under synchronous slave axis of
synchronous/composite control. Cancel synchronous control before starting
PMC axis command in slave axis.
3 Each axes cannot execute another PMC axis command by assigning two or
more axes to the same group. Assign the axes to another groups, and command
to each group.
Basic procedure
(1) In parameter No. 8010, set one of groups 1 to 16 for use with each axis to be used.
When movements are made along multiple axes for synchronization by using one group, ensure that the
feedrate-related parameters (rapid traverse, acceleration/deceleration time constant, diameter/ radius
specification, linear axis/rotation axis, and so forth) must be set to the same conditions.
When assigning multiple axes to one group, check that all axes that belong to the group are in the
same path.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection signal (EAX1 to EAX8), that
corresponds to an axis to be controlled, to 1.
(3) Determine the operation.
The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type of operation. The axis control
feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g) specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
- 2322 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one
complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC-controlled automatic
operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data signals. (Refer to
Table 17.1.1 (e), “List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control”.)
Table 17.1.1 (e) List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control
Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type
Block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg Bit
Axis control block data Axis control command signal EC0g to EC6g Byte
signals Axis control feedrate signal EIF0g to EIF15g Word
Axis control data signal EID0g to EID31g 2-word
(4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is determined, reverse the logical state of
the axis control command read signal EBUFg (i.e., from 0 to 1 or vice versa). Note that, for this to
occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must be in the same logical state as
EBUFg.
(5) The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC in its buffer so that multiple
operations can be performed in series, under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to accept
a new command block from the PMC during the execution of another block if the buffer has free
space.
The Fig. 17.1.1 (h), "Buffering under PMC axis control" illustrates an example in which command
[1] is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers, and command [4] has been
issued (the axis control block data signal is set).
Setting of the axis
PMC Commands control block data signal CNC's buffers
Block 1 Command [1] [4] [3] Input buffer
Block 2 Command [2]
Block 3 Command [3] [2] Waiting buffer
Block 4 Command [4]
Block 5 Command [5] [1] Executing buffer
: :
Block n
Fig. 17.1.1 (h) Buffering under PMC axis control
When the execution of command [1] is completed:
Command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer;
Command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;
and
Command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data signal).
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue command [5] to the CNC (the
axis control block data signal is set).
The timing chart for the command operation is shown below. (Fig. 17.1.1 (i), "Timing chart of command
operation")
- 2323 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Command block [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
(Input)
EBUFg
(Input)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Not specifiable
EBSYg
(Output)
Input buffer
[3] [4]
Waiting buffer [2] [3]
Executing buffer [1] [2]
Beginning End of Beginning
of execution execution of execution
Fig. 17.1.1 (i) Timing chart of command operation
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are
in different logical states). In interval (4), the buffer is in the "full" state.
The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR of the axis control command read
signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output
from the CNC. (Table 17.1.1 (f), "Buffering status in PMC axis control")
Table 17.1.1 (f) Buffering status in PMC axis control
Exclusive OR
EBUFg EBSYg CNC buffer status
(XOR)
0 0 The previous block has already been read into the CNC buffer. The
0
1 1 PMC can issue the next block.
0 1 The previous block has not yet been read completely. It is just being
read or waiting for the CNC buffer to become available. Do not issue
1
1 0 the next block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Reversing the
EBUFg state invalidates any block that has been already issued.
(6) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to 0. Before
setting these signals to 0, however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC's input, waiting, and
executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to 0 while a block is being executed, or
while a block remains in any of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This alarm PS0139
suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks stored in the input and waiting
buffers.
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks remaining in the input or waiting
buffer, check that control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0.
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those controlling turrets, pallets, and
ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to EAX8 signals are always set to 1. There is no need to set these
signals to 0 after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC. When all command blocks have
been executed (there are no blocks remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops
execution.
- 2324 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(7) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are set from 1 to 0, control is returned to the
CNC.
Command
Overview of commands
As described in step (3) in the basic procedure, one PMC axis control command block is represented by
the axis control block data signals.
PMC axis control enables the commands indicated in Table 17.1.1 (g), “Command list” to be specified.
In Table 17.1.1 (g), "Command list":
"Command" represents the axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g).
"Data 1" represents the axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g).
"Data 2" represents the axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g).
Table 17.1.1 (g) Command list
No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description
Rapid
Total moving The same operation as “G00” of the CNC
(1) 00h Rapid traverse traverse rate
distance is performed.
(NOTE)
Cutting feed - feed per Cutting Total moving The same operation as “G94 G01” of the
(2) 01h
minute feedrate distance CNC is performed.
Cutting feed - feed per Feedrate per Total moving The same operation as “G95 G01” of the
(3) 02h
revolution revolution distance CNC is performed.
Cutting Total moving The same operation as “G31 G01” of the
(4) 03h Skip - feed per minute
feedrate distance CNC is performed.
The same operation as “G04” of the CNC
(5) 04h Dwell --- Dwell time
is performed.
After a rapid traverse movement is made
in the reference position return direction
Reference position
(6) 05h --- --- set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006,
return
the same operation as manual reference
position return of the CNC is performed.
A continuous feed operation is performed
along a controlled axis in a certain
Continuous Feed direction
(7) 06h Continuous feed direction.
feedrate (EID31g only)
The same operation as continuous feed in
the JOG mode of the CNC is performed.
Rapid The same operation as reference position
First reference position
(8) 07h traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
return
(NOTE) with “G28” of the CNC is performed.
Rapid The same operation as reference position
Second reference
(9) 08h traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
position return
(NOTE) with “G30 P2” of the CNC is performed.
Rapid The same operation as reference position
Third reference
(10) 09h traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
position return
(NOTE) with ”G30 P3” of the CNC is performed.
Rapid The same operation as reference position
Fourth reference
(11) 0Ah traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
position return
(NOTE) with G30 P4” the CNC is performed.
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the position
(12) 0Bh synchronization - Pulse weight ---
coder is performed.
position coder
- 2325 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the first
(13) 0Dh synchronization - first Pulse weight ---
manual handle is performed.
manual handle
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the second
(14) 0Eh synchronization - Pulse weight ---
manual handle is performed.
second manual handle
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the third
(15) 0Fh synchronization - third Pulse weight ---
manual handle is performed.
manual handle
Speed
specified by Continuous feed operation based on a
(16) 10h Speed command ---
speed speed command is performed.
command
Maximum Continuous feed operation based on
(17) 11h Torque control Torque data
feedrate torque control is performed.
Auxiliary The same operation as an auxiliary
(18) 12h Auxiliary function 1 ---
function code function of the CNC is performed.
Auxiliary The same operation as an auxiliary
(19) 14h Auxiliary function 2 ---
function code function of the CNC is performed.
Auxiliary The same operation as an auxiliary
(20) 15h Auxiliary function 3 ---
function code function of the CNC is performed.
Rapid
Machine coordinate Machine The same operation as “G53” of the CNC
(21) 20h traverse rate
system selection coordinate is performed.
(NOTE)
Cutting feed is performed according to a
Cutting feed - Cutting feed Total moving specified period of time.
(22) 21h
sec/block specification time distance In the sec/block specification, specify a
period of time required for ending a block.
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate is valid only when bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is
set to 1.
Details of commands
A detailed description of each command is provided below. The parenthesized number following each
command title represents the value of the axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g.
(1) Rapid traverse ( 00h )
This command performs the same operation as "G00" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Rapid traverse command (00h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Rapid traverse rate
With bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002, whether the same rapid traverse rate as set in the parameter No.
1420 of the CNC is used or the feedrate of the PMC axis interface set by EIF0g to EIF15g is used
independently of the CNC can be chosen.
When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1, set a rapid traverse rate with a binary code.
- 2326 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
[Unit of data]
Unit of data
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric machine 1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 deg/min
NOTE
When bit 0 (CMI) of parameter No. 11850 is 0, the rapid traverse rate set by
EIF0g to EIF15g is always represented in millimeters.
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535
Total moving distance
Set an incremental travel amount in the input system unit of the axis with a binary code.
[Unit of data] Least input increment of the applied axis (Refer to the standard parameter setting table
(A))
[Valid data range]
IS-A IS-B to IS-C
-99999999 to 99999999 (8-digit) -999999999 to 999999999 (9-digit)
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value
or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005.
When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 (to use the PMC axis interface for rapid traverse rate
selection), the rapid traverse rate unit is 1 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 0; the
rapid traverse rate unit is 10 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 1.
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection
signal to be used. In addition to these signals, with bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.8001, select also a feed
rate override signal, a override cancellation signal and rapid traverse override signal. The Table 17.1.1 (h)
indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Table 17.1.1 (h)
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter
No.8001 = 0
Signals No. 8001 = 1
(same signals as those used
(signals specific to the PMC)
for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G012> *EFOV0 to *EFOV7<G151>
Override cancellation signal OVC<G006.4) EOVC<G150.5>
EROV1,2<G150.0,1>
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2<G014.0,1> or
*EROV0 to *EROV7<G151>
Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> EDRN<G150.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT<G019.7> ERT<G150.6>
When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to “1”, the feedrate is as indicated Table 17.1.1 (i).
Table 17.1.1 (i)
Manual rapid traverse When rapid traverse is specified
selection signal (RTorERT) RDE(No.8001#3)=0 RDE(No.8001#3)=1
0 Rapid traverse Dry run feedrate ×*JV (NOTE)
1 Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
- 2327 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate
override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters
Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Parameter No. 1420
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
Bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005
Related signals
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7>
Dry run signal DRN <G046.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6>
Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute ( 01h )
This command performs the same operation as “G94 G01” of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed minute (01h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Cutting feed rate
Set a feedrate along the axis with a binary code.
A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002.
When bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006 is set to 1, the unit of feedrate data increases by a factor of 100.
Moreover, the feedrate unit can be changed using a combination of bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002.
[Unit of data]When the bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
Unit of data
Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C
Metric input 10 1 0.1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch input 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch/min
Rotation axis 10 1 0.1 deg/min
When the bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1.
Unit of data
Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C
Metric input 100 10 1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch input 1 0.1 0.01 inch/min
Rotation axis 100 10 1 deg/min
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535
- 2328 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
CAUTION
1 When “0” is specified, the buffering state remains unchanged and no axis
movement takes place. In such a case, perform a reset operation with the reset
signal ECLRg.
2 Clamping to the cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1430) is disabled.
Total moving distance
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection
signal to be used. In addition to these signals, with bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.8001, select also a feed
rate override signal, a override cancellation signal and rapid traverse override signal. The Table 17.1.1 (j)
below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Table 17.1.1 (j)
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter
No.8001 = 0
Signals No. 8001 = 1
(same signals as those used
(signals specific to the PMC)
for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G012> *EFOV0 to *EFOV7<G151>
Override cancellation signal OVC<G006.4) EOVC<G150.5>
EROV1,2<G150.0,1>
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2<G014.0,1> or
*EROV0 to *EROV7<G151>
Dry run signal DRN<G046.7> EDRN<G150.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT<G019.7> ERT<G150.6>
When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to “1”, the feedrate is as indicated Table 17.1.1 (k).
Unlike rapid traverse, the feedrate does not depend on the value of bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001.
Table 17.1.1 (k)
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RT / ERT) When cutting feed is specified
0 Dry run speed × *JV (Note)
1 Cutting feed
NOTE
When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate
override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters
Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
Bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006
Related signals
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7>
Dry run signal DRN<G046.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6>
Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>
- 2329 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(3) Cutting feed - feed per revolution ( 02h )
This command performs the same operation as "G95 G01" of the CNC.
Set the amount of feed along the axis per spindle revolution.
The feedrate per spindle revolution depends on whether the M series or T series is used.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed per revolution command (02h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Feedrate per revolution
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Feedrate per revolution
<For the T series>
[Unit of data] The Table 17.1.1 (l) indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and
bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
Table 17.1.1 (l)
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535
(However, data within the ranges indicated Table 17.1.1 (m) must be specified.)
Table 17.1.1 (m)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev
<For M series>
[Unit of data] The Table 17.1.1 (n) indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and
bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
Table 17.1.1 (n)
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.01 0.0001 0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535
(However, data within the ranges indicated Table 17.1.1 (o) must be specified.)
Table 17.1.1 (o)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev
- 2330 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
CAUTION
1 A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 or 100 by setting bit 6 (FR1)
and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
2 The feedrate is clamped to a value not exceeding the setting of parameter No.
8022.
3 Override is enabled. Dry run depends on the value of bit 3 (DRR) of parameter
No. 8005.
4 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC
program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis
once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.
Total moving distance
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute.
Related parameters
Bit 3 (DRR) of parameter No. 8005
Parameter No. 8022
Others follow the specifications of the cutting feed - feed per minute.
Related signals
Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute
(4) Skip - feed per minute ( 03h )
Skip
This command performs the same operation as "G31 G01" of the CNC.
High-speed skip is disabled.
This skip signal is valid for an axis assigned to a path from path 1 to path 3.
For an axis assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid.
For an axis assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2(X013.6) is valid.
For an axis assigned to path 3, ESKIP#3(X011.6) is valid.
For axes assigned to path 4, this skip signal cannot be used.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Skip command (03h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Cutting feedrate
The specifications of the cutting feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) are applicable.
CAUTION
Feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration are disabled.
Total moving distance
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
- 2331 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(5) Dwell ( 04h )
This command performs the same operation as "G04" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Dwell command (04h)
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Dwell time
Dwell time
Set a dwell time with a binary code.
Valid data range Unit
1 to 9999999 ms
When diameter specification is selected with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a
radius value or diameter value for dwell operation can be specified using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No.
8005.
When the increment system is IS-C, the dwell time can be set to a least input increment of 0.1 msec with
bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002.
Related parameters
Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006
Bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
(6) Reference position return ( 05h )
This command performs the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC after rapid
traverse in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
Reference position setting without DOG
If bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 for the function for setting the reference position without dogs is
set for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is
turned on, a reference position return operation (positioning at a grid closest to the current position) can
be performed without using the reference position return deceleration signal when a movement
(positioning at a location near the reference position) is made in the direction set for each axis with the
continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the reference position return command (EC0g to
EC6g: 05h) is specified.
At the time of positioning at a location near the reference position, the machine needs to be moved in the
reference position return direction at such a feedrate that the servo position deviation exceeds the value
set in parameter No. 1836.
The direction from a neighborhood point to a grid is set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
If the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is issued after reference position
establishment, a high-speed reference position return operation is performed, regardless of the reference
position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
Specify this command after canceling tool radius compensation and tool length compensation.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Reference position return command (05h)
Related parameters
Bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005
Bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006
Parameter No. 1836
- 2332 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(7) Continuous feed ( 06h )
This command performs a continuous feed operation along a controlled axis in a certain direction.
This command performs the same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC.
Continuous feed is performed until a reset. At this time, the remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is
decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”, and the control axis selection status
signal *EAXSL is also set to 0.
Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to
“0”.
Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg
continues to be set to “1”.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Continuous feed command (06h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate
EID31g G149.7 Feed direction (specified with EID31g only)
Continuous feedrate
A feedrate along an axis is set in the same way as for cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
A feedrate change can be made during continuous feed.
If a feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is set, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal
EBUFg is reversed, a new continuous feedrate is set.
This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be
checked when this command is specified usually.
A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. Moreover, a set
feedrate can be increased by a factor of up to 200 with bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004.
CAUTION
A maximum feedrate applicable when override is applied differs from a maximum
feedrate applicable when override is canceled. Maximum feedrate data in the
two cases is indicated Table 17.1.1 (p) and Table 17.1.1 (q).
Table 17.1.1 (p) Maximum feedrate (when an override of 254% is applied)
IS-B IS-C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 times 166458 1664.58 16645 166.45
10 times 1664589 16645.89 166458 1664.58
200 times (NOTE 1) 19660500 196605.00 1966050 19660.50
Table 17.1.1 (q) Maximum feedrate (when override is canceled)
IS-B IS-C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 times 65535 655.35 6553 65.53
10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35
200 times (NOTE 1) 13107000 131070 1310700 13107
- 2333 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 A feedrate increased by a factor of 200 is valid only when the continuous feed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is used.
2 The actual feedrate may not be displayed correctly, depending on the feedrate.
Feed direction
Specify the direction of continuous feed with the signal EID31g.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
The signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.
To change the feed direction during continuous feed, the signal EID31g is reversed and then the logical
state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute.
Related parameters
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
Bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004
Related signals
Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute
(8) First reference position return ( 07h )
This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position
done with "G28" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 First reference position return command (07h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse rate
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
When the first reference position return command is specified, the manual rapid traverse rate set by
parameter No. 1424 is used if manual reference position return operation is not performed even once after
the power is turned on.
NOTE
If bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to enable the function for setting the
reference position without dogs for each axis, and reference position return
operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, the alarm
PS0090, “REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE” is issued when the first
reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 07h) is specified.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of rapid traverse.
Related parameters
Bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005
Parameter No. 1240
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Parameter No. 1420
- 2334 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Parameter No. 1424
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002
Related signals
Same as for rapid traverse
(9) Second reference position return ( 08h )
This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position
done with "G28 P2" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Second reference position return command (08h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse rate
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
Related parameters
Bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005
Parameter No. 1241
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Parameter No. 1420
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002
Related signals
Same as for rapid traverse
(10) Third reference position return ( 09h )
This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position
done with "G28 P3" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Third reference position return command (09h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse rate
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
Related parameters
Bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005
Parameter No. 1242
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Parameter No. 1420
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002
- 2335 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Related signals
Same as for rapid traverse
(11) Fourth reference position return ( 0Ah )
This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position
done with "G28 P4" of the CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Fourth reference position return command (0Ah)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse rate
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
Related parameters
Bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005
Parameter No. 1243
Bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402
Parameter No. 1420
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001
Bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002
Related signals
Same as for rapid traverse
(12) External pulse synchronization – position coder ( 0Bh )
This command performs a synchronous operation with the position coder. Using position coder of the
serial spindle is also available.
When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction.
The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on
external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is
decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”, and the control axis selection status
signal *EAXSL is also set to “0”.
Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to
“0”.
Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg
continues to be set to “1”.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - position coder command (0Bh)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight
Spindle number of the serial spindle to be synchronized
EID0g to EID7g G146
(common to the system) (*1)
*1: This data is set only during synchronization with the position coder of the serial spindle.
The position coder to be synchronized depends on the parameter setting, as shown Table 17.1.1 (r).
- 2336 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Table 17.1.1 (r)
Bit 3 (ESY) of Bit 0 (EOS) of
Command of
parameter No. parameter No. Valid position coder
G146
8007 8019
0 0/1 Not required Position coder (not a serial spindle)
1 0 Not required Position coder of the first spindle belonging to path 1 (*2)
1 1 Required Position coder of an arbitrary spindle (specified by G146)
*2: This can be specified for the servo axis belonging to path 1.
Pulse weight
Set an external pulse weight.
1) In the Case of Manual pulse magnification change signal HNDMP<Gn088.3> is “0”
When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an
external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part.
The valid range is ±1/256 to ±127.
With EIF0g to EIF7g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/256.
Example)
For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF7g = 80h (=80h/100h=128 / 256 = 0.5)
For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF7g = 33h (=33h/100h= 51 / 256 = 0.2)
2) In the Case of Manual pulse magnification change signal HNDMP<Gn088.3> is 1
When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an
external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part.
The valid range is ±1/32 to ±1023.
With EIF0g to EIF4g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/32.
Example)
For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF4g = 10h (=10h/20h=16 / 32 = 0.5)
For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF4g = 06h (=06h/20h= 6 / 32 = 0.2)
When a negative weight value is set, a movement is made along the axis in the opposite direction.
If a new pulse weight is set and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is
reversed during axis movement based on external pulse synchronization, a movement is made along the
axis according to the new pulse weight.
This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be
checked when this command is specified usually.
Spindle number of a serial spindle to be synchronized (for synchronization with the position coder
of a serial spindle)
The serial spindle to be synchronized is set with a spindle number common to the system.
The valid range extends from 1 to the maximum number of control axes. If the spindle number falls
outside the range, external pulse synchronization is disabled.
Example)
When the spindle (serial spindle) of each path is assigned as shown Table 17.1.1 (s) and Fig.
17.1.1 (j)
Table 17.1.1 (s)
Spindle number common to the system Path number + Spindle number in the path
First spindle (S1) First spindle in path 1 (S11)
Second spindle (S2) Second spindle in path 1 (S12)
Third spindle (S3) Third spindle in path 1 (S13)
- 2337 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Spindle number common to the system Path number + Spindle number in the path
Fourth spindle (S4) First spindle in path 2 (S21)
Path 1 Path 2
Spindle Spindle Spindle Spindle
S1 S2 S3 S4
(S11) (S12) (S13) (S21)
Fig. 17.1.1 (j)
To perform external pulse synchronization with the second spindle (S21) in path 2, set the
spindle number of the serial spindle to 4.
NOTE
1 The spindle number to be set does not depend on the path and is common to
the system.
2 If the set serial spindle is not present, external pulse synchronization is disabled.
3 Be sure to set EID8g to EID31g (G147 to G149 for group 1) to 0.
Related parameters
Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006
Parameter No. 1424
Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
Bit 3 (ESY) of parameter No. 8007
Bit 0 (EOS) of parameter No. 8019
CAUTION
1 The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
(parameter No. 1424).
2 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC
program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis
once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.
NOTE
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether
to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of
parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of
parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.
(13) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle ( 0Dh )
(14) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle ( 0Eh )
(15) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle ( 0Fh )
Each of these commands performs a synchronous operation with a manual handle.
When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction.
The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
- 2338 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on
external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. A parameter-set magnification is invalid.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”, each of these commands can be ended. At this time, the servo
motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”, and the control axis selection
status signal *EAXSL is also set to “0”.
Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to
“0”. Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “0”, ensure that the reset signal
ECLRg continues to be set to “1”.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - manual handle command
(0Dh for the first manual handle)
(0Eh for the second manual handle)
(0Fh for the third manual handle)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight
Pulse weight
The specifications of the external pulse synchronization - position coder command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
are applicable.
Related parameters
Same as for external pulse synchronization - position coder
CAUTION
The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
(parameter No. 1424).
NOTE
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether
to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of
parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of
parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.
(16) Speed command ( 10h )
This command performs a continuous feed operation based on a speed command.
By using bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006, set a rotation axis as a controlled axis for which this
command is executed.
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) exercises position control. However, the speed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can exercise speed control on the servo motor to dynamically change the
speed during continuous feed. So, this command is suited, for example, to an application where a servo
motor drives a rotary tool.
With parameter No. 8028 and No. 8032, a time constant for linear acceleration/ deceleration can be set for
each axis.
Every coordinate values are not updated during the speed command.
A reference position return operation needs to be performed after a move command is specified upon
completion of the speed command. (This operation also needs when an absolute position detector is
attached.)
When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is set to 0, coordinates are updated during feed operation based
on a speed command. (The FS15 type is used for the speed command in PMC axis control.)
- 2339 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is set to 1, the FS16 type is used for the speed command in
PMC axis control. With this setting, the speed command is determined by the setting of bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005.
When the FS16i type (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is set to 1) and speed control (bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005 is set to 0) are specified, coordinates are not updated. Reference position return must
be performed before a move command is executed after the completion of the speed command since the
machine position is lost. (The machine position is also lost when an absolute position detector is
attached.)
When the FS16i type (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is set to 1) and position control (bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005 is set to 1) are specified, coordinates are updated.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to “1”, this command can be ended.
At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”.
Before specifying the next command, check that the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”.
Until the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set
to “1”.
After the execution of speed command, to execute a move command in an NC block, execute the method
(2) of CAUTION 9 in the item "Caution" described in the end of chapter "PMC CONTROL
FUNCTION".
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Speed command (10h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate
Continuous feedrate
Set the speed of the servo motor with a binary code.
Set a positive value when the servo motor rotates in the forward direction. Set a negative value (two's
complement) when the servo motor rotates in the reverse direction.
If a new servo motor speed is set as a feedrate, and the logical state of the axis control command read
signal EBUFg is reversed, the servo motor is accelerated or decelerated to the new speed.
Valid data range Unit
-32768 to +32767 min-1
Related parameters
Parameter No. 8028
Parameter No. 8032
- 2340 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The following feedrate error can occur:
Gear
Speed command
Amplifier Motor
Axis
(b)
Detector
(a)
(a) With the speed command based on PMC axis control, a servo motor speed
is specified as a feedrate. So, in order to specify a feedrate for an axis when
a gear is used between the axis and servo motor, the desired feedrate for
the axis needs to be converted to a servo motor speed. A feedrate must be
specified using an integer, so that when it is converted to a servo motor
speed, a rounding error can occur.
(b) The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expression below. An integer
must be specified. No finer value may be specified.
Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit
P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
A speed is specified according to the expression below.
F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
F : Speed command (integer)
N : Servo motor speed (min-1)
P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
2 In the speed command mode, a speed after acceleration/deceleration is
specified for the servo control section. At this time, a position control loop gain is
invalid.
3 Machine lock is disabled for the speed command.
Speed command and position control
The PMC axis can be moved at a constant speed by performing the speed specification of PMC axis
control through position loop control, that is, outputting the command pulses corresponding to a rotation
speed to servo position control instead of outputting rotation speed data to the amplifier.
Set the FS16i specification (set bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 to 1) and specify either speed loop
control or position loop control is used for speed specification of PMC axis control using bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005.
When speed command with position control(bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 and bit 2 (VCP) of
parameter No. 8007 are set to 1) uses acceleration/ deceleration, the linear acceleration/deceleration
expanded parameter for PMC axis control speed command continuous feed (bit 0 (PTC) of parameter
12730) must be set to 1, and set the linear acceleration/deceleration using following parameters.
Parameter(No.8028):Time constant 1 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command
continuous feed under PMC axis control: Unit [msec/1000[min-1]]
Parameter(No.12731):Time constant 2 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command
continuous feed under PMC axis control :Unit [msec/1000[min-1]]
Parameter(No.12732):Time constant 3 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command
continuous feed under PMC axis control :Unit [msec/1000[min-1]]
Parameter(No.12733):Time constant 4 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command
continuous feed under PMC axis control :Unit [msec/1000[min-1]]
- 2341 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter(No.12734):Time constant 5 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command
continuous feed under PMC axis control :Unit [msec/1000[min-1]]
Parameter(No.12735):1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a
speed command in PMC axis control :Unit [min-1]
Parameter(No.12736):2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a
speed command in PMC axis control :Unit [min-1]
Parameter(No.12737):3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a
speed command in PMC axis control :Unit [min-1]
Parameter(No.12738):4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a
speed command in PMC axis control :Unit [min-1]
For position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), override is enabled.
Set parameter No. 8040 for each axis to the amount of travel per revolution of the motor in terms of the
minimum travel unit and convert speed commands to position commands using this value.
As shown in the following block diagram (Fig. 17.1.1 (k)), rotation speed data is not output to the
amplifier and the command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed are output to servo position control.
＋
Command CMR Position Servo Motor
pulse control amplifier
Detector
Block diagram
Fig. 17.1.1 (k)
Related parameters
Bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005
Bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007
Parameter No. 8040
Parameter PTC (No.12730)
Parameter No. 12731
Parameter No. 12732
Parameter No. 12733
Parameter No. 12734
Parameter No. 12735
Parameter No. 12736
Parameter No. 12737
Parameter No. 12738
NOTE
1 The control axis to be controlled needs to be set as a rotation axis in bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006.
2 When the FS16i specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
speed control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 0) are specified, coordinates are
not updated.
After execution, the following signal is set to 0 and the position is lost.
- Reference position establishment signal ZRFx<F120>
After execution of speed command, establish the reference position.
3 When the FS16i specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, coordinates
are updated.
- 2342 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
4 Only when the FS16i specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, feedrate
override is enabled.
5 After the execution of speed command, to execute a move command in an NC
block, execute the method (2) of CAUTION 9 in the item "Caution" described in
the end of chapter "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION".
(17) Torque control ( 11h )
This command performs a continuous feed operation based on torque control.
With this command, position control on a PMC control axis can be switched to torque-based control. The
servo motor outputs torque exactly as specified by the NC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Torque control command (11h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Maximum feedrate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Torque data
Maximum feedrate
Specify a maximum feedrate during torque control by using the unit min-1.
When there is no torque generation target or the feedrate exceeds the specified value during torque
control, the alarm SV0422, “EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE” is issued.
When updating the maximum feedrate during torque control set in the torque control mode, set new data
on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg.
Valid data range Unit
1 to +32767 min-1
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is cm/min.
Torque data
Specify torque data.
Specify a positive value when the torque direction is positive. Specify a negative value when the torque
direction is negative.
When updating the torque data set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the
logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg.
Valid data range Unit
-999999999 to +999999999 (9-digit) 0.00001 Nm
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is 0.001N.
(1) Switching from position control to torque control
(a) Torque control axis setting
Using bit 7 (TRQ) of parameter No. 2007, set whether an axis is to be placed under torque
control. Moreover, for an axis to be placed under torque control, set the torque constant
parameter No. 2105. The standard value of the motor is automatically set in this parameter
when the power is turned on after setting bit 1 (DGP) of parameter No. 2000 to 0.
- 2343 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(b) Position management in the torque control mode
Whether to perform follow-up operation in the torque control mode can be chosen using bit 4
(TQF) of parameter No. 1803.
If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), position
control is exercised, regardless of whether the torque control mode is set.
If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 0), the
operation depends on whether to update the error counter (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805).
If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the alarm
SV0423, “EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE” is issued when the value of the error counter
exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1885. At the time of switching back to position control,
follow-up operation is performed.
If the error counter is not updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 1), no errors
are accumulated, so that no servo alarm is issued. However, when the maximum allowable
speed is exceeded, the alarm SV0422, “EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE” is issued.
When this setting is selected, a reference position return operation is required to switch back to
position control.
Except when bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0, and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No.
1805 is se to 1, the CNC always exercises position control even in the torque control mode. So,
no reference position return operation needs to be performed even at the time of switching from
torque control to position control.
(c) Movement direction and speed in the torque control mode
In the torque control mode, the output of torque specified by the axis control data signals
EID0g to EID31g is attempted. However, when there is no torque generation target or the
output has not reached the specified torque data yet, a movement is made in the same direction
as in the case of position control according to the +/- sign of torque data. When the move speed
exceeds the specified value, the alarm SV0422 is issued.
(d) Timing of switching to torque control
Switching to the torque control mode from another mode occurs when the position deviation is
decreased to within the in-position width.
(e) In the torque control mode, the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 1. (For details of
this signal, see "Signal detail".)
(2) Switching from torque control to position control
(Torque control mode cancellation)
When any of the following conditions occurs, the torque control mode ends:
(i) When the reset signal ECLRg is set to “1”
(ii) When a servo alarm is issued
(iii) When an OT alarm is issued with an axis placed under torque control
(iv) At the time of emergency stop
(v) When servo-off occurs due to the servo-off signal ESOFg
- 2344 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(a) Timing of torque control cancellation
The cancellation of torque control based on PMC axis control depends on whether to perform
follow-up operation as determined by bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803.
- When follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1).
The torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 to return to position control immediately
when a cancellation condition occurs. The execution then stops when the position deviation is
decreased to within the in-position width.
- When follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1).
The torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 when a cancellation condition occurs. If the
error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the control mode is
switched back to position control when the position deviation is decreased to below the value
of the cancellation limit parameter No. 1886 after the start of follow-up operation. The
execution then ends when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If
the error counter is not updated (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is set to 1), a reference
position return operation must be once performed to return to position control.
(b) Command after cancellation
After the torque control mode is canceled, the control mode is switched to normal position
control. In the torque control mode, position is controlled, so that machine coordinates are not
shifted. However, a shift occurs between the workpiece coordinates and machine coordinates,
so that the shift amount needs to be canceled, for example, by executing workpiece coordinate
system preset.
After the execution of torque control, to execute a move command in an NC block, execute the
method (2) of CAUTION 9 in the item "Caution" described in the end of chapter "PMC
CONTROL FUNCTION".
The Table 17.1.1 (t) indicates the operations dependent on the settings of bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No.
1803 and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805.
Table 17.1.1 (t)
Bit 4 (TQF) of Bit 1 (TRE) of Reference
Position
parameter No. parameter No. Operation in TRQ mode position
control
1803 1805 return(*)
1 0/1 O Position control is exercised. Not required
0 0 O The alarm SV0423 is issued when the error Not required
counter exceeds the value of parameter No. 1885.
0 1 - No SV alarm is issued. When the maximum Required
allowable speed is exceeded, however, the alarm
SV0422 is issued.
(*) Whether reference position return operation is required or not when the control mode has been
switched from torque control back to position control
TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION
Set following parameters about servo function "torque control function" properly. As to the detail of the
parameters, refer to "FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL(B-65270EN)".
Parameter No.2007#7
Parameter No.2203#4
Parameter No.2003#3
Parameter No.2105
If the parameter No.2007#7 or No.2105 is not set correctly, the alarm (DS1184), “PARAMETER
ERROR IN TORQUE” occurs.
- 2345 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
CAUTION
1 If a movement is made along a torque control axis in the torque control mode,
set bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 for follow-up operation to 1.
2 If a movement has been made along a torque control axis when torque control is
canceled, a mechanical shock occurs at the time of return to position control. As
a greater speed is used, a larger shock occurs. So, decelerate to a maximum
allowable extent or stop before canceling torque control.
3 When specifying torque control after completion of manual reference position
return, set the feed direction selection signal to 0 or switch to a mode other than
the manual reference position return mode beforehand.
4 When the control axis selection signal EAXx is switched in the torque control
mode, the alarm PS0139, “CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS” is issued.
Before switching the control axis selection signal EAXx, cancel the torque control
mode.
5 In the torque control mode, do not detach a controlled axis with the control axis
detach signal DTCHx or a setting parameter.
6 When servo-off occurs, the torque control mode is canceled. However, the
torque control state remains to be set. So, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg
to “1”.
7 Machine lock is disabled for the torque control command.
8 In case bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is 0 (Follow-up operation is not
performed.) and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is 1 (Servo error counter is
not updated.), after execution of torque control, establish the reference position.
9 After the execution of torque control, to execute a move command in an NC
block, execute the method (2) of CAUTION 9 in the item "Caution" described in
the end of chapter "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION".
Related parameters
Bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803
Bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805
Parameter No. 1885
Parameter No. 1886
Parameters about servo function "torque control function" (See above description)
Related signals
Control axis detach signal DTCHx <G124>
(18) Auxiliary function 1 ( 12h )
(19) Auxiliary function 2 ( 14h )
(20) Auxiliary function 3 ( 15h )
Each of these commands performs the same operation as an auxiliary function (M code Function) of the
CNC.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Auxiliary function command
(12h for the auxiliary function 1 command)
(14h for the auxiliary function 2 command)
(15h for the auxiliary function 3 command)
EID0g to EID15g G146 to 147 Auxiliary function code
- 2346 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Auxiliary function code
Specify an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC with a binary code.
With bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, specify a 1-byte or 2-byte code on the signals EID0g to
EID15g.
Related parameters
Bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001
Related signals
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0>
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0> (for auxiliary function 1)
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2> (for auxiliary function 2)
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3> (for auxiliary function 3)
Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g <F132, F142>
Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg <F130.3>
NOTE
The same auxiliary function cannot be concurrently executed with some groups
(For example, command of 12h to 2 groups). Execute a different auxiliary
function in each group or execute with another group after the auxiliary function
ends.
(21) Machine coordinate system selection ( 20h )
This command performs the same operation as “G53” of the CNC.
This command performs rapid traverse in the absolute mode to a specified position in the machine
coordinate system. So, this command can be used to move the tool to a specified machine-specific
position such as a tool change position.
NOTE
1 When using this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose
radius compensation beforehand.
2 When using this command with the M series, cancel tool radius compensation,
tool length compensation, and tool offset beforehand.
3 Before this command can be specified, a machine coordinate system must be
set. So, a manual reference position return operation or reference position return
operation based on G28 needs to be performed at least once after the power is
turned on. When an absolute-position detector is attached, machine position
data is stored, so that a reference position return operation is unnecessary after
the power is turned on.
4 This command can be specified regardless of the setting (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136) of the workpiece coordinate system.
When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis control for the
rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is set to 1), the
direction of the rotation for an absolute command is as follows.
Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013
0 1
0 Direction of the shortest path Direction of the shortest path
Bit 1 (RABx) of
Direction of sign of the amount of the Direction of sign of the command
parameter No.1008 1
movement to be made value
- 2347 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Machine coordinate system selection (20h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Machine coordinate
Rapid traverse rate
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
Machine coordinate
For a linear axis, specify a machine coordinate in the input unit for the axis as an absolute value with a
binary code.
Example: For absolute "10000"
Input unit inch 1.0000 mm 10.000
Output unit mm 25.400 inch 0.3937
For a rotation axis, a move direction can be selected with a parameter.
Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1 to enable the rollover function. Then, select the sign of a
specified value or the shortcut direction with bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. Additionally, the
amount of travel per revolution needs to be set in parameter No. 1260.
Related parameters
Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006
Bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008
Parameter No. 1260
(22) Cutting feed-sec/block specification ( 21h )
This command performs cutting feed according to a specified period of time. In the sec/block
specification, specify a period of time required for ending a block.
Axis control block data
Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - sec/block command specification (21h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feed time
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Cutting feed time
Specify a period of time required for ending a block.
[Unit of data] 0.1sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
Total moving distance
The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
NOTE
The dry run signal and the override signal are invalid, but the tool stops only
when the override signal specifies 0%.
Related parameters and related signals
Basically same as for cutting feed -feed per minute
- 2348 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Notes on the commands
- Display of the remaining amount of travel
When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization
commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are specified, the remaining amount of travel indicates 0 at
all times.
- Command buffering
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal
EBSYg need not be checked at usual command specification time.
When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is specified, the feedrate is changed to a
specified value by specifying a value with EIFg and reversing EBUFg. (However, the direction remains
unchanged.)
- Acceleration/deceleration
The valid acceleration/deceleration type varies from one command to another.
See Table 17.1.1 (u), "Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)".
Table 17.1.1 (u) Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)
Command Operation Acceleration/deceleration type
00h Rapid traverse
05h Reference position return
07h 1st reference position return The settings of rapid traverse parameters of exponential type,
08h 2nd reference position return linear type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after
09h 3rd reference position return interpolation used with the NC are valid.
0Ah 4th reference position return
20h Machine coordinate system selection
01h Cutting feed - feed per minute
02h Cutting feed - feed per revolution The settings of cutting parameters of exponential type, linear
External pulse type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation
0Bh -Position coder used with the NC are valid.
0Dh -1st manual handle However, when exponential type and value is set in
0Eh -2nd manual handle parameters Nos. 8030 and 8031, these settings are valid
0Fh -3rd manual handle instead of parameters Nos. 1622 and 1623.
21h Cutting feed - sec / block
The settings of jog feed parameters of exponential type, linear
type after interpolation, and bell-shaped type after interpolation
used with the NC are valid.
06h Continuous feed
However, when exponential type and value is set in
parameters Nos. 8030 and 8031, these settings are valid
instead of parameters Nos. 1624 and 1625.
10h Speed command Set linear-type parameters Nos.8028 and 8032.
- Immediate commands
The commands listed below are not buffered. The commands are referred to as immediate commands.
(1) Continuous feed(EC0g to EC6g : 06h)
(2) External pulse synchronization - Position coder (EC0g to EC6g : 0Bh)
(3) External pulse synchronization - 1st manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh)
(4) External pulse synchronization - 2nd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh)
(5) External pulse synchronization - 3rd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh)
(6) Speed command(EC0g to EC6g : 10h)
(7) Torque control (EC0g to EC6g : 11h)
- 2349 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
When an immediate command is prepared and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed
during execution of the same type of command, the command being executed is terminated, and the next
command is executed immediately.
Suppose, for example, that when continuous feed is being executed at 100 mm/min, another continuous
feed command with only the feedrate changed to 300 mm/min is specified and the axis control command
read signal EBUFg is reversed. The feedrate changes to 300 mm/min.
To end an immediate command, input the reset signal ECLRg.
When specifying a command other than the immediate commands, set the reset signal ECLRg to “1” and
check that the command is terminated, then reverse EBUFg.
(If both of the block being executed and a block being prepared are immediate commands, but the types
of commands differ from each other, set the reset signal ECLRg to “1” once.)
- To detect an alarm for unselected PMC axis control
If the controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are 0, execution of PMC axis control command is
ignored. When the bit 2 (EZC) of parameter No.8019 is set to 1, controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to
EAX8 state are “0”, alarm DS1451, “IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND” is detected when the PMC
axis control command is executed. Unexpected operation of the machine can be prevented by alarm stop.
Alarm DS1451 is detected in the path that belongs to group of PMC axis control. Automatic operation of
the path is stopped, operation of PMC axis control of the group is stopped. Further, in the alarm signal
AL<Fn001.0> and alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2> is set to “1”. If PMC axis
control command from the different path, stop the automatic operation by setting the bit 1 (IAL) of
parameter No.8100 to 0.
- To detect an alarm for incorrect command after PMC axis control
After the move command of PMC axis control is interrupted by reset signal ECLRg, execution of next
command requires the following operations.
(1) Reset signal ECLRg is set to “1”.
(2) Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg
continues to be set to “1”.
(3) Execution of next PMC axis control command.
Without waiting for the condition (2), the following command can not be executed. When the bit 1 (PIA)
of parameter No.8019 is set to 1, As shown in Table17.1.1 (v) and Table17.1.1 (w), alarm DS1451,
”IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND” is generated by different acceleration/deceleration type
command during deceleration. Incorrect behavior can be suppressed by alarm DS1451 is generated.
Table17.1.1 (v) PMC axis control command and acceleration/deceleration type
PMC axis control command Acceleration/deceleration type
Rapid traverse(00h)
Reference position return(05h)
First reference position return(07h)
Second reference position return(08h) Acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse
Third reference position return(09h)
Fourth reference position return(0Ah)
Machine coordinate system selection(20h)
Cutting feed - feed per minute(01h)
Cutting feed - feed per revolution(02h)
External pulse synchronization - position coder(0Bh)
External pulse synchronization - first manual handle(0Dh) Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed
External pulse synchronization - second manual handle(0Eh)
External pulse synchronization - third manual handle(0Fh)
Cutting feed - sec/block specification(21h)
Continuous feed(06h) Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed
Skip - feed per minute(03h) Acceleration/deceleration disabled
- 2350 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Table17.1.1 (w) Alarm generated by combination of acceleration /deceleration type
( parameter PIA (No.8019#1)=1 )
Next PMC axis control command acceleration/deceleration
Reset PMC axis control command type
acceleration/deceleration type Rapid Cutting Jog
Disabled
traverse feed feed
Rapid traverse Specifiable Alarm Alarm Alarm
Cutting feed Alarm Specifiable Alarm Alarm
Jog feed Alarm Alarm Specifiable Alarm
Signal
Signal list (PMC axis control)
Number Symbol Signal name
(1) EAX1 to EAX8 Controlled axis selection signals
(2) EC0g to EC6g Axis control command signals
(3) EIF0g to EIF15g Axis control feedrate signals
(4) EID0g to EID31g Axis control data signals
(5) EBUFg Axis control command read signal
(6) EBSYg Axis control command read completion signal
(7) ECLRg Reset signal
(8) ESTPg Axis control temporary stop signal
(9) ESBKg Block stop signal
(10) EMSBKg Block stop disable signal
(11) EM11g to EM48g Auxiliary function code signals
(12) EMFg Auxiliary function strobe signal
(13) EMF2g Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal
(14) EMF3g Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal
(15) EFINg Auxiliary function completion signal
(16) ESOFg Servo-off signal
(17) EMBUFg Buffering disable signal
(18) *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal
(19) EINPg In-position signal
(20) ECKZg Following zero checking signal
(21) EIALg Alarm signal
(22) EGENg Axis moving signal
(23) EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal
(24) EOTNg Negative-direction overtravel signal
(25) EOTPg Positive-direction overtravel signal
(26) *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g Feedrate override signals
(27) *EROV0g to *EROV7g 1% step rapid traverse override signals
(28) EOVCg Override cancellation signal
(29) EROV1, EROV2 Rapid traverse override signals
(30) EDRN Dry run signal
(31) ERT Manual rapid traverse selection signal
(32) EOV0 Override 0% signal
(33) ESKIP Skip signal
(34) EADEN1 to EADEN32 Distribution completion signals
(35) EABUFg Buffer full signal
(36) EACNT1 to EACNT32 Controlling signals
(37) ELCKZg Accumulated zero check signal
(38) TRQM1 to TRQM8 Torque control mode signal
- 2351 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Signal list (Related signals)
Number Symbol Signal name
(1) *+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal 1
*- ED1 to *- ED8
(2) *+ED21 to *+ED28 External deceleration signal 2
*- ED21 to *- ED28
(3) *+ED31 to *+ED38 External deceleration signal 3
*- ED31 to *- ED38
(4) *+ED41 to *+ED48 External deceleration signal 4
*- ED41 to *- ED48
(5) *+ED51 to *+ED58 External deceleration signal 5
*- ED51 to *- ED58
(6) HROV 1% rapid traverse override select signal
(7) *HROV0 to *HROV6 1% rapid traverse override signals
(8) FHROV 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal
(9) *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 0.1% rapid traverse override signals
(10) ROV1, 2 Rapid traverse override signals
(11) ZP1 to ZP8 First reference position return completion signal
(12) ZP21 to ZP28 Second reference position return completion signal
(13) ZP31 to ZP38 Third reference position return completion signal
(14) ZP41 to ZP48 Fourth reference position return completion signal
(15) NDCAL1 to NDCAL8 A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal
(16) HNDMP Manual pulse magnification change signal
Signal address
The method of counting the addresses of the input/output signals G and F is described below. (See Table
17.1.1 (b), "Allocation of group-by-group signals".)
For group-by-group signals, the addresses of group 5 and up are determined in such a way that 1000 is
incremented for every four groups.
For axis-by-axis signals, the addresses of the 9th axis and up are determined in such a way that 1000 is
incremented for every eight axes.
For axis-by-axis signals in a path, the addresses for path 2 and up are determined in such a way that 1000
is incremented for each path.
Example:
The address of the EBUFg signal for group 10 is G2154.7.
The address of the EAX signal is determined as follows:
Path 1: 1st axis G136.0
2nd axis G136.1
3rd axis G136.2
Path 2: 1st axis G1136.0
2nd axis G1136.1
Signal Detail
Each signal is detailed below.
"<>" in the title of each signal indicates a signal address. For group-by-group signals, addresses for group
1 to group 4 are indicated. For axis-by-axis signals, addresses for the 1st axis to 8th axis are indicated.
Signal Detail (PMC axis control)
(1) Controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 <Gn136>
[Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Exercises PMC axis control.
[Function] When the signal is set to “1”, PMC axis control becomes valid.
- 2352 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
When the signal is set to “0”, PMC axis control becomes invalid. Changing the setting of
the control axis selection signal is possible only when control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is set to “0”. Changing the setting when *EAXSL is set to “1” results in the
issue of an alarm PS0139, “CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS”. Alarm signal
EIALg is set to “1”. When the bit 5 (NCC) of parameter No. 8001, is set to 0, a command
issued from the CNC is executed while the control axis selection signal is set to “1” and
signal *EAXSL is set to “0”. When the parameter is set to “1”, the same attempt results in
the issue of an alarm PS0139.
If the control axis selection signal is set to “1” while the CNC is currently executing a
command, an alarm is generated.
While *EAXSL is set to “0”, the status of alarm signal EIALg does not change to “1”
when the control axis selection signal is set to “1” and an alarm PS0139 is generated. In
this case, the axis can be controlled from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm
status.
NOTE
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “1”, it
takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue commands to the
CNC.
(2) Axis control command signals
EC0g to EC6g<G143.0 to 6, G155.0 to 6, G167.0 to 6, G179.0 to 6>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] One of the axis control block data signals
[Operation] Specifies a type of command with 7 bits.
For the meaning of each command, see Table 17.1.1 (g), "Command list".
(3) Axis control feedrate signals
EIF0g to EIF15g <G144 to 145, G156 to 157, G168 to 169, G180 to 181>
[Classification] Input signal, Group-by-group signal
[Function] One of the axis control block data signals
[Operation] Two-byte command interface area
Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 17.1.1 (g), "Command
list".
(4) Axis control data signals
EID0g to EID31g <G146 to 149, G158 to 161, G170 to 173, G182 to 185>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] One of the axis control block data signals
[Operation] Four-byte command interface area
Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 17.1.1 (g), "Command
list".
(5) Axis control command read signal EBUFg <G142.7, G154.7, G166.7, G178.7>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from
“0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”, see Fig. 17.1.1 (l), "Timing chart of command operation"
and Table 17.1.1 (f), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".
(6) Axis control command read completion signal
EBSYg <F130.7, F133.7, F136.7, F139.7>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
- 2353 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control
and has stored the block in the input buffer.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from
“0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”, see Fig. 17.1.1 (m), "Timing chart of command operation"
and Table 17.1.1 (f), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".
(7) Reset signal ECLRg <G142.6, G154.6, G166.6, G178.6>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Resets a PMC axis control command.
[Operation] Resets the corresponding PMC-controlled axis.
When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: decelerates and stops the tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation.
Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control command is
ignored while this signal is set to “1”.
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse synchronization
command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be terminated by setting reset signal
ECLRg to “1”. When these commands are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and
stops, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”, and the controlled axis selection status
signal *EAXSL is set to “0”.
Confirm that the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to “0”
before issuing the next command. Do not set reset signal ECLRg to “0” until the
controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to “0”.
The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by setting the reset
signal ECLRg to “1”. When this command is terminated, the servo motor decelerates and
stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to “0”. Confirm that the axis moving
signal EGENg has been set to “0” before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to set
the reset signal ECLRg to “0” until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to “0”.
(8) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg <G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Temporarily stops a movement before the execution of a block is completed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the tool.
(2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary
function completion signal EFINg is input.
The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to “0”.
(9) Block stop signal ESBKg <G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3>
(10)Block stop disable signal EMSBKg <G143.7,G155.7, G167.7, G179.7>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Enables a stop for each command block, or disables a stop for each block.
[Operation] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to “1” during the execution of a command issued
from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block being executed is completed. When
this signal is set to “0”, the buffered command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is
disabled when block stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to 1 for the block.
Fig. 17.1.1 (l), "Timing chart of block stop related signals" shows the timing chart of
command operation.
- 2354 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
ESBKg More than 8 msec
(input)
Command block [1] [2] [3]
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer [2]
Waiting buffer [1] [2]
Executing buffer [1]
Fig. 17.1.1 (l) Timing chart of block stop related signals
(11) Auxiliary function code signals
EM11g to EM48g <F132, F142, F135, F145, F138, F148, F141, F151>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
(12) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0, F134.0, F137.0, F140.0>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
(13) Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2, F134.2, F137.2, F140.2>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
(14) Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3, F134.3, F137.3, F140.3>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
(15) Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0, G154.0, G166.0, G178.0>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Completes an auxiliary function
[Operation] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by the PMC, the
auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signals EID0g to EID7g) or two bytes
(using signals EID0g to EID15g), depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter
No. 8001.
The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to EID7g and
EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM28g and EM31g to
EM48g and awaits the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary
function completion signal EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block.
The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary function strobe
signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function completion signal, are the same as
those for the auxiliary functions (M functions) under the control of the CNC. See
"Auxiliary function executing signal" for details.
- 2355 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(16) Servo-off signal ESOFg <G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Changes the servo-off state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the servo motor for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis
is turned off (servo-off state). When this signal is set to “0”, the servo motor is turned on.
When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified, entering the servo-off
state cancels torque control mode, but the torque control state remains set. In such a case,
set reset signal ECLRg to “1”.
(17) Buffering disable signal EMBUFg <G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Changes the buffering disabled state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while the executing,
waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to “1” when any of these
buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent commands are read only
when the buffers are all empty.
To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the axis control
command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a command is read when all
buffers are empty.
Fig. 17.1.1 (m), "Timing chart of buffering related signals" shows the timing chart of
command operation.
EMBUFg
(input)
Command block [1] [2]
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
Command
disabled
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
Executing buffer [1] [2]
Beginning of execution End Beginning of execution
Fig. 17.1.1 (m) Timing chart of buffering related signals
Buffering is disabled, regardless of the buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for the following commands:
(1) Skip-feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 03h)
(2) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h)
(3) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h)
(4) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h)
(5) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h)
(6) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah)
(7) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)
- 2356 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(18) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL <F129.7>
[Classification] Output signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Indicates whether PMC axis control is being exercised.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “0”, controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 can be
changed.
This signal is set to “1” in the following cases:
(1) When the tool is moving along a PMC-controlled axis
(2) When a block is being read into a buffer
(3) When the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to “1”
When this signal is set to “1”, controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 cannot be
changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in the output of an alarm PS0139,
“CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS”.
If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX8 is made when servo-off signal ESOFg is
“1”, an alarm PS0139 occurs and cannot be released simply by setting reset signal
ECLRg to “1”. In such a case, restore signals EAX1 to EAX8 or set servo-off signal
ESOFg to “0” before setting reset signal ECLRg to “1”. When a command is issued for
any of the four groups with PMC axis control, signal *EAXSL is set to “1” to disable axis
selection. Thus, changing signals EAX1 to EAX8 results in the output of an alarm
PS0139. For groups for which commands are not issued, however, axis selection is
enabled if bit 5 (DSL) of parameter No. 8004 is set accordingly.
(19) In-position signal EINPg <F130.0, F133.0, F136.0, F139.0>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the in-position state.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when the corresponding PMC-controlled axis is in the in-position
state.
When the tool is decelerated, in-position check is performed to disable the next command
until the tool enters the in-position area. The in-position check, however, can be skipped
using bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.
NOTE
When the axis is fed at a very low speed, the in -position signal
might turn to “1”.
(20) Following zero checking signal ECKZg <F130.1, F133.1, F136.1, F139.1>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the following zero state.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in-position check is being
performed for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis.
The following zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.
(21) Alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the alarm state related to PMC axis control.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or alarm PS0130, “NC
AND PMC AXIS ARE CONFLICTED” or PS0139, “CANNOT CHANGE PMC
CONTROL AXIS” occurs for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. This signal is set
to 0 when the reset signal ECLRg is set to “1” after the alarm is released, as described
below.
Servo alarm
Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC.
Overtravel alarm
Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the CNC.
- 2357 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area within the
stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h)
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h)
(3) Cutting feed - feed per rotation(EC0g to EC6g : 02h)
(4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h)
(5) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh)
(6) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh)
(7) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh)
Alarm (PS0130, PS0139)
Reset the CNC.
See "Alarms and messages" for details.
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases. Use the reset
button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or emergency stop signal *ESP.
Even if an alarm occurs on an axis not related to the group, alarm signal EIALx does not
generally change from “0” to “1”.
(22) Axis moving signal EGENg <F130.4, F133.4, F136.4, F139.4>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the state of movement on an axis.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when the tool is moving along the corresponding PMC-controlled
axis according to commands such as rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed
(EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
When the dwell command (EC0g to EC6g: 04h) is specified, this signal remains to be set
to “0”.
NOTE
This signal is set to “0” when distribution for the axis is completed
(the signal is set to “0” during deceleration).
(23) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg <F130.3, F133.3, F136.3, F139.3>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the state of auxiliary function execution.
[Operation] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the PMC, this signal is
set to “1” during the period from when auxiliary function codes EID0g to EID15g are
sent to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g until the auxiliary function
completion signal EFINg is returned.
Fig. 17.1.1 (n), "Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals" shows the timing chart
of command operation.
TMF and TFIN in the table are set in parameters Nos. 3010 and 3011.
- 2358 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Command block Auxiliary function command Next command
(input)
EM11g to EM48g
(output)
TMF
EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g
(output)
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
Fig. 17.1.1 (n) Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals
(24) Negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg <F130.6, F133.6, F136.6, F139.6>
(25) Positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg <F130.5, F133.5, F136.5, F139.5>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the overtravel state.
[Operation] These signals are set to “1” when an overtravel alarm is detected. When the stroke limit in
the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set to “1”. When the stroke limit in
the positive direction is exceeded, signal EOTPg is set to “1”. Simultaneously, alarm
signal EIALg is set to “1”.
These signals are set to 0 when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg is
set to “1”. See "Alarm signal EIALg" for details of how to release an overtravel alarm.
(26) Feedrate override signals *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g <G151 (, G163, G175, G187)>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal (group-by-group signal)
[Function] Applies cutting override.
[Operation] Like the CNC's feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7, these signals can be used to
select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from 0 to 254%, independently
of the CNC using the bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.
These signals form an eight-bit binary code and correspond to the override value as
follows:
7
Override value = ∑ 2 ×Vi %
i =0
i
Vi = 0 when signal *EFOVi is “1”
Vi = 1 when signal *EFOVi is “0”
That is, each signal has the following significance:
*EFOV7 = 128%, *EFOV3 = 8% ,
*EFOV6 = 64%, *EFOV2 = 4% ,
*EFOV5 = 32%, *EFOV1 = 2% ,
*EFOV4 = 16%, *EFOV0 = 1%
When all signals are set to “0”, the override is regarded as being 0%, as well as when all
signals are “1”.
- 2359 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005 is used to determine whether these signals are
path-by-path signals or group-by-group signals.
When the IFV parameter is set to 0, these signals are path-by-path signals. When the IFV
parameter is set to 1, these signals are group-by-group signals.
(27) 1% step rapid traverse override signals *EROV0g to *EROV7g<G151 (, G163,
G175, G187)>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal (group-by-group signal)
[Function] These signals use the same addresses as the feedrate override signals. When bit 1 (OVR)
of parameter No. 8013 is set to 1, these signals are used for rapid traverse override.
[Operation] When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 and bit 1 (OVR) of parameter No.
8013 is set to 1, these signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate,
in steps of 1% from 0% to 100%, independently of the CNC. The override is clamped to
100%.
Each corresponding signal has the following significance:
*EROV7 = 100% *EROV3 = 8%
*EROV6 = 64% *EROV2 = 4%
*EROV5 = 32% *EROV1 = 2%
*EROV4 = 16% *EROV0 = 1%
For example, to set an override of 5%, set signals *EFOV7 to *EFOV0 to 11111010,
which corresponds to a binary code of 00000101.
When bit 7 (IFH) of parameter No. 11850 is set to 0, these signals are used as
path-by-path signals. When the bit is set to 1, they are used as group-by-group signals.
NOTE
When all signals are set to “0”, an override of 100% is assumed,
while an override of 0% is assumed for *EFOVg.
(28) Override cancellation signal EOVCg <G150.5 (G162.5, G174.5, G186.5)>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal (group-by-group signal)
[Function] Disables override.
[Operation] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting the bit 2 (OVE) of
parameter No. 8001, setting this signal to “1” fixes the cutting feed override to 100%.
This signal does not affect the rapid traverse override.
Bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005 is used to determine whether these signals are
path-by-path signals or group-by-group signals.
When the IFV parameter is set to 0, these signals are path-by-path signals. When the IFV
parameter is set to 1, these signals are group-by-group signals.
(29) Rapid traverse override signals EROV1, EROV2 <Gn150.0,1>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Applies rapid traverse override.
[Operation] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently
of the CNC, by setting of the bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001.
Rapid traverse override signals Override value
EROV2 EROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.
- 2360 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
(30) Dry run signal EDRN <G150.7>
(31) Manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT <G150.6>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Applies dry run, or chooses whether to apply dry run.
[Operation] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse, independently of
the CNC, by setting the bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001. When the dry run signal
EDRN is set to “1”, the specified rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are ignored and
the tool moves at the dry run speed (set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the
specified manual feedrate override. Bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to
specify whether to enable or disable dry run for rapid traverse.
When the manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT is set to “1” during dry run, the tool
moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the maximum jog feedrate for
cutting feed. When the signal is set to “0”, the tool moves at the jog feedrate. When the
dry run signal EDRN is set to “0”, the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is
restored.
Manual rapid traverse Command from PMC
select signal At rapid traverse At Cutting feed
1 Rapid traverse rate Cutting feedrate
0 Dry run feedrate x JV (NOTE) Dry run feedrate x JV (NOTE)
or Rapid traverse rate *
* Dry run feedrate × JV when bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001 is 1. Rapid traverse
rate when parameter RDE is 0.
NOTE
When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual
feedrate override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate
is just applied.
(32) Override 0% signal EOV0 <F129.5>
[Classification] Output signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Indicates whether the override value is 0%.
[Operation] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%.
(33) Skip signal ESKIP <X004.6>, ESKIP#2 <X013.6>, ESKIP#3 <X011.6>
[Classification] Direct input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Applies skip.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1” during execution of the skip cutting command, the block
being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is executed. This signal is
unique during PMC axis control. Bit 7 (SKE) of parameter No. 8001 can be used to select
whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC and CNC, or
PMC-specific skip signal ESKIP.
This skip signal is valid for those axes that are assigned to path 1 to path 3.
For those axes that are assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid.
For those axes that are assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2 (X013.6) is valid.
For those axes that are assigned to path 3, ESKIP#3 (X011.6) is valid.
This skip signal cannot be used for those axes that are assigned to path 4.
(34) Distribution completion signals EADEN1 to EADEN32 <F112>
[Classification] Output signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Indicates the state of distribution based on PMC axis control.
- 2361 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[Operation] These signals are set to “0” when the tool is moving with a command from the PMC. The
signals are set to “1” when the tool is not moving, except when it is stopped by an axis
control temporary stop signal ESTPg during the execution of a move command.
(35) Buffer full signal EABUFg <F131.1, F134.1, F137.1, F140.1>
[Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Indicates the PMC axis control command buffering state.
[Operation] When the group input buffer holds a command block, this signal is set to “1”. When no
command is buffered, this signal is set to “0”.
(36) Controlling signals EACNT1 to EACNT32 <F182>
[Classification] Output signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Indicates that PMC axis control is being exercised.
[Operation] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to “1”, the bit signal
corresponding to an axis being controlled is set to “1”.
A bit signal is set to 1 also when the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to “1”.
(37) Accumulated zero check signal
ELCKZg <G142.1, G154.1, G166.1, G178.1>
[Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal
[Function] Makes an accumulated zero check.
[Operation] Setting this signal to “1” causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at
a subsequent cutting feed command. The accumulated zero state means that the
acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.
(1) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(2) Cutting feed -feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(3) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h)
(38) Torque control mode signal
TRQM1 to TRQM8 <F190>
[Classification] Output signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Indicates an axis in the torque control mode.
[Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, which axis is placed in the torque control mode by the
torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) based on PMC axis control is indicated.
Signal detail (Related signals)
The signals related to PMC axis control are detailed below.
The [Function] field and [Operation] field provide descriptions related to PMC axis control. For the
general functions of the signals, see the description of each signal.
(1) External deceleration signals 1
*+ED1 to *+ED8 <G118>, *-ED1 to *-ED8 <G120>
(2) External deceleration signals 2
*+ED21 to *+ED28 <G101>, *-ED21 to *-ED28 <G103>
(3) External deceleration signals 3
*+ED31 to *+ED38 <G107>, *-ED31 to *-ED38 <G109>
(4) External deceleration signals 4
*+ED41 to *+ED48 <G341>, *-ED41 to *-ED48 <G342>
(5) External deceleration signals 5
*+ED51 to *+ED58 <G343>, *-ED51 to *-ED58 <G344>
[Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Decelerates the movement along a specified axis to a parameter-set feedrate.
- 2362 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
[Operation] While a signal is set to “0” for an axis, the feedrate along the axis in the specified
direction can be forcibly decelerated to a certain feedrate (external deceleration feedrate)
set by a parameter (dependent on the type of command).
If the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, however, the specified
feedrate continues to be used.
The feedrate for other axes with these signals not set to “0” is not affected.
For details, refer to the specifications of the external deceleration function.
A signal is available for each controlled axis and for each direction. Each signal name
includes the sign + or - for direction indication, and the number at the end of each signal
name indicates a controlled axis number. These signals are shared by the CNC.
* x ED y z
z
1: Feed along the first axis is decelerated.
2: Feed along the second axis is decelerated.
3: Feed along the third axis is decelerated.
y
None: Follows external deceleration setting 1.
2: Follows external deceleration setting 2.
3: Follows external deceleration setting 3.
4: Follows external deceleration setting 4.
5: Follows external deceleration setting 5.
x
+ : Feed in the positive direction is decelerated.
- : Feed in the negative direction is decelerated.
When any of the following axis control command is specified while the bit 0 (EDC) of
parameter No. 8005 is held at 1, the external deceleration function becomes effective:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h)
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h)
(3) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h)
(4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h)
(5) First reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h)
(6) Second reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h)
(7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h)
(8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah)
(9) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)
(10) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h)
For each command above, the external deceleration feedrate settings for axis-by-axis
rapid traverse (parameters Nos. 1427, 1441, 1444, 12752, and 12755) are valid.
To cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) and cutting feed - sec/block
(EC0g to EC6g: 21h) as well, the settings for rapid traverse are applied instead of the
external deceleration feedrate settings for cutting feed (parameters Nos. 1426, 1440, 1443,
12751, and 12754).
(6) 1% rapid traverse override select signal HROV <G96.7>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
(7) 1% rapid traverse override signal *HROV0 to *HROV6 <G96.0 to G96.6>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
- 2363 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[Function] Enables override to be applied in steps of 1%. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] If the 1% rapid traverse override select signal HROV <G96.7> is set to “1” when bit 2
(OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to “0”, rapid traverse override can be specified in
steps of 1% by using the 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6
<G96.0 to G96.6>.
(8) 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal FHROV <G353.7>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
(9) 0.1% rapid traverse override signal
*FHRO0 to *FHRO9 <G352.0 to G352.7, G353.0 to G353.1>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] An override can be applied in steps of 0.1%. This signal is used with the CNC as well.
[Operation] If bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, the 0.1% rapid traverse override signals
*FHRO0 to *FHRO9 <G352.0 to G352.7, G353.0 to G353.1> enable a rapid traverse
override to be specified in steps of 0.1% when the 1% rapid traverse override select signal
HROV <G96.7> and the 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal FHROV <G353.7>
are set to “1”.
(10) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 <G14.0>, ROV2 <G14.1>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] Overrides the rapid traverse rate. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] This signal is a two-bit code signal, and sets an override value as indicated Table 17.1.1
(x).
Table 17.1.1 (x)
Rapid traverse override signal Override value
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0 (parameter No. 1421)
(11) First reference position return completion signals ZP1 to ZP8 <F94>
(12) Second reference position return completion signals ZP21 to ZP28 <F96>
(13) Third reference position return completion signals ZP31 to ZP38 <F98>
(14) Fourth reference position return completion signals ZP41 to ZP48 <F100>
[Classification] Output signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Posts that the tool is at the reference position on a controlled axis. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] The number at the end of a signal name indicates the number of a controlled axis.
Each of these signals is set to “1” when reference position return is completed, and the
tool enters the in-position area.
Each of these signals is set to “0” when a movement is made from the reference position,
an emergence stop occurs, or a servo alarm is issued.
(15) A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal
NDCAL1 to NDCAL8 <Gn202>
[Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Does not output the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm.
[Operation] While this signal is set to “1”, the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm is not
output during speed specification based on PMC axis control. Fig. 17.1.1 (o), "Timing
chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal" shows a timing chart.
- 2364 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
A/B phase detector
disconnection alarm
ignore parameter
HNG (No.2017#4)
NDCALx
(input) Even if hard disconnection
alarm is issued, servo soft
does not notify NC.
Hard disconnection
Occurs at high speed Reset by ALR
Fig. 17.1.1 (o) Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal
NOTE
1 Change the level of this signal from “1” to “0” before switching from
a speed command to a position command.
2 After switching from a speed command to a position command, be
sure to perform a manual reference position return operation before
making a movement on the axis.
3 This function cannot be used when an absolute-position detector is
attached.
4 To enable this signal, set bit 4 of parameter No. 2017 to 1.
(16) Manual pulse magnification change signal HNDMP<Gn088.3>
[Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal
[Function] In an external pulse synchronization function of the PMC axis control, the setting range
of the weight of an external pulse (multiplier) is selected.
“±1/256 to ±127” or “±1/32 to ±1023” can be selected as a setting range.
This signal becomes effective for the following the axis control command signals (EC0g
to EC6g <Gn143.0 to 6, Gn155.0 to 6, Gn167.0 to 6, Gn179.0 to 6>).
axis control command
Operation
(Hexadecimal Code)
0Bh External pulse synchronization - position coder
0Dh External pulse synchronization - first manual handle
0Eh External pulse synchronization - second manual handle
0Fh External pulse synchronization - third manual handle
[Operation] In the Case of HNDMP<Gn088.3> is “0”:
When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the
integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to
specify the fractional part.
The valid range is ±1/256 to ±127.
Integer part : Higher bits EIF8g to EIF15g (-127 to 127)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
EIF15g EIF14g EIF13g EIF12g EIF11g EIF10g EIF9g EIF8g
Fractional part : Lower bits EIF0g to EIF7g (0/256 to 255/256)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EIF7g EIF6g EIF5g EIF4g EIF3g EIF2g EIF1g EIF0g
- 2365 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
In the Case of HNDMP<Gn088.3> is “1”:
When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the
integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to
specify the fractional part.
The valid range is ±1/32 to ±1023.
Integer part : Higher bits EIF5g to EIF15g (-1023 to 1023)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
EIF15g EIF14g EIF13g EIF12g EIF11g EIF10g EIF9g EIF8g EIF7g
6 5
EIF6g EIF5g
Fractional part : Lower bits EIF0g to EIF4g (0/32 to 31/32)
4 3 2 1 0
EIF4g EIF3g EIF2g EIF1g EIF0g
NOTE
The manual handle feed amount selection signals
(MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,5>, MP21,MP22<Gn087.0,1>, MP31,
MP32<Gn087.3,4>) do not influence external pulse synchronization
weight.
Example of setting weight of pulse)
In the Case of HNDMP<Gn088.3> is “0”:
Setting of weight in fractional part
Set the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part. (0/256 to 255/256)
Example) For weight 0.5
0.5 128/256 “1000 0000”
“1000 0000” that converts 128 into a binary number is set to EIF0g-EIF7g.
Setting of negative weight
The two's complement expression is used for the setting of negative weight.
Example) For weight -2.5
2.5: “0000 0010 1000 0000”
: The bit is reversed.
“1111 1101 0111 1111”
: 1 is added to the 0th bit.
-2.5: “1111 1101 1000 0000”
List of example of setting weight of pulse
Axis control feedrate signal
Pulse weight
<EIF15g - EIF8g> <EIF7g - EIF0g>
00000000 00000000 × 0
00000000 00000001 × 1/256
00000000 00001000 × 1/32
00000001 00000000 × 1
00001010 00000000 × 10
01111111 00000000 × 127
11111111 11111111 × -1/256
11111111 11111000 × -1/32
11111111 00000000 × -1
11110110 00000000 × -10
10000001 00000000 × -127
- 2366 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
In the Case of HNDMP<Gn088.3> is “1”:
Setting of weight in fractional part
Set the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the fractional part. (0/32 to 31/32)
Example) For weight 0.5
0.5 16/32 “1 0000”
“1 0000” that converts 16 into a binary number is set to EIF0g-EIF4g.
Setting of negative weight
The two's complement expression is used for the setting of negative weight.
Example) For weight -2.5
2.5: “0000 0000 0101 0000”
: The bit is reversed.
“1111 1111 1010 1111”
: 1 is added to the 0th bit.
-2.5: “1111 1111 1011 0000”
List of example of setting weight of pulse
Axis control feedrate signal
Pulse weight
<EIF15g – EIF5g> <EIF4g - EIF0g>
00000000000 00000 × 0
00000000000 00001 × 1/32
00000000001 00000 × 1
00000001010 00000 × 10
01111111111 00000 × 1023
11111111111 11111 × -1/32
11111111111 00000 × -1
11111110110 00000 × -10
10000000001 00000 × -1023
Signal address
- Signals for PMC axis control
DI → CNC
The signals below are direct signals for PMC axis control.
For the relationships with groups assigned to signals, see Table 17.1.1 (c), "Example of Path-by-path
signal (PMC axis control override signal) allocation".
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 ESKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3
X0011 ESKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2
X0013 ESKIP
NOTE
The ESKIP signal is valid only for the axes assigned to paths 1 to 3.
PMC → CNC
Signals common to all groups (path-by-path signals)
The signals below are assigned on a path-by-path basis. For details of relationships with groups assigned
to signals, see Table 17.1.1 (c).
Example:
- 2367 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
EDRN#1 is valid for the axes assigned to groups 1 to 4.
ERT#3 is valid for the axes assigned to groups 9 to 12.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 EDRN#1 ERT#1 EOVC#1 EROV2#1 EROV1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#1 *EFOV6#1 *EFOV5#1 *EFOV4#1 *EFOV3#1 *EFOV2#1 *EFOV1#1 *EFOV0#1
G151
*EROV7#1 *EROV6#1 *EROV5#1 *EROV4#1 *EROV3#1 *EROV2#1 *EROV1#1 *EROV0#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1150 EDRN#2 ERT#2 EOVC#2 EROV2#2 EROV1#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#2 *EFOV6#2 *EFOV5#2 *EFOV4#2 *EFOV3#2 *EFOV2#2 *EFOV1#2 *EFOV0#2
G1151
*EROV7#2 *EROV6#2 *EROV5#2 *EROV4#2 *EROV3#2 *EROV2#2 *EROV1#2 *EROV0#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2150 EDRN#3 ERT#3 EOVC#3 EROV2#3 EROV1#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#3 *EFOV6#3 *EFOV5#3 *EFOV4#3 *EFOV3#3 *EFOV2#3 *EFOV1#3 *EFOV0#3
G2151
*EROV7#3 *EROV6#3 *EROV5#3 *EROV4#3 *EROV3#3 *EROV2#3 *EROV1#3 *EROV0#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3150 EDRN#4 ERT#4 EOVC#4 EROV2#4 EROV1#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#4 *EFOV6#4 *EFOV5#4 *EFOV4#4 *EFOV3#4 *EFOV2#4 *EFOV1#4 *EFOV0#4
G3151
*EROV7#4 *EROV6#4 *EROV5#4 *EROV4#4 *EROV3#4 *EROV2#4 *EROV1#4 *EROV0#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G4150 EDRN#5 ERT#5 EOVC#5 EROV2#5 EROV1#5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#5 *EFOV6#5 *EFOV5#5 *EFOV4#5 *EFOV3#5 *EFOV2#5 *EFOV1#5 *EFOV0#5
G4151
*EROV7#5 *EROV6#5 *EROV5#5 *EROV4#5 *EROV3#5 *EROV2#5 *EROV1#5 *EROV0#5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G5150 EDRN#6 ERT#6 EOVC#6 EROV2#6 EROV1#6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#6 *EFOV6#6 *EFOV5#6 *EFOV4#6 *EFOV3#6 *EFOV2#6 *EFOV1#6 *EFOV0#6
G5151
*EROV7#6 *EROV6#6 *EROV5#6 *EROV4#6 *EROV3#6 *EROV2#6 *EROV1#6 *EROV0#6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G6150 EDRN#7 ERT#7 EOVC#7 EROV2#7 EROV1#7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#7 *EFOV6#7 *EFOV5#7 *EFOV4#7 *EFOV3#7 *EFOV2#7 *EFOV1#7 *EFOV0#7
G6151
*EROV7#7 *EROV6#7 *EROV5#7 *EROV4#7 *EROV3#7 *EROV2#7 *EROV1#7 *EROV0#7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G7150 EDRN#8 ERT#8 EOVC#8 EROV2#8 EROV1#8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#8 *EFOV6#8 *EFOV5#8 *EFOV4#8 *EFOV3#8 *EFOV2#8 *EFOV1#8 *EFOV0#8
G7151
*EROV7#8 *EROV6#8 *EROV5#8 *EROV4#8 *EROV3#8 *EROV2#8 *EROV1#8 *EROV0#8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G8150 EDRN#9 ERT#9 EOVC#9 EROV2#9 EROV1#9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#9 *EFOV6#9 *EFOV5#9 *EFOV4#9 *EFOV3#9 *EFOV2#9 *EFOV1#9 *EFOV0#9
G8151
*EROV7#9 *EROV6#9 *EROV5#9 *EROV4#9 *EROV3#9 *EROV2#9 *EROV1#9 *EROV0#9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G9150 EDRN#10 ERT#10 EOVC#10 EROV2#10 EROV1#10
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7#10 *EFOV6#10 *EFOV5#10 *EFOV4#10 *EFOV3#10 *EFOV2#10 *EFOV1#10 *EFOV0#10
G9151
*EROV7#10 *EROV6#10 *EROV5#10 *EROV4#10 *EROV3#10 *EROV2#10 *EROV1#10 *EROV0#10
- 2368 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
Whether EOVC and *EFOV are group-by-group signals or path-by-path signals
is determined by bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005.
Signals common to all groups (axis-by-axis signals)
The signals below are assigned on an axis-by-axis basis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G136 EAX8#1 EAX7#1 EAX6#1 EAX5#1 EAX4#1 EAX3#1 EAX2#1 EAX1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1136 EAX8#2 EAX7#2 EAX6#2 EAX5#2 EAX4#2 EAX3#2 EAX2#2 EAX1#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2136 EAX8#3 EAX7#3 EAX6#3 EAX5#3 EAX4#3 EAX3#3 EAX2#3 EAX1#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3136 EAX8#4 EAX7#4 EAX6#4 EAX5#4 EAX4#4 EAX3#4 EAX2#4 EAX1#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G202 NDCAL8#1 NDCAL7#1 NDCAL6#1 NDCAL5#1 NDCAL4#1 NDCAL3#1 NDCAL2#1 NDCAL1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1202 NDCAL8#2 NDCAL7#2 NDCAL6#2 NDCAL5#2 NDCAL4#2 NDCAL3#2 NDCAL2#2 NDCAL1#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2202 NDCAL8#3 NDCAL7#3 NDCAL6#3 NDCAL5#3 NDCAL4#3 NDCAL3#3 NDCAL2#3 NDCAL1#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3202 NDCAL8#4 NDCAL7#4 NDCAL6#4 NDCAL5#4 NDCAL4#4 NDCAL3#4 NDCAL2#4 NDCAL1#4
- 2369 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Group-by-group signals
The signals below are assigned on a group-by-group basis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G142 EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1 ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1 ELCKZA#1 EFINA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 EC2A#1 EC1A#1 EC0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G144 EIF7A#1 EIF6A#1 EIF5A#1 EIF4A#1 EIF3A#1 EIF2A#1 EIF1A#1 EIF0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G145 EIF15A#1 EIF14A#1 EIF13A#1 EIF12A#1 EIF11A#1 EIF10A#1 EIF9A#1 EIF8A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G146 EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID0A#1
For group 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G147 EID15A#1 EID14A#1 EID13A#1 EID12A#1 EID11A#1 EID10A#1 EID9A#1 EID8A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G148 EID23A#1 EID22A#1 EID21A#1 EID20A#1 EID19A#1 EID18A#1 EID17A#1 EID16A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G149 EID31A#1 EID30A#1 EID29A#1 EID28A#1 EID27A#1 EID26A#1 EID25A#1 EID24A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 EOVCA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7A#1 *EFOV6A#1 *EFOV5A#1 *EFOV4A#1 *EFOV3A#1 *EFOV2A#1 *EFOV1A#1 *EFOV0A#1
G151
*EROV7A#1 *EROV6A#1 *EROV5A#1 *EROV4A#1 *EROV3A#1 *EROV2A#1 *EROV1A#1 *EROV0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 ELCKZB#1 EFINB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G155 EMSBKB#1 EC6B#1 EC5B#1 EC4B#1 EC3B#1 EC2B#1 EC1B#1 EC0B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G156 EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G157 EIF15B#1 EIF14B#1 EIF13B#1 EIF12B#1 EIF11B#1 EIF10B#1 EIF9B#1 EIF8B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G158 EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID0B#1
For group 2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G159 EID15B#1 EID14B#1 EID13B#1 EID12B#1 EID11B#1 EID10B#1 EID9B#1 EID8B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G160 EID23B#1 EID22B#1 EID21B#1 EID20B#1 EID19B#1 EID18B#1 EID17B#1 EID16B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G161 EID31B#1 EID30B#1 EID29B#1 EID28B#1 EID27B#1 EID26B#1 EID25B#1 EID24B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G162 EOVCB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7B#1 *EFOV6B#1 *EFOV5B#1 *EFOV4B#1 *EFOV3B#1 *EFOV2B#1 *EFOV1B#1 *EFOV0B#1
G163
*EROV7B#1 *EROV6B#1 *EROV5B#1 *EROV4B#1 *EROV3B#1 *EROV2B#1 *EROV1B#1 *EROV0B#1
- 2370 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G166 EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1 ELCKZC#1 EFINC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G167 EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G168 EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G169 EIF15C#1 EIF14C#1 EIF13C#1 EIF12C#1 EIF11C#1 EIF10C#1 EIF9C#1 EIF8C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G170 EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID0C#1
For group 3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G171 EID15C#1 EID14C#1 EID13C#1 EID12C#1 EID11C#1 EID10C#1 EID9C#1 EID8C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G172 EID23C#1 EID22C#1 EID21C#1 EID20C#1 EID19C#1 EID18C#1 EID17C#1 EID16C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G173 EID31C#1 EID30C#1 EID29C#1 EID28C#1 EID27C#1 EID26C#1 EID25C#1 EID24C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G174 EOVCC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7C#1 *EFOV6C#1 *EFOV5C#1 *EFOV4C#1 *EFOV3C#1 *EFOV2C#1 *EFOV1C#1 *EFOV0C#1
G175
*EROV7C#1 *EROV6C#1 *EROV5C#1 *EROV4C#1 *EROV3C#1 *EROV2C#1 *EROV1C#1 *EROV0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 ELCKZD#1 EFIND#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D#1 EC5D#1 EC4D#1 EC3D#1 EC2D#1 EC1D#1 EC0D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G181 EIF15D#1 EIF14D#1 EIF13D#1 EIF12D#1 EIF11D#1 EIF10D#1 EIF9D#1 EIF8D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G182 EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID0D#1
For group 4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G183 EID15D#1 EID14D#1 EID13D#1 EID12D#1 EID11D#1 EID10D#1 EID9D#1 EID8D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G184 EID23D#1 EID22D#1 EID21D#1 EID20D#1 EID19D#1 EID18D#1 EID17D#1 EID16D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G185 EID31D#1 EID30D#1 EID29D#1 EID28D#1 EID27D#1 EID26D#1 EID25D#1 EID24D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G186 EOVCD#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7D#1 *EFOV6D#1 *EFOV5D#1 *EFOV4D#1 *EFOV3D#1 *EFOV2D#1 *EFOV1D#1 *EFOV0D#1
G187
*EROV7D#1 *EROV6D#1 *EROV5D#1 *EROV4D#1 *EROV3D#1 *EROV2D#1 *EROV1D#1 *EROV0D#1
- 2371 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1142 EBUFA#2 ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2 ESOFA#2 ESBKA#2 EMBUFA#2 ELCKZA#2 EFINA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1144 EIF7A#2 EIF6A#2 EIF5A#2 EIF4A#2 EIF3A#2 EIF2A#2 EIF1A#2 EIF0A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1145 EIF15A#2 EIF14A#2 EIF13A#2 EIF12A#2 EIF11A#2 EIF10A#2 EIF9A#2 EIF8A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1146 EID7A#2 EID6A#2 EID5A#2 EID4A#2 EID3A#2 EID2A#2 EID1A#2 EID0A#2
For group 5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1147 EID15A#2 EID14A#2 EID13A#2 EID12A#2 EID11A#2 EID10A#2 EID9A#2 EID8A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1148 EID23A#2 EID22A#2 EID21A#2 EID20A#2 EID19A#2 EID18A#2 EID17A#2 EID16A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1149 EID31A#2 EID30A#2 EID29A#2 EID28A#2 EID27A#2 EID26A#2 EID25A#2 EID24A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1150 EOVCA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7A#2 *EFOV6A#2 *EFOV5A#2 *EFOV4A#2 *EFOV3A#2 *EFOV2A#2 *EFOV1A#2 *EFOV0A#2
G1151
*EROV7A#2 *EROV6A#2 *EROV5A#2 *EROV4A#2 *EROV3A#2 *EROV2A#2 *EROV1A#2 *EROV0A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2 ELCKZB#2 EFINB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1155 EMSBKB#2 EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3B#2 EC2B#2 EC1B#2 EC0B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1156 EIF7B#2 EIF6B#2 EIF5B#2 EIF4B#2 EIF3B#2 EIF2B#2 EIF1B#2 EIF0B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1157 EIF15B#2 EIF14B#2 EIF13B#2 EIF12B#2 EIF11B#2 EIF10B#2 EIF9B#2 EIF8B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1158 EID7B#2 EID6B#2 EID5B#2 EID4B#2 EID3B#2 EID2B#2 EID1B#2 EID0B#2
For group 6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1159 EID15B#2 EID14B#2 EID13B#2 EID12B#2 EID11B#2 EID10B#2 EID9B#2 EID8B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1160 EID23B#2 EID22B#2 EID21B#2 EID20B#2 EID19B#2 EID18B#2 EID17B#2 EID16B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1161 EID31B#2 EID30B#2 EID29B#2 EID28B#2 EID27B#2 EID26B#2 EID25B#2 EID24B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1162 EOVCB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7B#2 *EFOV6B#2 *EFOV5B#2 *EFOV4B#2 *EFOV3B#2 *EFOV2B#2 *EFOV1B#2 *EFOV0B#2
G1163
*EROV7B#2 *EROV6B#2 *EROV5B#2 *EROV4B#2 *EROV3B#2 *EROV2B#2 *EROV1B#2 *EROV0B#2
- 2372 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1166 EBUFC#2 ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2 ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2 EMBUFC#2 ELCKZC#2 EFINC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1168 EIF7C#2 EIF6C#2 EIF5C#2 EIF4C#2 EIF3C#2 EIF2C#2 EIF1C#2 EIF0C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1169 EIF15C#2 EIF14C#2 EIF13C#2 EIF12C#2 EIF11C#2 EIF10C#2 EIF9C#2 EIF8C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1170 EID7C#2 EID6C#2 EID5C#2 EID4C#2 EID3C#2 EID2C#2 EID1C#2 EID0C#2
For group 7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1171 EID15C#2 EID14C#2 EID13C#2 EID12C#2 EID11C#2 EID10C#2 EID9C#2 EID8C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1172 EID23C#2 EID22C#2 EID21C#2 EID20C#2 EID19C#2 EID18C#2 EID17C#2 EID16C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1173 EID31C#2 EID30C#2 EID29C#2 EID28C#2 EID27C#2 EID26C#2 EID25C#2 EID24C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1174 EOVCC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7C#2 *EFOV6C#2 *EFOV5C#2 *EFOV4C#2 *EFOV3C#2 *EFOV2C#2 *EFOV1C#2 *EFOV0C#2
G1175
*EROV7C#2 *EROV6C#2 *EROV5C#2 *EROV4C#2 *EROV3C#2 *EROV2C#2 *EROV1C#2 *EROV0C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 ELCKZD#2 EFIND#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1180 EIF7D#2 EIF6D#2 EIF5D#2 EIF4D#2 EIF3D#2 EIF2D#2 EIF1D#2 EIF0D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1181 EIF15D#2 EIF14D#2 EIF13D#2 EIF12D#2 EIF11D#2 EIF10D#2 EIF9D#2 EIF8D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1182 EID7D#2 EID6D#2 EID5D#2 EID4D#2 EID3D#2 EID2D#2 EID1D#2 EID0D#2
For group 8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1183 EID15D#2 EID14D#2 EID13D#2 EID12D#2 EID11D#2 EID10D#2 EID9D#2 EID8D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1184 EID23D#2 EID22D#2 EID21D#2 EID20D#2 EID19D#2 EID18D#2 EID17D#2 EID16D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1185 EID31D#2 EID30D#2 EID29D#2 EID28D#2 EID27D#2 EID26D#2 EID25D#2 EID24D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1186 EOVCD#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7D#2 *EFOV6D#2 *EFOV5D#2 *EFOV4D#2 *EFOV3D#2 *EFOV2D#2 *EFOV1D#2 *EFOV0D#2
G1187
*EROV7D#2 *EROV6D#2 *EROV5D#2 *EROV4D#2 *EROV3D#2 *EROV2D#2 *EROV1D#2 *EROV0D#2
- 2373 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2142 EBUFA#3 ECLRA#3 ESTPA#3 ESOFA#3 ESBKA#3 EMBUFA#3 ELCKZA#3 EFINA#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2143 EMSBKA#3 EC6A#3 EC5A#3 EC4A#3 EC3A#3 EC2A#3 EC1A#3 EC0A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2144 EIF7A#3 EIF6A#3 EIF5A#3 EIF4A#3 EIF3A#3 EIF2A#3 EIF1A#3 EIF0A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2145 EIF15A#3 EIF14A#3 EIF13A#3 EIF12A#3 EIF11A#3 EIF10A#3 EIF9A#3 EIF8A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2146 EID7A#3 EID6A#3 EID5A#3 EID4A#3 EID3A#3 EID2A#3 EID1A#3 EID0A#3
For group 9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2147 EID15A#3 EID14A#3 EID13A#3 EID12A#3 EID11A#3 EID10A#3 EID9A#3 EID8A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2148 EID23A#3 EID22A#3 EID21A#3 EID20A#3 EID19A#3 EID18A#3 EID17A#3 EID16A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2149 EID31A#3 EID30A#3 EID29A#3 EID28A#3 EID27A#3 EID26A#3 EID25A#3 EID24A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2150 EOVCA#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7A#3 *EFOV6A#3 *EFOV5A#3 *EFOV4A#3 *EFOV3A#3 *EFOV2A#3 *EFOV1A#3 *EFOV0A#3
G2151
*EROV7A#3 *EROV6A#3 *EROV5A#3 *EROV4A#3 *EROV3A#3 *EROV2A#3 *EROV1A#3 *EROV0A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2154 EBUFB#3 ECLRB#3 ESTPB#3 ESOFB#3 ESBKB#3 EMBUFB#3 ELCKZB#3 EFINB#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2155 EMSBKB#3 EC6B#3 EC5B#3 EC4B#3 EC3B#3 EC2B#3 EC1B#3 EC0B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2156 EIF7B#3 EIF6B#3 EIF5B#3 EIF4B#3 EIF3B#3 EIF2B#3 EIF1B#3 EIF0B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2157 EIF15B#3 EIF14B#3 EIF13B#3 EIF12B#3 EIF11B#3 EIF10B#3 EIF9B#3 EIF8B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 10
G2158 EID7B#3 EID6B#3 EID5B#3 EID4B#3 EID3B#3 EID2B#3 EID1B#3 EID0B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2159 EID15B#3 EID14B#3 EID13B#3 EID12B#3 EID11B#3 EID10B#3 EID9B#3 EID8B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2160 EID23B#3 EID22B#3 EID21B#3 EID20B#3 EID19B#3 EID18B#3 EID17B#3 EID16B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2161 EID31B#3 EID30B#3 EID29B#3 EID28B#3 EID27B#3 EID26B#3 EID25B#3 EID24B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2162 EOVCB#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7B#3 *EFOV6B#3 *EFOV5B#3 *EFOV4B#3 *EFOV3B#3 *EFOV2B#3 *EFOV1B#3 *EFOV0B#3
G2163
*EROV7B#3 *EROV6B#3 *EROV5B#3 *EROV4B#3 *EROV3B#3 *EROV2B#3 *EROV1B#3 *EROV0B#3
- 2374 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2166 EBUFC#3 ECLRC#3 ESTPC#3 ESOFC#3 ESBKC#3 EMBUFC#3 ELCKZC#3 EFINC#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2167 EMSBKC#3 EC6C#3 EC5C#3 EC4C#3 EC3C#3 EC2C#3 EC1C#3 EC0C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2168 EIF7C#3 EIF6C#3 EIF5C#3 EIF4C#3 EIF3C#3 EIF2C#3 EIF1C#3 EIF0C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2169 EIF15C#3 EIF14C#3 EIF13C#3 EIF12C#3 EIF11C#3 EIF10C#3 EIF9C#3 EIF8C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 11
G2170 EID7C#3 EID6C#3 EID5C#3 EID4C#3 EID3C#3 EID2C#3 EID1C#3 EID0C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2171 EID15C#3 EID14C#3 EID13C#3 EID12C#3 EID11C#3 EID10C#3 EID9C#3 EID8C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2172 EID23C#3 EID22C#3 EID21C#3 EID20C#3 EID19C#3 EID18C#3 EID17C#3 EID16C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2173 EID31C#3 EID30C#3 EID29C#3 EID28C#3 EID27C#3 EID26C#3 EID25C#3 EID24C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2174 EOVCC#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7C#3 *EFOV6C#3 *EFOV5C#3 *EFOV4C#3 *EFOV3C#3 *EFOV2C#3 *EFOV1C#3 *EFOV0C#3
G2175
*EROV7C#3 *EROV6C#3 *EROV5C#3 *EROV4C#3 *EROV3C#3 *EROV2C#3 *EROV1C#3 *EROV0C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2178 EBUFD#3 ECLRD#3 ESTPD#3 ESOFD#3 ESBKD#3 EMBUFD#3 ELCKZD#3 EFIND#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2179 EMSBKD#3 EC6D#3 EC5D#3 EC4D#3 EC3D#3 EC2D#3 EC1D#3 EC0D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2180 EIF7D#3 EIF6D#3 EIF5D#3 EIF4D#3 EIF3D#3 EIF2D#3 EIF1D#3 EIF0D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2181 EIF15D#3 EIF14D#3 EIF13D#3 EIF12D#3 EIF11D#3 EIF10D#3 EIF9D#3 EIF8D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 12
G2182 EID7D#3 EID6D#3 EID5D#3 EID4D#3 EID3D#3 EID2D#3 EID1D#3 EID0D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2183 EID15D#3 EID14D#3 EID13D#3 EID12D#3 EID11D#3 EID10D#3 EID9D#3 EID8D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2184 EID23D#3 EID22D#3 EID21D#3 EID20D#3 EID19D#3 EID18D#3 EID17D#3 EID16D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2185 EID31D#3 EID30D#3 EID29D#3 EID28D#3 EID27D#3 EID26D#3 EID25D#3 EID24D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G2186 EOVCD#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7D#3 *EFOV6D#3 *EFOV5D#3 *EFOV4D#3 *EFOV3D#3 *EFOV2D#3 *EFOV1D#3 *EFOV0D#3
G2187
*EROV7D#3 *EROV6D#3 *EROV5D#3 *EROV4D#3 *EROV3D#3 *EROV2D#3 *EROV1D#3 *EROV0D#3
- 2375 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3142 EBUFA#4 ECLRA#4 ESTPA#4 ESOFA#4 ESBKA#4 EMBUFA#4 ELCKZA#4 EFINA#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3143 EMSBKA#4 EC6A#4 EC5A#4 EC4A#4 EC3A#4 EC2A#4 EC1A#4 EC0A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3144 EIF7A#4 EIF6A#4 EIF5A#4 EIF4A#4 EIF3A#4 EIF2A#4 EIF1A#4 EIF0A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3145 EIF15A#4 EIF14A#4 EIF13A#4 EIF12A#4 EIF11A#4 EIF10A#4 EIF9A#4 EIF8A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 13
G3146 EID7A#4 EID6A#4 EID5A#4 EID4A#4 EID3A#4 EID2A#4 EID1A#4 EID0A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3147 EID15A#4 EID14A#4 EID13A#4 EID12A#4 EID11A#4 EID10A#4 EID9A#4 EID8A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3148 EID23A#4 EID22A#4 EID21A#4 EID20A#4 EID19A#4 EID18A#4 EID17A#4 EID16A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3149 EID31A#4 EID30A#4 EID29A#4 EID28A#4 EID27A#4 EID26A#4 EID25A#4 EID24A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3150 EOVCA#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7A#4 *EFOV6A#4 *EFOV5A#4 *EFOV4A#4 *EFOV3A#4 *EFOV2A#4 *EFOV1A#4 *EFOV0A#4
G3151
*EROV7A#4 *EROV6A#4 *EROV5A#4 *EROV4A#4 *EROV3A#4 *EROV2A#4 *EROV1A#4 *EROV0A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3154 EBUFB#4 ECLRB#4 ESTPB#4 ESOFB#4 ESBKB#4 EMBUFB#4 ELCKZB#4 EFINB#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3155 EMSBKB#4 EC6B#4 EC5B#4 EC4B#4 EC3B#4 EC2B#4 EC1B#4 EC0B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3156 EIF7B#4 EIF6B#4 EIF5B#4 EIF4B#4 EIF3B#4 EIF2B#4 EIF1B#4 EIF0B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3157 EIF15B#4 EIF14B#4 EIF13B#4 EIF12B#4 EIF11B#4 EIF10B#4 EIF9B#4 EIF8B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 14
G3158 EID7B#4 EID6B#4 EID5B#4 EID4B#4 EID3B#4 EID2B#4 EID1B#4 EID0B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3159 EID15B#4 EID14B#4 EID13B#4 EID12B#4 EID11B#4 EID10B#4 EID9B#4 EID8B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3160 EID23B#4 EID22B#4 EID21B#4 EID20B#4 EID19B#4 EID18B#4 EID17B#4 EID16B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3161 EID31B#4 EID30B#4 EID29B#4 EID28B#4 EID27B#4 EID26B#4 EID25B#4 EID24B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3162 EOVCB#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7B#4 *EFOV6B#4 *EFOV5B#4 *EFOV4B#4 *EFOV3B#4 *EFOV2B#4 *EFOV1B#4 *EFOV0B#4
G3163
*EROV7B#4 *EROV6B#4 *EROV5B#4 *EROV4B#4 *EROV3B#4 *EROV2B#4 *EROV1B#4 *EROV0B#4
- 2376 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3166 EBUFC#4 ECLRC#4 ESTPC#4 ESOFC#4 ESBKC#4 EMBUFC#4 ELCKZC#4 EFINC#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3167 EMSBKC#4 EC6C#4 EC5C#4 EC4C#4 EC3C#4 EC2C#4 EC1C#4 EC0C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3168 EIF7C#4 EIF6C#4 EIF5C#4 EIF4C#4 EIF3C#4 EIF2C#4 EIF1C#4 EIF0C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3169 EIF15C#4 EIF14C#4 EIF13C#4 EIF12C#4 EIF11C#4 EIF10C#4 EIF9C#4 EIF8C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 15
G3170 EID7C#4 EID6C#4 EID5C#4 EID4C#4 EID3C#4 EID2C#4 EID1C#4 EID0C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3171 EID15C#4 EID14C#4 EID13C#4 EID12C#4 EID11C#4 EID10C#4 EID9C#4 EID8C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3172 EID23C#4 EID22C#4 EID21C#4 EID20C#4 EID19C#4 EID18C#4 EID17C#4 EID16C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3173 EID31C#4 EID30C#4 EID29C#4 EID28C#4 EID27C#4 EID26C#4 EID25C#4 EID24C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3174 EOVCC#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7C#4 *EFOV6C#4 *EFOV5C#4 *EFOV4C#4 *EFOV3C#4 *EFOV2C#4 *EFOV1C#4 *EFOV0C#4
G3175
*EROV7C#4 *EROV6C#4 *EROV5C#4 *EROV4C#4 *EROV3C#4 *EROV2C#4 *EROV1C#4 *EROV0C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3178 EBUFD#4 ECLRD#4 ESTPD#4 ESOFD#4 ESBKD#4 EMBUFD#4 ELCKZD#4 EFIND#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3179 EMSBKD#4 EC6D#4 EC5D#4 EC4D#4 EC3D#4 EC2D#4 EC1D#4 EC0D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3180 EIF7D#4 EIF6D#4 EIF5D#4 EIF4D#4 EIF3D#4 EIF2D#4 EIF1D#4 EIF0D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3181 EIF15D#4 EIF14D#4 EIF13D#4 EIF12D#4 EIF11D#4 EIF10D#4 EIF9D#4 EIF8D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 16
G3182 EID7D#4 EID6D#4 EID5D#4 EID4D#4 EID3D#4 EID2D#4 EID1D#4 EID0D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3183 EID15D#4 EID14D#4 EID13D#4 EID12D#4 EID11D#4 EID10D#4 EID9D#4 EID8D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3184 EID23D#4 EID22D#4 EID21D#4 EID20D#4 EID19D#4 EID18D#4 EID17D#4 EID16D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3185 EID31D#4 EID30D#4 EID29D#4 EID28D#4 EID27D#4 EID26D#4 EID25D#4 EID24D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G3186 EOVCD#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
*EFOV7D#4 *EFOV6D#4 *EFOV5D#4 *EFOV4D#4 *EFOV3D#4 *EFOV2D#4 *EFOV1D#4 *EFOV0D#4
G3187
*EROV7D#4 *EROV6D#4 *EROV5D#4 *EROV4D#4 *EROV3D#4 *EROV2D#4 *EROV1D#4 *EROV0D#4
- 2377 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 The bits other than the override cancellation signal EOVC at the address where
EOVC is positioned are path-by-path signals. In the case of group 1, for
example, the bits <G150.0 to 4,6,7> other than G150.5 are path-by-path signals.
2 Whether EOVC and *EFOV are group-by-group signals or path-by-path signals
is determined by bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005.
CNC→PMC
Signals common to all groups (path-by-path signals)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
Signals common to all groups (axis-by-axis signals)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F112 EADEN8#1 EADEN7#1 EADEN6#1 EADEN5#1 EADEN4#1 EADEN3#1 EADEN2#1 EADEN1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F182 EACNT8#1 EACNT7#1 EACNT6#1 EACNT5#1 EACNT4#1 EACNT3#1 EACNT2#1 EACNT1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F190 TRQM8#1 TRQM7#1 TRQM6#1 TRQM5#1 TRQM4#1 TRQM3#1 TRQM2#1 TRQM1#1
Group-by-group signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1 EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 1
F131 EMF3A#1 EMF2A#1 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F132 EM28A#1 EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A#1 EM12A#1 EM11A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F142 EM48A#1 EM44A#1 EM42A#1 EM41A#1 EM38A#1 EM34A#1 EM32A#1 EM31A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F133 EBSYB#1 EOTNB#1 EOTPB#1 EGENB#1 EDENB#1 EIALB#1 ECKZB#1 EINPB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 2
F134 EMF3B#1 EMF2B#1 EABUFB#1 EMFB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F135 EM28B#1 EM24B#1 EM22B#1 EM21B#1 EM18B#1 EM14B#1 EM12B#1 EM11B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F145 EM48B#1 EM44B#1 EM42B#1 EM41B#1 EM38B#1 EM34B#1 EM32B#1 EM31B#1
- 2378 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F136 EBSYC#1 EOTNC#1 EOTPC#1 EGENC#1 EDENC#1 EIALC#1 ECKZC#1 EINPC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 3
F137 EMF3C#1 EMF2C#1 EABUFC#1 EMFC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F138 EM28C#1 EM24C#1 EM22C#1 EM21C#1 EM18C#1 EM14C#1 EM12C#1 EM11C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F148 EM48C#1 EM44C#1 EM42C#1 EM41C#1 EM38C#1 EM34C#1 EM32C#1 EM31C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F139 EBSYD#1 EOTND#1 EOTPD#1 EGEND#1 EDEND#1 EIALD#1 ECKZD#1 EINPD#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 4
F140 EMF3D#1 EMF2D#1 EABUFD#1 EMFD#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F141 EM28D#1 EM24D#1 EM22D#1 EM21D#1 EM18D#1 EM14D#1 EM12D#1 EM11D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F151 EM48D#1 EM44D#1 EM42D#1 EM41D#1 EM38D#1 EM34D#1 EM32D#1 EM31D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTPA#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2 EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 5
F1131 EMF3A#2 EMF2A#2 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1132 EM28A#2 EM24A#2 EM22A#2 EM21A#2 EM18A#2 EM14A#2 EM12A#2 EM11A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1142 EM48A#2 EM44A#2 EM42A#2 EM41A#2 EM38A#2 EM34A#2 EM32A#2 EM31A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1133 EBSYB#2 EOTNB#2 EOTPB#2 EGENB#2 EDENB#2 EIALB#2 ECKZB#2 EINPB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 6
F1134 EMF3B#2 EMF2B#2 EABUFB#2 EMFB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1135 EM28B#2 EM24B#2 EM22B#2 EM21B#2 EM18B#2 EM14B#2 EM12B#2 EM11B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1145 EM48B#2 EM44B#2 EM42B#2 EM41B#2 EM38B#2 EM34B#2 EM32B#2 EM31B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1136 EBSYC#2 EOTNC#2 EOTPC#2 EGENC#2 EDENC#2 EIALC#2 ECKZC#2 EINPC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 7
F1137 EMF3C#2 EMF2C#2 EABUFC#2 EMFC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1138 EM28C#2 EM24C#2 EM22C#2 EM21C#2 EM18C#2 EM14C#2 EM12C#2 EM11C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1148 EM48C#2 EM44C#2 EM42C#2 EM41C#2 EM38C#2 EM34C#2 EM32C#2 EM31C#2
- 2379 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1139 EBSYD#2 EOTND#2 EOTPD#2 EGEND#2 EDEND#2 EIALD#2 ECKZD#2 EINPD#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 8
F1140 EMF3D#2 EMF2D#2 EABUFD#2 EMFD#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1141 EM28D#2 EM24D#2 EM22D#2 EM21D#2 EM18D#2 EM14D#2 EM12D#2 EM11D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1151 EM48D#2 EM44D#2 EM42D#2 EM41D#2 EM38D#2 EM34D#2 EM32D#2 EM31D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2130 EBSYA#3 EOTNA#3 EOTPA#3 EGENA#3 EDENA#3 EIALA#3 ECKZA#3 EINPA#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 9
F2131 EMF3A#3 EMF2A#3 EABUFA#3 EMFA#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2132 EM28A#3 EM24A#3 EM22A#3 EM21A#3 EM18A#3 EM14A#3 EM12A#3 EM11A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2142 EM48A#3 EM44A#3 EM42A#3 EM41A#3 EM38A#3 EM34A#3 EM32A#3 EM31A#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2133 EBSYB#3 EOTNB#3 EOTPB#3 EGENB#3 EDENB#3 EIALB#3 ECKZB#3 EINPB#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 10
F2134 EMF3B#3 EMF2B#3 EABUFB#3 EMFB#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2135 EM28B#3 EM24B#3 EM22B#3 EM21B#3 EM18B#3 EM14B#3 EM12B#3 EM11B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2145 EM48B#3 EM44B#3 EM42B#3 EM41B#3 EM38B#3 EM34B#3 EM32B#3 EM31B#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2136 EBSYC#3 EOTNC#3 EOTPC#3 EGENC#3 EDENC#3 EIALC#3 ECKZC#3 EINPC#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 11
F2137 EMF3C#3 EMF2C#3 EABUFC#3 EMFC#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2138 EM28C#3 EM24C#3 EM22C#3 EM21C#3 EM18C#3 EM14C#3 EM12C#3 EM11C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2148 EM48C#3 EM44C#3 EM42C#3 EM41C#3 EM38C#3 EM34C#3 EM32C#3 EM31C#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2139 EBSYD#3 EOTND#3 EOTPD#3 EGEND#3 EDEND#3 EIALD#3 ECKZD#3 EINPD#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 12
F2140 EMF3D#3 EMF2D#3 EABUFD#3 EMFD#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2141 EM28D#3 EM24D#3 EM22D#3 EM21D#3 EM18D#3 EM14D#3 EM12D#3 EM11D#3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F2151 EM48D#3 EM44D#3 EM42D#3 EM41D#3 EM38D#3 EM34D#3 EM32D#3 EM31D#3
- 2380 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3130 EBSYA#4 EOTNA#4 EOTPA#4 EGENA#4 EDENA#4 EIALA#4 ECKZA#4 EINPA#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 13
F3131 EMF3A#4 EMF2A#4 EABUFA#4 EMFA#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3132 EM28A#4 EM24A#4 EM22A#4 EM21A#4 EM18A#4 EM14A#4 EM12A#4 EM11A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3142 EM48A#4 EM44A#4 EM42A#4 EM41A#4 EM38A#4 EM34A#4 EM32A#4 EM31A#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3133 EBSYB#4 EOTNB#4 EOTPB#4 EGENB#4 EDENB#4 EIALB#4 ECKZB#4 EINPB#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 14
F3134 EMF3B#4 EMF2B#4 EABUFB#4 EMFB#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3135 EM28B#4 EM24B#4 EM22B#4 EM21B#4 EM18B#4 EM14B#4 EM12B#4 EM11B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3145 EM48B#4 EM44B#4 EM42B#4 EM41B#4 EM38B#4 EM34B#4 EM32B#4 EM31B#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3136 EBSYC#4 EOTNC#4 EOTPC#4 EGENC#4 EDENC#4 EIALC#4 ECKZC#4 EINPC#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 15
F3137 EMF3C#4 EMF2C#4 EABUFC#4 EMFC#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3138 EM28C#4 EM24C#4 EM22C#4 EM21C#4 EM18C#4 EM14C#4 EM12C#4 EM11C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3148 EM48C#4 EM44C#4 EM42C#4 EM41C#4 EM38C#4 EM34C#4 EM32C#4 EM31C#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3139 EBSYD#4 EOTND#4 EOTPD#4 EGEND#4 EDEND#4 EIALD#4 ECKZD#4 EINPD#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group 16
F3140 EMF3D#4 EMF2D#4 EABUFD#4 EMFD#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3141 EM28D#4 EM24D#4 EM22D#4 EM21D#4 EM18D#4 EM14D#4 EM12D#4 EM11D#4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F3151 EM48D#4 EM44D#4 EM42D#4 EM41D#4 EM38D#4 EM34D#4 EM32D#4 EM31D#4
- 2381 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Related signals
DI → CNC
The signals below are direct signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3
X011 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2
X013 SKIP
PMC → CNC
The signals below are input signals related to PMC axis control.
For axis-type signals, addresses for the 1st axis to 8th axis are indicated. For path-type signals, addresses
for group 1 are indicated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G088 HNDMP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G101 *+ED28 *+ED27 *+ED26 *+ED25 *+ED24 *+ED23 *+ED22 *+ED21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 *-ED28 *-ED27 *-ED26 *-ED25 *-ED24 *-ED23 *-ED22 *-ED21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G107 *+ED38 *+ED37 *+ED36 *+ED35 *+ED34 *+ED33 *+ED32 *+ED31
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 *-ED8 *-ED7 *-ED6 *-ED5 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G202 NDCAL8 NDCAL7 NDCAL6 NDCAL5 NDCAL4 NDCAL3 NDCAL2 NDCAL1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G341 *+ED48 *+ED47 *+ED46 *+ED45 *+ED44 *+ED43 *+ED42 *+ED41
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G342 *-ED48 *-ED47 *-ED46 *-ED45 *-ED44 *-ED43 *-ED42 *-ED41
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G343 *+ED58 *+ED57 *+ED56 *+ED55 *+ED54 *+ED53 *+ED52 *+ED51
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G344 *-ED58 *-ED57 *-ED56 *-ED55 *-ED54 *-ED53 *-ED52 *-ED51
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G352 *FHRO7 *FHRO6 *FHRO5 *FHRO4 *FHRO3 *FHRO2 *FHRO1 *FHRO0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G353 FHROV *FHRO9 *FHRO8
- 2382 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
CNC → PMC
The signals below are output signals related to PMC axis control.
For axis-type signals, addresses for the 1st axis to 8th axis are indicated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F096 ZP28 ZP27 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F098 ZP38 ZP37 ZP36 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 INI Unit of input
0: In metrics
1: In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis
0: Mirror image is off. (Normal)
1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
- 2383 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx DIAx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:
0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:
0: + direction
1: - direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RABx ROAx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROAx The rotary axis roll-over is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotary axis (for which bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
#1 RABx In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the direction
0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZPR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2384 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used
(when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). If a workpiece
coordinate system function is provided, making a manual reference
position return always causes the workpiece coordinate system to
be established on the basis of the workpiece zero point offset
(parameters Nos. 1220 to 1226), irrespective of this parameter
setting.
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the reference position in the machine coordinate system.
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system
1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.
Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is
1250
performed
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for performing
automatic coordinate system setting.
- 2385 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] Degree
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis.
For the rotary axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JOV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 JOV Jog override is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled (tied to 100%)
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
- 2386 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each
axis.
NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter No. 1420 (rapid traverse rate
for each axis) is assumed.
2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set
in this parameter, regardless of the setting of bit 4 (JRV) of
parameter No. 1402.
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1805 TRE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 TRE When bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0 (not to perform follow-up operation
with a torque control command in PMC axis control), the servo error counter is:
0: Updated.
When the error count exceeds the maximum allowable cumulative travel value
(parameter No. 1885), the alarm SV0423, “EXCESS ERROR INTORQUE” is
issued.
1: Not updated.
No errors are accumulated, so that the alarm SV0423 is not issued. When the
maximum allowable feedrate is exceeded, however, the alarm SV0422, “EXCESS
VELOCITY IN TORQUE” is issued.
To return to position control when this parameter bit is set to 1, a reference position
return operation needs to be performed.
- 2387 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
1826 In-position width for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The in-position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute
value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is
assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)
1827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4
(CCI) of parameter No. 1801=1.
1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.)
When the servo error amount never exceeds this parameter value before leaving the limit
switch for the deceleration in reference position return, alarm (PS0090), "REFERENCE
RETURN INCOMPLETE" occurs.
1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set a maximum allowable cumulative travel value (error counter value) during torque
control. If the cumulative travel value exceeds the set value, the servo alarm SV0423,
“EXCESS ERROR INTORQUE” is issued.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No.
1803 is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
- 2388 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Set a positional deviation value when torque control is canceled to return to positional
deviation. After the positional deviation has fallen to the parameter-set value, switching
to position control is performed.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No.
1803 is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 DGP
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 DGP Upon power-up, the digital servo parameter specific to a motor is:
0: Set.
1: Not set.
When this parameter is set to 0 after the motor type is set, the digital servo parameter is
automatically set to the standard value appropriate for the motor type and this parameter
is set to 1 at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2007 TRQ
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#7 TRQ Torque control is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2017 HTN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#4 HTN In the speed command mode, the hardware broken wire alarm for the separate detector is:
0: Detected.
1: Ignored.
2105 Torque constant
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
[Unit of data] 0.00001Nm/ (torque command)
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter is set for each torque characteristic.
- 2389 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the data unit is 0.001 N/(1 torque
command).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:
0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.
Signal of negative logic:
- Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<Gn012>
- Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<Gn013>
- Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187>
- Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<Fn078>
Signals of positive logic:
- Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<Gn014.0, Gn014.1>
- Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<Fn076.4, Fn076.5>
- Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, G0150.1/G0162.0, G0162.1/G0174.0,
G0174.1/G0186.0, G0186.1>
The signals indicated below are not affected.
- 1% step rapid traverse override selection signal HROV <Gn096.7>
- 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 <Gn096.0 to
Gn096.6>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV <Gn353.7>
- 0.1% step rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 <Gn352.0 to
Gn352.7, Gn353.0 to Gn353.1>
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
The time required to send strobe signals MF<Fn007.0>, SF<Fn007.2>, TF<Fn007.3>,
and BF<Fn007.7> after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively.
- 2390 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
Delay time
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 4 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of four
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 0 is set, 4 ms is assumed.
If the high speed M/S/T/B interface is used, when 0 is set, 0 ms
is assumed.
The time count period may change, depending on the system.
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word path
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal
(FIN).
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
FIN sigal
Ignored because shorter Valid because longer
than min. signal width than min. signal width
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 4 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of four
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 0 is set, 4 ms is assumed.
The time count period may change, depending on the system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 PPD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2391 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set
0: Not preset
1: Preset
NOTE
If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative
position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
(1) Manual reference position return
(2) Coordinate system setting based on G92 (G50 for G code
system A on the lathe system)
(3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1
(G50.3 for G code system A on the lathe system)
(4) When a T code for the lathe system is specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the actual speed display
0: Added
1: Not added
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDFx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#3 NDFx In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a selected axis is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK <Gn044.1> is valid for PMC-controlled axes
0: Valid
1: Invalid
The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx <Gn108> depends on the setting of bit 1 of
parameter No. 8006.
#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
- 2392 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.
No. 8001 = 0
Signals 8001 = 1
(same signals as those
(signals specific to the PMC)
used for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <G012> *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 <G151>
Override cancellation signal OVC <G006.4> EOVC <G150.5>
ROV1,2 <G014.0,1> EROV1,2 <G150.0,1>
Rapid traverse override signals or
*EROV0 to *EROV7 <G151>
Dry run signal DRN <G46.7> EDRN <G150.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection RT <G19.7> ERT <G150.6>
signal
(The listed signal addresses when PMC signals are selected are for the 1st group. Actual
addresses differs depending on the used group.)
NOTE
When PMC control is performed with more than four times as many
groups as the number of NC paths, the signals shown in "same
signals as those used for the CNC" cannot be used for the excess
paths and groups. Therefore, set this parameter to 1 for this case.
#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#5 NCC When the program specifies a move command for a PMC-controlled axis (with the
controlled axis selection signal EAX <G0136> set to “1”) not placed under PMC axis
control:
0: CNC command is valid.
1: The alarm PS0130, “NC AND PMC AXIS ARE CONFLICTED” is issued.
#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command (12H) output size is:
0: 1 byte (0 to 255)
1: 2 bytes (0 to 65535)
#7 SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC
0: Uses the same signal SKIP <X004.7, X013.7, or X011.7> as CNC.
1: Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP <X004.6, X013.6, or X011.6> used by the
PMC.
WARNING
If signal ESKIP<X004.6, X013.6, or X011.6> is used by another
usage when you set 1 to this parameter, it may cause an
unexpected machine behavior. Be careful enough that you must
prevent the competition of the used X address.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 DWE RPD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2393 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes
0: Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC
#1 DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the
increment system is IS-C
0: 1ms
1: 0.1ms
#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control
The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C
Millimeter input 0 10 1 0.1
(mm/min) 1 100 10 1
Inch input 0 0.1 0.01 0.001
(inch/min) 1 1 0.1 0.01
#4 PF1
#5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
0 1 1 / 10
1 0 1 / 100
1 1 1 / 1000
#6 FR1
#7 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
(1)T series
[Unit of data]
Unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No.
8002.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated following table
must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev
(2)M series
[Unit of data]
Unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No.
8002.
- 2394 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.01 0.0001 0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1
[Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated following table
must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 FEX
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#3 FEX The maximum feedrate that can be achieved by the machine during cutting feed or
continuous feed in PMC axis control is:
0: Not extended.
1: Extended.
Restrictions
- Parameters for setting the time constants for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
When as the acceleration/deceleration type, linear acceleration/ deceleration after
interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation is used for
each of rapid traverse, cutting feed, and manual feed, the maximum allowable time
constant is a half of the maximum value that can be set conventionally.
The time constant parameters used are as follows:
Parameter No. Meaning
1620 Time constant (T) used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse
for each axis, or time constant (T1) used for bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
1621 Time constant (T2) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis
1626 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in
the mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
5271 to 5274 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first to
fourth gears)
5365 to 5368 Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping (first
to fourth gears)
- The waveform display function of VCMD on the Servo Guide or the Servo Guide
Mate.
- 2395 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
As the feedrate increases, more data is acquired for VCMD waveform display,
which can prevent waveforms from being displayed correctly.
CAUTION
1 When this function is enabled, the feedrate is extended to the
maximum value that can be specified for cutting feed or continuous
feed in PMC axis control if CMR is 1. If CMR is greater than 1, the
feedrate is limited to a value smaller than the maximum value that
can be specified.
2 Note that the maximum motor speed may be exceeded depending
on the feedrate specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NCI DSL JFM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is
specified in axis control by the PMC.
Increment Bit 2 (JFM) of Millimeter input Inch input Rotation axis
system No. 8004 (mm/min) (inch/min) (degree/min)
0 1 0.01 1
IS-B
1 200 2.00 200
0 0.1 0.001 0.1
IS-C
1 20 0.200 20
#5 DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled:
0: An alarm PS0139, “CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL AXIS” is issued.
1: The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified group.
#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 IFV EVP DRR R10 CDI EDC
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#1 CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a
PMC-controlled axis:
0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius.
1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with
a radius.
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1 (A move
command for each axis is based on diameter specification.)
- 2396 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#2 R10 When the bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1, the unit for specifying a rapid
traverse rate for the PMC axis is:
0: 1 mm/min.
1: 10mm/min.
#3 DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EVP Speed command in PMC axis control is executed by:
0: Velocity control.
1: Position control.
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS16 type (bit 2 (VCP)
of parameter No. 8007 is 1).
#5 IFV When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 in PMC axis control, the feedrate
override signal *EFOVx and the override cancel signal OVC are:
0: Used on a path-by-path basis. (The start groups (1st group, 5th group, ... 33rd group,
37th group) of each path are used.)
1: Used on a group-by-group basis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8006 EZR EFD MLS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#1 MLS When bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock
signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of
feedrate data is:
0: Unchanged (1 times).
1: 100 times greater.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
is invalid.
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is:
0: Invalid.
With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm PS0224, “ZERO RETURN NOT
FINISHED” is not issued.
1: Valid.
A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an
NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8007 ESY VCP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
- 2397 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#2 VCP Speed command in PMC axis control is:
0: FS15 type.
1: FS16 type.
#3 ESY In PMC axis control, external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 EMRx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to
MI8 <G106.0 to .7> set to 1 or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1.
If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the
CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is
set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1 to 40
Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.
For addresses of the fifth group and up, 1000 is added in steps of 4 groups.
For example:
The start address of the 10th group is G2154.
The start address of the 25th axis is G6142.
P8010 Description
1 DI/DO 1st group <G142 to G153> is used.
2 DI/DO 2nd group <G154 to G165> is used.
3 DI/DO 3rd group <G166 to G177> is used.
4 DI/DO 4th group <G178 to G189> is used.
5 DI/DO 5th group <G1142 to G1153> is used.
6 DI/DO 6th group <G1154 to G1165> is used.
: :
13 DI/DO 13th group <G3142 to G3153> is used.
: :
20 DI/DO 20th group <G4178 to G4189> is used.
21 DI/DO 21st group <G5142toG5153> is used.
: :
29 DI/DO 29th group <G7142toG7153> is used.
: :
35 DI/DO 35th group <G8166toG8177> is used.
36 DI/DO 36th group <G8178toG8189> is used.
37 DI/DO 37th group <G9142toG9153> is used.
38 DI/DO 38th group <G9154toG9165> is used.
39 DI/DO 39th group <G9166toG9177> is used.
- 2398 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
P8010 Description
40 DI/DO 40th group <G9178toG9189> is used.
NOTE
When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled
by the PMC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8013 R20x ROP OVR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 OVR When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1, for rapid traverse override in PMC
axis control:
0: Rapid traverse override signals EROV2 and EROV1 <G150.1 and G150.0> for
PMC axis control are used.
1: 1% step rapid traverse override signals *EROV7 to *EROV0 <G151> for PMC axis
control are used.
(The listed signal addresses when PMC signals are selected are for the 1st group. Actual
addresses differs depending on the used group.)
#3 ROP When rotation axis rollover is enabled for an axis controlled in PMC axis control, the
direction in which a movement (rotation) is performed to reach an end point by a
reference position return command 07H to 0AH (equivalent to G28, G30P2/P3/P4) is:
0: Determined by the sign of the specified value.
1: The direction in the shortest path.
NOTE
ROPx is valid only when bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 1 and bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0.
#4 R20x When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis
control for the rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of
parameter No.1008 is set to 1), setting the bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008 which
specifies the direction of the rotation for an absolute command is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
The above direction of the rotation is as follows by setting the bit 1 (RABx) of parameter
No.1008 and the bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013.
Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013
0 1
Bit 1 (RABx) of 0 Direction of the shortest path Direction of the shortest path
parameter No.1008 Direction of sign of the amount Direction of sign of the
1
of the movement to be made command value
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8019 EZC PIA EOS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2399 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#0 EOS In external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) in PMC axis control,
the serial spindle to be synchronized is:
0: The first spindle of path 1.
1: Any spindle.
NOTE
If EOS is set to 0, only the servo axis of path 1 can be specified.
#1 PIA After the move command of PMC axis control is interrupted by reset signal ECLRg, If
different acceleration/deceleration type command without waiting for a deceleration stop
generates:
0: Not alarm.
1: Alarm DS1451, "IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND".
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#2 EZC If the controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are "0" or PMC controlled-axis
selection variable (#8700) is 0, the PMC axis control command generates:
0: Not alarm.
1: Alarm DS1451, "IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND".
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
8020 FL rate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
For each axis, this parameter sets a feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration for reference
position return in PMC axis control.
NOTE
If 0 is specified, the value of parameter No. 1425 is used.
8022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control.
- 2400 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
8028 Time for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for parameter No. 8032 or this parameter. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8032, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8030
axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1622 is used.
The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear
acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.
FL rate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis
8031
control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
For each axis, this parameters sets a lower feedrate limit (FL rate) for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1623 is used.
However, be sure to set 0 in this parameter and parameter No.
1623 for all axes at all times except for special purposes. If a value
other than 0 is specified, correct linear or circular figures cannot be
obtained.
8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
- 2401 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for this parameter or parameter No. 8028. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8028, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
Amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment when speed command in
8040
PMC axis control is velocity control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment
when speed command in PMC axis control is velocity control.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS16 type (bit 2
(VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and is executed by position control (bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005 is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11850 IFH CMI
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 CMI If, in PMC axis control, a rapid traverse rate is specified with the axis control block data
signal, with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 being set to 1, the rapid traverse rate is:
0: Always treated as being in millimeters.
1: Dependent on the setting of bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
#7 IFH When bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 in PMC axis control, the 1% rapid
traverse override signals *EROVs are:
0: On a path-by-path basis. (The first groups in the individual paths (first, fifth,
ninth, ..., 33rd, and 37th groups) are used.)
1: On a group-by-group basis.
Depending on this parameter and bit 1 (OVR) of parameter No. 8013, selected signals are
as given in the table below.
(The signal addresses are those in the first path, and the actual addresses differ depending
on the group used.)
Bit 7 (IFH) of No. 11850 = 0 Bit 7 (IFH) of No. 11850 = 1
(*EROVs are on a (*EROVs are on a
path-by-path basis.) group-by-group basis.)
EROV1, EROV2 EROV1, EROV2
Bit 1 (OVR) of No. 8013 = 0
<G150.0, G150.1> <G150.0, G150.1>
*EROVA<G151>
*EROVB<G163>
Bit 1 (OVR) of No. 8013 = 1 *EROV<G151>
*EROVC<G175>
*EROVD<G187>
- 2402 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
Overrides are clamped at up to 100%.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12730 PTC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 PTC Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a
speed command in PMC axis control is:
0: Normal.
1: Extended.
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS16 type (bit 2 (VCP)
of parameter No. 8007 is 1).
Time constant 2 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command continuous feed under PMC
12731
axis control
Time constant 3 of linear acceleration/deceleration in velocity command continuous feed under PMC
12732
axis control
4th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12733
command in PMC axis control
5th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12734
command in PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
If 0 is specified, the time constant at a given feedrate becomes invalid, and
acceleration/deceleration is not performed.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS16 type (bit 2
(VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(bit 0 (PTC) of parameter No. 12730 is 1).
1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12735
PMC axis control
2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12736
PMC axis control
3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12737
PMC axis control
4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12738
PMC axis control
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] min-1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set feedrate parameters as following.
- 2403 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
No. 12735 < No. 12736 < No. 12737 < No. 12738.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS16 type (bit 2
(VCP) of parameter No. 8007) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(bit 0 (PTC) of parameter No. 12730 is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
18050 OTW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#7 OTW If an axis move command is executed with PMC axis control during automatic operation,
and the NC block under execution is stopped by a feed hold when the axis moving due to
PMC axis control is completed, the amount of movement due to PMC axis control in that
block is:
0: Not reflected in the NC coordinate system.
1: Reflected in the NC coordinate system.
NOTE
This parameter is FANUC recommendation setting parameter
(fixed type). For details, refer to the appendix "FANUC
recommendation setting parameter" in this manual.
Alarm and message
Servo and overtravel alarms for PMC axis control are detected in the same way as for CNC controlled
axes.
When an alarm is issued, the alarm signal EIALg is set to “1” for notification to the PMC in addition to
normal alarm processing.
(When an overtravel alarm is issued, the negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg or the
positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to “1”.)
The alarm signal EIALg is reset using the reset signal ECLRg.
CAUTION
If an alarm is issued by a PMC axis control command or in connection with PMC
axis control, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to “1” in addition to a reset
operation on the NC.
- Alarms related to contention with the NC
Alarm PS0130
In general, if the CNC and PMC attempt to simultaneously control an axis not subject to superimposition,
the alarm PS0130 is issued.
This alarm is issued in the following cases:
• When cutting feed with an override of 0% is performed along the axis, or the tool is temporarily
stopped along the axis (with the axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg set to “1”), this alarm is
issued. (During feed hold or single block stop, a PMC axis control command is valid, not resulting in
an alarm.)
• When a command is issued from the CNC for an axis controlled by the PMC
• When a move command is issued from the PMC for an axis on the polar coordinate interpolation
plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 command)
- 2404 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Alarm PS5131
If a command related to 3-dimensional coordinate conversion or polar coordinate interpolation is
specified during PMC axis control, the alarm PS5131 is issued.
- Alarms due to setting modifications made during PMC axis control
Alarm PS0139
If parameter No. 8010 is modified during PMC axis control, or the level of the control axis selection
signal EAXx for an axis under PMC axis control is changed, the alarm PS0139 is issued.
- Other alarms
Alarm PS0224
If a PMC axis control command is specified without performing a reference position return operation
even once after the power is turned off when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, the alarm
PS0224 is issued.
Alarm PS5065
If a PMC axis control command is executed by assigning axes with different increment systems to the
same group, the alarm PS5065 is issued.
Number Message Description
PS0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
PS0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC axis
CONTROL AXIS is being controlled.
PS0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED Reference position return has not been performed before the
automatic operation starts. Perform reference position return only
when the bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0.
PS5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC Axes having different increment systems have been specified in
AXIS) the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of
parameter No. 8010.
PS5131 NC COMMAND IS NOT The PMC axis control and 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
COMPATIBLE or a polar coordinate interpolation were specified simultaneously.
PS0220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the
SYNCHR-MODE NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous
axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder.
DS1184 PARAMETER ERROR IN An invalid parameter was set for torque control.
TORQUE The torque constant parameter is set to 0.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as a
parameter was exceeded.
DS1451 IMPROPER PMC AXIS 1. During deceleration of PMC axis control, next PMC axis
COMMAND control command is commanded. Correct PMC ladder
sequence to execute the next command after the PMC axis
control is stopped.
2. While the controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 or
PMC controlled-axis selection variable (#8700) are “0”, PMC
axis control command is commanded. Correct PMC ladder
sequence or macro executor program so that the signal or
variable is set to 1.
- 2405 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Warning
WARNING
1 PMC axis control must be executed while the controlled axis selection signals
EAX1 to EAX8 are "1". If controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are "0",
the command cannot be accepted.
2 PMC axis control is able to command by PMC ladder and macro executor.
In case of use PMC axis control, “controlled axis selection” and “PMC axis
control command”, use the same command method. If you use the different
command method to “controlled axis selection” and “PMC axis control
command”, “PMC axis control command” may be ignored, or the command may
execute incorrect axis motion. Therefore, the machine may behave in an
unexpected manner.
Controlled axis PMC ladder Macro executor
selection command command
NG
OK OK
PMC axis control PMC ladder Macro executor
command command command
Caution
CAUTION
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses have no effect.
2 CNC-controlled feed hold *SP, single block stop SBK, reset signal ERS, and
interlock of all axes or each axis are invalid for PMC axis control, but similar
control is enabled by operating the PMC signals (ESTPg, ESBKg, and ECLRg).
3 Emergency stop is enabled.
4 If cutting feed blocks are specified in succession, deceleration is not performed
between blocks (acceleration/deceleration is applied, however, when the
specification of a feedrate changes), and cutting proceeds to the next block
without waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. At the end of a block
other than for cutting feed, the tool is temporarily decelerated. The next block is
then executed after waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. When bit 6
(NCI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to 1, cutting can proceed to the next block
without making an in-position check for each block.
5 Under PMC axis control, manual absolute mode is always set. If the PMC starts
control of an axis after manual intervention (manual continuous feed, manual
handle feed, etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual
absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to “1”), manual absolute mode is set.
6 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis commands. Even for
the auxiliary functions, the position check is effective.
7 When the CNC executes the command to set the workpiece coordinate system
setting (G54 to G59) during an axial movement by PMC axis control command, a
valid coordinate system cannot be set.
- 2406 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
CAUTION
8 If the alarm PS0139 is issued due to a modification to parameter No. 8010, the
alarm is issued with all paths. After resetting the alarm, input the reset signal
ECLRg for all groups before a start.
9 After the execution of a move command in PMC axis control during NC
automatic operation, to execute a move command (in the absolute or
incremental mode) for the relevant axis in an NC block during the same
operation, execute the following method (1) or (2).
Note that in case of speed command or torque control, execute the method (2)
because the method (1) can not be executed.
(1) Execute the PMC axis command by M code preventing buffering.
Execute the PMC axis command while the system is waiting for
the FIN signal for an M code preventing buffering. Then, after the completion
of that PMC axis command, return the FIN signal for the M code preventing
buffering.
For example, in the following program, to execute the move command (N40)
after the tool is moved along the Y-axis using a PMC axis command, the
PMC axis command must be controlled within the M code preventing
buffering (N20):
When the speed command or torque control command in PMC axis control is
specified, execute the method (2) instead of this method.
O0001
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; → Y axis moves by PMC axis command.
N30 X70.0 ;
N40 Y50.0 ;
N50 M02 ;
Control under the following setting.
- Set an M code preventing buffering for the M55 block (Example: set 55 in
parameter No. 3411).
- During M55 block, start PMC axis command. And, after the PMC axis
command ends, the FIN signal for M55 is returned.
- After PMC axis operation, to restart automatic operation stopped by feed
hold or single block stop, the amount of travel according to PMC axis
control must be reflected in the program coordinate system even when
incremental programming is used for the NC program.
To perform the feed hold stop during PMC axis control, set bit 7 (OTW) of
parameter No.18050 to 1.
- 2407 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
CAUTION
(2)-1 After the PMC axis command ends, specify each axis workpiece
coordinate system preset signal M code.
After the PMC axis command ends, specify each axis workpiece coordinate
system preset signal M code before the move command of NC block. Refer
to "Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal" for details.
(2)-2 After the PMC axis command ends, specify workpiece coordinate system
preset.
As well as (2)-1, after the PMC axis command ends, specify workpiece
coordinate system preset before the move command of NC block.
For example, in the following program, to execute the move command(N50)
after the tool is moved along the Y-axis using a PMC axis command, each
axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal or workpiece coordinate
system preset must be specified in N40.
O0002
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20.0 Y30.0 F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; → Y axis moves start by PMC axis command.
N30 X70.0 ;
N40 M60 ; → Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal M code
is specified. Or, workpiece coordinate system preset
(G92.1Y0) is specified.
N50 Y50. ;
N60 M02 ;
When the speed command or torque control command in PMC axis control is
specified, this method is only applicable to the setting that the coordinates
are updated.
10 Both feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward function are unavailable
for PMC axis.
11 For the axis under Cs contour control, PMC axis control can be used only
following command.
- Rapid traverse (00h)
- Cutting feed (01h)
- Continuous feed (06h)
- Machine coordinate system selection (20h)
- Speed command (10h) for FS16i type position control
( bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No.8007 is set to 1 and bit 4 (EVP) of parameter
No.8005 is set to 1 )
Note
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of movement along a PMC-controlled axis
can be displayed if the bit 3 (ZDF) of parameter No. 3115 is set to 1.
2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference position is retained in
memory, even after the power is turned off.
- 2408 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
3 For an index table indexing axis, no PMC axis control command can be
specified.
4 The individual output of the auxiliary function is provided by adding a signal for
individual output. The timing diagram of controlling and specifying the auxiliary
function is not changed. The normal specifications of the auxiliary functions for
PMC axis control function are applied.
- 2409 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17.1.2 PMC Axis Status Display Function
Overview
This function displays the status of a command specified by PMC axis control and the status of signals
related to PMC axis control. This function can be used to easily identify the reason why PMC axis control
does not operate normally or to easily check what is specified in PMC axis control in progress.
- PMC axis control signal status screen
- PMC axis control executing buffer status screen
Explanation
- Screen display procedure
1 Set the bit 7 (EAC) of parameter No. 3137 =1.
2 Press the function key .
3 Press the continuous menu key several times, then press the chapter selection soft key [PMC
AXIS ].
4 “Signal status screen for PMC axis control” screen appears.
- 2410 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
The PMC axis control option is required to use this function. If the PMC axis
control option is not specified, the PMC axis control signal status screen does
not appear even when the above operation is performed.
- Screen configuration and switching to each screen
There are four screens: signal status screen, executing buffer display screen, operation waiting display
screen, and input buffer display screen.
Pressing the PAGE key switches between these screens.
[Signal status screen] [Executing buffer screen]
[Input buffer screen] [Waiting buffer screen]
- Display operation on a screen
• Switching display axes
The axis information currently displayed can be switched to the next axis information. Press soft key
[AXIS-L NEXT] to switch to the left-hand axis information or press soft key [AXIS-R NEXT] to
switch to the right-hand axis information. Each time soft key [AXIS-L NEXT]/[AXIS-R NEXT] is
pressed, the axis is changed as shown below.
First axis -> Second axis -> Third axis -> ...
The axis information currently displayed can be switched to the previous axis information. Press soft
key [AXIS-L PREV] to switch to the left-hand axis information or press soft key [AXIS-R REV] to
switch to the right-hand axis information. Each time soft key [AXIS-L PREV]/[AXIS-R PREV] is
pressed, the axis is changed reversely as shown below.
Fourth axis → Third axis → Second axis → ...
• Switching between decimal display and hexadecimal display
The value of each item can be switched between decimal display and hexadecimal display. Soft key
[HEX DISP] appears when the screen is displayed in decimal or soft key [DEC DISP] appears when
the screen is displayed in hexadecimal.
- 2411 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
- Signal status screen
• Control axis select signal Displays the status of control axis select signal EAX <Gn136>.
• Alarm signal Displays the status of alarm signal EIALg.
• Reset signal Displays the status of reset signal ECLRg.
• Axis moving signal Displays the status of axis moving signal EGENg.
• ECKZ signal Displays the status of following zero checking signal ECKZg.
• In-position signal Displays the status of in-position signal EINPg.
• Pause signal Displays the status of axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg.
• Remaining traverse distance Displays the remaining traverse distance of the command being
executed.
NOTE
1 When the control axis select signal is 0, the remaining traverse distance is
indicated as "---".
2 When the associated axis is being moved by other than the ladder or macro
executor, the remaining traverse distance is indicated as "---".
- Executing buffer display screen
• Command Displays axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g in the executing
buffer.
• Subcommand Displays a subcommand number in the executing buffer.
• Feedrate signal Displays axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF5g in the executing
buffer.
• Data signal Displays axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g in the executing
buffer.
• Subcommand data 1 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 4] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 2 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 8] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 3 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 12] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 4 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 16] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 5 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 20] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 6 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 24] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 7 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 28] in
the executing buffer is displayed.
NOTE
1 What was specified is displayed only when the buffer is valid. When execution is
completed or the buffer is invalid, "---" is displayed.
2 If the PMC axis does not move due to an invalid command etc. or an alarm is
issued during execution, what was specified is displayed on this screen. This
indication is cleared when the ECLRg signal turns on or an emergency stop
occurs. After that "---" is displayed.
3 When the associated axis is being moved by other than the ladder or macro
executor, "---" is displayed.
4 The speed signal is displayed in decimal with no sign.
- 2412 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
- Waiting buffer display screen
• Command Displays axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g in the waiting
buffer.
• Subcommand Displays a subcommand number in the waiting buffer.
• Feedrate signal Displays axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF5g in the waiting buffer.
• Data signal Displays axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g in the waiting buffer.
• Subcommand data 1 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 4] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 2 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 8] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 3 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 12] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 4 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 16] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 5 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 20] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 6 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 24] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 7 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 28] in
the waiting buffer is displayed.
NOTE
1 What was specified is displayed only when the buffer is valid. When the buffer is
invalid, "---" is displayed.
2 When the associated axis is being moved by other than the ladder or macro
executor, "---" is displayed.
3 The speed signal is displayed in decimal with no sign.
- Input buffer display screen
• Command Displays axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g in the input buffer.
• Subcommand Displays a subcommand number in the input buffer.
• Feedrate signal Displays axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF5g in the input buffer.
• Data signal Displays axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g in the input buffer.
• Subcommand data 1 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 4] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 2 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 8] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 3 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 12] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 4 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 16] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 5 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 20] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 6 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 24] in
the input buffer is displayed.
• Subcommand data 7 (4) Four-byte information beginning with [subcommand start address + 28] in
the input buffer is displayed.
- 2413 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 What was specified is displayed only when the buffer is valid. When the buffer is
invalid, "---" is displayed.
2 If an alarm occurs due to a command error, what was specified is displayed on
this screen. This indication is cleared when the ECLRg signal turns on or an
emergency stop occurs. Then, "---" is displayed.
3 When the associated axis is being moved by other than the ladder or macro
executor, "---" is displayed.
4 The speed signal is displayed in decimal with no sign.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3137 EAC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 EAC The PMC axis status display screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid if the PMC axis control option is set.
- 2414 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
17.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT
Overview
In the external data input function, the CNC can be operated by the external data which use the signal of
PMC.
This function is an optional function.
There are following functions in the external data input.
- External tool offset
- External program number search
- External work coordinate system shift
- External machine zero point shift
- External alarm message
- External operator message
- Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required parts
NOTE
Each function requires following Options.
1 External tool offset
- External tool offset or External data input
2 External program number search
- External data input
3 External work coordinate system shift
- Workpiece coordinate system and External data input
4 External machine zero point shift
- External machine zero point shift or External data input
5 External alarm message
- External message or External data input
6 External operator message
- External message or External data input
7 Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required parts
- Run hour and parts count display and External data input
Explanation
- The basic external data input procedure
The following signals in the Table 17.2 (a) are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Table 17.2 (a)
Signal name Input signal Output signal
Address signal for external data input EA0 to EA6
Data signal for external data input ED0 to ED31
Read signal for external data input ESTB
Read completion signal for external data input EREND
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND
The basic external data input procedure is described below:
(1) The PMC sets the address signals, EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type and data signals ED0 to
ED31.
(2) The PMC sets the read signal ESTB to “1”.
(3) When the ESTB signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address.
- 2415 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(4) After reading the address, the control unit sets the read completion signal EREND to “1”.
(5) When the EREND signal is set to “1”, the PMC sets the ESTB signal to “0”.
(6) When the ESTB signal is set to “0”, the control unit sets the EREND signal to “0”. This completes
the data input procedure. New data can now be entered.
The timing diagram is shown below (Fig. 17.2 (a)):
EA0-EA6
ED0-ED15
ESTB
EREND
Only for external program number search
ESEND
End of search
Fig. 17.2 (a) Timing diagram of External data input
Table 17.2 (b)
E
E E E E E E E
S
No. Item A A A A A A A ED31 to ED16 ED15 to ED0
T
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B
1 External program number 1 0 0 0 X X X X Program number (BCD 8 digits with unsign)
2 External tool offset 1 0 0 1 X X X X Offset value (BCD 8 digits with sign *1)
3 Extended external machine 1 0 1 0 axis code Shift value (BCD 8 digits with sign *1)
zero point shift
4 External machine zero 1 0 1 1 axis code Extended external machine
point shift zero point shift value(binary)
-9999 to +9999 *2
5 Alarm set 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No. (binary)
0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Alarm clear 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No. (binary)
0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Operator message 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 message No. (binary)
set 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Operator message 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 message No. (binary)
clear 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Message 1 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 character(Character code)
6 Substitute No. of parts 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 No. of parts required
required (BDC4 digits with unsign)
Substitute No. of parts 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 No. of parts machined
machined (BDC4 digits with unsign)
NOTE
1 When bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 0, BCD 4 digits are used.
2 By setting bit 7 (EEX) of parameter No. 6300 to 1, a shift value of ±0 to
999999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.
- 2416 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
NOTE
For axis code, refer to the Table 17.2 (c).
Table 17.2 (c)
Axis code
Axis
EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
1st axis 0 0 0 0
2nd axis 0 0 0 1
3rd axis 0 0 1 0
4th axis 0 0 1 1
5th axis 0 1 0 0
6th axis 0 1 0 1
7th axis 0 1 1 0
8th axis 0 1 1 1
9th axis 1 0 0 0
10th axis 1 0 0 1
11th axis 1 0 1 0
12th axis 1 0 1 1
13th axis 1 1 0 0
14th axis 1 1 0 1
15th axis 1 1 1 0
16th axis 1 1 1 1
- External Program Number Search
A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source and is selected in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select the
program to be executed corresponding to a specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of CNC mode, but the search
execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM mode.
The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” on completion of external program number search. This
signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use
ESEND to initiate a cycle start signal after the search.
Because a search operation is deferred until a reset occurs in the MEM mode, an external program
number search attempted during a CNC operation (the OP signal is “1”) results in the program being
started immediately after the end of an automatic operation in a sequence in which the automatic
operation is started by checking only the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data
input).
For this reason, using the bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 enables an external program number search
to be canceled at a CNC reset. Concretely, if a reset signal is input between the time the ESTB signal
(read signal for external data input) is input and the time a search would be executed, setting the bit 3
(ESC) of parameter No. 6300 to 1 keeps the search from being executed. At the same time, the controller
uses the ESCAN (search cancel signal for external data input) signal to inform the PMC that the search
has been canceled.
The ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input) will not become “1”, because the
search is canceled.
The controller checks the state of the RST (NC reset) signal for a reset input between the rising edge of
the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) and the start of the search. Concretely, the controller
cancels the external program number search if the RST (NC reset) signal becomes “1” even momentarily
in this period. The ESCAN signal (search cancel signal for external data input) becomes “1” at the
beginning of the search.
However, it becomes “0” when the next search is executed (for example, when a cycle start or reset signal
is input), similarly to the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input).
- 2417 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Read signal for external d ata input
(ESTB)
Read completion signal for external
data input (EREND) If RST becomes “1” even momentarily in this period
Reset signal
(RST)
Search completion signal for external ESEND does not become “1”.
data input (ESEND)
Search cancel signal for e xter nal data ESCAN becomes “1” at the beginning of a search
input (ESCAN)
ESTB positive-going edge Beginni ng of search
Fig. 17.2 (b) Timing diagram of External data input
This function searches the following folder for a target program:
When parameter No. 3467 is set to 0:
Searches the default foreground folder for the program.
When parameter No. 3467 is set to other than 0:
Searches the initial folder specified in parameter No. 3467 for the program.
NOTE
1 The external program number search is available when bit 4 (ESR) of parameter
No. 6300 is set to 1.
2 In reset state the automatic operation lamp is off. If the start button is pushed in
the cycle operation stop or hold state, search execution starts from the actual
position indicated by the pointer.
3 When there is no program stored in memory corresponding to the set program
number, the alarm DS1128 occurs.
4 When the program number search is set to 0, the alarm DS0059 occurs.
5 Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state. Therefore,
in case that the PMC sequence, which the cycle start is executed by checking
search completion signal for external data input only, is used, if the external
program number search is commanded twice, the program is executed twice.
( When CNC accepts a command of the program number search, the command
is not cancelled even if CNC becomes reset state by external reset signal and so
on.) (See Fig. 17.2 (c).)
If the program execution after reset becomes a problem, make the PMC
sequence not to execute the cycle start after reset.
6 Parameter No. 3467 is also used by the “external workpiece number search”.
7 Parameter No. 3467 is also used by the “macro executor program reference and
write function”.
- 2418 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Read signal for external data 2nd command
input (ESTB)
Read completion signal for Search command is kept.
external data input (EREND)
Search completion signal for
external data input (ESEND)
2nd program
search
Cycle start signal
(ST)
Cycle start lamp signal
(STL)
Automatic operation signal
(OP)
2nd program execution
External reset signal NC reset
(ERS)
Reset signal
(RST)
Fig. 17.2 (c) External program search and program execution after NC reset
- External Tool offset
These signals provide for changing the tool compensation value via the PMC. When the offset number is
specified by a part program, data input from the PMC is added to the offset value. The offset value can
also be used as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece measuring functions, the offset
value can be corrected using this function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via
PMC.
If the tool compensation value is externally input when offset number 0 is specified in a part program (an
offset cancel) in the lathe turning machine, the workpiece coordinate system shifts by the entered
quantity.
The external tool offset range is +/ - 79999999.
NOTE
1 When data is out of range, the alarm DS1128 occurs.
2 When the data of ineffective optional function is specified, the alarm DS1121
occurs.
3 If bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 1, the Data area can be specified
by 32bit data specification.
Under the setting, the external tool offset range is up to +/ - 79999999.
- 2419 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Data specification for external tool offset (For M series)
*N ote
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D .. . D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 1 0
0 0 1 a/i g/w 0 r/l Sign
Offset value
0: + Spec ified by BCD 8-digit code
1: - (0 to +/- 79999999)
*N o te
0 Incremental specification
a/i
1 Absolute specification
0 Specification of tool wear offset value
g/w
1 Specification of tool geometry offset value
0 Specification of tool length compensation v alue
r/l
1 Specification of cutter compensation value
*Note: If the bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 0, the offset value is specified by using
signals ED0 to ED14, the s ign is decided by the signal ED15.
The range of data is available to s pecify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.
Data specification for external tool offset (For T series)
Address Data * N ote
E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D . .. D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 1 0
0 0 1 a/i g/w X/Z/R Sign
Offset value
0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code
1: - (0 to +/- 79999999)
* N ote
0 Inc remental s pec ification
a/i
1 Absolute spec ific ation
0 Specification of tool wear offset v alue
g/w
1 Specification of tool geometry offset value
EA1=0, Specification of X axis offs et
EA0=0
EA1=0, Specification of Z axis offset
X/Z/R
EA0=1
EA1=1, Specification of tool nose radius
EA0=0 compensation value
*Note:If the bit 3 (EED) of parameter No.6301 is set to 0, the offset value is s pec ified by us ing signals
ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15.
The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.
- 2420 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
- External workpiece coordinate system shift
In the external workpiece coordinate system shift, the shift value can be externally modified by the signal
of PMC.
Each axis has this shift value (parameter No. 1220), and this shift value is added to all the workpiece
coordinate systems in common.
The shift value is not lost by cutting off the power supply.
The shift value can not only be added to the current work coordinate system shift but also be substituted
for the current value.
The value range is 0 to + / - 79999999.
The unit and setting range are the same as the Tool offset.
NOTE
If bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 1, the data area can be specified
by 32bit data specification.
Under the setting, the external tool compensation range is up to +/ - 79999999.
- External machine zero point shift
The machine coordinate system can be externally shifted by inputting a shift value.
When the shift value is input, compensation is immediately applied to the corresponding axis and the axis
moves. The position accuracy can be improved by combining this function with sensors.
The specification to shift the axis is the same as the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified in signals ED0 to ED15 using a binary code ranging from 0 to ±9999.
This compensation value must be specified in absolute value. The value which the machine actually
moves at input is the difference from the previously stored value.
After the Reference point is established, this function becomes effective. The shift amount is memorized
though the machine is not moved when the shift amount is input before the Reference point is established.
When the Reference point is established afterwards, the machine is moved for the memorized shift
amount.
NOTE
If bit 7 (EEX) of parameter No. 6300 is set to 1, the Data area can be specified
by 32bit data specification.
Under the setting, the external machine zero point shift range is up to +/ -
999999999.
CAUTION
When a large value of compensation is applied at one time, an alarm such as
"excessive error on stop" may occur. In this case, input the compensation in
several smaller increments.
- External message
(a) External alarm message
By sending alarm number from PMC, the CNC is brought to an alarm status; an alarm message is
sent to the CNC, and the message is displayed on the screen of the CNC.
Reset of alarm status is also done with external data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers (16 alarm numbers when bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931 is set to 1) and
messages can be sent at a same time. A message consisting of up to 63 ASCII characters can be sent
for one alarm number.
In case of using a multi-path system, the alarm will be set separately for each path.
Also the alarm is set separately for one.
It is available to select the range of alarm number and the display form by setting the bit 0 (EXA) of
parameter No. 6301.
- 2421 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301 = 0
- Alarm number 0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC
displays them by adding 1000 to an alarm number.
Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301 = 1
- Alarm number 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC displays them with prefix characters “EX” to an
alarm number for display.
(b) External operator message
Message to the operator is given by the signal of PMC, and the message is displayed.
The operator messages can be cleared by external data.
Up to 4 message numbers (bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931) can be sent at a same time. Up to
256 characters can be sent in an operator message.
In case of using a multi-path system, the operator message is common resource for plural path of
machine group. It is set each machine group. It is available to display the operator message by using
the primary path signal of machine group.
It is available to select the range of message number and the display form by setting the bit 1 (EXM)
of parameter No. 6301.
Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301 = 0
The message numbers 0 to 999 can be sent.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by adding 2000 to an
alarm number.
When a message from 100 to 999 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its
text is displayed.
Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301 = 1
The message numbers 0 to 4095 can be sent.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
The CNC displays them with prefix characters "EX" to an alarm for display.
When a message number from 100 to 4095 is displayed, the message number is not displayed;
only its text is displayed.
Data specification method in external message
Table 17.2 (d)
Item EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 ED15 to ED0(binary)
Alarm set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No.
Alarm clear 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No.
Operator message list 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No.
Operator message clear 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No.
Message 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 Character(Note)
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time
(See ISO code given in the table below.)
ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character
ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character
When sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code smaller than
20 and it will be ignored.
- 2422 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Fig. 17.2 (d)
- Substitution of the number of required parts and number of machined parts
Substitution is possible for the number of parts required and the number of parts machined.
Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of parts
machined.
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D ........... D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 MSB LSB
Value of parts no.
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Set to 110000
(2) 0: No. of parts required
1: No. of parts machined
(3) BCD 4-digit code (0000 to 9999)
Signals
Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 <Gn002.6 – Gn002.0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals indicate the type of the entered data.
- 2423 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED31 <Gn211, Gn210,Gn000, Gn001>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals indicate the entered data.
The use of the 32 code signals (16 code signals) varies with the data type.
Read signal for external data input ESTB <Gn002.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.
When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address and data for external data
input.
Read completion signal for external data input EREND <Fn060.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data.
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND <Fn060.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal report that program number search, specified by external data input, has been
completed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when:
- The program number search specified by external data input is completed.
The signal is set to “0” when:
- An automatic operation is started.
- A reset occurs.
Search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN<Fn060.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies PMC of the cancellation of a program number search.
[Output cond.] When a reset is input between the time read signal for external data input ESTB is input
and the time a search is executed in the external program number search function, if bit 3
(ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1, the search is not executed. At this time, the control unit
sets search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN to “1” instead of setting search
completion signal for external data input ESEND to “1”.
NOTE
This signal is enabled when bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
Gn001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8
Gn002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
Gn210 ED23 ED22 ED21 ED20 ED19 ED18 ED17 ED16
Gn211 ED31 ED30 ED29 ED28 ED27 ED26 ED25 ED24
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn060 ESCAN ESEND EREND
- 2424 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 EEX ESR ESC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#3 ESC When a reset is input between the input of the external data input read signal ESTB and
the execution of a search, the external program number search function:
0: Performs a search.
1: Does not perform a search.
#4 ESR The external program number search function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 EEX PMC EXIN function
0: Conventional specifications
1: Extended specifications
If you want to use external machine coordinate system shift which handles ±10.000 or
more shift unavailable with the PMC/EXIN command in the conventional specifications,
set 1.
When this function is used for a multi-path system, the setting for path 1 is used.
For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC manuals.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6301 EED NNO EXM EXA
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit machine group
#0 EXA This bit selects an external alarm message specification.
0: A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. When displaying an alarm number,
the CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to the alarm number obtained by adding
1000 to the message number.
1: A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC prefixes the character
string "EX" to a alarm number for display.
#1 EXM This bit selects an external operator message specification.
0: A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The message of a message number
from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC adds 2000 to a number
for distinction. A message number from 100 to 999 is not displayed on the screen,
but only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.
1: A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message of a message number
from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC prefixes the character
string "EX" to a message number for display. A message number from 100 to 4095
is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on
the screen.
#2 NNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a new line operation between one
message set with a number and another message set with a different number is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
- 2425 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#3 EED To specify data for external tool compensation and external workpiece coordinate system
shift, use:
0: Signals ED15 to ED0.
(The value which can be specified for tool compensation and workpiece coordinate
system shift is from 0 to ±7999.)
1: Signals ED31 to ED0.
(The value which can be specified for tool compensation and workpiece coordinate
system shift is from 0 to ±79999999.)
6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word machine group
[Valid data range] 0 to 4096
This parameter sets the number of messages to which message numbers are to be prefixed
in external operator message display.
When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed.
[Example] When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of message numbers 0 to 499 are
displayed together with their numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is
not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on the
screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11931 M16
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#1 M16 In the external data input and external messages, the maximum number of external alarm
messages and external operator messages that can be displayed is:
0: 4.
1: 16.
3467 Selection of the target folder among initial folders
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 11 to 20
This parameter selects a folder to be used for the external workpiece number search
function, external program number search function, and macro executor program
reference and write function among the following initial folders:
0: No specification
1: Root folder (//CNC_MEM)
2: System folder (//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM)
3: MTB-dedicated folder 1 (//CNC_MEM/MTB1)
4: MTB-dedicated folder 2 (//CNC_MEM/MTB2)
- 2426 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
5: User folder (//CNC_MEM/USER)
6: Path folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATHn) (Note)
(NOTE) PATHn: n is the selected path number (1 to the maximum number of
paths).
7: Common program folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY)
8 to 10: Not specified.
11: Path 1 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1)
12: Path 2 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH2)
13: Path 3 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH3)
:
20: Path 10 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10)
When “0: No specification” is selected, the following folder is used for each function:
• External program number search function
• External workpiece number search function
(Default foreground folder)
• Macro executor program reference and write function
(Default background folder)
NOTE
Any user-created folder cannot be specified.
For example, assume that a user folder named PATH3 is created
in //CNC_MEM/USER in a 2-path system. User-created folder
//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH3 cannot be specified by specifying 13 in
this parameter.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No. search could
FOUND not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool data),
but either no tool numbers have been input since power ON or there
is no data for the entered tool No.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator message or
external alarm message, but five or more displays were required
simultaneously.
DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT An attempt to cancel an external operator message or external
FOUND alarm message failed because the specified message number was
not found.
DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
(HIGH) interface address signal are set to an undefined address
(high bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O interface
(LOW) address signal are set to an undefined address (low bits).
DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals EID0
to EID31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a sequence No.
ACCEPTED search as the system is not in the memory mode or the reset state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a tool No.
during loading by the G10 code.
- 2427 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT
Overview
The conventional external machine zero point shift value function cannot make shifts on multiple axes
simultaneously.
With this extended function, external machine zero point shifts can be performed on all controlled axes.
An external machine zero point shift value is to be set in a parameter-set R area. A shift value must be
specified using a binary code, and the absolute value of a number from -32767 to 32767 must be specified.
Explanation
- Setting
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (EMS) of parameter No. 1203 to 1. Enter a desired external
machine zero point shift value at the location starting at the address (R area of the PMC) set in parameter
No. 1280.
If 100 is set in parameter No. 1280, enter shift values at the location starting at R100 of the PMC. Set an
even number in parameter No. 1280.
Example) When 100 is set in parameter No. 1280
R0100 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (Low)
R0101 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (High)
R0102 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (Low)
R0103 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (High)
: :
R(0100+2(n-1)) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (Low)
R(0100+2(n-1)+1) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (High)
- Shift value
Specify a shift value by using a two-byte binary code for each axis.
A value from -32767 to 32767 can be specified.
A shift value is assumed to be specified as an absolute value.
The unit is the detection unit.
Example)
Suppose that the incremental system is IS-B, the machine is a millimeter machine (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1001 = 0),
the detection unit is 0.0002 mm (CMR (parameter No. 1820) = 10),
and parameter No. 1280 is set to 100.
When the following values are written to the R area :
R102 = 11001100 (CCh)
R103 = 11101101 (EDh)
the machine position on the second axis is shifted, and the shift value at that time is:
EDCCh [pulse] * 0.0002 [mm/pulse] = -0.932 mm
- Relationship with the error compensation functions
This function is superposed on error compensation functions such as the pitch error compensation
function and straightness compensation function.
- Coordinate system
If the machine is moved by this function, the coordinates are not updated.
- Multi-path control
In multi-path control, the locations of the R area are used in ascending order of axis numbers in the paths
as shown in the example below.
- 2428 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Example)
When, in parameter No. 1280, 100 is set for path 1 and 200 is set for path 2
Axis number Path (Prm.981) Shift value of path 1
1 1 R100—101
2 2 R102—103
3 2 R104—105
4 1 Shift value of path 2
5 2 R200—201
6 1 R202—203
R204—205
- Multi-path PMC
With a multi-path PMC, the PMC R area allocated to each path is used.
Example)
When the first PMC is assigned to path 1, and the second PMC is assigned to paths 2 and 3, the R
area of the first PMC is assigned to shift values for path 1, and the R area of the second PMC is
assigned to shift values for paths 2 and 3.
CNC PMC
Path 1 1st PMC
No.1280 = 100 R100~
Path 2 2nd PMC
No.1280 = 100 R100~
R200~
Path 3
No.1280 = 200
Signal
Extended external machine zero point shift signal
EMZ0 to EMZ15 <Rn to Rn+2*controlled axis count-1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Sets an external machine zero point shift value.
[Operation] When an external machine zero point shift value is set with this signal, the machine
position is shifted by the specified value.
A set value is regarded as an absolute value.
As a signal address, specify an arbitrary R address with parameter No. 1280.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rn EMZ7 EMZ6 EMZ5 EMZ4 EMZ3 EMZ2 EMZ1 EMZ0
Rn+1 EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8
:
Rn+2*con-
trolled axis EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8
count-1
n represents the value set in parameter No. 1280.
- 2429 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1203 EMS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 To use the extended external machine zero point shift function, the
external machine zero point shift function or the external data input
function is required.
2 When the extended external machine zero point shift function is
enabled, the conventional external machine zero point shift function
is disabled.
WARNING
Set an appropriate value to parameter No.1280 beforehand when
you set 1 to this parameter.
If an internal relay of the set address in parameter No.1280 is used
by another usage, it may cause an unexpected machine behavior.
Be careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the
used internal relay.
1280 Start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] Even number from 0 to 59999
Set the start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift
function. If a nonexistent address value is specified, this function is disabled.
If 100 is set, for example, this function uses R100 and up. The last R address to be used
depends on the number of controlled axes. When eight controlled axes are used, R100 to
R115 are used.
NOTE
1 If a nonexistent R address or an address in the system area is set,
this function is disabled.
2 Set an even number in this parameter.
3 When this parameter is 0, an internal relay from address R0 is
used.
- 2430 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
WARNING
If an internal relay of the set address in this parameter is used by
another usage, it may cause an unexpected machine behavior. Be
careful enough that you must prevent the competition of the used
internal relay.
Warning and Note
WARNING
1 When writing an external machine zero point shift value to the R area, write a
shift value for one axis as a word. If data for one axis is written in two operations,
one byte in one operation, an incorrect shift operation can result.
2 When writing data with the PMC or FOCAS2 function, provide an interval of
about 4 ms after one write operation before starting the next write operation. If
this write timing is not observed, an incorrect shift operation can result.
NOTE
1 This function is optional. To use this function, the option for "external machine
zero point shift" or "external data input" is required.
2 This function can not use together with flexible path axis assignment function.
17.4 EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR
EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT
Overview
In case of the external machine zero point shift or the extended external machine zero point shift, the
maximum shift value per one execution cycle is extended.
Explanation
In case of the external machine zero point shift or the extended external machine zero point shift, when all
of following conditions are satisfied, the maximum shift value per one execution cycle is multiplied by 10.
(The positive side is 1270. The negative side is -1280.)
- Parameter EMF (No.1814#1) = 1
- Increment system is B or C.
- Parameter HPE (No.1816#2) = 1
NOTE
1 In case of the compensation functions, when this function is valid, the maximum
compensation value per one execution cycle is multiplied by 10. (The positive
side is 1270. The negative side is -1280.)
- Stored pitch error compensation
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation
- Interpolation type pitch error compensation
- Smooth backlash compensation
2 Bit 1 (EMF) of parameter No.1814 is invalid on the following axes.
- Axis for Cs contour control
- Axis for Spindle positioning
- 2431 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1814 EMF
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#1 EMF In case of the external machine zero point shift or the extended external machine zero
point shift, the maximum shift value per one execution cycle is:
0: Conventional specification. (The positive side is 127. The negative side is -128.)
1: Multiplied by 10. (The positive side is 1270. The negative side is -1280.)
When all of following conditions are satisfied, this parameter is valid.
- Increment system is B or C.
- Parameter HPE (No.1816#2) = 1
NOTE
1 In case of the compensation functions, when this parameter is
valid, the maximum compensation value per one execution cycle is
multiplied by 10. (The positive side is 1270. The negative side is
-1280.)
- Stored pitch error compensation
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation
- Interpolation type pitch error compensation
- Smooth backlash compensation
2 This parameter is invalid on the following axes.
- Axis for Cs contour control
- Axis for Spindle positioning
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISCx ISAx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx Increment system of each axis
Increment system Bit 1 (ISC) Bit 0 (ISA)
IS-A 0 1
IS-B 0 0
IS-C 1 0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1816 HPE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
- 2432 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
#2 HPE The compensation amount by the error compensation can be output based on:
0: Detection unit
1: 1/1000 of the detection unit (same unit as for nano compensation)
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid in the following error compensation.
- Smooth backlash compensation
- Interpolation type straightness compensation
- Interpolation type straightness compensation 3072 points
- Linear inclination compensation function
- Interpolation type pitch error compensation
2 In error compensation, set compensation data such as pitch error
data by the detection unit regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
3 This parameter is valid on the following axes.
- Servo axis
- Axis for which Cs contour control or Spindle positioning is
enabled
4 When this parameter is 1, the compensation amount by following
error compensation can be output based on the detection unit.
- Backlash compensation
- Stored pitch error compensation
- Simple straightness compensation
- Straightness compensation
- Straightness compensation at 128 points
- Inclination compensation
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation
- Extended bi-directional pitch error compensation
17.5 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH
Overview
A machining program stored in the part program memory can be started by an external signal.
When automatic operation is started in the memory operation mode during the reset state, the program is
searched for from a specified workpiece number and then executed from the beginning.
For a machine with a function for automatically loading several types of workpieces, this function can be
used to automatically select and execute the program according to the workpiece.
This function searches the following folder for a target program:
When parameter No. 3467 is set to 0:
Searches the default foreground folder for the program.
When parameter No. 3467 is set to other than 0:
Searches the initial folder specified in parameter No. 3467 for the program.
NOTE
1 Parameter No. 3467 is also used by the “external program number search”.
2 Parameter No. 3467 is also used by the “macro executor program reference and
write function”.
- 2433 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Signal
External workpiece number search signals
PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,PN16 <Gn009.0 to Gn009.4>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.
These are 5-bit code signals and correspond to the workpiece numbers as shown Table
17.5 (a) (binary codes).
Table 17.5 (a)
External workpiece number search signals
Workpiece number
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
0 0 0 0 0 00
0 0 0 0 1 01
0 0 0 1 0 02
Omission
1 1 1 1 0 30
1 1 1 1 1 31
Of these numbers, workpiece number 00 has special meaning "making no search".
Therefore, a number from 01 to 31 can be specified as a workpiece number.
NOTE
The signals are also used to specify a file number for finding the
beginning of the file in inputting an external program.
[Operation] Searches the program number corresponding to the workpiece number specified by these
signals when:
Automatic operation is started (the automatic operation start signal (ST) changes
from “1” to “0”) in the memory operation mode if automatic operation is in the reset
state (the automatic operation signal (OP) is “0”).
When the workpiece number is 00, however, no search is carried out.
The searched program is used in:
• Automatic operation in the memory operation mode
• Foreground edit in the memory edit mode
Extended external workpiece number search signals
EPN0 to EPN13 <Gn024.0 to Gn025.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.
The correspondence with the workpiece numbers is shown Table 17.5 (b) (binary codes).
Table 17.5 (b)
Extended external workpiece number search signals
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E Workpiece
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P number
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0002
Omission
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 9998
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 9999
- 2434 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Of these numbers, workpiece number 0000 has special meaning "making no search".
Therefore, a number from 0001 to 9999 can be specified as a workpiece number.
These signals are used in place of the external workpiece number search signals (PN1 to
PN16) when the signal is selected by bit 1 (EPN) of parameter No. 3006.
[Operation] Operation of these signals is same as operation of external workpiece number search
signals.
External workpiece number search start signal EPNS <Gn025.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal executes only the search function of the workpiece number search and does
not perform automatic operation. When this signal changes from ”1” to ”0”, the search
function is executed.
When bit 2 (EPS) of parameter No. 3006 is set to 1, this signal is enabled and the search
function by ST is disabled.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
Gn024 EPN7 EPN6 EPN5 EPN4 EPN3 EPN2 EPN1 EPN0
Gn025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3006 EPS EPN
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 EPN As signals for specifying workpiece numbers for external workpiece number search:
0: The external workpiece search signals (PN1 to PN16) are used. (A number from 1 to
31 can be specified.)
1: The extended external workpiece number search signals (EPN0 to EPN13) are used.
(A number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.)
#2 EPS As the signal for starting external workpiece number search:
0: The automatic operation start signal ST is used. When automatic operation (memory
operation) is started, a search is made.
1: The external workpiece number search start signal EPNS is used. ST does not start a
search.
Correspondence between workpiece numbers and program numbers in external workpiece number
3020
search (PN)
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] -1 to 99
This parameter has the following meaning according to the value set.
- When a value from 0 to 99 is set
(Program number) = (setting)*100+(workpiece number)
This means that the setting specifies the higher 2 digits of a program number.
- 2435 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
- When the value -1 is set
The higher 2 digits of a program number represent the minimum of the existing
program numbers.
Example
When workpiece number 21 is specified, program numbers such as O0021, O0121,
and O0221 are searched for. If O0021 is not found, but O0121 and O0221 are found,
O0121 is selected as the program number.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a workpiece number is specified using
the PN1 to PN16 signals (when bit 1 (EPN) of parameter No. 3006
is set to 0).
3467 Selection of the target folder among initial folders
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 11 to 20
This parameter selects a folder to be used for the external workpiece number search
function, external program number search function, and macro executor program
reference and write function among the following initial folders:
0: No specification
1: Root folder (//CNC_MEM)
2: System folder (//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM)
3: MTB-dedicated folder 1 (//CNC_MEM/MTB1)
4: MTB-dedicated folder 2 (//CNC_MEM/MTB2)
5: User folder (//CNC_MEM/USER)
6: Path folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATHn) (Note)
(NOTE) PATHn: n is the selected path number (1 to the maximum number of
paths).
7: Common program folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY)
8 to 10: Not specified.
11: Path 1 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1)
12: Path 2 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH2)
13: Path 3 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH3)
:
20: Path 10 folder (//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH10)
When “0: No specification” is selected, the following folder is used for each function:
• External program number search function
• External workpiece number search function
(Default foreground folder)
• Macro executor program reference and write function
(Default background folder)
NOTE
Any user-created folder cannot be specified.
For example, assume that a user folder named PATH3 is created
in //CNC_MEM/USER in a 2-path system. User-created folder
//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH3 cannot be specified by specifying 13 in
this parameter.
- 2436 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program corresponding to the specified workpiece No.
could not be found.
17.6 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT
Overview
MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to
be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation.
Signal
- Signal list
Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals (Table 17.6 (a)) between the PMC and
CNC:
Table 17.6 (a)
Signal name Abbreviation
External key input mode selection signal (input) ENBKY
Key code signals (input) EKC0 to EKC7
Key code read signal (input) EKSET
Key code read completion signal (output) EKENB
Key input disable signal (output) INHKY
Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL
- Signal detail
The processing flow in the PMC is shown Fig. 17.6 (a).
(START)
Set ENBKY = “1” 1) Set the external key input control
< EKSET = EKENB > no
yes 2) Check whether a key code can be set.
< INHKY = “0” > no
yes
Set key code 3) When a key code can be set:
(1) Set the key code to be input.
(2) Invert the EKSET signal to instruct the CNC to read
Invert EKSE T
the key code.
no
< Has key input ended? > 4) Repeat the operation for the key data to be input
yes
no 5) After reporting the last data, check that the CNC
< EKSET = EKENB > has read the key data.
yes
no
< INHKY = “0” >
yes
Set ENBKY = “0” 6) Release extern al key input control mode.
(END)
Fig. 17.6 (a)
- 2437 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Read processing is controlled by exclusive-ORing (XOR) the key code read
signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and
EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once
reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB signal to match its
logic with that of the EKSET signal.
In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be set while the EKSET
and EKENB signals differ in their logic.
External key input mode selection signal ENBKY<Gn066.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] While this signal is turned on “1”, external key input control is enabled. In external key
input control mode, any MDI key operations are ignored.
NOTE
1 When ENBKY is set to “1” to enable external key input control, key
code input based on the C Language Executor is also ignored.
2 Key codes input with the external key input function can be read by
the macro executor and C Language Executor.
3 Even when external key input control is enabled, pressing the
key on the MDI keyboard
for 5 seconds can produce a hard copy of the screen.
Pressing the key while a hard copy of the screen is being
produced can cancel the production of a hard copy of the screen.
Even if the key code of the key is input with the external key
input function, the production of a hard copy of the screen cannot
be stopped.
Key code read signal EKSET<G066.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal instructs the CNC to read the input key code.
If the logical state of this signal is opposite to the logical sate of the key code read
completion signal EKENB, a key code read is specified.
Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7<G098>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals set an input key code.
Key input disable signal INHKY<F053.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] While this signal is “1”, no key code is accepted in external key input control mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” during program editing or program input/output.
Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL<F053.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal posts whether the CNC is displaying the program screen.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when the program screen is displayed.
- 2438 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Key code read completion signal EKENB<F053.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code.
[Output cond.] When the CNC completes key code read operation, the logical state of this signal is set to
the same state as for the key code read signal EKSET.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 EKSET ENBKY
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY
MDI key code
Codes in the table are given in hexadecimal. For example,
A corresponds to 41H in hexadecimal.
corresponds to 90H in hexadecimal.
- MDI Key Code Table (00H to 7FH)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P
1 ! 1 A Q
2 “ 2 B R
(Double-quote)
3 # 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 ‘ 7 G W
(Single-quote)
8 ( 8 H X
9 TAB ) 9 I Y
A ; * : J Z
(EOB) (Colon)
B + ; K [
(Semicolon)
C , < L ¥
(Comma)
- 2439 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
D - = M ]
(Minus)
E . > N ~
(Period)
F / ? O _
(Underline)
- 2440 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
- MDI Key Code Table (80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F
0 RESET [VF9] [F0]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
1 [VF8] [F1]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
2 [VF7] [F2]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
3 [VF6] [F3]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
4 SHIFT INSERT [VF5] AUX [F4]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
5 DELETE [VF4] [F5]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
6 CAN ALTER [VF3] [F6]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
7 ALT [VF2] [F7]
(Note 3) (Note 2)
8 Cursor INPUT [VF1] POS [F8]
→ (Note 3) (Note 2)
9 Cursor PROG [F9]
← (Note 2)
A Cursor HELP OFFSET
↓ SETTING
B Cursor CTRL SYSTEM
↑
C ABC/abc MESSAGE
D GRAPH
(CUSTOM)
(Note 1)
E PAGE CUSTOM [FR]
↓ (Note 1) (Note 2)
F PAGE CUSTOM2 [FL]
↑ (Note 2)
NOTE
1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to .
For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to . 0EEH is assigned to .
- 2441 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
2 Handling of the soft keys
[F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft
keys. They are associated with the MDI keys as shown below.
Key configuration for 7-soft key type LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F4]
and [FR], [FL])
[FL] [F4] [F3] [F2] [F1] [F0] [FR]
Key configuration for 12-soft key type LCD, or etc.: 10 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F9]
and [FR], [FL])
[FL] [F9] [F8] [F7] ...... [F1] [F0] [FR]
3 Handling of the vertical soft keys
[VF1] to [VF9] in the key code table are the key codes for the vertical soft keys.
From the top to the bottom, [VF1] to [VF9] are arranged.
- 2442 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
17.7 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL
Overview
This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switch installed in the machine only
by the change in a minimum LADDER program.
(1) Changes to MEM mode.
(2) Execution of macro program registered in memory.
(3) Return to the mode before macro program is executed.
And the program which had been selected before macro program is executed is automatically
selected.
This function is enabled only in the reset status (not during a reset). That is, this function cannot be used
during automatic operation (including stopping and suspending of automatic operation), a reset, or an
emergency stop.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Explanation
- Sequence between PMC and CNC
The signal must be processed between PMC and CNC according to the following procedures.
Start
(1) The macro call start signal MCSTx <Gn512.0 to Gn513.7> is input from PMC to CNC based on the
signal from the macro call switch installed in the machine.
Mode change
(2) CNC outputs the mode notification signal and the mode change request signal MCRQ <Fn512.1>
when the macro call start signal (MCSTx) is detected. At this time, MEM mode is notified as the
mode notification signal. The macro call executing signal MCEXE <Fn512.0> and Call program
confirmation signal MCEXx <Fn514.0 toFn515.7> are output at the same time.
(3) PMC must change the mode based on the signal output in the step of above (2).
(4) Set “1” in the mode change completion signal MCFIN <Gn514.0> by PMC when the mode change
is completed. If this mode is difference from that specified from the CNC in (2) or the reset mode, an
alarm PS5306 occurs.
Execution of macro program
(5) When MCFIN signal is set to “1”, CNC executes the macro program.
End of macro program
(6) Instruct M02 or M30 at the end of the macro program.
Moreover, input external reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) with M02 or M30 on the
PMC side.
Upon completion of the reset, the program selected before execution of the macro is automatically
selected. The mode change request signal(MCRQ) and mode notification signals are output at the
same time. At this time, the mode when macro call start signal (MCSTx) is input is notified as the
mode notification signal.
Return of mode
(7) Change the mode on the PMC side based on the signal output in the step of above (6).
(8) Set “1” in Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) on the PMC side when the mode change is
completed. On the CNC side, the Mode change request signal (MCRQ), the Macro call executing
signal (MCEXE) and the Call program confirmation signal(MCEXx) are set to “0” concurrently with
- 2443 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
asserting of the Mode change completion signal (MCFIN). The PS5306 alarm is not checked at this
time.
The Fig. 17.7 (a) shows the above-mentioned sequence.
Least 32ms
MCST
(PMC→CNC)
MCRQ
(CNC→PMC)
MEM before macro execution
Mode notification
signal(CNC→PMC)
Mode Change
process(PMC)
MCFIN
(PMC→CNC)
Mode indefinite MEM before macro
MCEXE
(CNC→PMC)
MCEXx
(CNC→PMC)
Program Execution
(CNC)
M30 or M02
(CNC→PMC)
ERS or RRW
(PMC→CNC)
Fig. 17.7 (a)
- Interruption of sequence
Interruption by reset or emergency stop
When the started macro is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop before being completed, the abnormal
end signal (MCSP) becomes “1” and stops the execution of the program. Then, when the reset is
completed or the emergency stop is cleared, if the MEM mode is entered, the mode change request signal
(MCRQ) and the mode notification signal are output for mode recovery and the selection program is
recovered. (In a non-MEM mode, the system waits until the MEM mode is entered.) On the PMC side, be
sure to set the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) to “1” to complete the sequence, regardless of
whether mode recovery is made.
Feed hold or single block
The abnormal end signal (MCSP) is not output when stopping in feed hold or single block. Under such a
condition, when the cycle start signal (ST) is turned on and off, the continuity of the macro program is
executed.
Under such a condition, even if macro call start signal (MCSTx) is turned on and off, it is not effective.
Under such a condition, when reset or emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in
“Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed.
- 2444 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Stop by alarm
When the execution of macro program is stopped by alarm, the abnormal end signal (MCSP) is output.
Under such a condition, when reset or the emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in
“Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed.
Fig. 17.7 (b) shows the timing chart of each signal when the sequence is interrupted by alarm.
Least 32ms
MCST
(PMC→CNC)
MCRQ
(CNC→PMC)
Mode notification MEM
signal(CNC→PMC)
Mode Change
process(PMC)
MCFIN
(PMC→CNC)
Mode indefinite MEM before macro execution
MCEXE
(CNC→PMC)
MCEXx
(CNC→PMC)
Program Execution
(CNC)
AL (Alarm)
(CNC→PMC)
MCSP
(CNC→PMC)
Reset
Fig. 17.7 (b)
Notes
NOTE
1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selection signal (MD1,MD2,MD4)
is effective. Therefore, change the LADDER program to disable the mode
change when the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is ”1” when the
inconvenience is caused if the mode change is done.
2 The macro call start signal (MCSTx) is effective only the reset state. The macro
call cannot be started during automatic operation (automatic operation stop
state, automatic operation suspend state, and automatic operation start state), a
reset, or an emergency stop. If an attempt is made to start macro program
during automatic operation, a reset, or an emergency stop, an alarm PS5306
occurs.
- 2445 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
3 The called macro program must end with M02 or M30. And input external reset
signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) from the PMC side when these M
codes are executed. If above two condition is not implemented, neither the
return of the mode nor the return of the selection program are done after the
program ends.
4 When the specified program is not registered in the memory, the alarm PS0059
is generated. The operation in this case becomes the shown in “Stop by alarm”.
5 If a main program had been not selected when the one touch macro call function
is started, the alarm DS0059 occurs at the end of execution of macro program.
At this time, current folder becomes the folder where an one-touch macro exists,
and the called one-touch macro remains being selected.
6 One Touch Macro programs need to be install to any folder among LIBRARY/,
MTB2/, MTB1/, and SYSTEM/. When One Touch Macro program does not exist
in any folder among LIBRARY/, MTB2/, MTB1/, and SYSTEM/, the alarm
DS0059 "SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND" occurs at searching program.
These folders to be searched are set in the bits 3 (SYS), bit 2 (MC1), bit 1
(MC2), and bit 0 (LIB) of parameter No. 3457 in advance. Even when a folder
which a program is install to is LIBRARY/, MTB2/, MTB1/, or SYSTEM/, if the
folder is not set as the search targets, the program is not searched for.
Signal
Macro call start signal MCSTx <Gn512.0 to Gn513.7>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence.
When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts the corresponding macro
program. O number of the program started by the MCST1 signal is specified by
parameter No. 6096.
[Operation] The sequence is shown in “Sequence between PMC and CNC”.
Mode change completion signal MCFIN <Gn514.0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] This signal notifies the completion of the mode change to CNC.
[Operation] CNC begins the execution of the program or complete the sequence.
Macro call executing signal MCEXE <Fn512.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the macro call function is being executed.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case:
- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx).
This signal is set to “0” in the following case:
- When the sequence is completed with the mode change completion signal MCFIN
set to “1” after macro execution is terminated or is interrupted by a reset, emergency
stop, or alarm.
Mode change request signal MCRQ <Fn512.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal requests the change of the mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx).
- When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal
(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input.
- 2446 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop.
This signal is set to “0” in the following case:
- When Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes ”1”.
Mode notification signal
MD1R,MD2R,MD4R,DNCIR,ZRNR<Fn513.0,Fn513.1,Fn513.2,Fn513.5,Fn513.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the mode which should be changed.
[Output cond.] This signal is output in the following case:
- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx).
- When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal
(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input.
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop.
Abnormal end signal MCSP <Fn512.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the sequence of the macro call is terminated abnormally.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop or alarm.
This signal is set to “0” in the following case:
- When the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes “1”, and the sequence
is completed.
Call program confirmation signal MCEXx <Fn514.0 toFn515.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal notifies the program number called by the macro call.
The signal which corresponds to macro call start signal (MCSTx) is output.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” in the following case:
- While executing the sequence.
This signal is set to “0” in the following case:
- When the sequence is completed.
Signal Address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn512 MCST8 MCST7 MCST6 MCST5 MCST4 MCST3 MCST2 MCST1
Gn513 MCST16 MCST15 MCST14 MCST13 MCST12 MCST11 MCST10 MCST9
Gn514 MCFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn512 MCSP MCRQ MCEXE
Fn513 ZRNR DNCIR MD4R MD2R MD1R
Fn514 MCEX8 MCEX7 MCEX6 MCEX5 MCEX4 MCEX3 MCEX2 MCEX1
Fn515 MCEX16 MCEX15 MCEX14 MCEX13 MCEX12 MCEX11 MCEX10 MCEX9
Parameter
6095 The number of programs used by the one touch macro call function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 0 to 16
- 2447 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Specify the number of programs used by the one touch macro call function.
For instance, when three is set, macro call start signal MCST1, MCST2, and MCST3 is
valid.
When 0 is specified, this function is invalid.
6096 The first O number of the program used by the one touch macro call function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] 2-word path
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Specify the first O number of the program used by the one touch macro call function.
When 9000 is set, for example, the relationship between macro call start signal MSCTx
and the program number of a program started by the signal is as follows:
MCST1 signal : Starts O9000 (when 1 or a greater value is set in parameter No. 6095).
MCST2 signal : Starts O9001 (when 2 or a greater value is set in parameter No. 6095).
MCST3 signal : Starts O9002 (when 3 or a greater value is set in parameter No. 6095).
: : :
MCST15 signal : Starts O9014 (when 15 or a greater value is set in parameter No. 6095).
MCST16 signal : Starts O9015 (when 16 or a greater value is set in parameter No. 6095).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3457 SYS MC1 MC2 LIB
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
NOTE
The parameters LIB, MC2, MC1, and SYS are used to set a search
folder for the following subprogram/macro calls:
• Subprogram call based on an M code
• Subprogram call based on a particular address
• Subprogram call based on a second auxiliary function code
• Macro call based on a G code
• Macro call based on an M code
• Macro call based on a T code
• One-touch macro call
#0 LIB The common program directory "//CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY/" of the initial
directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
#1 MC2 MTB dedicated directory 2 "//CNC_MEM/MTB2/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
#2 MC1 MTB dedicated directory 1 "//CNC_MEM/MTB1/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
#3 SYS The system directory "//CNC_MEM/SYSTEM/" of the initial directories is:
0: Set as a search directory.
1: Not set as a search directory.
- 2448 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
DS0021 START ERROR(ONE TOUCH An One Touch Macro can not be start for the following reasons:
MACRO) (1) Feed hold signal *SP is0.
(2) During alarm status.
(3) Program restart signal SRN is “1”.
etc.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program of the specified O number is not registered in
the memory.
PS5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR The mode is not changed correctly at start of sequence.
An one touch macro was started during a state other than the reset
state, a reset, or an emergency stop.
- 2449 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17.8 PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE
17.8.1 Parameter Write
Overview
You can write parameters by using PMC window function (function instruction WINDW: SUB52). You
can also use FOCAS2 or C Language Executor to write parameters.
Examine it enough not to occur any trouble when the parameter is changed in operation.
Limitation
- FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type)
When bit 0 (IPW) of parameter No.8880 is 0, FANUC recommendation parameter (fixed type) is cannot
be changed to other than recommended value and the error code is returned.
NOTE
About FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type), refer to the
appendix "FANUC recommendation setting parameter".
- Parameters which can be written only when all axes stop
The following parameters can be written only when all axes stop.
When the control axis is selected by the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A - HS1E) in the
manual handle feed mode, the axis is movement state and the following parameters cannot be written.
The error code is returned when the following parameter is written by PMC window function.
Refer to the parameter manual for the meaning of each parameter.
NOTE
The following list might be changed or added by adding new CNC function.
Table 17.8 (a) The list of parameters witch cannot be written when any axes move
0 1 12 981 982 1000 1001 1002 1005 1006 1007
1008 1012 1013 1014 1015 1020 1022 1023 1025 1026 1031
1203 1205 1206 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1240
1241 1242 1243 1244 1250 1260 1280 1300 1301 1310 1320
1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1350 1351 1352 1353
1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1401 1402 1403
1404 1405 1407 1408 1410 1414 1415 1420 1421 1423 1424
1425 1426 1427 1428 1430 1432 1434 1440 1441 1442 1443
1444 1445 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458
1459 1460 1461 1465 1466 1474 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485
1486 1487 1488 1495 1601 1602 1603 1604 1606 1610 1611
1612 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1660 1671
1672 1673 1713 1714 1722 1726 1732 1735 1737 1738 1763
1769 1772 1783 1788 1789 1790 1791 1800 1802 1803 1804
1805 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823
1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1832 1836 1838 1839 1841
1844 1846 1847 1848 1850 1851 1852 1868 1880 1881 1882
1883 1884 1885 1886 1902 1904 1905 2000 2002 2005 2007
2008 2009 2011 2015 2016 2017 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024
2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035
2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046
2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057
2058 2059 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069
- 2450 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080
2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091
2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102
2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113
2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124
2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136
2137 2138 2139 2140 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148
2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159
2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170
2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181
2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192
2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2206 2207 2224 2229
2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240
2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251
2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262
2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2273 2274
2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2284 2285 2286 2287
2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298
2299 2300 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310
2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321
2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332
2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343
2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354
2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365
2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376
2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387
2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398
2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409
2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420
2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431
2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442
2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454
2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465
2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476
2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487
2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498
2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509
2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520
2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531
2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542
2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553
2554 2555 2556 2557 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565
2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576
2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587
2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598
2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609
2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620
2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631
2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642
2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653
2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664
2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675
2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686
2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 3006 3012 3013 3014
3019 3021 3022 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3115 3129
3131 3132 3133 3134 3400 3401 3402 3405 3450 3452 3453
- 2451 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
3455 3456 3457 3460 3463 3464 3471 3605 3620 3621 3622
3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3661 3666 3671 3676 3681 3704
3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3730 3731 3738
3739 3741 3742 3743 3744 3772 3781 3794 3795 3796 3798
4352 4395 4801 4810 4811 4821 4826 4831 4832 4950 4959
4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 5019
5022 5040 5041 5042 5043 5102 5148 5176 5177 5178 5179
5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5203 5210 5214
5221 5222 5223 5224 5231 5232 5233 5234 5241 5242 5243
5244 5261 5262 5263 5264 5271 5272 5273 5274 5280 5281
5282 5283 5284 5291 5292 5293 5294 5300 5301 5302 5304
5306 5310 5311 5312 5313 5321 5322 5323 5324 5350 5352
5354 5356 5358 5360 5365 5366 5367 5368 5382 5401 5420
5421 5431 5440 5460 5461 5463 5464 5480 5481 5484 5490
5500 5501 5510 5511 5512 5620 5761 5762 5763 5764 5771
5772 5773 5774 5781 5782 5783 5784 5861 5862 5863 5864
5871 5872 5873 5874 6007 6131 6132 6136 6137 6138 6161
6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175
6176 6177 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6191 6192
6193 6194 6195 6196 6197 6201 6210 6280 6286 6287 6400
6402 6411 6412 6413 6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420
6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431
6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442
6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453
6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464
6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475
6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486
6487 6488 6489 6490 6495 6496 6497 7015 7040 7041 7042
7055 7066 7102 7106 7160 7161 7180 7181 7182 7183 7184
7185 7186 7187 7188 7301 7310 7501 7502 7503 7504 7505
7510 7514 7515 7521 7522 7523 7524 7525 7527 7570 7605
7635 7636 7700 7702 7704 7705 7709 7710 7731 7740 7741
7745 7772 7773 7776 7777 7778 7782 7783 7784 7785 8002
8003 8004 8005 8006 8007 8008 8010 8011 8013 8020 8022
8028 8030 8031 8032 8040 8101 8105 8161 8162 8163 8164
8166 8167 8168 8169 8180 8181 8183 8184 8185 8186 8190
8191 8192 8194 8210 8211 8212 8303 8304 8305 8307 8311
8312 8314 8323 8325 8326 8327 8330 8331 8332 8333 8334
8335 8336 8375 8377 8406 8407 8451 8456 8457 8458 8459
8465 8466 8486 8487 8490 8491 8860 8861 10000 10001 10002
10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013
10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024
10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035
10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046
10047 10048 10049 10050 10051 10052 10053 10054 10055 10056 10057
10058 10059 10060 10061 10062 10063 10064 10065 10066 10067 10068
10069 10070 10071 10072 10073 10074 10075 10076 10077 10078 10079
10080 10081 10082 10083 10084 10085 10086 10087 10088 10089 10090
10091 10092 10093 10094 10095 10096 10097 10098 10099 10100 10101
10102 10103 10104 10105 10106 10107 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112
10113 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 10121 10122 10123
10124 10125 10126 10127 10128 10129 10130 10131 10132 10133 10134
10135 10136 10137 10138 10139 10140 10141 10142 10143 10144 10145
10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 10153 10154 10155 10156
10157 10158 10159 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10165 10166 10167
10168 10169 10170 10171 10172 10173 10174 10175 10176 10177 10178
- 2452 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
10179 10180 10181 10182 10183 10184 10185 10186 10187 10188 10189
10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199 10200
10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10211
10212 10213 10214 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222
10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229 10230 10231 10232 10233
10234 10235 10236 10237 10238 10239 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244
10245 10246 10247 10248 10249 10250 10251 10252 10253 10254 10255
10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10263 10264 10265 10266
10267 10268 10269 10270 10271 10272 10273 10274 10275 10276 10277
10278 10279 10280 10281 10282 10283 10284 10285 10286 10287 10288
10289 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299
10300 10301 10302 10303 10304 10305 10306 10307 10308 10309 10310
10311 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 10318 10319 10320 10321
10322 10323 10324 10325 10326 10327 10328 10329 10331 10332 10339
10341 10342 10345 10346 10350 10360 10361 10362 10370 10371 10410
10411 10412 10480 10485 10486 10487 10490 10491 10500 10501 10502
10503 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513
10514 10515 10516 10517 10518 10519 10520 10521 10522 10523 10524
10525 10526 10527 10528 10529 10530 10531 10532 10533 10534 10535
10536 10537 10538 10539 10540 10541 10542 10543 10544 10545 10546
10547 10548 10549 10550 10551 10552 10553 10554 10555 10556 10557
10558 10559 10560 10561 10562 10563 10564 10565 10566 10567 10568
10569 10570 10571 10572 10573 10574 10575 10576 10577 10578 10579
10580 10581 10582 10583 10584 10585 10586 10587 10588 10589 10590
10591 10592 10593 10594 10595 10596 10770 10771 10772 10773 10774
10775 10776 10777 10778 10779 10780 10781 10782 10783 10784 10790
10791 10792 10793 10794 10795 10796 10797 10800 10801 10802 10803
10804 10805 10806 10807 10808 10809 10810 10811 10812 10813 10814
10830 10900 10901 10902 10903 10904 10905 10906 10907 10908 10909
10910 10911 10912 10913 10914 10915 10916 10917 10918 10919 10920
10921 10926 10927 10928 11000 11001 11005 11009 11012 11013 11014
11015 11016 11017 11020 11021 11022 11023 11024 11025 11026 11030
11031 11032 11033 11034 11035 11036 11037 11040 11041 11042 11050
11051 11052 11060 11061 11062 11063 11065 11066 11067 11068 11070
11071 11072 11073 11074 11075 11076 11080 11081 11082 11083 11084
11085 11086 11087 11090 11101 11102 11113 11118 11119 11201 11202
11203 11221 11222 11230 11231 11232 11240 11242 11244 11245 11250
11260 11261 11263 11270 11275 11276 11280 11281 11282 11283 11284
11400 11401 11402 11403 11420 11421 11422 11423 11424 11425 11426
11427 11428 11429 11430 11431 11432 11433 11434 11435 11436 11437
11438 11439 11440 11441 11442 11443 11444 11445 11446 11448 11449
11450 11451 11452 11453 11454 11455 11456 11457 11458 11459 11460
11461 11462 11463 11464 11465 11466 11467 11468 11469 11470 11471
11472 11473 11474 11476 11477 11478 11479 11480 11485 11487 11488
11489 11490 11500 11501 11502 11504 11549 11601 11602 11619 11630
11768 11769 11770 11771 11772 11773 11774 11775 11776 11777 11778
11779 11780 11803 11807 12255 12256 12318 12319 12321 12600 12730
12731 12732 12733 12734 12735 12736 12737 12738 12751 12752 12753
12754 12755 12756 13113 13351 13352 13353 13354 13361 13362 13363
13364 13371 13372 13373 13374 13391 13392 13393 13394 13395 13396
13421 13541 13542 13600 13634 13681 13806 13811 13821 13822 13823
13824 13826 13827 13828 13829 13831 13832 13833 13834 13835 13836
13837 13838 13844 13880 13881 13882 13883 13884 13885 13886 13887
13888 13889 13890 13891 13892 13893 13894 13895 13896 13897 13898
13899 13900 13901 13902 13903 13904 13905 13906 13907 13908 13909
13910 13911 13920 13921 13922 13923 13924 13925 13926 13927 13928
- 2453 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
13929 13930 13931 13932 13933 13934 13935 13936 13937 13938 13939
13940 13941 13942 13943 13944 13945 13946 13947 13948 13949 13950
13951 13960 13961 13962 13963 13964 13965 13966 13967 13968 13969
13970 13971 13972 13973 13974 13975 13976 13977 13978 13979 13980
13981 13982 13983 13984 13985 13986 13987 13988 13989 13990 13991
14010 14270 14271 14273 14274 14275 14276 14277 14278 14279 14280
14281 14282 14283 14284 14285 14286 14287 14288 14289 14310 14901
14902 14903 14910 14911 14912 14913 14914 14915 14916 14917 14918
14920 14921 14922 14923 14924 14925 14926 14927 14928 14929 14930
14931 14932 14933 14934 14935 14936 14937 14938 14940 14941 14942
14943 14944 14945 14946 14947 14948 14949 14950 14951 14952 14953
14954 14955 14956 14957 14958 14960 14961 14962 14963 14964 14965
14966 14967 14968 14969 14970 14971 14972 14973 14974 14975 14976
14977 14978 14985 14986 14987 14988 14997 14998 18500 18501 18502
18503 18505 18506 18507 18508 18509 18510 18511 18512 18513 18514
18515 18516 18517 18518 18519 18520 18521 18522 18523 18524 18525
18526 18527 18528 18529 18530 18531 18532 18533 18534 18535 18536
18537 18538 18539 18540 18545 18546 18547 18548 18550 18551 18552
18553 18554 18555 18556 18557 18558 18559 18560 18561 18562 18563
18564 18565 18566 18567 18568 18569 18570 18571 18572 18573 18574
18575 18576 18577 18578 18579 18580 18581 18582 18583 18584 18585
18590 18591 18592 18593 18595 18596 18597 18598 18599 18600 18601
18602 18603 18604 18605 18606 18607 18608 18609 18610 18611 18612
18613 18614 18615 18616 18617 18618 18619 18620 18621 18622 18623
18624 18625 18626 18627 18628 18629 18630 18640 18641 18642 18643
18645 18646 18647 18648 18650 18651 18652 18653 18655 18656 18657
18658 18659 18660 18661 18662 18663 18664 18665 18666 18667 18668
18669 18670 18671 18672 18673 18674 18675 18676 18677 18678 18679
18680 18681 18682 18683 18684 18685 18686 18687 18688 18689 18690
18691 18692 18693 18694 18695 18696 18697 18698 18699 18700 18701
18702 18703 18704 18705 18706 18707 18708 18709 18710 18711 18712
18713 18714 18715 18716 18717 18718 18719 18720 18721 18722 18723
18724 18725 18726 19500 19501 19503 19515 19516 19517 19518 19519
19531 19532 19533 19534 19535 19540 19541 19542 19543 19544 19545
19546 19547 19548 19549 19550 19551 19552 19553 19554 19555 19556
19557 19558 19559 19560 19561 19562 19563 19564 19565 19566 19567
19568 19581 19582 19587 19588 19589 19590 19591 19592 19593 19608
19650 19655 19656 19657 19658 19659 19660 19661 19662 19665 19666
19667 19680 19681 19682 19683 19684 19685 19686 19687 19688 19689
19690 19696 19697 19698 19699 19700 19701 19702 19703 19704 19705
19709 19710 19711 19712 19713 19714 19751 19752 19760 19761 19762
24096 24097 24098 24099 24100 24101 24102 24103 24604 24605 24607
24610 24611 24612 24613 24614 24615 24616 24617 24618 24619 24620
24621 24632 24633 24640 24653 24660 24711 24713 25700 25701 25702
25703 25704 25705 25706 25710 25711 25712 25713 25714 25715 25716
25717 25720 25721 25722 25723 25724 25725 25726 25730 25731 25732
25733 25734 25735 25736 25737 25861 25862 25863 25864 25865 25866
25867 25868 25869 25870 25884 25885 25886 25887
- 2454 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
17.8.2 Parameter (No. 2092, Bit 0 of No. 8162) Write
Overview
This function allows you to write the following parameters using a PMC window function (function
instruction WINDW: SUB52) as long as a relevant axis is stopped. You can also use FOCAS2 or C
Language Executor to write parameters. The function can be used to write the following parameters:
• Parameter No. 2092
Advanced preview feed forward coefficient
• Bit 0 (SMR) of parameter No. 8162
Synchronous mirror-image control is:
0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.)
1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.)
This function can reduce the machining cycle time as it can write parameters without all of the axes
stopped.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11502 IPW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 IPW The advanced preview feed-forward coefficient (parameter No. 2092) and bit 0 (SMR) of
parameter No. 8162 for specifying whether to apply a mirror image during
synchronization control are:
0: Write-disabled during axis moving.
1: Write-enabled if the corresponding axis is stopped.
Limitation
- Axis synchronous control
Under axis synchronous control, this function is disabled when slave axis parameter automatic setting is
enabled (bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 = 1). (All the axes must be stopped before parameters can be
written.)
- AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control
Under AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control, no parameter can be written even
when the relevant axis is stopped.
- 2455 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17.8.3 Parameter (No. 1620) Write
Overview
This function allows you to write a time constant (parameter No. 1620) for rapid-traverse linear
acceleration/deceleration during axial movement. You can write the parameter using the PMC window
function (function instruction WINDW: SUB52), FOCAS2, or C Language Executor.
If you change the time constant during axial movement, the new setting take effect from the move
command encountered first after the axis stops. This function can reduce the machining cycle time as it
can change the time constant without all of the axes stopped.
Example)
G00 X50.0 ;
G00 X150.0 ;
Feedrate Change to time constant
T: Time constant before change
T’: Time constant after change
Time
T T T’ T’
Fig. 17.8.3 (a)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11502 CTC
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#6 CTC During axis moving, the time constant of rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration
for each axis (parameter No. 1620) is:
0: Write-disabled.
1: Write-enabled.
Restrictions
- Axis of time constant 0
Do not use this function for an axis of time constant 0.
- Axis synchronous control
Under axis synchronous control, this function is disabled when slave axis parameter automatic setting is
enabled (bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 = 1). (All the axes must be stopped before the parameter can
be written.)
Note
NOTE
1 Set the time constants of the master and slave axes under axis synchronous
control to the same value.
2 Set the time constants of the master and slave axes under tandem control to the
same value.
- 2456 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
17.8.4 Parameter (No. 1825, No. 1826) Write
Overview
This function allows you to write the following parameters using a PMC window function (function
instruction WINDW: SUB52) as long as a relevant axis is stopped. You can also use FOCAS2 or C
Language Executor to write parameters. The function can be used to write the following parameters:
• Parameter No. 1825
Servo loop gain for each axis
• Parameter No. 1826
In-position width for each axis
This function can reduce the machining cycle time as it can write parameters without all of the axes
stopped.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10350 PWR
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 IPW The servo loop gain for each axis (parameter No. 1825) and the In-position width for each
axis (parameter No. 1826) are:
0: Write-disabled during axis moving.
1: Write-enabled if the corresponding axis is stopped.
Limitation
- Axis synchronous control
Under axis synchronous control, this function is disabled when slave axis parameter automatic setting is
enabled (bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 = 1). (All the axes must be stopped before parameters can be
written.)
- 2457 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
17.9 DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC
Overview
The signal data are transferred between PMC and DCSPMC. As a result, PMC data can be referred from
DCSPMC and DCSPMC data can be referred from PMC.
Regardless of 1-path or the multi path system, 2 bytes (16 points) data are transferred.
Explanation
The signal data are transferred between PMC and DCSPMC as follows.
Data transfer area
PMC G0765 DCSPMC F0017 (1byte)
G1765 F0037 (1byte)
DCSPMC G0017 PMC F0747 (1byte)
G0037 F1747 (1byte)
PMC (n=0,1) DCSPMC (m=0,20)
F area F area
Fn747 F(017+m)
G area G area
Gn765 G(017+m)
NOTE
Regardless of 1-path or the multi path system, 2 bytes (16 points) are
transferred.
Signal
DI signal for Data transfer between PMC and DCSPMC
TPMG00 to TPMG07 <PMC:Gn765> (n=0,1)
TDCG00 to TDCG07 <DCSPMC:G(017+m)> (m=0,20)
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] These signals are transferred between PMC and DCSPMC. PMC signals can be referred
from DCSPMC and DCSPMC signals can be referred from PMC. The signals are
transferred as follows.
- From TPMGxx(G765) to TPMFxx(F017).
- 2458 -
B-64603EN-1/01 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
- From TDCGxx(G017) to TDCFxx(F747).
[Operation] (1) DI signal(TPMG00 to TPMG07) are transferred to DO signal(TPMF00 to TPMF07)
(2) DI signal(TDCG00 to TDCG07) are transferred to DO signal(TDCF00 to TDCF07)
DO signal for Data transfer between PMC and DCSPMC
TDCF00 to TDCF07 <PMC:Fn747> (n=0,1)
TPMF00 to TPMF07 <DCSPMC:F(017+m)> (m=0,20)
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] These signals are transferred between PMC and DCSPMC. PMC signals can be referred
from DCSPMC and DCSPMC signals can be referred from PMC. The signals are
transferred as follows.
- From TPMGxx(G765) to TPMFxx(F017).
- From TDCGxx(G017) to TDCFxx(F747).
[Operation] (1) DI signal(TPMG00 to TPMG07) are transferred to DO signal(TPMF00 to TPMF07)
(2) DI signal(TDCG00 to TDCG07) are transferred to DO signal(TDCF00 to TDCF07)
Signal address
PMC (n=0,1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn765 TPMG07 TPMG06 TPMG05 TPMG04 TPMG03 TPMG02 TPMG01 TPMG00
Fn747 TDCF07 TDCF06 TDCF05 TDCF04 TDCF03 TDCF02 TDCF01 TDCF00
DCSPMC (m=0,20)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G(017+m) TDCG07 TDCG06 TDCG05 TDCG04 TDCG03 TDCG02 TDCG01 TDCG00
F(017+m) TPMF07 TPMF06 TPMF05 TPMF04 TPMF03 TPMF02 TPMF01 TPMF00
WARNING
1 The safety related signal such as the protection door lock/unlock signal is
input(or output) to PMC/DCSPMC respectively and monitored in redundant
mode. If this transfer function is applied to the safety related signal, the
independence between PMC/DCSPMC is lost. Do not use this data transfer
function to control the safety related function.
2 The error of ladder program cannot be checked by safety function itself. The
confirmation of the safety related ladder program should be done enough by the
machine tool builder. The safety related ladder program should be guaranteed
by the machine tool builder.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13805 PDTR NPDT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2459 -
17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#5 NPDT While the Dual Check Safety function is inactive (parameter DCE=0), Data transfer
between PMC and DCSPMC is:
0: Not available
1: Available
#6 PDTR Data transfer between PMC and DCSPMC is:
0: Not available
1: Available
- 2460 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function.
Chapter 18, "EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ......................................2461
18.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .......................................................2462
18.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES .......................................2532
18.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ...........................................................................2532
18.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION.................................2534
18.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION................................................2538
18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET
CARD
The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded
Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.
A selection can also be made to stop the embedded Ethernet function.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot for temporary communication.
CAUTION
1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the first time, set an IP address
and other items carefully as instructed by the network administrator, then
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting may cause a communication
failure on the entire network or system error in the CNC.
2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network can increase the
communication processing load on the CNC even if the unit is not
communicating with the CNC.
Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide network. Use a router or the like to
separate the network including the CNC from the other networks.
3 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a memory card slot, with a part of the
card left uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, take great care not
to damage the card by hitting the protruding part of the card.
When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the card immediately, in order to
prevent any damage to the card.
NOTE
1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by FANUC. General Ethernet cards
available on the market cannot be used.
2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC LADDER-III or a SERVO GUIDE.
3 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary communication as described
above. Avoid using the card for continuous communication.
- 2461 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 ETH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA LAN card) is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
18.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded Ethernet function.
18.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function
This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
WARNING
When using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function, thoroughly confirm the content of
“GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT” in
“SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” at the beginning of this manual.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time
NOTE
1 When running user's original application software created by using the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function, use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be
connected to one CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or personal computers may overload
the CNC, reducing the communication speed.
4 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can
create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2
library software.
Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal
computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that
there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the
personal computer.
Notes on using the CNC Screen Display function for the first time
NOTE
With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function
client can be connected to one CNC.
- 2462 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen
On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,
press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are
made when a connection to the SERVO GUIDE and FANUC LADDER-III is
established.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) (Fig. 18.2.1.1 (a)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.1.1 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
- 2463 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Item Description
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen (Fig. 18.2.1.1(b)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.1.1 (b) FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid
input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following standard setting values, for ease of connection
with a SERVO GUIDE or FANUC LADDER-III.
IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) :0
TIME INTERVAL :0
If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified setting is reset to the standard setting
value.
The embedded Ethernet port does not have a standard setting value.
- 2464 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
The following shows a setting example required for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS2/Ethernet.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None The Ethernet parameter screen
TCP port number 8193 8193 is used for setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0
PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the
personal computer (Windows
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.
Default gateway None
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100
The arguments of the data window
NC TCP port number 8193
library function cnc_allclibhndl3 are
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101 used for setting.
NC TCP port number 8193
18.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function
This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer function to operate using the
embedded Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The number of FTP communications to which one CNC can be connected using
the FTP file transfer function is one.
3 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer
function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system
including communication with the personal computer because the personal
computer environment may affect communication operation.
4 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be
operated on the host computer.
- 2465 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
5 When a lot of files are registered in the host computer, the display processing of
host file list display might become slow. In this case, divide the folder that
registers the files.
18.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen
On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port is displayed.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set
up. However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not necessary
usually.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) (Fig. 18.2.2.1(a)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.2.1 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
- 2466 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Item Description
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FTP transfer screen (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)
1 Press soft key [FTP TRANS]. The FTP transfer screen (Fig. 18.2.2.1(b) and (c)) is displayed.
2 Page keys can be used to make settings for the three host computers for connection
destinations 1 to 3.
Fig. 18.2.2.1 (b) FTP transfer screen (1st page) Fig. 18.2.2.1 (c) FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session is used,
so that "21" is to be specified usually.
USER NAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters
can be specified.)
If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the host computer becomes the log-in folder.
- 2467 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Operation
Select a destination.
1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this soft
key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed. (Fig.
18.2.2.1(d))
Fig. 18.2.2.1 (d)
2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or
[CONECT 3]. CONNECT 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer
corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected.
When CONNECT 1 is selected
18.2.2.2 Related parameters
The parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below.
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.
For embedded Ethernet port
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an FTP server
presence check based on PING is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
- 2468 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
Usually, set this parameter to 0 (to make a check).
If this parameter is set to 1 (not to make an FTP server presence
check based on PING), several tens of seconds may be required
until an error is recognized when no FTP server is present on the
network.
Mainly for security, a personal computer may be set to ignore the
PING command. When communicating with such a personal
computer, set this parameter to 1 (not to make an FTP server
presence check based on PING).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14883 PSV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#7 PSV FTP client of FTP file transfer function:
0: Operates as the active mode.
1: Operates as the passive mode.
18.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function
The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file transfer function to operate.
(when WindowsXP Professional is used as the OS for the personal computer).
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function.
• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates.
• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None
Connection host 1 Port number 21 21 The Ethernet parameter
IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 screen is used for setting.
User name user user
Password user user
Login DIR None None
The parameter screen is
Parameter No. 20 9 9 used for setting.
- 2469 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 computer (WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Default gateway None "User account of the personal computer
User name user (WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Password user
Login DIR Default "Internet service manager" of the personal
computer (WindowsXP) is used for setting.
- 2470 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function
The DNS/DHCP function is set up by using the COMMON screen (DETAIL) and parameters.
18.2.3.1 Setting up DNS
This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS.
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS client function, with reference to "Related Parameters," which will be seen later.
Also this function can be enabled by setting "1" to the DNS CLIENT in the COMMON screen
(BASIC).
2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working (hereafter referred to as a DNS
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen (DETAIL)
appears.
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS IP address field.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON
screen (DETAIL) (Fig. 18.2.3.1(a)). Specify a DNS IP address.
Fig. 18.2.3.1 (a) COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that order.
- 2471 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP
This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DHCP.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP client function, with reference to "Related Parameters," which will be seen later.
Also this function can be enabled by setting "1" to the DHCP CLIENT in the COMMON screen
(BASIC).
2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working (hereafter referred to as a DHCP
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen appears.
5 If the DHCP client function of the CNC has been enabled and if the DHCP server is connected
successfully, the DHCP server automatically specifies the following items.
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed in each field.
6 If the DNS client function has also been enabled and if the DHCP server and the DNS server work
together (if the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.
COMMON screen (BASIC and DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call desired Ethernet common
setting screens (BASIC and DETAIL).
If the DHCP server is connected successfully and if the setting data can be obtained, the screens are
displayed as shown Fig. 18.2.3.2(a).
Fig. 18.2.3.2 (a) When the DHCP server is connected successfully
If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host name in the
"NC-<MAC-address>" format.
- 2472 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Example of automatically assigned host name
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, the screens are displayed as shown Fig. 18.2.3.2(b).
Fig. 18.2.3.2 (b) When the DHCP server cannot be connected
Check items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server is connected successfully, the items obtained from
SUBNET MASK the DHCP server are displayed.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2
DOMAIN
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC.
If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the DHCP server notifies the
DNS server of this host name.
If the host name is left blank, a host name is automatically assigned in the
"NC-<MAC-address>" format.
Example of automatically assigned host name:
NC-080019000001
DNS CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#5(DNS) related to the DNS client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. See "Related Parameters", which will be
seen later.
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address.
- 2473 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.3.3 Related parameters
For embedded Ethernet port
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#5 DNS With the embedded Ethernet port, the DNS client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
This value is also displayed to the DNS CLIENT in the COMMON screen (DETAIL),
and the setting is also possible.
#6 DHC With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
This value is also displayed to the DHCP CLIENT in the COMMON screen (BASIC),
and the setting is also possible.
18.2.4 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function
CNC Screen Display function is a software that allows performing display and operation similar to a
CNC on the Windows PC. Refer to “CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR’S MANUAL”
(B-63164EN) for the method of use.
NOTE
1 The screen update interval of CNC Screen Display function is slower than that of
a CNC-dedicated display unit. Therefore, use this function as an auxiliary display
unit.
2 When high-load machining such as high-speed and high-precision machining is
performed or the software options that require the CPU power are specified, the
screen update interval might be slower. Even if a higher-performance personal
computer is used, the screen update interval is not improved.
Therefore, the CNC Screen Display function on Embedded Ethernet might not
show the full performance according to the system configuration of the machine.
3 On Embedded Ethernet, when other network functions (FOCAS2/Ethernet
function etc.) are used simultaneously with CNC Screen Display function, it
affects the screen update interval. Therefore, do not use other network functions
at the same time on Embedded Ethernet when using CNC Screen Display
function.
- 2474 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.4.1 Operation on the Setting screen
This section describes the setting screen for operating the CNC Screen Display function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. (When there is not this soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2], and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
Fig. 18.2.4.1 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
- 2475 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
Fig. 18.2.4.1 (b) FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the CNC screen Display function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
18.2.5 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package
Machine Remote Diagnosis package is a tool designed for the machine tool builder to provide remote
support of machines easily. Machine Remote Diagnosis function works on Embedded Ethernet or Fast
Ethernet board in order to communicate with Machine Remote Diagnosis package.
Refer to “Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL” (B-63734EN) for the
method of use.
NOTE
Refer to the notes of “Setting of the CNC Screen Display function” when using
CNC Screen Display function for MRDP (Machine Remote Diagnosis
Package).The notes are applied to this function, too.
18.2.5.1 Related NC parameters
When using Machine Remote Diagnosis package on Embedded Ethernet, the following parameters must
be set.
0024 Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool
[Input type] Setting input
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.
- 2476 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8706 MRD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#6 MRD Machine Remote Diagnosis function is used:
0: On Embedded Ethernet.
1: On Fast Ethernet board.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When connecting with the host computer (machine remote
diagnosis accepting server) on Intranet, set 0.
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
When connecting with the host computer (machine remote
diagnosis accepting server) via Internet, set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 ERD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#0 ERD On Embedded Ethernet, Machine Remote Diagnosis is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 2477 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.5.2 Operation on the Setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. (When there is not this soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the
items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
2 If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set
up. However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not
necessary usually.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).
Fig. 18.2.5.2 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
- 2478 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.
Fig. 18.2.5.2 (b) FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions
(FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
- 2479 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)
Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).
Fig. 18.2.5.2 (c) Machine remote diagnosis screen (COMMON)
Setting items
Item Description
MTB ID This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that
the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool
builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the
machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from
the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder.
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")
MACHINE ID Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine
under diagnosis
(Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")
MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)
Press soft key [RMTDIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.
- 2480 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
(When the DNS function is disabled) (When the DNS function is enabled)
Fig. 18.2.5.2 (d) Machine Remote Diagnosis screens (INQUIRY1)
Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is disabled.
(Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203")
Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis
functions are used.
INQUIRY NAME Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis
accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")
18.2.5.3 Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from PMC
You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote
diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to
the PMC ladder.
Signals
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0141 DIAREQ DIASTP INQU2 INQU1 INQU0
DIAREQ <G0141.5>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis.
- 2481 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the
inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry
destination (INQU0<G0141.0> to INQU2<G0141.2>). When the acceptance completion
signal (RMTEND<F0083.6>) or acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN<F0083.7>) is set to
"1", this signal is set to "0".
DIASTP <G0141.4>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel
acceptance (RMTCLS<F0082.3>) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".
INQU2 <G0141.2>
INQU1 <G0141.1>
INQU0 <G0141.0>
[Name] Inquiry number select signals
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis
[Operation] Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine
remote signal.
INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 Status
0 0 0 No selection
0 0 1 Inquiry destination 1
0 1 0 Inquiry destination 2
0 1 1 Inquiry destination 3
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0082 RMTCLS
RMTCLS <F0082.3>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.
[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote
diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP<G0141.4>) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When
the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP<G0141.4>) is set
to "0", this signal is set to "0".
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0083 RMTCAN RMTEND DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0
RMTCAN <F0083.7>
[Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "1",
a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server. When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "0", this signal
is set to "0".
- 2482 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
RMTEND <F0083.6>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine
remote diagnosis accepting server.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "1",
a request to start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server. When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ<G0141.5>) is set to "0", this signal
is set to "0".
DIAST5 <F0083.5>
DIAST4 <F0083.4>
DIAST3 <F0083.3>
DIAST2 <F0083.2>
DIAST1 <F0083.1>
DIAST0 <F0083.0>
[Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.
DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0 Description
0 0 0 0 0 0 No status
0 0 0 0 0 1 OPEN
0 0 0 0 1 0 OPENING
0 0 0 0 1 1 ACCEPTED
0 0 0 1 0 0 REFUSED
0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 0 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 1 CLOSE
0 0 1 0 0 0 FORCE CLOSING
0 0 1 0 0 1 ERROR
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0088 DIAER7 DIAER6 DIAER5 DIAER4 DIAER3 DIAER2 DIAER1 DIAER0
DIAER7 <F0088.7>
DIAER6 <F0088.6>
DIAER5 <F0088.5>
DIAER4 <F0088.4>
DIAER3 <F0088.3>
DIAER2 <F0088.2>
DIAER1 <F0088.1>
DIAER0 <F0088.0>
[Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is
0 to 255 in binary format.
- 2483 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Signal Timing Charts
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted
INQU0 (G0141.0)
INQU1 (G0141.1)
INQU2 (G0141.2)
<1>
DIAREQ (G0141.5) <4>
<2>
RMTEND (F0083.6) <3> <5>
The start of machine remote
diagnosis is accepted.
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion
signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1".
<4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".
When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected
INQU0 (G0141.0)
INQU1 (G0141.1)
INQU2 (G0141.2)
<1>
DIAREQ (G0141.5) <4>
<2>
RMTCAN (F0083.7) <3> <5>
The start of machine remote
diagnosis is rejected.
<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1".
<4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal
to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
- 2484 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for
machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".
When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated
DIASTP (G0141.4) <2>
RMTCLS (F0082.3) <1> <3>
Machine remote diagnosis is
forcibly terminated.
<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1".
<2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to
"1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0".
<3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the
machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.
18.2.5.4 Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.
Fig. 18.2.5.4 (a) Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.
Fig. 18.2.5.4 (b) Soft keys of Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
- 2485 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Display items
INQUIRY NUMBER
Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1,"
"INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."
INQUIRY
Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
RMT DIAG STATUS
Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.
RMT DIAG TIME
Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE
CLOSING," or "ERROR."
At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."
RECEIPT NUMBER
Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
ERROR NUMBER
Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
AVAILABLE DEVICE
Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can
operate.
ERROR MESSAGE
Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis
functions.
Operation list
DIAG OPEN
Starts machine remote diagnosis.
DIAG CLOSE
Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.
INQUIRY1
Selects inquiry destination 1.
INQUIRY2
Selects inquiry destination 2.
INQUIRY3
Selects inquiry destination 3.
Selecting an Inquiry Destination
Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1.
3 Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to
select inquiry destination 3.
- 2486 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Starting Diagnosis
Start diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to send the start request to the machine remote diagnosis
3 When the machine remote diagnosis accepts the start request, the diagnosis begins.
Diagnosis status
Status Description
--- No operation
OPEN Soft key [DIAG OPEN] was pressed.
An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
OPENING
server.
ACCEPTED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis.
REFUSED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis.
This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the communication
DIAGNOSING
line.
Soft key [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced termination
FORCE CLOSING
processing, "CLOSE" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field.
CLOSE The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis.
ERROR An error occurred on the communication line.
Error numbers and error messages
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
1 Diagnosis is busy Soft key [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis.
The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be
2 Router isn’t alive off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power
to the router is on.
The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be
invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be
Receipt Server isn’t
3 operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
alive
accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server is operating.
A system error occurred.
4 System error
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Invalid Inquiry A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination.
5
number. Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set.
6 Invalid IP Address Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.
A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number.
7 Invalid PORT number
Check whether the correct port number is set.
Invalid Router IP Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification
8
Address format.
A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below.
Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the
personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical
9 Socket error
communication path was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer with which to
communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC.
11 Invalid Request
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
- 2487 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
An unrecognizable packet was received.
12 Invalid Packet
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Diagnosis was Soft key [DIGA CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis.
13
already stopped
An attempt to receive data failed.
17 Receive error
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped.
19 HeartBeat timeout
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote
20 HeartBeat error diagnosis.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server using the DNS function.
22 DNS error The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS
server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid
and whether the power to the DNS server is on.
Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis
Forcibly terminate diagnosis.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.
18.2.6 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the unsolicited messaging function with the
embedded Ethernet function.
18.2.6.1 Overview
This subsection provides an overview of the unsolicited messaging function and describes the execution
procedure.
Overview of the unsolicited messaging function
An overview of the unsolicited messaging function is provided below.
With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited
manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program
or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer to
periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated.
When the conventional function is used
Application software
Inquiry
Response Application checks for
CNC/PMC data changes.
- 2488 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
When the unsolicited messaging function is used
NC program or ladder Application software
program アプリケーションソフトウェア
NC program or ladder
program checks for Application receives
Notification
CNC/PMC data notification from CNC.
changes.
NOTE
The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure
The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below.
1 Preparation on the personal compute
Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install
the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For information on creating an application
with FOCAS2 functions for the unsolicited messaging function and installing the unsolicited
message server, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in "Data Window
Library Specifications" that comes with the FOCAS1/2 library.
2 Preparation on the CNC
Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging.
For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Subsection, "Execution methods".
3 Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are
needed:
(1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
(2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC screen
and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer.
For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Subsection, "Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function"
through Subsection, "Setting on the personal computer".
4 Starting the NC program or ladder program
Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time,
no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited
messaging function", is executed.
5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function
Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places the
CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder
program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder
program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.
6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function
To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the
personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no
unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC
program or ladder program.
- 2489 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.6.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
This subsection describes the setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for operating the unsolicited
messaging function.
Procedure
1 Enable the unsolicited messaging function according to "Related parameters" described later.
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the soft key is
displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is
displayed.
5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] then make settings on each screen.
6 Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message screen is displayed. (Press the continuous
menu key until the soft key [UNSOLI MSG] is displayed.) For details of the Unsolicited Message
screen, see Subsections starting with Subsection, "Mode selection".
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) (Fig. 18.2.6.2(a)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.6.2 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
- 2490 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
NOTE
Set page 2 (DETAIL screen) of the COMMON screen when using the
DNS/DHCP function. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up the DNS/DHCP
Function".
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
When using the DNS client function, press soft key [COMMON] then press page key . The
COMMON screen (DETAIL) (Fig. 18.2.6.2(b)) is displayed. Set the DNS IP address setting items.
Fig. 18.2.6.2 (b) COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that
order.
DNS CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#5(DNS) related to the DNS client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
- 2491 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen (Fig. 18.2.6.2(c)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.6.2 (c) FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the unsolicited messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function). The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0.
- 2492 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.6.3 Mode selection
This subsection describes the selection of a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging function.
Unsolicited Message screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message screen (BASIC) (Fig. 18.2.6.3(a)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.6.3 (a) Unsolicited Message screen 1 (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
MODE Select a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging function.
For the method of selection, see "Operation" described later.
• When "CNC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the CNC screen.
In this case, setting on the personal computer is disabled.
For details, see Subsection, "Setting on the CNC screen".
• When "PC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the personal computer.
In this case, setting on the CNC screen is disabled.
For details, see Subsection, "Setting on the personal computer".
NOTE
1 The mode is set to "PC MODE" at the time of initial use.
2 The mode can be switched only in the "Not Ready" state. For the "Not Ready"
state, see "Display items" provided later.
3 If the mode is switched from "CNC MODE" to "PC MODE", all parameters set on
the CNC screen are cleared.
4 The mode can be switched on the available device side only.
- 2493 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Operation
The mode can be switched as described below.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [MODE] is displayed. (Fig. 18.2.6.3(b))
Fig. 18.2.6.3 (b)
2 Press soft key [MODE]. Soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE] are displayed. (Fig. 18.2.6.3(c))
Fig. 18.2.6.3 (c)
Display items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the personal computer currently connected.
(Example of display format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS Displays the current state.
The following five states are available:
<1> Not Ready
State where data is not transmitted even when a request for data transmission is
made from an NC program or ladder program
<2> Ready
State where data is transmitted when a request for data transmission is made from
an NC program or ladder program
<3> Sending...
State present from the acceptance of a request for data transmission from an NC
program or ladder program until data transmission is completed
<4> Receiving...
State present from completion of data transmission until response data is received
<5> Completed
State present from reception of response data until response data processing is
completed
[Supplement]
• Data transmission
Means unsolicited message transmission (CNC→PC).
• Response data
Means a response to an unsolicited message (PC→CNC).
AVAILABLE DEVICE Device where embedded Ethernet is currently enabled.
The embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
NOTE
1 To switch the state from "Not Ready" to "Ready”, the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart needs to be executed on the personal computer.
2 To switch the state from other than "Not Ready" to “Not Ready”, the FOCAS2
function cnc_unsolicstop needs to be executed on the personal computer.
3 For the timing charts of the states, see Subsection, "Execution methods".
- 2494 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.6.4 Setting on the CNC screen
This subsection describes the method of setting on the Unsolicited Message screen.
NOTE
1 To enable the settings on the CNC screen and perform unsolicited messaging,
the procedure below needs to be used.
(1) Set all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press soft key [APPLY].
(3) Start unsolicited messaging (execute the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart) on the personal computer.
2 Setting of the setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) and
execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) are possible only in the "Not
Ready" state. For the "Not Ready" state, see "Display items" in Subsection,
"Mode selection".
3 On the setting screen on the unavailable device side, the setting items can be
set. However, execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) is possible on
the available device side only.
Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] then open page 2 and page 3 with page keys . The Unsolicited
Message screen (CONNECT) (Figs. 18.2.6.4(a) and (b)) is displayed.
Fig. 18.2.6.4 (a) Unsolicited Message screen 2 Fig. 18.2.6.4 (b) Unsolicited Message screen 3
(CONNECT) (CONNECT)
- 2495 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME (IP ADDRESS) When the DNS client function is disabled, specify the IP address of the
communication destination personal computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
When the DNS client function is enabled, specify the host name of the
communication destination personal computer. (Up to 63 characters can be
specified.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")
PORT NUMBER Specify the TCP port number and UDP port number of the communication
destination personal computer.
Usually, specify "8196".
The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
RETRY COUNT Specify the number of retries to be made when there is no response to data
transmitted by the communication function.
The valid input range is 0 to 32767.
TIMEOUT Specify a time-out period (in sec) from the transmission of data by the
communication function until a response is made to the transmitted data.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in sec) of the alive signal to be transmitted while the
communication function is operating normally.
Specify a value not greater than the value of TIMEOUT.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a type of control parameter. When this parameter is set to 0, the control
TYPE parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1: PMC address (response notification method)
• When set to 2: PMC address (simplified method)
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable (simplified method)
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable (simplified method)
(Note) The RTM variable is a real-time custom macro variable.
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a control parameter for executing data transmission.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 1
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Two bytes starting at a specified address are allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 2
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Only a specified address (one byte) is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for control.
Only a volatile common variable may be specified as a custom macro
variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 4
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
Only a volatile RTM variable may be specified as a RTM variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER Specify the number of data items to be transmitted.
The valid input range is 1 to 3.
- 2496 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Item Description
TRANSMISSION Specify each parameter for transmission data.
PARAMETER
(No.1 to 3)
TYPE Specify a transmission data type. When this parameter is set to 0, the
transmission parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1 or 2: PMC address
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable
• When set to 5: Nonvolatile RTM variable
PMC ADDRESS or Specify the start of a transmission data area
MACRO NO. When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC address for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify a RTM variable number for transmission.
SIZE or NUMBER Specify the size of a transmission data area or the number of variables.
The maximum specifiable number of bytes is as follows:
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 1: 2890 bytes
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 2: 2874 bytes in total
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 3: 2858 bytes in total
When using macro variables (custom macro variables or RTM variables), use a
conversion rate of one variable for eight bytes.
When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC area size (bytes) for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify the number of custom macro variables for transmission.
When a macro variable number of 1000 or greater (system variable) is used,
this parameter can be set to 1 only.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify the number of RTM variables for transmission.
WARNING
When setting PMC address or macro variable for the unsolicited messaging
function, thoroughly confirm the content of “GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT” in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” at the beginning
of this manual.
Ensure that a PMC address area for control never overlaps PMC areas used for
a purpose other than the unsolicited messaging function and that a macro
variable for control never be doubly specified as a variable to be used for a
purpose other than the unsolicited messaging function.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, all R area and E area as volatile
memory in the PMC area are 0.
- 2497 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
CAUTION
2 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it
can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option.
When the area is used as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are
retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid
not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.
NOTE
1 Two methods are available for PMC address specification in CONTROL
PARAMETER TYPE: response notification method and simplified method. For
details of the methods, see Subsection, "Execution methods".
2 The valid setting range of PMC addresses depends on the usable PMC memory
type. For details, refer to "PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN)".
3 The valid setting ranges of custom macro variable numbers and RTM variable
numbers depend on the selected options. For details, refer to "Operator’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN)".
4 Ensure that the setting of TRANSMISSION NUMBER matches the settings of
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (No. 1 to No. 3). If TRANSMISSION NUMBER
is set to 3, and an invalid value is specified in any of TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER No. 1 to No. 3, for example, execution of soft key [APPLY] results
in an error.
Setting PMC address
To setting a PMC address for control or a PMC address for transmission, specify it as follows:
Input format)
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For example, for R0500 on the second path of the PMC, input "2:R500".
If <Path number> is omitted (R500), the first path is assumed (1:R0500).
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.
To clear "<Path number>:<PMC address>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In
this case, it is assumed that no PMC area is used.
Setting macro variable
To setting a macro variable for control or a macro variable for transmission, specify it as follows:
Input format)
<Path number>:<Variable No>
For example, for No.100 on the second path of the Macro, input "2:100".
If <Path number> is omitted (100), the first path is assumed (1:100).
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.
To clear "<Path number>:<Variable No>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In
this case, it is assumed that no macro variable is used.
Operation
The settings of all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) can be made effective as
follows:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [APPLY] is displayed. (Fig. 18.2.6.4(c))
- 2498 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Fig. 18.2.6.4 (c)
2 Press soft key [APPLY].
18.2.6.5 Setting on the personal computer
For setting on the personal computer, create and set an application by using the following FOCAS2
functions:
• cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Parameter setting 2 for unsolicited messaging
• cnc_unsolicstart Start of unsolicited messaging
For details, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in "Data Window Library
Specifications" that comes with the FOCAS1/2 library.
WARNING
When setting PMC address or macro variable for the unsolicited messaging
function, thoroughly confirm the content of “GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT” in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” at the beginning
of this manual.
Ensure that a PMC address area for control never overlaps PMC areas used for
a purpose other than the unsolicited messaging function and that a macro
variable for control never be doubly specified as a variable to be used for a
purpose other than the unsolicited messaging function.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
NOTE
1 To start unsolicited messaging, the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 needs
to be executed first then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart needs to be
executed.
2 The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 can be executed only in the "Not
Ready" state. For details of the state, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode
selection".
3 When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is executed, the Unsolicited
Message screen (CONNECT) displays the settings made on the personal
computer.
18.2.6.6 Execution methods
How to execute the unsolicited messaging function is described below.
To execute the unsolicited messaging function, three methods are available:
• Using a PMC address for control based on the response notification method in a ladder program
• Using a PMC address for control based on the simplified method in a ladder program
• Using a macro variable for control based on the simplified method in an NC program
- 2499 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 When a ladder program is used, the response notification method and the
simplified method are available. A major difference is that the response
notification method sends RES_CODE to the ladder program in response to data
transmission but the simplified method does not send a response.
To utilize a ladder program based on logic used with the Series 16i, for example,
use the response notification method. When RES_CODE is unnecessary or a
new ladder program is created, the simplified method can be used.
2 RES_CODE is recorded on the Ethernet log screen when a value other than
0x00 and 0x01 is detected.
3 For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION" in "Data Window Library Specifications" that comes with the
FOCAS1/2 library.
For details, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in "Data Window Library
Specifications" that comes with the FOCAS1/2 library.
When a PMC address for control is used (response notification method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program according to the response
notification method is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a macro variable for
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of
a macro variable to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the
ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for both of control and
transmission.
Explanation of PMC address signals for control
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging
function is provided below. A PMC address area for control consists of 2 bytes.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path number specified) is used as a PMC
address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for transmission, the ladder
program sets this signal to “1”. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Message response reception signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the reception of a response to an unsolicited message.
- 2500 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
[Output condition] Upon reception of a message by the personal computer, a response to the message is
transmitted to the CNC (communication function). When the CNC (communication
function) receives the response, this signal is set to “1”. When this signal is set to “1”, the
ladder program reads RES_CODE then clears REQ to “0”. Next, the CNC
(communication function) clears RES_CODE to “0” then sets this signal to “0”.
COM <Rxxxx+1.6>
[Name] Message transmission start signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the start of transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] When transmission of a message to the personal computer is started, this signal is set to
“1”. Upon completion of message transmission, this signal is set to “0”.
RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5>
[Name] Message response reception result signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the reception result of a response to an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] The reception result of a response to a message is set. After reading this signal, the ladder
program clears REQ to “0”. The CNC (communication function) then clears this signal to
“0”.
NOTE
For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION" in "Data Window Library Specifications" that comes with the
FOCAS1/2 library.
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the response notification method is
described in the Fig. 18.2.6.6 (a).
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the FOCAS2 function
cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready
State
REQ (ladder program → (1)
communication function) (2)
(3) (6)
COM (communication function
→ ladder program)
RES (communication function (5)
(4)
→ ladder program) (7)
RES_CODE (communication
function → ladder program)
Transmission completed Receive data valid
Fig. 18.2.6.6 (a)
(1) After checking that RES is set to “0”, the ladder program prepares a message then sets REQ to “1”.
(2) Because of REQ set to “1”, the communication function sets COM to “1” then transmits the
message.
(3) Upon completion of message transmission, the communication function sets COM to “0”.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function sets RES_CODE then sets
RES to “1”.
(5) Because of RES set to “1”, the ladder program reads RES_CODE then sets REQ to “0”.
(6) Because of REQ set to “0”, the communication function clears RES_CODE to “0”.
- 2501 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(7) The communication function sets RES to “0”.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".
When a PMC address for control is used (simplified method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program according to the simplified method
is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a macro variable for
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of
a macro variable to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the
ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for both of control and
transmission.
Explanation of PMC address signals for control
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging
function is provided below. A PMC address area for control consists of 1 byte.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path number specified) is used as a PMC
address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for transmission, the ladder
program sets this signal to 1. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer.
Upon reception of a response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the simplified method is described below.
In the example below (Fig. 18.2.6.6 (b)), an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready
State
REQ (ladder program ↔ (1)
communication function) (2)
(3) (5)
Transmission processing by
communication function
Reception processing by (4)
communication function
Transmission completed Response received
Fig. 18.2.6.6 (b)
- 2502 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the ladder program prepares a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission processing.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function completes reception
processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".
When a macro variable for control is used (simplified method)
A description of using a macro variable for control in an NC program according to the simplified method
is provided below.
Macro variables for control are classified as custom macros and RTM macros, but the same execution
method is applicable.
NOTE
A combination of a macro variable for control and a PMC address for
transmission is also usable. In this case, note that the read timing of the value of
PMC data to be transmitted cannot be identified when viewed from the NC
program.
In the description below, a macro variable is used for both of control and
transmission.
Explanation of a macro variable for control
A detailed description of a macro variable for control used to execute the unsolicited messaging function
is provided below. One macro variable for control is used.
The description below assumes that #xxxx (with no CNC path number specified) is used as a macro
variable number for control.
REQ <#xxxx>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message in a macro variable for transmission, the NC
program sets this signal to 1. The message is then transmitted to the personal computer.
Upon reception of a response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
NOTE
A REQ input/output value is a real number. So, "0" means "0.0", and "1" means
"1.0".
Timing chart of a macro variable for control
The timing chart of a macro variable for control based on the simplified method is described below.
In the example below (Fig. 18.2.6.6 (c)), an unsolicited message is transmitted once after reception of the
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
- 2503 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready
State
REQ (NC program ↔ (1)
1
communication function) (2)
0
(3) (5)
Transmission processing by
communication function
Reception processing by (4)
communication function
Transmission completed Response received
Fig. 18.2.6.6 (c)
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the NC program prepares a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission processing.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication function completes reception
processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in Subsection, "Mode selection".
Example of using a macro variable for control
An example of using a macro variable for control is provided below.
• Example
[Description]
An NC program on CNC path number 1 posts NC command start date and time information as
an unsolicited message to the personal computer.
[Setting]
As a macro variable for control, volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used. On the other
hand, macro variables for transmission are used for date and time information managed inside
the CNC (system variable numbers #3011 and #3012).
Setting item Set value
CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0
TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3011
NUMBER 1
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3012
NUMBER 1
- 2504 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
[Example of NC program]
A RTM variable is executed in synchronism with the immediately following NC command
according to the RTM variable specification. At this time, the operation timing of the
immediately following NC command is not affected.
So, the NC program indicated below posts NC command 2 start date and time information as an
unsolicited message to the personal computer.
RTM variable for control of the unsolicited
messaging function
//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; (1)
NC program #RV[0]=1; ①
#RV[0]=1;
ZEND;
:
:
:
NC command 1
Macro call command
One machining NC command 2
cycle
:
:
:
(Tip) (1) in the example above corresponds to the number in the timing chart provided earlier.
NOTE
1 Note that if a custom macro is used as a macro for control, the operation timing
of an NC command is affected. If the RTM variable in the example above is
replaced with a custom macro, for example, NC command 2 becomes
unexecutable unless the macro variable for control is changed.
2 For details of custom macros and RTM variables, refer to "Operator’s Manual
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64604EN)".
18.2.6.7 Related parameters
For embedded Ethernet port
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 UNM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#4 UNM With a embedded Ethernet port, the CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 UNS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
- 2505 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Re-setting this parameter requires turning the power off and on
again or restarting the embedded Ethernet interface.
#4 UNS In the CNC Unsolicited Messaging function of a embedded Ethernet port, when the end
of the function is requested by other than the CNC Unsolicited Messaging server
currently connected:
0: The request for the end of the function is rejected.
1: The request for the end of the function is accepted.
18.2.7 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the CNC screen Web server function with the
embedded Ethernet function.
18.2.7.1 Overview
This subsection provides an overview of the CNC screen Web server function and describes the execution
procedure.
Overview of the CNC screen Web server function
An overview of the CNC screen Web server function is provided below.
This function enables screen display and screen switch of CNC on a Web browser of a Tablet-type device
that connects with CNC through Ethernet.
The screen which is displayed on a Web browser is the same as the screen displayed on a standard CNC
Display unit.
The screen switch operation at a Web browser is reflected in a standard CNC Display unit.
The “CNC screen Web server function” option is necessary in order to use this function.
NOTE
1 This function enables only screen display and screen switch of CNC. It is not
possible to operate the data input.
2 A Tablet-type device cannot be used instead of a standard CNC Display unit.
3 It is also possible to use a Web browser of the personal computer.
4 Behavior might be different according to a Tablet-type device and a Web
browser.
5 The update cycle of the screen on a Tablet-type device slows more than a
standard CNC Display unit. In addition, it might become slower in the following
cases.
- System configuration with high CPU load, such as multi-path/multi-axes
control.
- Operation condition with high CPU load, such as program operation of small
blocks.
- Bad condition of communication between CNC and Tablet-type device.
- 2506 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
WARNING
On the screen of Web browser, do not perform the operation which relates to the
machine operation, e.g. Virtual MDI key function, the data input by soft key, or a
machine operator's panel screen made by machine tool builder.
The bad condition of communication might cause an unexpected machine
operation. For example, the off operation of a button on the screen might be lost,
or the response of a button might be slow. Such an unexpected machine
operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause
injury to the user.
Therefore, when connecting with Web browser by this function, perform the
sequences that check Web browser connection status signal WBCNT
<F0578.2> and prohibit the operation such as the data input and the operation
from the screen.
Connection status of the CNC screen Web server function
CNC connects a Tablet-type device via the embedded Ethernet and a wireless LAN equipment.
Refer to the manual of each equipment for the method of connecting the Tablet-type device and wireless
LAN equipment.
By starting a Web browser on the Tablet-type device and then inputting a URI, the Tablet-type device is
connected with CNC.
Fig.18.2.7.1 (a) Connection
NOTE
1 It is not possible to connect CNC with two or more Tablet-type devices at the
same time. Only the first Tablet-type device can be connected.
2 It is not possible to connect CNC while the CNC screen is displayed on a
personal computer by using CNC screen display function.
The display units of CNC that can be used are as follows.
Table18.2.7.1 (a) Display unit of CNC
CNC Display unit
LCD Mounted Type 8.4” color LCD
10.4” color LCD
15” color LCD
NOTE
1 The update of CNC screen on a Tablet-type device might stop temporarily
according to the CNC system configuration and the operation status. However, it
doesn’t influence automatic operation of CNC.
2 This function cannot be used while connecting iPendant.
3 This function cannot be used by connecting via a PCMCIA Ethernet card.
- 2507 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.7.2 Setting of the WEB SERVER function
This subsection describes the setting of the WEB SERVER function for operating the CNC screen Web
server function.
Procedure
1 Enable the CNC screen Web server function according to "Related parameters" described later.
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the soft key is
displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is
displayed.
5 Press soft key [WEB]. The WEB SERVER screen is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until
the soft key [WEB] is displayed.)
6 After setting items, restart the embedded Ethernet function.
WEB SERVER screen
Press soft key [WEB]. The WEB SERVER screen (Fig. 18.2.7.2(a)) is displayed.
Fig.18.2.7.2 (a) WEB SERVER screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the CNC screen Web server function. If 0 is
specified, PORT NUMBER is treated as 80.
TIMEOUT Specify a timeout of the CNC screen Web server function. TIMEOUT can be set the
value of 0, 5 to 99 in seconds. If 0 is specified, TIMEOUT is treated as 10 seconds.
USER NAME Specify a user name to be used for the CNC screen Web server function. (Up to 31
characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be
specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
- 2508 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.7.3 Operation of the CNC screen Web server function
This subsection describes the operation of the CNC screen Web server function.
Start of the CNC screen Web server function
Procedure
1 Turn on the power of the CNC.
2 Wait until the CNC screen is displayed.
3 Start a Web browser on the Tablet-type device and input URI (Uniform Resource Identifier)
“http://<IP Address>/cncscrn/”. The last “/” is not omissible.
(Example 1) Case of IP Address (192.168.1.1) and PORT NUMBER (0 or 80)
Input “http://192.168.1.1/cncscrn/” to the address bar.
Fig.18.2.7.3 (a) Input case 1
(Example 2) Case of IP Address (192.168.1.1) and PORT NUMBER (8501)
Input “http://192.168.1.1:8501/cncscrn/” to the address bar.
Fig.18.2.7.3 (b) Input case 2
4 When the login screen is displayed, input the username and password, and push the login button.
Fig.18.2.7.3 (c) login screen
NOTE
1 When the Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G0579.5> is set
to “1”, the error “Access Denied : Forbidden by signal” is displayed.
2 When the Web browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> is “1”, the
error “Access Denied : Doubly access” is displayed.
3 When the parameter WAL(No.14882#6) is set to 0 and failing in login
continuously five times, CNC screen Web server function becomes disabled until
the CNC is restarted.
5 The CNC screen is displayed on a Web browser, and the Web browser connection status signal
WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes “1”.
- 2509 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.18.2.7.3 (d) CNC screen on a Web browser
NOTE
The update cycle of the screen slows more than a standard CNC Display unit.
End of the CNC screen Web server function
The communication with CNC ends in the following cases.
- When Web browser on Tablet-type device is ended.
- When the connection of CNC and Tablet-type device is cut.
- When the Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G0579.5> is set to "1".
- When CNC screen function is started on other personal computer.
After the time interval that set on WEB SERVER screen is passed, the Web browser connection status
signal WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes "0".
To reconnect with the CNC, execute procedure 3 of "Start of CNC screen Web server function" after the
Web browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> becomes “0”.
NOTE
CNC cannot be operated with MDI key and touch panel of CNC while the Web
browser connection status signal WBCNT <F0578.2> is “1”, even if the
communication with CNC ends. The maximum time that CNC cannot be
operated is the time having set to TIME INTERVAL.
- 2510 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Operation on Web browser
This subsection explains the operation method in a Web browser.
NOTE
While connecting with Web browser, neither MDI key nor touch panel of CNC
can be used for operation.
The reset key of CNC and External key input, however, are always usable on the
CNC.
Operation by button
Function keys, help key, and page keys are displayed as buttons.
CNC screen changes according to each key if these buttons are pushed.
Fig.18.2.7.3 (e) Button on a Web browser
NOTE
Keys (address, figure, and sign, etc.) other than the above-mentioned cannot be
input.
Operation by touch screen
Tap Soft key on the CNC screen and button can be pushed.
CNC can be operated with each key by pushing function key and page key.
Double tap CNC screen size is set to be suitable for the screen size of Tablet-type device.
Pinch out / Pinch in CNC screen is expanded and reduced. Pinch out is expansion, and Pinch in is
reduction.
Refer to the manual of Tablet-type device for explanation of each operation.
NOTE
1 To perform the Tap operation on the screen made by machine tool builder using
C language executor, it is necessary to realize the operation with touch panel.
2 The communication with CNC might become interrupted during the operation of
Pinch out / Pinch in. If the time having set to TIME INTERVAL passed, the
communication of CNC and a Tablet-type device is cut.
Operation by direction of Tablet-type device
The direction of screen is changed automatically according to the direction of Tablet-type device.
Input / Output of CNC data
CNC data is input/output from/to CNC according to the setting of CNC by operation on Web browser
screen.
The data cannot be input/output from/to the Web browser side.
- 2511 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Display language
The title and buttons on Web browser are displayed in English.
NOTE
The display language of CNC screen is displayed according to the setting of
CNC.
Type of display screen
The screens of CNC displayed in Web browser is the same as the screens displayed in CNC. It is not
possible to display different size or kind of screens from CNC.
NOTE
1 Boot screen and IPL screen cannot be displayed.
2 When the system alarm is generated by CNC, the connection of Tablet-type
device is cut. The system alarm screen is not displayed in Web browser.
18.2.7.4 Related signals
Signal
Web browser connection prohibition signal WBEND <G579.5>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Forbid the connection with Web browser.
[Operation] “0”: Permit the connection with Web browser.
“1”: Forbid the connection with Web browser.
The connection is shut while connecting with Web browser.
Web browser connection status signal WBCNT<F578.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Show the status of the connection with Web browser.
[Operation] This signal is set to 1 when connecting with Web browser.
This signal is set to 0 when not connecting with Web browser.
NOTE
Perform the sequences that check this signal and prohibit the
operation which relates to the machine operation such as the data
input and the operation from the screen, e.g. Virtual MDI key
function, the data input by soft keys, or the operation on a machine
operator’s panel screen made by machine tool builder.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0579 WBEND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0578 WBCNT
- 2512 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.7.5 Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11373 WSE
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#7 WSE CNC screen Web server function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 WAL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#6 WAL In CNC screen Web server function, when failing in login continuously five times, this
function becomes:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
When CNC screen Web server function has become disabled,
restart the CNC.
- 2513 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.8 CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the CNC status notification function with the
embedded Ethernet function.
18.2.8.1 Overview
CNC status notification function is provided in the method of Monitoring the alarm even if the operator is
not in front of the machine.
This function delivers E-mail of the information about CNC status (for example, alarm number and alarm
message) to the e-mail software of a portable terminal or a personal computer via the Embedded
Ethernet..
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)
Alarm
occurs
Machine
(POP server)
Portable terminal
(POP client)
NOTE
1 This function requires the “CNC Status Notification function” software option
(R975).
2 This function can be used on Embedded Ethernet port and cannot be used on
PCMCIA LAN card.
3 This function does not use an e-mail server on the way, to deliver E-mail.
Therefore, this function is used only in the Intranet. E-mail cannot be delivered to
an external device on Internet.
4 The e-mail software of a portable terminal reads E-mail from CNC with this
function. Therefore, E-mail is read according to the timing that the e-mail
software of a portable terminal acquires.
5 In the above figure, CNC communicates with a portable terminal by using
wireless LAN. However, it is also possible to communicate with a personal
computer by using wired LAN.
6 This function is not “short message service(SMS)” using the cellular phone
network.
Therefore, the cellular phone not to be connectable with wireless LAN cannot be
used.
18.2.8.2 Contents of E-mail
This function creates E-mail and delivers it to the mail software of a portable terminal and a personal
computer.
There are two kinds of E-mail, "Alarm mail" and "Status mail".
- 2514 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
When the displayed language of the CNC screen is Japanese, English, or Simplified Chinese, the title and
each item name of the mail can be displayed in each language. In the case of other languages, the title and
each item name of the mail are displayed in English.
Alarm Mail
The alarm mail reports the information of CNC alarm status.
The alarm mail is made at the following cases.
(1) When the alarm is newly generated
(2) When the alarm is canceled
(3) When the number of generated alarms is changed
When two or more alarms have been generated, those alarms are constructed into one alarm mail.
The number of alarms included in one alarm mail is up to 10, and more alarms are not reported.
The order of the notified alarm is the order displayed on the alarm screen of CNC.
In the multi-path system, the alarms are gathered in order of path. Therefore, for example if ten alarms or
more are generated in the first path, the alarms which are generated in the second path or later are not
reported.
Moreover, the alarm message is reported when the displayed language of the CNC screen is Japanese,
English, and Simplified Chinese.
Only the alarm number is written in the case of other languages.
When the alarm is generated When the alarm is canceled
Fig.18.2.8.2 (a) Alarm Mail
NOTE
When the following alarms are generated, the alarm status is reported.
- PS/BG/SR/SW/SV/OT/IO/PW/SP/OH/DS/IE alarms
- External alarm message (EX alarm)
- Macro alarm message of #3000 (MC alarm)
Status Mail
The status mail reports the counter values of the total number of machined parts, number of machined
parts and number of parts required when bit 5 (SNP) of parameter No. 14884 is one.
- 2515 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
The status mail is made at the following cases:
(1) When the counter values of number of machined parts is changed.
Fig.18.2.8.2 (b) Status mail
NOTE
The total number of machined parts, number of machined parts and number of
parts required of only the first path are reported even in the case of multi-path
CNC.
Even if the number of machined parts of the second CNC path or later is changed,
it is not reported.
18.2.8.3 Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function
URI(CNC screen) of CNC screen Web server function is added in the mail when CNC screen Web server
function is enabled. The CNC screen can be displayed on Web a browser by clicking
Mail client Web browser
Fig.18.2.8.3 (a) Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function
- 2516 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Note
1 CNC Screen Web server function option (R728) is required.
2 Please refer to Technical Report of CNC Screen Web server function for details of
this function.
18.2.8.4 Setting of CNC Status Notification function
This section describes how to set the CNC parameters for CNC Status Notification function.
The setting of the Portable terminal (POP client), please refer to the manual of the Portable terminal or
Technical Report (A-94974)
Procedure
(1) Press function key .
(2) Soft key [EMBED PORT] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
(3) Press soft key [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for embedded Ethernet port is
displayed.
(4) Press soft key [COMMON] and [MAIL] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
Fig.18.2.8.4 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
- 2517 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Item Description
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON
screen (DETAIL).
Fig.18.2.8.4 (b) COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter a desired CNC host name.
On CNC Status Notification function, this host name is written as “Machine Name”
in E-mail.
If no host name is set, “NC-<MAC address>” is automatically set.
Example of host name automatically set: NC-080019000001
- 2518 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
MAIL SETTING screen
Press soft key [MAIL]. The MAIL SETTING screen is displayed.
Fig.18.2.8.4 (c) MAIL SETTING screen
Setting items
Item Description
POP SERVER PORT Specify the port number of POP server.
NUMBER Usually, set 110.
If this value is 0, this value is treated as 110.
SMTP SERVER PORT Specify the port number of SMTP server.
NUMBER Usually, set 25.
(Note 1) If this value is 0, this value is treated as 25.
USER NAME Specify the user name to login to the POP server.
(Note 2) A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
(Note 2) A password of up to 31 characters can be specified.
Note
1 SMTP is not actually used in this function.
However, when creating a mail account, a portable terminal might check the
SMTP setting. For this case, the SMTP server port number is necessary.
2 The user name and password of mail account in a portable terminal (POP client)
have to match with these settings to login to CNC (POP server).
However, if neither user name nor password is set in CNC, CNC does not check
them when a portable terminal tries to connect to CNC. Thus in this case, the
login to CNC always succeeds regardless of any user name and password in a
portable terminal.
- 2519 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.2.8.5 Related NC parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14884 SNE SNM SNP SNL
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When the following parameters are set, the power must be turned
off before operation is continued.
#7 SNE CNC Status Notification function:
0: is not used.
1: is used.
NOTE
If this parameter is not set, the setting screen of CNC Status
Notification function is not displayed.
#6 SNM When the displayed language of CNC screen is Japanese, English or Simplified Chinese,
the alarm message:
0: is included in the alarm mail.
1: is not included in the alarm mail.
NOTE
When the displayed language of the CNC screen is not Japanese,
English or Simplified Chinese, the alarm message is not included
in the alarm mail regardless of this parameter. In this case, only
the alarm number is reported.
#5 SNP The total number of machined parts, number of machined parts and number of parts
required:
0: is not included in the status mail.
1: is included in the status mail.
#0 SNL When failing in login continuously five times from a portable terminal, CNC Status
Notification function becomes:
0: Disabled.
1: Still enabled.
NOTE
When CNC Status Notification function has become disabled,
please restart the CNC.
- 2520 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
18.2.9 Setting of the Modbus/TCP Server Function
This subsection describes the setting required to operate the Modbus/TCP Server function with the
embedded Ethernet function.
WARNING
Only when a partner client device sends data and the Modbus/TCP Server
function of CNC receives it, the data is checked and processed by CNC. Even if
the communication of the client happens to stop unexpectedly, the Modbus/TCP
Server function does not detect such situations.
So, do not use the Modbus/TCP Server function for data exchange application
concerned with machine safety.
For example, even if the client attempts to send the "STOP" data at some timing,
it is not guaranteed that it always reaches CNC. Thus, it is very dangerous to
build the system concerned with machine safety by using Modbus/TCP Server
function.
If the data exchange concerned with machine safety fails, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
NOTE
1 The Modbus/TCP Server function can also be used on the Fast Ethernet board.
This subsection is written for the embedded Ethernet of Series 0i-F, but the
basic content can be also applied when the Fast Ethernet board is used. For
details on using the Fast Etherne board, see Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION
MANUAL(B-64013EN).
2 This function cannot be operated on the PCMCIA LAN card.
It cannot be operated on a Fast Ethernet Board and on embedded Ethernet at
the same time. Switch it between them, using bit 1 (MOD) of parameter
No.14882.
3 The communication speed of the embedded Ethernet is lower than a Fast
Ethernet board.
4 The Modbus/TCP client function are not supported.
18.2.9.1 OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
This section provides an overview of the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Modbus/TCP data model
The following four kinds of data formats, each called a "Table", are defined for the Modbus/TCP data
model.
Table name Object type (data type) Type of READ/WRITE
Discrete input Single bit READ only
Coils Single bit READ-WRITE
Input Registers 16-bit word READ only
Holding Registers 16-bit word READ-WRITE
- 2521 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
1 For the CNC Modbus/TCP Server function, only "Holding Registers" can be
used.
"Discrete input", "Coils", and "Input Registers" cannot be used.
2 "READ" means the input of data as viewed from the Modbus/TCP client, and
"WRITE" means the data of output as viewed from the client.
Modbus/TCP function codes
For the Modbus/TCP Server function of the CNC, the following function codes are supported.
Function code name Code number
Read Holding Registers 03h
Write Multiple Registers 10h
Read/Write Multiple Registers 17h
Modbus area (Holding Registers)
For the Modbus/TCP Server function, the Modbus area (Holding Registers) of 65536 words (131072
bytes) is prepared.
And the Modbus area can be allocated to the PMC area.
Because of this, the data accessed from the Modbus/TCP client device to the Modbus area can be posted
to the PMC area, and the user application (Ladder program etc.) can accessed the Modbus area through
the PMC area.
This allocation can be set in up to three areas.
The Modbus/TCP area is a data area in word units, and can take address values of 1 to 65536.
Modbus/TCP Modbus/TCP User
Client Server Application
Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
15 0 7 0
00001→
Area1
0 15
Write Registers
Area2
0 15
Read Registers
Area3
0 15
Read Registers
65536→
Address error is returned when accessing
the Modbus area not allocated to PMC area.
Fig.18.2.9.1 (a) Modbus area
- 2522 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
A Modbus/TCP client device can access only a Modbus area with a PMC area
allocated. If a client device attempts to access a Modbus area with no PMC area
allocated, an address error (Exception Code = 0x02, Exception Name = ILLIGAL
DATA ADDRESS) is returned to the client device.
Be sure to allocate a PMC area to the Modbus area to be accessed by a client
device.
SPECIFICATIONS
This section describes the specifications of the Modbus/TCP Server function of the CNC.
The following is a list of specifications of the Modbus/TCP Server function of the CNC.
Item Description
Required software option Only the Modbus/TCP Server function option (R968) is required.
The Ethernet function option (S707) is not required.
Combination with other The function can be operated at the same time as the function of embedded
functions Ethernet.
PMC area that can be - DI : R, E, and D areas
allocated - DO : R, E, and D areas
- Status : R and E area
Maximum DI/DO data size Depends on the effective PMC area.
Port number (TCP) 502 (standard value)
Function specification - "Automatic TCP connection management" is supported.
This means that the user application (ladder program) need not take TCP
connection into consideration.
- "Non-priority connection pool" is supported.
This means that if there are requests from more Modbus/TCP clients than a
certain number, connections will be terminated in order of the oldest to the
newest. (NOTE 1)
("Priority connection pool" is not supported.)
- "Access control service" is not supported.
This means that no client devices require authentication (user name or
password) to access the FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function.
Maximum number of clients
that can connect to a single 3
CNC at the same time
NOTE
1 Use the function within the maximum number of clients that can be connected to
a single CNC at the same time.
If there are connection requests from more clients than the maximum number,
the communication with the oldest client will be disconnected. Thus, a client that
wants to keep a connection must reconnect if disconnected, assuming that it
may be disconnected from the server.
2 Settings of communication parameters are not subject to 8-level data protection
function.
Allocating PMC Areas
To allocate a PMC area in the setting screen of each communication function, specify it as follows:
- 2523 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Input format)
<Path number>:<PMC address>
For example, for R0500 on the second path of the PMC, input "2:R500".
If <Path number> is omitted (R500), the first path is assumed (1:R0500).
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.
To clear "<Path number>:<PMC address>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In
this case, it is assumed that no PMC area is used.
WARNING
Be careful not to cause an overlap between the PMC area to allocate and a
PMC area used for other purposes. Immediately after setting all necessary
communication parameters, check that the DI/DO data and status data are
operated properly in a starter where safety is secured.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, all R area and E area as volatile
memory in the PMC area are 0.
2 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the
E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can
also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option.
When the area is used as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are
retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid
not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.
Creating a Ladder Program
DI/DO data and status data allocated to a PMC area are processed by a ladder program.
The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system.
CAUTION
1 The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may
vary depending on the system configuration of the CNC and the state of the
communication partner device.
If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, it is not
sufficient to determine it with time and status data only. Determine it with a
method such as checking with actual DI data.
2 Create a ladder program in such a way that the system will be operated safely
even if a communication error occurs.
Input signal (DI) and output signal (DO)
An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The
reading/writing process of a communication function reads the signal and sends it to the Ethernet network.
An input signal also flows a similar route in the opposite direction.
- 2524 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
CNC
ＣＮＣ
PMC Reading/writing
process
リフレッシュ
処理 Communication
DeviceNet
function of
Ladder program
ラダープログラム
process マスタ機能
embedded Communication
処理 PMC partner device of
Ethernet
area
レジスタ embedded
（メモリ） Ethernet
Ethernet
Input signal (DI)
Output signal (DO)
Fig.18.2.9.1 (b) Input signal (DI) and output signal (DO)
Ladder program process and reading/writing process by a communication function
Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by a communication function operate
asynchronously with one another.
Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of reading/writing process by a
communication function, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at high-speed.
The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the
ladder program.
(mth) (m+1)th (m+2)th
Ladder program process:
１ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
Content of data area A: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Content of data area B: ０ １ ２ ３
１ ２ ３
Reading/writing process of Industrial １，１ ２，１ ３，３
２，２
Ethernet communication function １ １ ２ １ ２ ２ ３ ３
(nth) (n+1)th (n+2)th (n+3)th
Transferred to the communication partner device of Industrial Ethernet
Fig.18.2.9.1 (c) Time chart
The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and
writing to data area A or data area B is performed in the ladder program.
The middle part indicates how data area A and data area B in the PMC are updated in this case. There are
differences in the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution
cycle of the ladder program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time.
- 2525 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
The lower part indicates that the reading/writing process by communication functions is cyclically made
to read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same
time, for example, in the case of (n+1)th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder
program cannot be read as one set.
Conversely, when input signals from communication functions are processed in the ladder program, the
data written by one execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.
CAUTION
Reading/writing process by a communication function is made asynchronously
with the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind
when creating a ladder program.
<1> When an input signal from the communication function to be written in the
specified PMC address is read from two points in the ladder program, even
if the ladder program can be executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee
that the same value can be read.
<2> When the ladder program writes an output signal to the communication
partner device in the specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred
to the communication partner device before the ladder program is
completely executed.
Unit of Data and Concurrency
The unit of I/O data can be word (2-bytes) only.
The concurrency of word (2-byte) data is guaranteed, and there will never be data segmentation. The
concurrency of long (4-byte) data cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING
If the data bigger than word (2-byte) data is used, data segmentation might
occur.
If word (2-byte) data is used, refer to “Creating a Ladder Program” for notes on
creating a ladder program.
If data segmentation occurs, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the
user.
To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions.
<1> In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes.
MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW, DSNEW,
DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW, LTW, GEW,
LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW, SHLW, SHRW,
ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB, DCNVB, DECB,
TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW, SUBSW, MULSW,
DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW
<2> When DI data or DO data is assigned to at the setting screen of a communication function, the value
of items "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries.
Example) ADDRESS/SIZE 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8
- 2526 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Conversion of Endian
The byte arrangement in the Modbus area (Holding Registers) is little endian to make it easy for the
ladder program to handle it.
With the appropriate setting item on the setting screen of the Modbus/TCP Server function, the byte
arrangement can be changed to big endian.
WARNING
Confirm that an appropriate value is set to the setting item of selecting the
conversion of endian, and that the byte arrangement of the exchanged data is
correct.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
Little endian
On the Ethernet line Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
0 15 0 15 7 0
+00 +00 +00
12h 34h 12h 34h 12h
+01 56h 78h +01 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
Fig.18.2.9.1 (d) Little endian
When Bit0 of OPTION1 is "1", byte arrangement of data becomes a big endian.
Big endian
On Ethernet line Modbus area PMC area
(Holding Registers)
0 15 0 15 7 0
+00 +00 +00
12h 34h 12h 34h 12h
+01 56h 78h +01 56h 78h +01 34h
+02 56h
+03 78h
Fig.18.2.9.1 (e) Big endian
18.2.9.2 SETTING
This section describes the setting of the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. When the soft key does not appear, press the continue key.
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] to display the setting screen of the embedded Ethernet function.
4 Press soft key [COMMON] or [Modbus SET]. When the soft key does not appear, press the continue
key.
- 2527 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
COMMON Screen
In the above-mentioned procedure, press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen
(BASIC).
Fig.18.2.9.2 (a) COMMON screen (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify the mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item if the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
DHCP CLIENT The value of parameter No.14880#6(DHC) related to the DHCP client function is
displayed, and the setting is also possible. For details, see Subsection, "Setting Up
the DNS/DHCP Function".
Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address.
- 2528 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Setting Screen of the Modbus/TCP Server Function
In the above-mentioned procedure, press soft key [Modbus SET] to display the setting screen of the
Modbus/TCP Server function.
Fig.18.2.9.2 (b) Setting screen 1 (BASIC) Fig.18.2.9.2 (c) Setting screen 2 (areas 1 to 3)
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify the port number for using the Modbus/TCP Server function.
The setting range is from 0 to 65535. Usually, set 502. When 0 is set, the
Modbus/TCP Server function is not operated.
OPTION1 Bit 0: BCE
The byte arrangement in the Modbus area is assumed to be
0: little endian
1: big endian
Bits 1 to 7: RSV
Be sure to set 0.
STATUS PMC ADDRESS Specify the top address in the E/R area of the PMC in which to store the status.
The setting range depends on the effective PMC area. A 1-byte area is used.
DATA Modbus ADDRESS Specify the top address in the Modbus area (Holding registers) used to exchange
I/O with the Modbus/TCP client. The setting range is 1 to 65536.
For details of the endian of the data in the Modbus area (Holding Registers), see
Subsection, "Conversion of Endian".
DATA PMC ADDRESS Specify the top address in E/R/D area of the PMC used to exchange I/O with the
Modbus/TCP client.
The setting range depends on the effective PMC area. Only the even-numbered
address can be set.
DATA SIZE Specify the data size (unit: word size) used to exchange I/O with the Modbus/TCP
client. The setting range depends on the effective PMC area. If not exchange I/O
with the area, specify 0 for this parameter.
- 2529 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
WARNING
When setting PMC address for Modbus/TCP server function, thoroughly confirm
the content of “GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION
DEVELOPMENT” in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” at the beginning of this manual.
Be careful not to cause an overlap between the PMC area to allocate and a
PMC area used for other purposes.
If the machine is operated without confirmation of above explanation, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
NOTE
1 For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on
or restart embedded Ethernet at the COMMON screen.
2 Communication parameters of the Modbus/TCP Server function that is operated
on embedded Ethernet are included in the embedded Ethernet parameters.
3 Set the Modbus areas for areas 1 to 3 so that they do not overlap. If any overlap,
different actions are taken for READ and WRITE, as follows:
For READ, area n where n is the largest is given priority, and data is read from
that area.
For WRITE, the same value is written to all the overlapping areas.
Status
The status (1 byte) is detected by the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Status
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Status PMC address +0 COM INT - - - - - ERR
Bit Name Description
#0 ERR Unrecoverable error
0: The Modbus/TCP Server function is operating correctly.
1: An unrecoverable error occurred in the Modbus/TCP Server function.
#1-5 - Reserved
#6 INT Initialization completion
0: The initialization of the Modbus/TCP Server function is not completed.
1: The initialization of the Modbus/TCP Server function is completed.
#7 COM Communicating
0: Not communicating with a Modbus/TCP client.
1: Communicating with one or more Modbus/TCP clients.
18.2.9.3 MAINTENANCE
This section describes the maintenance of the Modbus/TCP Server function.
Maintenance Screen of the Modbus/TCP Server Function
The connection status of the client connected to the Modbus/TCP Server can be checked on this screen.
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Soft key [EMBED PORT] appears. When the soft key does not appear, press the continue key.
- 2530 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT], and then soft key [Modbus MAINTE] appears on the setting screen
of the Ethernet function.
4 Press soft key [Modbus MAINTE], and then the maintenance screen (CLIENT LIST) of the
Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.
Fig.18.2.9.3 (d) Maintenance screen (CLIENT LIST) of the Modbus/TCP Server function
Display items
Item Description
CLIENT The IP addresses of the Modbus/TCP clients connected to this Modbus/TCP
Server are displayed. (Example of display format: "192.168.0.200")
They are displayed in the order in which the clients are connected.
TIME The connecting times of the Modbus/TCP clients connected to this Modbus/TCP
Server are displayed. The displayed times are updated automatically.
The display format for a time of hour (hhh), minute (mm) and second (ss) is
"hhh:mm:ss". The maximum value is "999:59:59", and if the maximum value is
exceeded, the time will not be updated from "999:59:59".
18.2.9.4 RELATED NC PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 MOD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#1 MOD The Modbus/TCP Server function is used
0: on a Fast Ethernet board.
1: on embedded Ethernet (embedded Ethernet port).
- 2531 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
DEVICES
There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet
card.
Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft key [COMMON], and then press
[(OPRT)] to display soft key [EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCMCIA] switches between enabled devices.
NOTE
1 Information on a switched device is stored in nonvolatile memory.
On the next power-on, the device last selected can be used as is.
2 When using the unsolicited messaging function, note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not Ready" state, regardless of the
unsolicited message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the response notification
method, RES and RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the simplified method, REQ is
cleared.
18.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft key [COMMON], and then press
[(OPRT)] to display soft key [RSTART].
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet communication and then restarts it.
NOTE
1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts communication even when it is in
progress.
2 This function makes a restart by software. An actual restart may be impossible
under some conditions.
- 2532 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
3 When using the unsolicited messaging function, note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not Ready" state, regardless of the
unsolicited message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the response notification
method, RES and RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the simplified method, REQ is
cleared.
- 2533 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
18.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET
FUNCTION
With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available.
The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates
abnormally.
Displaying and operating the PING screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet
card can be set.
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP file transfer, press soft key [PING
FTP1]. Similarly, to send the PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [PING FTP2]
or [PING FTP3], respectively.
Fig. 18.5 (a) PING connection status screen
- 2534 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the address of the destination on the
PING setting screen (Fig. 18.5(b)). (Page keys are used for switching.)
Fig. 18.5 (b) PING connection status screen
7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key [PING]. The specified number of
PING commands are sent to the specified destination.
8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft key [PING CANCEL].
Displaying Communication status screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet
card can be set.
4 To display the communication status (Fig. 18.5(c)) of the embedded Ethernet, press soft key [COM
STATE].
Page keys can be used to switch between the sending state and the receiving state.
- 2535 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 18.5 (c) Communication status screen
Display items
Item Description
BAUDRATE Displays the baud rate and transmission method.
Transmission rate: 100Mbps or 10Mbps
Transmission method: Full duplex or half duplex
-------- : Not connected to HUB
SEND PACKET Displays the number of transmitted packets.
COLLISION Displays the number of errors detected during transmission of packets.
CARRIER SENSE LOST
DELAYOVER
UNDERRUN
SEND PARITY ERROR
RECEIVE PACKET Displays the number of packets received.
ALIGNMENT ERROR Displays the number of errors detected during reception of packets.
CRC ERROR
OVERRUN ERROR
FRAME LENGTH ERROR
RECV PARITY ERROR
AVAILABLE DEVICE Currently available device of embedded Ethernet
Displays either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card.
Displaying Task status screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,
press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status (Fig. 18.5(d)) of the embedded Ethernet
function to be displayed.
- 2536 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Fig. 18.5 (d) Task status screen
Table 18.5 (a) lists the meaning of each symbol.
Table 18.5 (a)
Symbol and meaning
FOCAS2 #0 C: Waiting for a connection from the host
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: FOCAS2 out of service
FOCAS2 #1,#2 W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
SCREEN W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
UDP W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
PMC W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
FTP C: Execution wait
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
REMOTE DIAG W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
UNSOLICITED MSG W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: Abnormal state
X: Not yet executed
Number: Alive signal (UDP) transmission in progress when count-up operation is
performed
iPendant C: Waiting for a connection from iPendant
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
- 2537 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Symbol and meaning
WEB SERVER C: Waiting for a connection
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
Modbus SERVER C: Waiting for a connection
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
Number: Number of sockets currently connected
MAIL W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
X: Not yet executed
18.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
FUNCTION
This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function.
NOTE
1 If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA SERVER ERROR” is issued
during data transfer using the embedded Ethernet function, check the error
details on the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function.
2 The log information for the embedded Ethernet function is stored in volatile
memory and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. If an error occurs,
check the log information before turning the power off.
Displaying the log screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 To display the log screen (Fig. 18.6(a)) for the embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card,
press soft key [EMBED LOG] or [PCMCIA LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press
the continue key.)
Fig. 18.6 (a) LOG screen
- 2538 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and time when an error occurred are
displayed at the right end of the line. The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where
MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss
represents seconds.
The date and time of the upper item shown Fig. 18.6(a) is October 30, 18:33:09.
To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order. (Fig. 18.6 (b))
Fig. 18.6 (b)
The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the embedded Ethernet function and the basic
communication function.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.
(5) Soft key [UNSOLT MSG]
Displays the log related to the unsolicited messaging function.
(6) Soft key [WEB]
Displays the log related to the CNC screen Web server function.
(7) Soft key [Modbus]
Displays the log related to the Modbus/TCP Server function.
(8) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG]
Displays the log related to the Machine Remote Diagnosis.
(9) Soft key [MAIL]
Displays the log related to the CNC Status Notification function.
Error and message
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0118 Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error has occurred because of any of
E-0119 the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other
end. The communication channel has been logically
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has
logically shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication channels are
busy.
- 2539 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0126 No response from RMT DIAG server The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server may be invalid or the power to the
machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off.
Check whether the IP address of the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the power
to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is on.
Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server may not respond to the PING command to
increase the security level (such as a firewall setting).
Set bit 1 of parameter No.14880 to 1 and connect the
server again.
E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 was
Message received, the parameter for the unsolicited messaging
function could not be saved for one of the following
causes:
→ The mode of the unsolicited messaging function is not
set to "PC mode".
→ The state of the unsolicited messaging function is not
"Not Ready".
→ The argument "parameter-for-unsolicited-message" of
the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 includes an
invalid value.
E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2,
Message is wrong cnc_rdunsolicprm2, cnc_unsolicstart, or cnc_unsolicstop
was received, the argument
"parameter-number-for-unsolicited-message" was found
to be invalid.
E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent by the FTP server is displayed as it is.
A message containing characters other than ASCII
characters may not be displayed correctly.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server Software of the FTP server may not be running. Run the
FTP server software.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of parameter No. 14880 to
“1” and connect the server again.
E-0207 The router is not found The specified IP address of the router may be wrong.
Alternatively, the router may be turned off. Check whether
the IP address of the router has been correctly specified
and whether the router is turned on.
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The specified IP address of the FTP server may be
wrong. Alternatively, the FTP server may be turned off.
Check whether the IP address of the FTP server has
been correctly specified and whether the FTP server is
turned on.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of parameter No. 14880 to
“1” and connect the server again.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check whether a correct user name and password are
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check whether a correct user name and password are
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder logging into the FTP server.
- 2540 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error has occurred because of any of
the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other
end. The communication channel has been logically
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has
logically shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
→ Data cannot be posted to the communication
destination due to a firewall setting.
E-0901 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address is not written in the hardware.
Alternatively, the hardware has been damaged.
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network.
One possible solution is to divide the network.
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Specify an IP address.
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Specify a correct subnet mask in the designated format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Specify a subnet mask.
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP
address of the local node and the IP address of the
router.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP
address of the local node and the IP address of the DNS
server.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check whether a correct host name is specified.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check whether a correct domain name is specified.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B0C Port NO of a remote FTP server is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong The specified user name may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong The specified password may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong The specified log-in folder name may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To allow a set-up, disable the DHCP client function.
E-0B19 Embedded Ethernet hardware isn't found The software or hardware of embedded Ethernet function
E-0B1A cannot be recognized. Check whether the software has
been incorporated. Check whether the hardware is sound.
E-0B27 Unsolicited Message isn't available The software condition for using the unsolicited
messaging function is not satisfied. The cause may be
one of the following:
→ parameters for using the unsolicited messaging
function are not set.
For the parameters, see Subsection 18.2.4, "Setting of
the Unsolicited Messaging Function".
E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong In the CNC mode, the FOCAS2 function
cnc_wrunsolicprm2 cannot be executed.
- 2541 -
18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The state of the unsolicited messaging function was other
than "Not Ready", so that the parameters for the
unsolicited messaging function could not be updated. The
cause may be one of the following:
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", the FOCAS2
function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 or cnc_unsolicstart was
executed.
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", soft key [APPLY]
was pressed.
E-0B2B Cannot refresh parameter of Unsolicited The parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
Message could not be updated. The cause may be one of the
following:
→ The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred.
→ A parameter for the unsolicited messaging function
includes an invalid value.
E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission The parameter for the unsolicited messaging function,
parameter of Unsolicited Message TRANSMISSION NUMBER or TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3), includes an invalid value.
E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of The sum of sizes specified by the parameters for the
Unsolicited Message exceeds the unsolicited messaging function, TRANSMISSION
limitation PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, exceeds the maximum
specifiable number of bytes. For the maximum specifiable
number of bytes, see the setting item "TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER" in Subsection 18.2.4.4, "Setting on the
CNC screen".
E-0B47 TCP port number of Modbus/TCP Server Zero is specified. To use this function, specify TCP port
is wrong number.
E-0B48 Status PMC address of Modbus/TCP A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified.
Server is out of range Check the status PMC address settings.
E-0B49 Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP An odd-numbered address is specified. Check the data
Server is wrong PMC address setting.
E-0B4A Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified.
Server is out of range Check the data PMC address setting or data size setting.
E-0B4B Modbus area of Modbus/TCP Server is A value beyond the permissible setting range is specified.
out of range Check the data Modbus address setting or data size
setting.
E-1001 All Modbus communication paths are The number of connected communication parties
busy (Modbus/TCP clients) exceeded the maximum number of
connectable clients.
Connections to communication parties (Modbus/TCP
clients) will be terminated in order of the oldest to the
newest.
E-1003 Version number of Modbus packet is Specify a correct version number according to the
wrong protocol of Modbus/TCP.
E-1004 Length of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct size according to the protocol of
Modbus/TCP.
E-100B Function code of Modbus packet is wrong The specified function code may not be supported.
For details of supported function codes, see
"Modbus/TCP function codes" in Subsection 18.2.6.1,
"OVERVIEW".
E-1015 Data address of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct data address according to the protocol
E-1016 of Modbus/TCP.
E-1017 Data value of Modbus packet is wrong Specify a correct data address according to the protocol
E-1018 of Modbus/TCP.
E-1019
- 2542 -
B-64603EN-1/01 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-101A Data address that client requested is out No PMC area is assigned to the Modbus area requested
of range (1-3) from the connected communication party (Modbus/TCP
client). Assign a PMC area.
E-1300 (Sent message to Web browser) It is a message transmitted to notify the Web browser of
the error detected with the Web server.
E-1301 User name is not set Specify a user name.
E-1302 Password is not set Specify a password.
E-1303 User name is wrong Check whether a correct user name.
E-1304 Password is wrong Check whether a correct password.
E-1305 All communication paths are busy All the Web communication channels are busy.
E-1306 Session ended The connection with the Web browser ended.
E-1307 Session canceled The connection with the Web browser aborted
compulsorily by either of the following factor.
→ The Web browser connection prohibition signal
WBEND <G0579.5> became “1”.
→ CNC screen display function started on other personal
computer.
E-1308 Session started The connection with the Web browser started.
E-1309 Login failed The CNC screen Web server function became disabled.
Turn off / on the power of the CNC.
E-1400 (Sent message to POP client) It is not generated usually.
E-1401 (Sent message to SMTP client) It is not generated usually.
E-1402 User name is not set Enter user name
E-1403 Password is not set Enter password
E-1404 User name is wrong Confirm user name
E-1405 Password is wrong Confirm password
E-1406 Login failed CNC Status Notification function has not been usable.
Please restart the CNC.
E-XXXX (No message) An internal error has occurred.
Make a notification of the error number.
- 2543 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
19 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Chapter 19, "DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
19.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ................................................................................................2544
19.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE .............................................................................................2547
19.3 FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING FUNCTION AND COMMUNICATION
RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION............................................................................................2548
19.4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................................................2554
19.5 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS ................................................................................................2580
19.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE
Overview
The servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs.
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued. For example, this signal can be used by
the machine for retracting tools from the time a warning occurs by the time a servo alarm occurs.
Signal
Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <Fn093.4 to Fn093.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo amplifier.
[Output condition] The Table 19.1(a) shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier and their
corresponding warning signals.
Table 19.1 (a)
Warning status signals (F93) Time from when a
Corresponding alarm SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1 warning state signal
messages (#7) (#6) (#5) (#4) is issued to until an
alarm occurs
SV0444: SV INTERNAL FAN 1 0 0 0 One minute
FAILURE
SV0601: SV EXTERNAL FAN 1 0 0 1 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
SV0443 : SV INTERNAL FAN 1 1 0 0 One minute
FAILURE
SV0606: PS EXTERNAL FAN 1 1 0 1 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
SV0431: PS OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute
SV0607: PS IMPROPER INPUT 1 1 1 1 PSMR: Five seconds,
POWER PSM: One minute
A timing chart for handling a warning is shown Fig. 19.1(a).
- 2544 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Occurrence of a warning
Servo amplifier
SVWRN1-4
(Warning)
PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stop
during this time period with the PMC to
stop the machine without damage. The
time period varies with the warning type.
Activation
Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning
Fig. 19.1 (a)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1
Warning status alarms for servo amplifiers
When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 0, if a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status, a
DS alarm is output in addition to the servo warning detail signals.
If one of the following alarms is issued, automatic operation enters the feed hold state and movements
along all controlled axes including PMC axes are decelerated to a stop. Issuing a warning status alarm
does not cause to the servo motor to be deactivated.
Table 19.1 (b)
Alarm No. Alarm No.
when the servo when the servo
Operation performed when the warning status
amplifier is in amplifier is in Alarm message
occurs
the warning the alarm
status status
DS0608 SV0444 n-axis : SV INTERNAL Immediately after the fan stops, alarm DS0608 is
FAN FAILURE displayed and movements along axes enter the
feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept
active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is
deactivated and alarm SV0444 is displayed.
DS0609 SV0601 n-axis : SV EXTERNAL Immediately after the fan stops, alarm DS0609 is
FAN FAILURE displayed and movements along axes enter the
feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of
parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm
display can be canceled by a reset and operation
can be restarted.
DS0610 SV0443 n-axis : SV INTERNAL Immediately after the fan stops, DS0610 is
FAN FAILURE displayed and movements along axes enter the
feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept
active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is
deactivated and alarm SV0443 is displayed.
DS0611 SV0606 n-axis : PS EXTERNAL Immediately after the fan stops, DS0611 is
FAN FAILURE displayed and movements along axes enter the
feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of
parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm
display can be canceled by a reset and operation
can be restarted.
DS0612 SV0431 n-axis : PS OVERLOAD
DS0613 SV0607 n-axis : PS IMPROPER
INPUT POWER
- 2545 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
After an alarm in the warning status listed in Table 19.1 (b) is issued, when the αi servo amplifier is
actually placed in the alarm status, the servo motor is deactivated and the number of an alarm in the alarm
status is additionally displayed.
When bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, if a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status,
only the servo warning detail signals are output and no alarm in the warning status (alarm DS0608 to
DS0613) is issued. If a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status during automatic operation,
automatic operation is kept. So, decelerate the movements along axes to a stop using the servo warning
detail signals before the servo motor is deactivated. Note that if the movements along axes are not
decelerated to a stop, the servo motor is suddenly deactivated during movement along axes.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1807 SWP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#2 SWP This parameter specifies the operation of the αi series servo amplifier in its warning state
(for example, with the fan stopped).
0: An alarm is issued when the amplifier is placed in the warning state. Automatic
operation enters the feed hold state and the servo axis is decelerated to a stop.
1: An alarm is not issued even when the amplifier is placed in the warning state.
Automatic operation is kept. The servo is deactivated if the amplifier shifts from the
warning state to the alarm state.
CAUTION
If operation is continued with the external fan stopped while bit 2
(SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, the servo amplifier may
be overheated and "overheat alarm", "IPM alarm", or "VRDY off
alarm" may be issued depending on the operating conditions. If
such an alarm is issued, the amplifier is deactivated and the servo
motor is stopped by the dynamic brake, involving a risk of breaking
the workpiece or tool as the stop from high-speed rotation requires
an extended distance. The user should therefore understand that
the operation with bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 set to 1 is a
temporary step to take before fan replacement. Once the fan has
stopped, be sure to replace the fan immediately and set bit 2
(SWP) of parameter No. 1807 back to 0.
If bit 2 (SWP) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 1, the warning text
"FAN" blinks on the NC screen to show that the external fan has
been stopped. Also on the machine side, monitor the warning signal
output to the PMC and remind the operator of the operation with the
fan stopped.
- 2546 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
19.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE
Overview
The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to
the PMC is sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing cutting load from the time a warning
occurs by the time an overheat alarm occurs. In addition, diagnosis data also contains warning numbers.
Signal
Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <Fn264.0 to 7, Fn265.0>
[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi spindle amplifier.
[Output condition] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number consisting of SPWRN1 to
SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning number of the ai
spindle having the smallest axis number is output.
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown Table 19.2(a).
Table 19.2 (a)
Warning
Contents Details
number
56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform
processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm
occurs.
88 Radiator cooling fan If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output.
stopped Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC
to perform processing as needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
04 Open-phase If an open-phase is detected in the main power supply, the
detected in the warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate
converter main at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
power supply About one minute (for the αiPS) or about five seconds (for the
αiPSR) after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
58 Converter main If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is overloaded, the
circuit overloaded warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate
at this time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm
occurs.
59 Converter cooling If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the warning signal is
fan stopped output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use
the PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm
occurs.
113 Converter radiator If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops, the warning
cooling fan stopped signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this
time, use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
01 Motor overheat When the motor temperature increases beyond the overheat
warning detection level (set by a parameter), a warning signal is
output. At this time, spindle operation is continued. So, perform
necessary processing with the PMC.
An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has reached the
overheat alarm detection level.
- 2547 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN4 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
Fn265 SPWRN9
Diagnosis data
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnosis data.
712 Warning status of spindle
[Data type] Word spindle
The number of a warning caused on each spindle is indicated.
If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.
19.3 FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING FUNCTION
AND COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION
19.3.1 Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function
Overview
This function monitors the number of revolutions of the fan motor in the CNC control part to anticipate a
critical fault. If the fan motor is defective, the function detects it as an alarm level or a warning level, and
the alarm, the signal, and the warning are output.
NOTE
Exchange fan motors referring to the maintenance manual if the defect of the fan
motor is detected. Even if the warning level is detected, CNC can be
continuously operated. However, there is a possibility that fan motor is
deteriorated. Exchange fan motors as soon as possible.
Specification
The CNC control unit fan motor operates as shown in Table 19.3.1 (a) if it is defective.
Table 19.3.1 (a) Operation of the PCB cooling fan when it is defective
State Operation
When the warning level is detected. Displaying the warning status
Outputting the warning level detection signal WFAN
When the alarm level is detected. Displaying the warning status
Outputting the Alarm level detection signal SFAN
Servo: Makes a single block stop.
Spindle: Continues rotating.
After 50 seconds Servo: Makes a feed hold stop.
Spindle: Stops rotating.
After 60 seconds Alarm 701 occurs.
Note) System alarm 455 is generated for the CNC control unit where CPU
card (high speed version) was installed about 60 seconds after the
detection of the alarm level.
- 2548 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
NOTE
When the alarm level is detected, the spindle stops rotating 50 seconds later, but
it starts rotating again when the warning or alarm is cleared. To stop the rotation
of the spindle completely, create a ladder that stops the spindle using alarm level
detection signal SFAN.
Signal
Alarm level detection signal SFAN<Fn093.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when the alarm level is detected by fan motor in the CNC control
unit.
[Function] Reports that the alarm level was detected by fan motor in the CNC control unit.
NOTE
It takes a maximum of five seconds after the detection of the alarm
level until the alarm level detection signal SFAN is output.
Warning level detection signal WFAN<Fn093.3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when the warning level is detected by fan motor in the CNC control
unit.
[Function] Reports that the warning level was detected by fan motor in the CNC control unit.
NOTE
It takes a maximum of five seconds after the detection of the
warning level until the warning level detection signal WFAN is
output.
19.3.2 Communication Retry Monitoring Function
Overview
If the I/O Link retry counter value, Ethernet (embedded + fast), FL-net error detection count, and ECC
(SRAM) correction counter exceed the parameter setting, signals are output to report a reduction in
system reliability.
Specification
I/O Link retry counter value abnormality monitoring function
This function monitors the retry counter at 10 minute intervals, it outputs warning signals (WIOCH1,
WIOCH2, WIOCH3) if the counter value is equal to or more than the setting of parameter No. 11530.
The threshold beyond which a warning occurs changes every eight hours depending on the energization
time.
When the energization time is T (hour) and parameter No. 11530 is n:
0≤T≤8
A warning occurs when the retry counter value is equal to or greater than n.
8<T
A warning occurs when the retry counter value is equal to or greater than n × T/8 (rounded up).
The I/O Link retry counter makes a check at 10 minute intervals, so the warning signal is output at 10
minute intervals.
The counter value is accumulated until the power is turned off.
- 2549 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The maximum value of the retry counter is 255.
A warning is issued when an overflow occurs.
ECC correction counter value abnormality monitoring function
This function monitors the correction counter at 10 minute intervals, it outputs warning signal (WECCS)
if the counter value is equal to or more than the setting of parameter No. 11531.
The threshold beyond which a warning occurs changes every eight hours depending on the energization
time.
When the energization time is T (hour) and parameter No. 11531 is n:
0≤T≤8
A warning occurs when the retry counter value is equal to or greater than n.
8<T
A warning occurs when the retry counter value is equal to or greater than n × T/8 (rounded up).
The ECC correction counter makes a check at 10 minute intervals, so the warning signal is output at 10
minute intervals.
The counter value is accumulated until the power is turned off.
NOTE
The maximum value of the correction counter is 4095.
A warning is issued when an overflow occurs.
Ethernet error detection count abnormality monitoring function
• Error detection of embedded Ethernet
Checks the error detection count of embedded Ethernet at 10 second intervals and, if the error
detection count for the nearest one minute is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No.
11532, this function outputs warning signal WETE.
• Error detection of fast Ethernet
Checks the error detection count of fast Ethernet at 10 second intervals and, if the error detection
count for the nearest one minute is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533, this
function outputs warning signal WETE.
The error detection count is checked at 10 second intervals in both embedded Ethernet and fast Ethernet,
so the warning signal is output at 10 second intervals. Turning off and back on the power resets the signal
output.
NOTE
The maximum value for network error counters is 65535.
If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0.
FL-net error detection count abnormality monitoring function
Checks the error detection count of FL-net at 10 second intervals and, if the error detection count for the
nearest one minute is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11534, this function outputs
warning signal. FL-net1 and FL-net2 either use a set value of parameter No.11534. However, as for the
warning signal, WFLN1 is output for FL-net1, and WFLN2 is output for FL-net2.
In the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function, checks total of the error detection count of FL-net and
Ethernet at 10 second intervals and, if the error detection count for the nearest one minute is equal to or
greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533, this function outputs warning signal WETF.
- 2550 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The error detection count is checked at 10 second intervals, so the warning signal is output at 10 second
intervals. Turning off and back on the power resets the signal output.
NOTE
The maximum value for network error counters is 65535.
If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0.
Parameter
11530 Warning value (common to ch1, ch2, and ch3) for I/O link retry counter
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Correction counter value/8 hours
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the I/O link communication retry counter.
When the value in the 8-hour error correction counter becomes higher than or equal to the
setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 5 occurrences/8 hours basis.
11531 Warning value for the ECC correction counter (SRAM)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Correction counter value/8 hours
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the SRAM correction counter.
When the value in the 8-hour error correction counter becomes higher than or equal to the
setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 5 occurrences/8 hours basis.
11532 Warning value for the number of embedded-Ethernet error detection occurrences
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the number of embedded Ethernet error detection occurrences.
- 2551 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal
to the setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.
11533 Warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences.
When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal
to the setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.
11534 Warning value (common to FL-net port 1 and 2) for the number of FL-net error detection occurrences
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the number of FL-net error detection occurrences.
When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal
to the setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 3 occurrences/minute basis.
Signal
I/O Link 1 retry abnormality warning signal WIOCH1<F0535.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] In I/O Link, if an error is detected in received data, the data is transmitted again (retried)
to prevent the system from going down due to a temporary communication error caused
by noise or the like.
This signal is set to 1 when the data retry count per eight hours is equal to or greater than
the value set in parameter No. 11530 (standard setting 0, which means five retries per
eight hours) in the I/O link on the first channel side.
An I/O Link retry abnormality is monitored at 10 minute intervals, so this signal is output
at 10 minute intervals. Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power
is turned off.
I/O Link 2 retry abnormality warning signal WIOCH2<F0535.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
- 2552 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the retry count per eight hours for I/O Link on the second
channel side is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11530.
The other usage is the same as in I/O Link 1 retry failure warning signal WIOCH1.
I/O Link 3 retry abnormality warning signal WIOCH3<F0535.2>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] This signal is set to 1 when the retry count per eight hours for I/O Link on the third
channel side is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11530.
The other usage is the same as in I/O Link 1 retry failure warning signal WIOCH1.
SRAM ECC abnormality warning signal WECCS<F0535.3>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] SRAM, which stores parameters, machining programs, offset data, etc., uses ECC (error
correction code) to correct a single bit error. If the SRAM error correction count is equal
to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11531 (standard setting 0, which means
five retries per eight hours), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
Embedded Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETE<F0535.4>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the
embedded Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11532
(standard setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
Fast Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETF<F0535.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the fast
Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533 (standard
setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
FL-net1 communication abnormality warning signal WFLN1<F0535.6>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the
FL-net1 function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11534 (standard
setting 0, which means 3 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
FL-net2 communication abnormality warning signal WFLN2<F0535.7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the
FL-net2 function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11534 (standard
setting 0, which means 3 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.
- 2553 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
19.4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
19.4.1 Outline
Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier by diagnosis according to the
guidance message of this function.
And when the thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds the trouble forecast level, the
machine can be safely stopped by detecting the breakdown beforehand by the use of the trouble forecast
signal.
It introduces the example of the method of pursuing the cause of the alarm occurrence that uses the
trouble diagnosis function as follows.
When alarm "SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP)" is occurred.
It explains the procedure of the cause investigation when following alarm "SV0410 EXCESS ERROR
(STOP)" is occurred.
Fig.19.4.1 (a) Alarm message screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The cause of occurrence is pursued by answering the question displayed on the screen according to the
following procedures by soft key [YES] or [NO] though there are some occurrence factors of the alarm
"SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP)".
1 After pushing return soft key [<], press the continuous menu key until soft key
[GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH] appears.
2 Press soft key [GUIDE].
Fig.19.4.1 (b) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Because the following screens are displayed, press soft key [YES].
- 2554 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Fig.19.4.1 (c) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The following guidances are displayed.
Fig.19.4.1 (d) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the above guidance and the torque command
is confirmed.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the following procedures.
1 Press return soft key [<].
2 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
Fig.19.4.1 (e) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Press soft key [W.PRM].
Fig.19.4.1 (f) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)
A necessary parameter for the graphic display is set as follows.
- 2555 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
The index of an axis to graphic display
Data of graphic display
Fig.19.4.1 (g) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The displayed axis is selected by inputting the index of an axis to the box next to "AXIS".
The displayed data kind is selected by inputting data kind number to the box next to "DATA KIND".
This time, "1" is set in the index of an axis to confirm the waveform of the torque command of the X1
axis and "6" is set to data kind number.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen is displayed according to the following procedures.
1 Press return soft key [<].
2 Press soft key [G-ADJ.].
Fig.19.4.1 (h) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The graphical chart of the torque command immediately before occurring the alarm as follows is
displayed.
The vertical line shown by the arrow on a right edge is time that the alarm is occurred.
Time that alarm is occurred
Fig.19.4.1 (i) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 2556 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Return to trouble diagnosis guidance screen, and press the soft key [NO], because it can be judged that
the torque command doesn't vibrate from this graphical chart.
Trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed according to the following procedures.
1. Press return soft key [<].
2. Press soft key [GUIDE].
Fig.19.4.1 (j) Soft key to select trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Press soft key [NO] after pressing the soft key [(OPRT)] on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
Fig.19.4.1 (k) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
When soft key [NO] is pressed, the following guidances are displayed.
Fig.19.4.1 (l) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
The cause of the alarm is specified like this, and cope according to the content of the guidance.
- 2557 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
19.4.2 Investigation procedure of cause of alarm occurrence
The cause of occurrence can be investigated according to the following procedures when Servo/Spindle
alarms are occurred.
NOTE
Status display of the trouble diagnosis screen should be [SAMPLING] to diagnose
it when the servo alarm/spindle alarm is occurred.
Change in the state of [SAMPLING] surely referring to "Clear of the preserved
data" in Chapter 19.4.4 when status display is not [SAMPLING].
Investigation procedure (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1. Press function key , and the message screen is displayed.
2. After pushing return soft key [<], press the continuous menu key until soft key
[GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH] appears.
3. Press soft key [GUIDE].
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
The guidance to specify the cause of the occurred alarm is displayed on the trouble diagnosis
guidance screen.
The cause of occurrence and the coping method of the alarm are displayed by answering in soft key
[YES]/[NO] referring to servo/spindle monitor information on the trouble diagnosis monitor screen,
the waveform data of the trouble diagnosis graphic screen, and the diagnosis screen, etc.
Investigation procedure (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1. Press function key , and the message screen is displayed.
2. Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [GUIDE]/[MONIT]/[W.GRPH]
appears.
3. Press the vertical soft key [GUIDE].
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
The guidance to specify the cause of the occurred alarm is displayed on the trouble diagnosis
guidance screen.
The cause of occurrence and the coping method of the alarm are displayed by answering in
horizontal soft key [YES]/[NO] referring to servo/spindle monitor information on the trouble
diagnosis monitor screen, the waveform data of the trouble diagnosis graphic screen, and the
diagnosis screen, etc.
19.4.3 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen
Outline
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message to specify the cause of an alarm.
The cause of the alarm can be specified by confirmation/coping according to the guidance, and answering
by soft key [YES]/[NO] in a short time.
- 2558 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis guidance screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [GUIDE] appears.
3 Press soft key [GUIDE]. The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed as follows.
Trouble Code
Contents of trouble
Probable cause
Guidance message
Status display
Fig.19.4.3 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis guidance screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [GUIDE] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [GUIDE]. The trouble diagnosis guidance screen is displayed.
Explanation
- Contents of Display
Trouble Code : "NC"-"Alarm type + alarm number" is displayed as code for identifying alarm.
Contents of Trouble : Alarm Message.
Probable Cause : Probable Cause of alarm.
Guidance message : Question to find the cause or answer to remove trouble is displayed.
Status display :
[RESUMING] :
When press soft key [RESUME] , the guidance message which was displayed before CNC
power turned off is displayed again. Then [RESUMING] appears.
[SAMPLING] / [LATCHED] :
In CNC, there are two states in the state that the state (sampling state) to sample servo/spindle
data whenever it usually operates and servo/spindle alarm are occurred and the sampling stops
(preserved state). [SAMPLING] or [LATCHED] display show the two states.
The sampling of servo/spindle monitor data is stopped when the servo/spindle alarm is occurred,
and the data when the alarm is occurred is kept in CNC.
It is automatically diagnosed that it switches to the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in
- 2559 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[LATCHED] state after the alarm is occurred, and the diagnosis to servo/spindle alarm is
displayed partially in CNC based on servo/spindle data when the alarm is occurred.
There is a possibility that a correct diagnosis cannot be done when the alarm number diagnosed
on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen and the alarm number when monitor data was
preserved when the alarm is occurred are different when the alarm is occurred next if the
sampling is not begun. In this case, the display of [LATCHED] state blinks.
Clear the kept data on the screen of either the trouble diagnosis guidance screen, the trouble
diagnosis monitor screen, or the trouble diagnosis graphic screen to begin the sampling again in
preparation for the alarm occurred next after status display changes into [LATCHED] state
once. after diagnosing the cause of occurrence and the corrective action of the alarm.
When the kept data is cleared, [LATCHED] state changes into [SAMPLING] state, and restarts
the sampling of servo/spindle monitor data.
Operation
Press the soft key [(OPRT)] on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen. (Only for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
- Change of Guidance
Soft key [YES]/[NO] :
Check contents of guidance message, and, answer by pressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the
next guidance message is displayed.
In some cases CNC automatically checks and judges contents of guidance. In this case the next
guidance message is automatically displayed.
Automatic diagnosis is not done in case that CNC power turns off once after servo /spindle monitor
data is kept.
Soft key [BACK] :
Guidance message returns back 1 step.
It is possible to trace back the guidance message when soft key [YES]/[NO] is pressed by mistake.
Soft key [RESUME] :
Guidance message which was displayed before CNC power turned off is displayed again.
The diagnosis can be continued from the guidance displayed again.
However, it is not possible to go back to the step before the point where soft key [BACK] is pressed.
Status display “RESUMING” is displayed during the guidance that starts by pressing soft key
[RESUME].
- Change of alarm
When several alarms occur in same time, pressing page key / can select the guidance
message.
19.4.4 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen
Outline
Trouble diagnosis monitor screen displays information when the alarm is occurred necessary to diagnose
the servo/spindle alarm.
Servo/spindle monitor data on "1-4 immediately before occurrence of the alarm" for four samplings
immediately before and "The latest alarm is occurred" can be displayed as data when the alarm is
occurred.
Moreover, "Present" of servo/spindle monitor data when usually operating can be displayed.
- 2560 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis monitor screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MONIT] appears.
3 Press soft key [MONIT].
The following screen is sample of displaying data of X axis (servo) when the alarm occurred.
Fig.19.4.4 (a) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 The servo monitor data screen and the spindle monitor data screen can be switched by pushing soft
key [MON_SP] / [MON_SV].
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis monitor screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MONIT] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [MONIT].
4 The servo monitor data screen and the spindle monitor data screen can be switched by pushing the
vertical soft key [MON_SP] / [MON_SV].
Explanation
- Data displayed in monitor Screen
Displayed data in monitor screen is showed below.
Table 19.4.4 (a) Data of servo motor
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
COMMAND PULSE (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
F.B. PULSE (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 (Note3) 1
REF.COUNTER (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
POS. ERROR (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
- 2561 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
ACTUAL SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ +32767 1
AMR DATA Word 0~+255 Data of pole position of the 1
rotor “256” shows 360 degree
as electrical angle
TORQUE COMMAND (%) Word ±400 Torque command. “100” shows 2
maximum torque
EFFECTIVE CURRENT (%) Word ±400 “100” shows maximum current 2
of amplifier
MOTOR CURRENT (A) Word ±4096 2
DISTURBANCE LEVEL (%) Word 0 ~ +200 “100” shows the alarm level of 2
Unexpected disturbance
torque detection function
HEAT SIMULATION (%) Word 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 2
OVC alarm.
ARBITRARY DATA1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 2
ARBITRARY DATA2 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 2
DC LINK VOLT. (V) Word 0 ~ +1023 Instantaneous value(Note3) 3
PS VOLTAGE RMS (Vrms) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
PS VOLT.UMBALANCE (%) Word 0 ~ +15.5 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
PS VOLTAGE THD (%) Word 0 ~ +31.5 Average value of THD(Total 3
Harmonic Distortion) during 1
cycle of power
frequency(Note3)
PS CURRENT (A) Word 0 ~ +2047 Average value of current 3
amplitude during 1 cycle of
power source(Note3)
PS STATUS FLAG 1 Bit 0/1 (Note4) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 2 Bit 0/1 (Note4) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 3 Bit 0/1 (Note4) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 4 Bit 0/1 (Note4) 3
PS INPUT FREQ (Hz) Word 0 ~ +102.3 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
SV INS.INFO. Byte 0 ~ 3F Various status flags at using 4
Leakage detection function
SV INS.RESISTANCE (MΩ) Word 0 ~ +102.1 Value of insulation resistance 4
at using Leakage detection
function(Note3)
PS INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
PS HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
SV INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
SV HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
AMP GROUP/SLAVE Byte 0 ~ +255 Group number and Slave 5
number of power supply (PS)
PS DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Status flags of power 5
supply(PS)
AMP COMM.ERR.INF. Word 0 ~ FFFF Error information flags for 5
communication between
amplifiers
SV DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Diagnosis flags for servo 5
amplifier(SV)
SV FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SV FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SV FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
- 2562 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
SV FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SDU FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SDU FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SDU FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
SDU FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note5) 6
INT.DTCT.INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 7
interpolation when the
feedback data of internal
detector is disturbed by noise
INT.DTCT.COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 7
error when the feedback data
of internal detector is disturbed
by noise
INT.DETECTOR WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of internal 7
detector
EXT.DTCT.INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 7
interpolation when the
feedback data of external
detector is disturbed by noise
EXT.DTCT.COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 7
error when the feedback data
of external detector is
disturbed by noise
EXT.DETECTOR WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of 7
external detector
SV DATA 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7
SV DATA 2 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7
SV DATA 3 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7
SV DATA 4 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 7
NOTE
1 The data range shows the range in which a data can be monitored in this function.
It doesn’t show the system efficiency or rated value.
2 ARBITRARY DATA1,2 and SV DATA1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC.
3 The displayed values as Voltage, Current, Frequency, Resistance, and
Temperature are approximate value and they have some error. If you want to know
the precise values, measure them by exclusive equipments.
4 PS STATUS FLAG1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC.
5 FSSB ERROR and FSSB JITTER show the status of FSSB communication. They
are used for service operation by FANUC.
Table 19.4.4 (b) Data of spindle motor
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
OPERATION Character ***** 1
GEAR/OUT SEL Character ***** 1
COMMAND PULSE(pulse) 2Word ±99999999 1
COMMAND SPEED(1/min) Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 1
CONTROL INPUT Character ***** 1
CONTROL OUTPUT Character ***** 1
ACT.SPINDLE SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ +32767 2
ACT.MOTOR SPEED (1/min) Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note2) 2
LOAD METER (%) Word 0 ~ +10000 2
- 2563 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
TORQUE CMD(%) Word -100 ~ +100 Torque command. “100” shows 2
the maximum torque.
MOTOR CURRENT (A) Word -4096 ~ +4095 2
HEAT SIMU.(MOTOR) (%) Byte 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 2
OVC alarm.
HEAT SIMU.(AMP) (%) Byte 0 ~ +100 “100” shows the alarm level of 2
OVC alarm.
POS. ERROR (pulse) 2Word ±99999999 2
SYN ERR (pulse) 2Word ±99999999 2
DC LINK VOLT. (V) Word 0 ~ +1023 Instantaneous value(Note3) 3
PS VOLTAGE RMS (Vrms) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
PS VOLT.UMBALANCE (%) Word 0 ~ +15.5 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
PS VOLTAGE THD (%) Word 0 ~ +31.5 Average value of THD(Total 3
Harmonic Distortion) during 1
cycle of power source(Note3)
PS CURRENT (A) Word 0 ~ +1023 Average value of current 3
amplitude during 1 cycle of
power source(Note3)
PS STATUS FLAG 1 Bit 0/1 (Note5) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 2 Bit 0/1 (Note5) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 3 Bit 0/1 (Note5) 3
PS STATUS FLAG 4 Bit 0/1 (Note5) 3
PS INPUT FREQ (Hz) Word 0 ~ +102.3 Average value during 1 cycle 3
of power source(Note3)
SP INS.INFO. Byte 0 ~ 3F Various status flags at using 4
Leakage detection function
(Note3)
SP INS.RESISTANCE (MΩ) Word 0 ~ +102.1 Value of insulation resistance 4
at using Leakage detection
function(Note3)
PS INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
PS HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
SP INT.TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
SP HEAT SINK TMP. (℃) Byte 0 ~ +255 (Note3) 5
AMP GROUP/SLAVE Byte 0 ~ +255 Group number and Slave 5
number of power supply (PS)
PS DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Status flags of power 5
supply(PS)
AMP COMM.ERR.INF. Word 0 ~ FFFF Error information flags for 5
communication between
amplifiers
SP DGN.INFO. Word 0 ~ FFFF Diagnosis flags for spindle 5
amplifier(SP)
SP FSSB UPR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6
SP FSSB LWR.ERR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6
SP FSSB UPR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6
SP FSSB LWR.JTR. 2Word 0 ~ FFFF (Note6) 6
INT.A/B AMPLITUDE (V) Byte 0 ~ +2.55 Amplitude of internal analog 7
sensor
INT.A/B MAX FLUCT (mV) Byte 0 ~ +1270 Maximum fluctuation ratio of 7
internal analog sensor
- 2564 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Data (Unit) Data type Display range Data explanation Page number
INT.A/B OFFSET A (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of A-phase of internal 7
analog sensor
INT.A/B OFFSET B (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of B-phase of internal 7
analog sensor
INT.A/B NOISE CNT Word -32768 ~ +32767 The number of noise when the 7
feedback data of internal
analog sensor is disturbed
EXT.A/B AMPLITUDE (V) Byte 0 ~ +2.55 Amplitude of external analog 7
sensor
EXT.A/B MAX FLUCT (mV) Byte 0 ~ +1270 Maximum fluctuation ratio of 7
external analog sensor
EXT.A/B OFFSET A (mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of A-phase of external 7
analog sensor
EXT.A/B OFFSET B mV) Byte -1280 ~ +1270 Offset of B-phase of external 7
analog sensor
EXT.A/B NOISE CNT Word -32768 ~ +32767 The number of noise when the 7
feedback data of external
analog sensor is disturbed
INT.SRAL INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 8
interpolation when the
feedback data of internal serial
sensor is disturbed by noise
INT.SRAL COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 8
error when the feedback data
of internal serial sensor is
disturbed by noise
INT.SRAL WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of internal 8
serial sensor
EXT.SRAL INTP.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of data 8
interpolation when the
feedback data of external
serial sensor is disturbed by
noise
EXT.SRAL COM.CNT Word 0 ~ +65535 The number of communication 8
error when the feedback data
of external serial sensor is
disturbed by noise
EXT.SRAL WRN. Word 0 ~ FFFF Warning information of 8
external serial sensor
SP DATA 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note4) 8
SP DATA 2 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note4) 8
SP DATA 3 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note4) 8
SP DATA 4 Word -32768 ~ +32767 (Note4) 8
NOTE
1 The data range shows the range in which a data can be monitored in this
function. It doesn’t show the system efficiency or rated value.
2 To display COMMAND SPEED and ACTUAL MOTOR SPEED, it’s necessary to
set following parameters.
- No.4020 : Maximum motor speed of main spindle
- No.4196 : Maximum motor speed of sub spindle
(in case of using Spindle switching control)
- 2565 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
3 The displayed values as Voltage, Current, Frequency, Resistance, and
Temperature are approximate value and they have some error. If you want to
know the precise values, measure them by exclusive equipments.
4 SP DATA1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC
5 PS STATUS FLAG1-4 are used for service operation by FANUC.
6 FSSB ERROR and FSSB JITTER show the status of FSSB communication.
They are used for service operation by FANUC.
Table 19.4.4 (c) Data of others
Data Data form Page number
The latest latch date Year (Two last digits) / Month (Two digits) / Day (Two digits)
The latest latch time Hour (Two digits) / Minute (Two digits) / Second (Two digits) 8(servo),
Executed file name at latched Character 9(spindle)
Executed N number at latched Ｎ＋number of of five digits
Operation
- Servo monitor data screen
Fig.19.4.4 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Servo monitor data) (10.4-inch display unit)
Servo monitor data can be selected by pressing soft key [NEW]/[CURRNT]/[BEFORE]/[AFTER].
Soft key [NEW] and [CURRNT] is displayed alternately.
Moreover, Soft key [BEFORE]/[AFTER] is displayed to press soft key [NEW], and if soft key
[CURRNT] is pressed, it is not displayed.
- 2566 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
TIME
1-4 immediately before When alarm is Present
occurrence of the alarm occurred
Before After
Soft key [NEW] : Servo monitor data when the alarm is occurred is displayed.
Soft key [CURRNT] : Present servo monitor data is displayed.
Soft key [BEFORE] : When the alarm is occurred and status display changes into [LATCHED] state,
data before four samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is
preserved in CNC. Preserved servo monitor data changes and is displayed by
pressing this soft key as "SAMPLED IN ALM" → "BEFORE ALM 1" →
"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 3"→"BEFORE ALM 4".
Soft key [AFTER] : As well as the above operation, Preserved servo monitor data changes and is
displayed by pressing this soft key as "BEFORE ALM 4"→"BEFORE ALM 3"
→"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 1"→"SAMPLED IN ALM".
Soft key [MON_SP] : Spindle monitor data screen is displayed.
NOTE
Monitor data of 1 - 4 samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is not
displayed since 4 pages.
- Spindle monitor data screen
Fig.19.4.4 (c) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Spindle monitor data) (10.4-inch display unit)
Spindle monitor data can be selected by pressing soft key [NEW]/[CURRNT]/[BEFORE]/[AFTER].
Soft key [NEW] and [CURRNT] is displayed alternately.
- 2567 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Moreover, Soft key [BEFORE]/[AFTER] is displayed to press soft key [NEW], and if soft key
[CURRNT] is pressed, it is not displayed.
TIME
1-4 immediately before When alarm is Present
occurrence of the alarm occurred
Before After
Soft key [NEW] : Spindle monitor data when the alarm is occurred is displayed.
Soft key [CURRNT] : Present Spindle monitor data is displayed.
Soft key [BEFORE] : When the alarm is occurred and status display changes into [LATCHED] state,
data before four samplings immediately before occurrence of the alarm is
preserved in CNC. Preserved Spindle monitor data changes and is displayed by
pressing this soft key as "SAMPLED IN ALM" → "BEFORE ALM 1" →
"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 3"→"BEFORE ALM 4".
Soft key [AFTER] : As well as the above operation, Preserved Spindle monitor data changes and is
displayed by pressing this soft key as "BEFORE ALM 4"→"BEFORE ALM 3"
→"BEFORE ALM 2"→"BEFORE ALM 1"→"SAMPLED IN ALM".
Soft key [MON_SV] : Servo monitor data screen is displayed.
NOTE
Spindle monitor data that can the above operation is only an item from page 2 to
page 3.
The value is displayed in the item on page 1 and since 4 pages o f the spindle
monitor data screen the value at present when status display is [SAMPLING], or
the value at the alarm is occurred when status display is [LATCHED].
- Change of displayed page
Displayed page is switched by pressing page key / .
- Change of displayed axis
Displayed axis is switched by pressing cursor key / .
- Preservation of data when alarm is occurred
When status display is in the state of [SAMPLING], and servo alarm/spindle alarm is occurred newly,
"Data at the latest alarm occurrence" and "Data of 1-4 immediately before occurrence of the alarm" of the
alarm occurrence axis are preserved.
As a result, [SAMPLING] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [LATCHED].
NOTE
As for both servos and spindles, when the alarm as two or more axes at the same
time is occurred, only the data of the axis of the least index of an axis is
preserved.
- 2568 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
- Clear of preserved data
After releasing all servo/spindle alarm, clear "Data at the latest alarm occurrence" and "Data of 1-4
immediately before occurrence of the alarm".
As a result, [LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING].
Moreover, the waveform data (various data of each axis) displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic
screen is cleared at the same time.
Clear operation procedure of preserved data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 The soft key display changes as follows if soft key [(OPER)] is pressed on the trouble diagnosis
monitor screen, the trouble diagnosis graphic screen or the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
(The below figure is a trouble diagnosis monitor screen.)
Fig.19.4.4 (d) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
2 Press the soft key [CLEAR].
The soft key display changes as follows.
Press the soft key [CAN] when you cancel the clear operation.
- 2569 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.19.4.4 (e) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Press the soft key [EXEC].
[LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING]
Fig.19.4.4 (f) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 2570 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Clear operation procedure of preserved data (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 The horizontal soft key [CLEAR] deletion is displayed on the trouble diagnosis monitor screen, the
trouble diagnosis graphic screen or the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
2 Press the horizontal soft key [CLEAR].
Press the horizontal soft key [CAN] when you cancel the clear operation.
3 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].
[LATCHED] of status display on the right of the screen changes into [SAMPLING]
19.4.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen
Outline
The waveform data immediately before occurrence of the alarm necessary for the diagnosis when the
servo alarm / spindle alarm is occurred is displayed.
Trouble diagnosis graphic screen
The servo data / spindle data for a few seconds immediately before occurrence of the alarm is displayed
by waveform on the screen. The data of maximum 4 kinds can be displayed at the same time.
The displayed data is set on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis graphic screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [G-ADJ.].
(2)
(1)
Fig.19.4.5 (a) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Contents of display
(1) Red vertical line shows the position (time) in which the alarm is occurred..
- 2571 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(2) The date when the alarm was occurred is displayed.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis graphic screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [G-ADJ.].
Operation
- Change of position and magnification
When Soft key [G-ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB_LV］［ ］［(OPRT)］［ ］
［<］［H-DOBL］［H-HALF］［←TIME］［TIME→］［ ］［＋］
［<］［ CH-1 ］［ CH-2 ］［ CH-3 ］［ CH-4 ］［ ］［＋］
［<］［WAV.EX］［WAV.RE］［WAV.↑］［WAV.↓］［ ］［ ］
Soft key [H-DOBL] : The length of the time base is expanded.
Soft key [H-HALF] : The length of the time base is reduced.
Soft key [TIME←] : The time base is moved to the left side.
Soft key [TIME→] : The time base is moved to the right side.
Soft key [CH-1] : The operation to the waveform of channel 1 is selected.
Soft key [CH-2] : The operation to the waveform of channel 2 is selected.
Soft key [CH-3] : The operation to the waveform of channel 3 is selected.
Soft key [CH-4] : The operation to the waveform of channel 4 is selected.
Soft key [WAV.EX] : The length of the spindle is expanded to the selected waveform.
Soft key [WAV.RE] : The length of the spindle is reduced to the selected waveform.
Soft key [WAV.↑] : The selected waveform is moved for above.
Soft key [WAV.↓] : The selected waveform is moved below.
The time scale is a common scale for the channel 1,2,3 and 4.
The position and magnification of the height scale can be set for each channel.
Parameter setting for waveform display on the trouble diagnosis graphic
screen
The data kind and the data unit of the waveform data displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic screen
are displayed and set on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis parameter screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
- 2572 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [W.PRM].
Fig.19.4.5 (a) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Display procedure of trouble diagnosis parameter screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [W.PRM].
Explanation
- Contents of display
CHANNEL：
Channel for waveform display. Maximum 4 channels can be used. Set data from the first channel
sequentially.
AXIS :
Axis for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases Axis data is set automatically
for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA KIND :
Data kind for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases data kind is set
automatically for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA UNIT :
Unit of display data. This data is set automatically according to data kind. Manual setting is invalid.
FORECAST LV :
This data decides boundary value to output trouble forecast signal. Manual setting is available.
- 2573 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Guidance of setting each item :
The guidance to the above setting each item is displayed.
Operation
- Data Setting
1 Move cursor by Cursor key to the setting item.
2 Input number by MDI key and press input key to set data.
The content of the following each items can be input by the above operation.
AXIS :
In case of servo axis, input control axis number.
(Example) Set "1" for first servo axis.
In case of spindle axis, input "100 + spindle number".
(Example) Set "101" for first spindle axis.
NOTE
Set the index of an axis in the path system to the control axis number and the
control spindle number for the multi path system.
DATA KIND :
Input data number value according to the following table.
Table 19.4.5 (a) Data of Servo motor
Data number Data kind
1 Accumulated command pulse (pulse)
2 Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse)
3 Position error (pulse)
4 Reference counter (pulse)
5 Actual speed (1/min)
6 Command current (%)
7 Thermal simulation data (%)
8 Torque (%)
9 Disturbance level (%)
10 Optional data
11 R-phase current (%)
12 Effective current (%)
13 Pulse coder AMR data
14 Optional data 2
20 SV U CURRENT (A)
21 SV V CURRENT (A)
22 PS L1-L2 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
23 PS L2-L3 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
24 PS L3-L1 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
25 PS L1 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
26 PS L2 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
27 PS L3 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
28 PS DC LINK VOLT. (V) (Note3)
Table 19.4.5 (b) Data of Spindle motor
Data number Data
15 Actual speed (1/min)
16 Load meter (%)
17 Position error (pulse)
- 2574 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Data number Data
18 Actual speed (1/min) (80msec)
19 Load meter (%) (80msec)
30 SP U CURRENT (A)
31 SP V CURRENT (A)
32 PS L1-L2 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
33 PS L2-L3 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
34 PS L3-L1 VOLT. (V) (Note3)
35 PS L1 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
36 PS L2 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
37 PS L3 CURRENT (A) (Note3)
38 PS DC LINK VOLT. (V) (Note3)
NOTE
1 Each data kind is classified as follows as the combination to which the
waveforms can be displayed at the same time.
- Data number :1 - 17
- Data number :18, 19
- Data number :20, 21, 30, 31
- Data number :22 - 28, 32 - 38
Therefore, if the values other than the same combination as the data kind of
another channel are set when the data number is input to the data kind, Warning
"DATA SETTING ERROR" is displayed.
2 The emergency must stop when the set point displays the data kind of
waveforms of 20 or more number.
3 The displayed values as Voltage and Current are approximate value and they
have some error. If you want to know the precise values, measure them by
exclusive equipments.
19.4.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen
Trouble forecast level of the servo motor is set in this screen.
The breakdown level at the thermal simulation and disturbance level can be set.
Explanation
Thermal simulation
The calorific value of the motor and the amplifier is simulated based on a real current of the servo motor.
The alarm of "SOFTTHERMAL(OVC)" is occurred so that the motor or the amplifier might cause over
heat when this thermal simulation data reaches 100%.
Data value increases in the following cases.
1) Operating that frequency of acceleration and deceleration is high.
2) Operating to which state with very large cutting load continues.
3) The machine did not work according to the instruction though the motor output a full torque by the
contact etc. of the machine and work.
Disturbance level
The disturbance level shows the torque that the motor receives from the machine excluding the torque to
accelerate/decelerate the motor and the machine inertia in the output torque of the motor.
1) The machine came in contact with work.
2) The cutting load has increased.
- 2575 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
An increase in these values is observed by this function, and warning can be occurred before the accident
to the machine and occurrence of the alarm.
Display procedure of trouble forecast level setting screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display
unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [TRB LV].
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig.19.4.6 (a) Trouble forecast level setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- Contents of display
(1) Current value of thermal simulation/disturbance level is displayed with sign.
(2) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed by bar graphic.
Light Blue part : Current value of thermal simulation/disturbance level.
Red part : Trouble forecast level.
(3) Trouble forecast level.
The negative value is converted into the absolute value and a positive value is displayed.
Display procedure of trouble forecast level setting screen (for 15-inch display unit)
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press the vertical soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press the vertical soft key [TRB LV].
- 2576 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Operation
- Setting trouble forecast level
1 Select thermal simulation or disturbance level by page keys / .
2 Select axis by cursor keys / .
3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press input key or soft key [INPUT].
Trouble forecast level is input into parameter No.8860 and 8861.
- Change of trouble forecast level
When Soft key [TRB LV] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB LV］［ ］［(OPRT)］［ ］
［<］［－10％］［＋10％］［ －1％］［ ＋1％］［INPUT ］［ ］
Soft key [ -10% ] : Subtract 10% from trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ +10% ] : Add 10% to trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ -1% ] : Subtract 1% from trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ +1% ] : Add 1% to trouble forecast level.
Soft key [INPUT] : Input trouble forecast level by MDI key.
- Trouble forecast signal
When thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds trouble forecast level, trouble forecast
signal TDSML1 - 8 (Fn298)/ TDFTR1 - 8 (Fn299) is output.
Parameters TRSx (bit 0 of parameter No. 8855) / TRFx (bit 1 of parameter No. 8855) need to be set to 1
to perform the trouble forecast.
- Setting of trouble forecast level on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen
The trouble forecast level can be set even on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen.
1. The trouble diagnosis parameter screen is displayed.
2. The cursor is moved to the item set with the cursor key.
3. The axis is set to the servo axis.
4. The data kind is set at thermal simulation (7) or disturbance level (9).
5. Because the editing box next to "FORECAST LV" can be edited, the trouble forecast level that
wants to be set to the axis is input.
- 2577 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.19.4.6 (b) Setting of trouble forecast level on the trouble diagnosis parameter screen
19.4.7 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8850 MDG
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:
0: Available.
1: Not available.
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8855 TRFx TRSx
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
#0 TRSx Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:
0: Not available.
1: Available. (Set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8860.)
#1 TRFx Trouble forecast of disturbance level of servo axis is:
0: Not available.
1: Available. (Set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8861.)
8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation
[Input type] Parameter input
- 2578 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation is set.
8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance level
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Trouble forecast level for disturbance level is set.
19.4.8 Signal
Trouble forecast signals for thermal simulation TDSML1 - TDSML8 <Fn298>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The thermal simulation data is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition] When the thermal simulation data of servo is a value that is bigger than the trouble
forecast level, this signal is "1".
Trouble forecast signals for disturbance level TDFTR1 - TDFTR8 <Fn299>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] The disturbance level is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition]When the disturbance level of servo is a value that is bigger than the trouble forecast level,
this signal is "1".
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1
19.4.9 Restrictions
- The use of the I/O Link βi amplifier
The alarm occurred by the motor with the I/O Link βi amplifier cannot be diagnosed.
- Using with waveform diagnosis display function together
When data of the machine signal or the servo/spindle are traced by waveform diagnosis display function,
the waveform data displayed on the trouble diagnosis graphic screen is not sampled.
- This function on the NC Guide / NC Guide Pro
This function is a not available on the NC Guide / NC Guide Pro.
- 2579 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
19.5 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS
19.5.1 Outline
It is necessary to notify the operator by the alarm display and warning message in the machine tool when
a peculiar problem to the machine such as the tool breakage and coolant shortage occurs.
The machine tool builder customizes by using the external alarm, the macro alarm, and the operator
message function and a peculiar alarm and message to such a machine can be displayed.
In this function, the diagnostic information to specify the factor in addition can be added to the alarm and
the message that the machine tool builder customized.
When a peculiar alarm to the machine etc. are occurred, the added diagnostic information is displayed on
the guidance screen of the trouble diagnosis function and can be used to specify the cause.
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
Machine alarm
occurrence
What caused the alarm ? The cause can be specified
・Is ATC abnormal ? on the trouble diagnosis
・Tool breakage ? guidance screen.
・Coolant shortage ?
Fig.19.5.1 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)
- 2580 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
To add the diagnostic information on the screen, make the diagnostic message data to be displayed and
convert it the memory card format file that can be read by CNC by using the PC tool "Guidance table for
machine alarm diagnosis".
After the file is loaded into CNC, the additional diagnostic information can be displayed on the screen.
19.5.2 Additional alarm and operator message
The alarm and the operator message on the machine side that can be added to the trouble diagnosis
message are as follows.
1. External alarm
2. Macro alarm
3. External operator message
19.5.3 Diagnosis Number
In the alarm and the operator message on the machine side, the alarm number and message number that
can be diagnosed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen are as follows.
1. External alarm
Table 19.5.3 (a) Available diagnosis alarm number (External alarm)
Parameter EXA(No.6301#0)
=0 =1
Alarm number 1000 to 1999 0 to 4095
2. Macro alarm
Table 19.5.3 (b) Available diagnosis alarm number (Macro alarm)
Parameter MCA(No.6008#1)
=0 =1
Alarm number 3000 to 3200 0 to 4095
3. External operator message
Table 19.5.3 (c) Available diagnosis message number (External operator message)
Parameter EXM(No.6301#1)
=0 =1
Message number 2000 to 2999 0 to 4095
NOTE
1 Available diagnosis message number in the external operator message is a
number according to the setting of parameter No.6310.
2 The above available diagnosis number is a range of the number displayed on the
CNC screen, and it is different from the number actually set by the each function.
Refer to the following manuals for the number actually set by the each function.
- External alarm / External operator message
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)
”INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS”
- Macro alarm
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN) “CUSTOM MACRO“
- 2581 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
19.5.4 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message
The following operating environment and the PC tool "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" are
necessary to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
Prepare the personal computer as follows, and install this tool according to the next chapter.
- Operating environment
Operating system Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional or Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Memory Windows® XP：More than 512M bytes
Windows Vista®：More than 1G bytes
Free space in hard disk More than 128M bytes
Necessary equipment PC card adapter
Necessary application Microsoft® Excel® 2007
* Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and Excel are the registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation in USA.
NOTE
"Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" is not included in the option of
"machine alarm diagnosis function".
Purchase "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" CD
(A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11) additionally.
19.5.5 Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis
This tool is used to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance
screen.
Install this tool in the personal computer according to the following procedures, and make the trouble
diagnosis message.
19.5.5.1 Install
The installation procedure of this tool is as follows:
1 Run setup.exe in the install CD (A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11).
2 In the following setup dialog box, set an appropriate installation folder and press the <Next> button.
Fig.19.5.5.1 (a)
- 2582 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
NOTE
By pressing the <Browse> button, the installation folder can be changed.
3 By pressing the <Next> button in the dialog box for the confirmation of install, the installation will
be started.
4 After the installation is finished normally, a message box to show the finish of the installation
appears and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added in the Windows start menu.
19.5.5.2 Uninstall
The uninstall procedure of this tool is as follows:
1 Open the Windows control panel.
2 In the control panel, open the [Add or Remove Programs] and select "FANUC Guidance Table for
Machine Alarm Diagnosis" from the currently installed programs.
NOTE
Open the [Programs and Features] in Windows Vista.
3 By pressing the <Remove (or Uninstall)> button, a message box for the confirmation of uninstall
appears. By pressing the <Yes> button, this tool will be uninstalled.
19.5.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages
Making a Excel file in which trouble diagnosis messages are input is as follows:
Fig.19.5.5.3 (a)
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[New File] in the Windows start menu, then the
"New File" dialog box will be displayed.
- 2583 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.19.5.5.3 (b)
2 In the following dialog box, input a destination folder and file name of the Excel file to be made.
NOTE
1 The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel book format). Any other
extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 When making a new file is failed, the message box "A trouble diagnosis
message file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages
about the cause of that failure.
- The specified file name is not correct.
- The specified file has already existed.
- (Destination folder) is not found.
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
3 Click the [OK] button, a Excel file will be made as the specified name in the specified folder.
The trouble diagnosis messages can be input by opening the new Excel file.
19.5.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages
Three are 2 sheets in the Excel file to input the trouble diagnosis messages.
- [Overall] sheet ・・・The sheet for overall operations and settings
- [Guidance] sheet ・・・The sheet for inputting message strings
Fig.19.5.5.4 (a)
- Structure of [Overall] sheet
In the [Overall] sheet, you can make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation
buttons from (1) to (3).
And, you can switch the display language in sheets and change the settings for multi-languages.
- 2584 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
(1) (4)
(2) (5)
(3) (6)
Fig.19.5.5.4 (b)
- Overview for each items
Item Name Description Reference
(1) Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input the trouble diagnosis Chapter
messages. 19.5.6.1
(2) Check Input Data Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet as to checking Chapter
for the range of number, the invalid letter and so on. 19.5.6.2
(3) Make Memory Card Makes a CNC readable memory card format file from input data Chapter
File in the [Guidance] sheet. 19.5.6.3
(4) Display Language Switches the display language for sheets by selecting a －
language and pressing the [Apply] button. Either Japanese or
English can be selected.
(5) Result of Check Displays the result of check for all input data. Chapter
19.5.6.2
(6) Multi-Languages Changes the settings to input messages for multi-languages. Chapter 19.5.7
- Structure of [Guidance] sheet
In the guidance sheet, you can input numbers and messages for each alarm or operator message.
(3) (4) (5) (3) (4)
(1) (2)
Fig.19.5.5.4 (c)
- Overview for each items
Item Name Description Reference
(1) Guidance Table 1 The table to input numbers and titles for alarm or operator Chapter
message. 19.5.6.1
(2) Guidance Table 2 The table to input questions and instructions to an operator for Chapter
alarm or operator message. 19.5.6.1
(3) Jump to Page Switches the display between the guidance table 1 and 2. －
(4) Check Input Data Checks input data for each guidance table. Chapter
19.5.6.2
- 2585 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Item Name Description Reference
(5) Set Line Number Adds or deletes lines by a number specified in the combo box －
at the bottom of the guidance table 1 or 2.
Note that all line number in the guidance table is from the
minimum 30 to the maximum 2000.
19.5.6 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages
Make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation buttons in order from (1) to (3) on
the [Overall] sheet.
The brief of making procedure is as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig.19.5.6 (a)
(1) Input Guidance Data
Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input trouble diagnosis messages.
(2) Check Input Data
Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet
(3) Make Memory Card File
Makes a memory card format file from input data in the [Guidance] sheet.
The details for each operation are as follows:
19.5.6.1 Input Guidance Data
By clicking the [Input Guidance Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, the [Guidance] sheet will be
displayed.
Input data on the guidance table 1 and 2 according to the descriptions of the next section.
The data that is input on each guidance table is displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen as the
following figure.
- 2586 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Input items on the guidance table 1
Classified code
Title
Probable cause
Input item on the guidance table 2
Guidance message
Fig.19.5.6.1 (a)
Table 19.5.6.1 (a) Display item of trouble diagnosis guidance screen
Display Item Description
Classified code Classified code and number for the current alarm or operator message
Title Title for the current alarm or operator message
Probable cause Cause of the current alarm or operator message
Guidance message Confirmation to determine cause of an alarm, or an instruction about an operator
message
NOTE
The character that can be displayed on the CNC screen can be used for each
display item. As for details, refer the following manuals.
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64604EN)
“APPENDIX G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE “
- About input data in the guidance table 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Table 19.5.6.1 (b) Description of items in the guidance table 1
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(1) Kind Input a kind for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator 2 English capital
message. letters
Specify one of the following strings.
EX : External alarm
MC : Macro alarm
OP : External operator message
NOTE
If a kind other than above is input, checking input data is failed.
(2) Number Input a number for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator Within 4 numbers
message.
- 2587 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(3) Classified Input 2 types of code, "Code 1" and "Code 2".
Code "Code 1 – Code 2" is displayed at the first line on the trouble diagnosis
guidance screen.
Code 1 Input a classified code for an alarm or an operator Within 2 letters (1
message. in multi-bytes
letters)
Code 2 Input a number for an alarm or an operator messages. Within 16 letters
(8 in multi-bytes
letters)
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to make each classified code to be the same
as (1)kind and (2)number.
2 A character string "NC" is reserved as the code 1 of CNC
alarm. Do not use "NC" as the code 1.
(4) Title Input a string displayed at the second line on the trouble diagnosis Within 32 letters
guidance screen. (16 in multi-bytes
letters)
(5) Probable Input a string displayed at the "Probable cause" part on the trouble Within 32 letters
Cause diagnosis guidance screen. (16 in multi-bytes
letters) per line
(maximum 3
lines)
(6) Message ID Input an ID of a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part Within 8 letters
of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen at first when an alarm occurs. (English capital
Ex. The first guidance message for the external alarm message and numerical
alarm No.1000 ：EX1000A letters)
NOTE
As for the message ID, see the description of the next
description " About input data in the guidance table 2".
(7) Additional Do not input in the item.
information
(Reserved)
- About input data in the guidance table 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Table 19.5.6.1 (c) Description of items in the guidance table 2
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(1) Message ID It is a string to identify to one of the guidance messages in (2). Within 8 letters
Ex.1. The first message for the external alarm No.1000 : (English capital
EX1000A and numerical
Ex.2. The second message for the external alarm No.1000 : letters)
EX1000B
NOTE
The character string that starts by "M"+"Number" is not used as
message ID. Because this shows the destination of the jump of
the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table
for the CNC alarm. Therefore, do not use the character string
that starts by "M"+"Number".
- 2588 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(2) Guidance It is a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of the Within 128
Message trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Input a question, an instruction and letters (64 in
so on to an operator. multi-bytes
NOTE letters)
When the guidance message is shown on the trouble diagnosis
screen, a new line code is inserted to the message per 32
letters (16 in multi-bytes letters) automatically.
If you want to insert a new line code at a free position, input
"¥n" that is not included as the number of letters.
Moreover, the line number of the message is within 4 including
the above automatic new line.
(3) Next Message Input a message ID that is jumped to when pressing the soft key [Yes] Within 8 letters
ID or [No] for each question of guidance message. (English capital
Input "-1" when there is no message ID to be jumped. and numerical
letters)
(4) Notes Free notes can be written.
19.5.6.2 Checking input data
By clinking the [Check Input Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, all input data on the guidance sheet will
be checked as to the range of number, the number of letters, the invalid letter and the line number of
strings.
After the check is completed, the string of the [Result of Check] on the [Overall] sheet is changed from
"Unchecked" to "OK".
NOTE
After "OK" is displayed, it might return to "Unchecked" by editing on the
[Guidance] sheet again.
If the check is failed, the string of the [Result of Check] is changed to "NG" and a name of sheet and
guidance table where an error occurs is shown in a cell under the [Result of Check].
The guidance table where an error occurs is displayed by clicking the name of the guidance table.
Fig.19.5.6.2 (a)
In the guidance table, the color of an error cell is changed to green and an error message is attached to the
error cell as a commnet of the cell like the above figure. The list of the error messages is as follows:
- 2589 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
- Input a number.
- The value is out of range (n to m).
- Input a string within n characters (m in multi-bytes characters).
- The line number is over limit n.
- The message referenced by the ID is not found.
- The kind(s) cannot be specified.
(*) m and n are numbers, s is a string
NOTE
1 The input data can be checked for an individual guidance table by clicking the
[CHECK] button displayed at the top of the guidance table.
In this case, the result of the check is displayed under the [CHECK] button like
the following figure.
2 In case that errors occurs on two or more guidance tables, the [Result of Check]
on the [Overall] sheet shows the name of the guidance table where the first error
occurs. As for the result of check for each guidance table, see the display under
the [CHECK] button.
Moreover, the color of the cell changes into light blue when the character string that shows the destination
of the jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table for the CNC alarm is input to
message ID.
Example )
19.5.6.3 Making a memory card format file
By clicking the [Make Memory Card File] button on the [Overall] sheet, the following dialog box will be
displayed.
Fig.19.5.6.3 (a)
Make a CNC readable memory card format file as follows:
1 Input a folder name where you want to make a file in the [Destination folder].
2 Input a file name that you want to make in the [File name].
" GUI_USR.MEM " is input by default.
- 2590 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
When you input a file name without its extension, the extension "MEM" is added to the file name
automatically.
3 Click the [OK] button.
After making the file is completed, the message box "Making the memory card format file is completed."
will be displayed.
NOTE
1 The available file name is a short file name with alphabetic and numerical letters
(8.3 MS-DOS format).
Other name format cannot be read by CNC.
2 If a file having the same name as the specified one has already existed in the
destination folder, the file always will be overwritten.
3 When making the memory card format file is failed, the message box "The
memory card format file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following
messages about the cause of that failure.
- The input data have not been checked on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 or
2)
- There are error(s) of the input data on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 or 2)
- The specified file name is not correct.
- (Destination folder) is not found.
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
By loading the file to CNC with the CNC BOOT function, the trouble diagnosis message can be
displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen when the relevant external alarm, macro alarm or
operator message happens.
NOTE
As for the CNC BOOT function, see the following manuals.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64605EN) ”APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM”
19.5.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table
As a result of the diagnosis of the CNC alarm, the diagnosis of the machine side might be needed.
There is special message ID that jumps from the guidance table of the CNC alarm to the guidance table
on the machine side for the diagnosis of such a case.
It is possible to jump to the diagnosis of MTB's guidance table after the diagnosis of the CNC alarm if the
guidance table is made by using Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" in the following tables.
Tabel 19.5.6.4 (a) Reserved message ID
No. Message ID Title Probable cause
1 M205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when
the rigid tapping is executed.
2 M409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
load torque higher than a normal operation value.
3 M410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from reaching a target position.
4 M411 EXCESS ERROR ( MOVING ) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from moving.
- 2591 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
No. Message ID Title Probable cause
5 M420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque
difference.
6 M421 EXCESS ERROR (SEMI-FULL) With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between
the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate
detector by a cause such as a mechanical twist.
7 M436 SOFT THERMAL (OVC) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
large load and the flow of an excessive current.
NOTE
Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" other than existing in the above table is
not available.
19.5.7 Making Messages for Multi-languages
To change the language of messages displayed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen complying with
the display language of CNC, it is necessary to input messages for each language and make the memory
card format file.
The messages for each display language are input on dedicated sheets for multi-languages.
NOTE
The messages in the [Guidance] sheet are assumed as English.
If you need messages other than English, make messages as follows:
19.5.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages
Making sheets for multi-languages is as follows:
Fig.19.5.7.1 (a)
1 Click the [Multi-Languages] button on the [Overall] sheet. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
- 2592 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
2 Turn on a check box for a language that you want to make in the [Make sheet] list. Two or more
check boxes can be turned on.
After turning on the check box in the [Make sheet] list, the check box for the corresponding
language can be operated in the [Output file] list.
3 In the [Output file] list, turn on a check box for a language that you want to output to your CNC
readable memory card format file at the same time. Up to 5 check boxes other than English can be
turned on. 6 or more check boxes cannot be turned on.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The sheets that are selected in the item 2 will be made like the following figure.
Sheets for multi-languages
NOTE
1 The supported languages are 18 ones shown in the previous dialog box.
2 The number of languages that can be output to the file of the memory card
format at the same time is six languages (English + five national languages).
3 Once a sheet for multi-languages is made, the language of the [Guidance] sheet
assumed as English. And, in the previous dialog box, the check box for English
in the [Make sheet] and [Output file] list is turned on by default and they cannot
be operated.
4 If you input other than English messages in the [Guidance] sheet before making
the sheet for multi-languages, move the messages in the [Guidance] sheet to a
sheet for an appropriate language by cut and paste operation of Excel.
5 To remove the sheet for multi-languages, turn off the check box for the language
that you want to remove in the [Make sheet] list in the previous dialog box.
19.5.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages
The way to input data on the sheet for multi-languages is the same as one on the [Guidance] sheet that has
already explained in the section "Making trouble diagnosis messages". However, data can be input for the
3 items only – Title, Probable cause and Guidance message.
As for data other than the 3 times, data in the [Guidance] sheet is copied to here and displayed.
Fig.19.5.7.2 (a) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 1
Fig.19.5.7.2 (b) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 2
After inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages, check the input data and make the memory card
format file according to the procedure described in "Making trouble diagnosis messages".
- 2593 -
19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
The display language of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen is switched
automatically according to the CNC display language.
However, when there is no message for the CNC display language in the
memory card file, the input messages in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed.
19.5.8 Notice
- Excel’s file of trouble diagnosis message
When you use "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis", change the setting of the macro function to
"Enable" in the Trust Center of Excel 2007. If the setting is "Disable", the trouble diagnosis message
cannot be made.
To enable the macro function by setting a path in the "Trusted Locations" of the Trust Center, set the
folder where the file to input trouble diagnosis messages should be located and also the install folder of
the "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis".
19.5.9 Translating Data Used with the Former Series
(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B)
The Excel file and the memory card file used with the former series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i
/18i /21i-B) cannot be used with the current target series (Series 0i-F) of this function.
Translate the Excel file used with the former series and make the memory card format file again
according to the following description.
NOTE
As for the way to make the trouble diagnosis message for Series 0i /0i
Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B, see the manual "Trouble Diagnosis
Specifications" (A-78500) and "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Specifications"
(A-78622)
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[Translate Former Series Data] in the Windows start
menu.
Fig.19.5.9 (a)
2 In the displayed dialog box, input a Excel file name used with the former series in the [Source file
name] and input a translated file name in the [Destination file name].
Fig.19.5.9 (b)
- 2594 -
B-64603EN-1/01 19.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
3 Click the [OK] button, then the translated Excel file that is specified in the [Destination file name]
will be made.
4 With the translated Excel file, check input data and make the memory card format file according to
the section "Making trouble diagnosis messages".
NOTE
1 Input a full path in the [Source file name] and [Destination file name]. The path
name cannot be omitted. The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel
book format). Any other extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 The "Kind" in the guidance table 1 is input automatically complying with the
"Number" during the translation.
No. 1000 to 1999 → EX (External alarm)
No. 2000 to 2999 → OP (External operator message)
No. 3000 to 3200 → MC (Macro alarm)
3 When translating data is failed, the message box "The data cannot be
translated." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of
that failure.
- (Source file name) is not found.
- (Destination folder name) is not found.
- Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
- The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file
- (Destination file name) has already existed.
4 If you use separated Excel files for Japanese and English with the former series,
translate both files and make a sheet to input Japanese messages in the English
file. Then, move the data form the Japanese file to the sheet to input Japanese
in the English file by cut and paste operation of Excel so as to combine two files
to one.
- 2595 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
20 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Chapter 20, "MAINTENANCE FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
20.1 MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION .........................................................................2596
20.2 SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION ................................................2627
20.1 MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION
20.1.1 Overview
This function monitors state of machine.
When trouble of the machine occurs, CNC information such as the operation history, the position and the
feedrate at that time is saved in the CNC memory.
The saved CNC information can be used to investigate the cause of machine trouble.
Unexpected disturbance torque detection function, servo/spindle alarm, and a ladder program made by
machine tool builders monitor the state of machine.
In the ladder program, the shock value is monitored by the Multi-Sensor Unit (MSU). When trouble of
the machine such as the spindle collision occurs, the ladder program notifies CNC that the trouble has
occurred.
When CNC is notified the trouble occurrence, CNC saves the information on that time in the CNC
memory.
Machine tool builders or maintenance members investigate the cause of generation of trouble by using the
saved CNC information.
The maximum save number of CNC information is 100. So, the past trouble can be investigated.
PMC CNC
Ladder Program
Collision of Multi-Sensor Monitoring Machine State Investigation
Spindle Unit Shock Sensor Monitoring Function using by saved
(Option) Notice to CNC Information Save CNC
・Position/Feedrate Information
・Mode
・Sensor Value
Unexpected disturbance
・Operation History
torque detection function
・Program name
CNC Alarm
Fig.20.1.1 (a) Summary of machine state monitoring function (Ex. collision of spindle)
Machine state monitoring function has the following two screens.
(1) Machine state monitoring screen
(2) Machine state history screen
In the machine state monitoring screen, four bytes PMC signals that set by parameter and the signal of the
Multi-Sensor Unit can be monitored.
- 2596 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
In the machine state history screen, saved CNC state and signal value can be displayed. So, the signal of
Multi-Sensor Unit and the CNC state such as position and program at the time when a spindle collides
can be checked.
In addition, displayed information can be output to external devices.
When CNC saved information exceeded 100, CNC information is overwritten from the old one. CNC
Information is remained for eight days or more, so saving information is restricted.
NOTE
1 This function is an optional function.
2 Multi-Sensor Unit is the optional.
Please refer to the following manuals for Multi-Sensor Unit and unexpected
disturbance torque detection function.
- Multi-Sensor Unit:
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-64603EN)
- Unexpected Disturbance Torque Detection Function:
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64603EN-1)
"2.9UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION"
in "2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION".
20.1.2 Monitoring by CNC Software
CNC software monitors following three statuses and when at least one trouble is detected, CNC saves the
information.
1. unexpected disturbance torque
2. servo alarm
3. spindle alarm
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11352 ABT SVT SPT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#5 SPT When spindle alarm occurred, recording CNC information by machine state monitoring
is :
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#6 SVT When servo alarm occurred, recording CNC information by machine state monitoring is :
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 ABT When unexpected abnormal torque is detected, recording CNC information by machine
state monitoring is :
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 2597 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
20.1.3 Monitoring by Ladder Program
A ladder program made by machine tool builders monitors the state of machine.
Machine tool builders deicide abnormal criteria according to the purpose such as spindle collision and
machine overheat or the machine characteristic.
Example of abnormal detection)
(1) Detection of spindle collision
- The shock value that read by the Multi-Sensor Unit exceeds the assumption value.
- The load current value that read by the unexpected disturbance torque detection function
exceeds the assumption value.
(2) Detection of machine overheat
- The temperature value that read by the Multi-Sensor Unit exceeds the assumption value.
When the trouble is detected, the ladder program sets machine state history save request signal MSUREQ
<G0534.6> to “1” to notify CNC the occurrence of trouble.
20.1.4 Saving the Machine State
When the machine trouble is detected by machine state history save request signal MSUREQ <G0534.6>,
servo alarm, spindle alarm or unexpected disturbance torque detection function, CNC saves the following
information in the CNC memory.
The information can be saved up to 100.
If the new information is saved when history number is max, the oldest data is deleted and latest
information is saved.
The saved CNC information cannot be deleted by the screen operation.
Table 20.1.4 (a) Saved CNC Information List
Item Remarks
Time Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second
PMC Signal 4bytes
Machine Position All Axis, All Path
Absolute Position All Axis, All Path
Feedrate All Path
Spindle Speed All Axis, All Path
Program Name (O Number) All Path
Block Number All Path
Mode All Path
Modal M, S, T, B (Without G code) All Path
Operation History Data of 1/20 of normal operation history. About 400 MDI keys.
The number of MDI keys decreases when a history with large size such
as the alarm history is saved.
Non-Save Number Number of information not saved.
Multi-Sensor Unit Signals Maximum 4
Save trigger SIGNAL : signal MSUREQ
ABTRQ : unexpected abnormal torque is detected
SV ALM : servo alarm
SP ALM : spindle alarm
The machine state at the time when trouble occurs can be checked by the above saved information.
- 2598 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Example)
(1) Spindle collision during automatic operation
If the operation mode is automatic operation such as MEM when the trouble occurs, the operator
states can be clarified by checking the saved following data.
- The program name and its block number.
- The machine position and the absolute position.
- The Modal.
(2) Spindle collision during manual operation
If the operation mode is manual operation such as JOG mode when trouble is occurs, the operator
states can be clarified by checking the saved following data.
- The machine position and the absolute position.
- The operation history that the CNC parameter is changed.
20.1.4.1 Restriction of saving
To save CNC information for eight or more days, so number of saving information each day is restricted.
Potential Saving Number
Potential Saving Number means the number of limits that can be preserved in a day.
Potential Saving Number is given basically 10 times a day, but remained Potential Saving Number is
carried over next day. (Maximum 30)
CNC information is remained eight or more days in CNC memory. (Refer to Example.1 to 3)
Potential Saving Number is displayed on diagnosis data No. 4500.
When Potential Saving Number is 0, CNC information can’t be saved.
Non-Save Number
Non-Save Number is the number that CNC information was not saved because of restriction of saving
even if save request condition is fulfilled(signal MSUREQ<G0534.6> changing into “1”, detecting
unexpected abnormal torque, spindle alarm or servo alarm)
Non-Save Number is included in CNC information that will be saved next time.
The maximum value of Non-Save Number is 65535.
Non-Save Number is displayed on Machine state history screen. (Refer to the below figure.)
If “*” displayed at the right of detect time, it means the value of Non-Save Number is 1 or more.
If Non-Save Number is 0, “*” is not displayed.
For details, refer to the section, "Machine state history screen" in this chapter.
Non-Save Number is not 0.
- 2599 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig.20.1.4.1 Non-Save Number
Example.1 (Non-Save Number)
This is the case MSUREQ changes into “1” twelve times on 1 April, and change into “1” only one time 2
April.
On 1 April, Potential Saving Number was 10, and MSUREQ had changed into “1” twelve times.
From 1st to 10th CNC information was saved, but 11th and 12th had not been saved, because of
restriction.
On 2 April, MSUREQ had changed “1” only one time.
In this case, the value of Non-Save Number is saved is 2(11th and 12th on 1 April).
Date Change
1 April 2 April
Machine Status History
Save Request Signal
MSUSRQ<G0534.6>
9th 10th 11th 12th 1st
Save CNC information
Save CNC information Not Save Not Save
1st information
9th information 10th information Non-Save Number 2
Non-Save Number 0 Non-Save Number 0
Example.2 (Carry over of Potential Saving Number)
This is the case of carry over of Potential Saving Number.
On 1 April, Potential Saving Number was 10 and CNC information was saved 3 times.
Potential Saving Number was carried over next day.
On 2 April, Potential Saving Number was 17 as a result of carry over from 1 April, and CNC information
was saved only 1 time.
On 3 April, Potential Saving Number was 26 as a result of carry over from 2 April.
- 2600 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
1 April 2 April
Machine Status History
Save Request Signal
MSUSRQ<G0534.6>
1st 2nd 3rd 1st
Potential Saving 10 9 8 7 17 16 26
Number
2 April 10 3 April 10
+ carry over 7 + carry over 16
Example.3 (Saving 100 information by the shortest days)
This is the example of saving 100 information in the shortest days.
CNC information was saved 30 times on 1 April.
Next 7 days, information was saved 10 times a day.
On 8 April, there were CNC information from April 1, and information of 1 April still remained.
Like this, information remains for at least 8 days.
9 April the old information on 1 April is overwritten.
9 April
1 April 30 1 April 1 April 1 April
2 April 10 2 April 2 April
3 April 3 April
100
… 4 April 4 April
information
5 April 5 April
6 April 6 April
7 April 7 April
8 April 8 April
1st day 2nd day 8th day 9th day
30 times 10 times 10 times 10 times
20.1.5 Setting
20.1.5.1 PMC signal
Four bytes data can be set as PMC signal.
The address is set by the parameter.
The PMC path number of signal No.1 to 4 is set to parameter No.11378 to No.11381.
The value and the PMC path number that can be set are as follows.
No.11378 to 11381 PMC Path Number
0 Unsetting
- 2601 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
No.11378 to 11381 PMC Path Number
1 1st PMC
2 2nd PMC
3 3rd PMC
9 Dual Check Safety
The address kind of signal No.1 to 4 is set to parameter No.11382 to No.11385.
The value and the address kind that can be set are as follows.
No.11382 to 11385 Address Kind
0 Unsetting
1 X
2 Y
3 G
4 F
5 A
6 R
7 T
8 K
9 C
10 D
The address number of signal No.1 to 4 is set to parameter No.11386 to No.11389.
The range that can be set is decided depending on the address kind.
Refer to PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN) for detail.
Example:
Signal No Address PMC Path Number Address Kind Address Number
1 1:X10 No.11378 = 1 No.11382 = 1(X) No.11386 = 10
2 1:Y20 No.11379 = 1 No.11383 = 2(Y) No.11387 = 20
3 2:R30 No.11380 = 2 No.11384 = 6(R) No.11388 = 30
4 3:D40 No.11381 = 3 No.11385 = 10(D) No.11389 = 40
20.1.5.2 Multi-Sensor Unit
The Multi-Sensor Unit is connected with CNC by I/O Link.
When the Multi-Sensor Unit is detected in the power on, CNC automatically sets the address of the sensor
signal.
Therefore, the setting by MTB is unnecessary.
NOTE
The allocation setting of I/O Link is necessary.
20.1.5.3 Delay time for operation history saving
The alarm history can be saved in the operation history.
So, the operation history that contains the generated alarm can be saved by this function.
However, the gap might be caused in timing between the machine status history save request condition is
fulfilled and the alarm is saved into operation history.
In this case, even if CNC saves the operation history when the machine status history save request
condition is fulfilled, the operation history doesn’t contain the alarm generated in the immediately after
that.
To prevent this problem, the delay time for operation history save is set.
The delay time for the operation history save is set by parameter No.24302.
- 2602 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Without Delay Time for Operation History Save With Delay Time for Operation History Save
MSUSRQ=”1” Alarm Generation MSUSRQ =”1” Alarm Generation
Time Time
The alarm is saved The alarm is saved
in the operation history in the operation history
Check “MSUSRQ” Check “MSUSRQ” Save history
Save history Save History without operation history.
operation history.
Delay time for operation history save
The saved operation history doesn’t The saved operation history
contain the alarm history. contains the alarm history.
Fig.20.1.5.3 Delay time for operation history saving
If the parameter No.24302 is –1 or less, the delay time is 0.
If the parameter No.24302 is 0, the delay time is 160ms.
If the parameter No.24302 is 1 or more, the delay time is (No.24302×16)ms.
For example, if the parameter No.24302 is 5 or more, the delay time is 80ms.
20.1.5.4 Machine state history saving response signal (MSUSAS)
Machine State History Saving Response Signal MSUSAS <F545.6> is response signal of
MSUSRQ<G534.6>.If the machine status history start saving by other reason such as detecting spindle
alarm, MSUSAS doesn’t become “1”.
When CNC detects MSUSRQ<G534.6> changing into “1”, CNC changes MSUSAS<F545.6> into “1”.
Afterwards, behavior of CNC is different depend on the value of Potential Saving Number.
- When Potential Saving Number is one or more
(1) When CNC detects MSUSRQ changing into “1”, CNC begin to save information and change
MSUSAS into “1”.
(2) Ladder program confirm that MSUSAS changed into “1”, please change MSUSRQ into “0”.
(3) After information saving is ended, if MSUSRQ is “0”, MSUSAS is changing into “0”.
- 2603 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Accident
ON OFF
MSUSRQ
<G534.6>
ON OFF
MSUSAS
<F545.5>
Begin to save Save
information completion
Saving Information
Fig.20.1.5.4 (a) Machine State History Save Request Signal and Machine State History Saving Response
Signal
- When Potential Saving Number is zero
(1) When CNC detects MSUSRQ changing into “1”, CNC change MSUSAS into “1”, but CNC is
not saving information.
(2) Ladder program confirm that MSUSAS is changed into “1”, please change MSUSRQ into “0”.
(3) If MSUSRQ is 0, MSUSAS changing into “0”.
Accident
ON OFF
MSUSRQ
<G534.6>
ON OFF
MSUSAS
<F545.5>
Saving Information Information is not saved
Fig. 20.1.5.4 (b) Machine State History Save Request Signal and Machine State History Saving Response
Signal
Signal
Machine State History Save Request Signal MSUSRQ<G0534.6>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] The save of the machine state history is requested.
[Operation] When this signal becomes 1, the machine state history is saved.
- 2604 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Machine State History Saving Response Signal MSUSAS<F0545.5>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Response to the machine status history save request signal (MSUSRQ)
[Output cond.] This signal becomes 1 when:
- Detect MSUSRQ is “1”.
It becomes 0 when:
Behavior is different depend on the information was saved or not.
- The machine state history is saving: Detect MSUSRQ is “0” and saving is ended.
- The machine state history is not saving: Detect MSUSRQ is “0”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0534 MSUSRQ
F0545 MSUSAS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11372 MSH MSM
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#3 MSM The machine state monitoring screen
0: is not displayed.
1: is displayed.
#7 MSH The machine state history screen
0: is not displayed.
1: is displayed.
11378 PMC path number of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to
11381 PMC path number of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Data range] 0 to 3 and 9
The PMC path number of the PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is
set.
The value and the PMC path number that can be set are as follows.
No.11378 to 11381 PMC Path Number
0 Unsetting
1 1st PMC
2 2nd PMC
3 3rd PMC
9 Dual Check Safety
11382 Address kind of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to
11385 Address kind of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
- 2605 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
[Data range] 0 to 10
Address kind of PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is set.
The value and the address kind that can be set are as follows.
No.11382 to 11385 Address Kind
0 Unsetting
1 X
2 Y
3 G
4 F
5 A
6 R
7 T
8 K
9 C
10 D
11386 Address number of PMC signal No.1 for the machine state monitoring function
to
11389 Address number of PMC signal No.4 for the machine state monitoring function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Data range] Refer to PMC Programming Manual (B-64513EN) for detail.
Address number of PMC signal for the machine state monitoring function is set.
24302 Delay time from trigger signal to storing operation history for the machine state monitoring function
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Data range] -1 to 32767
This parameter sets delay time from turning on trigger signal to beginning preservation of
the operation history in the machine state monitoring function.
Parameter No.24302 Delay Time
-1 0msec
0 160msec
1 to 32767 Parameter No.24302×16msec
Diagnosis Data
4500 Potential Saving Number
[Valid data range] 0 to 30
Potential Saving Number is displayed.
20.1.6 Display the CNC Information
In the CNC screen, the PMC signal and the signal of the Multi-Sensor Unit can be monitored and the
CNC information at the time when the trouble of machine occurs is checked.
The screen for the confirmation has the following two kinds.
- Machine state monitoring screen: Display of current PMC signals and Multi-Sensor Unit information.
- Machine state history screen: Display of CNC information at the time when the trouble of machine
occurs.
- 2606 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
20.1.7 Machine state monitoring screen
In the machine state monitoring screen, four PMC signals that set by parameter and the signal of the
Multi-Sensor Unit can be monitored.
The machine state monitoring screen is displayed by the following procedures.
1. Press function key .
2. Press the continuous menu key several times to display the soft key [MACHIN MONITR]
3. Press the soft key [MACHIN MONITR] to display the machine state monitoring screen.
Fig. 20.1.7(a) Machine state monitoring screen(With Multi-Sensor Unit)
NOTE
This screen is displayed only when bit 3 (MSM) of parameter No.11372 is 1.
- 2607 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
20.1.7.1 Monitoring of PMC signals
In the machine state monitoring screen, four PMC signals that set by parameter can be monitored.
Title
Signal Address
Signal Value
Fig. 20.1.7.1 (a) Monitoring of PMC signals
Details of the content of the display are as follows.
PMC Signal Title
The title of PMC signal that can be set by the parameter is displayed.
The PMC signal can be set only by four bytes or less.
PMC Signal Address
The address of PMC signal set by the parameter is displayed.
If the parameter is not set, “****” is displayed.
In the case of multi PMC system, the PMC path number is displayed ahead of the address. (Refer to Fig.
20.1.7.1 (b))
PMC Signal Value
The real-time value of PMC signal set by the parameter is displayed.
If the parameter is not set, “****” is displayed.
PMC path number
(Multi PMC system)
Parameter is not set
Fig. 20.1.7.1 (b) PMC Signal Value
- 2608 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
20.1.7.2 With Multi-Sensor Unit
When Multi-Sensor Unit is connected, machine state monitoring screen is displayed as follows.
Title Title
Sensor Item Signal Value
Signal Address
Signal Address
Value
Unit
Fig. 20.1.7.2 (a) With Multi-Sensor Unit
Details of the content of the display are as follows.
Multi-Sensor Unit Title
The title of Multi-Sensor Unit title is displayed.
For the multi PMC system
In the case of multi PMC system, the PMC path number of the Multi-Sensor Unit is displayed next to the
title.
PMC path number
Fig. 20.1.7.2 (b) Multi PMC System
For the plural Multi-Sensor Units
The Multi-Sensor Unit can be connected up to four.
In the case of the plural Multi-Sensor Units, the displayed Multi-Sensor Unit number (MSU No.) and all
connected number of MSU are displayed.
The Multi-Sensor Unit number is counted from the one near CNC to four among units connected with I/O
Link.
MSU No. / All MSU
Fig. 20.1.7.2 (c) plural Multi-Sensor Units
For multi PMC system and the plural Multi-Sensor Units
In the case of multi PMC system and the plural Multi-Sensor Units, the displayed MSU No, all connected
number of MSU and the PMC path number of the Multi-Sensor Units are displayed next to the title.
- 2609 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
MSU No. / All MSU PMC path number
Fig. 20.1.7.2 (d) Multi PMC System and plural Multi-Sensor Units
Sensor Item
The following sensor items are displayed.
(1) Shock Sensor (Direction of X, Y, Z) : 2CH
(2) Analog Input : 2CH
(3) Thermo Sensor : 8CH
When all sensors cannot be displayed in one screen, the page can be switched by pushing page change
key .
Address
The address corresponding to each sensor is displayed.
Value
The sensor value that each sensor outputs is displayed.
Unit
The unit corresponding to each sensor is displayed.
PMC Signal Title
Refer to the section, "Monitoring of PMC signals" in this chapter.
PMC Signal Address
Refer to the section, "Monitoring of PMC signals" in this chapter.
PMC Signal Value
Refer to the section, "Monitoring of PMC signals" in this chapter.
- 2610 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Operation
If the soft key [(OPRT)] is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed.
Fig. 20.1.7.2 (d) soft key [(OPRT)]
Soft Key [MSU SWITCH]
This soft key is displayed when the plural Multi-Sensor Units are connected.
When this soft key is pressed, the displayed Multi-Sensor Units can be switched.
For example, when four Multi-Sensor Units are connected, whenever this soft key is pushed, the
displayed Multi-Sensor Unit changes as MSU No.1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 1…
Soft Key [SIGNAL SWITCH]
When this soft key is pressed, either display of X or Y signal can be switched.
X signal display Y signal display
[SIGNAL SWITCH]
- 2611 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Page Change Key
When the page change key is pressed, the sensor signal information of the next page can be
displayed.
Page 1 Page 2
- 2612 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
20.1.8 Machine state history screen
When the machine state history save request condition is fulfilled, CNC saves the PMC signal, the state of
CNC and the operation history in CNC as a history.
In the machine state history screen, these saved histories can be displayed.
As a result, the machine state at the time when a spindle collides can be checked and the investigation of
cause of trouble and restoration are easy.
The histories can be saved up to 100.
NOTE
1 If the machine state history save request condition is fulfilled when the 100 of
history data have been saved, the new history overwrites the oldest one.
2 Don’t set the machine state history save request condition fulfilled while the
machine state history screen is displayed. In this case, CNC Information is
saved when the display of the screen changes other screen.
The state of CNC saved as a history is as follows.
Table 20.1.8 (a) Saved CNC Information List
Item Remarks
Time Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second
PMC Signal 4bytes
Machine Position All Axis, All Path
Absolute Position All Axis, All Path
Feedrate All Path
Spindle Speed All Axis, All Path
Program Name (O Number) All Path
Block Number All Path
Mode All Path
Modal M, S, T, B (Without G code) All Path
Operation History Data of 1/20 of normal operation history. About 400 MDI keys.
The number of MDI keys decreases when a history with large size such
as the alarm history is saved.
Non-Save Number Number of information not saved.
Multi-Sensor Unit Signals Maximum 4
Save trigger SIGNAL : signal MSUREQ
ABTRQ : unexpected abnormal torque is detected
SV ALM : servo alarm
SP ALM : spindle alarm
The machine state history screen is composed by the following screens:
(A) Machine state history list screen
(B) Machine state history CNC data screen
(C) Machine state history operation history screen
The machine state history list screen is displayed by the following procedures.
1. Press function key .
2. Continuous menu key [+] several times to display the soft key [MACHIN HISTORY]
3. Press the soft key [MACHIN HISTORY].
4. Press the soft key [LIST], and machine state history list screen is displayed.
5. Press the soft key [CNC DATA], and CNC data screen is displayed.
6. Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTORY] to display the operation history screen is displayed.
- 2613 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
20.1.8.1 Machine State History List Screen
The machine state history list screen is composed by the following area.
(1) Common area
(2) History list area
(3) Detail data area
Common Detail data
area area
History
list area
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (a) Machine State History List Screen
In common area, common information such as the detect time and non-save number of the selection
history number is displayed.
In history list area, the detect time of all the histories saved in CNC is displayed in the list.
In detail data area, the detail data of the selection history number is displayed.
The following kind of detail data can be displayed.
(a) Signal information
(b) CNC information
(c) Operation history information
These kinds can be selected by cursor key or .
- 2614 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Signal Information
History List
MDI Key
MDI Key Fig. 20.1.8.1 (b) Machine State History List Screen (List + Signal)
CNC Information
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (c) Machine State History List Screen (List + CNC) MDI Key
MDI Key
Operation History
Information
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (d) Machine State History List Screen (List + Operation History)
- 2615 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Common Information
Common information is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Detect Time Non-Save Number Save trigger
Path Number (Multi Path System)
Displayed History Number
Total History Number
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (e) Common Area
(1) Displayed history number
The selected history number is displayed.
(2) Total history number
The total number of machine state histories saved in CNC is displayed.
(3) Detect time
The time that the machine state history save request signal MSUSRQ<G0534.6> becomes “1” and
the history was saved is displayed.
(4) Path number
In the case of multi path system, the path number of the displayed history is displayed.
(5) Non-Save Number
Non-Save Number is displayed.
When Non-Save Number is 0, it is not displayed on screen.
The maximum value of Non-Save Number is 65535.
- 2616 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
History List information
The history list information is displayed in the area in the left half of the machine state history list screen.
If Non-Save Number is not 0, the color of the character is changing purple and “*” is displayed.
History Number Detect Time
Non-Save Number
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (f) History List Area
Operation in History List Area
(1) Cursor Key and Page Change Key
The cursor is moved up and down by the cursor key and page change key ,
and the displayed history number can be changed.
(2) Soft Key [REC TOP] and [REC END]
If the soft key [REC TOP] is pressed, the oldest history number is displayed.
If the soft key [REC END] is pressed, the latest history number is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [F OUTPUT]
When the emergency stop state or EDIT mode is entered and the soft key [F OUTPUT] is pressed,
the following soft keys are displayed.
When any file name is input and the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, all the histories saved in CNC are
output.
If no name is input and the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, file name is “MSRHSTRY.TXT”
Signal Information
The signal information is displayed in the area in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The signal information of selected number history is displayed.
- 2617 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (g) Signal Information
The content of the display and the operation are similar to the machine state monitoring screen.
Refer to the section, "Monitoring of PMC signals" and "With Multi-Sensor Unit" in this chapter.
CNC Information
The CNC information is displayed in the area in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The CNC information of selected number history is displayed.
Machine Position Absolute Position
Feedrate
Spindle Speed
Program
Block Number
Mode
Modal
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (h) CNC Information
(1) Machine Position
Machine position is displayed.
When the number of control axis is six or more, if the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is pressed then the
axis since the sixth axis is displayed.
- 2618 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
(2) Absolute Position
Absolute position is displayed.
When the number of control axis is six or more, if the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is pressed then the
axis since the sixth axis is displayed.
(3) Feedrate
Feedrate is displayed.
(4) Spindle Speed
Spindle speed is displayed.
When the number of spindle is two or more, if the soft key [SPINDLE SWITCH] is pressed then the
spindle since the second spindle is displayed.
(5) Mode
Mode is displayed.
(6) Modal
Modal is displayed.
The modal that can be displayed is M, S, T, and B.
Operation in CNC Information
(1) Soft Key [AXIS SWITCH]
When the number of control axis is six or more, the soft key [AXIS SWITCH] is displayed.
If this soft key is pressed, the positions of the sixth and after axes are displayed in the machine and
absolute coordinates.
(2) Soft Key [SPINDLE SWITCH]
When the number of spindle is two or more, the soft key [SPINDLE SWITCH] is displayed.
If this soft key is pressed, the speed of the second and after spindles is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [PATH SWITCH]
When the number of paths are two or more, the soft key [PATH SWITCH] is displayed.
If this soft key is pressed, the displayed path number is changed.
Operation History Information
The operation history information is displayed in the right half of the machine state history list screen.
The operation history until the time that the selected history was saved is displayed.
The operation history is saved about 400 MDI keys.
- 2619 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Total Operation History
Displayed Top Operation
Number
History Number
Operation History
Fig. 20.1.8.1 (i) Operation History Information
Operation in Operation History Information
(1) Soft Key [TOP]
The oldest operation history is displayed.
(2) Soft Key [BOTTOM]
The newest operation history is displayed.
(3) Soft Key [Prev Page]
The previous page is displayed.
(4) Soft Key [Next Page]
The next page is displayed.
20.1.8.2 Machine State History CNC Data Screen
In the machine state history CNC data screen, the common information, the signal information and CNC
information are displayed together.
If the soft key [CNC DATA] is pressed, the machine state history CNC data screen is displayed.
- 2620 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Fig. 20.1.8.2 CNC Data Screen
For each information, refer to the section, "Machine State History List Screen" in this chapter.
20.1.8.3 Machine State History Operation History Screen
In the machine state history operation history screen, the common information and operation history
information are displayed together.
If the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is pressed, the machine state history operation history screen is
displayed.
The operation history information is displayed in the full screen.
- 2621 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Fig. 20.1.8.3 Operation History Screen
For the displayed contents and the operation, refer to the section, "Machine State History List Screen".
20.1.8.4 Output CNC Information
When the soft key [F OUTPUT] is pressed in the machine state history list screen, all history saved in
CNC is output.
The composition of the output file is as follows.
HEADER
HISTORY DATA 1
HISTORY DATA 2
HISTORY DATA N
Fig. 20.1.8.4 (a) The composition of the output file
- 2622 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Header
In the header, total history number and file information is output. The file information is for maintenance.
NUMBER OF HISTORY : 010 ← Total history number
FILE INFORMATION : 1-100-10-9 ← File Information (For maintenance)
History Data
In the history data, history number, detect time, Non-Save Number, Multi-Sensor Unit data, PMC signal,
CNC data, operation history and auxiliary information are output.
(1) History number, detect time and Non-Save Number.
The history number and the detect time are output as follows.
[HISTORY NO.001]-------------------------------- ← History Number
DETECT TIME : 2010/03/10 21:15:07 ← Detect Time
NON-SAVE NO. : 00025 ← Non-Save Number
(2) Multi-Sensor Unit Data
The Multi-Sensor Unit data is output as follows. In the case of the plural Multi-Sensor Units, all
Multi-Sensor Unit data are output.
MULTI SENSOR UNIT DATA :
<MULTI SENSOR UNIT NO.1>
SHOCK1 X(X00000) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK1 Y(X00002) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK1 Z(X00004) : 29.9 [G]
SHOCK2 X(X00006) : 1.9 [G]
SHOCK2 Y(X00008) : 0.0 [G]
SHOCK2 Z(X00010) : 0.0 [G]
COMMON1 (X00012) : 0 [-]
COMMON2 (X00014) : 0 [-]
TEMP1 (X00016) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP2 (X00018) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP3 (X00020) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP4 (X00022) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP5 (X00024) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP6 (X00026) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP7 (X00028) : 0.0 [C]
TEMP8 (X00030) : 0.0 [C]
(Y00000) : -30656
(Y00002) : 0
(Y00004) : 0
(Y00006) : 0
(Y00008) : 16
(Y00010) : 0
(Y00012) : 0
(Y00014) : 0
(Y00016) : 0
(Y00018) : 0
(Y00020) : 0
(Y00022) : 0
(Y00024) : 0
(Y00026) : 0
(Y00028) : 0
(Y00030) : 0
- 2623 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
(3) PMC Signal
The PMC signal is output as follows.
Single PMC System
PMC SIGNAL DATA :
X00010 0x00
Y00020 0x00
G00030 0x00
****** ****
Multi PMC System:
PMC SIGNAL DATA :
1:X00010 0x00
1:Y00020 0x00
1:G00030 0x00
****** ****
(4) CNC Data
The CNC data is output as follows. In the case of multi path system all path data are output.
CNC DATA :
<<MACHINE>>
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
<<ABSOLUTE>>
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
<<FEED RATE>>
F 0
<<SPINDLE SPEED>>
S 0
<<PROGRAM>>
//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O123
<<BLOCK>>
0
<<MODE>>
MEM
<<MODAL>>
M 0
S 0
T 0
B 0
(5) Operation History
The operation history is output as follows.
OPERATION HISTORY :
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:13
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:14
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:15
MDI 01_[RIGHT F] 12:02:15
MDI 01_[SOFT HF7] 12:02:16
- 2624 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
MDI 01_<Cursor Down> 12:02:26
MDI 01_<Cursor Down> 12:02:26
：
(6) Auxiliary Information
The auxiliary information is output. This information is for maintenance.
AUX INFO :
0-10
Reading of CNC information by FOCAS2/C language executor
Information saved in CNC can be read by the following functions of the FOCAS2 library and the C
language library of C language executor.
Table. 20.1.8.4
Function Name Function
cnc_upstart4 Beginning of NC data read (4)
cnc_upload4 NC data read (4)
cnc_upend4 End of NC data read (4)
When cnc_upstart4 is called specifying 78 for argument type, CNC information can be read.
A basic procedure of reading CNC information by cnc_upstart4, cnc_upload4, and cnc_upend4 function
is as shown in fig.20.1.8.4(b).
Please refer to the section, “The function specification” of FANUC FOCAS1/2 library specifications
(FWLIB32.HTM) included in “FOCAS1/2 library disk” for details of cnc_upstart4, cnc_upload4, and
cnc_upend4 function of the FOCAS2 library.
Please refer to the section, “the CNC/PMC window library” in C language Executor programming manual
(B-63943JA-3) for details of cnc_upstart4, the cnc_upload4, and cnc_upend4 function of the C language
library of C language executor.
- 2625 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
start
start reading NC data
cnc_upstart4(type=78)
read NC data
EW_BUFFER? YES
NO
YES EW_RESET?
NO
NO EW_OK?
YES
last data=’%’?
YES
end reading NC data
cnc_upstart4
end
Fig.20.1.8.4 (b) Reading data
20.1.9 Caution
To save CNC information for eight or more days, so number of saving information each day is restricted.
The history can be saved only up to the potential saving number. (Refer to 20.1.4.1)
So, in the ladder program, please judge trouble as accurately as possible.
Do not save CNC information at the time when trouble does not occur in order to decrease the load of
CNC.
At shipment of CNC, Potential Saving Number is 30.
CNC information might not be able to be saved correctly immediately before the power failure. So in the
system that can detect power failure, don’t save the CNC information when the power failure occurs.
- 2626 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
20.2 SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION
20.2.1 Outline
When something trouble occurs with machine, servos and spindles waveform data before and after the
trouble is automatically output to Data Server, which is sampled by Trouble diagnosis function.
Since long-termed data is automatically saved, it is easier to detect the cause of the trouble.
CNC always samples waveform data.
If something trouble occurs with machine, CNC detects the trouble through alarms or signals and output
waveform data before and after the trouble to Data Server automatically (Fig.20.2.1 (a)).
Always sampling
waveform data
Detecting trouble Outputting waveform
data automatically
through alarms or signals
Trouble
Occurs
Data Server
Fig.20.2.1 (a) Outline of Servo / spindle waveform data output function
NOTE
This function is an optional function.
To use this function, the both options for "Data Server function" and this function
are required.
20.2.2 Waveform Data
This function can output several kinds of data listed in tables below.
Each data can be sampled for up to 40 seconds summing up before and after trouble.
Table20.2.2 (a) Data list for servo motors
Data (Unit)
Accumulated command pulse (pulse)
Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse)
Position error (pulse)
Reference counter (pulse)
Actual speed (1/min)
Torque command (%)
- 2627 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Data (Unit)
Head simulation (%)
Motor current (A)
Disturbance level (%)
Arbitrary data
Effective current (%)
AMR data
Arbitrary data 2
Table20.2.2 (b) Data list for spindle motors
Data (Unit)
Actual motor speed (1/min)
Load meter (%)
Position error (pulse)
Torque command (%)
Motor current (A)
Whole data of all axes can be output, though output data can be selected by parameters.
NOTE
The upper limit of sampling time cannot be extended even if output data is
reduced.
20.2.3 Sampling
It is necessary to always sample waveform data in order to use this function.
Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal TDDM<G0589.0> starts the sampling.
Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal clears latched data of Trouble diagnosis function and changes
the state of the function from “LATCHED” to “SAMPLING”.
Output of waveform data to Data Server starts when sampling after trouble finishes, which is specified by
parameter No.24320.
It is necessary to start sampling again by trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal after outputting of
waveform data.
Weather the output finishes or not is indicated by Waveform data transfer signal WVTRNS<F0578.0>.
Restriction
When this function is effective, the state of Trouble diagnosis function, “SAMPLING” or “LATCHED”,
is common for all paths, though the state can be different for each path in ordinary Trouble diagnosis
function. Therefore, Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal starts sampling of all paths simultaneously
and trouble in some path stops sampling of all paths.
- 2628 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
NOTE
1 Latched data of Trouble diagnosis function and waveform data sampled by this
function is cleared when sampling restarts after trouble.
2 Though Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal is for each path, this function
uses only the signal of 1st path.
3 Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal is ignored when SV or SP alarm occurs
in some path. Start sampling by Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal after
confirming that no SV or SP alarm occurs in all paths.
4 The state of sampling (the state of Trouble diagnosis function) does not change
even if power is turned off and on. Therefore, it is necessary to start sampling
after power is turned on if sampling was stopped (the state of Trouble diagnosis
function was “LATCHED”) before power was turned off. Oppositely, sampling is
started automatically after power is turned on if sampling was active (the state of
Trouble diagnosis function was “SAMPLING”) before power was turned off.
20.2.4 Detect Trouble
SV or SP alarm changes the state of Trouble diagnosis function into “LATCHED” when the state is
“SAMPLING”. At the same time, CNC regards that something trouble occurs with machine and the
sequence of outputting waveform data of servos and spindles to Data Server is started.
This function makes it possible to detect trouble by changing Trouble diagnosis data latching signal
TDDL<G0589.1> from “0” to “1” as well as SV and SP alarms. Weather trouble is detected by Trouble
diagnosis data latching signal or not is specified by bit 1 (SPT) of parameter No.24318.
NOTE
1 Though Trouble diagnosis data latching signal is for each path, this function uses
the signal of 1st path.
2 Data of Trouble diagnosis function is latched and the state changes from
“SAMPLING” to “LATCHED” when trouble is detected by Trouble diagnosis data
latching signal.
3 Sampling continues for a while after trouble is detected, which can be specified
by parameter No.24320.
4 Trouble is not detected and this function is not active when the state of Trouble
diagnosis function is “LATCHED”.
20.2.5 Sequence when Trouble Occurs
Servos and spindles waveform data is sampled with constant period and, if trouble occurs, data before and
after the trouble specified by parameter Nos.24319 and 24320 is output to Data Server. The output is
started automatically if sampling after the trouble finishes, which is specified by parameter No.24320.
Waveform data transfer signal WVTRNS<F0578.0> is “1” between the occurrence of the trouble and the
end of the output.
Sequence when trouble occurs is shown in Fig.20.2.5 (a) and Fig.20.2.5 (b) below.
- 2629 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
Output data before and after
trouble to Data Server
Sampling
data
Trouble diagnosis
data latching signal
TDDL<G0589.1>
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Trouble diagnosis
data monitoring Longer than 32ms
signal
TDDM<G0589.0>
Time
Detect trouble Start the output
Restart sampling
（alarm occurs）
Fig.20.2.5 (a) Sequence when trouble occurs (when the trouble is detected by the signal)
Output data before and after
trouble to Data Server
Sampling
data
SV or SP alarm
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Trouble diagnosis
data monitoring Longer than 32ms
signal
TDDM<G0589.0>
Time
Detect trouble Start the output
Restart sampling
（alarm occurs）
NOTE: SV or SP alarms does not release even if Waveform data transfer signal changes into “1”.
Fig.20.2.5 (b) Sequence when trouble occurs (when the trouble is detected by SV or SP alarm)
- 2630 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
NOTE
1 Make it impossible to turn off power during Waveform data transfer signal is “1”
in order to output data normally.
2 Sampling cannot be started when Waveform data transfer signal is “1” or SV/SP
alarm occurs. In addition, Trouble diagnosis function and this function are not
effective in such cases.
20.2.6 Data Output
Output of waveform data to Data Server is started automatically if trouble is detected and sampling after
the trouble finishes, which is specified by parameter No.24320.
“OUTPUT” is blinking at Status bar during the output.
The data is output to “SVSPWAVE” folder below Data Folder on Data Server regardless of I/O devices
specified in parameter Nos.20-23.
Make all paths in alarm states before the output, which is required to start the output to Data Server (See 0
in NOTE below).
Waveform data transfer failure signal WVTF<F0578.1> is “1” if the output fails because of, for examples,
no data Folder existing on Data Server, memory shortage, not in alarm states, and so on. After the cause
of failure is resolved, setting Waveform data re-output signal WVROP<G0589.2> from “0” to “1” restarts
the output in such cases.
Waveform data transfer failure signal is “0” in the following cases:
1) When the re-output finishes normally.
2) When the next sampling is started.
3) When power is turned off.
Sequence of normal output is shown in Fig.20.2.6 (a) and Fig.20.2.6 (b), and that of output failure is
shown in Fig.20.2.6 (c) and Fig.20.2.6 (d).
Trouble diagnosis
data latching signal
TDDL<G589.1>
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Waveform data
（remained 0）
output failure signal
WVTF<F0578.1>
Waveform data
（remained 0）
re-output signal
WVROP<G0589.2>
Time
Finish output
Detect trouble
Fig.20.2.6 (a) Sequence of normal output (when the trouble is detected by the signal)
- 2631 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
SV or SP alarm
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Waveform data
（remained 0）
output failure signal
WVTF<F0578.1>
Waveform data
（remained 0）
re-output signal
WVROP<G0589.2>
Time
Finish output
Detect trouble
NOTE: SV or SP alarms does not release even if Waveform data transfer signal changes into “1”.
Fig.20.2.6 (b) Sequence of normal output (when the trouble is detected by SV or SP alarm)
Trouble diagnosis
data latching signal
TDDL<G0589.1>
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Waveform data
output failure signal
WVTF<F0578.1>
Waveform data
re-output signal
WVROP<G0589.2>
（Resolve the cause of failure）
Time
Detect trouble
Finish output
Output failure
Start re-output
Fig.20.2.6 (c) Sequence when output fails (when the trouble is detected by the signal)
- 2632 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
SV or SP alarm
Waveform data
transfer signal
WVTRNS
<F0578.0>
Waveform data
output failure signal
WVTF<F0578.1>
Waveform data
re-output signal
WVROP<G0589.2>
（Resolve the cause of failure）
Time
Detect trouble
Finish output
Output failure
Start re-output
NOTE: SV or SP alarms does not release even if Waveform data transfer signal changes into “1”.
Fig.20.2.6 (d) Sequence when output fails (when the trouble is detected by SV or SP alarm)
NOTE
1 Make all paths in alarm states by external alarms before the output starts if
trouble is detected by Trouble diagnosis data latching signal (TDDL).
2 Remain alarm states during the output.
3 Output of waveform data cannot be stopped by reset operations.
4 It is impossible to output other data by screen operations during the data output.
Warning message “THE MACHINE IS UNDER USE” is displayed if an output
operation is made during the data output.
5 Screen hard copy cannot be used during the output. BG alarm “HARD COPY
REJECTED DURING OUTPUT” occurs if screen hard copy is requested by a
MDI operation or a signal. In the same way, EW_REJECT is returned if screen
hard copy is requested from a FOCAS2 function.
6 Operations listed below are accepted after the output finishes if they are
operated during the data output:
- Changing the active path (only for display)
- Saving alarm history (Time when the save is done is saved as the occurrence
time of the alarm.)
- Writing PMC data on FROM
- Setting Memory protection signal KEYP<G0046.0>
- Changing displayed language
7 It takes several 10 seconds or a few minutes to output whole data.
8 Re-output makes a new file involving whole data. The old defective file is
overwritten by the new file.
9 Reserve enough area on Data Server to output waveform data by transferring
files in “SVSPWAVE” folder to host computers regularly because waveform data
is always output automatically if trouble is detected.
Diagnosis No.4600 will help the data transfer.
- 2633 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
20.2.7 Output File Format
Waveform data is output in CSV format.
Filename
Output filenames are in the format “SVSPW_yyyymmddHHMMSS.CSV”.
The part of “yyyymmddHHMMSS” means date when trouble occurs.
- yyyy:year (2000-2999)
- mm: month (01-12)
- dd: day (01-31)
- HH: hour (00-23)
- MM: minute (00-59)
- SS: second (00-59)
File format
File format is as shown below.
%
-------------------------------------------------------------
Wave Data of Trouble Diagnosis ←Title
-------------------------------------------------------------
Trouble Occurs: November 11 2011 at 14:00:00 [ = 30000ms in data] ←Time when trouble occurs
Trigger : Signal (G589.1) ON ←How to detect trouble
-------------------------------------------------------------
SV1 SV1 … SV2 SV2 … ←Axis number
TIME COM. PULSE F.B. PULSE … COM. PULSE F.B. PULSE … ←Data name
[ms] [pulse] [pulse] … [pulse] [pulse] … ←Data unit
0 50 50 … 50 50 … ←Data
4 50 50 … 50 50 …
8 50 50 … 50 50 …
12 50 50 … 50 50 …
… … …… … ……
%
20.2.8 Restriction
Sampling of this function stops when sampling of Waveform diagnosis function is active.
Note that Servos and spindles waveform data is not output if something trouble occurs during sampling of
Waveform diagnosis function is active.
Signal
Trouble diagnosis data monitoring signal TDDM<Gn589.0>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Clears latched data of Trouble diagnosis function and changes the state from
“LATCHED” to “SAMPLING”. In addition, sampling of all paths starts in Servo /
spindle waveform data output function.
- 2634 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
[Operation] When this signal is set from “0” to “1”, latched data of Trouble diagnosis function is
cleared and the state changes from “LATCHED” to “SAMPLING”. In addition, sampling
of waveform data starts. Note that this signal is ignored when Wave data transfer signal
WVTRNS is “1”. Since this signal is also ignored when SV or SP alarm occurs, set this
signal after resolving the causes of alarms.
NOTE
Only the signal of 1st path is effective when Servo / spindle
waveform data output function is effective.
Trouble diagnosis data latching signal TDDL<Gn589.1>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Latches data of Trouble diagnosis function and changes the state from “SAMPLING” to
“LATCHED”. In addition, sequence of outputting waveform data starts in Servo / spindle
waveform data output function.
[Operation] When this signal is set from “0” to “1”, data of Trouble diagnosis function is latched and
the state changes from “SAMPLING” to “LATCHED”. In addition, sequence of
outputting waveform data starts. Note that this signal is ignored when the state of Trouble
diagnosis function is “LATCHED”.
NOTE
Only the signal of 1st path is effective when Servo / spindle
waveform data output function is effective.
Waveform data re-output signal WVROP<G0589.2>
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Starts re-output of waveform data if output of servos and spindles waveform data fails
because of shortage of memory and so on.
[Operation] When this signal is set from “0” to “1”, re-output of waveform data is started. Start
re-output by this signal after resolving causes of output failure. Note that this signal is
ignored when Waveform data transfer failure signal WVTF is “0”.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn589 WVROP TDDL TDDM
Waveform data transfer signal WVTRNS<F0578.0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that trouble was detected and that output of waveform data does not finish in
Servo / spindle waveform data output function. Note that this signal is “1” even if output
of waveform data does not run during sampling after the trouble.
[Operation] This signal is “1” when output of waveform data does not finish.
This signal is “0” when output of waveform data finishes.
Waveform data transfer failure signal WVTF<F0578.1>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that output of waveform data failed in Servo / spindle waveform data output
function. Re-output of the data can be started by Waveform data re-output signal when
this signal is “1”.
[Operation] This signal is “1” when output of waveform data failed.
This signal is “0” in the following cases:
1. Output of waveform data was normal.
2. Sampling of waveform data was restarted.
- 2635 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
3. Power was turned off and on.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn578 WVTF WVTRNS
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24318 SPT WDT
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
#0 WDT Servo / spindle waveform data output function is
0: Effective.
1: Not effective.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Servo / spindle waveform
data output function.
#1 SPT In Trouble diagnosis function and Servo / spindle waveform data output function, Trouble
diagnosis data monitoring signal and Trouble diagnosis data latching signal are
0: Ignored.
1: Not ignored.
24319 Sampling time of waveform data before trouble
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] second
[Valid data range] 0 to 40
24320 Sampling time of waveform data after trouble
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] second
[Valid data range] 0 to 40
Set sampling times before and after trouble in Servo / spindle waveform data output
function.
Specify the sampling times so that the sum of them is within 40 seconds because room for
the buffer is limited. Note that data is not sampled as specified by these parameters if the
sum exceeds 40 seconds.
The following is an example when the sum exceeds 40 seconds:
When 30 seconds is specified for the sampling time before trouble and 20 seconds is
specified for the sampling time after trouble, waveform data of 30 seconds before trouble
and of 10 seconds after trouble is obtained.
- 2636 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
When 50 seconds is specified for the sampling time before trouble and 10 seconds is
specified for the sampling time after trouble, waveform data of only 40 seconds before
trouble is obtained.
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Servo / spindle waveform
data output function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24321 MCR HTS TCM ASD REF PER FBP CMP
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Servo / spindle waveform
data output function.
#0 CMP In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, accumulated command pulse of a servo
axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#1 FBP In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, accumulated feedback pulse of a servo
axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#2 PER In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, position error of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#3 REF In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, reference counter of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#4 ASD In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, actual speed of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#5 TCM In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, torque command of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#6 HTS In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, heat simulation of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#7 MCR In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, motor current of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
- 2637 -
20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION B-64603EN-1/01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24322 AR2 AMR EFC AR1 DLV
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit axis
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Servo / spindle waveform
data output function.
#0 DLV In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, disturbance level of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#1 AR1 In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, arbitrary data 1 of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#2 EFC In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, effective current of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#3 AMR In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, AMR data of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#4 AR2 In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, arbitrary data 2 of a servo axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24323 MCR TCM PER LDM SPD
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit spindle
NOTE
This parameter requires the option of Servo / spindle waveform
data output function.
#0 SPD In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, actual motor speed of a spindle axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#1 LDM In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, load meter of a spindle axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#2 PER In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, position error of a spindle axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
- 2638 -
B-64603EN-1/01 20.MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
#3 TCM In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, torque command of a spindle axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
#4 MCR In Servo / spindle waveform data output function, motor current of a spindle axis is
0: Output.
1: Not output.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis 4600 Counter of output of waveform data
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] 1 time
[Valid data range] 0-255
The state of output of servos and spindles waveform data can be displayed.
Power-on clears this value to 0 and then 1 is added when output starts. In addition, 1 is
added again when output finishes normally. Therefore, odd number means that output is
active and even number means that output is not active.
Note that this value changes as follows if output fails:
1 1 is added when output starts.
2 1 is subtracted when output fails.
3 1 is added when output starts again.
4 1 is added when output finishes normally.
NOTE
1 This value is not cleared even if power is turned off.
2 This value is counted up from 0 again if this value exceeds 255.
- 2639 -
APPENDIX
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES
Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows:
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool
F0000~ Y000~
[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]
CNC G0000~ X000~
Path 1 F0000~ Y000~
PMC Machine tool
G1000~
Path 2 F1000~
[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]
CNC Signal PMC
I/F
1st
machine Path 1
G0000~ G0000~
group for X000~
machining F0000~ F0000~ I/O device
1st
PMC for 1st
G1000~ G1000~ Y000~ machine
Path 2
for
machining F1000~ F1000~
2nd X000~
G2000~ G0000~
machine Path 1 2nd I/O device
group for loader F2000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 2nd
machine
3rd X000~
G3000~ G0000~
machine Path 2 3rd I/O device
group for loader F3000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for 3rd
machine
- 2643 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an independent signal area. The F,
G, X, and Y signal addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other hand, the
F and G signal addresses from the viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses used in programming of each
ladder are different from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both lathe system (T series) and machining center system (M series) are described, some
signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown below. This means either
lathe system or machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for lathe system and
lower part is for machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON
M series
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates ROVLP is provided only for the lathe system (T series) while the other
signals for both the lathe system (T series) and machining system (M series).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 2]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for machining center system (M series) only.
- 2644 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal is
*ESP<X0008.4>, *ESP<X0008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively.
2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right
of a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1 on PMC side) : #1
- Path type (for path 2 on PMC side) : #2
- Path type (for path 3 on PMC side) : #3
In addition, #1, #2 or #3 attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided only
for path 1, 2, or 3 on PMC side, respectively.
- Path type : #P
- Controlled axis type : #SV
- Spindle type : #SP
In G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, or #SP attached to a signal
indicates the signal is provided for each path on CNC side, each control axis on
CNC side, or each spindle on CNC side, respectively.
- PMC axis control group type: #PX
#PX attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided for each PMC axis
control group.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
5 For a signal of controlled axis type, when the number of axes eceeds eight for
each path, set parameter No. 3021 to address this situation.
- 2645 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
MT → CNC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0000
X0001
X0002
X0003
X0004 ESKIP -MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 -MIT1#1 +MIT1#1
T series SKIP #1
SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
X0004 ESKIP
SKIP #1 #1
M series SKIP5 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1
SKIP6 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
X0005
X0006
#2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
X0007 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
X0008 *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP)
#1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
X0009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
#3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
X0010 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
X0011 ESKIP#3 -MIT2#3 +MIT2#3 -MIT1#3 +MIT1#3
#3
T series SKIP
SKIP6 #3 SKIP5 #3 SKIP4 #3 SKIP3 #3 SKIP2 #3 SKIP8 #3 SKIP7 #3
X0011 ESKIP#3
#3
M series SKIP SKIP5#3 SKIP4#3 SKIP3 #3
SKIP6 #3 SKIP2 #3 SKIP8 #3 SKIP7 #3
X0012
X0013 ESKIP#2 -MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 -MIT1#2 +MIT1#2
#2
T series SKIP
SKIP6 #2 SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
X0013 ESKIP#2
#2
M series SKIP SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2
SKIP6 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
- 2646 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
PMC → CNC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0#P
Gn001 ED15#P ED14#P ED13#P ED12#P ED11#P ED10#P ED9#P ED8#P
Gn002 ESTB#P EA6#P EA5#P EA4#P EA3#P EA2#P EA1#P EA0#P
Gn003
Gn004 MFIN5#P MFIN4#P MFIN3#P MFIN2#P FIN#P
Gn005 BFIN#P AFL#P TFIN#P SFIN#P MFIN#P
Gn006 SKIPP#P OVC#P *ABSM
#P
SRN#P
Gn007 RLSOT
#P
EXLM#P *FLWU
#P
RLSOT3#P ST#P STLK#P
RVS#P
Gn008 ERS#P RRW#P *SP#P *ESP#P *BSL#P *CSL#P *IT#P
Gn009 PN16#P PN8#P PN4#P PN2#P PN1#P
Gn010 *JV7#P *JV6#P *JV5#P *JV4#P *JV3#P *JV2#P *JV1#P *JV0#P
Gn011 *JV15#P *JV14#P *JV13#P *JV12#P *JV11#P *JV10#P *JV9#P *JV8#P
Gn012 *FV7#P *FV6#P *FV5#P *FV4#P *FV3#P *FV2#P *FV1#P *FV0#P
Gn013 *AFV7#P *AFV6#P *AFV5#P *AFV4#P *AFV3#P *AFV2#P *AFV1#P *AFV0#P
Gn014 ROV2#P ROV1#P
Gn015
Gn016
F1D#P
Gn017
Gn018 HS2D#P HS2C#P HS2B#P HS2A#P HS1D#P HS1C#P HS1B#P HS1A#P
Gn019 RT#P MP4#P MP2#P MP1#P HS3D#P HS3C#P HS3B#P HS3A#P
Gn020 HS4D#P HS4C#P HS4B#P HS4A#P
- 2647 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn021 SVR08I SVR07I SVR06I SVR05I SVR04I SVR03I SVR02I SVR01I
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn022 SVSP SVGN DFSYC SVR12I SVR11I SVR10I SVR09I
#P #P #P #P #P
Gn023 ALNGH RGHTH NOINPS HREV HNDLF
Gn024 EPN7#P EPN6#P EPN5#P EPN4#P EPN3#P EPN2#P EPN1#P EPN0#P
Gn025 EPNS#P EPN13
#P
EPN12
#P
EPN11
#P
EPN10
#P
EPN9#P EPN8#P
#P
Gn026 *SSTP4#SP SWS4 PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#P
Gn027 CON#P *SSTP3#SP *SSTP2#SP *SSTP1#SP SWS3
#P
SWS2
#P
SWS1
#P
Gn028 PC2SLC#P SPSTPA#SP *SCPFA#SP *SUCPFA#SP GR2#SP GR1#SP
Gn029 *SSTP#P SOR#P SAR#P GR32#SP GR31#SP GR22#SP GR21#SP
Gn030 SOV7#P SOV6#P SOV5#P SOV4#P SOV3#P SOV2#P SOV1#P SOV0#P
Gn031 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P GR42#SP GR41#SP M3R#P
Gn032 R08I#SP R07I#SP R06I#SP R05I#SP R04I#SP R03I#SP R02I#SP R01I#SP
Gn033 SIND#SP SSIN#SP SGN#SP R12I#SP R11I#SP R10I#SP R09I#SP
Gn034 R08I2#SP R07I2#SP R06I2#SP R05I2#SP R04I2#SP R03I2#SP R02I2#SP R01I2#SP
Gn035 SIND2
#SP
SSIN2
#SP
SGN2
#SP
R12I2#SP R11I2#SP R10I2#SP R09I2#SP
Gn036 R08I3#SP R07I3#SP R06I3#SP R05I3#SP R04I3#SP R03I3#SP R02I3#SP R01I3#SP
Gn037 SIND3
#SP
SSIN3
#SP
SGN3
#SP
R12I3#SP R11I3#SP R10I3#SP R09I3#SP
Gn038 *BECLP#P *BEUCP#P
SDPC
#P
SPPHS
#P
SPSYC
#P
SBRT#P *PLSST
#P
Gn039
WOSET#P PRC#P S2TLS#P
Gn040
Gn041 HS2ID#P HS2IC#P HS2IB#P HS2IA#P HS1ID#P HS1IC#P HS1IB#P HS1IA#P
Gn042 DMMC#P HS3ID#P HS3IC#P HS3IB#P HS3IA#P
- 2648 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Gn043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1#P
Gn044 MLK#P BDT1#P
Gn045 BDT9#P BDT8#P BDT7#P BDT6#P BDT5#P BDT4#P BDT3#P BDT2#P
Gn046 DRN#P KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK#P KEYP
#P
Gn047 TL128 TL64#P TL32#P TL16#P TL08#P TL04#P TL02#P TL01#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP LFCIV TL512 TL256
Gn049 *TLV7#P *TLV6#P *TLV5#P *TLV4#P *TLV3#P *TLV2#P *TLV1#P *TLV0#P
Gn050 *TLV9#P *TLV8#P
Gn051
Gn052
*CDZ#P SMZ#P #P #P #P
Gn053 ROVLP UINT TMRON
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024
#P #P
Gn058 EXOUT EXSTP EXINP#P
#P #P
Gn059 NSYNCA#P TRRTN TRESC
#P
Gn060 *TSB
RGTSP4#SP RGTSP3#SP RGTSP2#SP RGTSP1#SP #P #P
Gn061 SYSS RGTAP
Gn062 RTNT#P *CRTOF
#P #P #P
Gn063 NMWT #P NOZAGC#P SLSPB SLSPA NOWT HEAD
INFD
#P #P
Gn064 ESRSYC#P SLPCB SLPCA
- 2649 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn065
#P
Gn066 EKSET RTRCT ENBKY IGNVRY#P
Gn067 HCREQ HCABT EGBS#P MCHK#P MMOD#P
Gn068
Gn069
Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA#SP SRVA
#SP
CTH1A#SP CTH2A#SP TLMHA#SP TLMLA#SP
#SP
Gn071 RCHA RSLA#SP INTGA
#SP
SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA
#SP
ARSTA#SP
#SP #SP
Gn072 RCHHGA#SP MFNHGA#SP INCMDA#SP OVRA DEFMDA#SP NRROA#SP ROTAA#SP INDXA
Gn073 MPOFA#SP SLVA#SP MORCMA#SP
Gn074 MRDYB#SP ORCMB#SP SFRB#SP SRVB
#SP
CTH1B#SP CTH2B#SP TLMHB#SP TLMLB#SP
Gn075 RCHB
#SP
RSLB#SP INTGB
#SP
SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB
#SP
ARSTB#SP
#SP #SP
Gn076 RCHHGB#SP MFNHGB#SP INCMDB#SP OVRB DEFMDB#SP NRROB#SP ROTAB#SP INDXB
Gn077 MPOFB#SP SLVB#SP MORCMB#SP
Gn078 SH07A#SP SH06A#SP SH05A#SP SH04A#SP SH03A#SP SH02A#SP SH01A#SP SH00A#SP
Gn079 SH14A#SP SH13A#SP SH12A#SP SH11A#SP SH10A#SP SH09A#SP SH08A#SP
Gn080 SH07B#SP SH06B#SP SH05B#SP SH04B#SP SH03B#SP SH02B#SP SH01B#SP SH00B#SP
Gn081 SH14B#SP SH13B#SP SH12B#SP SH11B#SP SH10B#SP SH09B#SP SH08B#SP
Gn082 EUI07#P EUI06#P EUI05#P EUI04#P EUI03#P EUI02#P EUI01#P EUI00#P
Gn083 EUI15#P EUI14#P EUI13#P EUI12#P EUI11#P EUI10#P EUI09#P EUI08#P
Gn084
Gn085
Gn086 -Ja#P +Ja#P -Jg#P +Jg#P
- 2650 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P
Gn087 MP42 MP41 MP32 MP31 MP22 MP21#P
Gn088 HS4ID#P HS4IC#P HS4IB#P HS4IA#P HNDMP#P
Gn089
#P
G2Y#P G2Z#P G2X#P #P #P #P
G2SLC G2RVY G2RVZ G2RVX
Gn090
Gn091
Gn092
Gn093
Gn094
Gn095
Gn096 HROV#P *HROV6#P *HROV5#P *HROV4#P *HROV3#P *HROV2#P *HROV1#P *HROV0#P
Gn097
Gn098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
Gn099
Gn100 +J8#SV +J7#SV +J6#SV +J5#SV +J4#SV +J3#SV +J2#SV +J1#SV
Gn101 *+ED28#SV *+ED27#SV *+ED26#SV *+ED25#SV *+ED24#SV *+ED23#SV *+ED22#SV *+ED21#SV
Gn102 -J8#SV -J7#SV -J6#SV -J5#SV -J4#SV -J3#SV -J2#SV -J1#SV
Gn103 *-ED28#SV *-ED27#SV *-ED26#SV *-ED25#SV *-ED24#SV *-ED23#SV *-ED22#SV *-ED21#SV
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn104 +EXL8 +EXL7 +EXL6 +EXL5 +EXL4 +EXL3 +EXL2 +EXL1
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn105 -EXL8 -EXL7 -EXL6 -EXL5 -EXL4 -EXL3 -EXL2 -EXL1
Gn106 MI8#SV MI7#SV MI6#SV MI5#SV MI4#SV MI3#SV MI2#SV MI1#SV
Gn107 *+ED38#SV *+ED37#SV *+ED36#SV *+ED35#SV *+ED34#SV *+ED33#SV *+ED32#SV *+ED31#SV
Gn108 MLK8#SV MLK7#SV MLK6#SV MLK5#SV MLK4#SV MLK3#SV MLK2#SV MLK1#SV
- 2651 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn109 *-ED38 *-ED37 *-ED36 *-ED35 *-ED34 *-ED33 *-ED32 *-ED31#SV
Gn110 +LM8#SV +LM7#SV +LM6#SV +LM5#SV +LM4#SV +LM3#SV +LM2#SV +LM1#SV
Gn111
Gn112 -LM8#SV -LM7#SV -LM6#SV -LM5#SV -LM4#SV -LM3#SV -LM2#SV -LM1#SV
Gn113
Gn114 *+L8#SV *+L7#SV *+L6#SV *+L5#SV *+L4#SV *+L3#SV *+L2#SV *+L1#SV
Gn115
Gn116 *-L8#SV *-L7#SV *-L6#SV *-L5#SV *-L4#SV *-L3#SV *-L2#SV *-L1#SV
Gn117
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
Gn119
Gn120 *-ED8#SV *-ED7#SV *-ED6#SV *-ED5#SV *-ED4#SV *-ED3#SV *-ED2#SV *-ED1#SV
Gn121
PK8#SV PK7#SV PK6#SV PK5#SV PK4#SV PK3#SV PK2#SV PK1#SV
Gn122 PKESS2 #P
PKESS1 #P
Gn123
Gn124 DTCH8#SV DTCH7#SV DTCH6#SV DTCH5#SV DTCH4#SV DTCH3#SV DTCH2#SV DTCH1#SV
Gn125 IUDD8#SV IUDD7#SV IUDD6#SV IUDD5#SV IUDD4#SV IUDD3#SV IUDD2#SV IUDD1#SV
Gn126 SVF8#SV SVF7#SV SVF6#SV SVF5#SV SVF4#SV SVF3#SV SVF2#SV SVF1#SV
Gn127
Gn128 MIX8#SV MIX7#SV MIX6#SV MIX5#SV MIX4#SV MIX3#SV MIX2#SV MIX1#SV
Gn129
Gn130 *IT8#SV *IT7#SV *IT6#SV *IT5#SV *IT4#SV *IT3#SV *IT2#SV *IT1#SV
- 2652 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn131
Gn132 +MIT2#P +MIT1#P
+MIT8#P +MIT7#P +MIT6#P +MIT5#P +MIT4#P +MIT3#P
Gn133
Gn134 -MIT2#P -MIT1#P
-MIT8#P -MIT7#P -MIT6#P -MIT5#P -MIT4#P -MIT3#P
Gn135
Gn136 EAX8#SV EAX7#SV EAX6#SV EAX5#SV EAX4#SV EAX3#SV EAX2#SV EAX1#SV
Gn137
Gn138 SYNC8#SV SYNC7#SV SYNC6#SV SYNC5#SV SYNC4#SV SYNC3#SV SYNC2#SV SYNC1#SV
Gn139
Gn140 SYNCJ8#SV SYNCJ7#SV SYNCJ6#SV SYNCJ5#SV SYNCJ4#SV SYNCJ3#SV SYNCJ2#SV SYNCJ1#SV
Gn141
#PX
Gn142 EBUFA#PX ECLRA#PX ESTPA#PX ESOFA#PX ESBKA#PX EMBUFA#PX ELCKZA#PX EFINA
Gn143 EMSBKA#PX EC6A#PX EC5A#PX EC4A#PX EC3A#PX EC2A#PX EC1A#PX EC0A#PX
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A
#PX #PX
Gn145 EIF15A#PX EIF14A#PX EIF13A#PX EIF12A#PX EIF11A#PX EIF10A#PX EIF9A EIF8A
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
#PX #PX
Gn147 EID15A#PX EID14A#PX EID13A#PX EID12A#PX EID11A#PX EID10A#PX EID9A EID8A
Gn148 EID23A#PX EID22A#PX EID21A#PX EID20A#PX EID19A#PX EID18A#PX EID17A#PX EID16A#PX
Gn149 EID31A#PX EID30A#PX EID29A#PX EID28A#PX EID27A#PX EID26A#PX EID25A#PX EID24A#PX
Gn150 EDRN#P ERT#P EOVC#P EROV2
#P
EROV1
#P
*EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P
Gn151 *EROV7#P *EROV6#P *EROV5#P *EROV4#P *EROV3#P *EROV2#P *EROV1#P *EROV0#P
Gn152
- 2653 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn153
#PX
Gn154 EBUFB#PX ECLRB#PX ESTPB#PX ESOFB#PX ESBKB#PX EMBUFB#PX ELCKZB#PX EFINB
Gn155 EMSBKB#PX EC6B#PX EC5B#PX EC4B#PX EC3B#PX EC2B#PX EC1B#PX EC0B#PX
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B
#PX #PX
Gn157 EIF15B#PX EIF14B#PX EIF13B#PX EIF12B#PX EIF11B#PX EIF10B#PX EIF9B EIF8B
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
#PX #PX
Gn159 EID15B#PX EID14B#PX EID13B#PX EID12B#PX EID11B#PX EID10B#PX EID9B EID8B
Gn160 EID23B#PX EID22B#PX EID21B#PX EID20B#PX EID19B#PX EID18B#PX EID17B#PX EID16B#PX
Gn161 EID31B#PX EID30B#PX EID29B#PX EID28B#PX EID27B#PX EID26B#PX EID25B#PX EID24B#PX
Gn162 EOVCB#PX
*EFOV7B#PX *EFOV6B#PX *EFOV5B#PX *EFOV4B#PX *EFOV3B#PX *EFOV2B#PX *EFOV1B#PX *EFOV0B#PX
Gn163 *EROV7B#PX *EROV6B#PX *EROV5B#PX *EROV4B#PX *EROV3B#PX *EROV2B#PX *EROV1B#PX *EROV0B#PX
Gn164
Gn165
#PX
Gn166 EBUFC#PX ECLRC#PX ESTPC#PX ESOFC#PX ESBKC#PX EMBUFC#PX ELCKZC#PX EFINC
Gn167 EMSBKC#PX EC6C#PX EC5C#PX EC4C#PX EC3C#PX EC2C#PX EC1C#PX EC0C#PX
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C
#PX #PX
Gn169 EIF15C#PX EIF14C#PX EIF13C#PX EIF12C#PX EIF11C#PX EIF10C#PX EIF9C EIF8C
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C
#PX #PX
Gn171 EID15C#PX EID14C#PX EID13C#PX EID12C#PX EID11C#PX EID10C#PX EID9C EID8C
Gn172 EID23C#PX EID22C#PX EID21C#PX EID20C#PX EID19C#PX EID18C#PX EID17C#PX EID16C#PX
Gn173 EID31C#PX EID30C#PX EID29C#PX EID28C#PX EID27C#PX EID26C#PX EID25C#PX EID24C#PX
Gn174 EOVCC#PX
- 2654 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
*EFOV7C#PX *EFOV6C#PX *EFOV5C#PX *EFOV4C#PX *EFOV3C#PX *EFOV2C#PX *EFOV1C#PX *EFOV0C#PX
Gn175 *EROV7C#PX *EROV6C#PX *EROV5C#PX *EROV4C#PX *EROV3C#PX *EROV2C#PX *EROV1C#PX *EROV0C#PX
Gn176
Gn177
#PX
Gn178 EBUFD#PX ECLRD#PX ESTPD#PX ESOFD#PX ESBKD#PX EMBUFD#PX ELCKZD#PX EFIND
Gn179 EMSBKD#PX EC6D#PX EC5D#PX EC4D#PX EC3D#PX EC2D#PX EC1D#PX EC0D#PX
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D
#PX #PX
Gn181 EIF15D#PX EIF14D#PX EIF13D#PX EIF12D#PX EIF11D#PX EIF10D#PX EIF9D EIF8D
#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX
Gn182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D
#PX #PX
Gn183 EID15D#PX EID14D#PX EID13D#PX EID12D#PX EID11D#PX EID10D#PX EID9D EID8D
Gn184 EID23D#PX EID22D#PX EID21D#PX EID20D#PX EID19D#PX EID18D#PX EID17D#PX EID16D#PX
Gn185 EID31D#PX EID30D#PX EID29D#PX EID28D#PX EID27D#PX EID26D#PX EID25D#PX EID24D#PX
Gn186 EOVCD#PX
*EFOV7D#PX #PX #PX
*EFOV4D#PX *EFOV3D#PX *EFOV2D#PX *EFOV1D#PX #PX
*EFOV6D *EFOV5D *EFOV0D
Gn187 *EROV7D#PX *EROV6D#PX *EROV5D#PX *EROV4D#PX *EROV3D#PX *EROV2D#PX *EROV1D#PX *EROV0D#PX
Gn188
Gn189
Gn190 OVLS8#SV OVLS7#SV OVLS6#SV OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV
Gn191
Gn192 IGVRY8#SV IGVRY7#SV IGVRY6#SV IGVRY5#SV IGVRY4#SV IGVRY3#SV IGVRY2#SV IGVRY1#SV
Gn193 HDSR#P
Gn194
Gn195
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn196 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
- 2655 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P
Gn197 MTD MTC MTB MTA#P
Gn198 NPOS8#SV NPOS7#SV NPOS6#SV NPOS5#SV NPOS4#SV NPOS3#SV NPOS2#SV NPOS1#SV
Gn199 IOLBH2 IOLBH1
Gn200
#P
Gn201 RSTRT
Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SV NDCAL5#SV NDCAL4#SV NDCAL3#SV NDCAL2#SV NDCAL1#SV
#P
Gn203 PWFL ESTPR
#SP #SP
Gn204 MRDYC#SP ORCMC#SP SFRC SRVC CTH1C#SP CTH2C#SP TLMHC#SP TLMLC#SP
#SP #SP #SP
Gn205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP
#SP #SP
Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP OVRC DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC
Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC#SP MORCMC#SP
Gn208 SH07C#SP SH06C#SP SH05C#SP SH04C#SP SH03C#SP SH02C#SP SH01C#SP SH00C#SP
Gn209 SH14C#SP SH13C#SP SH12C#SP SH11C#SP SH10C#SP SH09C#SP SH08C#SP
Gn210 ED23#P ED22#P ED21#P ED20#P ED19#P ED18#P ED17#P ED16#P
Gn211 ED31#P ED30#P ED29#P ED28#P ED27#P ED26#P ED25#P ED24#P
Gn212
Gn213
Gn214
Gn215
Gn216
Gn217
Gn220
Gn251
- 2656 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn263
Gn264 ESSYC4#SP ESSYC3#SP ESSYC2#SP ESSYC1#SP
Gn265 PKESE4#SP PKESE3#SP PKESE2#SP PKESE1#SP
#SP #SP
Gn266 MRDYD#SP ORCMD#SP SFRD SRVD CTH1D#SP CTH2D#SP TLMHD#SP TLMLD#SP
Gn267 RCHD
#SP
RSLD#SP INTGD
#SP
SOCND#SP MCFND#SP SPSLD#SP *ESPD#SP ARSTD#SP
#SP
Gn268 RCHHGD#SP MFNHGD#SP INCMDD#SP OVRD DEFMDD#SP NRROD#SP ROTAD#SP INDXD#SP
Gn269 MPOFD
#SP
SLVD#SP MORCMD#SP
Gn270 SH07D#SP SH06D#SP SH05D#SP SH04D#SP SH03D#SP SH02D#SP SH01D#SP SH00D#SP
Gn271 SH14D#SP SH13D#SP SH12D#SP SH11D#SP SH10D#SP SH09D#SP SH08D#SP
Gn272 R08I4#SP R07I4#SP R06I4#SP R05I4#SP R04I4#SP R03I4#SP R02I4#SP R01I4#SP
Gn273 SIND4
#SP
SSIN4
#SP
SGN4
#SP
R12I4#SP R11I4#SP R10I4#SP R09I4#SP
Gn274 CSFI4#SP CSFI3#SP CSFI2#SP CSFI1#SP CONS4#SP CONS3#SP CONS2#SP CONS1#SP
Gn275
Gn276 UI107#P UI106#P UI105#P UI104#P UI103#P UI102#P UI101#P UI100#P
Gn277 UI115#P UI114#P UI113#P UI112#P UI111#P UI110#P UI109#P UI108#P
Gn278 UI123#P UI122#P UI121#P UI120#P UI119#P UI118#P UI117#P UI116#P
Gn279 UI131#P UI130#P UI129#P UI128#P UI127#P UI126#P UI125#P UI124#P
Gn280 UI207#P UI206#P UI205#P UI204#P UI203#P UI202#P UI201#P UI200#P
Gn281 UI215#P UI214#P UI213#P UI212#P UI211#P UI210#P UI209#P UI208#P
Gn282 UI223#P UI222#P UI221#P UI220#P UI219#P UI218#P UI217#P UI216#P
Gn283 UI231#P UI230#P UI229#P UI228#P UI227#P UI226#P UI225#P UI224#P
Gn284 UI307#P UI306#P UI305#P UI304#P UI303#P UI302#P UI301#P UI300#P
- 2657 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn285 UI315 UI314 UI313 UI312 UI311 UI310 UI309 UI308#P
Gn286 UI323#P UI322#P UI321#P UI320#P UI319#P UI318#P UI317#P UI316#P
Gn287 UI331#P UI330#P UI329#P UI328#P UI327#P UI326#P UI325#P UI324#P
Gn288 SPSYC4#SP SPSYC3#SP SPSYC2#SP SPSYC1#SP
Gn289 SPPHS4#SP SPPHS3#SP SPPHS2#SP SPPHS1#SP
Gn290 PGCK#P
Gn291
Gn292
Gn293
Gn294
Gn295 CNCKY C2SEND
Gn296
Gn297
Gn298 RNDH#P TB_BASE
#P
Gn299
Gn300
Gn301
Gn302
Gn303
Gn304
Gn305
Gn306
- 2658 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn307
Gn308
Gn309
Gn310
Gn311
Gn312
Gn313
Gn314
Gn315
Gn316
Gn317
Gn318
Gn319
Gn320
Gn321
Gn322
Gn323
Gn324
Gn325
Gn326
Gn327
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn328 TLRSTI4 TLRSTI3 TLRSTI2 TLRSTI1 TLRST4 TLRST3 TLRST2 TLRST1
- 2659 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn329 TLNCT4 TLNCT3 TLNCT2 TLNCT1 TLSKP4 TLSKP3 TLSKP2 TLSKP1
Gn330 TKEY5 TKEY4 TKEY3 TKEY2 TKEY1 TKEY0
Gn331
Gn332
Gn333
Gn334
Gn335
Gn336
Gn337
Gn338
Gn339
#P
Gn340 SLRER SLREF#P
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn341 *+ED48 *+ED47 *+ED46 *+ED45 *+ED44 *+ED43 *+ED42 *+ED41
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn342 *-ED48 *-ED47 *-ED46 *-ED45 *-ED44 *-ED43 *-ED42 *-ED41
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn343 *+ED58 *+ED57 *+ED56 *+ED55 *+ED54 *+ED53 *+ED52 *+ED51
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn344 *-ED58 *-ED57 *-ED56 *-ED55 *-ED54 *-ED53 *-ED52 *-ED51
Gn345
Gn346
Gn347 NOT3DM#P HDN#P
Gn348
Gn349
Gn350
- 2660 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn351 SSEGB4 #SP
SSEGB3 #SP
SSEGB2 #SP
SSEGB1#SP
Gn352 *FHRO7#P *FHRO6#P *FHRO5#P *FHRO4#P *FHRO3#P *FHRO2#P *FHRO1#P *FHRO0#P
Gn353 FHROV#P *FHRO9#P *FHRO8#P
Gn354
Gn355
Gn356
Gn357
Gn358 WPRST8#SV WPRST7#SV WPRST6#SV WPRST5#SV WPRST4#SV WPRST3#SV WPRST2#SV WPRST1#SV
~
Gn375
Gn376 SOV27 SOV26 SOV25 SOV24 SOV23 SOV22 SOV21 SOV20
Gn377 SOV37 SOV36 SOV35 SOV34 SOV33 SOV32 SOV31 SOV30
Gn378 SOV47 SOV46 SOV45 SOV44 SOV43 SOV42 SOV41 SOV40
Gn379 HS5ID#P HS5IC#P HS5IB#P HS5IA#P HS5D#P HS5C#P HS5B#P HS5A#P
#P #P
Gn380 MP52 MP51
#P #P #P #P
Gn381 AUTPHD AUTPHC AUTPHB AUTPHA
Gn382
Gn383
Gn384
Gn385
Gn386
Gn387
Gn388
- 2661 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn389
Gn390
Gn391
Gn392
Gn393
Gn394
Gn395
Gn396
Gn397
Gn398
Gn399
Gn400 *SUCPFD#SP *SUCPFC#SP *SUCPFB#SP
Gn401 *SCPFD#SP *SCPFC#SP *SCPFB#SP
Gn402 SPSTPD#SP SPSTPC#SP SPSTPB#SP
#P #P #P #P
Gn403 SLPCD SLPCC SLSPD SLSPC
Gn404
Gn405
ITF04#P ITF03#P ITF02#P ITF01#P
Gn406
Gn407
Gn408 STCHK#P
Gn409
Gn410
- 2662 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #S #P
Gn411 HS4IE HS3IE HS2IE HS1IE HS4E HS3E HS2E HS1E#P
Gn412 HS5IE#P HS5E#P
~
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn512 MCST8 MCST7 MCST6 MCST5 MCST4 MCST3 MCST2 MCST1
#P
Gn513 MCST16#P MCST15#P MCST14#P MCST13#P MCST12#P MCST11#P MCST10#P MCST9
Gn514 MCFIN#P
Gn515
Gn516
Gn517 SYPST
#P
GAE2#P GAE1#P
GAE3#P
Gn518 DNTCLR
Gn519
Gn521 SRVON8#SV SRVON7#SV SRVON6#SV SRVON5#SV SRVON4#SV SRVON3#SV SRVON2#SV SRVON1#SV
Gn523 SVRVS8#SV SVRVS7#SV SVRVS6#SV SVRVS5#SV SVRVS4#SV SVRVS3#SV SVRVS2#SV SVRVS1#SV
Gn524
Gn525
Gn526
Gn527
Gn528
~
Gn530 EGBS8#SV EGBS7#SV EGBS6#SV EGBS5#SV EGBS4#SV EGBS3#SV EGBS2#SV EGBS1#SV
#P #P #P #P
Gn531 EXLM3#P EXLM2#P OVLN HBTRN MRVM FWSTP
Gn532
- 2663 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #SP #SP #SP
Gn533 SSRS SSR4 SSR3 SSR2 SSR1#SP
Gn534
Gn535
SPSP#P #P #P
Gn536 DASN EXCST RMVST
~
#P #P #P #P #P
Gn544 MHLC5 MHLC4 MHLC3 MHLC2 MHLC1
#P #P #P #P #P
Gn545 MHUS5 MHUS4 MHUS3 MHUS2 MHUS1
Gn546
Gn547 ONSC#P
Gn548 *CL8#SV *CL7#SV *CL6#SV *CL5#SV *CL4#SV *CL3#SV *CL2#SV *CL1#SV
Gn549 RMTC#P GTMSR#P
~
Gn579 NHSW WBEND
Gn580 *ACTF8#SV *ACTF7#SV *ACTF6#SV *ACTF5#SV *ACTF4#SV *ACTF3#SV *ACTF2#SV *ACTF1#SV
Gn581 SLANG LANG7 LANG6 LANG5 LANG4 LANG3 LANG2 LANG1
~
Gn587 SPAPH4 SPAPH3 SPAPH2 SPAPH1 SPMST4 SPMST3 SPMST2 SPMST1
Gn588 SMSL24 SMSL23 SMSL22 SMSL21 SMSL14 SMSL13 SMSL12 SMSL11
~
Gn594 OTD7 OTD6 OTD5 OTD4 OTD3 OTD2 OTD1 OTD0
Gn595 OTD15 OTD14 OTD13 OTD12 OTD11 OTD10 OTD9 OTD8
Gn596 OTA8 OTA7 OTA6 OTA5 OTA4 OTA3 OTA2 OTA1
Gn597 -OT3 +OT3 -OT2 +OT2 -OT12 +OT12 -OT11 +OT11
Gn598 -OT3C +OT3C -OT2C +OT2C -OT12C +OT12C -OT11C +OT11C
- 2664 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Gn599 OTSW
~
Gn708 RE08I#SP RE07I#SP RE06I#SP RE05I#SP RE04I#SP RE03I#SP RE02I#SP RE01I#SP
Gn709 RE16I#SP RE15I#SP RE14I#SP RE13I#SP RE12I#SP RE11I#SP RE10I#SP RE09I#SP
Gn710 RE24I#SP RE23I#SP RE22I#SP RE21I#SP RE20I#SP RE19I#SP RE18I#SP RE17I#SP
Gn711 RE32I#SP RE31I#SP RE30I#SP RE29I#SP RE28I#SP RE27I#SP RE26I#SP RE25I#SP
Gn712 RE08I2#SP RE07I2#SP RE06I2#SP RE05I2#SP RE04I2#SP RE03I2#SP RE02I2#SP RE01I2#SP
Gn713 RE16I2#SP RE15I2#SP RE14I2#SP RE13I2#SP RE12I2#SP RE11I2#SP RE10I2#SP RE09I2#SP
Gn714 RE24I2#SP RE23I2#SP RE22I2#SP RE21I2#SP RE20I2#SP RE19I2#SP RE18I2#SP RE17I2#SP
Gn715 RE32I2#SP RE31I2#SP RE30I2#SP RE29I2#SP RE28I2#SP RE27I2#SP RE26I2#SP RE25I2#SP
Gn716 RE08I3#SP RE07I3#SP RE06I3#SP RE05I3#SP RE04I3#SP RE03I3#SP RE02I3#SP RE01I3#SP
Gn717 RE16I3#SP RE15I3#SP RE14I3#SP RE13I3#SP RE12I3#SP RE11I3#SP RE10I3#SP RE09I3#SP
Gn718 RE24I3#SP RE23I3#SP RE22I3#SP RE21I3#SP RE20I3#SP RE19I3#SP RE18I3#SP RE17I3#SP
Gn719 RE32I3#SP RE31I3#SP RE30I3#SP RE29I3#SP RE28I3#SP RE27I3#SP RE26I3#SP RE25I3#SP
Gn720 RE08I4#SP RE07I4#SP RE06I4#SP RE05I4#SP RE04I4#SP RE03I4#SP RE02I4#SP RE01I4#SP
Gn721 RE16I4#SP RE15I4#SP RE14I4#SP RE13I4#SP RE12I4#SP RE11I4#SP RE10I4#SP RE09I4#SP
Gn722 RE24I4#SP RE23I4#SP RE22I4#SP RE21I4#SP RE20I4#SP RE19I4#SP RE18I4#SP RE17I4#SP
Gn723 RE32I4#SP RE31I4#SP RE30I4#SP RE29I4#SP RE28I4#SP RE27I4#SP RE26I4#SP RE25I4#SP
～
Gn765 TPMG07 TPMG06 TPMG05 TPMG04 TPMG03 TPMG02 TPMG01 TPMG00
Gn766
Gn767
- 2665 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
CNC → PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD#P
Fn001 MA#P TAP#P ENB#SP DEN#P BAL#P RST#P AL#P
Fn002 MDRN#P CUT#P SRNMV#P THRD#P CSS#P RPDO#P INCH#P
Fn003 MEDT#P MMEM
#P
MRMT#P MMDI#P MJ#P MH#P MINC#P
Fn004 MREF#P MAFL#P MSBK#P MABSM#P MMLK#P MBDT1
#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2
Fn006 ERTVA#P MDIRST#P TPPRS
Fn007 BF#P TF#P SF#P MF#P
Fn008 MF5#P MF4#P MF3#P MF2#P
Fn009 DM00#P DM01#P DM02#P DM30#P
Fn010 M07#P M06#P M05#P M04#P M03#P M02#P M01#P M00#P
Fn011 M15#P M14#P M13#P M12#P M11#P M10#P M09#P M08#P
Fn012 M23#P M22#P M21#P M20#P M19#P M18#P M17#P M16#P
Fn013 M31#P M30#P M29#P M28#P M27#P M26#P M25#P M24#P
Fn014 M207#P M206#P M205#P M204#P M203#P M202#P M201#P M200#P
Fn015 M215#P M214#P M213#P M212#P M211#P M210#P M209#P M208#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
Fn016
M231#P M230#P M229#P M228#P M227#P M226#P M225#P M224#P
M315#P M314#P M313#P M312#P M311#P M310#P M309#P M308#P
Fn017
M231#P M230#P M229#P M228#P M227#P M226#P M225#P M224#P
Fn018
Fn019
Fn020
- 2666 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn021
Fn022 S07#P S06#P S05#P S04#P S03#P S02#P S01#P S00#P
Fn023 S15#P S14#P S13#P S12#P S11#P S10#P S09#P S08#P
Fn024 S23#P S22#P S21#P S20#P S19#P S18#P S17#P S16#P
Fn025 S31#P S30#P S29#P S28#P S27#P S26#P S25#P S24#P
Fn026 T07#P T06#P T05#P T04#P T03#P T02#P T01#P T00#P
Fn027 T15#P T14#P T13#P T12#P T11#P T10#P T09#P T08#P
Fn028 T23#P T22#P T21#P T20#P T19#P T18#P T17#P T16#P
Fn029 T31#P T30#P T29#P T28#P T27#P T26#P T25#P T24#P
Fn030 B07#P B06#P B05#P B04#P B03#P B02#P B01#P B00#P
Fn031 B15#P B14#P B13#P B12#P B11#P B10#P B09#P B08#P
Fn032 B23#P B22#P B21#P B20#P B19#P B18#P B17#P B16#P
Fn033 B31#P B30#P B29#P B28#P B27#P B26#P B25#P B24#P
Fn034 SRSRDY#P SRSP1R#SP SRSP2R#SP SRSP3R#SP SRSP4R#SP
GR3O#P GR2O#P GR1O#P
Fn035 SPAL#P
Fn036 R08O#SP R07O#SP R06O#SP R05O#SP R04O#SP R03O#SP R02O#SP R01O#SP
Fn037 R12O#SP R11O#SP R10O#SP R09O#SP
Fn038 ENB3#SP ENB2#SP SUCLPA
#SP
SCLPA#SP
Fn039 ENB4#SP MSPOSA#SP
Fn040 AR07#SP AR06#SP AR05#SP AR04#SP AR03#SP AR02#SP AR01#SP AR00#SP
Fn041 AR15#SP AR14#SP AR13#SP AR12#SP AR11#SP AR10#SP AR09#SP AR08#SP
Fn042
- 2667 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#SP #SP #SP
Fn043 SYCAL4 SYCAL3 SYCAL2 SYCAL1#SP
#P #P #P #P
Fn044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA#SP LDT2A
#SP
LDT1A
#SP
SARA
#SP
SDTA#SP SSTA#SP ALMA#SP
#SP #SP
Fn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#SP SLVSA#SP RCFNA#SP RCHPA#SP CFINA CHPA
Fn047 INCSTA#SP PC1DTA#SP
Fn048 CSPENA#SP
Fn049 ORARB#SP TLMB#SP LDT2B
#SP
LDT1B
#SP
SARB
#SP
SDTB#SP SSTB#SP ALMB
#SP
#SP #SP
Fn050 MORA2B#SP MORA1B#SP PORA2B#SP SLVSB#SP RCFNB#SP RCHPB#SP CFINB CHPB
Fn051 INCSTB#SP PC1DTB#SP
Fn052 CSPENB#SP
#P #P #P
Fn053 EKENB BGEACT IOALM IOBSY PRGDPL INHKY
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124
#P #P #P
Fn060 ESCAN ESEND EREND
Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2
BCLP
#P
BUCLP
#P
Fn062 PRTSF
#P
D3ROT
#P
#P #P AICC#P
S2MES S1MES
Fn063 PSYN#P WATO#P COSP2
#P
COSP1
#P
PSAR#P PSE2#P PSE1#P
#P #P
TIALM TICHK
Fn064 COSP#P TLCHB
#P
TLCHI#P TLNW#P TLCH#P
- 2668 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Fn065 SYNMOD#P
RTRCTF RSMAX RGSPM RGSPP
#P
Fn066 #P FEED0 RTPT#P
PECK2
Fn067
Fn068
Fn069
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn071 PSW16 PSW15 PSW14 PSW13 PSW12 PSW11 PSW10 PSW09
Fn072 OUT7#P OUT6#P OUT5#P OUT4#P OUT3#P OUT2#P OUT1#P OUT0#P
Fn073 ZRNO#P MD4O#P MD2O#P MD1O#P
Fn074 OUT15
#P
OUT14
#P
OUT13
#P
OUT12
#P
OUT11
#P
OUT10
#P
OUT9#P OUT8#P
Fn075 SPO#P KEYO DRNO#P MLKO#P SBKO#P BDTO#P
Fn076 ROV2O
#P
ROV1O
#P
RTAP#P MP2O#P MP1O#P
Fn077 RTO#P HS1DO
#P
HS1CO
#P
HS1BO
#P
HS1AO
#P
Fn078 *FV7O#P *FV6O#P *FV5O#P *FV4O#P *FV3O#P *FV2O#P *FV1O#P *FV0O#P
Fn079 *JV7O#P *JV6O#P *JV5O#P *JV4O#P *JV3O#P *JV2O#P *JV1O#P *JV0O#P
Fn080 *JV15O
#P
*JV14O
#P
*JV13O
#P
*JV12O
#P
*JV11O
#P
*JV10O
#P
*JV9O#P *JV8O#P
Fn081 -J4O#P +J4O#P -J3O#P +J3O#P -J2O#P +J2O#P -J1O#P +J1O#P
#P
Fn082 EGBSM
RVSL#P
Fn083
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn084 EUO07 EUO06 EUO05 EUO04 EUO03 EUO02 EUO01 EUO00
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn085 EUO15 EUO14 EUO13 EUO12 EUO11 EUO10 EUO09 EUO08
Fn086
- 2669 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn087
Fn088
Fn089
#P #P #P #P
Fn090 SVSPM SVAR SYSSM SYAR ABTSP3＃SP ABTSP2＃SP ABTSP1＃SP ABTQSV#P
Fn091 ADCO#P ABTSP4＃SP MMMOD
#P
MRVSP
#P
MNCHG
#P
MRVMD
#P
#P #P #P
Fn092 TRSPS TRMTN TRACT
#P
Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#P SVWRN1#P WFAN#P LFCIF#P SFAN#P LIFOVR
Fn094 ZP8#SV ZP7#SV ZP6#SV ZP5#SV ZP4#SV ZP3#SV ZP2#SV ZP1#SV
Fn095
Fn096 ZP28#SV ZP27#SV ZP26#SV ZP25#SV ZP24#SV ZP23#SV ZP22#SV ZP21#SV
Fn097
Fn098 ZP38#SV ZP37#SV ZP36#SV ZP35#SV ZP34#SV ZP33#SV ZP32#SV ZP31#SV
Fn099
Fn100 ZP48#SV ZP47#SV ZP46#SV ZP45#SV ZP44#SV ZP43#SV ZP42#SV ZP41#SV
Fn101
Fn102 MV8#SV MV7#SV MV6#SV MV5#SV MV4#SV MV3#SV MV2#SV MV1#SV
Fn103
Fn104 INP8#SV INP7#SV INP6#SV INP5#SV INP4#SV INP3#SV INP2#SV INP1#SV
Fn105
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
Fn107
Fn108 MMI8#SV MMI7#SV MMI6#SV MMI5#SV MMI4#SV MMI3#SV MMI2#SV MMI1#SV
- 2670 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn109
Fn110 MDTCH8#SV MDTCH7#SV MDTCH6#SV MDTCH5#SV MDTCH4#SV MDTCH3#SV MDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SV
Fn111
Fn112 EADEN8#SV EADEN7#SV EADEN6#SV EADEN5#SV EADEN4#SV EADEN3#SV EADEN2#SV EADEN1#SV
Fn113
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
Fn115
Fn117
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn118 SYN80 SYN70 SYN60 SYN50 SYN40 SYN30 SYN20 SYN10
Fn119
Fn120 ZRF8#SV ZRF7#SV ZRF6#SV ZRF5#SV ZRF4#SV ZRF3#SV ZRF2#SV ZRF1#SV
Fn121
Fn122 HDO3#P HDO2#P HDO1#P HDO0#P
Fn123
Fn124 +OT8#SV +OT7#SV +OT6#SV +OT5#SV +OT4#SV +OT3#SV +OT2#SV +OT1#SV
Fn125
Fn126 -OT8#SV -OT7#SV -OT6#SV -OT5#SV -OT4#SV -OT3#SV -OT2#SV -OT1#SV
Fn127
Fn128
Fn129 *EAXSL#P EOV0#P
#PX #PX
Fn130 EBSYA#PX EOTNA#PX EOTPA#PX EGENA#PX EDENA#PX EIALA ECKZA#PX EINPA
- 2671 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#PX #PX #PX
Fn131 EMF3A EMF2A EABUFA #PX
EMFA
Fn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PX EM21A#PX EM18A#PX EM14A#PX EM12A#PX EM11A#PX
#PX #PX
Fn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PX EGENB#PX EDENB#PX EIALB ECKZB#PX EINPB
#PX
Fn134 EMF3B#PX EMF2B#PX EABUFB#PX EMFB
Fn135 EM28B#PX EM24B#PX EM22B#PX EM21B#PX EM18B#PX EM14B#PX EM12B#PX EM11B#PX
#PX #PX
Fn136 EBSYC#PX EOTNC#PX EOTPC#PX EGENC#PX EDENC#PX EIALC ECKZC#PX EINPC
#PX
Fn137 EMF3C#PX EMF2C#PX EABUFC#PX EMFC
Fn138 EM28C#PX EM24C#PX EM22C#PX EM21C#PX EM18C#PX EM14C#PX EM12C#PX EM11C#PX
#PX #PX
Fn139 EBSYD#PX EOTND#PX EOTPD#PX EGEND#PX EDEND#PX EIALD ECKZD#PX EINPD
#PX
Fn140 EMF3D#PX EMF2D#PX EABUFD#PX EMFD
Fn141 EM28D#PX EM24D#PX EM22D#PX EM21D#PX EM18D#PX EM14D#PX EM12D#PX EM11D#PX
Fn142 EM48A#PX EM44A#PX EM42A#PX EM41A#PX EM38A#PX EM34A#PX EM32A#PX EM31A#PX
Fn143
Fn144
Fn145 EM48B#PX EM44B#PX EM42B#PX EM41B#PX EM38B#PX EM34B#PX EM32B#PX EM31B#PX
Fn146
Fn147
Fn148 EM48C#PX EM44C#PX EM42C#PX EM41C#PX EM38C#PX EM34C#PX EM32C#PX EM31C#PX
Fn149
Fn150
Fn151 EM48D#PX EM44D#PX EM42D#PX EM41D#PX EM38D#PX EM34D#PX EM32D#PX EM31D#PX
Fn152
- 2672 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn153
Fn154 TLAL#P
Fn155
Fn156
Fn157
Fn158
Fn159
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn160 MSP07 MSP06 MSP05 MSP04 MSP03 MSP02 MSP01 MSP00
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn161 MSP15 MSP14 MSP13 MSP12 MSP11 MSP10 MSP09 MSP08
Fn162
Fn163
Fn164
Fn165
Fn166
Fn167
Fn168 ORARC#SP TLMC#SP LDT2C#SP LDT1C#SP SARC
#SP
SDTC
#SP
SSTC#SP ALMC
#SP
#SP #SP
Fn169 MORA2C#SP MORA1C#SP PORA2C#SP SLVSC#SP RCFNC#SP RCHPC#SP CFINC CHPC
Fn170 INCSTC#SP PC1DTC#SP
Fn171 CSPENC#SP
#P #P
Fn172 PBATL PBATZ
Fn173
Fn174
- 2673 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn175
Fn176
Fn177
Fn178
Fn179
Fn180 CLRCH8#SV CLRCH7#SV CLRCH6#SV CLRCH5#SV CLRCH4#SV CLRCH3#SV CLRCH2#SV CLRCH1#SV
Fn181
Fn182 EACNT8#SV EACNT7#SV EACNT6#SV EACNT5#SV EACNT4#SV EACNT3#SV EACNT2#SV EACNT1#SV
Fn183
Fn184 ABDT8#SV ABDT7#SV ABDT6#SV ABDT5#SV ABDT4#SV ABDT3#SV ABDT2#SV ABDT1#SV
Fn185
Fn186
Fn187
Fn188
Fn189
Fn190 TRQM8#SV TRQM7#SV TRQM6#SV TRQM5#SV TRQM4#SV TRQM3#SV TRQM2#SV TRQM1#SV
Fn191
Fn192
Fn193
Fn194
Fn195
Fn196
- 2674 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P
Fn197 MFSYND MFSYNC MFSYNB MFSYNA#P
Fn198
Fn199
Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SP R05O2#SP R04O2#SP R03O2#SP R02O2#SP R01O2#SP
Fn201 R12O2#SP R11O2#SP R10O2#SP R09O2#SP
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn202 AR072 AR062 AR052 AR042 AR032 AR022 AR012 AR002
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn203 AR152 AR142 AR132 AR122 AR112 AR102 AR092 AR082
Fn204 R08O3#SP R07O3#SP R06O3#SP R05O3#SP R04O3#SP R03O3#SP R02O3#SP R01O3#SP
Fn205 R12O3#SP R11O3#SP R10O3#SP R09O3#SP
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn206 AR073 AR063 AR053 AR043 AR033 AR023 AR013 AR003
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn207 AR153 AR143 AR133 AR123 AR113 AR103 AR093 AR083
Fn208 EGBM8#SV EGBM7#SV EGBM6#SV EGBM5#SV EGBM4#SV EGBM3#SV EGBM2#SV EGBM1#SV
Fn209
Fn210 SYNMT8#P SYNMT7#P SYNMT6#P SYNMT5#P SYNMT4#P SYNMT3#P SYNMT2#P SYNMT1#P
Fn211 SYNOF8#P SYNOF7#P SYNOF6#P SYNOF5#P SYNOF4#P SYNOF3#P SYNOF2#P SYNOF1#P
Fn212
Fn213
Fn214
Fn215
Fn216
Fn217
Fn218
- 2675 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn263
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
#P
Fn265 SPWRN9
Fn266 ORARD#SP TLMD#SP LDT2D#SP LDT1D#SP SARD
#SP
SDTD
#SP
SSTD#SP ALMD
#SP
#SP #SP
Fn267 MORA2D#SP MORA1D#SP PORA2D#SP SLVSD#SP RCFND#SP RCHPD#SP CFIND CHPD
Fn268 INCSTD#SP PC1DTD#SP
Fn269 CSPEND#SP
Fn270 R08O4#SP R07O4#SP R06O4#SP R05O4#SP R04O4#SP R03O4#SP R02O4#SP R01O4#SP
Fn271 R12O4#SP R11O4#SP R10O4#SP R09O4#SP
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn272 AR074 AR064 AR054 AR044 AR034 AR024 AR014 AR004
#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP
Fn273 AR154 AR144 AR134 AR124 AR114 AR104 AR094 AR084
Fn274 CSFO4#SP CSFO3#SP CSFO2#SP CSFO1#SP FCSS4#SP FCSS3#SP FCSS2#SP FCSS1#SP
Fn275
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024
Fn278
Fn279
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO208
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn282 UO223 UO222 UO221 UO220 UO219 UO218 UO217 UO216
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn283 UO231 UO230 UO229 UO228 UO227 UO226 UO225 UO224
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn284 UO307 UO306 UO305 UO304 UO303 UO302 UO301 UO300
- 2676 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn285 UO315 UO314 UO313 UO312 UO311 UO310 UO309 UO308
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn286 UO323 UO322 UO321 UO320 UO319 UO318 UO317 UO316
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn287 UO331 UO330 UO329 UO328 UO327 UO326 UO325 UO324
Fn288 FSPSY4#SP FSPSY3#SP FSPSY2#SP FSPSY1#SP
Fn289 FSPPH4#SP FSPPH3#SP FSPPH2#SP FSPPH1#SP
#P
Fn290 PRGMD#P PCKSV DNTCM
Fn291
Fn292
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn293 HPS08 HPS07 HPS06 HPS05 HPS04 HPS03 HPS02 HPS01
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn294 HPS16 HPS15 HPS14 HPS13 HPS12 HPS11 HPS10 HPS09
Fn295 CNCKYO C2SENO
Fn296
#P
Fn297 MBCAN
Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1
Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1
Fn300
Fn301
Fn302
Fn303
Fn304
Fn305
Fn306
- 2677 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn307
Fn308
Fn309
Fn310
Fn311
Fn312
Fn313
Fn314
#P
Fn315 TLMEM#P TMFNFD#P TLMOT#P TLMG10#P TLMSRH#P TLSKF
Fn316 SQMPE#P SQMPR#P
Fn317
Fn318
Fn319
Fn320
Fn321
Fn322
Fn323
Fn324
Fn325
Fn326
Fn327
Fn328 TLCHI4#P TLCHI3#P TLCHI2#P TLCHI1#P TLCH4#P TLCH3#P TLCH2#P TLCH1#P
- 2678 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn329 TLCHB4 TLCHB3 TLCHB2 TLCHB1 TLSKF4 TLSKF3 TLSKF2 TLSKF1#P
Fn330
Fn331
Fn332
Fn333
Fn334
Fn335
Fn336
Fn337
Fn338
Fn339
Fn340
Fn341 SYCM8#SV SYCM7#SV SYCM6#SV SYCM5#SV SYCM4#SV SYCM3#SV SYCM2#SV SYCM1#SV
Fn342 SYCS8#SV SYCS7#SV SYCS6#SV SYCS5#SV SYCS4#SV SYCS3#SV SYCS2#SV SYCS1#SV
Fn343 MIXO8#SV MIXO7#SV MIXO6#SV MIXO5#SV MIXO4#SV MIXO3#SV MIXO2#SV MIXO1#SV
Fn344 OVMO8#SV OVMO7#SV OVMO6#SV OVMO5#SV OVMO4#SV OVMO3#SV OVMO2#SV OVMO1#SV
Fn345 OVSO8#SV OVSO7#SV OVSO6#SV OVSO5#SV OVSO4#SV OVSO3#SV OVSO2#SV OVSO1#SV
Fn346 SMPK8#SV SMPK7#SV SMPK6#SV SMPK5#SV SMPK4#SV SMPK3#SV SMPK2#SV SMPK1#SV
Fn347 D3MI#P
Fn348
Fn349
Fn350
Fn351 SSEGBM4#SP SSEGBM3#SP SSEGBM2#SP SSEGBM1#SP
- 2679 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn356
Fn358 WPSF8#SV WPSF7#SV WPSF6#SV WPSF5#SV WPSF4#SV WPSF3#SV WPSF2#SV WPSF1#SV
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn376 SVSST8 SVSST7 SVSST6 SVSST5 SVSST4 SVSST3 SVSST2 SVSST1
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn377 SVSAR8 SVSAR7 SVSAR6 SVSAR5 SVSAR4 SVSAR3 SVSAR2 SVSAR1
Fn381 PHFIND#P PHFINC#P PHFINB#P PHFINA#P
Fn395
Fn396
Fn397
Fn398
Fn399
Fn400 SUCLPD#SP SUCLPC#SP SUCLPB#SP
Fn401 SCLPD#SP SCLPC#SP SCLPB#SP
Fn402 MSPOSD#SP MSPOSC#SP MSPOSB#SP
#P
Fn403 SYNER
#P #P
Fn404 COSP4 COSP3
Fn405
Fn406
Fn407
Fn408
Fn409
Fn410
Fn411
Fn412
Fn413
- 2680 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn414
Fn415
Fn416
Fn417
Fn418
~
Fn511
Fn512 MCSP#P MCRQ#P MCEXE
#P
Fn513 ZRNR#P DNCIR
#P
MD4R#P MD2R#P MD1R#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn514 MCEX8 MCEX7 MCEX6 MCEX5 MCEX4 MCEX3 MCEX2 MCEX1
#P
Fn515 MCEX16#P MCEX15#P MCEX14#P MCEX13#P MCEX12#P MCEX11#P MCEX10#P MCEX9
Fn516
Fn517 RP18#SV RP17#SV RP16#SV RP15#SV RP14#SV RP13#SV RP12#SV RP11#SV
Fn518 RP28#SV RP27#SV RP26#SV RP25#SV RP24#SV RP23#SV RP22#SV RP21#SV
Fn520 ATBK
Fn521 SVREV8#SV SVREV7#SV SVREV6#SV SVREV5#SV SVREV4#SV SVREV3#SV SVREV2#SV SVREV1#SV
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn522 SPP8 SPP7 SPP6 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1
Fn523
Fn524
~
Fn527 SYPER#P SYPFN#P
~
#P
Fn531 IOLBR DVCPR TDICHK
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn532 SYNO8 SYNO7 SYNO6 SYNO5 SYNO4 SYNO3 SYNO2 SYNO1
Fn533
- 2681 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn534 PE3EX PE2EX PE1EX MBSO#P SRNEX
Fn535 WFLN2 WFLN1 WETF WETE WECCS WIOCH3 WIOCH2 WIOCH1
INIST#P #P
Fn536 EXCED RMVED#P
Fn540 TDIH4FE TDIH3FE TDIH2FE TDIH1FE TDIT4FE TDIT3FE TDIT2FE TDIT1FE
Fn541 TDIO6FE TDIO5FE TDIO4FE TDIO3FE TDIO2FE TDIO1FE
Fn542 TDIH4AE TDIH3AE TDIH2AE TDIH1AE TDIT4AE TDIT3AE TDIT2AE TDIT1AE
Fn543 TDIO6AE TDIO5AE TDIO4AE TDIO3AE TDIO2AE TDIO1AE
#P
Fn545 DNTER OVLNS FLANG
Fn546 GTME#P GTMC#P
~
#P #P #P #P
Fn553 PHERD PHERC PHERB PHERA
Fn554
~
Fn558 CDLAD5 CDLAD4 CDPRM CDDCL CDLAD3 CDLAD2 CDLAD1 CDCEX
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Fn559 SEO8 SEO7 SEO6 SEO5 SEO4 SEO3 SEO2 SEO1
Fn560 TDITO6#P TDITO5#P TDITO4#P TDITO3#P TDITO2#P TDITO1#P
Fn561 TDIHO6#P TDIHO5#P TDIHO4#P TDIHO3#P TDIHO2#P TDIHO1#P
Fn562
~
Fn564 M307#P M306#P M305#P M304#P M303#P M302#P M301#P M300#P
Fn565 M315#P M314#P M313#P M312#P M311#P M310#P M309#P M308#P
Fn566 M323#P M322#P M321#P M320#P M319#P M318#P M317#P M316#P
Fn567 M331#P M330#P M329#P M328#P M327#P M326#P M325#P M324#P
Fn568 M407#P M406#P M405#P M404#P M403#P M402#P M401#P M400#P
Fn569 M415#P M414#P M413#P M412#P M411#P M410#P M409#P M408#P
- 2682 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn570 M423#P M422#P M421#P M420#P M419#P M418#P M417#P M416#P
Fn571 M431#P M430#P M429#P M428#P M427#P M426#P M425#P M424#P
Fn572 M507#P M506#P M505#P M504#P M503#P M502#P M501#P M500#P
Fn573 M515#P M514#P M513#P M512#P M511#P M510#P M509#P M508#P
Fn574 M523#P M522#P M521#P M520#P M519#P M518#P M517#P M516#P
Fn575 M531#P M530#P M529#P M528#P M527#P M526#P M525#P M524#P
~
Fn577 SPMER4 SPMER3 SPMER2 SPMER1 SPMFN4 SPMFN3 SPMFN2 SPMFN1
Fn578 ALLO WBCNT
~
Fn580 ARE07#SP ARE06#SP ARE05#SP ARE04#SP ARE03#SP ARE02#SP ARE01#SP ARE00#SP
Fn581 ARE15#SP ARE14#SP ARE13#SP ARE12#SP ARE11#SP ARE10#SP ARE09#SP ARE08#SP
Fn582 ARE23#SP ARE22#SP ARE21#SP ARE20#SP ARE19#SP ARE18#SP ARE17#SP ARE16#SP
Fn583 ARE31#SP ARE30#SP ARE29#SP ARE28#SP ARE27#SP ARE26#SP ARE25#SP ARE24#SP
Fn584 ARE072#SP ARE062#SP ARE052#SP ARE042#SP ARE032#SP ARE022#SP ARE012#SP ARE002#SP
Fn585 ARE152#SP ARE142#SP ARE132#SP ARE122#SP ARE112#SP ARE102#SP ARE092#SP ARE082#SP
Fn586 ARE232#SP ARE222#SP ARE212#SP ARE202#SP ARE192#SP ARE182#SP ARE172#SP ARE162#SP
Fn587 ARE312#SP ARE302#SP ARE292#SP ARE282#SP ARE272#SP ARE262#SP ARE252#SP ARE242#SP
Fn588 ARE073#SP ARE063#SP ARE053#SP ARE043#SP ARE033#SP ARE023#SP ARE013#SP ARE003#SP
Fn589 ARE153#SP ARE143#SP ARE133#SP ARE123#SP ARE113#SP ARE103#SP ARE093#SP ARE083#SP
Fn590 ARE233#SP ARE223#SP ARE213#SP ARE323#SP ARE193#SP ARE183#SP ARE173#SP ARE163#SP
Fn591 ARE313#SP ARE303#SP ARE293#SP ARE283#SP ARE273#SP ARE263#SP ARE253#SP ARE243#SP
Fn592 ARE074#SP ARE064#SP ARE054#SP ARE044#SP ARE034#SP ARE024#SP ARE014#SP ARE004#SP
Fn593 ARE154#SP ARE144#SP ARE134#SP ARE124#SP ARE114#SP ARE104#SP ARE094#SP ARE084#SP
Fn594 ARE234#SP ARE224#SP ARE214#SP ARE324#SP ARE194#SP ARE184#SP ARE174#SP ARE164#SP
- 2683 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn595 ARE314#SP ARE304#SP ARE294#SP ARE284#SP ARE274#SP ARE264#SP ARE254#SP ARE244#SP
~
Fn598 -OT3O +OT3O -OT2O +OT2O -OT12O +OT12O -OT11O +OT11O
Fn599 OTSWFN
~
Fn708 RE08O#SP RE07O#SP RE06O#SP RE05O#SP RE04O#SP RE03O#SP RE02O#SP RE01O#SP
Fn709 RE16O#SP RE15O#SP RE14O#SP RE13O#SP RE12O#SP RE11O#SP RE10O#SP RE09O#SP
Fn710 RE24O#SP RE23O#SP RE22O#SP RE21O#SP RE20O#SP RE19O#SP RE18O#SP RE17O#SP
Fn711 RE32O#SP RE31O#SP RE30O#SP RE29O#SP RE28O#SP RE27O#SP RE26O#SP RE25O#SP
Fn712 RE08O2#SP RE07O2#SP RE06O2#SP RE05O2#SP RE04O2#SP RE03O2#SP RE02O2#SP RE01O2#SP
Fn713 RE16O2#SP RE15O2#SP RE14O2#SP RE13O2#SP RE12O2#SP RE11O2#SP RE10O2#SP RE09O2#SP
Fn714 RE24O2#SP RE23O2#SP RE22O2#SP RE21O2#SP RE20O2#SP RE19O2#SP RE18O2#SP RE17O2#SP
Fn715 RE32O2#SP RE31O2#SP RE30O2#SP RE29O2#SP RE28O2#SP RE27O2#SP RE26O2#SP RE25O2#SP
Fn716 RE08O3#SP RE07O3#SP RE06O3#SP RE05O3#SP RE04O3#SP RE03O3#SP RE02O3#SP RE01O3#SP
Fn717 RE16O3#SP RE15O3#SP RE14O3#SP RE13O3#SP RE12O3#SP RE11O3#SP RE10O3#SP RE09O3#SP
Fn718 RE24O3#SP RE23O3#SP RE22O3#SP RE21O3#SP RE20O3#SP RE19O3#SP RE18O3#SP RE17O3#SP
Fn719 RE32O3#SP RE31O3#SP RE30O3#SP RE29O3#SP RE28O3#SP RE27O3#SP RE26O3#SP RE25O3#SP
Fn720 RE08O4#SP RE07O4#SP RE06O4#SP RE05O4#SP RE04O4#SP RE03O4#SP RE02O4#SP RE01O4#SP
Fn721 RE16O4#SP RE15O4#SP RE14O4#SP RE13O4#SP RE12O4#SP RE11O4#SP RE10O4#SP RE09O4#SP
Fn722 RE24O4#SP RE23O4#SP RE22O4#SP RE21O4#SP RE20O4#SP RE19O4#SP RE18O4#SP RE17O4#SP
Fn723 RE32O4#SP RE31O4#SP RE30O4#SP RE29O4#SP RE28O4#SP RE27O4#SP RE26O4#SP RE25O4#SP
～
Fn747 TDCF07 TDCF06 TDCF05 TDCF04 TDCF03 TDCF02 TDCF01 TDCF00
~
Fn767
- 2684 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions)
○ : Available
● : Available only with multi path control
- : Unavailable
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
2nd feedrate override
2nd feedrate override *AFV0 to *AFV7 G013 ○ ○ 7.1.7.3
signals
G2RVX G090.0 ○ -
Tool offset direction
G2RVZ G090.1 ○ -
signal
G2RVY G090.2 ○ -
2nd geometry tool G2X G090.4 ○ -
2nd geometry tool offset 12.4.4
offset G2Z G090.5 ○ -
axis select signal
G2Y G090.6 ○ -
2nd geometry tool offset
G2SLC G090.7 ○ -
signal
2nd reference position
ZP21 to ZP28 F096 ○ ○
2nd reference position return completion signals
return/3rd, 4th 3rd reference position
ZP31 to ZP38 F098 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
reference position return completion signals
return 4th reference position
ZP41 to ZP48 F100 ○ ○
return completion signals
Absolute position detector
battery voltage zero alarm PBATZ F172.6 ○ ○
Absolute position signal
1.4.2
detection Absolute position detector
battery voltage low alarm PBATL F172.7 ○ ○
signal
Block cancel signal BCAN G297.0 ○ ○
Active block cancel Block cancel 5.11
MBCAN F297.0 ○ ○
acknowledgement signal
Actual speed display axis *ACTF1 to
Actual speed display G580 ○ ○ 14.1.15
selection signals *ACTF8
AR00 to AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○
Actual spindle speed Actual spindle speed AR002 to AR152 F202,F203 ○ ○
11.9
output signals AR003 to AR153 F206,F207 ○ ○
AR004 to AR154 F272,F273 ○ ○
AI advanced preview
AI contour control mode
control (M Series) / AI AICC F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.12
signal
contour control I/II
Alarm signal AL F001.0 ○ ○
Alarm signal 2.4
Battery alarm signal BAL F001.2 ○ ○
Signal for disabling
Angular axis control angular axis control for NOZAGC G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8
the perpendicular axis
Groove of thread
GTMSR G549.4 ○ ○
measurement signal
Re-machining thread
Arbitrary speed MRTC G549.5 ○ ○
signal 6.5.7.2
threading
Groove of thread
measurement completion GTMC F546.4 ○ ○
signal
- 2685 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Arbitrary speed Groove of thread
GTME F546.5 ○ ○ 6.5.7.2
threading measurement error signal
Spindle position save SPMST1 to G587.0 to
○ ○
start signal SPMST4 G587.3
SMSL11 to G588.0 to
○ ○
Spindle position save SMSL14 G588.3
selection signal SMSL21 to G588.4 to
Arbitrary spindle ○ ○
SMSL24 G588.7
position phase
Arbitrary spindle position 11.14.1
synchronization SPAPH1 to G587.4 to
phase synchronization ○ ○
function SPAPH4 G587.7
signal
Spindle position save SPMFN1 to
F577.0 to F577.3 ○ ○
completion signal SPMFN4
Spindle position save SPMER1 to
F577.4 to F577.7 ○ ○
error signal SPMER4
Automatic data Automatic data backup
ATBK F520.0 ○ ○
backup executing signal
AUTPHA,
Flexible synchronization
AUTPHB, G381.0 to
control automatic phase ○ ○
AUTPHC, G381.3
synchronization signals
Automatic phase AUTPHD
1.12.2
synchronization for Flexible synchronization
flexible control phase PHFINA, PHFINB,
F381.0 to F381.3 ○ ○
synchronization synchronization end PHFINC, PHFIND
control signals
Automatic phase
PHERA, PHERB,
synchronization positional F553.0 to F553.3 ○ ○ 1.12.3
PHERC, PHERD
error detection signals
Automatic tool length GAE1 G517.0 ○ ○
measurement (M Measuring position GAE2 G517.1 ○ ○
16.2
series)/ Automatic tool reached signals
GAE3 G517.2 - ○
offset (T series)
Auxiliary function code
M00 to M31 F010 to F013 ○ ○
signals
Auxiliary function strobe
MF F007.0 ○ ○
signals
DM00 F009.7 ○ ○
DM01 F009.6 ○ ○
Decode M signals
DM02 F009.5 ○ ○
DM30 F009.4 ○ ○
Spindle function code
S00 to S31 F022 to F025 ○ ○
signals
Auxiliary function/2nd Spindle function strobe
SF F007.2 ○ ○ 10.1
auxiliary function signal
Tool function code signals T00 to T31 F026 to F029 ○ ○
Tool function strobe
TF F007.3 ○ ○
signal
2nd auxiliary function
B00 to B31 F030 to F033 ○ ○
code signals
2nd auxiliary function
BF F007.7 ○ ○
strobe signal
End signal FIN G004.3 ○ ○
Distribution completion
DEN F001.3 ○ ○
signals
- 2686 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Auxiliary function lock
AFL G005.6 ○ ○
signal
Auxiliary function lock 10.2
Auxiliary function lock
MAFL F004.4 ○ ○
check signal
Auxiliary function
Auxiliary function output
output block reverse
block reverse movement ADCO F091.5 ○ ○ 5.3.6
movement for manual
enable output signal
handle retrace
Axis immediate stop start
Axis immediate stop ESTPR G203.3 ○ ○ 1.13
signal
Axis non-displayed
Axis non-display NPOS1 to NPOS8 G198 ○ ○ 14.1.19
signals
Signals for selecting the
SYNCJ1 to
manual feed axis for axis G140 ○ ○
SYNCJ8
synchronous control
Machine coordinate
SYNMT1 to
match state output F210 ○ ○
SYNMT8
signals
Axis synchronous control
SYNO1 to SYNO8 F532 ○ ○
status signals
Synchronization
SYNOF1 to
compensation enable F211 ○ ○
Axis synchronous SYNOF8
state output signals 1.6
control
Signal for indicating a
positional deviation error
SYNER F403.0 ○ ○
alarm for axis
synchronous control
Synchronous control axis
SYNC1 to SYNC8 G138 ○ ○
selection signals
Signal for disabling torque
difference alarm detection
NSYNCA G059.7 ○ ○
for axis synchronous
control
Canned cycle /
multiple repetitive Chamfering signal *CDZ G053.7 ○ - 13.8
canned cycle
Small-hole peck drilling
Canned cycle for PECK2 F066.5 - ○
cycle in progress signal 13.7
drilling
Tapping signal TAP F001.5 ○ ○
Display language switch
SLANG G581.7 ○ ○
start signal
Changing the display
Display language setting G581.0 to
language by pmc LANG1 to LANG7 ○ ○ 14.1.8
signals G581.6
signals
Display language switch
FLANG F545.0 ○ ○
completion signal
Chuck / tail stock Tail stock barrier
*TSB G060.7 ○ - 2.3.8
barrier selection signal
CNC ready signal MA F001.7 ○ ○
CNC ready signal 2.2
Servo ready signal SA F000.6 ○ ○
- 2687 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Key control selection
CNCKY G295.7 ○ ○
signal 14.1.11
Key control selection 14.1.12
CNCKYO F295.7 ○ ○
CNC screen dual status signal
display Dual display forcible end
C2SEND G295.6 ○ ○ 14.1.9
request signal
Dual display forcible end
C2SENO F295.6 ○ ○ 14.1.9
status signal
Web browser connection
WBCNT F0578.2 ○ ○
CNC screen Web status signal
18.2.7
server function Web browser connection
WBEND G0579.5 ○ ○
prohibition signal
I/O Link 1 retry
abnormality warning WIOCH1 F0535.0 ○ ○
signal
I/O Link 2 retry
abnormality warning WIOCH2 F0535.1 ○ ○
signal
I/O Link 3 retry
abnormality warning WIOCH3 F0535.2 ○ ○
signal
SRAM ECC abnormality
WECCS F0535.3 ○ ○
warning signal
Embedded Ethernet
Communication Retry
communication 19.3.2
Monitoring Function WETE F0535.4 ○ ○
abnormality warning
signal
Fast Ethernet
communication
WETF F0535.5 ○ ○
abnormality warning
signal
FL-net1 communication
abnormality warning WFLN1 F0535.6 ○ ○
signal
FL-net2 communication
abnormality warning WFLN2 F0535.7 ○ ○
signal
Constant surface Constant surface speed
CSS F002.2 ○ ○ 11.8
speed control signal
Controlled axis detach
DTCH1 to DTCH8 G124 ○ ○
signals 1.2.5,
Controlled axis detach
Controlled axis detach MDTCH1 to 1.15
F110 ○ ○
status signals MDTCH8
Cs contour control
CON G027.7 ○ ○
change signal
CONS1 G274.0 ○ ○
Cs contour control
CONS2 G274.1 ○ ○
Cs contour control change signal (for each 11.11
CONS3 G274.2 ○ ○
spindle)
CONS4 G274.3 ○ ○
Cs contour control
FSCSL F044.1 ○ ○
change completion signal
- 2688 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
FCSS1 F274.0 ○ ○
Cs contour control
FCSS2 F274.1 ○ ○
Cs contour control change completion signal 11.11
FCSS3 F274.2 ○ ○
(for each spindle)
FCSS4 F274.3 ○ ○
CSFI1 G274.4 ○ ○
Cs axis coordinate
CSFI2 G274.5 ○ ○
establishment request
CSFI3 G274.6 ○ ○
signals
CSFI4 G274.7 ○ ○
CSFO1 F274.4 ○ ○
Cs contour control Cs axis coordinate
CSFO2 F274.5 ○ ○
axis coordinate establishment alarm 11.11.4
CSFO3 F274.6 ○ ○
establishment signals
CSFO4 F274.7 ○ ○
CSPENA F048.4 ○ ○
Cs axis origin established CSPENB F052.4 ○ ○
state signals CSPENC F171.4 ○ ○
CSPEND F269.4 ○ ○
UI000 to UI031 G054 to G057 ○ ○
Custom macro input UI100 to UI131 G276 to G279 ○ ○
signals UI200 to UI231 G280 to G283 ○ ○
UI300 to UI331 G284 to G287 ○ ○
Custom macro F054,F055, 13.6
UO000 to UO031 ○ ○
F276,F277
Custom macro output
UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059 ○ ○
signals
UO200 to UO231 F280 to F283 ○ ○
UO300 to UO331 F284 to F287 ○ ○
Cycle start signal ST G007.2 ○ ○
Feed hold signal *SP G008.5 ○ ○
Automatic operation
Cycle start / feed hold OP F000.7 ○ ○ 5.1
signal
Cycle start lamp signal STL F000.5 ○ ○
Feed hold lamp signal SPL F000.4 ○ ○
DI signal for Data transfer
TPMG00 to
between PMC and G765 ○ ○
TPMG07
Data transfer between DCSPMC
17.9
PMC and DCSPMC DO signal for Data
TDCF00 to
transfer between PMC F747 ○ ○
TDCF07
and DCSPMC
DeviceNet
communication normal DNTCM F290.2 ○ ○
signal
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Master
communication abnormal DNTER F545.4 ○ ○
function
signal
DeviceNet
communication error clear DNTCLR G518.4 ○ ○
signal
Direct input of tool
Position record signal PRC G040.6 ○ - 16.4.1
offset value measured
G039.0 to
Tool offset number OFN0 to OFN5, G039.5,
Direct input of tool ○ -
selection signals OFN6 to OFN9 G040.0 to
offset value measured 16.4.2
G040.3
B
Tool offset write mode
GOQSM G039.7 ○ -
select signal
- 2689 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Workpiece coordinate
system shift value write WOQSM G039.6 ○ -
mode select signal
+MIT1,-MIT1 X004.2,X004.3
+MIT2,-MIT2 X004.4,X004.5
G132.0 to
Tool offset write signals ○ -
+MIT1 to +MIT2 G132.1
-MIT1 to -MIT2 G134.0 to
G134.1
Direct input of tool Spindle measurement
S2TLS G040.5 ○ -
offset value measured select signal 16.4.2
B Workpiece coordinate
system shift value write WOSET G040.7 ○ -
signal
Tool compensation
number specification ONSC G547.6 ○ -
signal
Spindle 1 under
S1MES F062.3 ○ -
measurement signal
Spindle 2 under
S2MES F062.4 ○ -
measurement signal
Direct operation by
Direct operation select
personal computer DMMC G042.7 ○ ○ 5.15
signal
function
DNC operation select
DNCI G043.5 ○ ○ 5.15, 5.16
signal
DNC operation selection 5.15,
DNC operation MRMT F003.4 ○ ○
confirm signal 5.16, 5.17
External device program
DVCPR F531.6 ○ ○ 5.14
execution signal
Dry run signal DRN G046.7 ○ ○
Dry run 5.3.2
Dry run check signal MDRN F002.7 ○ ○
Turning mode selection
HBTRN G531.3 ○ ○
Dual position signal
1.10
feedback Compensation clamp
*CL1 to *CL8 G548 ○ ○
signals
Each axis workpiece
WPRST1 to
coordinate system preset G358 ○ ○
Each axis workpiece WPRST8
signals
coordinate system 1.5.2.6
Each axis workpiece
preset signals
coordinate system preset WPSF1 to WPSF8 F358 ○ ○
completion signals
Retract signal RTRCT G066.4 ○ ○
1.10, 6.22
Electronic gear box Retract completion signal RTRCTF F065.4 ○ ○
EGB mode signal SYNMOD F065.6 - ○ 1.9
EGB synchronization start 1.10.7,
EGBS1 to EGBS8 G530 ○ ○
Signal-based servo signals 1.10.8
EGB synchronous 1.10.5,
EGB mode confirmation
control EGBM1 to EGBM8 F208 ○ ○ 1.10.7,
signals
1.10.8
G008.4 ○ ○
Emergency stop Emergency stop signals *ESP 2.1
X008.4, .0, .1 ○ ○
Extended external Extended external Specifying by
machine zero point machine zero point shift EMZ0 to EMZ15 parameter ○ ○ 17.3
shift signal No.1280.
- 2690 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Address signals for G002.6 to
EA6 to EA0 ○ ○
external data input G002.0
Data signals for external G211,G210,
ED31 to ED0 ○ ○
data input G001,G000
Read signal for external
ESTB G002.7 ○ ○
data input
External data input 17.2
Read completion signal
EREND F060.0 ○ ○
for external data input
Search completion signal
ESEND F060.1 ○ ○
for external data input
Search cancel signal for
ESCAN F060.2 ○ ○
external data input
External deceleration *+ED1 to *+ED8 G118 ○ ○
signals 1 *-ED1 to *-ED8 G120 ○ ○
External deceleration *+ED21 to *+ED28 G101 ○ ○
signals 2 *-ED21 to *-ED28 G103 ○ ○
External deceleration *+ED31 to *+ED38 G107 ○ ○
External deceleration 7.1.10
signals 3 *-ED31 to *-ED38 G109 ○ ○
External deceleration *+ED41 to *+ED48 G341 ○ ○
signals 4 *-ED41 to *-ED48 G342 ○ ○
External deceleration *+ED51 to *+ED58 G343 ○ ○
signals 5 *-ED51 to *-ED58 G344 ○ ○
External input start signal EXINP G058.1 ○ ○
External input/output stop
EXSTP G058.2 ○ ○
signal
External I/O device External output start
EXOUT G058.3 ○ ○ 15.2
control signal
Input/output busy signal IOBSY F053.2 ○ ○
Input/output alarm signal IOALM F053.3 ○ ○
Background editing signal BGEACT F053.4 ○ ○
External key input mode
ENBKY G066.1 ○ ○
selection signal
Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7 G098 ○ ○
Key code read signal EKSET G066.7 ○ ○
External key input Key code read completion 17.6
EKENB F053.7 ○ ○
signal
Key input disable signal INHKY F053.0 ○ ○
Program screen display
PRGDPL F053.1 ○ ○
mode signal
External workpiece PN1,PN2,PN4, G009.0 to
○ ○
number search signals PN8,PN16 G009.4
Extended external
G024.0 to
External workpiece workpiece number search EPN0 to EPN13 ○ ○
G025.5 17.5
number search signals
External workpiece
number search start EPNS G025.7 ○ ○
signal
Alarm level detection
Fan Motor SFAN F093.1 ○ ○
signal
Abnormality 19.3
Warning level detection
Monitoring Function WFAN F093.3 ○ ○
signal
Feedrate override Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
- 2691 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Removal start signal RMVST G536.2 ○ ○
Assignment start signal ASNST G536.3 ○ ○
Exchange start signal EXCST G536.4 ○ ○
Direct assignment mode
DASN G536.5 ○ ○
signal
Removal completion
Flexible path axis RMVED F536.2 ○ ○
signal 1.14
assignment
Assignment completion
ASNED F536.3 ○ ○
signal
Exchange completion
EXCED F536.4 ○ ○
signal
Initial axis assignment
INIST F536.7 ○ ○
signal
Flexible synchronization
MTA,MTB,MTC, G197.0 to
control mode selection ○ ○
MTD G197.3
Flexible signals
synchronization MFSYNA, 1.12
Flexible synchronization
control MFSYNB,
control mode status F197.0 to F197.3 ○ ○
MFSYNC,
signals
MFSYND
Follow-up Follow-up signal *FLWU G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.7
Function of
Power failure deceleration
deceleration stop in PWFL G203.7 ○ ○ 1.11
signal
case of power failure
Speed-up of
G code preventing
non-buffering command NHSW G579.6 ○ ○ 13.22
buffering
by G code invalid signal
Handle-synchronous feed
HREV G023.4 ○ ○
signal
Handle-synchronous Selecting direction of
3.5
feed manual handle rotation HDSR G193.3 ○ ○
signal
Feed zero signal FEED0 F066.2 ○ ○
Oscillation feedrate G051.0 to
*CHP1 to *CHP8 ○ ○
override signals G051.3
Oscillation start signal CHPST G051.6 ○ ○
High precision
Oscillation hold signal *CHLD G051.7 ○ ○ 1.15
oscillation function
Oscillation -in-progress
CHPMD F039.2 ○ ○
signal
Oscillation cycle signal CHPCYL F039.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function
MFIN G005.0 ○ ○
completion signal
Spindle function
SFIN G005.2 ○ ○
completion signal
Tool function completion
TFIN G005.3 ○ ○
signal
High-speed M/S/T/B 2nd auxiliary function
BFIN G005.7 ○ ○ 10.4
interface completion signal
2nd M function
MFIN2 G004.4 ○ ○
completion signal
3rd M function completion
MFIN3 G004.5 ○ ○
signal
4th M function completion
MFIN4 G004.6 ○ ○
signal
- 2692 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
High-speed M/S/T/B 5th M function completion
MFIN5 G004.7 ○ ○ 10.4
interface signal
High-speed position High-speed position F293,F294 ○ ○ 1.2.11
HPS01 to HPS16
switch switch signals Yxxx,Yxxx+1 ○ ○ 1.2.12
High-speed program
PGCK G290.5 ○ ○
check signal
High speed program High speed program
PRGMD F290.5 ○ ○ 5.3.4
check check mode signal
High speed program
PCKSV F290.4 ○ ○
check saving data signal
High-speed skip High-speed skip status
HDO0 to HDO7 F122 ○ ○ 16.3.3
signal signals
Inch/metric conversion Inch input signal INCH F002.0 ○ ○ 13.5
B axis clamp signal BCLP F061.1 - ○
B axis clamp completion
*BECLP G038.7 - ○
Index table indexing signal
13.12
function B axis unclamp signal BUCLP F061.0 - ○
B axis unclamp
*BEUCP G038.6 - ○
completion signal
In-feed control (for In-feed control cut start
INFD G063.6 - ○ 13.9
grinding machine) signal
In-position signals INP1 to INP8 F104 ○ ○
In-position check signal SMZ G053.6 ○ ○
In-position check 7.2.6
In-position check disable
NOINPS G023.5 ○ ○
signal
Path interference check G406.0 to
ITF01 to ITF10 ● -
association signal G407.1
Path interference check in
Interference check TICHK F064.6 ● - 8.4
progress signal
Path interference alarm
TIALM F064.7 ● -
signal
Start lock signal STLK G007.1 ○ ○
Interlock signal for all
*IT G008.0 ○ ○
axes
Interlock signal for each
*IT1 to *IT8 G130 ○ ○
axis
Interlock 2.5
Interlock signal for each +MIT1 to +MIT8 G132
- ○
axis direction -MIT1 to -MIT8 G134
Cutting block start
*CSL G008.1 ○ ○
interlock signal
Block start interlock signal *BSL G008.3 ○ ○
Interrupt type custom Interrupt signal for custom
UINT G053.3 ○ ○ 13.6.3
macro macro
Inter-path flexible
synchronization mode OVLN G531.4 ● ●
Inter-path flexible
select signal
synchronization 1.12.4
Inter-path flexible
control
synchronization mode OVLNS F545.1 ● ●
signal
I/O Link βi Manual Manual handle
handle interface generators selection IOLBH1, IOLBH2 G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○
3.9
(Peripheral equipment signal
control interface) β ready signal IOLBR F531.7 ○ ○
- 2693 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Feed axis and direction +J1 to +J8 G100 ○ ○
selection signals -J1 to -J8 G102 ○ ○
Jog feed/incremental Manual feedrate override
*JV0 to *JV15 G010,G011 ○ ○ 3.1
feed signals
Manual rapid traverse
RT G019.7 ○ ○
selection signal
All-axis machine lock
MLK G044.1 ○ ○
signal
Each-axis machine lock
Machine lock MLK1 to MLK8 G108 ○ ○ 5.3.1
signal
All-axis machine lock
MMLK F004.1 ○ ○
check signal
Input signals for P-code
EUI00 to EUI15 G082,G083 ○ ○
macro
Macro executor 13.17
Output signals for P-code
EUO00 to EUO15 F084,F085 ○ ○
macro
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th
reference position return SLREF G340.5 ○ ○
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th
select 1 signal
reference position 4.13
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th
return function
reference position return SLRER G340.6 ○ ○
select 2 signal
Manual absolute signal *ABSM G006.2 ○ ○
Manual absolute
Manual absolute check 5.4
on/off MABSM F004.2 ○ ○
signal
G018.0 to
HS1A to HS1D,
G018.3, ○ ○
HS1E
G411.0
G018.4 to
HS2A to HS2D,
G018.7, ○ ○
HS2E
G411.1
G019.0 to
Manual handle feed axis HS3A to HS3D,
G019.3, ○ ○ 3.2
selection signals HS3E
G411.2
G020.0 to
HS4A to HS4D,
G020.3, ○ ○
HS4E
G411.3
G379.0 to
HS5A to HS5D,
Manual handle feed G379.3, ○ ○
HS5E
G412.0
Manual handle feed
G019.4,G019.5 3.2, 3.5,
amount selection signals MP1,MP2,MP4 ○ ○
G019.6 3.9
(incremental feed signals)
MP21, MP22 G087.0,G087.1
Manual handle feed MP31, MP32 G087.3,G087.4
○ ○ 3.2
amount selection signals MP41, MP42 G087.6,G087.7
MP51, MP52 G380.0,G380.1
Manual handle feed
3.2
maximum feedrate HNDLF G023.3 ○ ○
7.1.10
change signal
Manual handle feed
HDN G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2
direction inversion signal
- 2694 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
G041.0 to
HS1IA to HS1ID,
G041.3, ○ ○
HS1IE
G411.4
G041.4 to
HS2IA to HS2ID,
G041.7, ○ ○
HS2IE
G411.5
G042.0 to
Manual handle interrupt HS3IA to HS3ID,
G042.3, ○ ○ 3.3
axis selection signals HS3IE
G411.6
G088.4 to
HS4IA to HS4ID,
G088.7, ○ ○
HS4IE
Manual handle G411.7
interrupt G379.4 to
HS5IA to HS5ID,
G379.7, ○ ○
HS5IE
G412.4
3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion
manual interrupt NOT3DM G347.7 ○ ○
enable/disable switch
signal 3.3.1
3-dimensional coordinate
conversion manual
D3MI F347.7 ○ ○
interrupt mode
in-progress signal
Checking mode signal MMOD G067.2 ○ ○
Manual handle check
MCHK G067.3 ○ ○
signal
Forward movement
FWSTP G531.0 ○ ○
prohibition signal
5.3.5
Reverse movement
MRVM G531.1 ○ ○
prohibition signal
Manual handle retrace
Reverse movement signal MRVMD F091.0 ○ ○
Direction change
MNCHG F091.1 ○ ○
prohibition signal
Reverse movement
MRVSP F091.2 ○ ○
prohibition signal
5.3.5
Check mode confirmation
MMMOD F091.3 ○ ○
signal
Feed axis and direction G086.0 to
+Jg, -Jg, +Ja, -Ja ○ ○ 3.4
selection signals G086.3
Manual linear/circular G544.0 to
Manual linear/circular MHLC1 to MHLC5 ○ ○
interpolation signals G544.4
interpolation
Usage selection of 3.4, 3.5
G545.0 to
manual linear/circular MHUS1 to MHUS5 ○ ○
G545.4
interpolation signals
Manual reference position
ZRN G043.7 ○ ○
return selection signal
Manual reference position
return selection check MREF F004.5 ○ ○
Manual reference
signal 4.1
position return
Reference position return G196 ○ ○
*DEC1 to *DEC8
deceleration signals X009 ○ ○
Reference position return
ZP1 to ZP8 F094 ○ ○
end signals
- 2695 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Manual reference Reference position
ZRF1 to ZRF8 F120 ○ ○ 4.1
position return establishment signals
G046.3 to 14.1.3
Memory protection Memory protection KEY1 to KEY4 ○ ○
G046.6 14.2.1
key signals
KEYP G046.0 ○ ○ 14.2.2
Mirror image signals MI1 to MI8 G106 ○ ○
Mirror image Mirror image check 1.2.6
MMI1 to MMI8 F108 ○ ○
signals
G043.0 to
Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 ○ ○
G043.2
Manual data input
MMDI F003.3 ○ ○
selection check signal
Automatic operation
MMEM F003.5 ○ ○
selection check signal
Program edit selection
Mode selection MEDT F003.6 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
Manual handle feed
MH F003.1 ○ ○
selection check signal
Incremental feed
MINC F003.0 ○ ○
selection check signal
Jog feed selection check
MJ F003.2 ○ ○
signal
2nd M function code M200 to M215 F014,F015 ○ ○
signals M200 to M231 F014 to F018 ○ ○
3rd M function code M300 to M315 F016,F017 ○ ○
signals M300 to M331 F564 to F567 ○ ○
4th M function code
M400 to M431 F568 to F571 ○ ○
signals
5th M function code
M500 to M531 F572 to F575 ○ ○
Multiple M commands signals
10.3
in a single block 2nd M function strobe
MF2 F008.4 ○ ○
signal
3rd M function strobe
MF3 F008.5 ○ ○
signal
4th M function strobe
MF4 F008.6 ○ ○
signal
5th M function strobe
MF5 F008.7 ○ ○
signal
SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○
SWS2 G027.1 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals
SWS3 G027.2 ○ ○
SWS4 G026.3 ○ ○
*SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○
Individual spindle stop *SSTP2 G027.4 ○ ○
signals *SSTP3 G027.5 ○ ○
Multi-spindle control *SSTP4 G026.6 ○ ○ 11.12
GR21,GR22 G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○
Gear selection signals
GR31,GR32 G029.2,G029.3 ○ ○
(input)
GR41,GR42 G031.4,G031.5 ○ ○
2nd position coder
PC2SLC G028.7 ○ ○
selection signal
3rd position coder
PC3SLC G026.0 ○ ○
selection signal
- 2696 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
4th position coder
PC4SLC G026.1 ○ ○
selection signal
2nd spindle speed
SOV20 to SOV27 G376 ○ ○
override signals
3rd spindle speed
SOV30 to SOV37 G377 ○ ○
override signals
4th spindle speed
SOV40 to SOV47 G378 ○ ○
override signals
Spindle command path
Multi-spindle control SPSP G536.7 ○ ○ 11.12
specification signal
ENB2 F038.2 ○ ○
Spindle enable signal ENB3 F038.3 ○ ○
ENB4 F039.1 ○ ○
R01O2 to R12O2 F200.0 to F201.3 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals R01O3 to R12O3 F204.0 to F205.3 ○ ○
R01O4 to R12O4 F270.0 to F271.3 ○ ○
Multi-spindle address P
MSP00 to MSP15 F160,F161 ○ ○
signals
SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○
Multi-step skip SKIP X004.7 ○ ○
Skip signal 16.3.5
function SKIP2 to SKIP6, X004.2 to X004.6
○ ○
SKIP7,SKIP8 X004.0,X004.1
NC data output
NC data output signal ALLO F578.5 ○ ○ 15.3
function
One-digit F code feed
One-digit F code feed F1D G016.7 - ○ 7.1.5
signal
MCST1 to
Macro call start signal G512,G513 ○ ○
MCST16
Mode change completion
MCFIN G514.0 ○ ○
signal
Macro call executing
MCEXE F512.0 ○ ○
signal
Mode change request
MCRQ F512.1 ○ ○
signal
One touch macro call 17.7
MD1R F513.0 ○ ○
MD2R F513.1 ○ ○
Mode notification signal MD4R F513.2 ○ ○
DNCIR F513.5 ○ ○
ZRNR F513.7 ○ ○
Abnormal end signal MCSP F512.2 ○ ○
Call program confirmation MCEX1 to
F514,F515 ○ ○
signal MCEX16
Start check signal STCHK G408.0 ○ ○
Operator error prevent 2.13
Middle block start signal MBSO F534.4 ○ ○
Optional block skip BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○
Optional block
signals BDT2 to BDT9 G045 ○ ○
skip/addition of 5.5
Optional block skip check MBDT1 F004.0 ○ ○
optional block skip
signals MBDT2 to MBDT9 F005 ○ ○
Outputting the Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 F102 ○ ○
movement state of an Axis moving direction 1.2.5
MVD1 to MVD8 F106 ○ ○
axis signals
Override cancel Override cancel signal OVC G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
*+L1 to *+L8 G114 ○ ○
Overtravel Overtravel signals 2.3.1
*-L1 to *-L8 G116 ○ ○
- 2697 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Path select signal 8.15,
Path select HEAD G063.0 ● ●
(Tool post select signal) 14.3
Path spindle command SLSPA,SLSPB, G063.2,G063.3,
● ●
selection signals SLSPC,SLSPD G403.0,G403.1
Path spindle feedback SLPCA,SLPCB, G064.2,G064.3,
● ●
selection signals SLPCC,SLPCD G403.4,G403.5
Path spindle command
Path spindle control COSP F064.5 ● ● 8.11
confirmation signal
COSP1 F063.3 ● ●
Path spindle command COSP2 F063.4 ● ●
confirmation signal COSP3 F404.0 ● ●
COSP4 F404.1 ● ●
Polygon spindle stop
*PLSST G038.0 ○ ○
signal
Polygon spindle speed
PSAR F063.2 ○ ○
arrival signal
Paths polygon turning 6.9.2
Polygon master axis not
PSE1 F063.0 ○ ○
arrival signal
Polygon synchronization
PSE2 F063.1 ○ ○
axis not arrival signal
Periodic Maintenance Periodic maintenance
LIFOVR F093.0 ○ ○ 14.1.18
Screen lifetime warning signal
Peripheral axis control
PE1EX F534.5 ○ ○
group 1 start signal
Peripheral axis control
Peripheral axis control PE2EX F534.6 ○ ○ 1.20
group 2 start signal
Peripheral axis control
PE3EX F534.7 ○ ○
group 3 start signal
Control axis selection
signals (PMC axis EAX1 to EAX8 G136 ○ ○
control)
G143.0 to
EC0A to EC6A ○ ○
G143.6
Axis control command G155.0 to
EC0B to EC6B ○ ○
signals G155.6
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC G167.0 to
EC0C to EC6C ○ ○
axis control) G167.6
G179.0 to
EC0D to EC6D ○ ○
PMC axis control / G179.6
PMC axis speed Axis control feedrate EIF0A to EIF15A G144 to G145 ○ ○ 17.1
control function signals EIF0B to EIF15B G156 to G157 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EIF0C to EIF15C G168 to G169 ○ ○
axis control) EIF0D to EIF15D G180 to G181 ○ ○
Axis control command EBUFA G142.7 ○ ○
read signal EBUFB G154.7 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EBUFC G166.7 ○ ○
axis control) EBUFD G178.7 ○ ○
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 ○ ○
Axis control data signals
EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 ○ ○
axis control)
EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 ○ ○
- 2698 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Axis control command EBSYA F130.7 ○ ○
read completion signals EBSYB F133.7 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EBSYC F136.7 ○ ○
axis control) EBSYD F139.7 ○ ○
ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○
Reset signal
ECLRB G154.6 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
ECLRC G166.6 ○ ○
axis control)
ECLRD G178.6 ○ ○
Axis control temporary ESTPA G142.5 ○ ○
stop signal ESTPB G154.5 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC ESTPC G166.5 ○ ○
axis control) ESTPD G178.5 ○ ○
ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○
Block stop signal
ESBKB G154.3 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
ESBKC G166.3 ○ ○
axis control)
ESBKD G178.3 ○ ○
EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○
Block stop disable signal
EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○
axis control)
EMSBKD G179.7 ○ ○
Auxiliary function code EM11A to EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○
signals EM11B to EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EM11C to EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○
axis control) EM11D to EM48D F141,F151 ○ ○
PMC axis control / Auxiliary function strobe EMFA F131.0 ○ ○
PMC axis speed signal EMFB F134.0 ○ ○ 17.1
control function (for group 1 to 4) (PMC EMFC F137.0 ○ ○
axis control) EMFD F140.0 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 2 strobe EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○
signal EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○
axis control) EMF2D F140.2 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 3 strobe EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○
signal EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EMF3C F137.3 ○ ○
axis control) EMF3D F140.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function EFINA G142.0 ○ ○
completion signal EFINB G154.0 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EFINC G166.0 ○ ○
axis control) EFIND G178.0 ○ ○
ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○
Servo-off signal
ESOFB G154.4 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
ESOFC G166.4 ○ ○
axis control)
ESOFD G178.4 ○ ○
EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○
Buffering disable signal
EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○
axis control)
EMBUFD G178.2 ○ ○
Controlled axis selection
status signals (PMC axis *EAXSL F129.7 ○ ○
control)
- 2699 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
EINPA F130.0 ○ ○
In-position signal
EINPB F133.0 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EINPC F136.0 ○ ○
axis control)
EINPD F139.0 ○ ○
Following zero checking ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○
signals ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○
axis control) ECKZD F139.1 ○ ○
EIALA F130.2 ○ ○
Alarm signal
EIALB F133.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EIALC F136.2 ○ ○
axis control)
EIALD F139.2 ○ ○
EGENA F130.4 ○ ○
Axis moving signals
EGENB F133.4 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EGENC F136.4 ○ ○
axis control)
EGEND F139.4 ○ ○
Auxiliary function EDENA F130.3 ○ ○
executing signals EDENB F133.3 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EDENC F136.3 ○ ○
axis control) EDEND F139.3 ○ ○
Negative-direction EOTNA F130.6 ○ ○
overtravel signals EOTNB F133.6 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EOTNC F136.6 ○ ○
PMC axis control / axis control) EOTND F139.6 ○ ○
PMC axis speed ○ ○ 17.1
Positive-direction EOTPA F130.5
control function
overtravel signals EOTPB F133.5 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EOTPC F136.5 ○ ○
axis control) EOTPD F139.5 ○ ○
*EFOV0 to
G151 ○ ○
*EFOV7
*EFOV0B to
Feedrate override signals G163 ○ ○
*EFOV7B
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
*EFOV0C to
axis control) G175 ○ ○
*EFOV7C
*EFOV0D to
G187 ○ ○
*EFOV7D
*EROV0 to
G151 ○ ○
*EROV7
1% step rapid traverse *EROV0B to
G163 ○ ○
override signals *EROV7B
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC *EROV0C to
G175 ○ ○
axis control) *EROV7C
*EROV0D to
G187 ○ ○
*EROV7D
EOVC G150.5 ○ ○
Override cancellation
signal EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○
axis control) EOVCD G186.5 ○ ○
- 2700 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Rapid traverse override
signals (PMC axis EROV1,EROV2 G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○
control)
Dry run signal (PMC axis
EDRN G150.7 ○ ○
control)
Manual rapid traverse
selection signal (PMC ERT G150.6 ○ ○
axis control)
Override 0% signal (PMC
EOV0 F129.5 ○ ○
axis control)
Skip signal (PMC axis
ESKIP X004.6 ○ ○
control)
Distribution completion
EADEN1 to
signals (PMC axis F112 ○ ○
EADEN8
control)
EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○
PMC axis control / Buffer full signals
EABUFB F134.1 ○ ○
PMC axis speed (for group 1 to 4) (PMC 17.1
EABUFC F137.1 ○ ○
control function axis control)
EABUFD F140.1 ○ ○
Controlling signals (PMC EACNT1 to
F182 ○ ○
axis control) EACNT8
Accumulated zero check ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○
signal ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○
axis control) ELCKZD G178.1 ○ ○
Torque control mode
TRQM1 to TRQM8 F190 ○ ○
signal (PMC axis control)
A/B phase detector
disconnection alarm NDCAL1 to
G202 ○ ○
ignore signal (PMC axis NDCAL8
control)
Manual pulse
magnification change HNDMP G088.3 ○ ○
signal
Polygon synchronization
Polygon turning PSYN F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9
under way signal
Position switch Position switch signals PSW01 to PSW16 F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.9
Program restart signal SRN G006.0 ○ ○
Program restart under
SRNMV F002.4 ○ ○
way signal
Program restart MDI
Program restart program output SQMPR F316.6 ○ ○ 5.6
completion signal
Program restart MDI
program execution SQMPE F316.7 ○ ○
completion signal
Quick program restart
Quick program restart SRNEX Fn534.1 ○ ○ 5.7
under way signal
Rapid traverse block Rapid traverse block 7.2.1.2
ROVLP G053.5 ○ ○
overlap overlap disable signal 7.2.1.3
- 2701 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Rapid traverse override
ROV1,ROV2 G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
signals
1% step rapid traverse
HROV G096.7 ○ ○
override selection signals 7.1.7.1
1% rapid traverse *HROV0 to G096.0 to 7.1.9
○ ○
Rapid traverse override signals *HROV6 G096.6
override 0.1% step rapid traverse
FHROV G353.7 ○ ○
override selection signal
G352.0 to
7.1.7.1
0.1% rapid traverse *FHRO0 to G352.7
○ ○
override signals *FHRO9 G353.0 to
G353.1
Reference point Torque limit reach signals
CLRCH1 to
setting with for reference point setting F180 ○ ○ 4.7, 4.8
CLRCH8
mechanical stopper with mechanical stopper
Reference position match
RP11 to RP18 F517.0 to F517.7 ○ ○
Reference position signals
4.11
signal output function 2nd reference position
RP21 to RP28 F518.0 to F518.7 ○ ○
match signals
External reset signal ERS G008.7 ○ ○
MDI reset confirmation
MDIRST F006.1 ○ ○
signal
Reset and rewind 5.2
Reset & rewind signal RRW G008.6 ○ ○
Resetting signal RST F001.1 ○ ○
Rewinding signal RWD F000.0 ○ ○
RE01O to
F708 to F711 ○ ○
RE32O
RE01O2 to
F712 to F715 ○ ○
RE32O2
S 32-bit code signals
RE01O3 to
F716 to F719 ○ ○
RE32O3
RE01O4 to
F720 to F723 ○ ○
RE32O4
ARE00 to
F580 to F583 ○ ○
Resolution of spindle ARE31
11.27
speed command ARE002 to
F584 to F587 ○ ○
Extended actual spindle ARE312
speed signals ARE003 to
F588 to F591 ○ ○
ARE313
ARE004 to
F592 to F595 ○ ○
ARE314
RE01I to RE32I G708 to G711 ○ ○
Extended spindle motor RE01I2 to RE32I2 G712 to G715 ○ ○
speed command signals RE01I3 to RE32I3 G716 to G719 ○ ○
RE01I4 to RE32I4 G720 to G723 ○ ○
Reverse execution signal RVS G007.0 - ○
Retrace 5.10
Reverse movement signal RVSL F082.2 - ○
- 2702 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Rigid tapping retraction
RTNT G062.6 ○ ○
Retraction for Rigid start signal
5.14, 5.18
tapping Rigid tapping retraction
RTPT F066.1 ○ ○
completion signal
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP G061.0 ○ ○
Spindle rotation direction RGSPP F065.0 ○ ○
signals RGSPM F065.1 ○ ○
Rigid tapping Rigid tapping-in-progress 11.13
RTAP F076.3 ○ ○
signal
Rigid tapping spindle RGTSP1 to G061.4 to
○ -
selection signals RGTSP4 G061.7
Target part count reached
PRTSF F062.7 ○ ○
signal
Run hour and part
General-purpose 14.1.1
count display
integrating meter start TMRON G053.0 ○ ○
signal
Screen erasure disable
*CRTOF G062.1 ○ ○
signal
Screen erasure 14.1.13
Automatic screen erasure
ERTVA F006.2 ○ ○
status in-progress signal
Hard copy cancellation
HCABT G067.6 ○ ○
request signal
Hard copy execution
HCREQ G067.7 ○ ○
Screen hard copy request signal
14.1.14
function Hard copy cancellation
HCAB2 F061.2 ○ ○
request reception signal
Hard copy execution
HCEXE F061.3 ○ ○
status signal
SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○
Servo warning Servo warning detail SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○
19.1
interface signals SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○
SVWRN4 F093.7 ○ ○
Servo off / mechanical
Servo off signals SVF1 to SVF8 G126 ○ ○ 1.2.8
handle feed
Servo motor rotation
G021.0 to
speed specification SVR01I to SVR12I ○ ○
G022.3
signals
Differential speed
synchronization DFSYC G022.4 ○ ○
command signal
Servo motor rotation
polarity specification SVGN G022.5 ○ ○
signal
Servo motor spindle
Servo/Spindle SVSP G022.7 ○ ○
control switching signal 11.22.1
synchronous control
Servo motor spindle
synchronization start SYSS G061.2 ○ ○
signal
Servo motor spindle
synchronization mode
SYAR F090.4 ○ ○
acceleration/deceleration
completion signal
Servo motor spindle
synchronization mode SYSSM F090.5 ○ ○
signal
- 2703 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Servo motor spindle
control mode
SVAR F090.6 ○ ○
Servo/Spindle acceleration/deceleration
11.22.1
synchronous control completion signal
Servo motor spindle
SVSPM F090.7 ○ ○
control mode signal
Phase synchronization for
Servo/Spindle SYPST G517.7 ○ ○
synchronous start signal
Phase synchronization for
Phase synchronization
Servo/Spindle
for Servo/Spindle SYPFN F527.6 ○ ○ 11.22.3
synchronous finished
synchronous control
signal
Phase synchronization for
Servo/Spindle SYPER F527.7 ○ ○
synchronous error signal
Simple spindle EGB SSEGB1 to G351.0 to
○ ○
Simple spindle signals SSEGB4 G351.3
11.24
electronic gear box Simple spindle EGB SSEGBM1 to
F351.0 to F351.3 ○ ○
mode signals SSEGBM4
Single block signal SBK G046.1 ○ ○
Single block 5.3.3
Single block check signal MSBK F004.3 ○ ○
SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○
Skip function Skip signal 16.3
SKIP X004.7 ○ ○
Software operator’s panel
MD1O F073.0 ○ ○
signal (MD1)
Software operator’s panel
MD2O F073.1 ○ ○
signal (MD2)
Software operator’s panel
MD4O F073.2 ○ ○
signal (MD4)
Software operator’s panel
ZRNO F073.4 ○ ○
signal (ZRN)
Software operator’s panel F081.0,F081.2,
+J1O to +J4O ○ ○
signal (+J1 to +J4) F081.4,F081.6
Software operator’s panel F081.1,F081.3,
-J1O to -J4O ○ ○
signal (-J1 to -J4) F081.5,F081.7
Software operator’s panel
RTO F077.6 ○ ○
signal (RT)
Software operator's Software operator’s panel
HS1AO F077.0 ○ ○ 14.1.2
panel signal (HS1A)
Software operator’s panel
HS1BO F077.1 ○ ○
signal (HS1B)
Software operator’s panel
HS1CO F077.2 ○ ○
signal (HS1C)
Software operator’s panel
HS1DO F077.3 ○ ○
signal (HS1D)
Software operator’s panel
MP1O F076.0 ○ ○
signal (MP1)
Software operator’s panel
MP2O F076.1 ○ ○
signal (MP2)
Software operator’s panel
*JV0O to *JV15O F079,F080 ○ ○
signal (*JV0 to *JV15)
Software operator’s panel
*FV0O to *FV7O F078 ○ ○
signal (*FV0 to *FV7)
- 2704 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Software operator’s panel
ROV1O F076.4 ○ ○
signal (ROV1)
Software operator’s panel
ROV2O F076.5 ○ ○
signal (ROV2)
Software operator’s panel
BDTO F075.2 ○ ○
signal (BDT)
Software operator’s panel
SBKO F075.3 ○ ○
signal (SBK)
Software operator’s panel
Software operator's MLKO F075.4 ○ ○
signal (MLK) 14.1.2
panel
Software operator’s panel
DRNO F075.5 ○ ○
signal (DRN)
Software operator’s panel
KEYO F075.6 ○ ○
signal (KEY1 to KEY4)
Software operator’s panel
SPO F075.7 ○ ○
signal (*SP)
Software operator’s panel
general-purpose switch OUT0 to OUT15 F072,F074 ○ ○
signals
Speed display function
Speed display change
of a milling tool with SDPC G038.5 ○ ○ 14.1.10
signal
servo motor
Spindle command
synchronous control ESRSYC G064.6 ○ ○
signal
ESSYC1 G264.0 ○ ○
Spindle command
ESSYC2 G264.1 ○ ○
synchronous control
ESSYC3 G264.2 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle)
ESSYC4 G264.3 ○ ○
G122.6
1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○
(G031.6)
G122.7
Spindle command 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○
(G031.7) 11.17
synchronous control
PKESE1 G265.0 ○ ○
Spindle command
PKESE2 G265.1 ○ ○
synchronous parking
PKESE3 G265.2 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle)
PKESE4 G265.3 ○ ○
Phase error monitor
SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○
signal
SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○
Phase error monitor SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle) SYCAL3 F043.2 ○ ○
SYCAL4 F043.3 ○ ○
SV speed control mode SRVON1 to
G521 ○ ○
signals SRVON8
SVRVS1 to
SV reverse signals G523 ○ ○
SVRVS8
Spindle control with SV speed control mode SVREV1 to
F521 ○ ○ 11.20
servo motor in-progress signals SVREV8
Spindle indexing signals
SPP1 to SPP8 F522 ○ ○
for each axis
SVSST1 to
Speed zero signals F376 ○ ○
SVSST8
- 2705 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Spindle control with SVSAR1 to
Speed arrival signals F377 ○ ○ 11.20
servo motor SVSAR8
G078.0 to
SH00A to SH14A ○ ○
G079.6
G080.0 to
Spindle orientation SH00B to SH14B ○ ○
G081.6
Spindle orientation external stop position 11.15
G208.0 to
command signals SH00C to SH14C ○ ○
G209.6
G270.0 to
SH00D to SH14D ○ ○
G271.6
SIND G033.7 ○ ○
Spindle motor speed
SIND2 G035.7 ○ ○
command selection
SIND3 G037.7 ○ ○
signals
SIND4 G273.7 ○ ○
G032.0 to
R01I to R12I ○ ○
G033.3
G034.0 to
R01I2 to R12I2 ○ ○
Spindle motor speed G035.3
command signals G036.0 to
R01I3 to R12I3 ○ ○
Spindle output control G037.3
11.6
by the PMC G272.0 to
R01I4 to R12I4 ○ ○
G273.3
SSIN G033.6 ○ ○
Spindle motor command SSIN2 G035.6 ○ ○
polarity selection signals SSIN3 G037.6 ○ ○
SSIN4 G273.6 ○ ○
SGN G033.5 ○ ○
Spindle motor command SGN2 G035.5 ○ ○
polarity command signals SGN3 G037.5 ○ ○
SGN4 G273.5 ○ ○
SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○
Spindle stop completion SPSTPB G402.1 ○ ○
signal SPSTPC G402.2 ○ ○
SPSTPD G402.3 ○ ○
SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○
SUCLPB F400.1 ○ ○
Spindle unclamp signal
SUCLPC F400.2 ○ ○
SUCLPD F400.3 ○ ○
*SUCPFA G028.4 ○ ○
Spindle unclamp *SUCPFB G400.1 ○ ○
completion signal *SUCPFC G400.2 ○ ○
*SUCPFD G400.3 ○ ○
Spindle positioning 11.10
*SCPFA G028.5 ○ ○
Spindle clamp completion *SCPFB G401.1 ○ ○
signal *SCPFC G401.2 ○ ○
*SCPFD G401.3 ○ ○
SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○
SCLPB F401.1 ○ ○
Spindle clamp signal
SCLPC F401.2 ○ ○
SCLPD F401.3 ○ ○
MSPOSA F039.0 ○ ○
Spindle positioning mode MSPOSB F402.1 ○ ○
signals MSPOSC F402.2 ○ ○
MSPOSD F402.3 ○ ○
- 2706 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Total spindle revolution G533.0 to
SSR1 to SSR4 ○ ○
Spindle revolution number reset signals G533.3
number history Total spindle revolution 11.21
function number reset selection SSRS G533.4 ○ ○
signal
TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○
Torque limit command
TLMLB G074.0 ○ ○
LOW signals (serial
TLMLC G204.0 ○ ○
spindle)
TLMLD G266.0 ○ ○
TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○
Torque limit command
TLMHB G074.1 ○ ○
HIGH signals (serial
TLMHC G204.1 ○ ○
spindle)
TLMHD G266.1 ○ ○
11.2
CTH1A,CTH2A G070.3,G070.2 ○ ○
Clutch/gear signals (serial CTH1B,CTH2B G074.3,G074.2 ○ ○
spindle) CTH1C,CTH2C G204.3,G204.2 ○ ○
CTH1D,CTH2D G266.3,G266.2 ○ ○
SRVA G070.4 ○ ○
CCW command signals SRVB G074.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle) SRVC G204.4 ○ ○
SRVD G266.4 ○ ○
SFRA G070.5 ○ ○
CW command signals SFRB G074.5 ○ ○
11.2
(serial spindle) SFRC G204.5 ○ ○
SFRD G266.5 ○ ○
ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○
Orientation command ORCMB G074.6 ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle) ORCMC G204.6 ○ ○ 11.15
ORCMD G266.6 ○ ○
Spindle serial output
MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○
Machine ready signals MRDYB G074.7 ○ ○
(serial spindle) MRDYC G204.7 ○ ○
MRDYD G266.7 ○ ○
ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○
Alarm reset signals (serial ARSTB G075.0 ○ ○
spindle) ARSTC G205.0 ○ ○
ARSTD G267.0 ○ ○
*ESPA G071.1 ○ ○
Emergency stop signals *ESPB G075.1 ○ ○
(serial spindle) *ESPC G205.1 ○ ○
*ESPD G267.1 ○ ○
11.2
SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals SPSLB G075.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle) SPSLC G205.2 ○ ○
SPSLD G267.2 ○ ○
MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○
Power line switch
MCFNB G075.3 ○ ○
completion signals (serial
MCFNC G205.3 ○ ○
spindle)
MCFND G267.3 ○ ○
SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○
Soft start/stop cancel SOCNB G075.4 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) SOCNC G205.4 ○ ○
SOCND G267.4 ○ ○
- 2707 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
INTGA G071.5 ○ ○
Speed integral signals INTGB G075.5 ○ ○
(serial spindle) INTGC G205.5 ○ ○
INTGD G267.5 ○ ○
RSLA G071.6 ○ ○
Output switch request RSLB G075.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) RSLC G205.6 ○ ○
RSLD G267.6 ○ ○
RCHA G071.7 ○ ○
Power line status check RCHB G075.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) RCHC G205.7 ○ ○
RCHD G267.7 ○ ○
INDXA G072.0 ○ ○
Orientation stop position
INDXB G076.0 ○ ○
change command signals
INDXC G206.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
INDXD G268.0 ○ ○
Rotational direction ROTAA G072.1 ○ ○
command signals for ROTAB G076.1 ○ ○
orientation stop position ROTAC G206.1 ○ ○
change (serial spindle) ROTAD G268.1 ○ ○
Shortcut command NRROA G072.2 ○ ○
signals for orientation NRROB G076.2 ○ ○
stop position change NRROC G206.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle) NRROD G268.2 ○ ○
DEFMDA G072.3 ○ ○
Differential speed mode
DEFMDB G076.3 ○ ○
Spindle serial output command signals (serial 11.2
DEFMDC G206.3 ○ ○
spindle)
DEFMDD G268.3 ○ ○
OVRA G072.4 ○ ○
Analog override signals OVRB G076.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle) OVRC G206.4 ○ ○
OVRD G268.4 ○ ○
INCMDA G072.5 ○ ○
Incremental command
INCMDB G076.5 ○ ○
externally set orientation
INCMDC G206.5 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
INCMDD G268.5 ○ ○
MFNHGA G072.6 ○ ○
Spindle switch MAIN
MFNHGB G076.6 ○ ○
MCC contact status
MFNHGC G206.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
MFNHGD G268.6 ○ ○
RCHHGA G072.7 ○ ○
Spindle switch HIGH
RCHHGB G076.7 ○ ○
MCC contact status
RCHHGC G206.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
RCHHGD G268.7 ○ ○
MORCMA G073.0 ○ ○
Magnetic sensor
MORCMB G077.0 ○ ○
orientation command
MORCMC G207.0 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
MORCMD G269.0 ○ ○
SLVA G073.1 ○ ○
Subordinate operation
SLVB G077.1 ○ ○
mode command signals
SLVC G207.1 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
SLVD G269.1 ○ ○
- 2708 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○
Motor power cutoff
MPOFB G077.2 ○ ○
command signals (serial
MPOFC G207.2 ○ ○
spindle)
MPOFD G269.2 ○ ○
ALMA F045.0 ○ ○
Alarm signals (serial ALMB F049.0 ○ ○
spindle) ALMC F168.0 ○ ○
ALMD F266.0 ○ ○
SSTA F045.1 ○ ○
Speed zero signals (serial SSTB F049.1 ○ ○
spindle) SSTC F168.1 ○ ○
SSTD F266.1 ○ ○
SDTA F045.2 ○ ○
Speed detection signals SDTB F049.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle) SDTC F168.2 ○ ○
SDTD F266.2 ○ ○
SARA F045.3 ○ ○
Spindle speed arrival SARB F049.3 ○ ○
signal (serial spindle) SARC F168.3 ○ ○
SARD F266.3 ○ ○
LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○
Load detection signals 1 LDT1B F049.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle) LDT1C F168.4 ○ ○
LDT1D F266.4 ○ ○
LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○
Load detection signals 2 LDT2B F049.5 ○ ○
Spindle serial output 11.2
(serial spindle) LDT2C F168.5 ○ ○
LDT2D F266.5 ○ ○
TLMA F045.6 ○ ○
Torque limit signals TLMB F049.6 ○ ○
(serial spindle) TLMC F168.6 ○ ○
TLMD F266.6 ○ ○
ORARA F045.7 ○ ○
Orientation completion ORARB F049.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) ORARC F168.7 ○ ○
ORARD F266.7 ○ ○
CHPA F046.0 ○ ○
Power line switch signals CHPB F050.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle) CHPC F169.0 ○ ○
CHPD F267.0 ○ ○
CFINA F046.1 ○ ○
Spindle switch completion CFINB F050.1 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) CFINC F169.1 ○ ○
CFIND F267.1 ○ ○
RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○
Output switch signals RCHPB F050.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle) RCHPC F169.2 ○ ○
RCHPD F267.2 ○ ○
RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○
Output switch completion RCFNB F050.3 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) RCFNC F169.3 ○ ○
RCFND F267.3 ○ ○
- 2709 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○
Subordinate operation
SLVSB F050.4 ○ ○
status signals (serial
SLVSC F169.4 ○ ○
spindle)
SLVSD F267.4 ○ ○
PORA2A F046.5 ○ ○
Position coder orientation
PORA2B F050.5 ○ ○
proximity signal (serial
PORA2C F169.5 ○ ○
spindle)
PORA2D F267.5 ○ ○
MORA1A F046.6 ○ ○
Magnetic sensor
MORA1B F050.6 ○ ○
orientation completion
MORA1C F169.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
MORA1D F267.6 ○ ○
MORA2A F046.7 ○ ○
Magnetic sensor
MORA2B F050.7 ○ ○
orientation proximity
MORA2C F169.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
MORA2D F267.7 ○ ○
Position coder PC1DTA F047.0 ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle serial output one-rotation signal PC1DTB F051.0 ○ ○
detection status signals PC1DTC F170.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle) PC1DTD F268.0 ○ ○
INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○
Incremental orientation
INCSTB F051.1 ○ ○
mode signals (serial
INCSTC F170.1 ○ ○
spindle)
INCSTD F268.1 ○ ○
All-spindle operation
SRSRDY F034.7 ○ ○
ready signal
1st serial spindle ready
SRSP1R F034.6 ○ ○
signals
2nd serial spindle ready
SRSP2R F034.5 ○ ○
signals
3rd serial spindle ready
SRSP3R F034.4 ○ ○
signals
4th serial spindle ready
SRSP4R F034.3 ○ ○
signals
Spindle warning detail SPWRN1 to 11.2
F264.0 to F265.0 ○ ○
signals 1 to 9 SPWRN9 19.2
Spindle stop signal *SSTP G029.6 ○ ○
Spindle orientation signal SOR G029.5 ○ ○
Spindle speed override
SOV0 to SOV7 G030 ○ ○
signals
Spindle speed arrival
SAR G029.4 ○ ○
signal
Spindle speed control 11.5
Spindle enable signal ENB F001.4 ○ ○
Gear selection signals GR1O,GR2O,
F034.0 to F034.2 - ○
(output) GR3O
Gear selection signals GR1 G028.1 ○ ○
(input) GR2 G028.2 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals R01O to R12O F036.0 to F037.3 ○ ○
Spindle speed Spindle fluctuation
SPAL F035.0 ○ ○ 11.19
fluctuation detection detection alarm signal
Spindle synchronous Spindle synchronous
SPSYC G038.2 ○ ○ 11.14
control control signal
- 2710 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
SPSYC1 G288.0 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
SPSYC2 G288.1 ○ ○
control signal (for each
SPSYC3 G288.2 ○ ○
spindle)
SPSYC4 G288.3 ○ ○
Spindle phase
synchronous control SPPHS G038.3 ○ ○
signal
SPPHS1 G289.0 ○ ○
Spindle phase
SPPHS2 G289.1 ○ ○
synchronous control
SPPHS3 G289.2 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle)
SPPHS4 G289.3 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
speed control completion FSPSY F044.2 ○ ○
signal
FSPSY1 F288.0 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
FSPSY2 F288.1 ○ ○
speed control completion
FSPSY3 F288.2 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle)
Spindle synchronous FSPSY4 F288.3 ○ ○
11.14
control Spindle phase
synchronization control FSPPH F044.3 ○ ○
completion signal
Spindle phase FSPPH1 F289.0 ○ ○
synchronization control FSPPH2 F289.1 ○ ○
completion signal (for FSPPH3 F289.2 ○ ○
each spindle) FSPPH4 F289.3 ○ ○
Phase error monitor
SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○
signal
SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○
Phase error monitor SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle) SYCAL3 F043.2 ○ ○
SYCAL4 F043.3 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
speed ratio control clamp RSMAX F065.2 ○ ○
signal
Spindle synchronous
SBRT G038.1 ○ ○
speed ratio control signal
Rapid traversing signal RPDO F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1
Status output signal Cutting feed signal CUT F002.6 ○ ○
2.7
Dwell status signal DWL F526.5 ○ ○
Stored stroke check 1 +EXL1 to +EXL8 G104 ○ ○
switching signals in axis
direction -EXL1 to -EXL8 G105 ○ ○
G007.6,
Stored stroke check 1 EXLM, EXLM2, 2.3.2,
Stored stroke check G531.6, ○ ○
change signals EXLM3 2.3.3
G531.7
Stroke check 1 release
RLSOT G007.7 ○ ○
signal
+OT1 to +OT8 F124 ○ ○
Overtravel alarm signals
-OT1 to -OT8 F126 ○ ○
Stored stroke check 2, Stroke check 3 release
RLSOT3 G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.4
3 signal
- 2711 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Stored stroke limit range
switching data selection OTD0 to OTD15 G594,G595 ○ ○
signals
Stored stroke limit range
switching axis selection OTA1 to OTA8 G596 ○ ○
signals
+OT11, -OT11,
Stored stroke limit range
+OT12, -OT12,
switching selection G597 ○ ○
+OT2, -OT2,
signals
+OT3, -OT3
Stored stroke limit
+OT11C, -OT11C,
range switching Sotred stroke limit range 2.3.8
+OT12C, -OT12C,
function by signal switching cancellation G598 ○ ○
+OT2C, -OT2C,
signals
+OT3C, -OT3C
Stored stroke limit range
OTSW G599.0 ○ ○
switching start signal
+OT11O, -OT11O,
Stored stroke limit range
+OT12O, -OT12O,
switching confirmation F598 ○ ○
+OT2O, -OT2O,
signals
+OT3O, -OT3O
Stored stroke limit range
OTSWFN F599.0 ○ ○
switching finish signal
Stroke limit external Stroke limit external +LM1 to +LM8 G110 ○ ○
2.3.6
setting setting signals -LM1 to -LM8 G112 ○ ○
Superimposed control
OVLS1 to OVLS8 G190 ○ ○
axis selection signals
Superimposed control
OVMO1 to
master axis confirmation F344 ○ ○
OVMO8
signals
Superimposed control Superimposed control 8.7
slave axis confirmation OVSO1 to OVSO8 F345 ○ ○
signals
Synchronous/composite/s
uperimposed control SYN1O to SYN8O F118 ○ ○
under way signals
Composite control axis
MIX1 to MIX8 G128 ○ ○
change selection signals
Composite axis
MIXO1 to MIXO8 F343 ○ ○
confirmation signals
Synchronous control axis
SYNC1 to SYNC8 G138 ○ ○
selection signals
Synchronous master axis
SYCM1 to SYCM8 F341 ○ ○
confirmation signals
Synchronous and Synchronous slave axis
SYCS1 to SYCS8 F342 ○ ○ 8.6.2
composite control confirmation signals
Synchronous/composite/s
uperimposed control SYN1O to SYN8O F118 ○ ○
under way signals
Parking signals PK1 to PK8 G122 ○ ○
Parking axis confirmation
SMPK1 to SMPK8 F346 ○ ○
signals
Excess synchronization
SEO1 to SEO8 F559 ○ ○
error signals
Threading Threading signal THRD F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5.1
- 2712 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Three-dimensional
coordinate system
M3R G031.3 ○ ○
conversion manual
Three-dimensional
interruption switch signal 13.15
coordinate conversion
Three-dimensional
coordinate conversion D3ROT F062.6 ○ ○
mode signal
Tool axis direction feed
ALNGH G023.7 ○ ○
mode signal
Tool axis right-angle
Three-dimensional direction feed mode RGHTH G023.6 ○ ○
3.7.5.2
manual feed signal
Table base signal TB_BASE G298.0 ○ ○
Tool tip center rotation
RNDH G298.2 ○ ○
feed mode signal
Tool change signal TLCH F064.0 ○ ○
Tool change signal TLRST G048.7 ○ ○
Individual tool change
TLCHI F064.2 ○ ○
signal
Individual tool change
TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○
reset signal
Tool skip signal TLSKP G048.5 ○ ○
New tool select signal TLNW F064.1 ○ ○
Tool group number G047.0 to
TL01 to TL512 ○ ○
selection signals G048.1
Tool life management 12.5
Tool life count override G049.0 to
*TLV0 to *TLV9 ○ ○
signals G050.1
Tool life arrival notice
TLCHB F064.3 ○ ○
signal
Tool life counting disable
LFCIV G048.2 ○ ○
signal
Tool life counting disable
LFCIF F093.2 ○ ○
signal
Number of remaining
TLAL F154.0 - ○
tools notification signal
Tool management Tool management data G330.0 to
TKEY0 to TKEY5 ○ ○ 12.3.2
extension function protection signal G330.5
Tool management data
modification in-progress TLMG10 F315.2 ○ ○
signal
Tool management data
TLMOT F315.4 ○ ○
output in-progress signal
Tool management data
TLMEM F315.7 ○ ○
Tool management edit in-progress signal
12.3.1
function Tool search in-progress
TLMSRH F315.1 ○ ○
signal
Tool change signal TLCH F064.0 ○ ○
Tool change signal 1 TLCH1 F328.0 ○ ○
Tool change signal 2 TLCH2 F328.1 ○ ○
Tool change signal 3 TLCH3 F328.2 ○ ○
Tool change signal 4 TLCH4 F328.3 ○ ○
- 2713 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Tool change signal TLRST G048.7 ○ ○
Tool change signal 1 TLRST1 G328.0 ○ ○
Tool change signal 2 TLRST2 G328.1 ○ ○
Tool change signal 3 TLRST3 G328.2 ○ ○
Tool change signal 4 TLRST4 G328.3 ○ ○
Individual tool change
TLCHI F064.2 ○ ○
signal
Individual tool change
TLCHI1 F328.4 ○ ○
signal 1
Individual tool change
TLCHI2 F328.5 ○ ○
signal 2
Individual tool change
TLCHI3 F328.6 ○ ○
signal 3
Individual tool change
TLCHI4 F328.7 ○ ○
signal 4
Individual tool change
TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○
reset signal
Individual tool change
TLRSTI1 G328.4 ○ ○
reset signal 1
Individual tool change
TLRSTI2 G328.5 ○ ○
reset signal 2
Individual tool change
TLRSTI3 G328.6 ○ ○
reset signal 3
Individual tool change
TLRSTI4 G328.7 ○ ○
reset signal 4
Tool management Tool life expiration notice
TLCHB F064.3 ○ ○ 12.3.1
function signal
Tool life expiration notice
TLCHB1 F329.4 ○ ○
signal 1
Tool life expiration notice
TLCHB2 F329.5 ○ ○
signal 2
Tool life expiration notice
TLCHB3 F329.6 ○ ○
signal 3
Tool life expiration notice
TLCHB4 F329.7 ○ ○
signal 4
Tool skip signal TLSKP G048.5 ○ ○
Tool skip signal 1 TLSKP1 G329.0 ○ ○
Tool skip signal 2 TLSKP2 G329.1 ○ ○
Tool skip signal 3 TLSKP3 G329.2 ○ ○
Tool skip signal 4 TLSKP4 G329.3 ○ ○
Tool skip completion
TLSKF F315.0 ○ ○
signal
Tool skip completion
TLSKF1 F329.0 ○ ○
signal 1
Tool skip completion
TLSKF2 F329.1 ○ ○
signal 2
Tool skip completion
TLSKF3 F329.2 ○ ○
signal 3
Tool skip completion
TLSKF4 F329.3 ○ ○
signal 4
Tool life count override G049.0 to
*TLV0 to *TLV9 ○ ○
signals G050.1
- 2714 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
Tool life counting disable
TLNCT1 G329.4 ○ ○
signal 1
Tool life counting disable
TLNCT2 G329.5 ○ ○
signal 2
Tool management
Tool life counting disable 12.3.1
function TLNCT3 G329.6 ○ ○
signal 3
Tool life counting disable
TLNCT4 G329.7 ○ ○
signal 4
Life expiration signal TMFNFD F315.6 ○ ○
Tool retraction axis
TRMTN F092.4 ○ ○
movement signal
Tool retraction signal TRESC G059.0 ○ ○
Tool retraction mode
Tool retract & recover TRACT F092.3 ○ ○ 5.8
signal
Tool return signal TRRTN G059.1 ○ ○
Tool return completion
TRSPS F092.5 ○ ○
signal
Torque limit reached
Torque limit skip TRQL1 to TRQL8 F114 ○ ○ 16.3.6
signals
Touch panel check
Touch panel check signal TPPRS F006.0 ○ ○ 14.1.7
signal
Trouble forecast signals TDSML1 to
F298 ○ ○
for thermal simulation TDSML8
Trouble diagnosis 19.4
Trouble forecast signals TDFTR1 to
F299 ○ ○
for disturbance level TDFTR8
EGB synchronization
EGBS G067.4 ○ ○
mode selection signal
U-axis Control 1.9.4
EGB synchronization
EGBSM F082.6 ○ ○
mode confirmation signal
Unexpected disturbance
torque detection ignore IUDD1 to IUDD8 G125 ○ ○
signals
Unexpected disturbance
ABDT1 to ABDT8 F184 ○ ○
torque detection signals
Servo axis unexpected
disturbance torque ABTQSV F090.0 ○ ○
detection signal
1st spindle unexpected
Unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP1 F090.1 ○ ○
disturbance torque 2.9
detection signal
detection
2nd spindle unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP2 F090.2 ○ ○
detection signal
3rd spindle unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP3 F090.3 ○ ○
detection signal
4th spindle unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP4 F091.4 ○ ○
detection signal
All-axis VRDY off alarm
IGNVRY G066.0 ○ ○
VRDY off alarm ignore ignore signal
2.8
signal Each-axis VRDY off IGVRY1 to
G192 ○ ○
alarm ignore signals IGVRY8
- 2715 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address
series series item
No-wait signal NOWT G063.1 ● ●
Waiting M code No-wait signal NMWT G063.7 ● ● 8.2
Waiting signal WATO F063.6 ● ●
Waiting M codes of
Waiting M codes of
high-speed type invalid NHSW G579.6 ● ● 8.3
high-speed type
signal
Notification signal for
modification of C
CDCEX F558.0 ○ ○
Language Executor
program
Notification signal for
modification of 1st path CDLAD1 F558.1 ○ ○
PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for
modification of 2nd path CDLAD2 F558.2 ○ ○
PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for
modification of 3rd path CDLAD3 F558.3 ○ ○
Warning function
PMC Ladder program
against modification of 14.1.23
Notification signal for
setting
modification of Dual
CDDCL F558.4 ○ ○
Check Safety PMC
Ladder program
Notification signal for
modification of CNC CDPRM F558.5 ○ ○
parameter
Notification signal for
modification of 4th path CDLAD4 F558.6 ○ ○
PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for
modification of 5th path CDLAD5 F558.7 ○ ○
PMC Ladder program
- 2716 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols)
○ : Available
● : Available only with multi path control
- : Unavailable
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
*+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signals 1 G118 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*+ED21 to *+ED28 External deceleration signals 2 G101 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*+ED31 to *+ED38 External deceleration signals 3 G107 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*+ED41 to *+ED48 External deceleration signals 4 G341 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*+ED51 to *+ED58 External deceleration signals 5 G343 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*+L1 to *+L8 Overtravel signals G114 ○ ○ 2.3.1
*-ED1 to *-ED8 External deceleration signals 1 G120 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*-ED21 to *-ED28 External deceleration signals 2 G103 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*-ED31 to *-ED38 External deceleration signals 3 G109 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*-ED41 to *-ED48 External deceleration signals 4 G342 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*-ED51 to *-ED58 External deceleration signals 5 G344 ○ ○ 7.1.10
*-L1 to *-L8 Overtravel signals G116 ○ ○ 2.3.1
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006.2 ○ ○ 5.4
Actual speed display axis
*ACTF1 to *ACTF8 G580 ○ ○ 14.1.15
selection signals
*AFV0 to *AFV7 2nd feedrate override signals G013 ○ ○ 7.1.7.3
*BSL Block start interlock signal G008.3 ○ ○ 2.5
*BECLP B axis clamp completion signal G038.7 - ○ 13.12
B axis unclamp completion
*BEUCP G038.6 - ○ 13.12
signal
*CDZ Chamfering signal G053.7 ○ - 13.8
*CHLD Oscillation hold signal G051.7 ○ ○ 1.15
Oscillation feedrate override
*CHP1 to *CHP8 G051.0 to G051.3 ○ ○ 1.15
signals
* Dual position feedback
*CL1 to *CL8 G548 ○ ○ 1.10
compensation clamp signals
*CRTOF Screen erasure disable signal G062.1 ○ ○ 14.1.13
Cutting block start interlock
*CSL G008.1 ○ ○ 2.5
signal
Reference position return X009 ○ ○
*DEC1 to *DEC8 4.1
deceleration signals G196 ○ ○
Controlled axis selection status
*EAXSL F129.7 ○ ○ 17.1
signals (PMC axis control)
X008.4, .0, .1 ○ ○
*ESP Emergency stop signals 2.1
G008.4 ○ ○
*ESPA G071.1 ○ ○
*ESPB Emergency stop signals (serial G075.1 ○ ○
11.2
*ESPC spindle) G205.1 ○ ○
*ESPD G267.1 ○ ○
*EFOV0 to *EFOV7 G151 ○ ○
Feedrate override signals
*EFOV0B to *EFOV7B G163 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
*EFOV0C to *EFOV7C G175 ○ ○
control)
*EFOV0D to *EFOV7D G187 ○ ○
*EROV0 to *EROV7 1% step rapid traverse override G151 ○ ○
*EROV0B to *EROV7B signals G163 ○ ○
17.1
*EROV0C to *EROV7C (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis G175 ○ ○
*EROV0D to *EROV7D control) G187 ○ ○
0.1% rapid traverse override G352.0 to G352.7
*FHRO0 to *FHRO9 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
signals G353.0 to G353.1
- 2717 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
*FLWU Follow-up signal G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.7
*FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signals G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
Software operator’s panel signal
*FV0O to *FV7O F078 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(*FV0 to *FV7)
1% rapid traverse override
*HROV0 to *HROV6 G096.0 to G096.6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
signals
*IT Interlock signal for all axes G008.0 ○ ○ 2.5
*IT1 to *IT8 Interlock signal for each axis G130 ○ ○ 2.5
Manual feedrate override
*JV0 to *JV15 G010,G011 ○ ○ 3.1
signals
Software operator’s panel signal
*JV0O to *JV15O F079,F080 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(*JV0 to *JV15)
*PLSST Polygon spindle stop signal G038.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2
*SCPFA G028.5 ○ ○
*SCPFB G401.1 ○ ○
Spindle clamp completion signal 11.10
* *SCPFC G401.2 ○ ○
*SCPFD G401.3 ○ ○
*SP Feed hold signal G008.5 ○ ○ 5.1
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029.6 ○ ○ 11.5
*SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○
*SSTP2 G027.4 ○ ○
Individual spindle stop signals 11.12
*SSTP3 G027.5 ○ ○
*SSTP4 G026.6 ○ ○
*SUCPFA G028.4 ○ ○
*SUCPFB Spindle unclamp completion G400.1 ○ ○
11.10
*SUCPFC signal G400.2 ○ ○
*SUCPFD G400.3 ○ ○
12.3.1
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signals G049.0 to G050.1 ○ ○
12.6
Tail stock barrier selection
*TSB G060.7 ○ - 2.3.8
signal
Stored stroke check 1 switching
+EXL1 to +EXL8 G104 ○ ○ 2.3.2
signals in axis direction
Feed axis and direction
+J1 to +J8 G100 ○ ○ 3.1
selection signals
Software operator’s panel signal F081.0,F081.2,
+J1O to +J4O ○ ○ 14.1.2
(+J1 to +J4) F081.4,F081.6
Feed axis and direction
+Jg,+Ja G086.0,G086.2 ○ ○ 3.4
selection signals
Stroke limit external setting
+LM1 to +LM8 G110 ○ ○ 2.3.6
signals
X004.2,X004.4
+MIT1,+MIT2 Tool offset write signals ○ - 16.4.2
+ G132.0,G132.1
Interlock signal for each axis
+MIT1 to +MIT8 G132 - ○ 2.5
direction
+OT1 to +OT8 Overtravel alarm signals F124 ○ ○ 2.3.2
+OT11 G597.0 ○ ○
+OT12 Stored stroke limit range G597.2 ○ ○
2.3.8
+OT2 switching selection signals G597.4 ○ ○
+OT3 G597.6 ○ ○
+OT11C G598.0 ○ ○
+OT12C Stored stroke limit range G598.2 ○ ○
2.3.8
+OT2C switching cancellation signals G598.4 ○ ○
+OT3C G598.6 ○ ○
- 2718 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
+OT11O F598.0 ○ ○
+OT12O Stored stroke limit range F598.2 ○ ○
+ 2.3.8
+OT2O switching confirmation signals F598.4 ○ ○
+OT3O F598.6 ○ ○
Stored stroke check 1 switching
-EXL1 to -EXL8 G105 ○ ○ 2.3.2
signals in axis direction
Feed axis and direction
-J1 to -J8 G102 ○ ○ 3.1
selection signals
Software operator’s panel signal F081.1,F081.3,
-J1O to -J4O ○ ○ 14.1.2
(-J1 to -J4) F081.5,F081.7
Feed axis and direction
-Jg,-Ja G086.1,G086.3 ○ ○ 3.4
selection signals
Stroke limit external setting
-LM1 to -LM8 G112 ○ ○ 2.3.6
signals
X004.3,X004.5
-MIT1,-MIT2 Tool offset write signals ○ - 16.4.2
G134.0,G134.1
Interlock signal for each axis
-MIT1 to -MIT8 G134 - ○ 2.5
- direction
-OT1 to -OT8 Overtravel alarm signals F126 ○ ○ 2.3.2
-OT11 G597.1 ○ ○
-OT12 Stored stroke limit range G597.3 ○ ○
2.3.8
-OT2 switching selection signals G597.5 ○ ○
-OT3 G597.7 ○ ○
-OT11C G598.1 ○ ○
-OT12C Stored stroke limit range G598.3 ○ ○
2.3.8
-OT2C switching cancellation signals G598.5 ○ ○
-OT3C G598.7 ○ ○
-OT11O F598.1 ○ ○
-OT12O Stored stroke limit range F598.3 ○ ○
2.3.8
-OT2O switching confirmation signals F598.5 ○ ○
-OT3O F598.7 ○ ○
Unexpected disturbance torque
ABDT1 to ABDT8 F184 ○ ○ 2.9
detection signal
Servo axis unexpected
ABTQSV disturbance torque detection F090.0 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
1st spindle unexpected
ABTSP1 disturbance torque detection F090.1 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
2nd spindle unexpected
ABTSP2 disturbance torque detection F090.2 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
A 3rd spindle unexpected
ABTSP3 disturbance torque detection F090.3 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
4th spindle unexpected
ABTSP4 disturbance torque detection F091.4 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
Auxiliary function output block
ADCO reverse movement enable F091.5 ○ ○ 5.3.6
output signal
AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005.6 ○ ○ 10.2
AICC AI contour control mode signal F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.12
AL Alarm signal F001.0 ○ ○ 2.4
- 2719 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
ALLO NC data output signal F578.5 ○ ○ 15.3
ALMA F045.0 ○ ○
ALMB F049.0 ○ ○
Alarm signals (serial spindle) 11.2
ALMC F168.0 ○ ○
ALMD F266.0 ○ ○
Tool axis direction feed mode
ALNGH G023.7 ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
signal
AR00 to AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○
AR002 to AR152 F202,F203 ○ ○
Actual spindle speed signals 11.9
AR003 to AR153 F206,F207 ○ ○
AR004 to AR154 F272,F273 ○ ○
ARE00 to ARE31 F580 to F583 ○ ○
A
ARE002 to ARE312 Extended actual spindle speed F584 to F587 ○ ○
11.27
ARE003 to ARE313 signals F588 to F591 ○ ○
ARE004 to ARE314 F592 to F595 ○ ○
ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○
ARSTB Alarm reset signals (serial G075.0 ○ ○
11.2
ARSTC spindle) G205.0 ○ ○
ARSTD G267.0 ○ ○
Automatic data backup
ATBK F520.0 ○ ○
executing signal
Flexible synchronization control
AUTPHA to
automatic phase G381.0 to G381.3 ○ ○ 1.12
AUTPHD
synchronization signals
2nd auxiliary function code
B00 to B31 F030 to F033 ○ ○ 10.1
signals
BAL Battery alarm signal F001.2 ○ ○ 2.4
BCAN Block cancel signal G297.0 ○ ○ 5.11
BCLP B axis clamp signal F061.1 - ○ 13.12
BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○
Optional block skip signals 5.5
BDT2 to BDT9 G045 ○ ○
B Software operator’s panel signal
BDTO F075.2 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(BDT)
2nd auxiliary function strobe
BF F007.7 ○ ○ 10.1
signal
2nd auxiliary function
BFIN G005.7 ○ ○ 10.4
completion signal
BGEACT Background editing signal F053.4 ○ ○ 15.2
BUCLP B axis unclamp signal F061.0 - ○ 13.12
Dual display forcible end
C2SEND G295.6 ○ ○ 14.1.9
request signal
Dual display forcible end status
C2SENO F295.6 ○ ○ 14.1.9
signal
Notification signal for
CDCEX modification of C Language F558.0 ○ ○
C Executor program
Notification signal for
CDDCL modification of Dual Check F558.4 ○ ○ 14.1.23
Safety PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for
CDLAD1 modification of 1st path PMC F558.1 ○ ○
Ladder program
- 2720 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Notification signal for
CDLAD2 modification of 2nd path PMC F558.2 ○ ○
Ladder program
Notification signal for
CDLAD3 modification of 3rd path PMC F558.3 ○ ○
Ladder program
Notification signal for
14.1.23
CDLAD4 modification of 4th path PMC F558.6 ○ ○
Ladder program
Notification signal for
CDLAD5 modification of 5th path PMC F558.7 ○ ○
Ladder program
Notification signal for
CDPRM F558.5 ○ ○
modification of CNC parameter
CFINA F046.1 ○ ○
CFINB Spindle switch completion F050.1 ○ ○
11.2
CFINC signals (serial spindle) F169.1 ○ ○
CFIND F267.1 ○ ○
CHPA F046.0 ○ ○
CHPB Power line switch signals (serial F050.0 ○ ○
11.2
CHPC spindle) F169.0 ○ ○
CHPD F267.0 ○ ○
CHPCYL Oscillation cycle signal F039.3 ○ ○ 1.15
CHPMD Oscillation -in-progress signal F039.2 ○ ○ 1.15
CHPST Oscillation start signal G051.6 ○ ○ 1.15
C Torque limit reach signals for
CLRCH1 to
reference pointsetting with F180 ○ ○ 4.7, 4.8
CLRCH8
mechanical stopper
CNCKY Key control selection signal G295.7 ○ ○
14.1.11
Key control selection status
CNCKYO F295.7 ○ ○ 14.1.12
signal
Cs contour control change
CON G027.7 ○ ○ 11.11
signal
CONS1 G274.0 ○ ○
CONS2 Cs contour control change G274.1 ○ ○
11.11
CONS3 signal (for each spindle) G274.2 ○ ○
CONS4 G274.3 ○ ○
Path spindle command
COSP F064.5 ● ● 8.11
confirmation signal
COSP1 F063.3 ● ●
COSP2 Path spindle command F063.4 ● ●
8.11
COSP3 confirmation signal F404.0 ● ●
COSP4 F404.1 ● ●
CSFI1 G274.4 ○ ○
CSFI2 Cs axis coordinate G274.5 ○ ○
CSFI3 establishment request signals G274.6 ○ ○
CSFI4 G274.7 ○ ○
11.11.4
CSFO1 F274.4 ○ ○
CSFO2 Cs axis coordinate F274.5 ○ ○
CSFO3 establishment alarm signals F274.6 ○ ○
CSFO4 F274.7 ○ ○
- 2721 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
CSPENA F048.4 ○ ○
CSPENB Cs axis origin established state F052.4 ○ ○
11.11.4
CSPENC signals F171.4 ○ ○
CSPEND F269.4 ○ ○
CSS Constant surface speed signal F002.2 ○ ○ 11.8
C
CTH1A,CTH2A G070.3,G070.2 ○ ○
CTH1B,CTH2B Clutch/gear signals (serial G074.3,G074.2 ○ ○
11.2
CTH1C,CTH2C spindle) G204.3,G204.2 ○ ○
CTH1D,CTH2D G266.3,G266.2 ○ ○
CUT Cutting feed signal F002.6 ○ ○ 2.7
3-dimensional coordinate
D3MI conversion manual interrupt F347.7 ○ ○ 3.3.1
mode in-progress signal
Three-dimensional coordinate
D3ROT F062.6 ○ ○ 13.15
conversion mode signal
DASN Direct assignment mode signal G536.5 ○ ○ 1.14.2
DEFMDA G072.3 ○ ○
Differential speed mode
DEFMDB G076.3 ○ ○
command signals (serial 11.2
DEFMDC G206.3 ○ ○
spindle)
DEFMDD G268.3 ○ ○
DEN Distribution completion signals F001.3 ○ ○ 10.1
Differential speed
DFSYC synchronization command G022.4 ○ ○ 11.22.1
signal
DM00 F009.7 ○ ○
DM01 F009.6 ○ ○
Decode M signals 10.1
DM02 F009.5 ○ ○
D
DM30 F009.4 ○ ○
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042.7 ○ ○ 5.15
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043.5 ○ ○ 5.14
DNCIR Mode notification signal F513.5 ○ ○ 17.7
DeviceNet communication error
DNTCLR G518.4 ○ ○
clear signal
DeviceNet communication
DNTCM F290.2 ○ ○
normal signal
DeviceNet communication
DNTER F545.4 ○ ○
abnormal signal
DRN Dry run signal G046.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2
Software operator’s panel signal
DRNO F075.5 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(DRN)
DTCH1 to DTCH8 Controlled axis detach signals G124 ○ ○ 1.2.5, 1.15
External device program
DVCPR F531.6 ○ ○ 5.14
execution signal
DWL Dwell status signal F526.5 ○ ○ 2.7
Address signals for external
EA6 to EA0 G002.6 to G002.0 ○ ○ 17.2
data input
EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○
Buffer full signals
EABUFB F134.1 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EABUFC F137.1 ○ ○
E control)
EABUFD F140.1 ○ ○
Controlling signals (PMC axis
EACNT1 to EACNT8 F182 ○ ○ 17.1
control)
EADEN1 to Distribution completion signals
F112 ○ ○ 17.1
EADEN8 (PMC axis control)
- 2722 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Control axis selection signals
EAX1 to EAX8 G136 ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
EBSYA Axis control command read F130.7 ○ ○
EBSYB completion signals F133.7 ○ ○
17.1
EBSYC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis F136.7 ○ ○
EBSYD control) F139.7 ○ ○
EBUFA Axis control command read G142.7 ○ ○
EBUFB signal G154.7 ○ ○
17.1
EBUFC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis G166.7 ○ ○
EBUFD control) G178.7 ○ ○
EC0A to EC6A G143.0 to G143.6 ○ ○
Axis control command signals
EC0B to EC6B G155.0 to G155.6 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EC0C to EC6C G167.0 to G167.6 ○ ○
control)
EC0D to EC6D G179.0 to G179.6 ○ ○
ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○
Following zero checking signals
ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○
control)
ECKZD F139.1 ○ ○
ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○
Reset signal
ECLRB (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis G154.6 ○ ○ 17.1
ECLRC control) G166.6 ○ ○
ECLRD G178.6 ○ ○
Data signals for external data G211,G210,
ED31 to ED0 ○ ○ 17.2
input G001,G000
E EDENA Auxiliary function executing F130.3 ○ ○
EDENB signals F133.3 ○ ○
17.1
EDENC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis F136.3 ○ ○
EDEND control) F139.3 ○ ○
Dry run signal (PMC axis
EDRN G150.7 ○ ○ 17.1
control)
EFINA Auxiliary function completion G142.0 ○ ○
EFINB signal G154.0 ○ ○
17.1
EFINC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis G166.0 ○ ○
EFIND control) G178.0 ○ ○
EGENA F130.4 ○ ○
Axis moving signals
EGENB F133.4 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EGENC F136.4 ○ ○
control)
EGEND F139.4 ○ ○
1.10.5, 1.10.7,
EGBM1 to EGBM8 EGB mode confirmation signals F208 ○ ○
1.10.8
EGB synchronization mode
EGBS G067.4 ○ ○ 1.9.4
selection signal
EGB synchronization start
EGBS1 to EGBS8 G530 ○ ○ 1.9
signals
EGB synchronization mode
EGBSM F082.6 ○ ○ 1.9.4
confirmation signal
EIALA F130.2 ○ ○
Alarm signal
EIALB F133.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EIALC F136.2 ○ ○
control)
EIALD F139.2 ○ ○
- 2723 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 ○ ○
Axis control data signals
EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 ○ ○
control)
EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 ○ ○
EIF0A to EIF15A G144,G145 ○ ○
Axis control feedrate signals
EIF0B to EIF15B G156,G157 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EIF0C to EIF15C G168,G169 ○ ○
control)
EIF0D to EIF15D G180,G181 ○ ○
EINPA F130.0 ○ ○
In-position signal
EINPB F133.0 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EINPC F136.0 ○ ○
control)
EINPD F139.0 ○ ○
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signals G098 ○ ○ 17.6
Key code read completion
EKENB F053.7 ○ ○ 17.6
signal
EKSET Key code read signal G066.7 ○ ○ 17.6
ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○
Accumulated zero check signal
ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○
control)
ELCKZD G178.1 ○ ○
EM11A to EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○
Auxiliary function code signals
EM11B to EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EM11C to EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○
control)
EM11D to EM48D F141,F151 ○ ○
EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○
Buffering disable signal
EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
E EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○
control)
EMBUFD G178.2 ○ ○
EMFA F131.0 ○ ○
Auxiliary function strobe signal
EMFB F134.0 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EMFC F137.0 ○ ○
control)
EMFD F140.0 ○ ○
EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal
EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○
control)
EMF2D F140.2 ○ ○
EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal
EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EMF3C F137.3 ○ ○
control)
EMF3D F140.3 ○ ○
EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○
Block stop disable signal
EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○
control)
EMSBKD G179.7 ○ ○
Specifying by
Extended external machine zero
EMZ0 to EMZ15 parameter ○ ○ 17.3
point shift signal
No.1280.
ENB F001.4 ○ ○ 11.5
ENB2 F038.2 ○ ○
Spindle enable signal
ENB3 F038.3 ○ ○ 11.12
ENB4 F039.1 ○ ○
External key input mode
ENBKY G066.1 ○ ○ 17.6
selection signal
- 2724 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
EOTNA Negative-direction overtravel F130.6 ○ ○
EOTNB signals F133.6 ○ ○
17.1
EOTNC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis F136.6 ○ ○
EOTND control) F139.6 ○ ○
EOTPA Positive-direction overtravel F130.5 ○ ○
EOTPB signals F133.5 ○ ○
17.1
EOTPC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis F136.5 ○ ○
EOTPD control) F139.5 ○ ○
Override 0% signal (PMC axis
EOV0 F129.5 ○ ○ 17.1
control)
EOVC G150.5 ○ ○
Override cancellation signal
EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○
control)
EOVCD G186.5 ○ ○
Extended external workpiece
EPN0 to EPN13 G024.0 to G025.5 ○ ○ 17.5
number search signals
External workpiece number
EPNS G025.7 ○ ○ 17.5
search start signal
Read completion signal for
EREND F060.0 ○ ○ 17.2
external data input
Rapid traverse override signals
EROV1,EROV2 G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
ERS External reset signal G008.7 ○ ○ 5.2
Manual rapid traverse selection
ERT G150.6 ○ ○ 17.1
signal (PMC axis control)
Automatic screen erasure
E ERTVA F006.2 ○ ○ 14.1.13
status in-progress signal
ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○
Block stop signal
ESBKB G154.3 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
ESBKC G166.3 ○ ○
control)
ESBKD G178.3 ○ ○
Search cancel signal for
ESCAN F060.2 ○ ○ 17.2
external data input
Search completion signal for
ESEND F060.1 ○ ○ 17.2
external data input
ESKIP Skip signal (PMC axis control) X004.6 ○ ○ 17.1
ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○
Servo-off signal
ESOFB G154.4 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 17.1
ESOFC G166.4 ○ ○
control)
ESOFD G178.4 ○ ○
Spindle command synchronous
ESRSYC G064.6 ○ ○ 11.17
control signal
ESSYC1 G264.0 ○ ○
ESSYC2 Spindle command synchronous G264.1 ○ ○
11.17
ESSYC3 control signal (for each spindle) G264.2 ○ ○
ESSYC4 G264.3 ○ ○
Read signal for external data
ESTB G002.7 ○ ○ 17.2
input
ESTPA Axis control temporary stop G142.5 ○ ○
ESTPB signal G154.5 ○ ○
17.1
ESTPC (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis G166.5 ○ ○
ESTPD control) G178.5 ○ ○
- 2725 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
ESTPR Axis immediate stop start signal G203.3 ○ ○ 1.13
EUI00 to EUI15 Input signals for P-code macro G082,G083 ○ ○ 13.17
Output signals for P-code
EUO00 to EUO15 F084,F085 ○ ○ 13.17
macro
EXCST Exchange start signal G536.4 ○ ○ 1.14
E EXCED Exchange completion signal F536.4 ○ ○ 1.14
EXLM, EXLM2, Stored stroke check 1 select G007.6, G531.6, 2.3.2,
○ ○
EXLM3 signals G531.7 2.3.3
EXINP External input start signal G058.1 ○ ○ 15.2
EXSTP External input/output stop signal G058.2 ○ ○ 15.2
EXOUT External output start signal G058.3 ○ ○ 15.2
F1D One-digit F code feed signal G016.7 - ○ 7.1.5
FEED0 Feed zero signal F066.2 ○ ○ 3.5
0.1% step rapid traverse
FHROV G353.7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
override selection signal
FIN End signal G004.3 ○ ○ 10.1
FCSS1 F274.0 ○ ○
Cs contour control change
FCSS2 F274.1 ○ ○
completion signal (for each 11.11
FCSS3 F274.2 ○ ○
spindle)
FCSS4 F274.3 ○ ○
FLANG Display language switch F545.0 ○ ○
14.1.8
completion signal
Cs contour control change
FSCSL F044.1 ○ ○ 11.11
completion signal
F Spindle phase synchronization
FSPPH F044.3 ○ ○ 11.14
control completion signal
FSPPH1 F289.0 ○ ○
Spindle phase synchronization
FSPPH2 F289.1 ○ ○
control completion signal (for 11.14
FSPPH3 F289.2 ○ ○
each spindle)
FSPPH4 F289.3 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed
FSPSY F044.2 ○ ○ 11.14
control completion signal
FSPSY1 F288.0 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed
FSPSY2 F288.1 ○ ○
control completion signal (for 11.14
FSPSY3 F288.2 ○ ○
each spindle)
FSPSY4 F288.3 ○ ○
Forward movement prohibition
FWSTP G531.0 ○ ○ 5.3.5
signal
G2RVX G090.0 ○ -
G2RVY Tool offset direction signal G090.2 ○ - 12.4.4
G2RVZ G090.1 ○ -
G2SLC 2nd geometry tool offset signal G090.7 ○ - 12.4.4
G2X G090.4 ○ -
2nd geometry tool offset axis
G2Y G090.6 ○ - 12.4.4
select signal
G2Z G090.5 ○ -
G
GAE1 G517.0 ○ ○
Measuring position reached
GAE2 G517.1 ○ ○ 16.2
signals
GAE3 G517.2 - ○
Tool offset write mode select
GOQSM G039.7 ○ － 16.4.2
signal
GR1,GR2 Gear selection signals (input) G028.1,G028.2 ○ ○ 11.5
GR1O,GR2O,GR3O Gear selection signals (output) F034.0 to F034.2 - ○ 11.5
- 2726 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
GR21,GR22 G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○
GR31,GR32 Gear selection signals (input) G029.2,G029.3 ○ ○ 11.12
GR41,GR42 G031.4,G031.5 ○ ○
Groove of thread measurement
GTMC F546.4 ○ ○
G completion signal
Groove of thread measurement
GTME F546.5 ○ ○ 6.5.7.2
error signal
Groove of thread measurement
GTMSR G549.4 ○ ○
signal
Dual position feedback turning
HBTRN G531.3 ○ ○ 1.10
mode selection signal
Hard copy cancellation request
HCAB2 F061.2 ○ ○ 14.1.14
reception signal
Hard copy cancellation request
HCABT G067.6 ○ ○ 14.1.14
signal
Hard copy execution status
HCEXE F061.3 ○ ○ 14.1.14
signal
Hard copy execution request
HCREQ G067.7 ○ ○ 14.1.14
signal
Manual handle feed direction
HDN G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2
inversion signal
HDO0 to HDO3 High-speed skip status signals F122.0 to F122.3 ○ ○ 16.3.3
Selecting direction of manual
HDSR G193.3 ○ ○ 3.5
handle rotation signal
Path select signal (Tool post
HEAD G063.0 ● ● 8.15, 14.3
select signal)
Manual handle feed maximum 3.2
HNDLF G023.3 ○ ○
feedrate change signal 7.1.10
Manual pulse magnification
HNDMP G088.3 ○ ○ 17.1
change signal
High-speed position switch F293,F294 ○ ○ 1.2.11
H HPS01 to HPS16
signals Y***,Y***+1 ○ ○ 1.2.12
1% step rapid traverse override 7.1.7.1
HROV G096.7 ○ ○
selection signals 7.1.9
HREV Handle-synchronous feed signal G023.4 ○ ○ 3.5
HS1A to HS1D, Manual handle feed axis G018.0 to G018.3,
○ ○ 3.2
HS1E selection signals G411.0
Software operator’s panel signal
HS1AO F077.0 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(HS1A)
Software operator’s panel signal
HS1BO F077.1 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(HS1B)
Software operator’s panel signal
HS1CO F077.2 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(HS1C)
Software operator’s panel signal
HS1DO F077.3 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(HS1D)
HS1IA to HS1ID, Manual handle interrupt axis G041.0 to G041.3,
○ ○ 3.3
HS1IE selection signals G411.4
HS2A to HS2D, Manual handle feed axis G018.4 to G018.7,
○ ○ 3.2
HS2E selection signals G411.1
HS2IA to HS2ID, Manual handle interrupt axis G041.4 to G041.7,
○ ○ 3.3
HS2IE selection signals G411.5
HS3A to HS3D, Manual handle feed axis G019.0 to G019.3,
○ ○ 3.2
HS3E selection signals G411.2
- 2727 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
HS3IA to HS3ID, Manual handle interrupt axis G042.0 to G042.3,
○ ○ 3.3
HS3IE selection signals G411.6
HS4A to HS4D, Manual handle feed axis G020.0 to G020.3,
○ ○ 3.2
HS4E selection signals G411.3
HS4IA to HS4ID, Manual handle interrupt axis G088.4 to G088.7,
H ○ ○ 3.3
HS4IE selection signals G411.7
HS5A to HS5D, Manual handle feed axis G379.0 to G379.3,
○ ○ 3.2
HS5E selection signals G412.0
HS5IA to HS5ID, Manual handle interrupt axis G379.4 to G379.7,
○ ○ 3.3
HS5IE selection signals G412.4
All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore
IGNVRY G066.0 ○ ○ 2.8
signal
Each-axis VRDY off alarm
IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 G192 ○ ○ 2.8
ignore signal
INCH Inch input signal F002.0 ○ ○ 13.5
INCMDA G072.5 ○ ○
Incremental command
INCMDB G076.5 ○ ○
externally set orientation signals 11.2
INCMDC G206.5 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
INCMDD G268.5 ○ ○
INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○
INCSTB Incremental orientation mode F051.1 ○ ○
11.2
INCSTC signals (serial spindle) F170.1 ○ ○
INCSTD F268.1 ○ ○
INDXA G072.0 ○ ○
Orientation stop position
INDXB G076.0 ○ ○
change command signals 11.2
INDXC G206.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
INDXD G268.0 ○ ○
I
INFD In-feed control cut start signal G063.6 - ○ 13.9
INHKY Key input disable signal F053.0 ○ ○ 17.6
INIST Initial axis assignment signal F536.7 ○ ○ 1.14
INP1 to INP8 In-position signals F104 ○ ○ 7.2.6
INTGA G071.5 ○ ○
INTGB Speed integral signals (serial G075.5 ○ ○
11.2
INTGC spindle) G205.5 ○ ○
INTGD G267.5 ○ ○
IOALM Input/output alarm signal F053.3 ○ ○ 15.2
IOBSY Input/output busy signal F053.2 ○ ○ 15.2
Manual handle generators
IOLBH1, IOLBH2 G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○ 3.9
selection signal
IOLBR β ready signal F531.7 ○ ○ 3.9
Path interference check
ITF01 to ITF04 G406.0 to G406.3 ● - 8.4
association signal
Unexpected disturbance torque
IUDD1 to IUDD8 G125 ○ ○ 2.9
detection disable signal
14.1.3
KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protection signals G046.3 to G046.6 ○ ○
14.2.1
K Software operator’s panel signal
KEYO F075.6 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(KEY1 to KEY4)
KEYP Memory protection signal G046.0 ○ ○ 14.2.2
LANG1 to LANG7 Display language setting signals G581.0 to G581.6 ○ ○ 14.1.8
LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○
L LDT1B Load detection signals 1 (serial F049.4 ○ ○
11.11
LDT1C spindle) F168.4 ○ ○
LDT1D F266.4 ○ ○
- 2728 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○
LDT2B Load detection signals 2(serial F049.5 ○ ○
11.11
LDT2C spindle) F168.5 ○ ○
LDT2D F266.5 ○ ○
L
LFCIF Tool life counting disable signal F093.2 ○ ○ 12.5
LFCIV Tool life counting disable signal G048.2 ○ ○ 12.5
Periodic maintenance service
LIFOVR F093.0 ○ ○ 14.1.18
life expiration signal
M00 to M31 Auxiliary function code signals F010 to F013 ○ ○ 8.16, 10.1
M200 to M215 F014 to F015
2nd M function code signals ○ ○ 10.3
M200 to M231 F014 to F017
M300 to M315 F016 to F017
3rd M function code signals ○ ○ 10.3
M300 to M331 F564 to F567
M400 to M431 4th M function code signals F568 to F571 ○ ○ 10.3
M500 to M531 5th M function code signals F572 to F575 ○ ○ 10.3
Three-dimensional coordinate
M3R system conversion manual G031.3 ○ ○ 13.15
interruption switch signal
MA CNC ready signal F001.7 ○ ○ 2.2
MABSM Manual absolute check signal F004.2 ○ ○ 5.4
Auxiliary function lock check
MAFL F004.4 ○ ○ 10.2
signal
Block cancel acknowledgement
MBCAN F297.0 ○ ○ 5.11
signal
MBDT1 Optional block skip check F004.0 ○ ○
5.5
MBDT2 to MBDT9 signals F005 ○ ○
MBSO Middle block start signal F534.4 ○ ○ 2.13
Call program confirmation
MCEX1 to MCEX16 F514,F515 ○ ○ 17.7
signal
MCEXE Macro call executing signal F512.0 ○ ○ 17.7
MCFIN Mode change completion signal G514.0 ○ ○ 17.7
M
MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○
MCFNB Power line switch completion G075.3 ○ ○
11.2
MCFNC signals (serial spindle) G205.3 ○ ○
MCFND G267.3 ○ ○
Handle available signal in
MCHK G067.3 ○ ○ 5.3.5
checking mode
MCRQ Mode change request signal F512.1 ○ ○ 17.7
MCSP Abnormal end signal F512.2 ○ ○ 17.7
MCST1 to MCST16 Macro call start signal G512,G513 ○ ○ 17.7
MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signals G043.0 to G043.2 ○ ○ 2.6
Software operator’s panel signal
MD1O F073.0 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MD1)
MD1R Mode notification signal F513.0 ○ ○ 17.7
Software operator’s panel signal
MD2O F073.1 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MD2)
MD2R Mode notification signal F513.1 ○ ○ 17.7
Software operator’s panel signal
MD4O F073.2 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MD4)
MD4R Mode notification signal F513.2 ○ ○ 17.7
MDIRST MDI reset confirmation signal F006.1 ○ ○ 5.2
MDRN Dry run check signal F002.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2
MDTCH1 to Controlled axis detach status
F110 ○ ○ 1.2.5, 1.15
MDTCH8 signals
- 2729 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Program edit selection check
MEDT F003.6 ○ ○ 2.6
signal
MF Auxiliary function strobe signals F007.0 ○ ○ 10.1
MF2 2nd M function strobe signal F008.4 ○ ○ 10.3
MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008.5 ○ ○ 10.3
MF4 4th M function strobe signal F008.6 ○ ○ 10.3
MF5 5th M function strobe signal F008.7 ○ ○ 10.3
Auxiliary function completion
MFIN G005.0 ○ ○ 10.4, 10.7
signal
2nd M function completion
MFIN2 G004.4 ○ ○ 10.4, 10.7
signal
3rd M function completion
MFIN3 G004.5 ○ ○ 10.4, 10.7
signal
MFIN4 4th M function completion signal G004.6 ○ ○ 10.4
MFIN5 5th M function completion signal G004.7 ○ ○ 10.4
MFNHGA G072.6 ○ ○
Spindle switch MAIN MCC
MFNHGB G076.6 ○ ○
contact status signals (serial 11.2
MFNHGC G206.6 ○ ○
spindle)
MFNHGD G268.6 ○ ○
MFSYNA,MFSYNB Flexible synchronization control
F197.0 to F197.3 ○ ○ 1.12
MFSYNC,MFSYND mode status signals
Manual handle feed selection
MH F003.1 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
Manual linear/circular
MHLC1 to MHLC5 G544.0 to G544.4 ○ ○ 3.4, 3.5
interpolation signals
M Usage selection of manual
MHUS1 to MHUS5 linear/circular interpolation G545.0 to G545.4 ○ ○ 3.4, 3.5
signals
MI1 to MI8 Mirror image signals G106 ○ ○ 1.2.6
Incremental feed selection
MINC F003.0 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
Composite control axis change
MIX1 to MIX8 G128 ○ ○ 8.6.2
selection signals
Composite axis confirmation
MIXO1 to MIXO8 F343 ○ ○ 8.6.2
signals
MJ Jog feed selection check signal F003.2 ○ ○ 2.6
MLK All-axis machine lock signal G044.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1
MLK1 to MLK8 Each-axis machine lock signal G108 ○ ○ 5.3.1
Software operator’s panel signal
MLKO F075.4 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MLK)
Manual data input selection
MMDI F003.3 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
Automatic operation selection
MMEM F003.5 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
MMI1 to MMI8 Mirror image check signals F108 ○ ○ 1.2.6
All-axis machine lock check
MMLK F004.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1
signal
MMMOD Check mode confirmation signal F091.3 ○ ○ 5.3.5
MMOD Checking mode signal G067.2 ○ ○ 5.3.5
Direction change prohibition
MNCHG F091.1 ○ ○ 5.3.5
signal
- 2730 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
MORA1A F046.6 ○ ○
Magnetic sensor orientation
MORA1B F050.6 ○ ○
completion signals (serial 11.2
MORA1C F169.6 ○ ○
spindle)
MORA1D F267.6 ○ ○
MORA2A F046.7 ○ ○
MORA2B Magnetic sensor orientation F050.7 ○ ○
11.2
MORA2C proximity signals (serial spindle) F169.7 ○ ○
MORA2D F267.7 ○ ○
MORCMA G073.0 ○ ○
Magnetic sensor orientation
MORCMB G077.0 ○ ○
command signals (serial 11.2
MORCMC G207.0 ○ ○
spindle)
MORCMD G269.0 ○ ○
Manual handle feed amount
G019.4,G019.5
MP1,MP2,MP4 selection signals (incremental ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5, 3.9
G019.6
feed signals)
MP21,MP22 G087.0,G087.1
MP31,MP32 Manual handle feed amount G087.3,G087.4
○ ○ 3.2
MP41,MP42 selection signals G087.6,G087.7
MP51,MP52 G380.0,G380.1
Software operator’s panel signal
MP1O F076.0 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MP1)
Software operator’s panel signal
MP2O F076.1 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(MP2)
MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○
MPOFB Motor power cutoff command G077.2 ○ ○
11.2
MPOFC signals (serial spindle) G207.2 ○ ○
MPOFD G269.2 ○ ○
M
MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○
MRDYB Machine ready signals (serial G074.7 ○ ○
11.2
MRDYC spindle) G204.7 ○ ○
MRDYD G266.7 ○ ○
Manual reference position
MREF F004.5 ○ ○ 4.1
return selection check signal
DNC operation selection 5.14, 5.15,
MRMT F003.4 ○ ○
confirm signal 5.16
Reverse movement prohibition
MRVM G531.1 ○ ○ 5.3.5
signal
MRVMD Reverse movement signal F091.0 ○ ○ 5.3.5
Reverse movement prohibition
MRVSP F091.2 ○ ○ 5.3.5
signal
MSBK Single block check signal F004.3 ○ ○ 5.3.3
MSP00 to MSP15 Multi-spindle address P signals F160,F161 ○ ○ 11.12
MSPOSA F039.0 ○ ○
MSPOSB Spindle positioning mode F402.1 ○ ○
11.10
MSPOSC signals F402.2 ○ ○
MSPOSD F402.3 ○ ○
Manual tool compensation tool
MT8N00 to MT8N31 G525 to G528 ○ - 12.1.5
number signal (8 digits)
Manual tool compensation
MTLA F061.5 ○ - 12.1.5
completion signal
Manual tool compensation
MTLANG F061.4 ○ - 12.1.5
uncompleted signal
Manual tool compensation
MTLC G067.0 ○ - 12.1.5
command number
- 2731 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Manual tool compensation tool
MTLN00 to MTLN15 G068,G069 ○ - 12.1.5
number signal (4 digits)
M
MV1 to MV8 Axis moving signals F102 ○ ○ 1.2.5
MVD1 to MVD8 Axis moving direction signals F106 ○ ○ 1.2.5
A/B phase detector
NDCAL1 to NDCAL8 disconnection alarm ignore G202 ○ ○ 17.1
signal (PMC axis control)
Waiting M codes of high-speed
● ● 8.3
type invalid signal
NHSW Speed-up of non-buffering G579.6
command by G code invalid ○ ○ 13.22
signal
NMWT No-wait signal G063.7 ● ● 8.2
NOINPS In-position check disable signal G023.5 ○ ○ 7.2.6.3
3-dimensional coordinate
system conversion manual
NOT3DM G347.7 ○ ○ 3.3.1
interrupt enable/disable switch
N
signal
NOWT No-wait signal G063.1 ● ● 8.2
Signal for disabling angular axis
NOZAGC control for the perpendicular G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8
axis
NPOS1 to NPOS8 Axis non-displayed signals G198 ○ ○ 14.1.19
NRROA G072.2 ○ ○
Shortcut command signals for
NRROB G076.2 ○ ○
orientation stop position change 11.2
NRROC G206.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
NRROD G268.2 ○ ○
Signal for disabling torque
NSYNCA difference alarm detection for G059.7 ○ ○ 1.6
axis synchronous control
OFN0 to OFN5, Tool offset number selection G039.0 to G039.5, 16.5
○ ○
OFN6 to OFN9 signals G040.0 to G040.3 16.4.2
Tool compensation number
ONSC G547.6 ○ － 16.4.2
specification signal
OP Automatic operation signal F000.7 ○ ○ 5.1
ORARA F045.7 ○ ○
ORARB Orientation completion signals F049.7 ○ ○
11.2
ORARC (serial spindle) F168.7 ○ ○
ORARD F266.7 ○ ○
ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○
ORCMB Orientation command G074.6 ○ ○ 11.2
ORCMC signals(serial spindle) G204.6 ○ ○ 11.15
O
ORCMD G266.6 ○ ○
Stored stroke limit range
OTA1 to OTA8 G596 ○ ○ 2.3.8
switching axis selection signals
Stored stroke limit range
OTD0 to OTD15 G594, G595 ○ ○ 2.3.8
switching data selection signals
Stored stroke limit range
OTSW G599.0 ○ ○ 2.3.8
switching start signal
Stored stroke limit range
OTSWFN F599.0 ○ ○ 2.3.8
switching finish signal
Software operator’s panel
OUT0 to OUT15 F072,F074 ○ ○ 14.1.2
general-purpose switch signals
OVC Override cancel signal G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
- 2732 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Inter-path flexible
synchronization mode select
OVLN signal G531.4 ● ● 1.12
Advanced superimposition
signal
Inter-path flexible
synchronization mode signal
OVLNS F545.1 ● ● 1.12
Advanced superimposition
mode signal
O Superimposed control axis
OVLS1 to OVLS8 G190 ○ ○ 8.7
selection signals
Superimposed control master
OVMO1 to OVMO8 F344 ○ ○ 8.7
axis confirmation signals
OVRA G072.4 ○ ○
OVRB Analog override signals (serial G076.4 ○ ○ 11.2
OVRC spindle) G206.4 ○ ○
OVRD G268.4 ○ ○
Superimposed control slave
OVSO1 to OVSO8 F345 ○ ○ 8.7
axis confirmation signals
Absolute position detector
PBATL F172.7 ○ ○ 1.4.2
battery voltage low alarm signal
Absolute position detector
PBATZ battery voltage zero alarm F172.6 ○ ○ 1.4.2
signal
PC1DTA F047.0 ○ ○
Position coder one-rotation
PC1DTB F051.0 ○ ○
signal detection status signals 11.2
PC1DTC F170.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
PC1DTD F268.0 ○ ○
2nd position coder selection
PC2SLC G028.7 ○ ○ 11.12
signal
3rd position coder selection
PC3SLC G026.0 ○ ○ 11.12
signal
4th position coder selection
PC4SLC G026.1 ○ ○ 11.12
signal
High speed program check
PCKSV F290.4 ○ ○ 5.3.4
saving data signal
P
Peripheral axis control group 1
PE1EX F534.5 ○ ○
start signal
Peripheral axis control group 2
PE2EX F534.6 ○ ○ 1.20
start signal
Peripheral axis control group 3
PE3EX F534.7 ○ ○
start signal
Small-hole peck drilling cycle in
PECK2 F066.5 - ○ 13.7
progress signal
High-speed program check
PGCK G290.5 ○ ○ 5.3.4
signal
Automatic phase
PHERA, PHERB,
synchronization positional error F553.0 to F553.3 ○ ○ 1.12.3
PHERC, PHERD
detection signals
Flexible synchronization control
PHFINA to PHFIND phase synchronization end F381.0 to F381.3 ○ ○ 1.12.2
signals
PK1 to PK8 Parking signals G122 ○ ○ 8.6.2
- 2733 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
G122.6
PKESS1 1st spindle parking signal ○ ○ 11.17
(G031.6)
G122.7
PKESS2 2nd spindle parking signal ○ ○ 11.17
(G031.7)
PKESE1 G265.0 ○ ○
PKESE2 Spindle command synchronous G265.1 ○ ○
11.17
PKESE3 parking signal(for each spindle) G265.2 ○ ○
PKESE4 G265.3 ○ ○
PN1,PN2,PN4, External workpiece number
G009.0 to G009.4 ○ ○ 17.5
PN8,PN16 search signals
PRC Position record signal G040.6 ○ - 16.4.1
Program screen display mode
PRGDPL F053.1 ○ ○ 17.6
signal
P High speed program check
PRGMD F290.5 ○ ○ 5.3.4
mode signal
Target part count reached
PRTSF F062.7 ○ ○ 14.1.1
signal
Polygon spindle speed arrival
PSAR F063.2 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
Polygon master axis not arrival
PSE1 F063.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
Polygon synchronization axis
PSE2 F063.1 ○ ○ 6.9.2
not arrival signal
PSW01 to PSW16 Position switch signals F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.9
Polygon synchronization under
PSYN F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9
way signal
Power failure deceleration
PWFL G203.7 ○ ○ 1.11
signal
R01I to R12I G032.0 to G033.3 ○ ○
R01I2 to R12I2 Spindle motor speed command G034.0 to G035.3 ○ ○
11.6
R01I3 to R12I3 signals G036.0 to G037.3 ○ ○
R01I4 to R12I4 G272.0 to G273.3 ○ ○
R01O to R12O F036.0 to F037.3 ○ ○ 11.5
R01O2 to R12O2 F200.0 to F201.3 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals
R01O3 to R12O3 F204.0 to F205.3 ○ ○ 11.12
R01O4 to R12O4 F270.0 to F271.3 ○ ○
RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○
RCFNB Output switch completion F050.3 ○ ○
11.2
RCFNC signals (serial spindle) F169.3 ○ ○
RCFND F267.3 ○ ○
R
RCHA G071.7 ○ ○
RCHB Power line status check signals G075.7 ○ ○
11.2
RCHC (serial spindle) G205.7 ○ ○
RCHD G267.7 ○ ○
RCHHGA G072.7 ○ ○
Spindle switch HIGH MCC
RCHHGB G076.7 ○ ○
contact status signals (serial 11.2
RCHHGC G206.7 ○ ○
spindle)
RCHHGD G268.7 ○ ○
RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○
RCHPB Output switch signals (serial F050.2 ○ ○
11.2
RCHPC spindle) F169.2 ○ ○
RCHPD F267.2 ○ ○
- 2734 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
RE01I to RE32I G708 to G711 ○ ○
RE01I2 to RE32I2 Extended spindle motor speed G712 to G715 ○ ○
RE01I3 to RE32I3 command signals G716 to G719 ○ ○
RE01I4 to RE32I4 G720 to G723 ○ ○
11.27
RE01O to RE32O F708 to F711 ○ ○
RE01O2 to RE32O2 F712 to F715 ○ ○
S32-bit code signals
RE01O3 to RE32O3 F716 to F719 ○ ○
RE01O4 to RE32O4 F720 to F723 ○ ○
Tool axis right-angle direction
RGHTH G023.6 ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
feed mode signal
RGSPM Spindle rotation direction F065.1 ○ ○
11.13
RGSPP signals F065.0 ○ ○
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061.0 ○ ○ 11.13
RGTSP1 to Rigid tapping spindle selection
G061.4 to G061.7 ○ - 11.13
RGTSP4 signals
RLSOT Stroke check 1 release signal G007.7 ○ ○ 2.3.2
RLSOT3 Stroke check 3 release signal G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.4
RMTC Re-machining thread signal G549.5 ○ ○ 6.5.7.2
RMVST Removal start signal G536.2 ○ ○ 1.14
RMVED Removal completion signal F536.2 ○ ○ 1.14
Tool tip center rotation feed
RNDH G298.2 ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
mode signal
ROTAA G072.1 ○ ○
Rotational direction command
ROTAB G076.1 ○ ○
signals for orientation stop 11.2
ROTAC G206.1 ○ ○
position change (serial spindle)
ROTAD G268.1 ○ ○
R ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signals G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
Software operator’s panel signal
ROV1O F076.4 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(ROV1)
Software operator’s panel signal
ROV2O F076.5 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(ROV2)
Rapid traverse block overlap 7.2.1.2
ROVLP G053.5 ○ ○
disable signal 7.2.1.3
Reference position match
RP11 to RP18 F517.0 to F517.7 ○ ○ 4.11
signals
2nd reference position match
RP21 to RP28 F518.0 to F518.7 ○ ○ 4.11
signals
RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7, 7.1.1
RRW Reset & rewind signal G008.6 ○ ○ 5.2
RSLA G071.6 ○ ○
RSLB Output switch request signals G075.6 ○ ○
11.2
RSLC (serial spindle) G205.6 ○ ○
RSLD G267.6 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed
RSMAX F065.2 ○ ○ 11.14
ratio control clamp signal
RST Resetting signal F001.1 ○ ○ 5.2
Manual rapid traverse selection
RT G019.7 ○ ○ 3.1
signal
RTAP Rigid tapping-in-progress signal F076.3 ○ ○ 11.13
Rigid tapping retraction start
RTNT G062.6 ○ ○ 5.14, 5.18
signal
Software operator’s panel signal
RTO F077.6 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(RT)
- 2735 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Rigid tapping retraction
RTPT F066.1 ○ ○ 5.14, 5.18
completion signal
RTRCT Retract signal G066.4 ○ ○ 1.10, 6.22
R RTRCTF Retract completion signal F065.4 ○ ○ 1.10, 6.22
RVS Reverse execution signal G007.0 - ○ 5.10
RVSL Reverse movement signal F082.2 - ○ 5.10, 5.11
RWD Rewinding signal F000.0 ○ ○ 5.2
S00 to S31 Spindle function code signals F022 to F025 ○ ○ 10.1
Spindle 1 under measurement
S1MES F062.3 ○ - 16.4.2
signal
Spindle 2 under measurement
S2MES F062.4 ○ - 16.4.2
signal
Spindle measurement select
S2TLS G040.5 ○ - 16.4.2
signal
SA Servo ready signal F000.6 ○ ○ 2.2
SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029.4 ○ ○ 11.5
SARA F045.3 ○ ○
SARB Spindle speed arrival signal F049.3 ○ ○
11.2
SARC (serial spindle) F168.3 ○ ○
SARD F266.3 ○ ○
SBK Single block signal G046.1 ○ ○ 5.3.3
Software operator’s panel signal
SBKO F075.3 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(SBK)
Spindle synchronous speed
SBRT G038.1 ○ ○ 11.14
ratio control signal
SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○
SCLPB F401.1 ○ ○
Spindle clamp signal 11.10
SCLPC F401.2 ○ ○
SCLPD F401.3 ○ ○
S SDPC Speed display change signal G038.5 ○ ○ 14.1.10
SDTA F045.2 ○ ○
SDTB Speed detection signals (serial F049.2 ○ ○
11.2
SDTC spindle) F168.2 ○ ○
SDTD F266.2 ○ ○
Excess synchronization error
SEO1 to SEO8 F559 ○ ○ 8.6.2
signals
SF Spindle function strobe signal F007.2 ○ ○ 10.1
SFAN Alarm level detection signal F093.1 ○ ○ 19.3
Spindle function completion
SFIN G005.2 ○ ○ 10.4
signal
SFRA G070.5 ○ ○
SFRB CW command signals (serial G074.5 ○ ○
11.2
SFRC spindle) G204.5 ○ ○
SFRD G266.5 ○ ○
SGN G033.5 ○ ○
SGN2 Spindle motor command polarity G035.5 ○ ○
11.6
SGN3 command signals G037.5 ○ ○
SGN4 G273.5 ○ ○
SH00A to SH14A G078.0 to G079.6 ○ ○
SH00B to SH14B Spindle orientation signals with G080.0 to G081.6 ○ ○
11.15
SH00C to SH14C the stop position externally set G208.0 to G209.6 ○ ○
SH00D to SH14D G270.0 to G271.6 ○ ○
- 2736 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
SIND G033.7 ○ ○
SIND2 Spindle motor speed command G035.7 ○ ○
11.6
SIND3 selection signals G037.7 ○ ○
SIND4 G273.7 ○ ○
SKIP Skip signal X004.7 ○ ○ 16.3
SKIP2 to SKIP6, X004.2 to X004.6,
Skip signal ○ ○ 16.3.5
SKIP7,SKIP8 X004.0,X004.1
SKIPP Skip signal G006.6 ○ ○ 16.3
SLANG Display language switch start G581.7 ○ ○ 14.1.8
signal
SLPCA Path spindle feedback selection G064.2 ● ●
8.11
SLPCB signals G064.3 ● ●
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference
SLREF G340.5 ○ ○ 4.13
position return select 1 signal
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference
SLRER G340.6 ○ ○ 4.13
position return select 2 signal
SLSPA Path spindle command G063.2 ● ●
8.11
SLSPB selection signals G063.3 ● ●
SLVA G073.1 ○ ○
Subordinate operation mode
SLVB G077.1 ○ ○
command signals (serial 11.2
SLVC G207.1 ○ ○
spindle)
SLVD G269.1 ○ ○
SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○
SLVSB Subordinate operation status F050.4 ○ ○
11.2
SLVSC signals (serial spindle) F169.4 ○ ○
S SLVSD F267.4 ○ ○
Parking axis confirmation
SMPK1 to SMPK8 F346 ○ ○ 8.6
signals
SMSL11 G588.0 ○ ○
SMSL12 G588.1 ○ ○
SMSL13 G588.2 ○ ○
SMSL14 Spindle position save selection G588.3 ○ ○
11.14.1
SMSL21 signal G588.4 ○ ○
SMSL22 G588.5 ○ ○
SMSL23 G588.6 ○ ○
SMSL24 G588.7 ○ ○
SMZ In-position check signal G053.6 ○ ○ 7.2.6
SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○
SOCNB Soft start/stop cancel signals G075.4 ○ ○
11.2
SOCNC (serial spindle) G205.4 ○ ○
SOCND G267.4 ○ ○
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029.5 ○ ○ 11.5
SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signals G030 ○ ○ 11.5
2nd spindle speed override
SOV20 to SOV27 G376 ○ ○ 11.12
signals
3rd spindle speed override
SOV30 to SOV37 G377 ○ ○ 11.12
signals
4th spindle speed override
SOV40 to SOV47 G378 ○ ○ 11.12
signals
Spindle fluctuation detection
SPAL F035.0 ○ ○ 11.19
alarm signal
- 2737 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
SPAPH1 G587.4 ○ ○
SPAPH2 Arbitrary spindle position phase G587.5 ○ ○
11.14.1
SPAPH3 synchronization signal G587.6 ○ ○
SPAPH4 G587.7 ○ ○
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000.4 ○ ○ 5.1
SPMER1 F577.4 ○ ○
SPMER2 Spindle position save error F577.5 ○ ○
11.14.1
SPMER3 signal F577.6 ○ ○
SPMER4 F577.7 ○ ○
SPMFN1 F577.0 ○ ○
SPMFN2 Spindle position save F577.1 ○ ○
11.14.1
SPMFN3 completion signal F577.2 ○ ○
SPMFN4 F577.3 ○ ○
SPMST1 G587.0 ○ ○
SPMST2 Spindle position save start G587.1 ○ ○
11.14.1
SPMST3 signal G587.2 ○ ○
SPMST4 G587.3 ○ ○
Software operator’s panel signal
SPO F075.7 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(*SP)
Spindle indexing signals for
SPP1 to SPP8 F522 ○ ○ 11.20
each axis
Spindle phase synchronous
SPPHS G038.3 ○ ○ 11.14
control signal
SPPHS1 G289.0 ○ ○
SPPHS2 Spindle phase synchronous G289.1 ○ ○
11.14
SPPHS3 control signal (for each spindle) G289.2 ○ ○
SPPHS4 G289.3 ○ ○
S
SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○
SPSLB Spindle selection signals (serial G075.2 ○ ○
11.2
SPSLC spindle) G205.2 ○ ○
SPSLD G267.2 ○ ○
Spindle command path
SPSP G536.7 ○ ○ 11.12
specification signal
SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○
SPSTPB G402.1 ○ ○
Spindle stop completion signal 11.10
SPSTPC G402.2 ○ ○
SPSTPD G402.3 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous control
SPSYC G038.2 ○ ○ 11.14
signal
SPSYC1 G288.0 ○ ○
SPSYC2 Spindle synchronous control G288.1 ○ ○
11.14
SPSYC3 signal (for each spindle) G288.2 ○ ○
SPSYC4 G288.3 ○ ○
SPWRN1 to Spindle warning detail signals 1 11.2
F264.0 to F265.0 ○ ○
SPWRN9 to 9 19.2
Program restart MDI program
SQMPE F316.7 ○ ○ 5.6
execution completion signal
Program restart MDI program
SQMPR F316.6 ○ ○ 5.6
output completion signal
SRN Program restart signal G006.0 ○ ○ 5.6
Quick program restart under
SRNEX Fn534.1 ○ ○ 5.7
way signal
Program restart under way
SRNMV F002.4 ○ ○ 5.6
signal
- 2738 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
SRSP1R 1st serial spindle ready signals F034.6 ○ ○ 11.2
SRSP2R 2nd serial spindle ready signals F034.5 ○ ○ 11.2
SRSP3R 3rd serial spindle ready signals F034.4 ○ ○ 11.2
SRSP4R 4th serial spindle ready signals F034.3 ○ ○ 11.2
All-spindle operation ready
SRSRDY F034.7 ○ ○ 11.2
signal
SRVA G070.4 ○ ○
SRVB CCW command signals (serial G074.4 ○ ○
11.2
SRVC spindle) G204.4 ○ ○
SRVD G266.4 ○ ○
SRVON1 to
SV speed control mode signals G521 ○ ○ 11.20
SRVON8
SSEGB1 to
Simple spindle EGB signals G351.0 to G351.3 ○ ○ 11.24
SSEGB4
SSEGBM1 to Simple spindle EGB mode
F351.0 to F351.3 ○ ○ 11.24
SSEGBM4 signals
SSIN G033.6 ○ ○
SSIN2 Spindle motor command polarity G035.6 ○ ○
11.6
SSIN3 selection signals G037.6 ○ ○
SSIN4 G273.6 ○ ○
Total spindle revolution number
SSR1 to SSR4 G533.0 to G533.3 ○ ○ 11.21
reset signals
Total spindle revolution number
SSRS G533.4 ○ ○ 11.21
reset selection signal
SSTA F045.1 ○ ○
SSTB Speed zero signals (serial F049.1 ○ ○
11.2
S SSTC spindle) F168.1 ○ ○
SSTD F266.1 ○ ○
ST Cycle start signal G007.2 ○ ○ 5.1
STCHK Start check signal G408.0 ○ ○ 2.13
STL Cycle start lamp signal F000.5 ○ ○ 5.1
STLK Start lock signal G007.1 ○ ○ 2.5
SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○
SUCLPB F400.1 ○ ○
Spindle unclamp signal 11.10
SUCLPC F400.2 ○ ○
SUCLPD F400.3 ○ ○
Servo motor spindle control
SVAR mode acceleration/deceleration F090.6 ○ ○ 11.22.1
completion signal
SVF1 to SVF8 Servo off signals G126 ○ ○ 1.2.8
Servo motor rotation polarity
SVGN G022.5 ○ ○ 11.22.1
specification signal
Servo motor rotation speed
SVR01I to SVR12I G021.0 to G022.3 ○ ○ 11.22.1
specification signals
SV speed control mode
SVREV1 to SVREV8 F521 ○ ○ 11.20
in-progress signals
SVRVS1 to SVRVS8 SV reverse signals G523 ○ ○ 11.20
SVSAR1 to SVSAR8 Speed arrival signals F377 ○ ○ 11.20
Servo motor spindle control
SVSP G022.7 ○ ○
switching signal
11.22.1
Servo motor spindle control
SVSPM F090.7 ○ ○
mode signal
SVSST1 to SVSST8 Speed zero signals F376 ○ ○ 11.20
- 2739 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○
SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○
Servo warning detail signals 19.1
SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○
SVWRN4 F093.7 ○ ○
SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○
SWS2 G027.1 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals 11.12
SWS3 G027.2 ○ ○
SWS4 G026.3 ○ ○
Servo motor spindle
synchronization mode
SYAR F090.4 ○ ○ 11.22.1
acceleration/deceleration
completion signal
SYCAL Phase error monitor signal F044.4 ○ ○ 11.14,11.17
SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○
SYCAL2 Phase error monitor signal (for F043.1 ○ ○ 11.14
SYCAL3 each spindle) F043.2 ○ ○ 11.17
SYCAL4 F043.3 ○ ○
Synchronous master axis
SYCM1 to SYCM8 F341 ○ ○ 8.6.2
confirmation signals
Synchronous slave axis
SYCS1 to SYCS8 F342 ○ ○ 8.6.2
confirmation signals
Synchronous/composite/superi
SYN1O to SYN8O mposed control under way F118 ○ ○ 8.7,8.10
signals
Synchronous control axis
SYNC1 to SYNC8 G138 ○ ○ 1.6.11,8.6.2
S selection signals
Signals for selecting the manual
SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 feed axis for axis synchronous G140 ○ ○ 1.6.11
control
Signal for indicating a positional
SYNER deviation error alarm for axis F403.0 ○ ○ 1.6.11
synchronous control
SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065.6 - ○ 1.10.11
SYNMT1 to Machine coordinate match state
F210 ○ ○ 1.6.11
SYNMT8 output signals
Axis synchronous control status
SYNO1 to SYNO8 F532 ○ ○ 1.6.11
signals
SYNOF1 to Synchronization compensation
F211 ○ ○ 1.6.11
SYNOF8 enable state output signals
Phase synchronization for
SYPER Servo/Spindle synchronous F527.7 ○ ○
error signal
Phase synchronization for
SYPFN Servo/Spindle synchronous F527.6 ○ ○ 11.22.3
finished signal
Phase synchronization for
SYPST Servo/Spindle synchronous G517.7 ○ ○
start signal
Servo motor spindle
SYSS G61.2 ○ ○
synchronization start signal
11.22.1
Servo motor spindle
SYSSM F090.5 ○ ○
synchronization mode signal
T00 to T31 Tool function code signals F026 to F029 ○ ○ 10.1
T
TAP Tapping signal F001.5 ○ ○ 13.7.11
- 2740 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
TB_BASE Table base signal G298.0 ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
DO signal for Data transfer
TDCF00 to TDCF07 F747 ○ ○ 17.9
between PMC and DCSPMC
Trouble forecast signals for
TDFTR1 to TDFTR8 F299 ○ ○ 19.4
disturbance level
Trouble forecast signals for
TDSML1 to TDSML8 F298 ○ ○ 19.4
thermal simulation
TF Tool function strobe signal F007.3 ○ ○ 10.1
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005.3 ○ ○ 10.4
THRD Threading signal F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5
TIALM Path interference alarm signal F064.7 ● - 8.4
Path interference check in
TICHK F064.6 ● - 8.4
progress signal
Tool management data
TKEY0 to TKEY5 G330.0 to G330.5 ○ ○ 12.3.2.7
protection signal
Tool group number selection
TL01 to TL512 G047.0 to G048.1 ○ ○
signals
12.5
Number of remaining tools
TLAL F154.0 - ○
notification signal
12.3.1
TLCH Tool change signal F064.0 ○ ○
12.6
TLCH1 Tool change signal 1 F328.0 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCH2 Tool change signal 2 F328.1 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCH3 Tool change signal 3 F328.2 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCH4 Tool change signal 4 F328.3 ○ ○ 12.3.1
12.3.1
TLCHB Tool life expiration notice signal F064.3 ○ ○
T 12.6
Tool life expiration notice signal
TLCHB1 F329.4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
1
Tool life expiration notice signal
TLCHB2 F329.5 ○ ○ 12.3.1
2
Tool life expiration notice signal
TLCHB3 F329.6 ○ ○ 12.3.1
3
Tool life expiration notice signal
TLCHB4 F329.7 ○ ○ 12.3.1
4
12.3.1
TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064.2 ○ ○
12.6
TLCHI1 Individual tool change signal 1 F328.4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCHI2 Individual tool change signal 2 F328.5 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCHI3 Individual tool change signal 3 F328.6 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLCHI4 Individual tool change signal 4 F328.7 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLMA F045.6 ○ ○
TLMB Torque limit signals (serial F049.6 ○ ○
11.11.2
TLMC spindle) F168.6 ○ ○
TLMD F266.6 ○ ○
Tool management data edit
TLMEM F315.7 ○ ○ 12.3.1
in-progress signal
Tool management data
TLMG10 F315.2 ○ ○ 12.3.1
modification in-progress signal
TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○
TLMHB Torque limit command HIGH G074.1 ○ ○
11.11.2
TLMHC signals (serial spindle) G204.1 ○ ○
TLMHD G266.1 ○ ○
- 2741 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○
TLMLB Torque limit command LOW G074.0 ○ ○ 11.2
TLMLC signals (serial spindle) G204.0 ○ ○ 11.10.1
TLMLD G266.0 ○ ○
Tool management data output
TLMOT F315.4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
in-progress signal
TLMSRH Tool search in-progress signal F315.1 ○ ○ 12.3.1
Tool life counting disable signal
TLNCT1 G329.4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
1
Tool life counting disable signal
TLNCT2 G329.5 ○ ○ 12.3.1
2
Tool life counting disable signal
TLNCT3 G329.6 ○ ○ 12.3.1
3
Tool life counting disable signal
TLNCT4 G329.7 ○ ○ 12.3.1
4
TLNW New tool select signal F064.1 ○ ○ 12.5
12.3.1
TLRST Tool change signal G048.7 ○ ○
12.6
TLRST1 Tool change signal 1 G328.0 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLRST2 Tool change signal 2 G328.1 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLRST3 Tool change signal 3 G328.2 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLRST4 Tool change signal 4 G328.3 ○ ○ 12.3.1
Individual tool change reset 12.3.1
TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○
signal 12.6
Individual tool change reset
TLRSTI1 G328.4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
signal 1
Individual tool change reset
T TLRSTI2 G328.5 ○ ○ 12.3.1
signal 2
Individual tool change reset
TLRSTI3 G328.6 ○ ○ 12.3.1
signal 3
Individual tool change reset
TLRSTI4 G328.7 ○ ○ 12.3.1
signal 4
TLSKF Tool skip completion signal F315.0 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKF1 Tool skip completion signal 1 F329.0 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKF2 Tool skip completion signal 2 F329.1 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKF3 Tool skip completion signal 3 F329.2 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKF4 Tool skip completion signal 4 F329.3 ○ ○ 12.3.1
12.3.1
TLSKP Tool skip signal G048.5 ○ ○
12.6
TLSKP1 Tool skip signal 1 G329.0 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKP2 Tool skip signal 2 G329.1 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKP3 Tool skip signal 3 G329.2 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TLSKP4 Tool skip signal 4 G329.3 ○ ○ 12.3.1
TMFNFD Life expiration signal F315.6 ○ ○ 12.3.1
General-purpose integrating
TMRON G053.0 ○ ○ 14.1.1
meter start signal
TPMG00 to DI signal for Data transfer
G765 ○ ○ 17.9
TPMG07 between PMC and DCSPMC
TPPRS Touch panel check signal F006.0 ○ ○ 14.1.7
TRACT Tool retraction mode signal F092.3 ○ ○ 5.8
TRESC Tool retraction signal G059.0 ○ ○ 5.8
Tool retraction axis movement
TRMTN F092.4 ○ ○ 5.8
signal
TRQL1 to TRQL8 Torque limit reached signals F114 ○ ○ 16.3.6
- 2742 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
Torque control mode signal
TRQM1 to TRQM8 F190 ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
T
TRRTN Tool return signal G059.1 ○ ○ 5.8
TRSPS Tool return completion signal F092.5 ○ ○ 5.8
UI000 to UI031 G054 to G057 ○ ○
UI100 to UI131 G276 to G279 ○ ○
Custom macro input signals 13.6
UI200 to UI231 G280 to G283 ○ ○
UI300 to UI331 G284 to G287 ○ ○
Interrupt signal for custom
UINT G053.3 ○ ○ 13.6.3
U macro
F054,F055,
UO000 to UO031 ○ ○
F276,F277
UO100 to UO131 Custom macro output signals F056 to F059 ○ ○ 13.6
UO200 to UO231 F280 to F283 ○ ○
UO300 to UO331 F284 to F287 ○ ○
WATO Waiting signal F063.6 ● ● 8.2
Web browser connection status
WBCNT F0578.2 ○ ○ 18.2.7
signal
Web browser connection
WBEND G0579.5 ○ ○ 18.2.7
prohibition signal
SRAM ECC abnormality
WECCS F0535.3 ○ ○ 19.3.2
warning signal
Embedded Ethernet
W WETE communication abnormality F0535.4 ○ ○ 19.3.2
warning signal
Fast Ethernet communication
WETF F0535.5 ○ ○ 19.3.2
abnormality warning signal
WFAN Warning level detection signal F093.3 ○ ○ 19.3.1
FL-net1 communication
WFLN1 F0535.6 ○ ○ 19.3.2
abnormality warning signal
FL-net2 communication
WFLN2 F0535.7 ○ ○ 19.3.2
abnormality warning signal
I/O Link 1 retry abnormality
WIOCH1 F0535.0 ○ ○ 19.3.2
warning signal
I/O Link 2 retry abnormality
WIOCH2 F0535.1 ○ ○ 19.3.2
warning signal
I/O Link 3 retry abnormality
WIOCH3 F0535.2 ○ ○ 19.3.2
warning signal
Workpiece coordinate system
WOQSM shift value write mode select G039.6 ○ － 16.4.2
W signal
Workpiece coordinate system
WOSET G040.7 ○ - 16.4.2
shift value write signal
WPRST1 to Each axis workpiece coordinate
G358 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
WPRST8 system preset signals
Each axis workpiece coordinate
WPSF1 to WPSF8 system preset completion F358 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
signals
Reference position return end
ZP1 to ZP8 F094 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
2nd reference position return
Z ZP21 to ZP28 F096 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
completion signals
3rd reference position return
ZP31 to ZP38 F098 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
completion signals
- 2743 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Symbol Signal name Address
series series item
4th reference position return
ZP41 to ZP48 F100 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
completion signals
Reference position
ZRF1 to ZRF8 F120 ○ ○ 4.1
establishment signals
Z Manual reference position
ZRN G043.7 ○ ○ 4.1
return selection signal
Software operator’s panel signal
ZRNO F073.4 ○ ○ 14.1.2
(ZRN)
ZRNR Mode notification signal F513.7 ○ ○ 17.7
- 2744 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)
○ : Available
● : Available only with multi path control
- : Unavailable
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
X004.2 to X004.6, SKIP2 to SKIP6,
Skip signal ○ ○ 16.3.5
X004.0,X004.1 SKIP7,SKIP8
+MIT1,-MIT1
X004.2 to X004.5 Tool offset write signals ○ - 16.4.2
+MIT2,-MIT2
X004.6 Skip signal (PMC axis control) ESKIP ○ ○ 17.1
X004.7 Skip signal SKIP ○ ○ 16.3
X008.0 ○ ○ 2.1
X008.1 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1
X008.4 ○ ○ 2.1
Reference position return deceleration
X009 *DEC1 to *DEC8 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
Y*** 1.2.11
High-speed position switch signals HPS01 to HPS16 ○ ○
Y***+1 1.2.12
G000 to G001 Data signals for external data input ED15 to ED0 ○ ○ 17.2
G002.6 to G002.0 Address signals for external data input EA6 to EA0 ○ ○ 17.2
G002.7 Read signal for external data input ESTB ○ ○ 17.2
G004.3 End signal FIN ○ ○ 10.1
G004.4 2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 ○ ○ 10.4
G004.5 3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 ○ ○ 10.4
G004.6 4th M function completion signal MFIN4 ○ ○ 10.4
G004.7 5th M function completion signal MFIN5 ○ ○ 10.4
G005.0 Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN ○ ○ 10.4
G005.2 Spindle function completion signal SFIN ○ ○ 10.4
G005.3 Tool function completion signal TFIN ○ ○ 10.4
G005.6 Auxiliary function lock signal AFL ○ ○ 10.2
G005.7 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN ○ ○ 10.4
G006.0 Program restart signal SRN ○ ○ 5.6
G006.2 Manual absolute signal *ABSM ○ ○ 5.4
G006.4 Override cancel signal OVC ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
G006.6 Skip signal SKIPP ○ ○ 16.3
G007.0 Reverse execution signal RVS - ○ 5.10
G007.1 Start lock signal STLK ○ ○ 2.5
G007.2 Cycle start signal ST ○ ○ 5.1
G007.4 Stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 ○ ○ 2.3.4
G007.5 Follow-up signal *FLWU ○ ○ 1.2.7
G007.6 Stored stroke check 1 select signals EXLM ○ ○ 2.3.2
G007.7 Stroke check 1 release signal RLSOT ○ ○ 2.3.2
G008.0 Interlock signal for all axes *IT ○ ○ 2.5
G008.1 Cutting block start interlock signal *CSL ○ ○ 2.5
G008.3 Block start interlock signal *BSL ○ ○ 2.5
G008.4 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1
G008.5 Feed hold signal *SP ○ ○ 5.1
G008.6 Reset & rewind signal RRW ○ ○ 5.2
G008.7 External reset signal ERS ○ ○ 5.2
External workpiece number search PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,
G009.0 to G009.4 ○ ○ 17.5
signals PN16
G010,G011 Manual feedrate override signals *JV0 to *JV15 ○ ○ 3.1
G012 Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
- 2745 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
G013 2nd feedrate override signals *AFV0 to *AFV7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.3
G014.0,G014.1 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
G016.7 One-digit F code feed signal F1D - ○ 7.1.5
G018.0 to G018.3 HS1A to HS1D ○ ○
Manual handle feed axis selection
G018.4 to G018.7 HS2A to HS2D ○ ○ 3.2
signals
G019.0 to G019.3 HS3A to HS3D ○ ○
G019.4,G019.5, Manual handle feed amount selection
MP1,MP2,MP4 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5, 3.9
G019.6 signals (incremental feed signals)
G019.7 Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT ○ ○ 3.1
Manual handle feed axis selection
G020.0 to G020.3 HS4A to HS4D ○ ○ 3.2
signals
Servo motor rotation speed specification
G021.0 to G022.3 SVR01I to SVR12I ○ ○
signals
Differential speed synchronization
G022.4 DFSYC ○ ○
command signal
11.22.1
Servo motor rotation polarity
G022.5 SVGN ○ ○
specification signal
Servo motor spindle control switching
G022.7 SVSP ○ ○
signal
Manual handle feed maximum feedrate
G023.3 HNDLF ○ ○ 3.2, 7.1.10
change signal
G023.4 Handle-synchronous feed signal HREV ○ ○ 3.5
G023.5 In-position check disable signal NOINPS ○ ○ 7.2.6.3
Tool axis right-angle direction feed mode
G023.6 RGHTH ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
signal
G023.7 Tool axis direction feed mode signal ALNGH ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
Extended external workpiece number
G024.0 to G025.5 EPN0 to EPN13 ○ ○ 17.5
search signals
External workpiece number search start
G025.7 EPNS ○ ○ 17.5
signal
G026.0 PC3SLC ○ ○
Position coder selection signal 11.12
G026.1 PC4SLC ○ ○
G026.3 Spindle selection signals SWS4 ○ ○ 11.12
G026.6 Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP4 ○ ○ 11.12
G027.0 SWS1 ○ ○
G027.1 Spindle selection signals SWS2 ○ ○ 11.12
G027.2 SWS3 ○ ○
G027.3 *SSTP1 ○ ○
G027.4 Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP2 ○ ○ 11.12
G027.5 *SSTP3 ○ ○
G027.7 Cs contour control change signal CON ○ ○ 11.11.1
G028.1,G028.2 Gear selection signals (input) GR1,GR2 ○ ○ 11.5
G028.4 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFA ○ ○ 11.10
G028.5 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFA ○ ○ 11.10
G028.6 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPA ○ ○ 11.10
G028.7 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC ○ ○ 11.12
G029.0 GR21 ○ ○
G029.1 GR22 ○ ○
Gear selection signals (input) 11.12
G029.2 GR31 ○ ○
G029.3 GR32 ○ ○
G029.4 Spindle speed arrival signal SAR ○ ○ 11.5
G029.5 Spindle orientation signal SOR ○ ○ 11.5
G029.6 Spindle stop signal *SSTP ○ ○ 11.5
G030 Spindle speed override signals SOV0 to SOV7 ○ ○ 11.5
- 2746 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Three-dimensional coordinate system
G031.3 conversion manual interruption switch M3R ○ ○ 13.15
signal
G031.4 GR41 ○ ○
Gear selection signals (input) 11.12
G031.5 GR42 ○ ○
G031.6 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 11.17
G031.7 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 11.17
G032.0 to G033.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I to R12I ○ ○ 11.6
Spindle motor command polarity
G033.5 SGN ○ ○ 11.6
command signals
Spindle motor command polarity
G033.6 SSIN ○ ○ 11.6
selection signals
Spindle motor speed command selection
G033.7 SIND ○ ○ 11.6
signals
G034.0 to G035.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I2 to R12I2 ○ ○ 11.6
Spindle motor command polarity
G035.5 SGN2 ○ ○ 11.6
command signals
Spindle motor command polarity
G035.6 SSIN2 ○ ○ 11.6
selection signals
Spindle motor speed command selection
G035.7 SIND2 ○ ○ 11.6
signals
G036.0 to G037.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I3 to R12I3 ○ ○ 11.6
Spindle motor command polarity
G037.5 SGN3 ○ ○ 11.6
command signals
Spindle motor command polarity
G037.6 SSIN3 ○ ○ 11.6
selection signals
Spindle motor speed command selection
G037.7 SIND3 ○ ○ 11.6
signals
G038.0 Polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST ○ ○ 6.9.2
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control
G038.1 SBRT ○ ○ 11.14
signal
G038.2 Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC ○ ○ 11.14
Spindle phase synchronous control
G038.3 SPPHS ○ ○ 11.14
signal
G038.5 Speed display change signal SDPC ○ ○ 14.1.10
G038.6 B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP - ○ 13.12
G038.7 B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP - ○ 13.12
G039.0 to G039.5 OFN0 to OFN5 ○ ○ 16.5
Tool offset number selection signals
G040.0 to G040.3 OFN6 to OFN9 ○ ○ 16.4.2
Workpiece coordinate system shift value
G039.6 WOQSM ○ - 16.4.2
write mode select signal
G039.7 Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM ○ - 16.4.2
G040.5 Spindle measurement select signal S2TLS ○ - 16.4.2
G040.6 Position record signal PRC ○ - 16.4.1
Workpiece coordinate system shift value
G040.7 WOSET ○ - 16.4.2
write signal
G041.0 to G041.3 HS1IA to HS1ID ○ ○
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G041.4 to G041.7 HS2IA to HS2ID ○ ○ 3.3
signals
G042.0 to G042.3 HS3IA to HS3ID ○ ○
G042.7 Direct operation select signal DMMC ○ ○ 5.15, 5.16
G043.0 to G043.2 Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 ○ ○ 2.6
G043.5 DNC operation select signal DNCI ○ ○ 5.14, 5.15
- 2747 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Manual reference position return
G043.7 ZRN ○ ○ 4.1
selection signal
G044.0 BDT1 ○ ○
Optional block skip signals 5.5
G045 BDT2 to BDT9 ○ ○
G044.1 All-axis machine lock signal MLK ○ ○ 5.3.1
G046.0 Memory protection signal KEYP ○ ○ 14.2.2
G046.1 Single block signal SBK ○ ○ 5.3.3
14.1.3
G046.3 to G046.6 Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4 ○ ○
14.2.1
G046.7 Dry run signal DRN ○ ○ 5.3.2
G047.0 to G048.1 Tool group number selection signals TL01 to TL512 ○ ○ 12.5
G048.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV ○ ○ 12.5
12.3.1
G048.5 Tool skip signal TLSKP ○ ○
12.6
12.3.1
G048.6 Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI ○ ○
12.6
12.3.1
G048.7 Tool change signal TLRST ○ ○
12.6
12.3.1
G049.0 to G050.1 Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 ○ ○
12.6
General-purpose integrating meter start
G053.0 TMRON ○ ○ 14.1.1
signal
G053.3 Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT ○ ○ 13.6.3
Rapid traverse block overlap disable 7.2.1.2,
G053.5 ROVLP ○ ○
signal 7.2.1.3
G053.6 In-position check signal SMZ ○ ○ 7.2.6.1
G053.7 Chamfering signal *CDZ ○ - 13.8
G054 to G057 Custom macro input signals UI000 to UI031 ○ ○ 13.6
G058.1 External input start signal EXINP ○ ○ 15.2
G058.2 External input/output stop signal EXSTP ○ ○ 15.2
G058.3 External output start signal EXOUT ○ ○ 15.2
G059.0 Tool retraction signal TRESC ○ ○ 5.8
G059.1 Tool return signal TRRTN ○ ○ 5.8
Signal for disabling torque difference
G059.7 alarm detection for axis synchronous NSYNCA ○ ○ 1.6
control
G060.7 Tail stock barrier selection signal *TSB ○ - 2.3.8
G061.0 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP ○ ○ 11.13
Servo motor spindle synchronization
G061.2 SYSS ○ ○ 11.22.1
start signal
G061.4 to G061.7 Rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1 to RGTSP4 ○ - 11.13
G062.1 Screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF ○ ○ 14.1.13
G062.6 Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT ○ ○ 5.13, 5.17
G062.7 Path select signal（Path select signal 2） HEAD2 ● ● 8.13, 14.3
Path select signal (Tool post select
G063.0 HEAD ● ● 8.13, 14.3
signal)
G063.1 No-wait signal NOWT ● ● 8.2
G063.2,G063.3 Path spindle command selection signals SLSPA,SLSPB ● ● 8.11
Signal for disabling angular axis control
G063.5 NOZAGC ○ ○ 1.8
for the perpendicular axis
G063.6 In-feed control cut start signal INFD - ○ 13.9
G063.7 No-wait signal NMWT ● ● 8.2
G064.2,G064.3 Path spindle feedback selection signals SLPCA,SLPCB ● ● 8.11
- 2748 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Spindle command synchronous control
G064.6 ESRSYC ○ ○ 11.17
signal
G066.0 All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGNVRY ○ ○ 2.8
G066.1 External key input mode selection signal ENBKY ○ ○ 17.6
G066.4 Retract signal RTRCT ○ ○ 1.10, 6.22
G066.7 Key code read signal EKSET ○ ○ 17.6
Manual tool compensation command
G067.0 MTLC ○ - 12.1.5
number
G067.2 Checking mode signal MMOD ○ ○ 5.3.5
Handle available signal in checking
G067.3 MCHK ○ ○ 5.3.5
mode
EGB synchronization mode selection
G067.4 EGBS ○ ○ 1.9.4
signal
G067.6 Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT ○ ○
14.1.14
G067.7 Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ ○ ○
Manual tool compensation tool number
G68,G69 MTLN00 to MTLN15 ○ - 12.1.5
signal (4 digits)
Torque limit command LOW signals
G070.0 TLMLA ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals
G070.1 TLMHA ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
G070.3,G070.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A ○ ○ 11.2
G070.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVA ○ ○ 11.2
G070.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRA ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation command signals (serial 11.2
G070.6 ORCMA ○ ○
spindle) 11.15
G070.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYA ○ ○ 11.2
G071.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTA ○ ○ 11.2
G071.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPA ○ ○ 11.2
G071.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLA ○ ○ 11.2
Power line switch completion signals
G071.3 MCFNA ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial
G071.4 SOCNA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
G071.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGA ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch request signals (serial
G071.6 RSLA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Power line status check signals (serial
G071.7 RCHA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Orientation stop position change
G072.0 INDXA ○ ○ 11.2
command signals (serial spindle)
Rotational direction command signals for
G072.1 orientation stop position change (serial ROTAA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Shortcut command signals for orientation
G072.2 NRROA ○ ○ 11.2
stop position change (serial spindle)
Differential speed mode command
G072.3 DEFMDA ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
G072.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRA ○ ○ 11.2
Incremental command externally set
G072.5 INCMDA ○ ○ 11.2
orientation signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status
G072.6 MFNHGA ○ ○ 11.2
signals(serial spindle)
- 2749 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status
G072.7 RCHHGA ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command
G073.0 MORCMA ○ ○ 11.2
signal(serial spindle)
Subordinate operation mode command
G073.1 SLVA ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Motor power cutoff command signals
G073.2 MPOFA ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command LOW signals
G074.0 TLMLB ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals
G074.1 TLMHB ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
G074.3,G074.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1B,CTH2B ○ ○ 11.2
G074.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVB ○ ○ 11.2
G074.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRB ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation command signals (serial 11.2
G074.6 ORCMB ○ ○
spindle) 11.15
G074.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYB ○ ○ 11.2
G075.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTB ○ ○ 11.2
G075.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPB ○ ○ 11.2
G075.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLB ○ ○ 11.2
Power line switch completion signals
G075.3 MCFNB ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial
G075.4 SOCNB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
G075.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGB ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch request signals (serial
G075.6 RSLB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Power line status check signals (serial
G075.7 RCHB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Orientation stop position change
G076.0 INDXB ○ ○ 11.2
command signals (serial spindle)
Rotational direction command signals for
G076.1 orientation stop position change (serial ROTAB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Shortcut command signals for orientation
G076.2 NRROB ○ ○ 11.2
stop position change (serial spindle)
Differential speed mode command
G076.3 DEFMDB ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
G076.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRB ○ ○ 11.2
Incremental command externally set
G076.5 INCMDB ○ ○ 11.2
orientation signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status
G076.6 MFNHGB ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status
G076.7 RCHHGB ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command
G077.0 MORCMB ○ ○ 11.2
signal(serial spindle)
Subordinate operation mode command
G077.1 SLVB ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Motor power cutoff command signals
G077.2 MPOFB ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
G078.0 to G079.6 Spindle orientation signals with the stop SH00A to SH14A ○ ○ 11.15
G080.0 to G081.6 position externally set SH00B to SH14B ○ ○ 11.15
- 2750 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
G082,G083 Input signals for P-code macro EUI00 to EUI15 ○ ○ 13.17
G086.0 to G086.3 Feed axis and direction selection signals +Jg, -Jg, +Ja, -Ja ○ ○ 3.4
G087.0,G087.1 MP21,MP22 ○ ○
Manual handle feed amount selection
G087.3,G087.4 MP31,MP32 ○ ○ 3.2
signals(Incremental feed signals)
G087.6,G087.7 MP41,MP42 ○ ○
Manual pulse magnification change
G088.3 HNDMP ○ ○ 17.1
signal
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G088.4 to G088.7 HS4IA to HS4ID ○ ○ 3.3
signals
G090.0 G2RVX ○ -
G090.1 Tool offset direction signals G2RVZ ○ - 12.4.4
G090.2 G2RVY ○ -
G090.4 G2X ○ -
2nd geometry tool offset axis select
G090.5 G2Z ○ - 12.4.4
signals
G090.6 G2Y ○ -
G090.7 2nd geometry tool offset signal G2SLC ○ - 12.4.4
G096.0 to G096.6 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
1% step rapid traverse override selection
G096.7 HROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
signal
G098 Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7 ○ ○ 17.6
G100 Feed axis and direction selection signals +J1 to +J8 ○ ○ 3.1
G101 External deceleration signals 2 *+ED21 to *+ED28 ○ ○ 7.1.10
G102 Feed axis and direction selection signals -J1 to -J8 ○ ○ 3.1
G103 External deceleration signals 2 *-ED21 to *-ED28 ○ ○ 7.1.10
G104 Axis direction dependent stored stroke +EXL1 to +EXL8 ○ ○ 2.3.2
G105 check 1 switch signals -EXL1 to -EXL8 ○ ○ 2.3.2
G106 Mirror image signals MI1 to MI8 ○ ○ 1.2.6
G107 External deceleration signals 3 *+ED31 to *+ED38 ○ ○ 7.1.10
G108 Each-axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 ○ ○ 5.3.1
G109 External deceleration signals 3 *-ED31 to *-ED38 ○ ○ 7.1.10
G110 +LM1 to +LM8 ○ ○
Stroke limit external setting signals 2.3.6
G112 -LM1 to -LM8 ○ ○
G114 *+L1 to *+L8 ○ ○
Overtravel signals 2.3.1
G116 *-L1 to *-L8 ○ ○
G118 *+ED1 to *+ED8 ○ ○
External deceleration signals 1 7.1.10
G120 *-ED1 to *-ED8 ○ ○
G122 Parking signals PK1 to PK8 ○ ○ 8.6.2
G122.6(G031.6) 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 11.17
G122.7(G031.7) 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 11.17
G124 Controlled axis detach signals DTCH1 to DTCH8 ○ ○ 1.2.5, 1.15
Unexpected disturbance torque detection
G125 IUDD1 to IUDD8 ○ ○ 2.9
ignore signal
G126 Servo off signals SVF1 to SVF8 ○ ○ 1.2.8
Composite control axis change selection
G128 MIX1 to MIX8 ○ ○ 8.6
signals
G130 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT8 ○ ○ 2.5
G132 +MIT1 to +MIT8
Interlock signal for each axis direction - ○ 2.5
G134 -MIT1 to -MIT8
G132.0,G132.1 Tool offset write signals +MIT1,+MIT2 ○ - 16.4.2
G134.0,G134.1 Tool offset write signals -MIT1,-MIT2 ○ - 16.4.2
Control axis selection signals (PMC axis
G136 EAX1 to EAX8 ○ ○ 17.1
control)
Synchronous control axis selection
G138 SYNC1 to SYNC8 ○ ○ 1.6, 8.6
signals
- 2751 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Signals for selecting the manual feed
G140 SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 ○ ○ 1.6
axis for axis synchronous control
Auxiliary function completion signal
G142.0 EFINA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Accumulated zero check signal
G142.1 ELCKZA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signal
G142.2 EMBUFA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Block stop signal
G142.3 ESBKA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Servo-off signal
G142.4 ESOFA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Axis control temporary stop signal
G142.5 ESTPA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Reset signal
G142.6 ECLRA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command read signal
G142.7 EBUFA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command signals
G143.0 to G143.6 EC0A to EC6A ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Block stop disable signal
G143.7 EMSBKA ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals
G144,G145 EIF0A to EIF15A ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Axis control data signals
G146 to G149 EID0A to EID31A ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Rapid traverse override signals (PMC
G150.0,G150.1 EROV1,EROV2 ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Override cancellation signal
G150.5 EOVC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Manual rapid traverse selection signal
G150.6 ERT ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
G150.7 Dry run signal (PMC axis control) EDRN ○ ○ 17.1
Feedrate override signals
G151 *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
1% step rapid traverse override signals
G151 *EROV0 to *EROV7 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 1) (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function completion signal
G154.0 EFINB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Accumulated zero check signal
G154.1 ELCKZB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signal
G154.2 EMBUFB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Block stop signal
G154.3 ESBKB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Servo-off signal
G154.4 ESOFB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Axis control temporary stop signal
G154.5 ESTPB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Reset signal
G154.6 ECLRB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command read signal
G154.7 EBUFB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command signals
G155.0 to G155.6 EC0B to EC6B ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
- 2752 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Block stop disable signal
G155.7 EMSBKB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals
G156,G157 EIF0B to EIF15B ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Axis control data signals
G158 to G161 EID0B to EID31B ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Override cancellation signal
G162.5 EOVCB ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control)
Feedrate override signals *EFOV0B to
G163 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control) *EFOV7B
1% step rapid traverse override signals *EROV0B to
G163 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 2) (PMC axis control) *EROV7B
Auxiliary function completion signal
G166.0 EFINC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Accumulated zero check signal
G166.1 ELCKZC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signal
G166.2 EMBUFC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Block stop signal
G166.3 ESBKC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Servo-off signal
G166.4 ESOFC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Axis control temporary stop signal
G166.5 ESTPC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Reset signal
G166.6 ECLRC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command read signal
G166.7 EBUFC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command signals
G167.0 to G167.6 EC0C to EC6C ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Block stop disable signal
G167.7 EMSBKC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals
G168,G169 EIF0C to EIF15C ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Axis control data signals
G170 to G173 EID0C to EID31C ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Override cancellation signal
G174.5 EOVCC ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control)
Feedrate override signals *EFOV0C to
G175 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control) *EFOV7C
1% step rapid traverse override signals *EROV0C to
G175 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 3) (PMC axis control) *EROV7C
Auxiliary function completion signal
G178.0 EFIND ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Accumulated zero check signal
G178.1 ELCKZD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Buffering disable signal
G178.2 EMBUFD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Block stop signal
G178.3 ESBKD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Servo-off signal
G178.4 ESOFD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Axis control temporary stop signal
G178.5 ESTPD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
- 2753 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Reset signal
G178.6 ECLRD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command read signal
G178.7 EBUFD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Axis control command signals
G179.0 to G179.6 EC0D to EC6D ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Block stop disable signal
G179.7 EMSBKD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals
G180,G181 EIF0D to EIF15D ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Axis control data signals
G182 to G185 EID0D to EID31D ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Override cancellation signal
G186.5 EOVCD ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control)
Feedrate override signals *EFOV0D to
G187 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control) *EFOV7D
1% step rapid traverse override signals *EROV0D to
G187 ○ ○ 17.1
(for group 4) (PMC axis control) *EROV7D
Superimposed control axis selection
G190 OVLS1 to OVLS8 ○ ○ 8.7
signals
G192 Each-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 ○ ○ 2.8
Selecting direction of manual handle
G193.3 HDSR ○ ○ 3.5
rotation signal
Reference position return deceleration
G196 *DEC1 to *DEC8 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
Flexible synchronization control mode
G197.0 to G197.3 MTA,MTB,MTC,MTD ○ ○ 1.12
selection signals
G198 Axis non-displayed signals NPOS1 to NPOS8 ○ ○ 14.1.19
Manual handle generators selection
G199.0,G199.1 IOLBH1, IOLBH2 ○ ○ 3.9
signal
A/B phase detector disconnection alarm
G202 NDCAL1 to NDCAL8 ○ ○ 17.1
ignore signal (PMC axis control)
G203.3 Axis immediate stop start signal ESTPR ○ ○ 1.13
G203.4 Active offset value change mode signal CHGAO ○ ○ 12.1.5,12.2.2
G203.5 to G203.6 Active offset selection signal AOFS1 to AOFS2 ○ ○ 12.1.5,12.2.2
G203.7 Power failure deceleration signal PWFL ○ ○ 1.11
Torque limit command LOW signals
G204.0 TLMLC ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals
G204.1 TLMHC ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
G204.3,G204.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1C,CTH2C ○ ○ 11.2
G204.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVC ○ ○ 11.2
G204.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRC ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation command signals (serial 11.2
G204.6 ORCMC ○ ○
spindle) 11.15
G204.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYC ○ ○ 11.2
G205.0 Alarm reset signals(serial spindle) ARSTC ○ ○ 11.2
G205.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPC ○ ○ 11.2
G205.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLC ○ ○ 11.2
Power line switch completion signals
G205.3 MCFNC ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals (serial
G205.4 SOCNC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
G205.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGC ○ ○ 11.2
- 2754 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Output switch request signals (serial
G205.6 RSLC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Power line status check signals (serial
G205.7 RCHC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Orientation stop position change
G206.0 INDXC ○ ○ 11.2
command signals (serial spindle)
Rotational direction command signals for
G206.1 orientation stop position change (serial ROTAC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Shortcut command signals for orientation
G206.2 NRROC ○ ○ 11.2
stop position change (serial spindle)
Differential speed mode command
G206.3 DEFMDC ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
G206.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRC ○ ○ 11.2
Incremental command externally set
G206.5 INCMDC ○ ○ 11.2
orientation signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status
G206.6 MFNHGC ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status
G206.7 RCHHGC ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command
G207.0 MORCMC ○ ○ 11.2
signal(serial spindle)
Subordinate operation mode command
G207.1 SLVC ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Motor power cutoff command signals
G207.2 MPOFC ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Spindle orientation external stop position
G208.0 to G209.6 SH00C to SH14C ○ ○ 11.15
command signals
G210 to G211 Data signals for external data input ED31 to ED16 ○ ○ 17.2
Spindle command synchronous control
G264.0 to G264.3 ESSYC1 to ESSYC4 ○ ○ 11.17
signal (for each spindle)
Spindle command synchronous parking
G265.0 to G265.3 PKESE1 to PKESE4 ○ ○ 11.17
signal (for each spindle)
Torque limit command LOW signals
G266.0 TLMLD ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals
G266.1 TLMHD ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
G266.2,G266.3 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH2D, CTH1D ○ ○ 11.2
G266.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVD ○ ○ 11.2
G266.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRD ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation command signals (serial 11.2
G266.6 ORCMD ○ ○
spindle) 11.15
G266.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYD ○ ○ 11.2
G267.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTD ○ ○ 11.2
G267.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPD ○ ○ 11.2
G267.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLD ○ ○ 11.2
Power line switch completion signals
G267.3 MCFND ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals (serial
G267.4 SOCND ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
G267.5 Speed integral signals(serial spindle) INTGD ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch request signals (serial
G267.6 RSLD ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
- 2755 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Power line status check signals (serial
G267.7 RCHD ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Orientation stop position change
G268.0 INDXD ○ ○ 11.2
command signals(serial spindle)
Rotational direction command signals for
G268.1 orientation stop position change (serial ROTAD ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Shortcut command signals for orientation
G268.2 NRROD ○ ○ 11.2
stop position change (serial spindle)
Differential speed mode command
G268.3 DEFMDD ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
G268.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRD ○ ○ 11.2
Incremental command externally set
G268.5 INCMDD ○ ○ 11.2
orientation signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status
G268.6 MFNHGD ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact status
G268.7 RCHHGD ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command
G269.0 MORCMD ○ ○ 11.2
signal(serial spindle)
Subordinate operation mode command
G269.1 SLVD ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Motor power cutoff command signals
G269.2 MPOFD ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Spindle orientation external stop position
G270.0 to G271.6 SH00D to SH14D ○ ○ 11.15
command signals
G272.0 to G273.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I4 to R12I4 ○ ○ 11.6
Spindle motor command polarity
G273.5 SGN4 ○ ○ 11.6
command signals
Spindle motor command polarity
G273.6 SSIN4 ○ ○ 11.6
selection signals
Spindle motor speed command selection
G273.7 SIND4 ○ ○ 11.6
signals
Cs contour control change signal (for
G274.0 to G274.3 CONS1 to CONS4 ○ ○ 11.11
each spindle)
Cs axis coordinate establishment
G274.4 to G274.7 CSFI1 to CSFI4 ○ ○ 11.11.4
request signals (for each spindle)
G276 to G279 UI100 to UI131 ○ ○ 13.6
G280 to G283 Input signals for custom macro UI200 to UI231 ○ ○ 13.6
G284 to G287 UI300 to UI331 ○ ○ 13.6
Spindle synchronous control signal (for
G288.0 to G288.3 SPSYC1 to SPSYC4 ○ ○ 11.14
each spindle)
Spindle phase synchronous control
G289.0 to G289.3 SPPHS1 to SPPHS4 ○ ○ 11.14
signal (for each spindle)
G290.5 High-speed program check signal PGCK ○ ○ 5.3.4
G292.3 Interference check area change signal ITRC ○ ○
Inter-group interference check disable
G292.4 to G292.6 ITCD1 to ITCD3 ○ ○
signals 2.3.9
Interference check for rotary area disable
G292.7 ITCD ○ ○
signal
G295.6 Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND ○ ○ 14.1.9
14.1.11
G295.7 Key control selection signal CNCKY ○ ○
14.1.12
G297.0 Block cancel signal BCAN ○ ○ 5.11
- 2756 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
G298.0 Table base signal TB_BASE ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
G298.2 Tool tip center rotation feed mode signal RNDH ○ ○ 3.7.5.2
G328.0 to G328.3 Tool change signals 1 to 4 TLRST1 to TLRST4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
Individual tool change reset signals 1 to
G328.4 to G328.7 TLRSTI1 to TLRSTI4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
4
G329.0 to G329.3 Tool skip signals 1 to 4 TLSKP1 to TLSKP4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
G329.4 to G329.7 Tool life counting disable signals 1 to 4 TLNCT1 to TLNCT4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
G330.0 to G330.5 Tool management data protection signal TKEY0 to TKEY5 ○ ○ 12.3.2
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return
G340.5 SLREF ○ ○ 4.13
select 1 signal
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return
G340.6 SLRER ○ ○ 4.13
select 2 signal
G341 *+ED41 to *+ED48 ○ ○
External deceleration signals 4 7.1.10
G342 *-ED41 to *-ED48 ○ ○
G343 *+ED51 to *+ED58 ○ ○
External deceleration signals 5 7.1.10
G344 *-ED51 to *-ED58 ○ ○
Manual handle feed direction inversion
G347.1 HDN ○ ○ 3.2
signal
3-dimensional coordinate system
G347.7 conversion manual interrupt NOT3DM ○ ○ 3.3.1
enable/disable switch signal
G352.0 to G353.1 0.1% rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0 to *FHRO9 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
0.1% step rapid traverse override
G353.7 FHROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
selection signal
Each axis workpiece coordinate system WPRST1 to
G358 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
preset signals WPRST8
G376 2nd spindle speed override signals SOV20 to SOV27 ○ ○ 11.12
G377 3rd spindle speed override signals SOV30 to SOV37 ○ ○ 11.12
G378 4th spindle speed override signals SOV40 to SOV47 ○ ○ 11.12
Manual handle feed axis selection
G379.0 to G379.3 HS5A to HS5D ○ ○ 3.2
signals
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G379.4 to G379.7 HS5IA to HS5ID ○ ○ 3.3
signals
Manual handle feed amount selection
G380.0,G380.1 MP51,MP52 ○ ○ 3.2
signals
Flexible synchronization control automatic
G381.0 to G381.3 AUTPHA to AUTPHD ○ ○ 1.12.2
phase synchronization signals
G400.1 *SUCPFB ○ ○
G400.2 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFC ○ ○ 11.10
G400.3 *SUCPFD ○ ○
G401.1 *SCPFB ○ ○
G401.2 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFC ○ ○ 11.10
G401.3 *SCPFD ○ ○
G402.1 SPSTPB ○ ○
G402.2 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPC ○ ○ 11.10
G402.3 SPSTPD ○ ○
G403.0,G403.1 Path spindle command selection signals SLSPC,SLSPD ● ● 8.11
G403.4,G403.5 Path spindle feedback selection signals SLPCC,SLPCD ● ● 8.11
Path interference check association
G406.0 to G407.1 ITF01 to ITF10 ● - 8.4
signal
Inter-group interference check disable
G407.2 to G407.4 ITCD4 to ITCD6 ○ ○ 2.3.9
signals
G408.0 Start check signal STCHK ○ ○ 2.13
- 2757 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Manual handle feed axis selection
G411.0 to G411.3 HS1E to HS4E ○ ○ 3.2
signals
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G411.4 to G411.7 HS1IE to HS4IE ○ ○ 3.3
signals
Manual handle feed axis selection
G412.0 HS5E ○ ○ 3.2
signals
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G412.4 HS5IE ○ ○ 3.3
signals
G512,G513 Macro call start signal MCST1 to MCST16 ○ ○ 17.7
G514.0 Mode change completion signal MCFIN ○ ○ 17.7
G517.0 GAE1 ○ ○
G517.1 Measuring position reached signals GAE2 ○ ○ 16.2
G517.2 GAE3 - ○
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle
G517.7 SYPST ○ ○ 11.22.3
synchronous start signal
DeviceNet communication error clear
G518.4 DNTCLR ○ ○
signal
SRVON1 to
G521 SV speed control mode signals ○ ○ 11.20
SRVON8
G523 SV reverse signals SVRVS1 to SVRVS8 ○ ○ 11.20.1
Manual tool compensation tool number
G525 to G528 MT8N00 to MT8N31 ○ - 12.1.5
signal (8 digits)
G530 EGB synchronization start signals EGBS1 to EGBS8 ○ ○ 1.9
G531.0 Forward movement prohibition signal FWSTP ○ ○ 5.3.5
G531.1 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVM ○ ○ 5.3.5
Dual position feedback turning mode
G531.3 HBTRN ○ ○ 1.10
selection signal
Inter-path flexible synchronization mode
G531.4 OVLN ● ● 1.12.4
select signal
G531.6, G531.7 Stored stroke check 1 change signals EXLM2, EXLM3 ○ ○ 2.3.3
Total spindle revolution number reset
G533.0 to G533.3 SSR1 to SSR4 ○ ○ 11.21
signals
Total spindle revolution number reset
G533.4 SSRS ○ ○ 11.21
selection signal
G536.2 Removal start signal RMVST ○ ○
G536.3 Assignment start signal ASNST ○ ○
1.14
G536.4 Exchange start signal EXCST ○ ○
G536.5 Direct assignment mode signal DASN ○ ○
Spindle command path specification
G536.7 SPSP ○ ○ 11.12
signal
Manual linear/circular interpolation
G544.0 to G544.4 MHLC1 to MHLC5 ○ ○ 3.4, 3.5
signals
Usage selection of manual linear/circular
G545.0 to G545.4 MHUS1 to MHUS5 ○ ○ 3.4, 3.5
interpolation signals
Tool compensation number specification
G547.6 ONSC ○ － 16.4.2
signal
Dual position feedback compensation
G548 *CL1 to *CL8 ○ ○ 1.10
clamp signals
G549.4 Groove of thread measurement signal GTMSR ○ ○
6.5.7.2
G549.5 Re-machining thread signal RMTC ○ ○
Web browser connection prohibition
G579.5 WBEND ○ ○ 18.2.7
signal
Waiting M codes of high-speed type
G579.6 NHSW ● ● 8.3
invalid signal
- 2758 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Speed-up of non-buffering command by
○ ○ 13.22
G code invalid signal
G580 Actual speed display axis selection *ACTF1 to *ACTF8 ○ ○
14.1.15
signals
G581.0 to G581.6 Display language setting signals LANG1 to LANG7 ○ ○ 14.1.8
G581.7 Display language switch start signal SLANG ○ ○ 14.1.8
G587.0 to G587.3 Spindle position save start signal SPMST1 to SPMST4 ○ ○ 11.14.1
G587.4 to G587.7 Arbitrary spindle position phase SPAPH1 to SPAPH4 ○ ○ 11.14.1
synchronization signal
G588.0 to G588.3 SMSL11 to SMSL14 ○ ○
Spindle position save selection signal 11.14.1
G588.4 to G588.7 SMSL21 to SMSL24 ○ ○
Stored stroke limit range switching data
G594 to G595 OTD0 to OTD15 ○ ○ 2.3.8
selection signals
Stored stroke limit range switching axis
G596 OTA1 to OTA8 ○ ○ 2.3.8
selection signals
+OT11, -OT11,
Stored stroke limit range switching +OT12, -OT12,
G597 ○ ○ 2.3.8
selection signals +OT2, -OT2,
+OT3, -OT3
+OT11C, -OT11C,
Stored stroke limit range switching +OT12C, -OT12C,
G598 ○ ○ 2.3.8
cancellation signals +OT2C, -OT2C,
+OT3C, -OT3C
G708 to G711 RE01I to RE32I ○ ○
G712 to G715 Extended spindle motor speed command RE01I2 to RE32I2 ○ ○
11.27
G716 to G719 signals RE01I3 to RE32I3 ○ ○
G720 to G723 RE01I4 to RE32I4 ○ ○
G765 DI signal for Data transfer between PMC TPMG00 to TPMG07 ○ ○ 17.9
and DCSPMC
F000.0 Rewinding signal RWD ○ ○ 5.2
F000.4 Feed hold lamp signal SPL ○ ○ 5.1
F000.5 Cycle start lamp signal STL ○ ○ 5.1
F000.6 Servo ready signal SA ○ ○ 2.2
F000.7 Automatic operation signal OP ○ ○ 5.1
F001.0 Alarm signal AL ○ ○ 2.4
F001.1 Resetting signal RST ○ ○ 5.2
F001.2 Battery alarm signal BAL ○ ○ 2.4
F001.3 Distribution completion signals DEN ○ ○ 10.1
F001.4 Spindle enable signal ENB ○ ○ 11.5
F001.5 Tapping signal TAP ○ ○ 13.7.1
F001.7 CNC ready signal MA ○ ○ 2.2
F002.0 Inch input signal INCH ○ ○ 13.5
F002.1 Rapid traversing signal RPDO ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1
F002.2 Constant surface speed signal CSS ○ ○ 11.8
F002.3 Threading signal THRD ○ ○ 6.5
F002.4 Program restart under way signal SRNMV ○ ○ 5.6
F002.6 Cutting feed signal CUT ○ ○ 2.7
F002.7 Dry run check signal MDRN ○ ○ 5.3.2
F003.0 Incremental feed selection check signal MINC ○ ○ 2.6
Manual handle feed selection check
F003.1 MH ○ ○ 2.6
signal
F003.2 Jog feed selection check signal MJ ○ ○ 2.6
F003.3 Manual data input selection check signal MMDI ○ ○ 2.6
- 2759 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
5.14, 5.15,
F003.4 DNC operation selection confirm signal MRMT ○ ○
5.16
Automatic operation selection check
F003.5 MMEM ○ ○ 2.6
signal
F003.6 Program edit selection check signal MEDT ○ ○ 2.6
F004.0 MBDT1 ○ ○
Optional block skip check signals 5.5
F005 MBDT2 to MBDT9 ○ ○
F004.1 All-axis machine lock check signal MMLK ○ ○ 5.3.1
F004.2 Manual absolute check signal MABSM ○ ○ 5.4
F004.3 Single block check signal MSBK ○ ○ 5.3.3
F004.4 Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL ○ ○ 10.2
Manual reference position return
F004.5 MREF ○ ○ 4.1
selection check signal
F006.0 Touch panel check signal TPPRS ○ ○ 14.1.7
F006.1 MDI reset confirmation signal MDIRST ○ ○ 5.2
Automatic screen erasure status
F006.2 ERTVA ○ ○ 14.1.12
in-progress signal
F007.0 Auxiliary function strobe signals MF ○ ○ 10.1
F007.2 Spindle function strobe signal SF ○ ○ 10.1
F007.3 Tool function strobe signal TF ○ ○ 10.1
F007.7 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF ○ ○ 10.1
F008.4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 ○ ○ 10.3
F008.5 3rd M function strobe signal MF3 ○ ○ 10.3
F008.6 4th M function strobe signal MF4 ○ ○ 10.3
F008.7 5th M function strobe signal MF5 ○ ○ 10.3
F009.4 DM30 ○ ○
F009.5 DM02 ○ ○
Decode M signals 10.1
F009.6 DM01 ○ ○
F009.7 DM00 ○ ○
F010 to F013 Auxiliary function code signals M00 to M31 ○ ○ 10.1
F014 to F015 2nd M function code signals M200 to M215 ○ ○ 10.3
3rd M function code signals M300 to M315 ○ ○ 10.3
F016 to F017
2nd M function code signals M216 to M231 ○ ○ 10.3
F022 to F025 Spindle function code signals S00 to S31 ○ ○ 10.1
F026 to F029 Tool function code signals T00 to T31 ○ ○ 10.1
F030 to F033 2nd auxiliary function code signals B00 to B31 ○ ○ 10.1
F034.0 to F034.2 Gear selection signals (output) GR1O,GR2O,GR3O - ○ 11.5
F034.3 4th serial spindle ready signals SRSP4R ○ ○ 11.2
F034.4 3rd serial spindle ready signals SRSP3R ○ ○ 11.2
F034.5 2nd serial spindle ready signals SRSP2R ○ ○ 11.2
F034.6 1st serial spindle ready signals SRSP1R ○ ○ 11.2
F034.7 All-spindle operation ready signal SRSRDY ○ ○ 11.2
F035.0 Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL ○ ○ 11.19
F036.0 to F037.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O to R12O ○ ○ 11.5
F038.0 Spindle clamp signal SCLPA ○ ○ 11.10
F038.1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPA ○ ○ 11.10
F038.2 ENB2 ○ ○ 11.12
Spindle enable signal
F038.3 ENB3 ○ ○ 11.12
F039.0 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSA ○ ○ 11.10
F039.1 Spindle enable signal ENB4 ○ ○ 11.12
F039.2 Oscillation -in-progress signal CHPMD ○ ○ 1.15
F039.3 Oscillation cycle signal CHPCYL ○ ○ 1.15
F040,F041 Actual spindle speed signals AR00 to AR15 ○ ○ 11.9
- 2760 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Phase error monitor signal (for each
F043.0 to F043.3 SYCAL1 to SYCAL4 ○ ○ 11.14,11.17
spindle)
Cs contour control change completion
F044.1 FSCSL ○ ○ 11.11.1
signal
Spindle synchronous speed control
F044.2 FSPSY ○ ○ 11.14
completion signal
Spindle phase synchronization control
F044.3 FSPPH ○ ○ 11.14
completion signal
F044.4 Phase error monitor signal SYCAL ○ ○ 11.14,11.17
F045.0 Alarm signals (serial spindle) ALMA ○ ○ 11.2
F045.1 Speed zero signals (serial spindle) SSTA ○ ○ 11.2
F045.2 Speed detection signals (serial spindle) SDTA ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle speed arrival signal (serial
F045.3 SARA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F045.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1A ○ ○ 11.2
F045.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2A ○ ○ 11.2
F045.6 Torque limit signals (serial spindle) TLMA ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation completion signals (serial
F045.7 ORARA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F046.0 Power line switch signals (serial spindle) CHPA ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle switch completion signals (serial
F046.1 CFINA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F046.2 Output switch signals (serial spindle) RCHPA ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch completion signals (serial
F046.3 RCFNA ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Subordinate operation status signals
F046.4 SLVSA ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Position coder orientation proximity
F046.5 PORA2A ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion
F046.6 MORA1A ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity
F046.7 MORA2A ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Position coder one-rotation signal
F047.0 PC1DTA ○ ○ 11.2
detection status signals (serial spindle)
Incremental orientation mode
F047.1 INCSTA ○ ○ 11.2
signals(serial spindle)
F048.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPENA ○ ○ 11.11.4
F049.0 Alarm signals (serial spindle) ALMB ○ ○ 11.2
F049.1 Speed zero signals (serial spindle) SSTB ○ ○ 11.2
F049.2 Speed detection signals (serial spindle) SDTB ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle speed arrival signal (serial
F049.3 SARB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F049.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1B ○ ○ 11.2
F049.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2B ○ ○ 11.2
F049.6 Torque limit signals (serial spindle) TLMB ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation completion signals (serial
F049.7 ORARB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F050.0 Power line switch signals (serial spindle) CHPB ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle switch completion signals (serial
F050.1 CFINB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F050.2 Output switch signals (serial spindle) RCHPB ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch completion signals (serial
F050.3 RCFNB ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
- 2761 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Subordinate operation status signals
F050.4 SLVSB ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Position coder orientation proximity
F050.5 PORA2B ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion
F050.6 MORA1B ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity
F050.7 MORA2B ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Position coder one-rotation signal
F051.0 PC1DTB ○ ○ 11.2
detection status signals (serial spindle)
Incremental orientation mode
F051.1 INCSTB ○ ○ 11.2
signals(serial spindle)
F052.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPENB ○ ○ 11.11.4
F053.0 Key input disable signal INHKY ○ ○ 17.6
F053.1 Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL ○ ○ 17.6
F053.2 Input/output busy signal IOBSY ○ ○ 15.2
F053.3 Input/output alarm signal IOALM ○ ○ 15.2
F053.4 Background editing signal BGEACT ○ ○ 15.2
F053.7 Key code read completion signal EKENB ○ ○ 17.6
F054,F055 UO000 to UO015 ○ ○
Custom macro output signals 13.6
F056 to F059 UO100 to UO131 ○ ○
Read completion signal for external data
F060.0 EREND ○ ○ 17.2
input
Search completion signal for external
F060.1 ESEND ○ ○ 17.2
data input
Search cancel signal for external data
F060.2 ESCAN ○ ○ 17.2
input
F061.0 B axis unclamp signal BUCLP - ○ 13.12
F061.1 B axis clamp signal BCLP - ○ 13.12
Hard copy cancellation request reception
F061.2 HCAB2 ○ ○
signal 14.1.14
F061.3 Hard copy execution status signal HCEXE ○ ○
Manual tool compensation uncompleted
F061.4 MTLANG ○ - 12.1.5
signal
Manual tool compensation completion
F061.5 MTLA ○ - 12.1.5
signal
F062.0 AI contour control mode signal AICC ○ ○ 7.1.12
F062.3 Spindle 1 under measurement signal S1MES ○ - 16.4.2
F062.4 Spindle 2 under measurement signal S2MES ○ - 16.4.2
Three-dimensional coordinate
F062.6 D3ROT ○ ○ 13.15
conversion mode signal
F062.7 Target part count reached signal PRTSF ○ ○ 14.1.1
F063.0 Polygon master axis not arrival signal PSE1 ○ ○ 6.9.2
Polygon synchronization axis not arrival
F063.1 PSE2 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
F063.2 Polygon spindle speed arrival signal PSAR ○ ○ 6.9.2
F063.3 Path spindle command confirmation COSP1 ● ●
8.11
F063.4 signal COSP2 ● ●
F063.6 Waiting signal WATO ● ● 8.2
Polygon synchronization under way
F063.7 PSYN ○ ○ 6.9.1
signal
12.3.1
F064.0 Tool change signal TLCH ○ ○
12.6
F064.1 New tool select signal TLNW ○ ○ 12.5
- 2762 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
12.3.1
F064.2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI ○ ○
12.6
12.3.1
F064.3 Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB ○ ○
12.6
Path spindle command confirmation
F064.5 COSP ● ● 8.11
signal
Path interference check in progress
F064.6 TICHK ● - 8.4
signal
F064.7 Path interference alarm signal TIALM ● - 8.4
F065.0 RGSPP ○ ○
Spindle rotation direction signals 11.13
F065.1 RGSPM ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control
F065.2 RSMAX ○ ○ 11.14
clamp signal
F065.4 Retract completion signal RTRCTF ○ ○ 1.10, 6.22
F065.6 EGB mode signal SYNMOD - ○ 1.9
F066.1 Rigid tapping retraction completion signal RTPT ○ ○ 5.14, 5.18
F066.2 Feed zero signal FEED0 ○ ○ 3.5
Small-hole peck drilling cycle in progress
F066.5 PECK2 - ○ 13.7.1
signal
F070,F071 Position switch signals PSW01 to PSW16 ○ ○ 1.2.9
Software operator’s panel
F072 OUT0 to OUT7 ○ ○ 14.1.2
general-purpose switch signals
F073.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MD1) MD1O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F073.1 Software operator’s panel signal (MD2) MD2O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F073.2 Software operator’s panel signal (MD4) MD4O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F073.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN) ZRNO ○ ○ 14.1.2
Software operator’s panel
F074 OUT8 to OUT15 ○ ○ 14.1.2
general-purpose switch signals
F075.2 Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F075.3 Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) SBKO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F075.4 Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F075.5 Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO ○ ○ 14.1.2
Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1
F075.6 KEYO ○ ○ 14.1.2
to KEY4)
F075.7 Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) SPO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F076.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MP1) MP1O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F076.1 Software operator’s panel signal (MP2) MP2O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F076.3 Rigid tapping-in-progress signal RTAP ○ ○ 11.13
F076.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1) ROV1O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F076.5 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2) ROV2O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F077.0 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A) HS1AO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F077.1 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B) HS1BO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F077.2 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C) HS1CO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F077.3 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D) HS1DO ○ ○ 14.1.2
F077.6 Software operator’s panel signal (RT) RTO ○ ○ 14.1.2
Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0 to
F078 *FV0O to *FV7O ○ ○ 14.1.2
*FV7)
Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0 to
F079,F080 *JV0O to *JV15O ○ ○ 14.1.2
*JV15)
F081.0,F081.2, Software operator’s panel signal (+J1 to
+J1O to +J4O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F081.4,F081.6 +J4)
F081.1,F081.3, Software operator’s panel signal
-J1O to -J4O ○ ○ 14.1.2
F081.5,F081.7 (-J1 to -J4)
F082.2 Reverse movement signal RVSL - ○ 5.10
- 2763 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
EGB synchronization mode confirmation
F082.6 EGBSM ○ ○ 1.9.4
signal
F084,F085 Output signals for P-code macro EUO00 to EUO15 ○ ○ 13.17
Servo axis unexpected disturbance
F090.0 ABTQSV ○ ○ 2.9
torque detection signal
1st spindle unexpected disturbance
F090.1 ABTSP1 ○ ○ 2.9
torque detection signal
2nd spindle unexpected disturbance
F090.2 ABTSP2 ○ ○ 2.9
torque detection signal
3rd spindle unexpected disturbance
F090.3 ABTSP3 ○ ○ 2.9
torque detection signal
Servo motor spindle synchronization
F090.4 mode acceleration/deceleration SYAR ○ ○
completion signal
Servo motor spindle synchronization
F090.5 SYSSM ○ ○
mode signal 11.22.1
Servo motor spindle control mode
F090.6 acceleration/deceleration completion SVAR ○ ○
signal
F090.7 Servo motor spindle control mode signal SVSPM ○ ○
F091.0 Reverse movement signal MRVMD ○ ○ 5.3.5
F091.1 Direction change prohibition signal MNCHG ○ ○ 5.3.5
F091.2 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP ○ ○ 5.3.5
F091.3 Check mode confirmation signal MMMOD ○ ○ 5.3.5
4th spindle unexpected disturbance
F091.4 ABTSP4 ○ ○ 2.9
torque detection signal
Auxiliary function output block reverse
F091.5 ADCO ○ ○ 5.3.6
movement enable output signal
F092.3 Tool retraction mode signal TRACT ○ ○ 5.8
F092.4 Tool retraction axis movement signal TRMTN ○ ○ 5.8
F092.5 Tool return completion signal TRSPS ○ ○ 5.8
Periodic maintenance service life
F093.0 LIFOVR ○ ○ 14.1.18
expiration signal
F093.1 Alarm level detection signal SFAN ○ ○ 19.3.1
F093.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIF ○ ○ 12.5
F093.3 Warning level detection signal WFAN ○ ○ 19.3.1
F093.4 SVWRN1 ○ ○
F093.5 SVWRN2 ○ ○
Servo warning detail signals 19.1
F093.6 SVWRN3 ○ ○
F093.7 SVWRN4 ○ ○
F094 Reference position return end signals ZP1 to ZP8 ○ ○ 4.1
2nd reference position return completion
F096 ZP21 to ZP28 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
signals
3rd reference position return completion
F098 ZP31 to ZP38 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
signals
4th reference position return completion
F100 ZP41 to ZP48 ○ ○ 4.4, 4.15
signals
F102 Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8 ○ ○ 1.2.5
F104 In-position signals INP1 to INP8 ○ ○ 7.2.6.2
F106 Axis moving direction signals MVD1 to MVD8 ○ ○ 1.2.5
F108 Mirror image check signals MMI1 to MMI8 ○ ○ 1.2.6
MDTCH1 to
F110 Controlled axis detach status signals ○ ○ 1.2.5, 1.15
MDTCH8
- 2764 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Distribution completion signals (PMC
F112 EADEN1 to EADEN8 ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F114 Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL8 ○ ○ 16.3.6
Synchronous/composite/superimposed
F118 SYN1O to SYN8O ○ ○ 8.6,8.7
control under way signals
F120 Reference position establishment signals ZRF1 to ZRF8 ○ ○ 4.1
F122 High-speed skip status signals HDO0 to HDO3 ○ ○ 16.3.3
F124 +OT1 to +OT8 ○ ○ 2.3.2
Overtravel alarm signals
F126 -OT1 to -OT8 ○ ○ 2.3.2
F129.5 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) EOV0 ○ ○ 17.1
Controlled axis selection status signals
F129.7 *EAXSL ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
F130.0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPA ○ ○ 17.1
Following zero checking signals (PMC
F130.1 ECKZA ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F130.2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALA ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function executing signals
F130.3 EDENA ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
F130.4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGENA ○ ○ 17.1
Positive-direction overtravel signals
F130.5 EOTPA ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Negative-direction overtravel signals
F130.6 EOTNA ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Axis control command read completion
F130.7 EBSYA ○ ○ 17.1
signals (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC
F131.0 EMFA ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F131.1 Buffer full signals (PMC axis control) EABUFA ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal (PMC
F131.2 EMF2A ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal (PMC
F131.3 EMF3A ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function code signals (PMC axis
F132,F142 EM11A to EM48A ○ ○ 17.1
control)
F133.0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPB ○ ○ 17.1
Following zero checking signals (PMC
F133.1 ECKZB ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F133.2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALB ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function executing signals
F133.3 EDENB ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
F133.4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGENB ○ ○ 17.1
Positive-direction overtravel signals
F133.5 EOTPB ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Negative-direction overtravel signals
F133.6 EOTNB ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Axis control command read completion
F133.7 EBSYB ○ ○ 17.1
signals (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC
F134.0 EMFB ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F134.1 Buffer full signals (PMC axis control) EABUFB ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal (PMC
F134.2 EMF2B ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal (PMC
F134.3 EMF3B ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
- 2765 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Auxiliary function code signals (PMC axis
F135,F145 EM11B to EM48B ○ ○ 17.1
control)
F136.0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPC ○ ○ 17.1
Following zero checking signals (PMC
F136.1 ECKZC ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F136.2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALC ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function executing signals
F136.3 EDENC ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
F136.4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGENC ○ ○ 17.1
Positive-direction overtravel signals
F136.5 EOTPC ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Negative-direction overtravel signals
F136.6 EOTNC ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Axis control command read completion
F136.7 EBSYC ○ ○ 17.1
signals (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC
F137.0 EMFC ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F137.1 Buffer full signals (PMC axis control) EABUFC ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal (PMC
F137.2 EMF2C ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal (PMC
F137.3 EMF3C ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function code signals (PMC axis
F138,F148 EM11C to EM48C ○ ○ 17.1
control)
F139.0 In-position signal (PMC axis control) EINPD ○ ○ 17.1
Following zero checking signals (PMC
F139.1 ECKZD ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F139.2 Alarm signal (PMC axis control) EIALD ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function executing signals
F139.3 EDEND ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
F139.4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGEND ○ ○ 17.1
Positive-direction overtravel signals
F139.5 EOTPD ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Negative-direction overtravel signals
F139.6 EOTND ○ ○ 17.1
(PMC axis control)
Axis control command read completion
F139.7 EBSYD ○ ○ 17.1
signals (PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC
F140.0 EMFD ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
F140.1 Buffer full signals (PMC axis control) EABUFD ○ ○ 17.1
Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal (PMC
F140.2 EMF2D ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal (PMC
F140.3 EMF3D ○ ○ 17.1
axis control)
Auxiliary function code signals (PMC axis
F141,F151 EM11D to EM48D ○ ○ 17.1
control)
Number of remaining tools notification
F154.0 TLAL - ○ 12.5
signal
F160,F161 Multi-spindle address P signals MSP00 to MSP15 ○ ○ 11.12
F168.0 Alarm signals (serial spindle) ALMC ○ ○ 11.2
F168.1 Speed zero signals (serial spindle) SSTC ○ ○ 11.2
F168.2 Speed detection signals (serial spindle) SDTC ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle speed arrival signal (serial
F168.3 SARC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
- 2766 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
F168.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1C ○ ○ 11.2
F168.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2C ○ ○ 11.2
F168.6 Torque limit signals (serial spindle) TLMC ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation completion signals (serial
F168.7 ORARC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F169.0 Power line switch signals (serial spindle) CHPC ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle switch completion signals (serial
F169.1 CFINC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F169.2 Output switch signals (serial spindle) RCHPC ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch completion signals (serial
F169.3 RCFNC ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Subordinate operation status signals
F169.4 SLVSC ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Position coder orientation proximity
F169.5 PORA2C ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion
F169.6 MORA1C ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity
F169.7 MORA2C ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Position coder one-rotation signal
F170.0 PC1DTC ○ ○ 11.2
detection status signals (serial spindle)
Incremental orientation mode
F170.1 INCSTC ○ ○ 11.2
signals(serial spindle)
F171.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPENC ○ ○ 11.11.4
Absolute position detector battery
F172.6 PBATZ ○ ○ 1.4.2
voltage zero alarm signal
Absolute position detector battery
F172.7 PBATL ○ ○ 1.4.2
voltage low alarm signal
Torque limit reach signals for reference
F180 CLRCH1 to CLRCH8 ○ ○ 4.7, 4.8
point setting with mechanical stopper
F182 Controlling signals (PMC axis control) EACNT1 to EACNT8 ○ ○ 17.1
Unexpected disturbance torque detection
F184 ABDT1 to ABDT8 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
Torque control mode signal (PMC axis
F190 TRQM1 to TRQM8 ○ ○ 17.1
control)
Flexible synchronization control mode MFSYNA,MFSYNB
F197.0 to F197.3 ○ ○ 1.12
status signals MFSYNC,MFSYND
F200.0 to F201.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O2 to R12O2 ○ ○ 11.12
F202,F203 Actual spindle speed signals AR002 to AR152 ○ ○ 11.9
F204.0 to F205.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O3 to R12O3 ○ ○ 11.12
F206,F207 Actual spindle speed signals AR003 to AR153 ○ ○ 11.9
1.10.5, 1.10.7
F208 EGB mode confirmation signals EGBM1 to EGBM8 ○ ○
1.10.8
Machine coordinate match state output
F210 SYNMT1 to SYNMT8 ○ ○ 1.6
signals
Synchronization compensation enable
F211 SYNOF1 to SYNOF8 ○ ○ 1.6
state output signals
SPWRN1 to
F264.0 to F265.0 Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9 ○ ○ 11.2, 19.2
SPWRN9
F266.0 Alarm signals (serial spindle) ALMD ○ ○ 11.2
F266.1 Speed zero signals (serial spindle) SSTD ○ ○ 11.2
F266.2 Speed detection signals (serial spindle) SDTD ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle speed arrival signal (serial
F266.3 SARD ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
- 2767 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
F266.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1D ○ ○ 11.2
F266.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2D ○ ○ 11.2
F266.6 Torque limit signals (serial spindle) TLMD ○ ○ 11.2
Orientation completion signals (serial
F266.7 ORARD ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F267.0 Power line switch signals (serial spindle) CHPD ○ ○ 11.2
Spindle switch completion signals (serial
F267.1 CFIND ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
F267.2 Output switch signals (serial spindle) RCHPD ○ ○ 11.2
Output switch completion signals (serial
F267.3 RCFND ○ ○ 11.2
spindle)
Subordinate operation status signals
F267.4 SLVSD ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
Position coder orientation proximity
F267.5 PORA2D ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion
F267.6 MORA1D ○ ○ 11.2
signal (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity
F267.7 MORA2D ○ ○ 11.2
signals (serial spindle)
Position coder one-rotation signal
F268.0 PC1DTD ○ ○ 11.2
detection status signals (serial spindle)
Incremental orientation mode signals
F268.1 INCSTD ○ ○ 11.2
(serial spindle)
F269.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPEND ○ ○ 11.11.4
F270.0 to F271.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O4 to R12O4 ○ ○ 11.12
F272,F273 Actual spindle speed signals AR004 to AR154 ○ ○ 11.9
Cs contour control change completion
F274.0 to F274.3 FCSS1 to FCSS4 ○ ○ 11.11
signal (for each spindle)
Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm
F274.4 to F274.7 CSFO1 to CSFO4 ○ ○ 11.11.4
signals (for each spindle)
F276 to F277 UO016 to UO031 ○ ○
F280 to F283 Output signals for custom macro UO200 to UO231 ○ ○ 13.6
F284 to F287 UO300 to UO331 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed control
F288.0 to F288.3 FSPSY1 to FSPSY4 ○ ○ 11.14
completion signal (for each spindle)
Spindle phase synchronization control
F289.0 to F289.3 FSPPH1 to FSPPH4 ○ ○ 11.14
completion signal (for each spindle)
F290.2 DeviceNet communication normal signal DNTCM ○ ○
High speed program check saving data
F290.4 PCKSV ○ ○ 5.3.4
signal
F290.5 High speed program check mode signal PRGMD ○ ○ 5.3.4
F293,F294 High-speed position switch signals HPS01 to HPS16 ○ ○ 1.2.10
F295.6 Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO ○ ○ 14.1.9
14.1.11
F295.7 Key control selection status signal CNCKYO ○ ○
14.1.12
Trouble forecast signals for thermal
F298 TDSML1 to TDSML8 ○ ○
simulation
19.4
Trouble forecast signals for disturbance
F299 TDFTR1 to TDFTR8 ○ ○
level
F315.0 Tool skip completion signal TLSKF ○ ○ 12.3.1
F315.1 Tool search in-progress signal TLMSRH ○ ○ 12.3.1
Tool management data modification
F315.2 TLMG10 ○ ○ 12.3.1
in-progress signal
- 2768 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Tool management data output
F315.4 TLMOT ○ ○ 12.3.1
in-progress signal
F315.6 Life expiration signal TMFNFD ○ ○ 12.3.1
Tool management data edit in-progress
F315.7 TLMEM ○ ○ 12.3.1
signal
Program restart MDI program output
F316.6 SQMPR ○ ○ 5.6.1
completion signal
Program restart MDI program execution
F316.7 SQMPE ○ ○ 5.6.1
completion signal
F328.0 to F328.3 Tool change signals 1 to 4 TLCH1 to TLCH4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
F328.4 to F328.7 Individual tool change signals 1 to 4 TLCHI1 to TLCHI4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
F329.0 to F329.3 Tool skip completion signals 1 to 4 TLSKF1 to TLSKF4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
F329.4 to F329.7 Tool life expiration notice signals 1 to 4 TLCHB1 to TLCHB4 ○ ○ 12.3.1
Synchronous master axis confirmation
F341 SYCM1 to SYCM8 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
Synchronous slave axis confirmation
F342 SYCS1 to SYCS8 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
F343 Composite axis confirmation signals MIXO1 to MIXO8 ○ ○ 8.5
Superimposed control master axis
F344 OVMO1 to OVMO8 ○ ○ 8.6
confirmation signals
Superimposed control slave axis
F345 OVSO1 to OVSO8 ○ ○ 8.6
confirmation signals
F346 Parking axis confirmation signals SMPK1 to SMPK8 ○ ○ 8.5
3-dimensional coordinate conversion
F347.7 D3MI ○ ○ 3.3.1
manual interrupt mode in-progress signal
SSEGBM1 to
F351.0 to F351.3 Simple spindle EGB mode signals ○ ○ 11.24
SSEGBM4
Each axis workpiece coordinate system
F358 WPSF1 to WPSF8 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
preset completion signals
F376 Speed zero signals SVSST1 to SVSST8 ○ ○ 11.20
F377 Speed arrival signals SVSAR1 to SVSAR8 ○ ○ 11.20
Flexible synchronization control phase
F381.0 to F381.3 PHFINA to PHFIND ○ ○ 1.12.2
synchronization end signals
F400.1 SUCLPB ○ ○
F400.2 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPC ○ ○ 11.10
F400.3 SUCLPD ○ ○
F401.1 SCLPB ○ ○
F401.2 Spindle clamp signal SCLPC ○ ○ 11.10
F401.3 SCLPD ○ ○
F402.1 MSPOSB ○ ○
F402.2 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSC ○ ○ 11.10
F402.3 MSPOSD ○ ○
Signal for indicating a positional
F403.0 deviation error alarm for axis SYNER ○ ○ 1.6
synchronous control
F404.0 Path spindle command confirmation COSP3 ● ●
8.10
F404.1 signal COSP4 ● ●
F512.0 Macro call executing signal MCEXE ○ ○ 17.7
F512.1 Mode change request signal MCRQ ○ ○ 17.7
F512.2 Abnormal end signal MCSP ○ ○ 17.7
- 2769 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
F513.0 MD1R ○ ○
F513.1 MD2R ○ ○
F513.2 Mode notification signal MD4R ○ ○ 17.7
F513.5 DNCIR ○ ○
F513.7 ZRNR ○ ○
F514,F515 Call program confirmation signal MCEX1 to MCEX16 ○ ○ 17.7
F517.0 to F517.7 Reference position match signals RP11 to RP18 ○ ○ 4.11
F518.0 to F518.7 2nd reference position match signals RP21 to RP28 ○ ○ 4.11
F520.0 Automatic data backup executing signal ATBK ○ ○
F521 SV speed control mode signals SVREV1 to SVREV8 ○ ○ 11.20.1
F522 Spindle indexing signals for each axis SPP1 to SPP8 ○ ○ 11.20.2
F526.5 Dwell status signal DWL ○ ○ 2.7
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle
F527.6 SYPFN ○ ○
synchronous finished signal
11.22.3
Phase synchronization for Servo/Spindle
F527.7 SYPER ○ ○
synchronous error signal
F531.6 External device program execution signal DVCPR ○ ○ 5.14
F531.7 β ready signal IOLBR ○ ○ 3.9
F532 Axis synchronous control status signals SYNO1 to SYNO8 ○ ○ 1.6
F534.1 Quick program restart under way signal SRNEX ○ ○ 5.7
F534.4 Middle block start signal MBSO ○ ○ 2.13
Peripheral axis control group 1 start
F534.5 PE1EX ○ ○
signal
Peripheral axis control group 2 start
F534.6 PE2EX ○ ○ 1.20
signal
Peripheral axis control group 3 start
F534.7 PE3EX ○ ○
signal
I/O Link 1 retry abnormality warning
F535.0 WIOCH1 ○ ○
signal
I/O Link 2 retry abnormality warning
F535.1 WIOCH2 ○ ○
signal 19.3.2
I/O Link 3 retry abnormality warning
F535.2 WIOCH3 ○ ○
signal
F535.3 SRAM ECC abnormality warning signal WECCS ○ ○
Embedded Ethernet communication
F535.4 WETE ○ ○
abnormality warning signal
Fast Ethernet communication
F535.5 WETF ○ ○
abnormality warning signal
19.3.2
FL-net1 communication abnormality
F535.6 WFLN1 ○ ○
warning signal
FL-net2 communication abnormality
F535.7 WFLN2 ○ ○
warning signal
F536.2 Removal completion signal RMVED ○ ○
F536.3 Assignment completion signal ASNED ○ ○
1.14
F536.4 Exchange completion signal EXCED ○ ○
F536.7 Initial axis assignment signal INIST ○ ○
F545.0 Display language switch completion FLANG ○ ○
14.1.8
signal
Inter-path flexible synchronization mode
F545.1 signal OVLNS ● ● 1.12.4
Advanced superimposition mode signal
DeviceNet communication abnormal
F545.4 DNTER ○ ○
signal
- 2770 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
T M Reference
Address Signal name Symbol
series series item
Groove of thread measurement
F546.4 GTMC ○ ○
completion signal
6.5.7.2
Groove of thread measurement error
F546.5 GTME ○ ○
signal
Automatic phase synchronization PHERA, PHERB,
F553.0 to F553.3 ○ ○ 1.12.3
positional error detection signals PHERC, PHERD
Notification signal for modification of C
F558.0 CDCEX ○ ○
Language Executor program
Notification signal for modification of 1st
F558.1 CDLAD1 ○ ○
path PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for modification of 2nd
F558.2 CDLAD2 ○ ○
path PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for modification of 3rd
F558.3 CDLAD3 ○ ○
path PMC Ladder program
14.1.23
Notification signal for modification of
F558.4 CDDCL ○ ○
Dual Check Safety PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for modification of
F558.5 CDPRM ○ ○
CNC parameter
Notification signal for modification of 4th
F558.6 CDLAD4 ○ ○
path PMC Ladder program
Notification signal for modification of 5th
F558.7 CDLAD5 ○ ○
path PMC Ladder program
F559 Excess synchronization error signals SEO1 to SEO8 ○ ○ 8.6
F564 to F567 3rd M function code signals M300 to M331 ○ ○ 10.3
F568 to F571 4th M function code signals M400 to M431 ○ ○ 10.3
F572 to F575 5th M function code signals M500 to M531 ○ ○ 10.3
F577.0 to F577.3 Spindle position save completion signal SPMFN1 to SPMFN4 ○ ○ 11.14.1
SPMER1 to
F577.4 to F577.7 Spindle position save error signal ○ ○ 11.14.1
SPMER4
F578.2 Web browser connection status signal WBCNT ○ ○ 18.2.7
F578.5 NC data output signal ALLO ○ ○ 15.3
F580 to F583 ARE00 to ARE31 ○ ○
F584 to F587 ARE002 to ARE312 ○ ○
Extended actual spindle speed signals 11.27
F588 to F591 ARE003 to ARE313 ○ ○
F592 to F595 ARE004 to ARE314 ○ ○
+OT11O, -OT11O,
Stored stroke limit range switching +OT12O, -OT12O,
F598 ○ ○ 2.3.8
confirmation signals +OT2O, -OT2O,
+OT3O, -OT3O
Stored stroke limit range switching finish
F599.0 OTSWFN ○ ○ 2.3.8
signal
F708 to F711 RE01O to RE32O ○ ○
F712 to F715 RE01O2 to RE32O2 ○ ○
S32-bit code signals
F716 to F719 RE01O3 to RE32O3 ○ ○ 11.27
F720 to F723 RE01O4 to RE32O4 ○ ○
DO signal for Data transfer between
F747 TDCF00 to TDCF07 ○ ○ 17.9
PMC and DCSPMC
- 2771 -
B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING
PMC SIGNALS OTHER THAN
G/F ADDRESS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
B LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC
SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS
B.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS OTHER
THAN G/F ADDRESS
Functions using PMC signals other than G/F address in addition to the function to create applications and
the communication function that are listed in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” are as follows.
Access Related
Function name Signal types types to parameter Reference item
signal numbers
High-Speed Position Y Write HPF(No.8501#0) 1.2.10 High-Speed Position Switch
Switch No.8565
Flexible Path Axis R Write No.11554 1.14 Flexible Path Axis
Assignment Assignment
Stored Stroke Limit D Read No.1313 2.3.8 Stored Stroke Limit Range
Range Switching Switching Function by Signal
Function by Signal
Manual Linear/Circular R Read MRI(No.7106#3) 3.4 Manual Linear/Circular
Interpolation Write MRO(No.7106#4) Interpolation
No.13541
No.13542
Manual Reference X Read GDC(No.3006#0) 4.1 Manual Reference Position
Position Return XSG(No.3008#2) Return
No.3013
No.3014
Spindle Speed Command R Read No.3773 11.24 Spindle Speed Command
Clamp Clamp
Custom Macro R Write IFR(No.6020#2) 13.6 Custom Macro
No.6094
Energy Saving Level X,Y,A,R,T,K,C, Read Set signals on the 14.1.21 Energy Saving Level
Selecting Function D display Selecting Function
Automatic Tool Length X Read XSG(No.3008#2) 16.2 Automatic Tool Length
Measurement (M Series) No.3019 Measurement (M Series)
/Automatic Tool Offset /Automatic Tool Offset (T Series)
(T Series)
Skip Function X Read XSG(No.3008#2) 16.3.1 Skip Function
No.3012
Multi-Step Skip X Read XSG(No.3008#2) 16.3.5 Multi-Step Skip
No.3012
Direct Input of Offset X Read XSG(No.3008#2) 16.4.2 Direct Input of Offset Value
Value Measured B (T No.3019 Measured B (T Series)
Series)
PMC Axis Control X Read XSG(No.3008#2) 17.1 PMC Axis Control
No.3019
SKE(No.8001#7)
Extended External R Read EMS(No.1203#0) 17.3 Extended External Machine
Machine Zero Point Shift No.1280 Zero Point Shift
Communication Retry R9051 (Z51) Read Fixed signals 19.3.2 Communication Retry
Monitoring Function R9057 (Z57) Monitoring Function
R9165 (Z165)
- 2772 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS
INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM COMMAND
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS
P IN THE PROGRAM COMMAND
C.1 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE
ARGUMENT OF G CODE
The function including address P in the argument of G code is shown below.
Machining Lathe system
Function name center G code system Reference item
system A B C
Dwell G04 G04 G04 G04 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "FEED
FUNCTIONS"
G code preventing G04.1 G04.1 G04.1 G04.1 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
buffering "PROGRAM COMMAND"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS"
AI advanced preview G08 G08 G08 G08 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
control(M Series)/AI "FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION
contour control AND DECELERATION CONTROL"
(advanced preview - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
control compatible T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
command) "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS"
Programmable data G10 G10 G10 G10 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
input Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)"
Programmable G10 G10 G10 G10 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
parameter input Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT (G10)"
Spindle speed G26 G26 G26 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
fluctuation detection "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
Reference position G30 G30 G30 G30 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
return Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"REFERENCE POSITION"
Multi-step skip G31 G31 G31 G31 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS"
Torque limit skip G31 G31 G31 G31 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS"
Continuous G31 G31 G31 G31 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
high-speed skip Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS"
Skip function for EGB G31.8 CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
axis "AXIS CONTROL"
- 2773 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS
INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN
THE PROGRAM COMMAND APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Machining Lathe system
Function name center G code system Reference item
system A B C
Scaling G51 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
"PROGRAM COMMAND"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "COMPENSATION
FUNCTION"
Polygon turning G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(G251) (G251) (G251) "INTERPOLATION FUNCTION"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "AXIS CONTROL
FUNCTIONS"
Synchronous, G51.4, G51.4, G51.4, G51.4, - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
Composite and G51.5, G51.5, G51.5, G51.5, "MULTI-PATH CONTROL"
Superimposed control G51.6, G51.6, G51.6, G51.6, - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
by program command G50.5 G50.5 G50.5 G50.5 T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"MULTI-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION"
Flexible path axis G52.1, G52.1, G52.1, G52.1, CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
assignment G52.2, G52.2, G52.2, G52.2, "AXIS CONTROL"
G52.3 G52.3 G52.3 G52.3
High-speed G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
function "AXIS CONTROL"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"COORDINATE SYSTEM"
Workpiece coordinate G54 G54 G54 G54 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
system "AXIS CONTROL"
(G54.1) (G54.1) (G54.1) (G54.1) - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"COORDINATE SYSTEM"
Custom macro G65, G65, G65, G65, OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
G66, G66, G66, G66, Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "CUSTOM
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 MACRO"
Execution macro G65, G65, G65, G65, Macro Executor PROGRAMMING
Note1) G66, G66, G66, G66, MANUAL 3
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 G66.1
Note1) Note1) Note1) Note1)
Pattern Data Input G65 G65 G65 G65 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
"PROGRAM COMMAND"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"PATTERN DATA INPUT"
Balanced cutting - G68 G68 G68 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
"MULTI-PATH CONTROL"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "BALANCE CUT"
Tilted working plane G68.2 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
indexing "PROGRAM COMMAND"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
- 2774 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS
INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM COMMAND
Machining Lathe system
Function name center G code system Reference item
system A B C
Tilted working plane G68.3, - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
indexing by tool axis "PROGRAM COMMAND"
direction - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Tilted working plane G68.4 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
indexing (incremental "PROGRAM COMMAND"
multi-command) - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Multiple repetitive G70 to G70 to G72 to - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
cycles G76 G76 G78 "PROGRAM COMMAND"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Figure copying G72.1, OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
G72.2 Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS
TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Canned cycle G74, - - - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
G76 II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Canned cycle for G75, G72, G72, G73, - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
grinding G77, G74 G74 G75 II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
G78, SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
G79 - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Canned cycle G82 to G84, G82 to G82 to G82 to - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
G85, G85, G85, II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
G87 to G89 G87 to G87 to G87 to SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING" and
G89, G89, G89, "MEMORY OPERATION USING Series
G83.5, G83.5, G83.5, 10/11 FORMAT"
G83.6, G83.6, G83.6,
G87.5, G87.5, G87.5, - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Electronic gear box G81 CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
"AXIS CONTROL"
High-speed peck - G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
drilling cycle II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Rigid tapping cycle G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(FS15-T format) "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For T Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
- 2775 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS
INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN
THE PROGRAM COMMAND APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Machining Lathe system
Function name center G code system Reference item
system A B C
Left-handed rigid G84.3 - - - - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
tapping cycle(FS15-T "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
format) - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For M Series)
II. PROGRAMMING, "FUNCTIONS TO
SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING"
Constant surface G96 G96 G96 G96 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
speed control "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
Spindle Indexing G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
Function to to to to "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
Spindle control with G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
servo motor "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to
T/M Series) II. PROGRAMMING,
"SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
Note 1) : Arbitrary G code is optional with the following compilation parameter.
No.9013 to No.9022,No.9034,No.9045 to No.9047,No.9129 to No.9137
C.2 LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE
ARGUMENT OF M AND S CODE
The function including address P in the argument of M and S code is shown below.
M code related
Function name Reference item
format parameters
Waiting M codes M_P_ No.8110,No.8111, - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
MWP(No.8103#1) "MULTI-PATH CONTROL"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "MULTI-PATH
CONTROL FUNCTION"
Waiting M codes of M_P_ No.8114,No.8115, - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
high-speed Type MWP(No.8103#1) "MULTI-PATH CONTROL"
- OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "MULTI-PATH
CONTROL FUNCTION"
Waiting function by M_P_L_IP STW(No.8101#1), - CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
specifying start point No.8110,No.8111, "MULTI-PATH CONTROL"
MWP(No.8103#1) - OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "MULTI-PATH
CONTROL FUNCTION"
(Custom macro) M98P_ OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Subprogram Series) III. PROGRAMMING, "PROGRAM
Program end M99P_ CONFIGURATION"
External subprogram call M198P_ SBP(No.3404#2) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Series) III. OPERATION, "AUTOMATIC
OPERATION"
- 2776 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS
INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN THE
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM COMMAND
M code related
Function name Reference item
format parameters
Custom macro M_P_ MAA(No.6009#2) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to T/M
Macro Call Using an M Series) II. PROGRAMMING, "CUSTOM MACRO"
code ( include
specification of multiple
definitions and special
macro call)
Execution macro M98P_ Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Subprogram call 3
Subprogram call for user M_P_
program
Execution macro M_P_
Macro Call Using an M
code ( include
specification of multiple
definitions and special
macro call)
Multi-spindle S_P_ MPP(No.3703#3), CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
No.3781 "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION"
- 2777 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
D FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING
PARAMETER
D.1 AUTOMATIC STEEING OF FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
Some parameters are automatically set to recommended values in Series 0i-F, so that you can use the
CNC by recommended setting.
These parameters set up automatically are classified into following (1) or (2).
(1) FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type)
(2) FANUC recommendation setting parameter (initialized type)
The specifications of (1) and (2) are as follows.
(1) FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type)
The parameter value is compared with the recommended value at power-on. If the value is other than
the recommended value, the parameter is reset to the recommended value.
The parameter value cannot be changed by the parameter screen, PMC window function (WINDW:
SUB52), FOCAS2, C Language Executor, Macro Executor, and programmable parameter input
(G10), because it is basically unnecessary for the machine tool builder to change the parameter value.
If there is a situation to change from recommended value, set bit 0 (IPW) of parameter No.8880 to 1.
When IPW is 1, the parameter value can be changed and the check at power-on is not executed. So
the setup is not changed again, even if the power is turned off and on.
(2) FANUC recommendation setting parameter (initialized type)
The parameter is set to the recommended value as initial setting at power-on only when memory all
clear has been executed.
Although use with initial value is recommended, the machine tool builder can change the parameter
value.
The parameter of (1) and (2) is set to recommended value at the time of shipment of CNC.
Prohibition of setting to FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type)
If FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type) is tried to set to other than recommended value
with IPW = 0, the following operations are performed.
- Setting parameter from parameter screen
The warning message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed, and the parameter value is not
changed.
- PMC window function (WINDW: SUB52)
Completion code 7 (write-protected) is returned, and the parameter value is not changed.
- FOCAS2, C Language Executor (cnc_wrparam, cnc_wrparas)
In the case of setting by cnc_wrparam, return value is set to EW_PROT (Writing protection) and
the parameter value is not changed.
- 2778 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX
In the case of setting by cnc_wrparas, return value is set to EW_PROT (Writing protection), but the
values of the parameters before prohibited one is changed.
- Macro Executor (G314)
Completion code 7 (The data of the parameter corresponding to the specified parameter number is
protected.) is returned, and the parameter value is not changed.
- Programmable parameter input (G10)
The alarm PS1302, "ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER" occurs, and the parameter value is not changed.
Operation when the parameter file is inputted
When the parameter file is inputted, FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type) is also
rewritten according to the contents of the parameter file regardless of the setting of IPW.
It depends on the setting of IPW whether FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type) is
automatically set up again at the time of next power-on.
Automatic servo parameter initialization
There are standard parameters for the servo motor in FANUC recommendation setting parameters. Some
parameters are that the initial setting value of automatic servo parameter initialization is different from the
recommended value of this function.
Priority is given to the recommended value of this function in Series 0i-F.
When automatic servo parameter initialization (bit 1 of parameter No.2000 is 0) is executed, the
following parameters are set to the recommended values of this function.
No.2005#1, No.2069, No.2092
Automatic spindle parameter initialization
There are spindle parameters in FANUC recommendation setting parameters. Some parameters are that
the initial setting value of automatic spindle parameter initialization is different from the recommended
value of this function.
Priority is given to the recommended value of this function in Series 0i-F.
When automatic spindle parameter initialization (MAIN) (bit 7 of parameter No.4019 is 1) is executed,
the following parameters are set to the recommended values of this function.
No.4542#4, No.4627
When automatic spindle parameter initialization (SUB) (bit 7 of parameter No.4195 is 1) is executed, the
following parameters are set to the recommended values of this function.
No.4344
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8880 IPW
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
#0 IPW Setting of FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 2779 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
D.2 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER
(FIXED TYPE)
The list of FANUC recommendation setting parameter (fixed type) is shown below.
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.301#1 When the input from the connected device to NC is aborted via Ethernet 1
with CNC screen display,
0: Alarm has been occurred.
1: Alarm is not occurred.
No.909#0 On the Data server host file list screen, high speed file search is: 1
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
No.1611#1 When a threading command is specified in AI advanced preview control (M 1
Series) / AI contour control mode:
0: An alarm is issued.
1: AI advanced preview control (M Series) / AI contour control mode is
temporarily canceled and the command is executed.
No.3403#6 When the same address two or more times are specified in one block: 1
0: The address specified last is valid.
1: It is treated as a program error and the alarm PS5074, "ADDRESS
DUPLICATION ERROR" is issued.
No.3458#1 In retrace function, when reverse execution is done during auxiliary function 1
execution and then forward reexecution is done, the output of auxiliary *Only for the M
function is: Series
0: Once.
1: Twice.
No.3470#0 In helical interpolation, when the circular interpolation axes don't move and 1
other specified axes don't move:
0: Alarm PS0021,"ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT" is issued.
1: Alarm is not issued.
No.3785#7 The speed-up of changing Cs contour control mode is 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.5107#0 For G71/G72 (G-code system A), movement to the last turning start position 1
is performed by: *Only for the T
0: Cutting feed. Series
1: Rapid traverse.
No.5107#1 The G71/G72 (G-code system A) TYPE1 commands execute the movement 1
toward the current turning start position in: *Only for the T
0: Two cycles. Series
1: One cycle.
No.5107#2 In G70-G73 (G-code system A), the cycle operation is executed by: 1
0: Conventional method. *Only for the T
1: Improved method. Series
No.5107#5 If Multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G76) is specified in Coordinate 1
system rotation, Programmable mirror image or Scaling mode: *Only for the T
0: Alarm is not issued. Series
1: Alarm (PS0327) "MODAL THAT MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES
CANNOT BE DONE" is issued.
No.5108#5 In Multiple repetitive cycle G71/G72 (G-code system A), in-position check 1
between cutting blocks is: *Only for the T
0: Executed. Series
1: Not executed.
- 2780 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.5109#0 When an axis, which is not included in the specified plane, is commanded in 1
the multiple repetitive cycle (G70 to G76): *Only for the T
0: An alarm does not occur. Series
1: An alarm PS0021,"ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT" occurs.
No.5203#2 In rigid tapping, feed forward is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.5208#0 High-speed rigid tapping is: 1
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
No.5209#6 If Constant surface speed control is commanded in Rigid tapping mode: 1
0: Alarm is not issued.
1: Alarm (PS0200) "ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND" is issued.
No.5209#7 On the peck rigid tapping, if the depth of cut (Q) is smaller than the cutting 1
start distance (d):
0: Alarm is not issued.
1: Alarm (PS5560) "ILLEGAL DEPTH OF CUT" is issued.
No.5402#6 In case that Positioning has not been done after Coordinate system rotation, 1
if Circular interpolation with R is specified:
0: a center angle might change by over 180 degrees.
1: a center angle does not change by over 180 degrees.
No.6021#1 For rotation axes for which rollover function is enabled, the reading of block 1
end point position by system variables #5001 to #5020 or #100001 to
#100050 is:
0: Not available.
1: Available.
No.8019#1 After the move command of PMC axis control is interrupted by reset signal 1
ECLRg, If different acceleration/deceleration type command without waiting
for a deceleration stop generates:
0: Not alarm.
1: Alarm DS1451,"IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND".
No.8019#2 If the controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 are "0" or PMC 1
controlled-axis selection variable (#8700) is 0, the PMC axis control
command generates:
0: Not alarm.
1: Alarm DS1451 "IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND".
No.8106#2 By reset in the path other than the path 1, the custom macro variables 1
common to tool path set to common variables #100-#499 cleared by
power-off are:
0: Not cleared to <null>.
1: Cleared to <null>.
(The setting bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 is depended on.)
No.8655#3 When the crt_cncscrn function is executed from the main task of C 1
Language Executor, the main task is:
0: Not stopped at the end of the function (is stopped after processing
is performed for a very short time).
1: Stopped at the end of the function.
No.10345#1 When the forbidden area of the stored stroke check 2, 3 (Parameter 1
No.1322, 1323) is set or it is changed by G22 command, the setting value
for axes with diameter specification is:
0: Half of command value
1: Command value
- 2781 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.10597#0 On the Dual Check Safety Diagnosis screen, the following information is: 1
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
- Safety speed limit (unit: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min)
- Safety speed zero monitoring request signal.
- Safe feed limit/safe machine position selection signal
- Safe feed limit/safe machine position selection signal in case
of an alarm
- Programmable Safety I/O signal
No.11303#4 During MDI program execution, blocks that call an execution macro are: 1
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
No.11354#1 While data transmission is awaited using the DPRNT/BPRNT of the custom 1
macro or macro executor, screen switching is:
0: Not possible.
1: Possible.
No.11354#2 When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to non-alarm 1
history, alarm history will be:
0: Erased.
1: Erased, except the most recent 50 items of history data.
No.11354#3 When the storage capacity for history data is exceeded due to data other 1
than external operator message history, external operator message history
will be:
0: Erased.
1: Retained.
No.11374#0 If EOB code is included in comment block when program is read: 1
0: Alarms are not generated.
1: The alarm PS0518,"CODE OF CONTROL-IN DOES NOT EXIST"
is generated.
No.11400#3 Select the behavior of following system variable related to tool length offset 1
by reset operation. *Only for the T
#5081-#5100 in case of the parameters LVC(No.5006#3)=1, Series
LWT(No.5002#2)=0.
#5121-#5140 in case of the parameters LVC(No.5006#3)=1,
LGT(No.5002#4)=1.
0: Not clear the system variable.
1: Clear the system variable.
No.11500#1 Cutting feed-forward flag is 0
0: output immediately when it comes in-position state.
1: output after waiting for 1 interpolation period after becoming
in-position state.
No.11501#3 At a start of the automatic operation, the time from a falling edge of the 1
cycle start signal ST to a start of the automatic operation is:
0: conventional.
1: reduced.
No.11501#5 The timing of starting detection of a one-rotation signal in threading is: 1
0: conventional.
1: high-speed execution.
No.11501#6 Speed-up of G28, G30 and G53 is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.11502#3 If the cycle start of MEM/RMT mode is commanded without reset while 1
executing subprogram/macro call of the MDI mode:
0: The alarm is not generated.
1: The alarm PS0525,"subprogram/macro calling." is generated.
- 2782 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.11503#4 When the axis controlled with a servo motor enters in-position check: 1
0: The next block is begun at the next interpolation cycle that entered
in-position.
1: The next block is begun at the interpolation cycle when entering
in-position.
No.11504#5 Operating time reduction of command of preventing buffering is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.11507#3 Speed-up of processing related to RS232C is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.11538#6 In automatic operation, the speed-up between blocks is: 1
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
No.11565#1 In Flexible path axis assignment, tool geometry offset value and tool wear 1
offset value and tool offset value are: *Only for the T
0: not canceled and alarm PS0514 occurs when flexible path axis Series
assignment command is issued.
1: canceled only for the commanded axis when flexible path axis
command is issued. In this case, the axis does not move regardless of
the tool offset methods.
No.11850#0 If in PMC axis control, a rapid traverse rate is specified with the axis control 1
block data signal, with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 being set to 1, the
rapid traverse rate is:
0: Always treated as being in millimeters.
1: Dependent on the setting of bit 0 (INM) of parameter No.1001.
No.13205#5 In Tool management function, when following G codes and M6 are 1
commanded in the same block, axes move to the end position of the block:
- G53 Machine coordinate system setting
(except for high speed G53)
- G28 Automatic return to reference position
- G29 Movement from reference position
- G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
- G30.1 Floating reference position return
0: After FIN signal returned.
1: Before FIN signal returned.
No.13208#6 In case of tool management function, if T code is commanded when either 1
of following PMC window is executing, edge number change and tool search
by T code command are:
- PMC window for tool exchange (Function code 329)
- PMC window for tool moving (Function code 329)
- PMC window for shifting tool management data (Function code 367)
0: Not kept waiting.
1: Kept waiting until PMC window is finished.
No.13421#2 If G27/G28/G29/G30/G30.1/G53 is specified during flexible synchronization 1
control, alarm PS0010,"IMPROPER G-CODE" is:
0: Issued.
1: Is not issued. Commands to the master axis are possible.
- 2783 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.13421#4 For a synchronization group for which a PMC axis is a master axis, when 1
the controlled axis selection signal EAXn<G0136> for PMC axis control is
set to "1" after starting flexible synchronization control mode, and the master
axis is specified by PMC axis control, or for a synchronization group for
which spindle control with servo motor is a master axis, when SV speed
control mode of the master axis is turned on after starting flexible
synchronization control mode:
0: Alarm is not generated.
1: Alarm PS5381 "INVALID COMMAND IN FSC MODE" is
generated.
No.13450#4 When the cutting is executed without specifying a feedrate (F) after the 1
modal G code of group 05 was changed by G93(inverse time feed) /
G94(feed per minute) / G95(feed per revolution) command:
0: The feedrate (F) is inherited as a modal.
1: Alarm PS0011,"FEED ZERO (COMMAND)" is issued.
No.13805#1 When the setting of that follow-up is executed by follow-up signal (*FLWU) 1
in servo-off state is effective (the value of the parameter FUPx(No.1819#0)
is 0), the following limit is applied to the safety position error monitoring
function during servo off state and follow-up state including emergency stop
and servo alarm etc, or pole position detection .
0: The position deviation limit in moving state (The parameter
No.1838, 1841)
1: The position deviation limit in servo-off state (The parameter
No.1840)
No.13806#0 The brake signal(*BRKx) of Dual Check Safety in servo off state 1
0: is not to 0.
1: is to 0.
No.18050#7 If an axis move command is executed with PMC axis control during 1
automatic operation, and the NC block under execution is stopped by a feed
hold when the axis moving due to PMC axis control is completed, the
amount of movement due to PMC axis control in that block is:
0: Not reflected in the NC coordinate system.
1: Reflected in the NC coordinate system.
No.24308#4 While the execution macro is being executed, making the data for displaying 1
program being executed is:
0: processing
1: not processing
- 2784 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX
D.3 FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER
(INITIALIZED TYPE)
The list of FANUC recommendation setting parameter (initialized type) is shown below.
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.101#0 The number of stop bits 1
0: 1
1: 2
No.101#7 Feed before and after the data output 1
0: Output
1: Not output
No.103 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) 10
No.1602#3 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in a mode of 1
look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation such as the AI contour
control mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/
deceleration is used.
(The setting of bit 6 (LS2) of parameter No. 1602 is followed.)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
(The bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation option is required.)
No.1602#6 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in a mode of 1
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation such as the AI contour control
mode:
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
No.1604#0 When automatic operation is started, the state equivalent to the specification of 1
G5.1Q1 for AI contour control is: *Only for the M
0: Not set Series
1: Set
No.1610#0 Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed 1
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
No.1610#1 Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed 1
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/
deceleration is applied.
(depending on the setting in bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610)
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied.
No.1610#4 Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed 1
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as for cutting feedrate is applied.
(Depending on the settings of bits 1 (CTBx) and 0 (CTLx) of parameter
No. 1610)
No.1660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acceleration/deceleration before 2000.0
interpolation for each axis *Only for the M
Series
No.1800#3 Feed-forward control in rapid traverse is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.2005#1 Feed-forward function is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 2785 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.101#0 The number of stop bits 1
0: 1
1: 2
No.101#7 Feed before and after the data output 1
0: Output
1: Not output
No.103 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) 10
No.2013#0 HRV3 current control is: 1
0: Not used.
1: Used.
No.2069 Velocity feed-forward coefficient for rapid traverse 100
No.2092 Advanced preview feed-forward coefficient for rapid traverse 9800
No.2144 Position advanced preview feed-forward coefficient for cutting 9800
No.2145 Velocity feed-forward coefficient for cutting 100
No.2214#4 The cutting/rapid feed-forward switching function is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.2283#0 The high-speed HRV current control mode (servo HRV3 control) is: 1
0: Set only when both G5.4Q1 and G01 are specified.
1: Set when G01 is specified (G5.4Q1 is not monitored).
No.2334 Current loop gain magnification in high-speed HRV current control mode 150
No.3205#5 When the background editing is started without inputting the program name in 1
the key:
0: Program to be edited are initialized (to the state where no selection is
made).
1: the editing of the previously edited programs are continued.
(Continued editing is possible only when last edited time is not changed
(to allow continued editing).)
No.4344 Advanced feed-forward coefficient 9800
No.4542#4 The cutting feed/rapid traverse feed-forward function is: 1
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
No.4627 Advanced preview feed-forward coefficient for cutting feed 9800
No.5203#5 As acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping cutting feed: 1
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
No.5503#0 In the index table indexing function, when the parameter 1
ABS(No.5500#2) is set to 1, internal coordinate system is: *Only for the M
0: Not rounded by one rotation. Series
1: Rounded by one rotation.
No.7003#0 When the manual absolute is on and manual operation is executed in reset state 1
or automatic operation stop state, the movement amount of the manual
operation is:
0: Reflected to the movement amount of the first absolute command.
1: Reflected to the coordinate system at the cycle start.
No.8306#0 In synchronization establishment: 1
0: A machine coordinate difference between the master axis and slave
axis is output at a time as command pulses (axis movements are
performed without acceleration/deceleration).
1: Axis movements are executed with the feedrate of manual rapid
traverse and the acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in rapid
traverse.
- 2786 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDATION
SETTING PARAMETER
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.101#0 The number of stop bits 1
0: 1
1: 2
No.101#7 Feed before and after the data output 1
0: Output
1: Not output
No.103 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) 10
No.9102#5 In TURN MATE i, sequential execution is: 1
0: Disabled. *Only for the T
1: Enabled. Series
No.9103#6 In TURN MATE i, The memory card input/output function is: 1
0: Disabled. *Only for the T
1: Enabled. Series
No.9104#1#0 In TURN MATE i, the maximum allowable number of contour blocks: #1 = 1
#1 = 0, #0 = 0: 10 #0 = 0
#1 = 0, #0 = 1: 15 *Only for the T
#1 = 1, #0 = 0: 30 Series
No.9104#7 In TURN MATE i, on the free figure input data screen, monotonic increasing and 1
monotonic decreasing of input figures is: *Only for the T
0: Limited. Series
1: Not limited.
No.9202#2 In TURN MATE i, on the cycle input data screen, approach positions X/Z are: 1
0: Not displayed. *Only for the T
1: Displayed. Series
No.9202#3 In TURN MATE i, in the process list display field, the tool change position is: 1
0: Not displayed. *Only for the T
1: Displayed. Series
No.11304#0 When the path select signal is changed, the screen of the multi path 1
simultaneous display group:
0: Is not switched.
1: Is switched to the display group including the selected path.
No.11308#1 When the file of specified name already exists on memory card: 1
0: It is not overwritten. Alarm SR1973, “FILE ALREADY EXIST” is
generated.
1: It is overwritten.
No.11364#3 If a program or a folder exists in the target folder when the deletion operation is 1
done specifying the folder:
0: The folder is not deleted.
1: The folder and programs/folders in the target folder are deleted.
No.11391#7 In direct input of offset value measured B for 2 spindle lathe, when the setting 1
that a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set in the workpiece *Only for the T
coordinate system memory is an automatic selection is made (parameter Series
2AT(No.5051#1), and workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select
signal WOQSM <Gn039.6> is 1, the cursor movement by the MDI operation is:
0: Not prohibited.
1: Prohibited.
No.11602#3 When the rapid traverse is linear interpolation type and time constant 1
acceleration/deceleration type, the rapid overlap is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
- 2787 -
D. FANUC RECOMMENDED
SETTING PARAMETER
APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Parameter No. Meaning of parameters Recommended
value
No.101#0 The number of stop bits 1
0: 1
1: 2
No.101#7 Feed before and after the data output 1
0: Output
1: Not output
No.103 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) 10
No.11651#1 When GOTO statement using stored sequence numbers is enabled and 1
memory operation of a program on the Data Server/the Memory card is
executed, sequence numbers in the program are:
0: Stored.
1: Not stored.
No.11933#0 Set a communication method for the I/O Link channel 1: 1
0: The I/O Link is used.
1: The I/O Link i is used.
No.11933#1 Set a communication method for the I/O Link channel 2: 1
0: The I/O Link is used.
1: The I/O Link i is used.
No.14000#1 If an inch-metric switch command is executed at a position other than 0 of the 1
machine coordinate,
0: Alarm is not issued.
1: Alarm PS5362,"CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS" is issued.
No.19503#0 When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration in AI contour control, 1
smooth feedrate control is: *Only for the M
0: Not used. Series
1: Used.
No.19517#0 When smooth speed control is effective, by block length of the linear 1
interpolation, smooth speed control and speed control with change of *Only for the M
acceleration on each axis; Series
0: Are not invalidated.
1: Are invalidated.
No.19517#1 By block length of the linear interpolation, speed control with acceleration on 1
each axis and speed control with change of acceleration on each axis: *Only for the M
0: Are not invalidated. Series
1: Are invalidated.
No.24306#2 On the servo tuning screen, path is changed to other path and returned previous 1
path, axis page and cursor position is:
0: Not restored.
1: Restored.
No.24311#7 When 8.4-inch display unit or virtual MDI key function is used, the current 1
position on program screen of TEACH IN mode is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
- 2788 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
E LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
○ : Standard ● : Standard option
☆ : Option * : Function included in another option
- : Not Available
Note) Some combinations of these options are restricted.
M represents a machining center system (M series).
T represents a lathe system (T series).
For (*1) to (*11) in the table, see Not below the table.
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Axis control
Max. total number of control axes Total 11 axes / (*9) ☆ ☆
(feed axes + spindle axes) / 2 path Up to 9 axes each path
system Total 10 axes / ○ ○
Up to 7 axes each path
Max. feed axes (*8) Total 9 axes / ☆ ☆
Up to 7 axes each path
Total 8 axes / ○ ○
Up to 5 axes each path
Max. spindle axes Total 4 axes / ☆ ☆
Up to 3 axes each path
Total 2 axes / ○ ○
Up to 2 axes each path
Max. total number of control axes 8 axes ☆ ☆
(feed axes + spindle axes) / 1 path 7 axes ○ -
system 6 axes - ○
Max. feed axes (*8) 7 axes ☆ ☆
5 axes ○ -
4 axes - ○
Max. spindle axes 3 axes - ☆
2 axes ○ ○
Controlled path 2 path ☆ ☆
1 path ○ ○
Machine groups Max. 3 groups ☆ ☆
1 group ○ ○
Max. simultaneously controlled axes Max. 4 axes ○ ○
(in each path)
Axis control by PMC Not available on Cs axes ○ ○
Cs contouring control ○ ○
Loader control function Loader 1 path (*10) ☆ ☆
This cannot be ordered with Peripheral axis control.
Addition of loader control path Loader 2 paths (*10) ☆ ☆
Loader control function is required.
Axis name Basic three axes are X, Y and Z, additional axes are ○ -
optional from U, V, W, A, B and C.
In case of G code system A, basic 2 axes are X and Z, - ○
additional axes are optional from Y, A, B and C.
In case of G code system B/C, basic 2 axes are X and Z, - ○
additional axes are optional from Y, U, V, W, A, B and C.
Axis name expansion Max 3 characters ○ ○
Arbitrary axis name setting Included in Custom macro function ○ ○
- 2789 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Spindle name expansion Max. 3 characters. Included in Multi-spindle function. ○ ○
Peripheral axis control This cannot be ordered with Loader control function. ☆ ☆
Synchronous/Composite control ☆ ☆
Superimposed control Changing function of velocity and time constant is not ☆ ☆
available. (*3)
Superimposed Control A Feedrate and acc/dec time of master and slave axis in ☆ ☆
superimposed control can be set individually. (*3)
Synchronous/Composite/Superimpose (*3) ☆ ☆
d control by program command
Flexible path axis assignment (*3) ☆ ☆
Axis synchronous control Max. 4 pairs ○ ○
Angular axis control Available on arbitrary axes. ☆ ☆
Tandem control ○ ○
Tandem disturbance elimination ☆ ☆
control
Torque control ○ ○
Pole position detection function ☆ ☆
Control axis detach ○ ○
High precision oscillation function ☆ ☆
Increment system IS-A, IS-B ○ ○
Increment system C 0.0001mm, ○ ○
0.0001deg,
0.00001inch
Flexible feed gear Optional DMR ○ ○
Dual position feedback ☆ ☆
HRV2 control ○ ○
HRV3 control ○ ○
Inch/metric conversion ○ ○
Interlock All axes/each axis/each direction/block start/cutting block ○ ○
start
Machine lock All axes/each axis ○ ○
Emergency stop ○ ○
Overtravel ○ ○
Stored stroke check 1 ○ ○
Stored stroke check 1 area expansion ☆ ☆
Stroke limit external setting ○ ○
Stored stroke check 2,3 ○ ○
Stroke limit check before move ○ ○
Stroke limit area changing function ☆ ☆
Stored stroke limit range switching ☆ ☆
function by signal
Chuck and tail stock barrier - ○
Mirror image Each axis ○ ○
Follow-up ○ ○
Servo off/Mechanical handle ○ ○
Chamfering on/off - ○
Interference check for each path Only for multi path control (*3) - ☆
Unexpected disturbance torque ○ ○
detection function
I/O Link β unexpected disturbance ☆ ☆
torque detection
Position switch ○ ○
High speed position switch ☆ ☆
- 2790 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Linear scale I/F with absolute address ☆ ☆
reference mark
Linear scale I/F expansion with ☆ ☆
absolute address reference mark
Temporary absolute coordinate setting ☆ ☆
Dual check safety ☆ ☆
Safety spindle speed limit override Dual check safety is required. ☆ ☆
Test mode function for Acceptance Dual check safety is required. ☆ ☆
Test
Axis immediate stop function AI contour control I or II is required. ☆ ☆
Operation
Automatic operation (memory) ○ ○
MDI operation ○ ○
DNC operation RS232C interface is required. ○ ○
DNC operation with memory card (*2) CF card and PCMCIA Card Attachment is required. ○ ○
Schedule function (*2) CF card and PCMCIA Card Attachment is required (When ○ ○
a memory card is used).
RS232C interface is required (when a Floppy Cassette is
used).
Program number search ○ ○
Sequence number search ○ ○
Sequence number comparison and ○ ○
stop
Program restart ○ ○
Quick program restart ☆ ☆
Tool retract and recover ☆ ☆
Manual intervention and return ○ ○
Wrong operation prevention ○ ○
Retraction for rigid tapping ○ ☆
Retraction for 3-dimensional rigid Retraction for rigid tapping is required. ☆ ☆
tapping
Buffer register ○ ○
Dry run ○ ○
Single block ○ ○
Jog feed ○ ○
Manual reference position return ○ ○
Manual 2nd/3rd/4th reference position 3rd/4th reference position return function is required. ☆ ☆
return
Reference position setting without ○ ○
DOG
Reference position setting with ○ ○
mechanical stopper
Reference point setting with ☆ ☆
mechanical stopper by Grid Method
Reference position return speed set ○ ○
Reference position shift ○ ○
Manual handle feed Max. 3 units ○ ○
Manual handle feed 4/5-units Max. 5 units ☆ ☆
Manual handle feed rate ×1, ×10, ×m , ×n ○ ○
m:0～2000, ｎ:0～2000
3-dimensional manual feed ☆ -
Manual handle interruption ○ ○
- 2791 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Manual interruption of 3-dimensional 3-dimensional coordinate conversion is required ☆ ☆
coordinate system conversion
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series ☆ ☆
with I/O Link Manual handle interface
Incremental feed ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000, ×10000 ○ ○
Jog and handle simultaneous mode ○ ○
Manual numerical command ☆ ☆
Reference position signal output ☆ ☆
Retrace ☆ -
Manual handle retrace ☆ ☆
Manual handle retrace for multi path (*3) ☆ ☆
Direction change movement in Manual handle retrace or manual handle retrace for multi ☆ ☆
auxiliary function output block function path is required.
Manual liner/circular interpolation Only for 1path ☆ ☆
Handle-Synchronous Feed Function Included in Manual liner/circular interpolation * *
Active block cancel ☆ ☆
High speed program check ☆ ☆
Dwell/Auxiliary function time override ☆ ☆
function
Interpolation functions
Nano interpolation ○ ○
Positioning G00 (Linear interpolation type positioning is possible) ○ ○
Single direction positioning G60 ○ -
Exact stop mode G61 ○ ○
Tapping mode G63 ○ ○
Cutting mode G64 ○ ○
Exact stop G09 ○ ○
Linear interpolation ○ ○
Circular interpolation ○ ○
Dwell Dwell in seconds and dwell in revolution ○ ○
Polar coordinate interpolation - ○
Cylindrical interpolation ○ ○
Cylindrical interpolation by plane Cylindrical interpolation is required. ☆ ☆
distance command
Helical interpolation Circular interpolation plus max. 2 axes linear interpolation ○ ☆
Nano smoothing AI contour control II is required. ☆ -
Thread cutting, synchronous cutting ○ ○
Multi threading - ○
Thread cutting retract - ○
Continuous threading - ○
Variable lead thread cutting - ○
Circular thread cutting - ☆
Polygon turning - ○
Polygon machining with two spindles - ○
Skip G31 ○ ○
Multi-step skip ☆ ☆
High-speed skip Input signal is 4 point ○ ○
Torque limit skip ○ ○
Reference position return G28 ○ ○
Reference position return check G27 ○ ○
2nd reference position return ○ ○
3rd/4th reference position return ○ ○
- 2792 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Normal direction control ○ -
Balanced cutting Only for multi path control (*3) - ☆
Index table indexing ○ -
Continuous high-speed skip ☆ ☆
General purpose retract ○ ○
Feed function
Rapid traverse rate (Increment system Max. 999.999m/min (1μm) ○ ○
B)
Rapid traverse rate (Increment system Max. 99.9999m/min (0.1μm) ○ ○
C)
Rapid traverse override F0, 25, 50, 100% or 0-100% (1% Step) ○ ○
Feed per minute ○ ○
Feed per revolution ○ ○
Without position coder feed per ○ ○
revolution
Without position coder constant ○ ○
surface speed control
Tangential speed constant control ○ ○
Cutting feedrate clamp ○ ○
Automatic acceleration/deceleration Rapid traverse: linear ○ ○
Cutting feed: exponential, linear
Rapid traverse bell-shaped ○ ○
acceleration / deceleration
Optimum torque acceleration / ☆ ☆
deceleration
Positioning by optimum acceleration ☆ ☆
Linear acceleration/deceleration after ○ ○
cutting feed interpolation
Bell-type acceleration/ deceleration ○ ○
after cutting feed interpolation
Linear acceleration/deceleration Included in AI preview control, AI contour control I or II ○ *
before cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate override 0-254% ○ ○
2nd feedrate override 0-254% ☆ ☆
One-digit F code feed ○ -
Inverse time feed ○ -
Jog override 0-655.34% ○ ○
Override cancel ○ ○
Manual per revolution feed - ○
External deceleration ○ ○
Automatic corner deceleration Included in AI preview control, AI contour control I or II ○ *
Feedrate control with acceleration in Included in AI contour control I or II on T system ○ *
circular interpolation
AI advanced preview control ○ -
AI contour control I ☆ ☆
AI contour control II ☆ ☆
Bell-type acceleration/deceleration Included in AI preview control, AI contour control I or II ○ *
before look ahead interpolation
Jerk control AI contour control II is required. ☆ -
Tolerance Control AI contour control II is required. ☆ -
Rigid tapping bell-shaped ○ ○
acceleration/deceleration
- 2793 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Optimum acceleration/deceleration for ☆ ☆
rigid tapping
Rapid traverse block overlap ○ ○
Programmable rapid traverse overlap ☆ ☆
Error detection - ○
Program input
Program code EIA/ISO ○ ○
Label skip ○ ○
Parity check Horizontal and vertical parity ○ ○
Control in/out ○ ○
Optional block skip 9 ○ ○
Max. programmable dimension ±9 digit ○ ○
Program file name 32 characters ○ ○
Sequence number N8 digit ○ ○
Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block ○ ○
Decimal point programming/ pocket ○ ○
calculator type decimal point
programming
Input unit 10 time multiply ○ ○
Diameter/radius programming ○ ○
Plane selection G17, G18, G19 ○ ○
Rotary axis designation ○ ○
Rotary axis roll-over ○ ○
Polar coordinate command ○ -
Coordinate system setting ○ ○
Automatic coordinate system setting ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system G52-G59 ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system preset ○ ○
Addition of workpiece coordinate 48 pairs ○ -
system 300 pairs ☆ -
Direct input of workpiece origin offset ○ ○
value measured
Positioning in machine coordinate ☆ ☆
system with feedrate
Manual absolute on and off ○ ○
Direct drawing dimension - ○
programming
G code system A/B/C - ○
Chamfering/corner R - ○
Optional chamfering/corner R ○ -
Programmable data input G10 ○ ○
Programmable parameter input ○ ○
Sub program call 10 folds nested ○ ○
Custom macro ○ ○
Addition of custom macro common #100 - #199, #500 - #999 ○ ○
variables
Addition of custom macro common #100 - #199, #500 - #999, ☆ ☆
variables 1000 #98000 - #98499
Custom macro common variables Only for multi path control ○ ○
between each path
Interruption type custom macro Only for multi path control (*3) ○ ○
Canned cycles - ○
Multiple repetitive cycle - ○
- 2794 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Multiple repetitive cycle II Pocket profile - ○
Canned cycles for drilling ○ ○
Circular interpolation by R 9 digit ○ ○
programming
Mirror image for double turret - ○
Automatic corner override ○ -
Scaling ○ -
Coordinate system rotation ○ ○
3-dimensional coordinate system ☆ ☆
conversion
Tilted working plane indexing Guidance screens is not shown on 8.4"LCD. ☆ -
Programmable mirror image ○ ○
Figure copying ☆ -
G code preventing buffering ○ ○
Program format for FANUC Series ○ ○
10/11
Macro executor ☆ ☆
Macro executor + C language ☆ ☆
executor
C language executor additional SRAM 192KB Non-volatile memory addition. ☆ ☆
256KB
C language executor additional SRAM 448KB Non-volatile memory addition. ☆ ☆
512KB
Custom software 512KB ☆ ☆
(Total amount of each path) 2MB ☆ ☆
4MB ☆ ☆
6MB ☆ ☆
8MB ☆ ☆
12MB ☆ ☆
16MB ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE executor Custom software size 4M bytes or larger is required. ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE function This function includes custom software size 6M bytes. ☆ ☆
FANUC PICTURE function for This function includes custom software size 6M bytes. ☆ ☆
non-touch panel display
Coordinate system shift - ○
Direct input of coordinate system shift - ○
Embedded macro ☆ ☆
Small-hole peck drilling cycle ○ -
Real time custom macro ☆ ☆
Pattern data input ○ ○
M code protect function ☆ ☆
Conversational programming with ○ ○
graphic function
Guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i multi-path function ☆ ☆
MANUAL GUIDE i Tilted Working ☆ -
Plane indexing function
MANUAL GUIDE 0i ☆ ☆
TURN MATE i (*4) - ☆
MDI key operation function - ☆
NC program conversion function - ☆
Expansion of machining cycle - ☆
- 2795 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Auxiliary/Spindle speed function
Auxiliary function M8 digit ○ ○
2nd auxiliary function B8 digit ○ ○
Auxiliary function lock ○ ○
High-speed M/S/T/B interface ○ ○
Waiting function Only for multi path control (*3) ○ ○
Waiting M codes of high-speed type Only for multi path control (*3) ○ ○
Multiple command of auxiliary function 5 commands ○ ○
Auxiliary function output in moving axis ☆ ☆
Waiting function by specifying start Only for multi path control (*3) ☆ ☆
point
Spindle speed function S5 digit , binary output ○ ○
Spindle serial output S5 digit , serial output ○ ○
Spindle analog output S5 digit , analog output, up to 1 spindle ○ ○
(*6)
Constant surface speed control ○ ○
Spindle override 0 - 254% ○ ○
Actual spindle speed output - ○
Spindle orientation All spindles ○ ○
Spindle output switching function All spindles ○ ○
Spindle synchronous control Analog spindle is not available. ○ ○
Spindle command synchronous control ☆ -
- ☆
Multi spindle control ☆ ○
Spindle positioning - ○
Rigid tapping ○ ○
FSSB High speed rigid tapping Analog spindle is not available. ○ ○
Rigid tapping by manual handle ☆ ☆
Arbitrary position reference setting for ☆ ☆
CS axis
M code group check ☆ ☆
Spindle speed fluctuation detection - ○
Spindle control with servo motor ☆ ☆
Servo/spindle synchronous control ☆ ☆
Spindle tandem control Analog spindle is not available. ☆ ☆
Arbitrary speed threading Analog spindle is not available. ☆ ☆
Tool function/Tool compensation
Tool function T7+1/T6+2/T5+3(Tool selection + Tool offset number) - ○
T8 digit ○ -
Tool offset pairs 128-pairs - ○
(Note) 200-pairs - ☆
Specify total of tool offset pairs of each 400-pairs ○ -
path.
Tool offset memory C Distinction between geometry and wear, or between cutter ○ -
and tool length compensation.
Common offset memory between each Only for multi path control (*3) ○ ○
path
Tool length offset ○ -
Tool offset ○ ○
Y-axis offset - ○
4th/5th axis offset - ☆
- 2796 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Tool radius/Tool nose radius ○ ○
compensation
Cutting point interpolation for ☆ ☆
cylindrical interpolation
Tool geometry/wear compensation - ○
2nd Geometry Tool Offset - ☆
Tool management function: 64 pairs 64 tools (*7) ☆ ☆
Tool management function: 240 pairs 240 tools (*7) ☆ ☆
Tool management function: 1000 pairs 1000 tools (*7) ☆ ☆
Tool management function: ☆ ☆
Customized data expansion (5～20)
Tool management function: ☆ ☆
Customized data expansion (5～40)
Tool management expansion ☆ ☆
Tool management function for Included in Tool management expansion B. * *
oversize tools
Tool management function for multi- ☆ ☆
edge tools
Tool management tool attachment / ☆ ☆
detachment function
Tool management expansion B ☆ ☆
Tool offset value counter input - ○
Tool length measurement ○ -
Automatic tool length measurement ○ -
Automatic tool offset - ○
Direct input of tool offset value - ○
measured
Direct input of tool offset value - ○
measured B
Direct input of offset value measured - ☆
B for 2 spindle lathe
Tool life management ○ ○
Extended tool life management ○ ○
Automatic alteration of tool position - ☆
compensation
Tool geometry size data 100-pairs ☆ ☆
300-pairs ☆ ☆
Tool geometry size data - Additional ☆ ☆
tool type
Accuracy compensation function
Backlash compensation ○ ○
Backlash compensation for each rapid ○ ○
traverse and cutting feed
Smooth backlash compensation ○ ○
Smart backlash compensation ○ ○
Stored pitch error compensation ☆ ☆
Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Stored pitch error compensation is required * *
Value Input
Interpolation type pitch error Stored pitch error compensation is required ☆ ☆
compensation
Bi-directional pitch error compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required ☆ ☆
Extended bi-directional pitch error Stored pitch error compensation and Bi-directional pitch ☆ ☆
compensation error compensation are required.
- 2797 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Inclination compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required ☆ ☆
Simple straightness compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required. ☆ ☆
1 pair
Straightness compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required. ☆ ☆
4 pairs
Interpolation type straightness 128points. ☆ ☆
compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required.
Interpolated Straightness Stored pitch error compensation and Interpolation type ☆ ☆
Compensation 3072 points straightness compensation are required
Electronic gear box
Electronic gear box ☆ -
Skip function for EGB axis Electronic gear box is required. ☆ -
Electronic gear box automatic phase Electronic gear box is required. ☆ -
synchronization
Flexible synchronization control ☆ ☆
Automatic phase synchronization for Flexible synchronization control is required. ☆ ☆
Flexible synchronization control
Inter-Path Flexible synchronization Flexible synchronization control is required. ☆ ☆
control (*3)
Skip function for Flexible Flexible synchronization control is required. ☆ ☆
synchronization control
Hob command by Flexible Flexible synchronization control is required. ☆ ☆
synchronization control
U-Axis Control Included in Electronic gear box. * -
Grinding function
Grinding function A Multi-step skip, Canned cycles for grinding, ☆ -
Continuous dressing, Infeed control
Multi-step skip, Canned cycles for grinding - ☆
Grinding function B Angular axis control is available in addition to the ☆ ☆
functions included in Grinding function A.
Editing operation
Part program storage size (*2) 512Kbyte (Only for 1 path control) (*4) ○ ○
(Note) 1Mbyte (Only for 2 path control) (*3) ○ ○
Specify total of part program storage 2Mbyte ☆ ☆
size of each path.
Number of registerable programs 400 (Only for 1 path control) ○ ○
800 (Only for 2 path control) (*3) ○ ○
Number of registerable programs Max. 1000 programs ☆ ☆
expansion 1
Part program editing ○ ○
Extended part program editing ○ ○
Program protect ○ ○
Key and program encryption ☆ ☆
Password function ○ ○
Playback ○ ○
Machining time stamp ☆ ☆
Background editing ○ ○
Multi part program editing Not available on 8.4" display unit ○ ○
Memory card program edit & operation Max 63 programs. ○ ○
PC tool for memory card program operation/editing
(A08B-9010-J700#ZZ11) is required to convert and store
files to memory card.
- 2798 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Memory card program entry count Max. 1000 programs ☆ ☆
extension
Data server editing/operation Fast data server is required. * *
Multi-path editing function (*3) ☆ ☆
High speed program management ○ ○
Setting and display
Status display ○ ○
Clock function ○ ○
Current position display ○ ○
Program comment display Program name 31 characters ○ ○
Parameter setting and display ○ ○
Parameter check sum function ○ ○
Alarm display ○ ○
Alarm history display ○ ○
Operator message history display ○ ○
Operation history display ○ ○
Remote diagnostic Included in Machine remote diagnosis package * *
Run hour and parts count display ○ ○
Actual cutting feedrate display ○ ○
Display of spindle speed and T code at ○ ○
all screens
Directory display of floppy cassette ○ ○
Optional path name display Only for multi path control (*3) ○ ○
Operating monitor screen ○ ○
Servo setting screen ○ ○
Spindle setting screen ○ ○
Servo waveform display ○ ○
Maintenance information screen ○ ○
Trouble diagnosis ○ ○
Machine alarm diagnosis Guidance table for Machine alarm diagnosis that is ☆ ☆
included in CNC Application Development Kit
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary for making
guidance messages.
Software operator's panel ○ ○
Software operator's panel general ○ ○
purpose switch
Extended software operator's panel ○ ○
general purpose switch
Machine operation menu Machine operation menu making tool that is included in ☆ ☆
CNC Application Development Kit
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary for making menu
data of machine operation menu.
FANUC Auto HMI-NC Either FANUC PICTURE function, FANUC PICTURE ☆ ☆
function for non-touch panel display or FANUC PICTURE
Executor is necessary.
FANUC Auto HMI-NC screen FANUC Auto HMI-NC is necessary. ☆ ☆
enhancement 1
- 2799 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
Multi-language display English ○ ○
Japanese (Chinese character) ○ ○
German ○ ○
French ○ ○
Spanish ○ ○
Italian ○ ○
Chinese (Traditional Chinese) ○ ○
Chinese (Simplified Chinese) ○ ○
Korean ○ ○
Portuguese ○ ○
Dutch ○ ○
Danish ○ ○
Swedish ○ ○
Hungarian ○ ○
Czech ○ ○
Polish ○ ○
Russian ○ ○
Turkish ○ ○
Romanian ○ ○
Bulgarian ○ ○
Slovak ○ ○
Finnish ○ ○
Hindi ○ ○
Dynamic display language switching ○ ○
Data protection key 4 types ○ ○
Protection of data at eight levels ☆ ☆
Warning function against modification ☆ ☆
of setting
Erase CRT screen display (*1) Manual or Automatic ○ ○
Parameter setting support screen ○ ○
Machining condition selecting function AI contour control I or II is required. ☆ ☆
Machining quality level adjustment AI contour control II, Nano smoothing and Machining ☆ -
function condition selecting function are required.
Help function ○ ○
Self-diagnosis function ○ ○
Periodic maintenance screen ○ ○
Display of hardware and software ○ ○
configuration
Servo information screen ○ ○
Spindle information screen ○ ○
Graphic display ○ ○
Dynamic graphic display ☆ ☆
Touch panel control ☆ ☆
External touch panel interface ☆ ☆
Virtual MDI key ☆ ☆
CNC screen display CNC Application Development Kit ○ ○
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary.
Dual screen of CNC screen display ☆ ☆
function
Basic operation package 2 function CNC Application Development Kit ☆ ☆
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary.
Machining status monitor package CNC Application Development Kit ☆ ☆
function (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary.
- 2800 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
CNC screen Web server function ☆ ☆
Power consumption monitoring ○ ○
Energy Saving Level Selecting ☆ ☆
Function
Machine State Monitoring Function ☆ ☆
Main menu screen ○ ○
Main menu screen customizing Main menu screen customization tool that is included in ☆ ☆
function CNC Application Development Kit
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is necessary.
Data input/output
RS232C interface RS232C (Ch.1) interface ○ ○
RS232C (Ch.2) interface ○ ○
Fast data server DNC operation is available for 1st path control only/Option ☆ ☆
board is required
Data server buffer mode included in Fast data server * *
Data server explorer connection Fast data server is required ☆ ☆
External tool offset ○ ○
External machine zero point shift ○ ○
External message ○ ○
External data input Including External message, External tool offset, and ○ ○
External machine zero point shift.
External key input ○ ○
External workpiece number search 9999 ○ ○
External program number search 1 - 9999 ○ ○
Memory card input/output ○ ○
USB memory input/output LCD mounted type Control unit with USB interface ○ ○
is required.
Screen hard copy ○ ○
Power Mate CNC manager ○ ○
External I/O device control ○ ○
One touch macro call ☆ ☆
Automatic data backup ○ ○
Interface function
Fast Ethernet Option board is required. ☆ ☆
PROFIBUS master function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
PROFIBUS slave function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
DeviceNet master function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
DeviceNet slave function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
FL-net function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
Safety function by FL-net FL-net function and Dual check safety are required. ☆ ☆
FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function Fast Ethernet and FL-net function are required. * *
Enhanced Embedded Ethernet ○ ○
function
CC-Link Remote Device function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
Robot connection function ☆ ☆
EtherNet/IP Scanner function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
EtherNet/IP Adapter function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
EtherNet/IP Adapter Safety function EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Dual check safety are ☆ ☆
required.
Modbus/TCP Server function ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Controller function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
PROFINET IO Device function Option board is required. ☆ ☆
- 2801 -
E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B-64603EN-1/01
Series 0i-F
Item Specifications
M T
CNC Status Notification function ☆ ☆
PMC
PMC function 24000 steps ○ ○
32000 steps ☆ ☆
64000 steps ☆ ☆
100000 steps ☆ ☆
Ladder Dividing Management Function ○ ○
I/O Link i DI/DO points DI/DO: 2048/2048 points ○ ○
1st level execution cycle of ladder 4ms ○ ○
Multi-path PMC function 3 paths ☆ ☆
PMC symbol, comment and message 512Kbyte ☆ ☆
area expansion
1Mbyte ☆ ☆
PMC multi-language message display ○ ○
function
Multi-language display of signal ○ ○
comment
Step sequence Only 1st PMC path ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function ☆ ☆
Nonvolatile PMC data table area 40Kbyte ☆ ☆
expansion (40KB)
Extended PMC ladder instruction ○ ○
function
PMC Function block function ○ ○
NOTE
*1 : The control unit is incorporated with display unit.
LCD is manufactured by using high precision technology, however it has points
which are always bright or dark.
This phenomenon is caused by LCD's structure, and not defects.
*2 : The part program storage size is a value of "Maximum program size when one
program is registered".
The total value of the program size that can be registered decreases when two
or more programs are registered.
(The actual registrable value might changes according to the registered number
of programs and the program sizes.)
*3 : Only for 2 path control
*4 : Only for 1 path control
*5 : Dual check safety is not available.
*6 : In case of using the serial spindle together, only spindle speed command
control and spindle speed command control by PMC can be used, because
position coder for analog spindle can not be used. Series 0i Mate-D can not use
an analog spindle together with a serial spindle.
*7 : This function includes "Tool management tool attachment/detachment function".
*8 : In case of Servo HRV3 control, the number of controllable position detectors is
up to 3, when the number of connected servo motors are up to 5, and the
number of controllable detectors is up to 6, when the connected servo motors
are from 6 to 10.
In case of Servo HRV2 control, the number of controllable position detectors is
up to 8.
- 2802 -
B-64603EN-1/01 APPENDIX E. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
*9 : The number of connectable servo motors is up to 9 when Loader control
function is not available.
*10 : The number of connectable servo motors is up to 10 in servo HRV3.
The number of connectable servo motors is up to 12 in servo HRV2.
*11 : Intel, Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
MIcrosoft, Windows, and VIsual Studio are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Each company's name and product's name is the trademark or registered
trademark.
- 2803 -
B-64603EN-1/01 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
INDEX
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M
<Number> SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH SERIES) .................................................................2255
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ......................677 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................1318
3-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION 1998 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.............................1331
3-DIMENSIONAL MANUAL FEED (M SERIES) ....596 Auxiliary Function Output Block Reverse Movement
3-dimensional Rigid Tapping.....................................1529 for Manual Handle Retrace .....................................796
8-Level Data Protection Function ..............................2112 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT IN MOVING
AXIS ......................................................................1345
<A> Auxiliary Function Output in Program Restart Function
About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, ..................................................................................819
Straightness Compensation, and Inclinaiton AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY
Compensation (for Reference Purposes) ....................71 FUNCTION............................................................1318
Absolute multiple command ......................................2026 Axis Assignment Reset ................................................384
Absolute Position Detection...........................................88 AXIS CONTROL ............................................................1
Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ............1524 AXIS IMMEDIATE STOP FUNCTION .....................354
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL ..1104 Axis Name Display of Pitch Error Compensation .........72
ACTIVE BLOCK CANCEL FUNCTION...................872 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ..........................171
Actual Speed Display Axis Selection Signals ............2159 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..186
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) 1422
Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54)153 <B>
Additional alarm and operator message .....................2581 Backlash Compensation .................................................39
AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Balance adjustment ......................................................180
Control I / AI Contour Control II ...........................1072 BALANCE CUTTING (T SERIES) ..........................1207
Alarm and Message............................. 214,895,1714,2213 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting
ALARM SIGNALS......................................................488 Feed Interpolation ..................................................1118
ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ....................................229 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......................61
Approach for Each Arbitrary Axis in Program Restart 822
Arbitrary Gear Ratio for Master Axis in Electronic Gear <C>
Box Automatic Phase Synchronization ...................268 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE
Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function ..........1480 REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES).....1954
Arbitrary Speed Threading...........................................921 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.........................1937
Arbitrary speed threading.............................................921 Canned Cycle for Drilling..........................................1937
Arbitrary Spindle Position Phase Synchronization CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING
Function..................................................................1617 MACHINE)............................................................1971
Automatic acceleration/deceleration ..........................1104 Caution................................................................ 215,2626
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ........................1104 Cautions on Multi-path Control .................................1176
Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING.........2068
Function) ................................................................1780 Change of password ...................................................2205
Automatic coordinate system setting ...........................154 Change Tolerance in Smart Tolerance Control Mode 1013
Automatic Corner Override........................................1052 Changing the Display Language by PMC Signals .....2141
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ......................................746 Chattering Prevention of "Direct Input of Offset Value
Automatic Phase Synchronization for flexible Measured B" (T Series) .........................................2313
synchronization Control ...........................................316 Checking input data ...................................................2589
AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Checking the Stored Stroke during the Time from
AND RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE Power–on to the Reference Position Establishment .465
POSITION................................................................670 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ......................476
Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .....................196 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION .................................902
AUTOMATIC STEEING OF FANUC Circular Threading .......................................................920
RECOMMENDATION SETTING PARAMETER CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .............1173
................................................................................2778 CNC READY SIGNALS .............................................445
CNC Screen Dual Display .........................................2144
CNC STATUS NOTIFICATION FUNCTION..........2514
i-1
INDEX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
COMBINATION OF SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL Delay time for operation history saving.....................2602
AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL ..........................1275 Detect Trouble ...........................................................2629
Combination with other functions................................190 Diagnosis Data .................................................... 214,1536
Command Format.......................................................1539 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .........................................2544
Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Diagnosis Number......................................................2581
Revolution ..............................................................1523 Direct Assignment Mode of Flexible Path Axis
Communication Retry Monitoring Function ..............2549 Assignment...............................................................377
Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...................2220 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS
COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT..........................2294 PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) .............................2070
Composite Control .....................................................1216 Direct input of coordinate system shift (T series) ........159
Concurrent Use of Polygon Turning and Polygon Direct Input of Offset Value Measured B (T Series)..2295
Turning with Two Spindles ......................................993 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value Measured (T Series)
Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and ................................................................................2294
Position Coder ........................................................1518 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ...........1410 EXECUTOR.............................................................890
Contents of E-mail .....................................................2514 DIRECT OPERATION BY PERSONAL COMPUTER
Continuous High-Speed Skip Function ......................2276 FUNCTION..............................................................889
Continuous Threading ..................................................919 Display the CNC Information ....................................2606
Controlled Axes Detach .................................................13 DISPLAY/SET...........................................................2091
CONTROLLED AXIS.....................................................1 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT ................................................2091
Controlling Machine Remote Diagnosis function from DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
PMC .......................................................................2481 ..................................................................................692
Cooperation with CNC screen Web server function ..2516 Distance coded linear scale interface and linear scale
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ....................1997 with distance-coded reference marks (serial) ...........182
Corner Control ...........................................................1135 DNC OPERATION......................................................886
CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE Dry Run........................................................................758
WITHOUT ROTARY DATA ..................................721 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK TURNING MODE /
Cs Contour Control ....................................................1456 COMPENSATION CLAMP ...................................302
Cs CONTOUR CONTROL........................................1456 Dwell/Auxiliary Function Time Override Function...1056
Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment..1482
Cs Contour Control Manual High-Speed Reference <E>
Position Return .......................................................1489 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals 161
Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip......................1477 Each tool data screen .................................................1819
CUSTOM MACRO....................................................1894 EDIT ..........................................................................2217
Custom Macro............................................................1894 Electronic Gear Box (FSSB type) ................................294
Custom Macro Variable Name Expansion 31 Characters Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...................................242
................................................................................2160 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ..................242
Customization of tool management data display........1818 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization
Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius ..................................................................................261
Compensation (T Series) .......................................1835 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................2461
Cutting Feedrate Clamp .............................................1026 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA
CYCLE START/FEED HOLD ....................................746 ETHERNET CARD ...............................................2461
Cylindrical Interpolation ..............................................962 Embedded Macro .......................................................1924
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ..........................962 EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................443
Cylindrical Interpolation by Plane Distance Command962 Energy Saving Level Selecting Function ...................2183
Cylindrical Interpolation Cutting Point Compensation 962 Environment for Making Trouble Diagnosis Message2582
ERROR COMPENSATION ..........................................31
<D> EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING
Data Output ................................................................2631 MODE / CUTTING MODE ....................................878
DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN PMC AND DCSPMC Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ...2465
................................................................................2458 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function ......2469
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET Example of Usage ........................................................171
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT Execution methods.....................................................2499
PROGRAMMING..................................................1875 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......67
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 SHIFT.....................................................................2428
i-2
B-64603EN-1/01 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis..........2582
CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................713
EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME.................................1410 <H>
Extended Tool Selection Function .............................1775 HANDLE-SYNCHRONOUS FEED ...........................586
EXTENSION OF MAXIMUM SHIFT VALUE FOR HELICAL INTERPOLATION ....................................958
EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...2431 HIGH PRECISION OSCILLATION FUNCTION ......386
Extension of the Manual Handle Retrace Function......801 HIGH-PRECISION SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL..1739
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT ......................................2415 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ......................1335
External Deceleration.................................................1061 High-Speed Position Switch ..........................................26
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL .....................2245 High-speed Program Check Function ..........................763
EXTERNAL KEY INPUT.........................................2437 HIGH-SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ..........2229
External Touch Panel Interface ..................................2123 High-speed Skip Signal..............................................2272
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH ....2433 Hob Command by Flexible Synchronization Control ..341
Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ....................................1250
<F>
Fan Motor Abnormality Monitoring Function ...........2548 <I>
FAN MOTOR ABNORMALITY MONITORING I/O Link βi MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE .........634
FUNCTION AND COMMUNICATION RETRY Improvement of Quick program restart for
MONITORING FUNCTION .................................2548 non-machining program ...........................................846
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In Case of a Linear Axis ..............................................737
PARAMETER........................................................2778 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...........................731
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable
PARAMETER (FIXED TYPE)..............................2780 Range is over One Rotation.....................................729
FANUC RECOMMENDATION SETTING In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable
PARAMETER (INITIALIZED TYPE).................2785 Range is under One Rotation...................................723
Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ................................1141 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................1888
Feed per Minute .........................................................1026 Inclinaiton Compensation ..............................................58
Feed per Revolution/Manual Feed per Revolution.....1031 Increment System.............................................................7
FEEDRATE CONTROL............................................1023 Incremental multiple command..................................2028
FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................1978
DECELERATION CONTROL ..............................1023 Indirect Axis Address Command ...............................1919
Feedrate override........................................................1042 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS ASSIGNMENT...................357 (M SERIES) ...........................................................1970
FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL ........305 Inner corner automatic override (G62).......................1052
Flexible Synchronization Control ................................305 In-position check........................................................1136
Follow-up .......................................................................20 IN-POSITION CHECK DISABLE REFERENCE
FS10/11 Format Command ........................................1527 POSITION RETURN...............................................680
FSSB automatic setting procedure ...............................117 In-position check disable signal .................................1137
FSSB High-speed Rigid Tapping ...............................1573 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse
FSSB Setting ................................................................102 ................................................................................1139
FSSB setting screen......................................................109 In-position check signal .............................................1135
FUNCTION FOR LOADER CONTROL ..................1306 Input Guidance Data ..................................................2586
FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE Input of customize data with the decimal point .........1818
OF POWER FAILURE ...........................................303 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA .....................................2235
Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages ..........2593
<G> Install .........................................................................2582
G Code List in the Lathe System ...............................1877 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC..............2643
G Code List in the Machining Center System............1880 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH (T
G CODE PREVENTING BUFFERING ....................2087 SERIES) .................................................................1197
G CODE SYSTEM ....................................................1877 Internal circular cutting feedrate change....................1054
GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT............................1017 Inter-path Flexible Synchronization Control................327
General specifications of the tilted working plane Interpolated Straightness Compensation ........................52
indexing..................................................................2008 Interpolated Straightness Compensation 3072 Points ....56
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............s-2 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .................................896
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation ...............69
DEVELOPMENT......................................................s-8 Interruption Type Custom Macro...............................1921
i-3
INDEX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ....................................1037 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION
Investigation procedure of cause of alarm occurrence2558 FUNCTION..............................................................515
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M
<J> SERIES) ...................................................................521
JERK CONTROL (M SERIES) .................................1161 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........2066
Jog and Handle Simultaneous Mode ............................556 Maintenance.................................................................182
JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED ...........................538 MAINTENANCE ......................................................2530
Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance MAINTENANCE FUNCTION .................................2596
table ........................................................................2591 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED
ETHERNET FUNCTION ......................................2534
<L> Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages.....2583
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Making a memory card format file ............................2590
Interpolation ...........................................................1116 Making Messages for Multi-languages ......................2592
LINEAR INTERPOLATION.......................................901 Making sheets for multi-languages ............................2592
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53)...........999 Making Trouble Diagnosis Messages ........................2586
LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS...............524
REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)..........................705 MANUAL 2ND/3RD/4TH REFERENCE POSITION
LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................2643 RETURN FUNCTION............................................741
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ...............................806
THE ARGUMENT OF G CODE ..........................2773 MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................546
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT ............................561
THE ARGUMENT OF M AND S CODE.............2776 Manual Handle Retrace................................................775
LIST OF FUNCTIONS INCLUDE ADDRESS P IN Manual Handle Retrace Function for Multi-path .........798
THE PROGRAM COMMAND..............................2773 Manual Interruption of 3-dimensional Coordinate
LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS System Conversion...................................................567
OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS............................2772 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN............858
LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC SIGNALS MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS.............................2772 ..................................................................................569
LIST OF SIGNALS ...................................................2685 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND...........................628
List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)......................2745 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................538
List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ......................2685 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.........640
List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ........................2717 M-CODE PROTECT FUNCTION ............................1341
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS.....................................2789 MDI Key Setting........................................................2219
Local Coordinate System .............................................166 MEASUREMENT .....................................................2254
LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS...........................1290
FUNCTION............................................................2538 Memory Protection Keys ...........................................2217
Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Memory Protection Signal for CNC Parameter..........2218
Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation (M Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223,
Series).....................................................................1164 723 and 220 ..............................................................733
Methods of alarm recovery by synchronization error
<M> check ........................................................................185
M CODE GROUPING FUNCTION..........................1338 Mirror Image..................................................................17
M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block....1557 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T
M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block....1567 SERIES) .................................................................1976
MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS............................2580 MODE SELECTION ...................................................495
Machine Coordinate System ........................................145 Mode selection ...........................................................2493
Machine Lock ..............................................................754 MODIFICATION WARNING SETTING screen......2201
Machine State History CNC Data Screen ..................2620 Monitoring by CNC Software ....................................2597
Machine State History List Screen.............................2614 Monitoring by Ladder Program .................................2598
Machine State History Operation History Screen ......2621 Monitoring of PMC signals........................................2608
Machine state history saving response signal Multi Path Display .....................................................2221
(MSUSAS) .............................................................2603 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ......................2221
Machine state history screen ......................................2613 MULTI-PATH CONTROL........................................1167
MACHINE STATE MONITORING FUNCTION ....2596 Multi-path Functions..................................................1174
Machine state monitoring screen................................2607 Multiple Axis Command Skip Function ....................2272
i-4
B-64603EN-1/01 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
Multiple Command of Tilted Working Plane Indexing Parameters..................................................................2212
................................................................................2026 Parameters Related to Servo ..........................................83
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
................................................................................1332 REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS............................1887
Multi-Sensor Unit.......................................................2602 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH
MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL..................................1491 NAMES..................................................................1294
Multi-Spindle Control ................................................1529 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ........1293
Multi-step Skip...........................................................2279 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ....................................1281
PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................2072
<N> Periodic Maintenance Screen.....................................2164
Name of Axes...................................................................3 PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL................................403
NANO SMOOTHING ...............................................1000 PHASE SYNCHRONIZATION FOR
NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION.............................2251 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL1733
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) .....995 PMC Axis Control .....................................................2316
Notes ..........................................................................1594 PMC AXIS CONTROL .............................................2316
Notes on interface with the PMC ...............................1549 PMC Axis Status Display Function ...........................2410
Notice.........................................................................2594 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION ..................................2316
Notification of the modification of setting .................2206 PMC signal.................................................................2601
PMC WINDOW PARAMETER WRITE ..................2450
<O> POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION .............959
Offset..........................................................................1765 Polygon Turning ..........................................................967
ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ..................................2443 POLYGON TURNING................................................967
One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .............................1034 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles ...........................975
Operating Machine Remote Diagnosis screen............2485 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .....1542
Operation of the CNC screen Web server function ....2509 Position Switch ..............................................................24
Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....2463 POSITIONING ............................................................896
Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......2466 Positioning by Optimum Accelerations .....................1067
Operation on the Setting screen ........................2475,2478 Power Consumption Monitor .....................................2168
OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS.........526 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................443
................................................................................1142 Procedure of reference position establishment.............177
Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .............1121 Procedure to Start-Up...................................................174
OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER PROGRAM COMMAND..........................................1875
ROUNDING (M SERIES) ....................................2067 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ..............................1885
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF PROGRAM RESTART ...............................................810
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......................................807 Programmable rapid traverse overlap.........................1109
Outline...................................................... 2554,2580,2627 Protection of various tool information items with the
Output CNC Information ...........................................2622 KEY signal .............................................................1818
Output File Format.....................................................2634
Outputting States of Individual Axes ...........................375 <Q>
Outputting the Movement State of an Axis ....................16 QUICK PROGRAM RESTART..................................824
Override ............................................................1038,1525 Quick program restart for multi path system................841
Override cancel ..........................................................1050
OVERTRAVEL CHECK.............................................446 <R>
Overtravel Signals........................................................446 Rapid Traverse Acceleration/deceleration before
Overview......................................... 2200,2488,2506,2514 Interpolation ...........................................................1156
OVERVIEW ..............................................................2521 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration
Overview....................................................................2596 ................................................................................1114
Rapid traverse block overlap......................................1108
<P> Rapid Traverse Overlap in Threading Cycle................954
Parameter .............................................. 74,200,1576,2578 Rapid traverse override ..............................................1038
Parameter (No. 1620) Write .......................................2456 Rapid Traverse Rate...................................................1024
Parameter (No. 1825, No. 1826) Write ......................2457 Reference point setting with mechanical stopper.........182
Parameter (No. 2092, Bit 0 of No. 8162) Write .........2455 REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH
Parameter Check Sum Function .................................2128 MECHANICAL STOPPER .....................................681
Parameter Write .........................................................2450
i-5
INDEX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
REFERENCE POINT SETTING WITH Selection of the tool length offset value.......................604
MECHANICAL STOPPER BY GRID METHOD..687 Sequence when Trouble Occurs.................................2629
Reference Position Established by the G00 Command 713 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL...............1372
Reference Position Establishment ................................177 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed................................22
Reference position establishment.................................180 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................2544
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..........640 SERVO/SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...1717
Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed............717 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control ..........................1717
Reference Position Return..........................................1527 Servo/Spindle Synchronous Control (FSSB Type) ....1728
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG SERVO/SPINDLE WAVEFORM DATA OUTPUT
..................................................................................662 FUNCTION............................................................2627
REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT SETTING...................................................................2527
FUNCTION..............................................................720 Setting ........................................................................2601
Registration and protection parameters, C Language SETTING EACH AXIS...................................................3
Executor programs, or ladder programs. ...............2204 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable
Related NC parameter ................................................2520 Range .......................................................................722
RELATED NC PARAMETER ..................................2531 Setting of axis name display ..........................................73
Related NC parameters ..............................................2476 Setting of CNC Status Notification function..............2517
Related parameters .......................... 2468,2474,2505,2513 SETTING OF FEEDBACK PULSES FOR SPINDLE
Related signals ...........................................................2512 FEEDBACK PULSES...........................................1751
Re-machining thread ....................................................933 Setting of grid position.................................................178
RESET AND REWIND ...............................................750 Setting of spindle position/standby position display ..1818
RESOLUTION OF SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND 1753 Setting of Synchronous Axes .......................................175
RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET.......2532 Setting of the CNC Screen Display Function.............2474
Restriction ..................................................................2634 Setting of the CNC Screen Web Server Function ......2506
Restriction of saving ..................................................2599 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.................2462
Restrictions.................................................................2579 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function..................2490
Restrictions of Tilted Working Plane Indexing..........2061 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..................2465
RETRACE (M SERIES) ..............................................862 Setting of the Machine Remote Diagnosis package ...2476
RETRACTION FOR 3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID Setting of the Modbus/TCP Server Function .............2521
TAPPING .................................................................891 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function..........2488
RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ......................879 Setting of the WEB SERVER function......................2508
RIGID TAPPING.......................................................1517 Setting on the CNC screen .........................................2495
RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE...............593 Setting on the personal computer ...............................2499
Rigid Tapping Specification.......................................1522 Setting up DHCP........................................................2472
Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor ...............................1687 Setting up DNS ..........................................................2471
Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path .............1530 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function.........................2471
Rotary Axis Roll-Over .................................................168 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
RS232C INTERFACE ...............................................2235 FUNCTION............................................................2462
Run Hour and Parts Count Display ............................2091 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED
AXES .........................................................................83
<S> SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SYSTEMS................................................................145
Sampling ....................................................................2628 Signal ......................................................... 197,1543,2579
Saving the Machine State...........................................2598 Signal-based Servo EGB Synchronous Control ...........286
SCALING ..................................................................1988 Signals........................................................................2212
Screen Erasure Function and Automatic Screen Erasure Signals for the rigid tapping function.........................1543
Function..................................................................2153 Signals related to gear switching................................1545
Screen Hard Copy Function .......................................2155 Signals related to S code output .................................1544
Screen Switching at Path Switching...........................2153 Signals related to the addition of multi-spindle control1546
Screen Switching by Mode ........................................2150 SIMPLE SPINDLE ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX .....1743
Second feedrate override............................................1045 Simple Straightness Compensation ................................48
Second Geometry Tool Offset (T Series)...................1851 Simultaneous Displaying Axis Number Expansion
Selection of a tool life count period ...........................1818 Function..................................................................2192
Selection of display axis on the Current Position Screen Simultaneous Multi Path Program Editing.................2226
................................................................................2166 Single Block.................................................................760
Selection of parameters ..............................................2207 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING .......................898
i-6
B-64603EN-1/01 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
Skip Function .............................................................2264 Stored stroke limit range switching function by signal 469
SKIP FUNCTION ......................................................2264 Straightness Compensation ............................................44
Skip Function for EGB Axis (M Series) ......................273 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points ......................50
Skip Function for Flexible Synchronization Control ...336 Stroke Limit Area Changing Function .........................468
SMART TOLERANCE CONTROL..........................1007 Stroke Limit External Setting.......................................467
Smooth Backlash............................................................41 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages
Software Operator's Panel ..........................................2096 ................................................................................2584
Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters 1561 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ..................................1255
Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters 1569 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL A (WITH SPEED
Specifying the Rotation Axis .........................................10 CONTROL)............................................................1271
Speed Arrival Signals and Speed Zero Signals ..........1697 Suppress Motion of Quick Program Restart.................838
Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increments C SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
................................................................................1101 ETHERNET DEVICES .........................................2532
Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Switching the Axis Name of an Axis Type Alarm.....2164
Axis (M Series) ......................................................1161 Synchronization Error Check.......................................185
Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Synchronization error check ........................................185
Motor......................................................................2148 Synchronization Error Compensation ..........................188
Speed-up of Spindle Indexing Function .....................1684 Synchronization Establishment ....................................183
Speed-up of Spindle Stop Motion for Spindle Control Synchronization Positional Difference Detection
with Servo Motor....................................................1711 Diagnosis Display and Signal Output in Flexible
SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT .................................1368 Synchronization........................................................325
SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Synchronous Control..................................................1211
................................................................................1632 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND
SPINDLE COMMAND SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM
INDEPENDENT PITCH ERROR COMMAND...........................................................1272
COMPENSATION FUNCTION............................1644 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL...........1210
SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR .......1659
Spindle Control with Servo Motor .............................1660 <T>
Spindle Control with Servo Motor (Speed Control)...1698 Table horizontal direction handle feed.........................608
Spindle Indexing Function .........................................1680 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed/Table
SPINDLE ORIENTATION .......................................1623 Horizontal Direction JOG Feed/Table Horizontal
SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC.......1404 Direction Incremental Feed ......................................606
Spindle Output Control with PMC .............................1696 Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING............................1629 direction incremental feed ........................................609
SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) .....................1424 Table vertical direction handle feed.............................605
SPINDLE REVOLUTION NUMBER HISTORY Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed/Table Vertical
FUNCTION............................................................1715 Direction JOG Feed/ Table Vertical Direction
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT....................................1357 Incremental Feed ......................................................605
SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND CLAMP..................1748 Table vertical direction JOG feed/table vertical
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL...................................1377 direction incremental feed ........................................606
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T TANDEM CONTROL.................................................217
SERIES) .................................................................1648 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting......................141
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION .................................1356 TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................754
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)1356 Threading .....................................................................906
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................1598 THREADING ..............................................................906
Spindle Synchronous Control for Spindle Control with Threading Cycle Retract ..............................................911
Servo Motor............................................................1700 Threading cycle retract (canned cycle) ........................912
SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE ........................2547 Threading cycle retract (multiple repetitive canned
START LOCK / INTERLOCK....................................488 cycle)........................................................................915
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL.......................................502 Threading, Feed per Revolution, and Constant Surface
Stored Pitch Error Compensation...................................31 Speed Control.........................................................1693
Stored Pitch Error Compensation Total Value Input Tilted Working Plane Indexing ..................................2005
function.......................................................................75 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING (M SERIES)
Stored Stroke Check 1..................................................448 ................................................................................2005
Stored Stroke Check 1 Area Expansion .......................455 Tilted working plane indexing based on Eulerian angle
Stored Stroke Check 2, 3..............................................458 ................................................................................2007
i-7
INDEX B-64603EN-1/01
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1022 / Volume 2 : P. 1023 to 1874 / Volume 3 : P. 1875 to 2803
Tilted working plane indexing based on projection Translating Data Used with the Former Series (Series 0i
angles......................................................................2015 /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ....................2594
Tilted working plane indexing based on roll-pitch-yaw TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...........................................2554
................................................................................2011 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen...............................2571
Tilted working plane indexing based on three points.2012 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen ............................2558
Tilted working plane indexing based on two vectors .2014 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ..............................2560
Tilted working plane indexing by tool axis direction.2017 Trouble forecast level setting screen..........................2575
Tilted Working Plane Indexing in Tool Length
Compensation.........................................................2042 <U>
Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification .........1552 U-axis Control (M Series)............................................277
Timing of the M code for unclamping .......................1571 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE
Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode .........................1571 DETECTION FUNCTION ......................................505
Title Display Function in Initial Screen .....................2214 Uninstall.....................................................................2583
Tool Axis Direction Control ......................................2030 Unregistration and canceling protection of parameters,
Tool axis direction control .........................................2030 C Language Executor programs, or ladder programs
Tool axis direction handle feed ....................................598 ................................................................................2206
Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction Update of Tool Compensation value for Tool Retract
JOG Feed/Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed ....598 and Recover..............................................................854
Tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction
incremental feed .......................................................599 <V>
Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed..................601 Variable Lead Threading .............................................919
Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed/Tool VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................504
Axis Right-Angle Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis
Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed .................599 <W>
Tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed/tool axis WAITING FUNCTION BY SPECIFYING START
right-angle direction incremental feed......................602 POINT ....................................................................1296
Tool center point retention type tool axis direction WAITING M CODES................................................1185
control ....................................................................2038 WAITING M CODES OF HIGH-SPEED TYPE ......1190
TOOL COMPENSATION .........................................1835 Warning Function Against Modification of Setting...2200
Tool Compensation Memory .....................................1785 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
TOOL FUNCTIONS..................................................1763 HANDLING.............................................................. s-5
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM .............1763 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER PROGRAMMING..................................................... s-3
SYSTEM ................................................................1784 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.............1764 MAINTENANCE...................................................... s-9
Tool Length Compensation (M Series) ......................1842 WARNINGS RELATED TO EDIT SCREENS FOR
Tool Length Compensation Shift Types (M Series)...1846 TOUCH PANEL ....................................................... s-7
TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)....2254 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............. s-7
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ..................................1856 Waveform Data ..........................................................2627
Tool Management Extension Function ......................1818 When M29 is specified before G84/G74....................1553
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ......................1789 When M29 is specified before G84/G88....................1565
Tool Management Function .......................................1789 With Multi-Sensor Unit..............................................2609
Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support.1826 Workpiece coordinate system ......................................148
Tool Offset .................................................................1764 Workpiece coordinate system preset............................151
TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER ...........................848 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series) ..............154
Tool tip center rotation handle feed .............................603 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece
Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed/Tool Tip Center Coordinate System Pair ............................................148
Rotation JOG Feed/ Tool Tip Center Rotation
Incremental Feed ......................................................602
Tool tip center rotation JOG feed/tool tip center rotation
incremental feed .......................................................604
Torque Limit Skip Function.......................................2287
Total life time display for tools of the same type.......1819
Touch Panel Check Signal .........................................2139
Touch Panel Control ..................................................2118
i-8
B-64603EN-1/01 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
01 Sep., 2014
r-1
B-64603EN-1/01
* B- 6 4 6 0 3 EN- 1 / 0 1 V3 *
You might also like
- B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol1 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)100% (1)B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol1 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)1,070 pages
- B-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)No ratings yetB-64603en-1 - 01 (v3) - Vol2 - 0if Connection Manual (Function)900 pages
- FANUC Series Oi & Oi Mate Model D (VMC) - OPERATORS MANUAL PDFNo ratings yetFANUC Series Oi & Oi Mate Model D (VMC) - OPERATORS MANUAL PDF336 pages
- B-64693en-1, Fanuc 0i-Model F Plus Connection Manual (Function)100% (2)B-64693en-1, Fanuc 0i-Model F Plus Connection Manual (Function)3,108 pages
- FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B - βi series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series, SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series MAINTENANCE MANUAL100% (1)FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi-B - βi series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series, SERVO AMPLIFIER βi-B series MAINTENANCE MANUAL178 pages
- Maintenance Manual: Servo Amplifier #+-B !100% (1)Maintenance Manual: Servo Amplifier #+-B !280 pages
- B-64644EN-3 - 02 FANUC iHMI Set-Up Guidance OPERATORNo ratings yetB-64644EN-3 - 02 FANUC iHMI Set-Up Guidance OPERATOR332 pages
- Fanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291No ratings yetFanuc Hardware Connection MNL, GFZ 036867291560 pages
- CNC Lathe Fanuc TF Operator Programming Manual 0133% (3)CNC Lathe Fanuc TF Operator Programming Manual 01432 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control ProductsNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control Products1,266 pages
- Slice I-O Connection Manual A-45417-00001EN - 03No ratings yetSlice I-O Connection Manual A-45417-00001EN - 0384 pages
- FANUC 0IF Connection Function B-64603EN-1 01 PDF100% (2)FANUC 0IF Connection Function B-64603EN-1 01 PDF2,852 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Beta Series Servo Motor I/O Link OptionNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Beta Series Servo Motor I/O Link Option200 pages
- CNC Screen Display Function Operators Manual - B-63164EN - 11No ratings yetCNC Screen Display Function Operators Manual - B-63164EN - 1188 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Series 16i / 18i / 160i / 180i - Model ANo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Series 16i / 18i / 160i / 180i - Model A450 pages
- Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6No ratings yetModel PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6220 pages
- Fanuc Series 15 / 150 - Model B For Machining Center Operator's Manual (Programming)No ratings yetFanuc Series 15 / 150 - Model B For Machining Center Operator's Manual (Programming)571 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control ProductsNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control Products904 pages
- Model PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6No ratings yetModel PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/ SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6506 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: AC Spindle Motor βi SeriesNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: AC Spindle Motor βi Series70 pages
- Tunnel Lining Analysis and Design Using Staad ProNo ratings yetTunnel Lining Analysis and Design Using Staad Pro4 pages
- GZF-65192 - EN - 02 Alfa Series Motor Control Amplifier Servo Amplifier UnitNo ratings yetGZF-65192 - EN - 02 Alfa Series Motor Control Amplifier Servo Amplifier Unit166 pages
- Linear Optimization and Extensions - Problems and Solutions (PDFDrive)No ratings yetLinear Optimization and Extensions - Problems and Solutions (PDFDrive)450 pages
- CLASS XII PHYSICS EXEMPLAR SOLUTION Chapter 5 Magnetism and MatterNo ratings yetCLASS XII PHYSICS EXEMPLAR SOLUTION Chapter 5 Magnetism and Matter35 pages
- Activity 1 Significant Figures (Ver06292020) (2) - UnlockedNo ratings yetActivity 1 Significant Figures (Ver06292020) (2) - Unlocked15 pages
- MIcro End-Milling I - Wear and BreakageNo ratings yetMIcro End-Milling I - Wear and Breakage18 pages
- Grade 8 Diagnostic Test Kasaysayan NG DaigdigNo ratings yetGrade 8 Diagnostic Test Kasaysayan NG Daigdig4 pages
- The Prodigy of Welding: By: Brandy Ratliff Graduation Project 2010No ratings yetThe Prodigy of Welding: By: Brandy Ratliff Graduation Project 201016 pages
- AMedP - 15 MILITARY MEDICAL SUPPORT in HUMANITARIAN AND DISASTER RELIEFNo ratings yetAMedP - 15 MILITARY MEDICAL SUPPORT in HUMANITARIAN AND DISASTER RELIEF38 pages
- CRUSHER JOE and DIRTY PAIR - Complete Movie, OVA, TV Series - 720p-1080p BluRay DUAL AUDIO x264No ratings yetCRUSHER JOE and DIRTY PAIR - Complete Movie, OVA, TV Series - 720p-1080p BluRay DUAL AUDIO x2644 pages
- ICT IGCSE Guide To Command Words-ExternalNo ratings yetICT IGCSE Guide To Command Words-External3 pages
- Minimum Subject Requirements For Students With NUS High School DiplomaNo ratings yetMinimum Subject Requirements For Students With NUS High School Diploma6 pages
